EFS 40&50 Installation Manual

Honeywell International Inc.
23500 West 105th Street

Olathe, Kansas 66061-8425
U.S.A.
CAGE: 22373
Telephone: (800) 601-3099 (Toll-Free U.S.A./Canada)
Telephone: (602) 365-3099 (International Direct)
Telephone: 00-800-601-30999 (EMEA Toll-Free)
Telephone: 420-234-625-500 (EMEA Direct)
Web site: http://portal.honeywell.com/wps/portal/aero
Bendix/King
System Installation Manual
Volume I - General Information, Installation, and
System Planning
EFS 40/EFS 50 Electronic Flight

Instrument System
This document contains technical data and is subject to U.S. export regulations. These commodities,
technology, or software were exported from the United States in accordance with the export administration
regulations. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited.
ECCN: 7E994, NLR Eligible.
Page T-1
Publication Number 006-00698-0007, Revision 9 Initial 1 Apr 1992
Revised 19 Oct 2010
© Honeywell International Inc. Do not copy without express permission of Honeywell.
SYSTEM INSTALLATION MANUAL
EFS 40/EFS 50
Honeywell – Confidential
THIS COPYRIGHTED WORK AND ALL INFORMATION ARE THE PROPERTY OF HONEYWELL
INTERNATIONAL INC., CONTAIN TRADE SECRETS AND MAY NOT, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, BE USED,
DUPLICATED, OR DISCLOSED FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
HONEYWELL INTERNATIONAL INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
Honeywell Materials License Agreement

The documents and information contained herein ("the Materials") are the proprietary data of Honeywell
International Inc. and Honeywell Intellectual Properties Inc. (collectively "Honeywell"). These Materials are
provided for the exclusive use of Honeywell Service Centers; Honeywell-authorized repair facilities; operators
of Honeywell aerospace products subject to an applicable product support agreement, their wholly
owned-subsidiaries or a formally designated third party service provider; and direct recipients of Materials from
Honeywell's Aerospace Technical Publication Distribution. The terms and conditions of this License
Agreement govern your use of these Materials, except to the extent that any terms and conditions of another
applicable agreement with Honeywell regarding the operation, maintenance, or repair of Honeywell aerospace
products conflict with the terms and conditions of this License Agreement, in which case the terms and
conditions of the other agreement will govern. However, this License Agreement will govern in the event of a
conflict between its terms and conditions and those of a purchase order or acknowledgement.
1. License Grant - If you are a party to an applicable product support agreement, a Honeywell Service Center
agreement, or an authorized repair facility agreement, Honeywell hereby grants you a limited, non-exclusive
license to use these Materials to operate, maintain, or repair Honeywell aerospace products only in
accordance with that agreement.
If you are a direct recipient of these Materials from Honeywell’s Aerospace Technical Publication Distribution
and are not a party to an agreement related to the operation, maintenance or repair of Honeywell aerospace
products, Honeywell hereby grants you a limited, non-exclusive license to use these Materials to maintain or
repair the subject Honeywell aerospace products only at the facility to which these Materials have been
shipped ("the Licensed Facility"). Transfer of the Materials to another facility owned by you is permitted only if
the original Licensed Facility retains no copies of the Materials and you provide prior written notice to
Honeywell.
2. Rights In Materials - Honeywell retains all rights in these Materials and in any copies thereof that are not
expressly granted to you, including all rights in patents, copyrights, trademarks, and trade secrets. No license
to use any Honeywell trademarks or patents is granted under this License Agreement.
3. Confidentiality - You acknowledge that these Materials contain information that is confidential and
proprietary to Honeywell. You agree to take all reasonable efforts to maintain the confidentiality of these
Materials.
4. Assignment And Transfer - This License Agreement may be assigned to a formally designated service
designee or transferred to a subsequent owner or operator of an aircraft containing the subject Honeywell
aerospace products. However, the recipient of any such assignment or transfer must assume all of your
obligations under this License Agreement. No assignment or transfer shall relieve any party of any obligation
that such party then has hereunder.
5. Copies of Materials - Unless you have the express written permission of Honeywell, you may not make or
permit making of copies of the Materials. Notwithstanding the foregoing, you may make copies of only portions
of the Material for your internal use. You agree to return the Materials and any copies thereof to Honeywell
upon the request of Honeywell.
Page T-2
19 Oct 2010
EFS 40/EFS 50
6. Term - This License Agreement is effective until terminated as set forth herein. This License Agreement will
terminate immediately, without notice from Honeywell, if you fail to comply with any provision of this License
Agreement or will terminate simultaneously with the termination or expiration of your applicable product
support agreement, authorized repair facility agreement, or your formal designation as a third party service
provider. Upon termination of this License Agreement, you will return these Materials to Honeywell without
retaining any copies and will have one of your authorized officers certify that all Materials have been returned
with no copies retained.
7. Remedies - Honeywell reserves the right to pursue all available remedies and damages resulting from a
breach of this License Agreement.
8. Limitation of Liability - Honeywell does not make any representation regarding the use or sufficiency of the
Materials. THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, EXPRESS, IMPLIED
OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, (i) WARRANTIES ARISING FROM COURSE OF
PERFORMANCE, DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE, WHICH ARE HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED, OR
(ii) WARRANTIES AGAINST INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS OF THIRD
PARTIES, EVEN IF HONEYWELL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF ANY SUCH INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT
WILL HONEYWELL BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
SPECIAL DAMAGES, INDIRECT DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF REVENUES, OR LOSS OF
USE, EVEN IF INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS WILL APPLY REGARDLESS OF WHETHER
LIABILITY ARISES FROM BREACH OF CONTRACT, WARRANTY, TORT (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO NEGLIGENCE), BY OPERATION OF LAW, OR OTHERWISE.
9. Controlling Law - This License shall be governed and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of
New York without regard to the conflicts of laws provisions thereof. This license sets forth the entire
agreement between you and Honeywell and may only be modified by a writing duly executed by the duly
authorized representatives of the parties.
Safety Advisory
WARNING: BEFORE THE MATERIALS CALLED OUT IN THIS PUBLICATION ARE USED, KNOW THE
HANDLING, STORAGE AND DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER OR
SUPPLIER. FAILURE TO OBEY THE MANUFACTURERS’ OR SUPPLIERS’ RECOMMENDATIONS CAN
RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DISEASE.
This publication describes physical and chemical processes which can make it necessary to use chemicals,
solvents, paints, and other commercially available materials. The user of this publication must get the Material
Safety Data Sheets (OSHA Form 174 or equivalent) from the manufacturers or suppliers of the materials to be
used. The user must know the manufacturer/supplier data and obey the procedures, recommendations,
warnings and cautions set forth for the safe use, handling, storage, and disposal of the materials.
Warranty/Liability Advisory
WARNING: HONEYWELL ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY HONEYWELL EQUIPMENT WHICH
IS NOT MAINTAINED AND/OR REPAIRED IN ACCORDANCE WITH HONEYWELL’S PUBLISHED
INSTRUCTIONS AND/OR HONEYWELL’S FAA/SFAR 36 REPAIR AUTHORIZATION. NEITHER DOES
HONEYWELL ASSUME RESPONSIBILITY FOR SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT FABRICATED
BY COMPANIES OTHER THAN HONEYWELL.
WARNING: INCORRECTLY REPAIRED COMPONENTS CAN AFFECT AIRWORTHINESS OR DECREASE
THE LIFE OF THE COMPONENTS. INCORRECTLY FABRICATED SPECIAL TOOLING OR TEST
EQUIPMENT CAN RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE PRODUCT COMPONENTS OR GIVE UNSATISFACTORY
RESULTS.
Page T-3
19 Oct 2010
EFS 40/EFS 50
Copyright - Notice
Copyright 1992, 2010 Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved.
Honeywell is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc.
All other marks are owned by their respective companies.
Page T-4
19 Oct 2010
EFS 40/EFS 50
REVISION HISTORY
*************************************************************************************************************
MANUAL EFS 40/EFS 50 System Installation Manual
REVISION Revision 9, 19 Oct 2010
PART NUMBER 006-00698-0007
REVISION SUMMARY Revised Volume I and Volume II title pages to the latest template
format and added the Safety and Warranty/Liability Advisories.
Updated the List of Effective Pages in Volumes I and II. Updated the
Table of Contents in Volume I. Updated revision history to include
Revision 9 changes.
Added software version 16 to Paragraph 3.9.4.B.1 in Volume I and
Paragraph 4.0 in Volume II.
Added the -16 version software as new Paragraph 4.13B in Volume
II.
*************************************************************************************************************
REVISION Revision 8, May, 2008
PART NUMBER 006-00698-0007
REVISION SUMMARY Added a copyright statement to the page footer of all revised pages.
Revised Volume I and Volume II title pages to the latest template
format. Added the Honeywell address, the confidentiality statement,
and the Honeywell Materials License Agreement. Updated the
Copyright statements.
Added List of Effective Pages for Volume I and Volume II.
Added -15 Software, GPS WAAS approach function.
*************************************************************************************************************
REVISION Revision 7, November, 2000
PART NUMBER 006-00698-0007
REVISION SUMMARY Added -14 Software, EGPWS, FMS output bus. Updated drawings.
*************************************************************************************************************
Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Page RH-1

EFS 40/EFS 50
REVISION HISTORY (Cont)
*************************************************************************************************************
REVISION Revision 6, April, 1997
PART NUMBER 006-00698-0006
*************************************************************************************************************
REVISION Revision 5, April, 1992
PART NUMBER 006-00698-0005
*************************************************************************************************************
Page RH-2 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010

EFS 40/EFS 50
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES - VOLUME I

Subheading and Page Date Subheading and Page Date
Title TOC-18 19 Oct 2010
T-1 19 Oct 2010 TOC-19 19 Oct 2010
T-2 19 Oct 2010 TOC-20 19 Oct 2010
T-3 19 Oct 2010 TOC-21 19 Oct 2010
T-4 19 Oct 2010 TOC-22 19 Oct 2010
Revision History TOC-23 19 Oct 2010
RH-1 19 Oct 2010 TOC-24 19 Oct 2010
RH-2 19 Oct 2010 TOC-25 19 Oct 2010
List of Effective Pages - Volume I TOC-26 19 Oct 2010
LEP-1 19 Oct 2010 TOC-27 19 Oct 2010
LEP-2 19 Oct 2010 TOC-28 19 Oct 2010
LEP-3 19 Oct 2010 TOC-29 19 Oct 2010
LEP-4 19 Oct 2010 TOC-30 19 Oct 2010
LEP-5 19 Oct 2010 TOC-31 19 Oct 2010
LEP-6 19 Oct 2010 TOC-32 19 Oct 2010
LEP-7 19 Oct 2010 TOC-33 19 Oct 2010
LEP-8 19 Oct 2010 TOC-34 19 Oct 2010
LEP-9 19 Oct 2010 TOC-35 19 Oct 2010
LEP-10 19 Oct 2010 TOC-36 19 Oct 2010
TOC-37 19 Oct 2010
Table of Contents
TOC-38 19 Oct 2010
TOC-1 19 Oct 2010
TOC-39 19 Oct 2010
TOC-2 19 Oct 2010
TOC-40 19 Oct 2010
TOC-3 19 Oct 2010
TOC-41 19 Oct 2010
TOC-4 19 Oct 2010
TOC-42 19 Oct 2010
TOC-5 19 Oct 2010
TOC-43 19 Oct 2010
TOC-6 19 Oct 2010
TOC-44 19 Oct 2010
TOC-7 19 Oct 2010
TOC-45 19 Oct 2010
TOC-8 19 Oct 2010
TOC-46 19 Oct 2010
TOC-9 19 Oct 2010
TOC-47 19 Oct 2010
TOC-10 19 Oct 2010
TOC-48 19 Oct 2010
TOC-11 19 Oct 2010
Section I
TOC-12 19 Oct 2010
General Information
TOC-13 19 Oct 2010
TOC-14 19 Oct 2010 1-1 * 19 Oct 2010
TOC-15 19 Oct 2010 1-2 Nov/2000
TOC-16 19 Oct 2010 1-3 Nov/2000
TOC-17 19 Oct 2010 1-4 Nov/2000
1-5 Nov/2000
* indicates a changed or added page.

F indicates a foldout page.
Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Page LEP-1

EFS 40/EFS 50

1-6 Nov/2000 1-45 Nov/2000
1-7 Nov/2000 1-46 Nov/2000
1-8 Nov/2000 Section II
1-9 Nov/2000 Installation
1-10 Nov/2000 2-1 Nov/2000
1-11 Nov/2000 2-2 Nov/2000
1-12 Nov/2000 2-3 Nov/2000
1-13 Nov/2000 2-4 Nov/2000
1-14 Nov/2000 2-5 Nov/2000
1-15 Nov/2000 2-6 Nov/2000
1-16 Nov/2000 2-7 Nov/2000
1-17 Nov/2000 2-8 Nov/2000
1-18 Nov/2000 F 2-9 Nov/2000
1-19 Nov/2000 2-10 Blank
1-20 Nov/2000 F 2-11 Nov/2000
1-21 Nov/2000 2-12 Blank
1-22 Nov/2000 F 2-13 Nov/2000
1-23 Nov/2000 2-14 Blank
1-24 Nov/2000 F 2-15 Nov/2000
1-25 Nov/2000 2-16 Blank
1-26 Nov/2000 F 2-17 Nov/2000
1-27 Nov/2000 2-18 Blank
1-28 Nov/2000 F 2-19 Nov/2000
1-29 Nov/2000 2-20 Blank
1-30 Nov/2000 F 2-21 Nov/2000
1-31 Nov/2000 2-22 Blank
1-32 Nov/2000 F 2-23 Nov/2000
1-33 Nov/2000 2-24 Blank
1-34 Nov/2000 F 2-25 Nov/2000
1-35 Nov/2000 2-26 Blank
1-36 Nov/2000 F 2-27 Nov/2000
1-37 Nov/2000 2-28 Blank
1-38 Nov/2000 F 2-29 Nov/2000
1-39 Nov/2000 2-30 Blank
1-40 Nov/2000 F 2-31 Nov/2000
1-41 Nov/2000 2-32 Blank
1-42 Nov/2000 F 2-33 Nov/2000
1-43 Nov/2000 2-34 Blank
1-44 Nov/2000 F 2-35 Nov/2000

Page LEP-2 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010

EFS 40/EFS 50

2-36 Blank 2-74 Blank
F 2-37 Nov/2000 F 2-75 Nov/2000
F 2-39 Nov/2000 F 2-77 Nov/2000
F 2-41 Nov/2000 F 2-79 Nov/2000
F 2-43 Nov/2000 F 2-81 Nov/2000
F 2-45 Nov/2000 F 2-83 Nov/2000
F 2-47 Nov/2000 F 2-85 Nov/2000
F 2-49 Nov/2000 F 2-87 Nov/2000
2-50 Blank Section III
F 2-51 Nov/2000 System Planning
2-52 Blank 3-1 Nov/2000
F 2-53 Nov/2000 3-2 Nov/2000
2-54 Blank 3-3 * 19 Oct 2010
F 2-55 Nov/2000 3-4 * 19 Oct 2010
2-56 Blank F 3-5 Nov/2000
F 2-57 Nov/2000 3-6 Blank
2-58 Blank F 3-7 Nov/2000
F 2-59 Nov/2000 3-8 Blank
2-60 Blank 3-9 Nov/2000
F 2-61 Nov/2000 3-10 Nov/2000
2-62 Blank 3-11 Nov/2000
F 2-63 Nov/2000 3-12 Nov/2000
2-64 Blank 3-13 Nov/2000
F 2-65 Nov/2000 3-14 Nov/2000
2-66 Blank 3-15 Nov/2000
F 2-67 Nov/2000 3-16 Nov/2000
2-68 Blank 3-17 Nov/2000
F 2-69 Nov/2000 3-18 Nov/2000
2-70 Blank 3-19 Nov/2000
F 2-71 Nov/2000 3-20 Nov/2000
2-72 Blank 3-21 Nov/2000
F 2-73 Nov/2000 3-22 Nov/2000


EFS 40/EFS 50

3-23 Nov/2000 3-62 Blank
3-24 Nov/2000 3-63 Nov/2000
3-25 Nov/2000 3-64 Nov/2000
3-26 Nov/2000 F 3-65 Nov/2000
3-27 Nov/2000 3-66 Blank
3-28 Nov/2000 F 3-67 Nov/2000
3-29 Nov/2000 3-68 Blank
3-30 Nov/2000 F 3-69 Nov/2000
3-31 Nov/2000 3-70 Blank
3-32 Nov/2000 F 3-71 Nov/2000
3-33 Nov/2000 3-72 Blank
3-34 Nov/2000 F 3-73 Nov/2000
3-35 Nov/2000 3-74 Blank
3-36 Nov/2000 F 3-75 Nov/2000
3-37 Nov/2000 3-76 Blank
3-38 Nov/2000 3-77 Nov/2000
F 3-39 Nov/2000 3-78 Nov/2000
3-40 Blank F 3-79 Nov/2000
F 3-41 Nov/2000 3-80 Blank
3-42 Blank F 3-81 Nov/2000
F 3-43 Nov/2000 3-82 Blank
3-44 Blank F 3-83 Nov/2000
F 3-45 Nov/2000 3-84 Blank
3-46 Blank F 3-85 Nov/2000
F 3-47 Nov/2000 3-86 Blank
3-48 Blank F 3-87 Nov/2000
3-49 Nov/2000 3-88 Blank
3-50 Nov/2000 F 3-89 Nov/2000
F 3-51 Nov/2000 3-90 Blank
3-52 Blank 3-91 Nov/2000
F 3-53 Nov/2000 3-92 Nov/2000
3-54 Blank F 3-93 Nov/2000
F 3-55 Nov/2000 3-94 Blank
3-56 Blank F 3-95 Nov/2000
F 3-57 Nov/2000 3-96 Blank
3-58 Blank F 3-97 Nov/2000
F 3-59 Nov/2000 3-98 Blank
3-60 Blank F 3-99 Nov/2000
F 3-61 Nov/2000 3-100 Blank


EFS 40/EFS 50

F 3-101 Nov/2000 F 3-139 Nov/2000
F 3-103 Nov/2000 F 3-141 Nov/2000
3-105 Nov/2000 F 3-143 Nov/2000
3-106 Nov/2000 3-144 Blank
F 3-107 Nov/2000 3-145 Nov/2000
3-108 Blank 3-146 Nov/2000
F 3-109 Nov/2000 3-147 Nov/2000
3-110 Blank 3-148 Nov/2000
F 3-111 Nov/2000 F 3-149 Nov/2000
F 3-113 Nov/2000 F 3-151 Nov/2000
F 3-115 Nov/2000 F 3-153 Nov/2000
F 3-117 Nov/2000 F 3-155 Nov/2000
F 3-119 Nov/2000 F 3-157 Nov/2000
F 3-121 Nov/2000 F 3-159 Nov/2000
F 3-123 Nov/2000 F 3-161 Nov/2000
3-125 Nov/2000 F 3-163 Nov/2000
3-126 Nov/2000 3-164 Blank
F 3-127 Nov/2000 F 3-165 Nov/2000
F 3-129 Nov/2000 F 3-167 Nov/2000
F 3-131 Nov/2000 F 3-169 Nov/2000
F 3-133 Nov/2000 3-171 Nov/2000
3-134 Blank 3-172 Nov/2000
F 3-135 Nov/2000 3-173 Nov/2000
3-136 Blank 3-174 Nov/2000
F 3-137 Nov/2000 F 3-175 Nov/2000


EFS 40/EFS 50

F 3-177 Nov/2000 3-216 Blank
3-178 Blank F 3-217 Nov/2000
F 3-179 Nov/2000 3-218 Blank
3-180 Blank F 3-219 Nov/2000
F 3-181 Nov/2000 3-220 Blank
3-182 Blank 3-221 Nov/2000
F 3-183 Nov/2000 3-222 Nov/2000
3-184 Blank F 3-223 Nov/2000
F 3-185 Nov/2000 3-224 Blank
3-186 Blank F 3-225 Nov/2000
F 3-187 Nov/2000 3-226 Blank
3-188 Blank F 3-227 Nov/2000
F 3-189 Nov/2000 3-228 Blank
3-190 Blank F 3-229 Nov/2000
F 3-191 Nov/2000 3-230 Blank
3-192 Blank F 3-231 Nov/2000
F 3-193 Nov/2000 3-232 Blank
3-194 Blank F 3-233 Nov/2000
F 3-195 Nov/2000 3-234 Blank
3-196 Blank F 3-235 Nov/2000
3-197 Nov/2000 3-236 Blank
3-198 Nov/2000 F 3-237 Nov/2000
F 3-199 Nov/2000 3-238 Blank
3-200 Blank F 3-239 Nov/2000
F 3-201 Nov/2000 3-240 Blank
3-202 Blank F 3-241 Nov/2000
F 3-203 Nov/2000 3-242 Blank
3-204 Blank F 3-243 Nov/2000
F 3-205 Nov/2000 3-244 Blank
3-206 Blank 3-245 Nov/2000
F 3-207 Nov/2000 3-246 Nov/2000
3-208 Blank 3-247 Nov/2000
F 3-209 Nov/2000 3-248 Nov/2000
3-210 Blank F 3-249 Nov/2000
F 3-211 Nov/2000 3-250 Blank
3-212 Blank F 3-251 Nov/2000
F 3-213 Nov/2000 3-252 Blank
3-214 Blank F 3-253 Nov/2000
F 3-215 Nov/2000 3-254 Blank


EFS 40/EFS 50

F 3-255 Nov/2000 F 3-293 Nov/2000
F 3-257 Nov/2000 F 3-295 Nov/2000
F 3-259 Nov/2000 F 3-297 Nov/2000
F 3-261 Nov/2000 3-299 Nov/2000
3-262 Blank 3-300 Nov/2000
F 3-263 Nov/2000 3-301 Nov/2000
3-264 Blank 3-302 Nov/2000
F 3-265 Nov/2000 3-303 Nov/2000
3-266 Blank 3-304 Nov/2000
F 3-267 Nov/2000 3-305 Nov/2000
3-268 Blank 3-306 Nov/2000
F 3-269 Nov/2000 3-307 Nov/2000
3-270 Blank 3-308 Nov/2000
3-271 Nov/2000 F 3-309 Nov/2000
3-272 Nov/2000 3-310 Blank
3-273 Nov/2000 F 3-311 Nov/2000
3-274 Nov/2000 3-312 Blank
F 3-275 Nov/2000 F 3-313 Nov/2000
F 3-277 Nov/2000 F 3-315 Nov/2000
F 3-279 Nov/2000 F 3-317 Nov/2000
F 3-281 Nov/2000 F 3-319 Nov/2000
F 3-283 Nov/2000 3-321 Nov/2000
3-284 Blank 3-322 Nov/2000
F 3-285 Nov/2000 3-323 Nov/2000
3-286 Blank 3-324 Nov/2000
F 3-287 Nov/2000 3-325 Nov/2000
3-288 Blank 3-326 Nov/2000
F 3-289 Nov/2000 3-327 Nov/2000
3-290 Blank 3-328 Nov/2000
F 3-291 Nov/2000 F 3-329 Nov/2000


EFS 40/EFS 50

F 3-331 Nov/2000 3-370 Blank
3-332 Blank F 3-371 Nov/2000
F 3-333 Nov/2000 3-372 Blank
3-334 Blank F 3-373 Nov/2000
F 3-335 Nov/2000 3-374 Blank
3-336 Blank F 3-375 Nov/2000
F 3-337 Nov/2000 3-376 Blank
3-338 Blank F 3-377 Nov/2000
3-339 Nov/2000 3-378 Blank
3-340 Nov/2000 F 3-379 Nov/2000
3-341 Nov/2000 3-380 Blank
3-342 Nov/2000 F 3-381 Nov/2000
3-343 Nov/2000 3-382 Blank
3-344 Nov/2000 3-383 Nov/2000
3-345 Nov/2000 3-384 Nov/2000
3-346 Nov/2000 3-385 Nov/2000
3-347 Nov/2000 3-386 Nov/2000
3-348 Nov/2000 F 3-387 Nov/2000
3-349 Nov/2000 3-388 Blank
3-350 Nov/2000 3-389 Nov/2000
3-351 Nov/2000 3-390 Nov/2000
3-352 Nov/2000 3-391 Nov/2000
3-353 Nov/2000 3-392 Nov/2000
3-354 Nov/2000 F 3-393 Nov/2000
F 3-355 Nov/2000 3-394 Blank
3-356 Blank F 3-395 Nov/2000
F 3-357 Nov/2000 3-396 Blank
3-358 Blank F 3-397 Nov/2000
F 3-359 Nov/2000 3-398 Blank
3-360 Blank 3-399 Nov/2000
F 3-361 Nov/2000 3-400 Nov/2000
3-362 Blank 3-401 Nov/2000
F 3-363 Nov/2000 3-402 Nov/2000
3-364 Blank F 3-403 Nov/2000
F 3-365 Nov/2000 3-404 Blank
3-366 Blank F 3-405 Nov/2000
F 3-367 Nov/2000 3-406 Blank
3-368 Blank 3-407 Nov/2000
F 3-369 Nov/2000 3-408 * 19 Oct 2010


EFS 40/EFS 50

3-408.1 * 19 Oct 2010 3-441 Nov/2000
3.408.2 May/2008 3-442 * 19 Oct 2010
3-409 May/2008 3-443 * 19 Oct 2010
3-410 Nov/2000 3-444 May/2008
3-411 Nov/2000 3-445 Nov/2000
3-412 May/2008 3-446 Nov/2000
3-413 * 19 Oct 2010 3-447 Nov/2000
3-414 * 19 Oct 2010 3-448 Nov/2000
3-415 * 19 Oct 2010 3-449 Nov/2000
3-416 * 19 Oct 2010 3-450 Nov/2000
F 3-417 Nov/2000 F 3-451 Nov/2000
F 3-419 Nov/2000 F 3-453 Nov/2000
F 3-420.1 * 19 Oct 2010 F 3-455 Nov/2000
3-420.2 Blank 3-456 Blank
F 3-420.3 * 19 Oct 2010 F 3-457 Nov/2000
3-420.4 Blank 3-458 Blank
3-421 Nov/2000 F 3-459 Nov/2000
3-422 Nov/2000 3-460 Blank
3-423 Nov/2000 F 3-461 Nov/2000
3-424 Nov/2000 3-462 Blank
F 3-425 Nov/2000 F 3-463 Nov/2000
F 3-427 Nov/2000 F 3-465 Nov/2000
3-429 Nov/2000 F 3-467 Nov/2000
3-430 Nov/2000 3-468 Blank
3-431 Nov/2000 F 3-469 Nov/2000
3-432 Nov/2000 3-470 Blank
F 3-433 Nov/2000 F 3-471 Nov/2000
F 3-435 Nov/2000 F 3-473 Nov/2000
3-437 Nov/2000 F 3-475 Nov/2000
3-438 Nov/2000 3-476 Blank
3-439 Nov/2000 F 3-477 Nov/2000
3-440 Nov/2000 3-478 Blank


EFS 40/EFS 50

F 3-479 Nov/2000
3-480 Blank
F 3-481 Nov/2000
3-482 Blank
F 3-483 Nov/2000
3-484 Blank
F 3-485 Nov/2000
3-486 Blank
F 3-487 Nov/2000
3-488 Blank
F 3-489 Nov/2000
3-490 Blank


EFS 40/EFS 50
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION I
GENERAL INFORMATION
Paragraph Page
1.0 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF UNITS ................................................................................ 1-1
1.1.1 EFS 40/EFS 50 System .................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 SG 464, SG 465 Symbol Generators ................................................................ 1-2
1.1.3 ED 461, ED 462 Displays .................................................................................. 1-2
1.1.4 ED 551, ED 551A Displays ............................................................................... 1-3
1.1.5 CP 113F, CP 466A, CP 466B, CP 467, CP 468, CP 469, CP 469A, CP 470
Control Panels ................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS ................................................................... 1-3
1.3 UNITS SUPPLIED ........................................................................................... 1-16
1.3.1 SG 464, SG 465 Symbol Generators .............................................................. 1-16
1.3.2 ED 461 EHSI Display ...................................................................................... 1-16
1.3.3 ED 462 EADI Display ...................................................................................... 1-17
1.3.4 ED 551, ED 551A Displays ............................................................................. 1-19
1.3.5 CP 113F, CP 466A, CP 466B Control Panels ................................................. 1-20
1.3.6 CP 467, CP 468, CP 469 Control Panels ........................................................ 1-21
1.3.7 CP 469A Control Panel ................................................................................... 1-23
1.3.8 CP 470 Control Panel ..................................................................................... 1-23
1.3.9 KA 163A Pitch and Roll Command Adapter..................................................... 1-24
1.4 INSTALLATION KITS AND ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED ............................... 1-24
1.4.1 SG 464, SG 465 Installation Kit ...................................................................... 1-24
1.4.2 ED 461, ED 462 Installation Kit ....................................................................... 1-26
1.4.3 ED 462 Inclinometer Installation Kit ................................................................ 1-27
1.4.4 ED 551, ED 551A Installation Kit .................................................................... 1-27
1.4.5 ED 551, ED 551A Inclinometer Installation Kit ................................................ 1-28
1.4.6 CP 113F Installation Kit ................................................................................... 1-28
1.4.7 CP 466A, CP 466B Installation Kit .................................................................. 1-29
1.4.8 CP 466A, CP 466B, CP 467, CP 468, CP 469, CP 469A Installation Kit ........ 1-29
1.4.9 CP 469A Installation Kit .................................................................................. 1-29
1.4.10 CP 470 Installation Kit ..................................................................................... 1-30
1.5 ACCESSORIES REQUIRED BUT NOT SUPPLIED ....................................... 1-30
1.5.1 Cooling Kits ..................................................................................................... 1-30
1.5.2 KA 163A Pitch and Roll Command Bar Adapter ............................................. 1-32
1.5.3 SU 463 Switching Unit .................................................................................... 1-33
1.5.4 SU 463 Switch/Annunciators ........................................................................... 1-34
1.5.5 JOYSTICK/ENTER Switch Kit ......................................................................... 1-35
Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Page TOC-1

EFS 40/EFS 50
1.5.6 Crimping Tools and Positioners ...................................................................... 1-35
1.5.7 Insertion/Extraction Tools ................................................................................ 1-36
1.5.8 Dzus Mounting Rails ....................................................................................... 1-38
1.5.9 Video and Deflection Shielded Wire ................................................................ 1-39
1.6 LICENSE REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................... 1-39
1.7 SUMMARY OF INPUT & OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS ............................... 1-39
SECTION I
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure Page
1-1 Crimping Tool and Positioner For SU 463, SG 464, SG 465 .......................... 1-37
1-2 Crimping Tool and Positioner For ED 461, ED 462, CP 467, CP 468, CP 469,
CP 469A, CP 470............................................................................................. 1-37
1-3 Insertion/Extraction Tool For KA 163A, ED 461, ED 462, CP 467, CP 468,
CP 469, CP 469A, CP 470 .............................................................................. 1-38
1-4 Insertion/Extraction Tool For SU 463, SG 464, SG 465 .................................. 1-38
SECTION I
LIST OF TABLES
Table Page
1-1 SG 464 Symbol Generator ................................................................................ 1-3
1-2 SG 465 Symbol Generator ................................................................................ 1-5
1-3 ED 461 EHSI Display ........................................................................................ 1-6
1-4 ED 462 EADI/EHSI Display ............................................................................... 1-7
1-5 ED 551, ED 551A EADI/EHSI Displays ............................................................ 1-8
1-6 CP 113F Control Panel ..................................................................................... 1-9
1-7 CP 466A, CP 466B Control Panels ................................................................... 1-9
1-8 CP 467 Control Panel ..................................................................................... 1-10
1-9 CP 468 Control Panel ..................................................................................... 1-11
1-10 CP 469 Control Panel ..................................................................................... 1-12
1-11 CP 469A Control Panel ................................................................................... 1-12
1-12 CP 470 Control Panel ..................................................................................... 1-13
1-13 KA 33 Cooling Blower ..................................................................................... 1-13
1-14 KA 163A Pitch and Roll Command Adapter .................................................... 1-14
1-15 SU 463 EFIS Reversionary Switching Unit ..................................................... 1-14
1-16 SG 464 Version Characteristics ...................................................................... 1-16
1-17 SG 465 Version Characteristics ...................................................................... 1-16
1-18 ED 461 Version Characteristics ...................................................................... 1-17
Page TOC-2 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010

EFS 40/EFS 50

1-24 ED 551, ED 551A Version Characteristics ...................................................... 1-19
1-25 ED 551, ED 551A Version Characteristics ...................................................... 1-19
1-26 CP 113F Version Characteristics .................................................................... 1-20
1-27 CP 466A Version Characteristics .................................................................... 1-20
1-29 CP 466B Version Characteristics .................................................................... 1-21
1-30 CP 466B Version Characteristics .................................................................... 1-21
1-31 CP 467 Version Characteristics ...................................................................... 1-21
1-38 SG 465 Cooling Options ................................................................................. 1-31
1-39 SU 463 Version Characteristics ...................................................................... 1-33
1-40 Input & Output Characteristics ........................................................................ 1-39
SECTION II
INSTALLATION
Paragraph Page
2.0 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING EQUIPMENT ............................................... 2-1
2.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION .......................................................................... 2-1
2.2.1 General Considerations .................................................................................... 2-1
2.2.2 SG 464 Installation ............................................................................................ 2-2
2.2.3 SG 465 Installation ............................................................................................ 2-2
2.2.4 ED 461, ED 462 Installation .............................................................................. 2-3
2.2.5 ED 551, ED 551A Installation ............................................................................ 2-4
2.2.6 CP 113F Installation .......................................................................................... 2-4
2.2.7 CP 466, CP 466B Installation ............................................................................ 2-5
2.2.8 CP 467, CP 468, CP 469 Installation ................................................................ 2-5
2.2.9 CP 469A Installation .......................................................................................... 2-5
2.2.10 CP 470 Installation ............................................................................................ 2-5
2.2.11 KA 33 Installation .............................................................................................. 2-5
2.2.12 KA 163A Installation .......................................................................................... 2-6
2.2.13 SU 463 EFIS Reversionary Switching Unit Installation ..................................... 2-6

EFS 40/EFS 50
2.2.14 Annunciator Unit and Switch Annunciators ....................................................... 2-6
2.2.15 JOYSTICK/ENTER Switch ................................................................................ 2-6
2.2.16 Harness and Cable Fabrication ......................................................................... 2-7
SECTION II
Figure Page
2-1 SG 464 (Non-HIRF) Installation Drawing .......................................................... 2-9
2-2 SG 464 (HIRF) Installation Drawing ................................................................ 2-13
2-3 SG 465 (Non-HIRF) Installation Drawing ........................................................ 2-17
2-3A SG 465 Short Rack (Non-HIRF) Installation Drawing ..................................... 2-21
2-4 SG 465 (HIRF) Installation Drawing ................................................................ 2-25
2-5 SG 465 Short Rack (HIRF) Installation Drawing ............................................. 2-29
2-6 SG 465 High Altitude, Short Rack (HIRF) Installation Drawing ....................... 2-33
2-7 ED 461 All Versions Without Mounting Rack, Installation Drawing ................. 2-37
2-8 ED 461/ED 462 All Versions With Mounting Rack, Installation Drawing ......... 2-39
2-9 ED 462 -0100/-0800, -2100/-2800 Versions (Standard Back) Without
Mounting Rack, Installation Drawing................................................................ 2-43
2-10 ED 462 -1100/-1800, -3100/-3800 Versions (Inverted Back) Without
Mounting Rack, Installation Drawing................................................................ 2-45
2-11 ED 551/ED 551A Installation Drawing ............................................................ 2-47
2-12 CP 113F Installation Drawing .......................................................................... 2-51
2-13 CP 466A Installation Drawing ......................................................................... 2-53
2-13A CP 466B Installation Drawing ......................................................................... 2-57
2-14 CP 467/CP 468/CP 469 Installation Drawing .................................................. 2-61
2-15 CP 469A Installation Drawing ......................................................................... 2-65
2-16 CP 470 Installation Drawing ............................................................................ 2-67
2-17 KA 33 -01 Version Blower Installation Drawing ............................................... 2-71
2-18 KA 33 -02 Version Blower Installation Drawing ............................................... 2-73
2-19 KA 163A Installation Drawing .......................................................................... 2-75
2-20 SU 463 (Non-HIRF) Installation Drawing ........................................................ 2-77
2-20A SU 463 (HIRF Rack) Installation Drawing ....................................................... 2-79
2-21 Annunciator Unit And Switch Annunciator Unit Installation Drawing ............... 2-83
2-22 JOYSTICK/ENTER Switch Installation Drawing ............................................. 2-87
SECTION III
SYSTEM PLANNING
Paragraph Page
3.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Applicable Part Numbers Subsection Description ............................................. 3-1

EFS 40/EFS 50
3.1.2 Function Subsection Description ....................................................................... 3-3

3.1.3 Requirements and Limitations Subsection Description ..................................... 3-4
3.1.4 Electrical Characteristics Subsection Description ............................................. 3-4
3.1.5 Interface Subsection Description ...................................................................... 3-4
3.2 INTRASYSTEM ................................................................................................. 3-9
3.2.1 Intrasystem Applicable Part Numbers ............................................................... 3-9
3.2.2 Intrasystem Function ....................................................................................... 3-12
3.2.3 Intrasystem Requirements and Limitations ..................................................... 3-14
3.2.4 Intrasystem Electrical Characteristics ............................................................. 3-15
3.2.5 Intrasystem Interface ....................................................................................... 3-35
3.3 HEADING/ATTITUDE/AHRS RATE of TURN ............................................... 3-299
3.3.1 HEADING/ATTITUDE/AHRS Rate of Turn Applicable Part Numbers ........... 3-299
3.3.2 HEADING/ATTITUDE/AHRS Rate of Turn Function .................................... 3-299
3.3.3 HEADING/ATTITUDE/AHRS Rate of Turn Requirements and Limitations ... 3-300
3.3.4 HEADING/ATTITUDE/AHRS Rate of Turn Electrical Characteristics ........... 3-301
3.3.5 HEADING/ATTITUDE/AHRS Rate of Turn Interface .................................... 3-305
3.4 VOR/LOC/GS/MARKER BEACON ............................................................... 3-321
3.4.1 VOR/LOC/GS/MARKER BEACON Applicable Part Numbers ...................... 3-321
3.4.2 VOR/LOC/GS/MARKER BEACON Function ................................................ 3-321
3.4.3 VOR/LOC/GS/MARKER BEACON Requirements and Limitations ............... 3-322
3.4.4 VOR/LOC/GS/MARKER BEACON Electrical Characteristics ....................... 3-322
3.4.5 VOR/LOC/GS/MARKER BEACON Interface ................................................ 3-326
3.5 DME/TACAN .................................................................................................. 3-339
3.5.1 DME/TACAN Applicable Part Numbers ........................................................ 3-339
3.5.2 DME/TACAN Function .................................................................................. 3-339
3.5.3 DME/TACAN Requirements and Limitations ................................................ 3-341
3.5.4 DME/TACAN Electrical Characteristics ......................................................... 3-342
3.5.5 DME/TACAN Interface .................................................................................. 3-345
3.6 MLS ............................................................................................................... 3-383
3.6.1 MLS Applicable Part Numbers ...................................................................... 3-383
3.6.2 MLS Function ................................................................................................ 3-383
3.6.3 MLS Requirements and Limitations .............................................................. 3-384
3.6.4 MLS Electrical Characteristics ...................................................................... 3-384
3.6.5 MLS Interface ................................................................................................ 3-384
3.7 ADF ............................................................................................................... 3-389
3.7.1 ADF Applicable Part Numbers ...................................................................... 3-389
3.7.2 ADF Function ................................................................................................ 3-389
3.7.3 ADF Requirements and Limitations .............................................................. 3-389
3.7.4 ADF Electrical Characteristics ....................................................................... 3-389
3.7.5 ADF Interface ................................................................................................ 3-391
3.8 RNAV ............................................................................................................ 3-399

EFS 40/EFS 50
3.8.1 RNAV Applicable Part Numbers ................................................................... 3-399

3.8.2 RNAV Function ............................................................................................. 3-399
3.8.3 RNAV Requirements and Limitations ............................................................ 3-400
3.8.4 RNAV Electrical Characteristics .................................................................... 3-400
3.8.5 RNAV Interface ............................................................................................. 3-401
3.9 LNAV/VNAV .................................................................................................. 3-407
3.9.1 LNAV/VNAV Applicable Part Numbers ......................................................... 3-407
3.9.2 LNAV/VNAV Function ................................................................................... 3-407
3.9.3 LNAV/VNAV Requirements and Limitations .............................................. 3-408.2
3.9.4 LNAV/VNAV Electrical Characteristics .......................................................... 3-410
3.9.5 LNAV/VNAV Interface .................................................................................... 3-414
3.10 AIR DATA/COLLECTIVE ............................................................................. 3-421
3.10.1 Air Data/Collective Applicable Part Numbers ................................................ 3-421
3.10.2 Air Data/Collective Function .......................................................................... 3-421
3.10.3 Air Data/Collective Requirements and Limitations ........................................ 3-421
3.10.4 Air Data/Collective Electrical Characteristics ................................................ 3-421
3.10.5 Air Data/Collective Interface .......................................................................... 3-423
3.11 RADIO ALTIMETER ...................................................................................... 3-429
3.11.1 Radio Altimeter Applicable Part Numbers ..................................................... 3-429
3.11.2 Radio Altimeter Function ............................................................................... 3-429
3.11.3 Radio Altimeter Requirements and Limitations ............................................. 3-430
3.11.4 Radio Altimeter Electrical Characteristics ..................................................... 3-430
3.11.5 Radio Altimeter Interface ............................................................................... 3-432
3.12 FLIGHT CONTROL ....................................................................................... 3-437
3.12.1 Flight Control Applicable Part Numbers ........................................................ 3-437
3.12.2 Flight Control Function .................................................................................. 3-437
3.12.3 Flight Control Requirements and Limitations ................................................ 3-438
3.12.4 Flight Control Electrical Characteristics ........................................................ 3-438
3.12.5 Flight Control Interface .................................................................................. 3-448
3.13 WEATHER DETECTION/ EGPWS/ CHECKLIST ......................................... 3-491
3.13.1 Weather Detection/ EGPWS/ Checklist Applicable Part Numbers ................ 3-491
3.13.2 Weather Detection/ EGPWS/ Checklist Function .......................................... 3-492
3.13.3 Weather Detection/ EGPWS/ Checklist Requirements and Limitations ........ 3-494
3.13.4 Weather Detection/ EGPWS/ Checklist Electrical Characteristics ................ 3-495
3.13.5 Weather Detection/ EGPWS/ Checklist Interface ......................................... 3-502
3.14 TCAS INTERFACE ....................................................................................... 3-533
3.14.1 TCAS Interface Applicable Part Numbers ..................................................... 3-533
3.14.2 TCAS Interface Function ............................................................................... 3-533
3.14.3 TCAS Interface Requirements and Limitations ............................................. 3-533
3.14.4 TCAS Interface Electrical Characteristics ..................................................... 3-534
3.14.5 TCAS Interface .............................................................................................. 3-535
3.15 HOVER/CABLE/HOMING ............................................................................. 3-539

EFS 40/EFS 50
3.15.1 HOVER/CABLE/HOMING Applicable Part Numbers .................................... 3-539

3.15.2 HOVER/CABLE/HOMING Function .............................................................. 3-539
3.15.3 HOVER/CABLE/HOMING Requirements and Limitations ............................ 3-540
3.15.4 HOVER/CABLE/HOMING Electrical Characteristics .................................... 3-541
3.15.5 HOVER/CABLE/HOMING Interface .............................................................. 3-547
3.16 MISCELLANEOUS INTERFACES ................................................................ 3-557
3.16.1 Miscellaneous Interfaces Applicable Part Numbers ...................................... 3-557
3.16.2 Miscellaneous Interfaces Function ................................................................ 3-557
3.16.3 Miscellaneous Interfaces Requirements and Limitations .............................. 3-557
3.16.4 Miscellaneous Interfaces Electrical Characteristics ...................................... 3-557
3.16.5 Miscellaneous Interfaces ............................................................................... 3-565
3.17 PIN FUNCTION LISTS .................................................................................. 3-569
3.18 PIN DESIGNATOR / LINE NAME INDEX ..................................................... 3-639
3.18.1 Pin Designator Index ..................................................................................... 3-639
3.18.2 Line Name Index ........................................................................................... 3-752
SECTION III
Figure Page
3-1 EFS 40 EADI/EHSI System Block Diagram ...................................................... 3-5
3-2 EFS 40 EHSI System Block Diagram ............................................................... 3-7
3-3 EFS 40/EFS 50 Tandem Control Panel Interconnect ..................................... 3-39
3-4 EFS 40/EFS 50 MFD Control Panel Interconnect ........................................... 3-41
3-5 EFS 40/EFS 50 Mechanical Joystick Interconnect ......................................... 3-43
3-6 EFS 40/EFS 50 Lighting and Brightness Interconnect .................................... 3-45
3-7 EFS 40/EFS 50 Configuration Module and Symbol Generator Fan Interconn 3-47
3-8 EFS 40 Single EHSI Block Diagram ............................................................... 3-51
3-9 EFS 40 Single EHSI Control Panel Interconnect ............................................ 3-53
3-10 EFS 40 Single EHSI/EHSI Power Interconnect .............................................. 3-55
3-11 EFS 40 Single EHSI/EHSI Video Interconnect ............................................... 3-57
3-12 EFS 40 Single EHSI/EHSI Deflection Interconnect ......................................... 3-59
3-13 EFS 40 Single EHSI XTALK and Discrete Interconnect ................................. 3-61
3-14 EFS 50 Single EHSI Block Diagram ............................................................... 3-65
3-15 EFS 50 Single EHSI Control Panel Interconnect ............................................ 3-67
3-16 EFS 50 Single EHSI/EHSI Power Interconnect .............................................. 3-69
3-17 EFS 50 Single EHSI/EHSI Video Interconnect ............................................... 3-71
3-18 EFS 50 Single EHSI/EHSI Deflection Interconnect ......................................... 3-73
3-19 EFS 50 Single EHSI XTALK and Discrete Interconnect ................................. 3-75
3-20 EFS 40 Dual EHSI Block Diagram .................................................................. 3-79
3-21 EFS 40 Dual EHSI Control Panel Interconnect ............................................... 3-81

EFS 40/EFS 50
3-22 EFS 40 Dual EHSI/EHSI Power Interconnect ................................................. 3-83
3-23 EFS 40 Dual EHSI/EHSI Video Interconnect .................................................. 3-85
3-24 EFS 40 Dual EHSI/EHSI Deflection Interconnect ........................................... 3-87
3-25 EFS 40 Dual EHSI XTALK and Discrete Interconnect .................................... 3-89
3-26 EFS 50 Dual EHSI Block Diagram .................................................................. 3-93
3-27 EFS 50 Dual EHSI Control Panel Interconnect ............................................... 3-95
3-28 EFS 50 Dual EHSI/EHSI Power Interconnect ................................................. 3-97
3-29 EFS 50 Dual EHSI/EHSI Video Interconnect .................................................. 3-99
3-30 EFS 50 Dual EHSI/EHSI Deflection Interconnect ......................................... 3-101
3-31 EFS 50 Dual EHSI XTALK and Discrete Interconnect .................................. 3-103
3-32 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI Block Diagram .................................................... 3-107
3-33 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI EADI Power Interconnect ................................... 3-109
3-34 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI EADI Video Interconnect .................................... 3-111
3-35 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI EADI Deflection Interconnect ............................. 3-113
3-36 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI Control Panel Interconnect ................................. 3-115
3-37 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI EHSI Power Interconnect ................................... 3-117
3-38 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI EHSI Video Interconnect .................................... 3-119
3-39 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI EHSI Deflection Interconnect ............................. 3-121
3-40 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI XTALK and Discrete Interconnect ...................... 3-123
3-41 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI Block Diagram .................................................... 3-127
3-42 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI EADI Power Interconnect ................................... 3-129
3-43 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI EADI Video Interconnect .................................... 3-131
3-44 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI EADI Deflection Interconnect ............................. 3-133
3-45 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI Control Panel Interconnect ................................. 3-135
3-46 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI EHSI Power Interconnect ................................... 3-137
3-47 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI EHSI Video Interconnect .................................... 3-139
3-48 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI EHSI Deflection Interconnect ............................. 3-141
3-49 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI XTALK and Discrete Interconnect ...................... 3-143
3-50 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD Block Diagram ................................... 3-149
3-51 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD EADI Power Interconnect .................. 3-151
3-52 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD EADI Video Interconnect ................... 3-153
3-53 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD EADI Deflection Interconnect ............ 3-155
3-54 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD Control Panel Interconnect ................ 3-157
3-55 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD EHSI Power Interconnect .................. 3-159
3-56 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD EHSI Video Interconnect ................... 3-161
3-57 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD EHSI Deflection Interconnect ............. 3-163
3-58 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD XTALK and Discrete Interconnect ...... 3-165
3-59 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD Mode Select Interconnect .................. 3-167
3-60 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD Spare Relays Interconnect ................ 3-169
3-61 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD Block Diagram ................................... 3-175
3-62 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD EADI Power Interconnect .................. 3-177
3-63 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD EADI Video Interconnect ................... 3-179

EFS 40/EFS 50
3-64 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD EADI Deflection Interconnect ............. 3-181
3-65 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD Control Panel Interconnect ................ 3-183
3-66 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD EHSI Power Interconnect .................. 3-185
3-67 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD EHSI Video Interconnect ................... 3-187
3-68 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD EHSI Deflection Interconnect ............. 3-189
3-69 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD XTALK and Discrete Interconnect ...... 3-191
3-70 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD Mode Select Interconnect .................. 3-193
3-71 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD Spare Relays Interconnect ................ 3-195
3-72 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI Block Diagram ....................................................... 3-199
3-73 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI EADI Power Interconnect ...................................... 3-201
3-74 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI EADI Video Interconnect ....................................... 3-203
3-75 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI EADI Deflection Interconnect ................................ 3-205
3-76 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI Control Panel Interconnect ................................... 3-207
3-77 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI EHSI Power Interconnect ...................................... 3-209
3-78 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI EHSI Video Interconnect ....................................... 3-211
3-79 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI EHSI Deflection Interconnect ................................ 3-213
3-80 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI XTALK and Discrete Interconnect ......................... 3-215
3-81 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI Mode Select Interconnect ..................................... 3-217
3-82 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI Spare Relays Interconnect .................................... 3-219
3-83 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI Block Diagram ....................................................... 3-223
3-84 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI EADI Power Interconnect ...................................... 3-225
3-85 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI EADI Video Interconnect ....................................... 3-227
3-86 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI EADI Deflection Interconnect ................................ 3-229
3-87 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI Control Panel Interconnect ................................... 3-231
3-88 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI EHSI Power Interconnect ...................................... 3-233
3-89 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI EHSI Video Interconnect ....................................... 3-235
3-90 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI EHSI Deflection Interconnect ................................ 3-237
3-91 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI XTALK and Discrete Interconnect ......................... 3-239
3-92 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI Mode Select Interconnect ..................................... 3-241
3-93 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI Spare Relays Interconnect .................................... 3-243
3-94 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD Block Diagram ...................................... 3-249
3-95 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD EADI Power Interconnect ..................... 3-251
3-96 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD EADI Video Interconnect ...................... 3-253
3-97 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD EADI Deflection Interconnect ............... 3-255
3-98 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD Control Panel Interconnect .................. 3-257
3-99 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD EHSI Power Interconnect ..................... 3-259
3-100 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD EHSI Video Interconnect ...................... 3-261
3-101 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD EHSI Deflection Interconnect ............... 3-263
3-102 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD XTALK and Discrete Interconnect......... 3-265
3-103 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD Mode Select Interconnect .................... 3-267
3-104 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD Spare Relays Interconnect ................... 3-269

EFS 40/EFS 50
3-105 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD Block Diagram ...................................... 3-275
3-106 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD EADI Power Interconnect ..................... 3-279
3-107 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD EADI Video Interconnect ...................... 3-281
3-108 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD EADI Deflection Interconnect ............... 3-283
3-109 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD Control Panel Interconnect .................. 3-285
3-110 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD EHSI Power Interconnect ..................... 3-287
3-111 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD EHSI Video Interconnect ...................... 3-289
3-112 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD EHSI Deflection Interconnect ............... 3-291
3-113 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD XTALK and Discrete Interconnect......... 3-293
3-114 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD Mode Select Interconnect .................... 3-295
3-115 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD Spare Relays Interconnect ................... 3-297
3-116 EFS 40/EFS 50 XYZ Heading Interconnect .................................................. 3-309
3-117 EFS 40/EFS 50 XYZ Attitude Interconnect ................................................... 3-311
3-118 EFS 40/EFS 50 VG/DG Reversionary Switching Interconnect ..................... 3-313
3-119 EFS 40/EFS 50 IRU/AHRS Interconnect ...................................................... 3-315
3-120 EFS 40/EFS 50 AHRS Reversionary Switching Interconnect ....................... 3-317
3-121 EFS 40/EFS 50 Rate of Turn Interconnect ................................................... 3-319
3-122 EFS 40/EFS 50 Composite NAV Receiver Interconnect ............................... 3-329
3-123 EFS 40/EFS 50 AC SIN/COS NAV Receiver Interconnect ........................... 3-333
3-124 EFS 40/EFS 50 ARINC 429 NAV Receiver Interconnect .............................. 3-335
3-125 EFS 40/EFS 50 Marker Beacon Receiver Interconnect ................................ 3-337
3-125A Stand Alone TACAN Vs Frequency Paired TACAN....................................... 3-340
3-126 EFS 40/EFS 50 Dual KING Serial DME Interconnect ................................... 3-355
3-127 EFS 40/EFS 50 Single KING Serial DME Without KDI 574 Interconnect ..... 3-357
3-128 EFS 40/EFS 50 Single KING Serial DME With KDI 574 Interconnect .......... 3-359
3-129 EFS 40/EFS 50 Dual ARINC 568 DME Interconnect .................................... 3-361
3-130 EFS 40/EFS 50 Single ARINC 568 DME Interconnect ................................. 3-363
3-131 EFS 40/EFS 50 Dual ARINC 429 DME Interconnect .................................... 3-365
3-132 EFS 40/EFS 50 Single Single-Channel ARINC 429 DME Interconnect ........ 3-367
3-133 EFS 40/EFS 50 Single Multi-Channel ARINC 429 DME Interconnect .......... 3-371
3-134 EFS 40/EFS 50 ARINC 429 TACAN Interconnect ........................................ 3-373
3-135 EFS 40/EFS 50 Composite KTU 709 Interconnect ....................................... 3-375
3-136 EFS 40/EFS 50 KTU 709 With KNR 634 Interconnect ................................. 3-379
3-137 EFS 40/EFS 50 ARINC 429 MLS Interconnect ............................................. 3-387
3-138 EFS 40/EFS 50 DC SIN/COS ADF Interconnect ........................................... 3-393
3-139 EFS 40/EFS 50 XYZ ADF Interconnect ......................................................... 3-395
3-140 EFS 40/EFS 50 ARINC 429 ADF Interconnect .............................................. 3-397
3-141 EFS 40/EFS 50 KNS 81 RNAV Interconnect ................................................. 3-403
3-142 EFS 40/EFS 50 ARINC 429 Long Range NAV Interconnect ........................ 3-417
3-142A EFS 40/EFS 50 ARINC 429 Dual LNAV Without SG 2 Interconnect ............ 3-419
3-142B EFS 40/EFS 50 ARINC 429 Garmin 430/530 ............................................ 3-420.1
3-143 EFS 40/EFS 50 Analog Airdata Interconnect................................................. 3-425

EFS 40/EFS 50
3-144 EFS 40/EFS 50 ARINC 429 Airdata Interconnect .......................................... 3-427

3-145 EFS 40/EFS 50 Analog Radio Altimeter Interconnect.................................... 3-433
3-146 EFS 40/EFS 50 ARINC 429 Radio Altimeter Interconnect............................. 3-435
3-147 EFS 40/EFS 50 EHSI Only Flight Control Interconnect ................................. 3-451
3-147A EFS 40/EFS 50 EADI/EHSI KFC 200 Flight Control Interconnect ................. 3-455
3-148 EFS 40/EFS 50 4” KFC 250 Flight Control Interconnect (3 Tube Single) ...... 3-459
3-148A EFS 40/EFS 50 4” KFC 250 Flight Control Interconnect (5 Tube Single) ...... 3-463
3-149 EFS 40/EFS 50 KFC 325 Flight Control Interconnect ................................... 3-467
3-150 EFS 40/EFS 50 KFC 400 Flight Control Interconnect (4 Tube Single) .......... 3-473
3-151 EFS 40/EFS 50 KFC 400 Flight Control Interconnect (4 Tube Dual) ............. 3-475
3-152 EFS 40/EFS 50 KFC 400 Flight Control Interconnect (5 Tube Single) .......... 3-477
3-153 EFS 40/EFS 50 KFC 400 Flight Control Interconnect (5 Tube Dual) ............. 3-479
3-154 EFS 40/EFS 50 KA 163A Flight Control Interconnect ................................... 3-481
3-154A EFS 40/EFS 50 KFC 500 Flight Control Interconnect (4 Tube Single) .......... 3-483
3-154B EFS 40/EFS 50 KFC 500 Flight Control Interconnect (5 Tube Single) .......... 3-487
3-155 EFS 40/EFS 50 Dual Symbol Generator, Weather Radar W/O Indicator Int . 3-505
3-156 EFS 40/EFS 50 Dual Symbol Generator, Weather Radar With Indicator Int . 3-507
3-157 EFS 40/EFS 50 Three Symbol Generator, Weather Radar W/O Indicator Int 3-509
3-158 EFS 40/EFS 50 RDR 1400 Weather Radar Interconnect ............................. 3-511
3-159 EFS 40/EFS 50 Lightning Interconnect ......................................................... 3-513
3-160 EFS 40/EFS 50 Checklist Interconnect ......................................................... 3-515
3-160A EFS 40/EFS 50 RDR 2000/RDR 2100 Interconnect (2 SG, 1 IND) ............... 3-517
3-160B EFS 40/EFS 50 RDR 2000/RDR 2100 Interconnect (2 SG, 1 MFD, 1 CP) ... 3-519
3-160C EFS 40/EFS 50 RDR 2000/RDR 2100 Interconnect (2 SG, 1 MFD, 3 CP) ... 3-521
3-160D EFS 40/EFS 50 RDR 2000/RDR 2100 Interconnect (2 SG, 1 IND, 2 CP) ..... 3-523
3-160E EFS 40/EFS 50 MK V, VI, VII, VIII EGPWS Interconnect .............................. 3-525
3-161 EFS 40/EFS 50 TCAS Interconnect .............................................................. 3-537
3-162 EFS 40/EFS 50 Hover Interconnect .............................................................. 3-549
3-163 EFS 40/EFS 50 Cable Interconnect .............................................................. 3-551
3-164 EFS 40/EFS 50 Homing Interconnect ........................................................... 3-553
3-165 EFS 40/EFS 50 Power and Ground Interconnect ......................................... 3-567
3-166 Configuration Module Connector P1 .............................................................. 3-571
3-167 CP 113F Connector P113F1 .......................................................................... 3-573
3-168 KA 163A Connector P163A1.......................................................................... 3-575
3-169 ED 461 Connector P4611 .............................................................................. 3-577
3-170 ED 462 Connector P4621 .............................................................................. 3-579
3-171 SU 463 Connector P4631A ............................................................................ 3-581
3-172 SU 463 Connector P4631B ............................................................................ 3-585
3-173 SU 463 Connector P4631C............................................................................ 3-589
3-174 SU 463 Connector P4631D............................................................................ 3-593
3-175 SU 463 Connector P4632 .............................................................................. 3-597

EFS 40/EFS 50
3-176 SG 464 Connector P4641A............................................................................ 3-599
3-177 SG 464 Connector P4641B............................................................................ 3-601
3-178 SG 464 Connector P4641C ........................................................................... 3-603
3-179 SG 465 Connector P4651A............................................................................ 3-605
3-180 SG 465 Connector P4651B............................................................................ 3-607
3-181 SG 465 Connector P4652A............................................................................ 3-609
3-182 SG 465 Connector P4652B............................................................................ 3-611
3-183 CP 466A Connector P466A1 ......................................................................... 3-615
3-184 CP 466B Connector P466B1 ......................................................................... 3-617
3-185 CP467 Connector P4671 ............................................................................... 3-619
3-186 CP468 Connector P4681 ............................................................................... 3-623
3-187 CP469 Connector P4691 ............................................................................... 3-627
3-188 CP469A Connector P469A1 .......................................................................... 3-629
3-189 CP469A Connector P469A2 .......................................................................... 3-631
3-190 CP 470 Connector J4701............................................................................... 3-633
3-191 ED 551 Connector P5511 .............................................................................. 3-635
3-192 ED 551A Connector P551A1 ......................................................................... 3-637
SECTION III
LIST OF TABLES
Table Page
3-1 Mode Selection Logic ...................................................................................... 3-20
3-2 Clockwise Heading/Course/DH Select Logic .................................................. 3-22
3-3 Counter-Clockwise Heading/Course/DH Select Logic .................................... 3-22
3-4 Nominal Current Draw ..................................................................................... 3-29
3-5 SU 463 Relay Characteristics ......................................................................... 3-32
3-6 SU 463 Program Pin Usage ............................................................................ 3-35
3-7 Dual DME #1 ................................................................................................. 3-348
3-8 Dual DME #2 ................................................................................................. 3-348
3-9 Single Multi-Channel DME Side-1 ................................................................. 3-350
3-10 Single Multi-Channel DME Side-2 ................................................................. 3-350
3-11 MFD Control Panel External ARINC 429 Receiver ........................................ 3-500
3-12 Symbol Generator HSI Power Inputs With Weather Board ........................... 3-558
3-13 Symbol Generator HSI Power Inputs Without Weather Board ..................... 3-559
3-14 SG 465 ADI Aircraft Power Current .............................................................. 3-560
3-15 Five Inch Display Aircraft Power Current ...................................................... 3-561
3-16 SU 463 Aircraft Power Current ...................................................................... 3-563
3-17 Configuration Module - P1 Pin Designator Index .......................................... 3-639
3-18 CP 113F - P113F1 Pin Designator Index ...................................................... 3-639
3-19 CP 466A - P466A1 Pin Designator Index ..................................................... 3-641

EFS 40/EFS 50
3-20 CP 466B - P466B1 Pin Designator Index ..................................................... 3-643

3-21 KA 163A - P163A1 Pin Designator Index ...................................................... 3-645
3-22 ED 461 - P4611 Pin Designator Index .......................................................... 3-646
3-24 SU 463 - P4631A Pin Designator Index ........................................................ 3-651
3-25 SU 463 - P4631B Pin Designator Index ........................................................ 3-658
3-26 SU 463 - P4631C Pin Designator Index ........................................................ 3-668
3-27 SU 463 - P4631D Pin Designator Index ........................................................ 3-675
3-28 SU 463 - P4632 Pin Designator Index .......................................................... 3-684
3-29 SG 464 - P4641A Pin Designator Index ........................................................ 3-687
3-30 SG 464 - P4641B Pin Designator Index ........................................................ 3-694
3-31 SG 464 - P4641C Pin Designator Index ....................................................... 3-701
3-36 CP 467 - P4671 Pin Designator Index .......................................................... 3-736
3-43 ED 551A - P551A1 Pin Designator Index ..................................................... 3-750
3-44 Configuration Module - Line Name Index ...................................................... 3-753
3-45 CP 113F - Line Name Index .......................................................................... 3-753
3-46 CP 466A - Line Name Index ......................................................................... 3-755
3-47 CP 466B - Line Name Index ......................................................................... 3-757
3-48 KA 163A - Line Name Index .......................................................................... 3-759
3-49 ED 461 - Line Name Index ............................................................................ 3-760
3-51 SU 463 - Line Name Index ............................................................................ 3-764
3-52 SG 464 - Line Name Index ............................................................................ 3-800
3-53 SG 465 - Line Name Index ............................................................................ 3-820
3-54 CP 467 - Line Name Index ............................................................................ 3-847
3-57 CP 469A - Line Name Index ......................................................................... 3-854
3-60 ED 551A - Line Name Index ......................................................................... 3-861

EFS 40/EFS 50
SECTION IV
POST INSTALLATION CHECKS
Paragraph Page
4.0 POST INSTALLATION CHECKOUT ................................................................. 4-1
4.1 CONFIGURATION WITH -02 VERSION SOFTWARE ..................................... 4-1
4.1.1 Initial Set Up ...................................................................................................... 4-2
4.1.2 Displaying The Configuration Menu Page ......................................................... 4-3
4.1.3 Symbol Generator Configuration ....................................................................... 4-5
4.1.4 Display Configuration ........................................................................................ 4-6
4.1.5 DU Type Configuration ...................................................................................... 4-6
4.1.6 Attitude/HDG #1 Configuration .......................................................................... 4-6
4.1.7 Attitude/HDG #2 Configuration .......................................................................... 4-7
4.1.8 Rate Of Turn Configuration ............................................................................... 4-7
4.1.9 ADF #1 Configuration ........................................................................................ 4-8
4.1.10 ADF #2 Configuration ........................................................................................ 4-8
4.1.11 NAV #1 Configuration ....................................................................................... 4-8
4.1.12 NAV #2 Configuration ....................................................................................... 4-9
4.1.13 Number Of DMEs Configuration ....................................................................... 4-9
4.1.14 DME #1 Configuration ..................................................................................... 4-10
4.1.15 DME#2 Configuration ...................................................................................... 4-11
4.1.16 MLS #1 Configuration ..................................................................................... 4-11
4.1.18 FMS/RNAV #1 Configuration .......................................................................... 4-12
4.1.19 FMS/RNAV #2 Configuration .......................................................................... 4-12
4.1.20 Number Of TACANs Configuration ................................................................. 4-12
4.1.21 TACAN #1 Configuration ................................................................................. 4-13
4.1.23 VNAV Configuration ........................................................................................ 4-14
4.1.24 Radar Altimeter Configuration ......................................................................... 4-15
4.1.25 Flight Control Configuration ............................................................................ 4-15
4.1.26 Air Data Configuration ..................................................................................... 4-15
4.1.27 Radar Type Configuration .............................................................................. 4-16
4.1.28 Radar Control Panel Configuration ................................................................. 4-16
4.1.29 Radar Indicator Configuration ......................................................................... 4-16
4.1.30 Checklist Configuration ................................................................................... 4-17
4.1.31 Joystick Configuration ..................................................................................... 4-17
4.1.32 Radar Graphics Configuration ......................................................................... 4-17
4.1.33 Vertical Scale Side Configuration .................................................................... 4-18
4.1.34 Declutter Glideslope On Backcourse Configuration ........................................ 4-19
4.1.35 Declutter Deviation On Flag Configuration ...................................................... 4-19

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.1.36 Display Wind Vector Configuration ................................................................. 4-19

4.1.37 Display Drift Configuration .............................................................................. 4-20
4.1.38 DG Mode Only Configuration .......................................................................... 4-20
4.1.39 DME Distance Only Configuration .................................................................. 4-20
4.1.40 Radar Only Configuration ................................................................................ 4-21
4.1.41 Hover Mode Available Configuration ............................................................... 4-21
4.1.42 Display Heading Tape Configuration .............................................................. 4-21
4.1.43 Command Bars Configuration ......................................................................... 4-22
4.1.44 Roll Indicator Configuration ............................................................................. 4-23
4.1.45 Decision Height Window Location Configuration ............................................ 4-23
4.1.46 Category II Available Configuration ................................................................. 4-23
4.1.47 Exiting Configuration ....................................................................................... 4-24
4.2 CONFIGURATION WITH -03 VERSION SOFTWARE ................................... 4-25
4.2.1 Initial Set Up .................................................................................................... 4-26
4.2.2 Displaying The Configuration Menu Page ....................................................... 4-26
4.2.3 Symbol Generator Configuration ..................................................................... 4-26
4.2.4 Display Configuration ...................................................................................... 4-27
4.2.5 DU Type Configuration .................................................................................... 4-27
4.2.6 Attitude/HDG #1 Configuration ........................................................................ 4-28
4.2.8 Rate Of Turn Configuration .............................................................................. 4-29
4.2.9 ADF #1 Configuration ...................................................................................... 4-29
4.2.11 VOR/ILS #1 Configuration ............................................................................... 4-30
4.2.13 DME #1Configuration ....................................................................................... 4-31
4.2.14 DME #2 Configuration ...................................................................................... 4-32
4.2.15 MLS #1 Configuration ...................................................................................... 4-32
4.2.17 FMS #1 Configuration ...................................................................................... 4-33
4.2.19 RNAV #1 Configuration ................................................................................... 4-34
4.2.25 AFCS Configuration ......................................................................................... 4-37
4.2.26 AFCS Command Bar Scaling Configuration ................................................... 4-37
4.2.27 AFCS Mode Annunciator Configuration .......................................................... 4-38

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.2.29 Radar Type Configuration ............................................................................... 4-38
4.2.37 Declutter Deviation On Flag Configuration ...................................................... 4-42
4.2.47 Decision Height Window Location Configuration ............................................ 4-46
4.2.49 Display ADI Perspective Lines ........................................................................ 4-47
4.2.50 Decision Height Selector Configuration .......................................................... 4-47
4.3.1 Initial Set Up .................................................................................................... 4-50
4.3.8 Rate Of Turn Configuration ............................................................................. 4-53
4.3.17 FMS #1 Configuration ..................................................................................... 4-58
4.3.18 FMS #2 Configuration ..................................................................................... 4-59

EFS 40/EFS 50

4.3.25 AFCS Configuration ........................................................................................ 4-62
4.3.46 Declutter Data On Unusual Attitude Configuration .......................................... 4-71
4.3.49 Decision Height Selector Configuration .......................................................... 4-72
4.3.50 Cable Mode Available Configuration ............................................................... 4-73
4.4.1 Initial Set Up .................................................................................................... 4-76

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.4.8 Rate Of Turn Configuration ............................................................................. 4-79
4.4.25 AFCS Configuration ........................................................................................ 4-88
4.4.35 Homing #1 Configuration ................................................................................ 4-92
4.4.36 Homing #2 Configuration ................................................................................ 4-93
4.4.39 Fulltime FMS Map Configuration ..................................................................... 4-94
4.4.46 MFD NAV Control Configuration ..................................................................... 4-97

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.4.50 Declutter Data On Unusual Attitude Configuration .......................................... 4-99

4.4.53 Decision Height Selector Configuration ........................................................ 4-100
4.4.54 Cable Mode Available Configuration ............................................................. 4-100
4.4.55 Selected HDG Sync Configuration ................................................................ 4-101
4.4.56 Selected CRS Sync Configuration ................................................................ 4-101
4.4.57 Exiting Configuration ..................................................................................... 4-101
4.5 CONFIGURATION WITH -06 VERSION SOFTWARE ................................. 4-103
4.5.1 Initial Set Up .................................................................................................. 4-105
4.5.2 Displaying The Configuration Menu Page ..................................................... 4-105
4.5.3 Symbol Generator Configuration ................................................................... 4-105
4.5.4 Display Configuration .................................................................................... 4-106
4.5.5 DU Type Configuration .................................................................................. 4-106
4.5.6 Attitude/HDG #1 Configuration ...................................................................... 4-107
4.5.8 Rate Of Turn Configuration ........................................................................... 4-108
4.5.9 ADF #1 Configuration .................................................................................... 4-108
4.5.11 VOR/ILS #1 Configuration ............................................................................. 4-109
4.5.13 DME #1 Configuration .................................................................................... 4-111
4.5.15 MLS #1 Configuration .................................................................................... 4-113
4.5.17 FMS #1 Configuration .................................................................................... 4-113
4.5.19 RNAV #1 Configuration ................................................................................. 4-114
4.5.21 TACAN #1 Configuration ............................................................................... 4-115
4.5.23 VNAV Configuration ...................................................................................... 4-116
4.5.24 Radar Altimeter Configuration ....................................................................... 4-117
4.5.25 AFCS Configuration ...................................................................................... 4-118
4.5.26 AFCS Command Bar Scaling Configuration ................................................. 4-118
4.5.27 AFCS Mode Annunciator Configuration ........................................................ 4-119
4.5.28 Air Data Configuration .................................................................................... 4-119
4.5.29 Radar Type Configuration ............................................................................. 4-120
4.5.30 Radar Control Panel Configuration ............................................................... 4-120
4.5.31 Radar Indicator Configuration ....................................................................... 4-120
4.5.32 Checklist Configuration ................................................................................. 4-121

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.5.33 Joystick Configuration ................................................................................... 4-121
4.5.34 TCAS Configuration ...................................................................................... 4-122
4.5.35 Homing #1 Configuration .............................................................................. 4-122
4.5.37 Lightning Detection Configuration ................................................................. 4-123
4.5.38 Vertical Scale Side Configuration .................................................................. 4-123
4.5.39 Declutter Glideslope On Backcourse Configuration ..................................... 4-124
4.5.40 Fulltime FMS Map Configuration ................................................................... 4-124
4.5.41 Display Wind Vector Configuration ............................................................... 4-125
4.5.42 Display Drift Configuration ............................................................................ 4-125
4.5.43 DG Mode Only Configuration ........................................................................ 4-126
4.5.44 DME Distance Only Configuration ................................................................ 4-126
4.5.45 Radar Only Configuration .............................................................................. 4-127
4.5.46 Hover Mode Available Configuration ............................................................. 4-127
4.5.47 MFD NAV Control Configuration ................................................................... 4-127
4.5.48 Display Heading Tape Configuration ............................................................ 4-128
4.5.49 Command Bars Configuration ....................................................................... 4-129
4.5.50 Roll Indicator Configuration ........................................................................... 4-129
4.5.51 Declutter Data On Unusual Attitude Configuration ........................................ 4-130
4.5.52 Category II Available Configuration ............................................................... 4-130
4.5.53 Display ADI Perspective Lines ...................................................................... 4-131
4.5.58 North Up Map Configuration ......................................................................... 4-132
4.5.59 Vertical Pointer Type Configuration .............................................................. 4-133
4.5.60 Display Messages For FMS Configuration .................................................... 4-134
4.5.61 HDG Color Configuration .............................................................................. 4-134
4.5.62 Command Bar Color Configuration ............................................................... 4-135
4.5.63 Reversionary Mode Annunciation Configuration ........................................... 4-135
4.5.64 LOC/MLS Deviation Display On EADI Configuration .................................... 4-135
4.5.65 ADI ILS/MLS Source Configuration ............................................................... 4-136
4.5.66 Command Bar Filter Configuration ................................................................ 4-137
4.6.1 Initial Set Up .................................................................................................. 4-141

EFS 40/EFS 50

4.6.25 AFCS Configuration. ..................................................................................... 4-155
4.6.28 Air Data Configuration ................................................................................... 4-156
4.6.41 Declutter Glideslope On Backcourse Configuration ...................................... 4-162

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.6.56 Select Control Panel Sync Configuration ...................................................... 4-169
4.6.61 Display Messages for FMS Configuration ..................................................... 4-172
4.6.65 LOC/MLS Deviation Display On EADI Configuration .................................... 4-173
4.7.1 Initial Set Up .................................................................................................. 4-179

EFS 40/EFS 50


EFS 40/EFS 50
4.7.65 LOC/MLS Deviation Display On EADI Configuration ..................................... 4-213
4.7.68 MLS Vertical Annunciation Configuration ...................................................... 4-215
4.7.69 Datum Scaling Configuration ......................................................................... 4-215
4.7.70 HDG Fail Annunciator Configuration ............................................................. 4-216
4.7.71 VNAV Approach Scale Configuration ............................................................ 4-216
4.7.72 LNAV CRS Control Configuration ................................................................. 4-217
4.8.1 Initial Set Up .................................................................................................. 4-221
4.8.5 Display Unit Type Configuration .................................................................... 4-225

EFS 40/EFS 50

4.8.50 ADI Plane/Command Bars Configuration ...................................................... 4-254
4.8.70 HDG Fail Annunciation Configuration ........................................................... 4-265

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.8.73 SG #1 Side Configuration .............................................................................. 4-266
4.8.74 Aircraft Symbol Configuration ........................................................................ 4-266
4.8.75 TACAN Annunciate Configuration.................................................................. 4-267
4.8.76 TCAS Intruder Displays Configuration ........................................................... 4-267
4.8.77 CAT II Sensors Configuration ........................................................................ 4-268
4.8.78 Max Radar Scan Angle Configuration ............................................................ 4-268
4.8.79 Radar SDI Configuration ................................................................................ 4-269
4.9.1 Initial Set Up .................................................................................................. 4-274

EFS 40/EFS 50


EFS 40/EFS 50
4.9.80 Pitch Offset Sync Configuration ..................................................................... 4-323
4.10.1 Initial Set Up .................................................................................................. 4-328

EFS 40/EFS 50

4.10.40 Variable LNAV Configuration ......................................................................... 4-356

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.11.1 Initial Set Up .................................................................................................. 4-382

EFS 40/EFS 50


EFS 40/EFS 50
4.12.1 Initial Set Up .................................................................................................. 4-436

EFS 40/EFS 50


EFS 40/EFS 50
4.12.82 DME Hold Distance With ADF RMI Configuration ......................................... 4-487
4.13.1 Initial Set Up .................................................................................................. 4-491

EFS 40/EFS 50

4.13.41 EGPWS Configuration ................................................................................... 4-519

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13.84 FMS Output Bus Configuration ...................................................................... 4-543
4.13A CONFIGURATION WITH -15 VERSION SOFTWARE .............................. 4-544.1
4.13A.1 Initial Set Up ............................................................................................... 4-544.3
4.13A.2 Displaying The Configuration Menu Page .................................................. 4-544.4
4.13A.3 Symbol Generator Configuration ................................................................ 4-544.6
4.13A.4 Display Configuration ................................................................................. 4-544.7
4.13A.5 Display Unit Type Configuration ................................................................. 4-544.8
4.13A.6 Attitude/HDG #1 Configuration ................................................................... 4-544.8
4.13A.7 Attitude/HDG #2 Configuration ................................................................... 4-544.9
4.13A.8 Rate Of Turn Configuration ...................................................................... 4-544.10
4.13A.9 ADF #1 Configuration ............................................................................... 4-544.11
4.13A.10 ADF #2 Configuration ............................................................................... 4-544.12
4.13A.11 VOR/ILS #1 Configuration ........................................................................ 4-544.12
4.13A.12 VOR/ILS #2 Configuration ........................................................................ 4-544.13
4.13A.13 DME #1 Configuration ............................................................................... 4-544.14
4.13A.14 DME #2 Configuration ............................................................................... 4-544.16
4.13A.15 MLS #1 Configuration ............................................................................... 4-544.16
4.13A.16 MLS #2 Configuration ............................................................................... 4-544.17
4.13A.17 FMS #1 Configuration ............................................................................... 4-544.17
4.13A.18 FMS #2 Configuration ............................................................................... 4-544.18
4.13A.19 RNAV #1 Configuration ............................................................................ 4-544.19
4.13A.20 RNAV #2 Configuration ............................................................................ 4-544.19
4.13A.21 TACAN #1 Configuration .......................................................................... 4-544.20
4.13A.22 TACAN #2 Configuration .......................................................................... 4-544.20
4.13A.23 VNAV Configuration ................................................................................. 4-544.21
4.13A.24 Radar Altimeter Configuration .................................................................. 4-544.23
4.13A.25 AFCS Configuration ................................................................................. 4-544.23
4.13A.26 AFCS Command Bar Scaling Configuration ............................................ 4-544.24
4.13A.27 AFCS Mode Annunciator Configuration ................................................... 4-544.25
4.13A.28 Air Data Configuration .............................................................................. 4-544.25

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13A.29 Radar Type Configuration ........................................................................ 4-544.26

4.13A.30 Radar Control Panel Configuration .......................................................... 4-544.27
4.13A.31 Radar Indicator Configuration .................................................................. 4-544.27
4.13A.32 Checklist Configuration ............................................................................ 4-544.28
4.13A.33 Joystick Configuration .............................................................................. 4-544.28
4.13A.34 TCAS Configuration ................................................................................. 4-544.29
4.13A.35 Homing #1 Configuration ......................................................................... 4-544.30
4.13A.36 Homing #2 Configuration ......................................................................... 4-544.30
4.13A.37 Lightning Detection Configuration ............................................................ 4-544.30
4.13A.38 Hover Mode Available Configuration ........................................................ 4-544.31
4.13A.39 Cable Mode Available Configuration ........................................................ 4-544.31
4.13A.40 Variable LNAV Configuration .................................................................... 4-544.32
4.13A.41 Variable VNAV Configuration.................................................................... 4-544-32
4.13A.42 EGPWS Configuration .............................................................................. 4-544.33
4.13A.43 Vertical Scale Side Configuration ............................................................. 4-544.33
4.13A.44 Declutter Glideslope On Backcourse Configuration ................................. 4-544.34
4.13A.45 Fulltime FMS Map Configuration .............................................................. 4-544.34
4.13A.46 Display Wind Vector Configuration .......................................................... 4-544.35
4.13A.47 Display Drift Configuration ....................................................................... 4-544.35
4.13A.48 DG Mode Only Configuration ................................................................... 4-544.36
4.13A.49 DME Distance Only Configuration ........................................................... 4-544.36
4.13A.50 Radar Only Configuration ......................................................................... 4-544.37
4.13A.51 MFD NAV Control Configuration .............................................................. 4-544.37
4.13A.52 Display Heading Tape Configuration ....................................................... 4-544.38
4.13A.53 ADI Plane/Command Bars Configuration ................................................. 4-544.39
4.13A.54 Roll Indicator Configuration ...................................................................... 4-544.40
4.13A.55 Declutter Data On Unusual Attitude Configuration ................................... 4-544.40
4.13A.56 Category II Available Configuration .......................................................... 4-544.41
4.13A.57 Display ADI Perspective Lines ................................................................. 4-544.42
4.13A.58 Decision Height Selector Configuration ................................................... 4-544.42
4.13A.59 Select Control Panel Sync Configuration ................................................. 4-544.42
4.13A.60 Selected HDG Sync Configuration ........................................................... 4-544.43
4.13A.61 Selected CRS Sync Configuration ........................................................... 4-544.43
4.13A.62 North Up Map Configuration .................................................................... 4-544.44
4.13A.63 Vertical Pointer Type Configuration ......................................................... 4-544.45
4.13A.64 Display Messages for FMS Configuration ................................................ 4-544.46
4.13A.65 HDG Color Configuration ......................................................................... 4-544.46
4.13A.66 Command Bar Color Configuration .......................................................... 4-544.47
4.13A.67 Reversionary Mode Annunciation Configuration ...................................... 4-544.47
4.13A.68 LOC/MLS Deviation Display On EADI Configuration ................................ 4-544.48
4.13A.69 ADI ILS/MLS Source Configuration .......................................................... 4-544.49

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13A.70 Command Bar Filter Configuration ........................................................... 4-544.49
4.13A.71 MLS Vertical Annunciation Configuration ................................................. 4-544.50
4.13A.72 Datum Scaling Configuration .................................................................... 4-544.50
4.13A.73 HDG Fail Annunciation Configuration ...................................................... 4-544.51
4.13A.74 VNAV Approach Scale Configuration ....................................................... 4-544.52
4.13A.75 LNAV CRS Control Configuration ............................................................ 4-544.52
4.13A.76 SG #1 Side Configuration ......................................................................... 4-544.53
4.13A.77 Aircraft Symbol Configuration ................................................................... 4-544.53
4.13A.78 TACAN Annunciate Configuration............................................................. 4-544.54
4.13A.79 TCAS Intruder Displays Configuration ...................................................... 4-544.54
4.13A.80 CAT II Sensors Configuration ................................................................... 4-544.55
4.13A.81 Max Radar Scan Angle Configuration ....................................................... 4-544.55
4.13A.82 Radar SDI Configuration ........................................................................... 4-544.56
4.13A.83 Pitch Offset Sync Configuration ................................................................ 4-544.57
4.13A.84 DME Hold Distance With ADF RMI Configuration .................................... 4-544.58
4.13A.85 FMS Output Bus Configuration ................................................................. 4-544.58
4.13A.86 LNAV VERT APR Configuration ............................................................... 4-544.59
4.13A.87 L/VNAV VERT APR Configuration ............................................................ 4-544.60
4.13A.88 LP VERT APR Configuration .................................................................... 4-544.60
4.13A.89 LPV VERT APR Configuration .................................................................. 4-544.61
4.13A.90 LNAV Select Out Configuration................................................................. 4-544.62
4.13A.91 Exiting Configuration ................................................................................ 4-544.63
4.13B CONFIGURATION WITH -16 VERSION SOFTWARE ............................ 4-544.65
4.13B.1 Initial Set Up ............................................................................................. 4-544.67
4.13B.2 Displaying The Configuration Menu Page ................................................ 4-544.68
4.13B.3 Symbol Generator Configuration .............................................................. 4-544.70
4.13B.4 Display Configuration ............................................................................... 4-544.71
4.13B.5 Display Unit Type Configuration ............................................................... 4-544.72
4.13B.6 Attitude/HDG #1 Configuration ................................................................. 4-544.72
4.13B.7 Attitude/HDG #2 Configuration ................................................................. 4-544.73
4.13B.8 Rate Of Turn Configuration ...................................................................... 4-544.74
4.13B.9 ADF #1 Configuration ............................................................................... 4-544.75
4.13B.10 ADF #2 Configuration ............................................................................... 4-544.76
4.13B.11 VOR/ILS #1 Configuration ........................................................................ 4-544.76
4.13B.12 VOR/ILS #2 Configuration ........................................................................ 4-544.77
4.13B.13 DME #1 Configuration ............................................................................... 4-544.78
4.13B.14 DME #2 Configuration ............................................................................... 4-544.80
4.13B.15 MLS #1 Configuration ............................................................................... 4-544.80
4.13B.16 MLS #2 Configuration ............................................................................... 4-544.81
4.13B.17 FMS #1 Configuration ............................................................................... 4-544.82
4.13B.18 FMS #2 Configuration ............................................................................... 4-544.82
4.13B.19 RNAV #1 Configuration ............................................................................ 4-544.83

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13B.20 RNAV #2 Configuration ............................................................................ 4-544.83

4.13B.21 TACAN #1 Configuration .......................................................................... 4-544.84
4.13B.22 TACAN #2 Configuration .......................................................................... 4-544.85
4.13B.23 VNAV Configuration ................................................................................. 4-544.85
4.13B.24 Radar Altimeter Configuration .................................................................. 4-544.87
4.13B.25 AFCS Configuration ................................................................................. 4-544.87
4.13B.26 AFCS Command Bar Scaling Configuration ............................................ 4-544.88
4.13B.27 AFCS Mode Annunciator Configuration ................................................... 4-544.89
4.13B.28 Air Data Configuration .............................................................................. 4-544.89
4.13B.29 Radar Type Configuration ........................................................................ 4-544.90
4.13B.30 Radar Control Panel Configuration .......................................................... 4-544.91
4.13B.31 Radar Indicator Configuration .................................................................. 4-544.91
4.13B.32 Checklist Configuration ............................................................................ 4-544.92
4.13B.33 Joystick Configuration .............................................................................. 4-544.92
4.13B.34 TCAS Configuration ................................................................................. 4-544.93
4.13B.35 Homing #1 Configuration ......................................................................... 4-544.94
4.13B.36 Homing #2 Configuration ......................................................................... 4-544.94
4.13B.37 Lightning Detection Configuration ............................................................ 4-544.94
4.13B.38 Hover Mode Available Configuration ........................................................ 4-544.95
4.13B.39 Cable Mode Available Configuration ........................................................ 4-544.95
4.13B.40 Variable LNAV Configuration .................................................................... 4-544.96
4.13B.41 Variable VNAV Configuration.................................................................... 4-544-96
4.13B.42 EGPWS Configuration .............................................................................. 4-544.97
4.13B.43 Vertical Scale Side Configuration ............................................................. 4-544.97
4.13B.44 Declutter Glideslope On Backcourse Configuration ................................. 4-544.98
4.13B.45 Fulltime FMS Map Configuration .............................................................. 4-544.99
4.13B.46 Display Wind Vector Configuration .......................................................... 4-544.99
4.13B.47 Display Drift Configuration ..................................................................... 4-544.100
4.13B.48 DG Mode Only Configuration ................................................................. 4-544.100
4.13B.49 DME Distance Only Configuration ......................................................... 4-544.101
4.13B.50 Radar Only Configuration ....................................................................... 4-544.101
4.13B.51 MFD NAV Control Configuration ............................................................ 4-544.102
4.13B.52 Display Heading Tape Configuration ..................................................... 4-544.102
4.13B.53 ADI Plane/Command Bars Configuration ............................................... 4-544.103
4.13B.54 Roll Indicator Configuration .................................................................... 4-544.104
4.13B.55 Declutter Data On Unusual Attitude Configuration ................................. 4-544.105
4.13B.56 Category II Available Configuration ........................................................ 4-544.105
4.13B.57 Display ADI Perspective Lines ............................................................... 4-544.106
4.13B.58 Decision Height Selector Configuration ................................................. 4-544.106
4.13B.59 Select Control Panel Sync Configuration ............................................... 4-544.107
4.13B.60 Selected HDG Sync Configuration ......................................................... 4-544.107

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13B.61 Selected CRS Sync Configuration ......................................................... 4-544.108
4.13B.62 North Up Map Configuration .................................................................. 4-544.108
4.13B.63 Vertical Pointer Type Configuration ....................................................... 4-544.109
4.13B.64 Display Messages for FMS Configuration .............................................. 4-544.110
4.13B.65 HDG Color Configuration ....................................................................... 4-544.111
4.13B.66 Command Bar Color Configuration ........................................................ 4-544.111
4.13B.67 Reversionary Mode Annunciation Configuration .................................... 4-544.112
4.13B.68 LOC/MLS Deviation Display On EADI Configuration .............................. 4-544.112
4.13B.69 ADI ILS/MLS Source Configuration ........................................................ 4-544.113
4.13B.70 Command Bar Filter Configuration ......................................................... 4-544.113
4.13B.71 MLS Vertical Annunciation Configuration ............................................... 4-544.114
4.13B.72 Datum Scaling Configuration .................................................................. 4-544.114
4.13B.73 HDG Fail Annunciation Configuration .................................................... 4-544.116
4.13B.74 VNAV Approach Scale Configuration ..................................................... 4-544.116
4.13B.75 LNAV CRS Control Configuration .......................................................... 4-544.116
4.13B.76 SG #1 Side Configuration ....................................................................... 4-544.117
4.13B.77 Aircraft Symbol Configuration ................................................................. 4-544.117
4.13B.78 TACAN Annunciate Configuration........................................................... 4-544.118
4.13B.79 TCAS Intruder Displays Configuration .................................................... 4-544.118
4.13B.80 CAT II Sensors Configuration ................................................................. 4-544.119
4.13B.81 Max Radar Scan Angle Configuration ..................................................... 4-544.120
4.13B.82 Radar SDI Configuration ......................................................................... 4-544.120
4.13B.83 Pitch Offset Sync Configuration .............................................................. 4-544.121
4.13B.84 DME Hold Distance With ADF RMI Configuration .................................. 4-544.122
4.13B.85 FMS Output Bus Configuration ............................................................... 4-544.123
4.13B.86 LNAV VERT APR Configuration ............................................................. 4-544.123
4.13B.87 L/VNAV VERT APR Configuration .......................................................... 4-544.124
4.13B.88 LP VERT APR Configuration .................................................................. 4-544.125
4.13B.89 LPV VERT APR Configuration ................................................................ 4-544.125
4.13B.90 LNAV Select Out Configuration............................................................... 4-544.126
4.13B.91 Exiting Configuration .............................................................................. 4-544.127
4.14.1 Initial Set Up .................................................................................................. 4-547

EFS 40/EFS 50

4.14.44 Display Drift Angle Configuration .................................................................. 4-577

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.14.81 NAV Select Display Configuration Description............................................... 4-597
4.15.1 Initial Set Up .................................................................................................. 4-601

EFS 40/EFS 50

4.15.45 Display Drift Angle Configuration .................................................................. 4-631

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.16 POST INSTALLATION KA 163A CHECK ..................................................... 4-655
4.17 GROUND CHECKOUT ................................................................................. 4-656
4.17.1 Startup ........................................................................................................... 4-656
4.17.2 SG Cooling .................................................................................................... 4-656
4.17.3 DU Cooling .................................................................................................... 4-656

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.17.4 System Controls Check ................................................................................. 4-656

4.17.5 Operational Check ........................................................................................ 4-661
4.18 FLIGHT CHECKS ......................................................................................... 4-666
4.18.1 Preflight Check Procedure ............................................................................ 4-667
4.18.2 Enroute Operation ......................................................................................... 4-667
4.18.3 Approach Operation ...................................................................................... 4-668
SECTION IV
Figure Page
4-1 EFS 40/EFS 50 Test Page................................................................................. 4-3
4-2 Menu and Item Buttons ...................................................................................... 4-4
4-3 EFS 40/EFS 50 Test Page............................................................................. 4-222
4-4 Menu and Item Buttons .................................................................................. 4-222
4-5 EFS 40/EFS 50 Test Page............................................................................. 4-275
4-7 EFS 40/EFS 50 Test Page............................................................................. 4-329
4-9 EFS 40/EFS 50 Test Page............................................................................. 4-383
4-11 EFS 40/EFS 50 Test Page ............................................................................. 4-437
4-13 EFS 40/EFS 50 Test Page ............................................................................. 4-492
4-14A EFS 40/EFS 50 Test Page .......................................................................... 4-544.4
4-14B Menu and Item Buttons ............................................................................... 4-544.5
4-14C EFS 40/EFS 50 Test Page........................................................................ 4-544.68
4-14D Menu and Item Buttons ............................................................................. 4-544.69
4-15 EFS 40/EFS 50 Test Page ............................................................................. 4-548
4-17 EFS 40/EFS 50 Test Page ............................................................................. 4-602
4-19 KA 163A AMP Board Assembly ..................................................................... 4-655
SECTION V
CERTIFICATION
Paragraph Page
5.1 INTRODUCTION................................................................................................ 5-1
5.2 CERTIFICATION PROCEDURE ....................................................................... 5-1

EFS 40/EFS 50
5.2.1 Equipment Compatibility ................................................................................... 5-1

5.2.2 Equipment Location ........................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.3 Equipment Cooling Requirements ..................................................................... 5-1
5.2.4 FAA Requirements ............................................................................................. 5-1
5.2.5 FAA Form 337.................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2.6 Flight Manual Revision....................................................................................... 5-2
5.3 TEMPERATURE SURVEY TEST PROCEDURE .............................................. 5-2
5.3.1 Temperature Test Objectives ............................................................................. 5-2
5.3.2 Reference Documents ....................................................................................... 5-3
5.3.3 Temperature Test Instrumentation ..................................................................... 5-3
5.3.4 Short Term Temperature Limit (Ground Test).................................................... 5-4
5.3.5 Long Term Temperature Limit (Flight Test) ....................................................... 5-6
5.3.6 Sample Temperature Survey Test ..................................................................... 5-9
SECTION V
Figure Page
5-1 Pressure Altitude Vs. Outside Air Temperature Survey Graph ........................ 5-14
5-2 SG 465 Temperature Test Point Location ....................................................... 5-15
5-3 SG 464 Temperature Test Point Location ....................................................... 5-16
5-4 ED 461/ED 462 Temperature Test Point Location .......................................... 5-17
5-5 ED 551/ED 551A Temperature Test Point Location ....................................... 5-18
SECTION V
LIST OF TABLES
Table Page
5-1 Sample Temperature Survey Test Data Sheet ................................................ 5-10
5-2 Sample Short Term TC Calculations (SG 465) ................................................ 5-11
5-3 Sample Short Term TC Calculations (ED 461) ................................................ 5-11
5-4 Sample Long Term TA Calculations (SG 465) ................................................ 5-12
5-5 Sample Long Term TAMAX Calculations (SG 465) .......................................... 5-12
5-6 Sample Long Term TC Calculations (SG 465) ................................................ 5-13
5-7 Sample Long Term TC Calculations (ED 461) ................................................ 5-13

EFS 40/EFS 50
SECTION VI
OPERATION
Page
OPERATION ...................................................................................................... 6-1
APPENDIX A
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALIFICATION FORMS
Page
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALIFICATION FORMS..................................................A-1
APPENDIX A
Figure Page
A-1 CP 113F Radar Control Panel EQF ..................................................................A-3
A-2 KA 163A Pitch and Roll Command Adapter EQF .............................................A-5
A-3 ED 461 Electronic Display EQF ........................................................................A-7
A-4 ED 461 Electronic Display EQF ........................................................................A-9
A-5 ED 462 Electronic Display EQF ......................................................................A-11
A-6 ED 462 Electronic Display EQF ......................................................................A-13
A-7 SU 463 EFIS Reversionary Switching Unit EQF .............................................A-15
A-8 SG 464 Symbol Generator EQF .....................................................................A-17
A-12 CP 466A/CP 466B Control Panel EQF ...........................................................A-25
A-13 CP 467/CP 468 Control Panel EQF ................................................................A-27
A-14 CP 467/CP 468 Control Panel EQF ................................................................A-29
A-15 CP 469 Control Panel EQF .............................................................................A-31
A-16 CP 469A Control Panel EQF ...........................................................................A-33
A-17 CP 470 Control Panel EQF .............................................................................A-35
A-18 ED 551/ED 551A Electronic Display EQF .......................................................A-37
A-19 ED 551/ED 551A Electronic Display EQF .......................................................A-39

EFS 40/EFS 50
APPENDIX B
SAMPLE ATTACHMENT TO FAA FORM 337
Page
SAMPLE ATTACHMENT TO FAA FORM 337 ..................................................B-1
APPENDIX C
FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENT (GENERIC EXAMPLE)
Page
FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENT (GENERIC EXAMPLE) ..............................C-1
APPENDIX C
Figure Page
C-1 EHI 40 Controls and Indicators ED 461 Electronic Display Unit .......................C-5

EFS 40/EFS 50
SECTION I
GENERAL INFORMATION
1.0 INTRODUCTION
This manual provides information about the physical, mechanical, and electrical characteristics of
the EFS 40/EFS 50 Electronic Flight Instrument System as well as information to aid in the instal-
lation, system planning, and interfacing of the system. Additionally, a post-installation checkout
procedure is included in this manual. The EFS 40/EFS 50 is designed to provide a large variety of
interconnection capabilities without the need for numerous versions. As such, interfacing external
units with the system is a complex process. This manual gives the installer, the technician, and
the user of the EFS 40/EFS 50 a tool in their individual encounters with the system.
The EHI 40/EHI 50 System is an EHSI only system. The EFS 40/EFS 50 System includes the
EHSI, EADI, and optional MFD displays.
For information on individual units in the EHI 40/EHI 50 and EFS 40/EFS 50 Systems refer to the
following manuals:
UNIT DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER
CP 113F RADAR CONTROL PANEL 006-05314-00XX

ED 461 EHSI DISPLAY 006-05230-00XX
ED 462 EHSI/EADI DISPLAY 006-05230-00XX
SU 463 EFIS SWITCHING UNIT 006-05322-00XX
SG 464 SYMBOL GENERATOR 006-05232-00XX
SG 465 SYMBOL GENERATOR 006-05232-00XX
CP 466A, CP 466B RADAR CONTROL PANEL 006-05231-00XX
CP 467, CP 468 EFIS CONTROL PANEL 006-05234-00XX
CP 469 MFD CONTROL PANEL 006-05234-00XX
CP 470 EFIS CONTROL PANEL 006-05234-00XX
ED 551, ED 551A EFIS DISPLAY UNIT 006-05240-00XX
For information on operation of the EHI 40/EHI 50, EFS 40/EFS 50 Systems, refer to the EFS 40/
EFS 50 Pilot’s Guide P/N 006-08701-0000.
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF UNITS
1.1.1 EFS 40/EFS 50 SYSTEM
Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Page 1-1

BENDIX/KING EFS 40/EFS 50
The EFS 40/EFS 50 is an Electronic Flight Instrumentation System (EFIS) that uses cathode ray
tubes (CRT’s) to display required flight information. The EFS 40 system uses a 4” cathode ray tube
while the EFS 50 system uses a 5” cathode ray tube. Information processed by a Symbol Gener-
ator (SG) is displayed in a multi color graphic form on the Electronic Attitude Director Indicator
(EADI), the Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator (EHSI), and a Multifunction Display (MFD).
Weather radar information can also be displayed on either the EHSI or the MFD. The EFS 40/EFS
50 System processes several types of information such as aircraft attitude, navigation computa-
tions, heading, and weather radar.
Some of the advanced features of the EFS 40/EFS 50 system include:
1.1.1.A. Presentation of attitude, navigation, heading and radar Information on EHSI and EADI
CRT displays as applicable.
1.1.1.B. Display of flight director mode annunciations.
1.1.1.C. Display of radio altimeter (RA) and decision height (DH) information.
1.1.1.D. Presentation of the glideslope (GS) and Information on a black background for greater
contrast and readability.
1.1.1.E. 85° sector and 360° EHSI formats that can display weather and NAV map data using
up to two navigation sources and distance information from up to three sources.
1.1.1.F. The ability to declutter displays for efficient interpretation of data.
1.1.1.G. The EHSI/EADI version uses dual I/O, stroker and power supplies for maximum dis-
play capability and redundant display of critical attitude.
1.1.1.H. A cross comparator system between the pilot’s and co-pilot’s displays and continuous
diagnostic testing which identifies sensor failures and flags the displays.
1.1.1.I. Reversionary modes in the event of the failure of one of the displays to allow operation
of the system to continue.
1.1.1.J. Advanced maintenance displays to enhance checkout and troubleshooting.
1.1.2 SG 464, SG 465 SYMBOL GENERATORS
The SG 464 (no longer available) and SG 465 Symbol Generators are remote mounted units
which receive information from aircraft attitude, navigation, guidance, and weather radar system
sources. This information is then processed for display on CRT display units in the form of X/Y
deflection drive signals and red-green-blue video signals. The SG 465 is housed in an ARINC 3/
8 short enclosure. The SG 464 is housed in an ARINC 1/4 short enclosure and is not ADI
equipped. The Symbol Generator is used in conjunction with various configurations with one or
two ED 461, ED 462 or ED 551, ED 551A display units, and the CP 467, CP 468, CP 469, CP
469A, or CP 470 control panels depending on how the installation is configured. Refer to Section
III for information regarding system planning. Both the SG 464 and the SG 465 require forced-air
cooling.
1.1.3 ED 461, ED 462 DISPLAYS
The ED 461 and ED 462 are panel-mounted units used to display flight information. Each unit uses
a four inch color CRT and converts X/Y axis deflection signals, and red-green-blue video signals
from the Symbol Generators. The ED 461 is used as a Horizontal Situation Indicator (EHSI) and
Page 1-2 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Rev 7, Nov/2000

has front panel pushbutton controls, course and heading controls, and a brightness control. The
ED 462 has no front panel controls and can be used as either an EHSI or EADI. When used as
an EADI, the ED 462 will have inclinometer mounted on its front panel.
1.1.4 ED 551, ED 551A DISPLAYS
The ED 551 (no longer available) and ED 551A are panel-mounted units used to display flight in-
formation. Each unit uses a five inch color CRT and converts X/Y axis deflections signals, and red-
green-blue video signals from the Symbol Generators. The ED 551, ED 551A have no front panel
controls and can be used as an EHSI, EADI, or an MFD. When used as an EADI an inclinometer
is mounted on its front panel. The ED 551A draws a picture using larger characters and symbols,
when compared to the ED 551.
1.1.5 CP 113F, CP 466A, CP 466B, CP 467, CP 468, CP 469, CP 469A, CP 470 CONTROL PAN-
ELS
The CP 113F (no longer available), CP 466A, CP 466B, CP 467, CP 468, CP 469 and CP 470 are
panel-mounted units used to control certain functions of the EFS 40/EFS 50 system. The CP 467
is used when the system is configured as an ADI/HSI system and controls system operating mode,
the radar altimeter, and testing the EFS 40/EFS 50 and the radio altimeter. This unit also has con-
trols for decision height (DH) selection, course selection, heading selection and ADI/HSI bright-
ness. The CP 468 can be used for HSI only systems and as such does not control DH select, radio
altimeter test, or ADI brightness. Versions of the CP 468 with dual brightness controls can be used
with 2-tube EFS 40 (dual ED 462s) or EFS 50 systems that do not require radio altimeter controls.
When the CP 468 is used for an ADI/HSI system a CP 470 is used to provide the DH select, radio
altimeter test, and ADI brightness controls. The CP 469 is used when the system is configured as
an ADI/HSI/MFD system. It provides controls for NAV source selection, display format and course
selection. The CP 469A provides the same functions as the CP 469 plus TCAS select button, Joy-
stick, Joystick ENTER button, Checklist button, and check list memory. Weather radar and radar
control functions and mode selections is performed by the CP 113F, or the CP 466A or CP 466B,
which are independent weather radar control panels.
1.2 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
TABLE 1-1 SG 464 SYMBOL GENERATOR
SG 464 SYMBOL GENERATOR

TSO COMPLIANCE: TSO C113
066-04020-01XX,-02XX RTCA DO-160B. See Appendix A.
RTCA DO-178A Level 2 Software.
APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS:
Compass System: ARINC 407 and ARINC 407-1
Digital I/O: ARINC 429
Rev 7, Nov/2000 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Page 1-3


Weather Radar Input: ARINC 708 and ARINC 553
Radio Altitude: ARINC 552A
DME Input: ARINC 568. Bendix/King Serial DME Specification

120-08013-0000.
KNS 81 Interface Bus: Bendix/King Bus Specification 001-00326-0000.
PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS: See Figure 2-1, Figure 2-2.
Height: Without spacers 7.702 in. (19.563 cm.) nominal
Height: With Fan kit 071-04057-0000 spacers 9.452 in. (24.008 cm.) nominal
Height: With KA 33 kit 071-04037-0001 spacers 8.452 in. (21.46 cm.) nominal
Width: 2.509 in. (6.373 cm.) nominal
Length: With Fan kit 071-04057-0000 (Non-HIRF) 16.84 in. (42.78 cm.) approx.
Length: With Fan kit 071-04057-0000 (HIRF) 16.87 in. (42.854 cm.) nominal
Length: With KA 33 kit 071-04037-0001 (Non-HIRF) 18.12 in. (46.032 cm.) nominal
Length: With KA 33 kit 071-04037-0001 (HIRF) 18.10 in. (45.98 cm.) nominal
WEIGHT: See Figure 2-1, Figure 2-2.
066-04020-01XX version: 8.20 lbs. (3.7 kg.) nominal
With Installation kit 050-02718-0000 (Non-HIRF) add: 1.10 lbs. (0.5 kg.) nominal
With Installation kit 050-02718-0001 (HIRF) add: 1.4 lbs. (0.64 kg.) nominal
With Fan kit 071-04057-0000 add: 0.75 lbs. (0.34 kg.) nominal
With KA 33 kit 071-04037-0001 add: 0.37 lbs. (0.17 kg.) nominal
TEMPERATURE RANGE: -55° C to +70° C. See Appendix A.
ALTITUDE: 55,000 ft. max.
POWER REQUIREMENTS: +27.5, ±0.5 Vdc:
-01XX,-11XX -02XX,-12XX
With four inch displays no Super flags 3.2 amps max. 3.0 amps max.
With five inch displays no Super Flags 1.1 amps max. 1.0 amps max.


066-04021-01XX,-02XX,-04XX,-05XX RTCA DO-160B. See Appendix A.
066-04021-11XX,-12XX,-14XX,-15XX RTCA DO-160B. See Appendix A.
RTCA DO-178A Level 2 Software
APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS:
Compass System: ARINC 407 and ARINC 407-1
Digital I/O: ARINC 429
Weather Radar Input: ARINC 708 and ARINC 553
Radio Altitude: ARINC 552A
DME Input: ARINC 568. Bendix/King Serial DME Specification

120-08013-0000.
KNS 81: Bendix/King Bus Specification 001-00326-0000
PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS: See Figure 2-3, Figure 2-3A, Figure 2-4, Figure 2-5,
Figure 2-6.
Height: Without Fan spacers 8.21 in. (20.864 cm.) nominal
Height: With Fan spacers 9.46 in. (24.028 cm.) nominal
Height: With High Altitude Fan spacers 9.96 in. (25.309 cm.) nominal
Length: Long Rack (Non-HIRF and HIRF) 18.29 in. (46.457 cm.) nominal
Length: Short Rack (Non-HIRF) 15.59 in. (39.588 cm.) nominal
Length: Short Rack (HIRF) 16.96 in. (43.073 cm.) nominal
WEIGHT: See Figure 2-3, Figure 2-3A, Figure 2-4, Figure 2-5,
Figure 2-6.
066-04021-01XX 13.0 lbs. (5.9 kg.) nominal
066-04021-02XX 13.4 lbs. (6.1 kg.) nominal
066-04021-04XX 10.4 lbs. (4.7 kg.) nominal
066-04021-05XX 10.0 lbs. (4.5 kg.) nominal
066-04021-11XX 13.0 lbs. (5.9 kg.) nominal
066-04021-12XX 13.4 lbs. (6.1 kg.) nominal
066-04021-14XX 10.4 lbs. (4.7 kg.) nominal
066-04021-15XX 10.0 lbs. (4.5 kg.) nominal


066-04021-16XX 13.0 lbs. (5.9 kg.) nominal
066-04021-17XX 13.0 lbs. (5.9 kg.) nominal
066-04021-50XX 13.0 lbs. (5.9 kg.) nominal
Long Rack (Non-HIRF) add: 2.1 lbs. (0.95 kg.) nominal
Short Rack (Non-HIRF) add: 1.9 lbs. (0.86 kg.) nominal
Long Rack (HIRF) add: 2.6 lbs. (1.18 kg.) nominal
Short Rack (HIRF) add: 2.4 lbs. (1.09 kg.) nominal
Rack Mounted Fan 071-04056-0000 add: 0.33 lbs. (0.15 kg.) approx.
High Altitude Rack Mounted Fan add: 0.74 lbs. (0.34 kg.) nominal
Two 1.25 in. 075-05087-0001 spacers add: 0.38 lbs. (0.18 kg.) nominal
Two 1.75 in. 075-05111-0002 spacers add: 0.68 lbs. (0.30 kg.) nominal
POWER REQUIREMENTS: 26 Vac, 400 Hz, at 10 mA maximum
+27.5. ± 0.5 Vdc:
HSI BUS HSI BUS ADI BUS
-01XX,-11XX -02XX,-12XX -01XX,-11XX
-04XX,-14XX -05XX,-15XX -02XX,-12XX
-16XX,-17XX -16XX,-17XX
-50XX -50XX
With four inch displays no Super flags 3.2 amps max. 3.0 amps max. 2.6 amps max.
With five inch displays no Super Flags 1.1 amps max. 1.0 amps max. 0.8 amps max.
TABLE 1-3 ED 461 EHSI DISPLAY
ED 461 EHSI DISPLAY

TSO COMPLIANCE: TSO C113. SAE AS-8034.
066-03123-0100,-0200,-0300,-0400,-0500,-0600, RTCA DO-160B. See Appendix A.

-0700,-0800
066-03123-1100,-1200,-1300,-1400,-1500,-1600, RTCA DO-160B. See Appendix A.

-1700,-1800
PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS: (Without Rack) See Figure 2-7.

TABLE 1-3 ED 461 EHSI DISPLAY
ED 461 EHSI DISPLAY

Height: (Front Panel) 4.175 in. (10.604 cm.) max.
Width: (Front Panel) 4.175 in. (10.604 cm.) max.
Length: (With connector clearance) 11.6 in. (29.464 cm.) nominal
PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS: (With Rack) See Figure 2-8.
WEIGHT: (Without Rack) 5.4 lbs. (2.45 kg.) nominal. See Figure 2-7.
WEIGHT: (With Rack) 6.1 lbs. (2.77 kg.) nominal. See Figure 2-8.
POWER REQUIREMENTS: Supplied by the SG 465.
LIGHTING:
066-03123-0200,-0400,-0600,-0800, 28 Vdc 0.15 A maximum

066-03123-1200,-1400,-1600,-1800
066-03123-0100,-0300,-0500,-0700, 5 Vac/ 5 Vdc 0.89 A maximum

066-03123-1100,-1300,-1500,-1700
TABLE 1-4 ED 462 EADI/EHSI DISPLAY
ED 462 EADI/EHSI DISPLAY

066-03125-0100,-0200,-0300,-0400,-0500,-0600, RTCA DO-160B See Appendix A

-0700,-0800

-1700,-1800

-2700,-2800

-3700,-3800
PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS: (With Rack) See Figure 2-8.

TABLE 1-4 ED 462 EADI/EHSI DISPLAY
ED 462 EADI/EHSI DISPLAY

PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS: (Without Rack) See Figure 2-9, Figure 2-10.
Length: (With connector clearance) 11.6 in. (29.464) nominal
WEIGHT: (With Rack) 6.1 lbs. (2.77 kg.) nominal. See Figure 2-8.
WEIGHT: (Without Rack) 5.4 lbs. (2.45 kg.) nominal. See Figure 2-9, Figure 2-
10.
POWER REQUIREMENTS: Supplied by the symbol generator
LIGHTING:
066-03125-0200,-0400,-0600,-0800, 28 Vdc 0.15 A Maximum

066-03125-1200,-1400,-1600,-1800,
066-03125-2200,-2400,-2600,-2800,
066-03125-3200,-3400,-2300,-3800,
066-03125-0100,-0300,-0500,-0700, 5 Vac/ 5 Vdc 0.89 A Maximum

066-03125-1100,-1300,-1500,-1700,
066-03125-2100,-2300,-2500,-2700,
066-03125-3100,-3300,-3500,-3700,
TABLE 1-5 ED 551, ED 551A EADI/EHSI DISPLAYS
ED 551, ED 551A EADI/EHSI DISPLAYS

TSO, COMPLIANCE: TSO C113. SAE AS-8034.
066-03137-0100,-0200,-0300,-0400 RTCA DO-160B. See Appendix A.
PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS: See Figure 2-11.
Height: (Front panel) 4.92 in. (12.484 cm.) max.
Width: (Front panel) 5.27 in. (13.386 cm.) max.
Length: (Without HIRF backshell) 11.75 in. (29.845 cm.) nominal
Length: (With 90 deg. HIRF backshell) 12.10 in. (30.734 cm.) nominal
Length: (With straight HIRF backshell) 12.50 in. (31.75 cm.) nominal
WEIGHT: (With Rack, Without Kit) 9.0 lbs. (4.1 kg.) nominal. See Figure 2-11.

TABLE 1-5 ED 551, ED 551A EADI/EHSI DISPLAYS
ED 551, ED 551A EADI/EHSI DISPLAYS

POWER REQUIREMENTS: 27.5 Vdc @ 2 Amps max.
LIGHTING:
066-03137-0200,-0400,-1200,-1400, 28 Vdc 0.15 A Maximum

066-03137-2200,-2400,-3200,-3400
066-03137-0100,-0300,-1100,-1300, 5 Vac/ 5 Vdc 0.89 A Maximum

066-03137-2100,-2300,-3100,-3300,-3600
TABLE 1-6 CP 113F CONTROL PANEL
CP 113F CONTROL PANEL

TSO COMPLIANCE: TSO C63c
071-01337-0010,-0011 RTCA DO-160A. See Appendix A.
Length: (Without connector) 6.52 in. (16.56 cm.) nominal
Length: (With connector) 8.72 in. (22.14 cm.) nominal
WEIGHT: 1.50 lbs. (0.68 kg.) nominal. See Figure 2-12.
POWER REQUIREMENTS: Supplied by radar or radar circuit breaker.
LIGHTING: +27.5 ± 0.5 Vdc @ 0.1 Amp max continuous, 0.5 amp
surge.
TABLE 1-7 CP 466A, CP 466B CONTROL PANELS
CP 466A, CP 466B CONTROL PANELS

TSO COMPLIANCE: TSO C63c
071-01438-0101,-0201,-0301,-0401,-0501,-0601, RTCA DO-160A. See Appendix A.

-0701,-0801

TABLE 1-7 CP 466A, CP 466B CONTROL PANELS
CP 466A, CP 466B CONTROL PANELS

-0702,-0802,-0902,-1002,-1102,-1202

-0701,-0801

-0702,-0802,-0902,-1002,-1102,-1202
PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS:
Height: (Front panel) 2.28 in. (5.79 cm.) approx.
Width: (Front panel) 5.78 in. (14.68 cm.) approx.
Length: (With connector) 8.72 in. (22.15 cm.) approx.
WEIGHT: 1.70 lbs. (0.78 kg.) nominal
POWER REQUIREMENTS: +18.0 to +33.0 Vdc supplied by radar or radar circuit

breaker.
Unit power required when using 28 Vdc Lighting bus +27.5 ± 0.5 Vdc @ 0.1 amp max. continuous, 0.5 amp
surge.
Unit power required when using 5 Vac Lighting bus +27.5 ± 0.5 Vdc @ 0.36 amp max. continuous, 1.0
amp surge.
LIGHTING: 28 Vdc or 5 Vac dimmer bus.
TABLE 1-8 CP 467 CONTROL PANEL
CP 467 CONTROL PANEL

071-01439-0100,-0200,-0300,-0400,-0500,-0600 RTCA DO-160B. See Appendix A.
071-01439-3100,-3200 RTCA DO-160B. See Appendix A.
Height: (Front panel) 1.87 in. (4.75 cm.) nominal
Width: (Front panel) 5.74 in. (14.58 cm.) nominal
Length: 3.312 in. (8.412 cm.) nominal


POWER REQUIREMENTS:
All unit versions require: +7 ± 0.2 Vdc @ 0.040 amps max. supplied by the
symbol generator.
Units 071-01439-3100 and above also require: +27.5 ± 0.5 Vdc @ 0.070 amps max.
LIGHTING:
071-01439-0100,-0300 5 Vdc @ 0.319, +0.040/ -0.090 A
071-01439-0200,-0400 28 Vdc @ 0.074, +0.010/ -0.025 A
071-01439-0500,-0600 5 Vac @ 0.285, +0.030/ -0.085 A
071-01439-3100,-3200,-3300,-3400,-3500,-3600 5 Vdc, 28 Vdc, or 5 Vac Lighting Bus.

TSO COMPLIANCE: TSO C113. SAE AS-8034b.
Height: (Front Panel) 1.87 in. (4.75 cm.) nominal
Width: (Front Panel) 5.74 in. (14.58 cm.) nominal
POWER REQUIREMENTS:
All unit versions require: +7 ± 0.2 Vdc @ 0.040 amps max. supplied by the
symbol generator.
Units 071-01439-4100 and above also require: +27.5 ± 0.5 Vdc @ 0.070 amps max.
LIGHTING:
071-01439-1100,-1300,-2100,-2300 5 Vdc @ 0.319 +0.040/ -0.090 A
071-01439-1200,-1400,-2200,-2400 28 Vdc @ 0.74, +0.010/ -0.025 A
071-01439-1500,-1600,-2500,-2600 5 Vac @ 0.285, +0.030/ -0.085 A


071-01439-4100,-4200,-4300,-4400 5 Vdc, 28 Vdc, or 5 Vac Lighting Bus.

POWER REQUIREMENTS: +7 ± 0.2 Vdc @ 0.040 amps max. supplied by the

symbol generator.
+27.5 ± 0.5 Vdc @ 0.75 amps continuous, 0.85 amp

surge.
LIGHTING: 5 Vdc, 28 Vdc, or 5 Vac Lighting Bus.
TABLE 1-11 CP 469A CONTROL PANEL
CP 469A CONTROL PANEL


TABLE 1-11 CP 469A CONTROL PANEL
CP 469A CONTROL PANEL

POWER REQUIREMENTS: +27.5 ± 0.5 Vdc @ 1.2 amps max. continuous, 2.0 A
surge.
LIGHTING OPTIONS: +28 Vdc @ 200 uA max.
+5 Vdc @ 25 uA max.
5 Vac @ 25 uA max.

Height (Front Panel): 1.00 in. (2.54 cm.) nominal
Width (Front Panel): 3.25 in. (8.26 cm.) nominal
Length (With connector): 4.34 in. (11.03 cm.) nominal
POWER REQUIREMENTS: NO POWER REQUIRED.
LIGHTING:
071-01517-0100,-0300 5 Vac/ +5 Vdc @ 0.24 ± 0.05 amps
071-01517-0200,-0400 +28 Vdc @ 0.08 ± 0.16 amps
TABLE 1-13 KA 33 COOLING BLOWER
KA 33 COOLING BLOWER
PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS:
071-04037-0001: See Figure 2-17.
Height: 5.275 in. (13.40 cm.) nominal
Weight: 1.25 lbs. (0.57 kg.) nominal
071-04037-0002: See Figure 2-18.

TABLE 1-13 KA 33 COOLING BLOWER
KA 33 COOLING BLOWER
Weight: 1.21 lbs. (0.55 kg.) nominal
POWER REQUIREMENTS: 28 Vdc at 500 mA maximum
COOLING CAPACITY:
071-04037-0001 36, ± 3 CFM 6 ports
071-04037-0002 36, ± 3 CFM 2 ports
TABLE 1-14 KA 163A PITCH AND ROLL COMMAND ADAPTER
KA 163A PITCH AND ROLL COMMAND ADAPTER

TSO COMPLIANCE: See Appendix A.
P/N 071-01303-0001
MAXIMUM ALTITUDE: 55,000 ft. max.
OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE: -55° C to +70° C. See Appendix A.
POWER REQUIREMENTS: 26 Vac, 400 Hz. 0.15 amps. max.
ELECTRICAL:
Input: DC Pitch and Roll Command from various flight direc-

tors.
Output: DC Pitch and Roll Command to EFS 40/EFS 50 (400

mVdc/degree)
TABLE 1-15 SU 463 EFIS REVERSIONARY SWITCHING UNIT
SU 463 EFIS REVERSIONARY SWITCHING UNIT


TABLE 1-15 SU 463 EFIS REVERSIONARY SWITCHING UNIT
SU 463 EFIS REVERSIONARY SWITCHING UNIT

071-00074-0100,-0200,-0300,-0400,-0500 RTCA DO-160B. See Appendix A.
PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS: See Figure 2-20, Figure 2-20A.
Length (With Non-HIRF Rack): 16.414 in. (41.68 cm.) nominal
Length (With HIRF Rack): 16.748 in. (42.54 cm.) nominal
WEIGHT: See Figure 2-20, Figure 2-20A.
071-00074-0100 7.0 lbs. (3.2 Kg.) nominal
071-00074-0200 6.8 lbs. (3.1 Kg.) nominal
071-00074-0300 8.2 lbs. (3.7 Kg.) nominal
071-00074-0400 6.6 lbs. (3.0 Kg.) nominal
071-00074-0500 7.4 lbs. (3.4 Kg.) nominal
With 050-02899-0000 Installation kit add: 1.6 lbs. (0.72 Kg.) nominal
TEMPERATURE RANGE: -55 C to +70 C. See Appendix A.
POWER REQUIREMENTS: BUS 1 (+27.5, ±0.5 Vdc)
071-00074-0100 MAX 480 mA
071-00074-0200 MAX 240 mA
071-00074-0300 MAX 600 mA
071-00074-0400 MAX 330 mA
071-00074-0500 MAX 440 mA
BUS 2 (+27.5, ±0.5 Vdc)
071-00074-0200 MAX 240 mA
071-00074-0300 MAX 630 mA
071-00074-0500 MAX 470 mA
BUS 1/2 (+27.5, ± 0.5 Vdc)
071-00074-0300 MAX 60 mA
071-00074-0500 MAX 70 mA

1.3 UNITS SUPPLIED
1.3.1 SG 464, SG 465 SYMBOL GENERATORS
The SG 464 and SG 465 are used with the ED 461, ED 462, ED 551, ED 551A display units and
the CP 467, CP 468, CP 469, CP 469A control panels. The SG 464 was available in versions to
drive only an EHSI. The SG 465 is available in versions to drive only an EHSI or to drive both EHSI
and EADI (or MFD) displays. The SG 465 is also available in versions with and without Weather
Radar interface. The versions of the SG 464 and SG 465 with their respective characteristics are
shown in the following tables. The SG 464 is no longer available, information is provided for ref-
erence only.
TABLE 1-16 SG 464 VERSION CHARACTERISTICS
SG 464 P/N 066-04020- 01XX 02XX 11XX 12XX
EHSI WITH WX RADAR X X
EHSI WITHOUT WX RADAR X X
LIGHTNING X X
TABLE 1-17 SG 465 VERSION CHARACTERISTICS
SG 465 P/N
01XX 02XX 04XX 05XX 11XX 12XX 14XX 15XX 1601 1755 5000
066-04021-
EADI/EHSI X X X X X X X
EHSI ONLY X X X X
WITH WX X X X X X X X
RADAR
WITHOUT WX X X X X
RADAR
HIRF/LIGHT- X X X X X X X
NING
SPECIAL X X X
APPLICATION
1.3.2 ED 461 EHSI DISPLAY
The ED 461 is used as a Horizontal Situation Indicator (EHSI) with integral controls (modes,
brightness, etc.). It is available in combinations of gray or black faceplate, 5 Vac, 5 Vdc, or 28 Vdc
lighting, with and without cooling blower. The versions of the ED 461 with their respective charac-
teristics are shown in the following tables.

TABLE 1-18 ED 461 VERSION CHARACTERISTICS
ED 461 066-03123- 0100 0200 0300 0400 0500 0600 0700 0800
BLACK FACEPLATE X X X X
GRAY FACEPLATE X X X X
5 Vac/ 5 Vdc LIGHTING X X X X
28 Vdc LIGHTING X X X X
WITHOUT COOLING FAN X X X X
WITH COOLING FAN X X X X
ED 461 066-03123- 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800
HIRF/LIGHTNING X X X X X X X X
1.3.3 ED 462 EADI DISPLAY
The ED 462 is used as an Electronic Attitude Director Indicator (EADI) or as an Electronic Hori-
zontal Situation Indicator (EHSI), and is available in combinations of gray or black faceplate, 5
Vac, 5 Vdc, or 28 Vdc lighting, with cooling fan and without and with an inverted back. The ver-
sions of the ED 462 with their respective characteristics are shown in the following tables.
ED 462 066-03125- 0100 0200 0300 0400 0500 0600 0700 0800

ED 462 066-03125- 0100 0200 0300 0400 0500 0600 0700 0800
ED 462 066-03125- 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800
INVERTED BACK X X X X X X X X
ED 462 066-03125- 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 2600 2700 2800
ED 462 066-03125- 3100 3200 3300 3400 3500 3600 3700 3800

ED 462 066-03125- 3100 3200 3300 3400 3500 3600 3700 3800
INVERTED BACK X X X X X X X X
1.3.4 ED 551, ED 551A DISPLAYS
The ED 551 and ED 551A are used as an Electronic Attitude Director Indicator (EADI), or as an
Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator (EHSI), or an MFD and is available in combinations of
gray or black faceplate, 5 Vac, 5Vdc, or 28 Vdc lighting. The versions of the ED 551 and ED 551A
with their respective characteristics are shown in the following tables.
TABLE 1-24 ED 551, ED 551A VERSION CHARACTERISTICS
ED 551, ED 551A 066-03137- 0100 0200 0300 0400 1100 1200 1300 1400
ED 551* X X X X
ED 551A X X X X
*No longer Available
TABLE 1-25 ED 551, ED 551A VERSION CHARACTERISTICS
ED 551, ED 551A
2100 2200 2300 2400 3100 3200 3300 3400 3600
066-03137-
ED 551* X X X X
ED 551A X X X X X
BLACK FACEPLATE X X X X X
5 Vac/ 5 Vdc LIGHTS X X X X
HIRF/LIGHTNING X X X X X X X X X
5 Vac/ 5 Vdc RED X

LIGHTING
*No longer Available

1.3.5 CP 113F, CP 466A, CP 466B CONTROL PANELS
The CP 113F, CP 466A and CP 466B are radar control panels. When the WX option is installed
and the weather radar indicator is not installed a radar control panels is used to controls weather
mode selection, GND, MAP, gain, range, antenna tilt, and antenna stabilization. The versions of
the CP 113F with their respective characteristics are no longer available and are shown in the fol-
lowing table for reference only.
TABLE 1-26 CP 113F VERSION

CHARACTERISTICS
CP 113F 071-01337- 0010 0011
GRAY FACEPLATE X
BLACK FACEPLATE X
The versions of the CP 466A with their respective characteristics are shown in the following table.
Some versions are no longer available.
TABLE 1-27 CP 466A VERSION CHARACTERISTICS
CP 466A 071-01438- 0102 0202 0302 0402 0502 0602 0702 0802
VERT PROFILE X X X X
LIGHTNING DETECTION X X X X
TABLE 1-28 CP 466A VERSION CHARACTERISTICS
CP 466A 071-01438- 0902 1002 1102 1202
BLACK FACEPLATE X X
GRAY FACEPLATE X X
LIGHTNING DETECTION X X
SECTOR SCAN X X X X
The versions of the CP 466B with their respective characteristics are shown in the following table.
Some versions are no longer available.

TABLE 1-29 CP 466B VERSION CHARACTERISTICS
CP 466B 071-01493- 0102 0202 0302 0402 0502 0602 0702 0802
LIGHTNING DETECTION X X X X
TABLE 1-30 CP 466B VERSION CHARACTERISTICS
CP 466B 071-01493- 0902 1002 1102 1202
BLACK FACEPLATE X X
GRAY FACEPLATE X X
LIGHTNING DETECTION X X
SECTOR SCAN X X X X
1.3.6 CP 467, CP 468, CP 469 CONTROL PANELS
The CP 467 is used when the system Is configured as an ADI/HSI system and controls system
operating mode and testing the EFS 40 and the radio altimeter. The CP 468 is used for HSI only
systems and as such does not control DH select, radio altimeter test, or ADI brightness. Versions
of the CP 468 with dual brightness controls can be used with 2-tube EFS 40 (dual ED 462s) or
EFS 50 systems that do not require radio altimeter controls. The CP 469 is for multi function dis-
play (MFD) systems. The functions provided Include those of the CP 468, except the heading se-
lect knob is removed, and a CRS (NOT) select switch is added. The versions of the CP 467 with
their respective characteristics are shown in the following tables.
TABLE 1-31 CP 467 VERSION CHARACTERISTICS
CP 467 071-01439- 0100 0200 0300 0400 0500 0600 3100 3200 3300
BLACK FACE- X X X X X
PLATE
5 Vac LIGHTING X X
5 Vdc LIGHTING X X
28 Vdc LIGHTING X X

CP 467 071-01439- 0100 0200 0300 0400 0500 0600 3100 3200 3300
5Vac/ 5Vdc/ 28Vdc X X X

LIGHTING
HIRF/LIGHTNING X X X
5Vac/5Vdc/28Vdc X
RED LIGHTING
The versions of the CP 468 with their respective characteristics are shown in the following tables.
CP 468 071-01439- 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600
BLACK FACEPLATE X X X
GRAY FACEPLATE X X X
5 Vac LIGHTING X X
5 Vdc LIGHTING X X
28 Vdc LIGHTING X X
SINGLE BRIGHTNESS X X X X X X
CP 468 071-01439- 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 2600
BLACK FACEPLATE X X X
GRAY FACEPLATE X X X
5 Vac LIGHTING X X
5 Vdc LIGHTING X X
28 Vdc LIGHTING X X
DUAL BRIGHTNESS X X X X X X
CP 468 071-01439- 4100 4200 4300 4400
BLACK FACEPLATE X X
GRAY FACEPLATE X X
5Vac/ 5Vdc/ 28Vdc LIGHTS X X X X

CP 468 071-01439- 4100 4200 4300 4400
SINGLE BRIGHTNESS X X
DUAL BRIGHTNESS X X
HIRF/LIGHTNING X X X X
The versions of the CP 469 with their respective characteristics are shown in the following table.
TABLE 1-35 CP 469 VERSION

CHARACTERISTICS
CP 469 071-01439- 5100 5200
BLACK FACEPLATE X
GRAY FACEPLATE X
5Vac/ 5Vdc/ 28Vdc LIGHTS X X
HIRF/LIGHTNING X X
1.3.7 CP 469A CONTROL PANEL
The CP 469A is for multifunction display (MFD) systems. It is similar to the CP 469 but also con-
tains checklist capability, a TCAS only button, and an integral joystick. The versions of the CP
469A with their respective characteristics are shown in the following table.
TABLE 1-36 CP 469A VERSION

CHARACTERISTICS
CP 469A 071-01511- 0101 0201
BLACK FACEPLATE X
GRAY FACEPLATE X
5Vac/ 5Vdc/ 28Vdc LIGHTS X X
HIRF/LIGHTNING X X
1.3.8 CP 470 CONTROL PANEL
The CP 470 ADI control panel has the capability for setting ADI brightness, altimeter test switch
and decision height setting. The versions of the CP 470 with their respective characteristics are
shown in the following table.

CP 470 071-01517- 0100 0200 0300 0400
BLACK FACEPLATE X X
GRAY FACEPLATE X X
5 Vac/ 5 Vdc LIGHTING X X
28 Vdc LIGHTING X X
HIRF & LIGHTNING X X X X
1.3.9 KA 163A PITCH AND ROLL COMMAND ADAPTER
The KA 163A is used for pitch and roll command bar drive voltages of less than 400 mVdc/degree.
The gain of each channel is independently adjustable from 2.55 to 28 to amplify command bar
drive to 400 mVdc/degree. The KA 163A P/N 071-01303-0001 is available in one version only.
1.4 INSTALLATION KITS AND ACCESSORIES SUPPLIED
1.4.1 SG 464, SG 465 INSTALLATION KIT
1.4.1.1 SG 464 Installation Kits

The SG 464 mounting rack installation kits are no longer available and are listed for reference
only. Installation kit P/N 050-02718-0000 is a pre HIRF and Lightning kit and is not approved for
new installation. Use only installation kit P/N 050-02718-0001 for new installations or installations
requiring HIRF and Lightning approval. The mounting rack installation kits contents are shown be-
low.
SG 464 INSTALLATION MOUNTING RACK KITS
KIT NUMBER DESCRIPTION

050-02718-0000 INSTALL KIT SG464 (No longer available)
050-02718-0001 INSTL KIT 464 HIRF (No longer available)
KIT P/N 050-02718- PARTS LIST
P/N DESCRIPTION UM 0000 0001

030-01094-0002 CONNECTOR 12/24 P EA - 2
030-01432-0000 TERMINAL CONN EA - 48
030-02351-0000 HOOD/LVR ASSY ST E EA 1 -
030-02351-0005 HOOD/LVR ASSY SD E EA - 1
047-09980-0002 COVER HIRF (SG464) EA - 1
047-09981-0004 CNTR PLT MTG RACK EA - 1

071-00061-0000 SYS CONFIG MOD EA 1 -

071-01463-0000 MTG RACK A SG464 EA 1 -
071-01463-0001 MTG RACK 464 HIRF EA - 1
089-05878-0010 SCR PHP 4-40XS/8 EA - 4
089-06008-0004 SCR FHP 4-40X1/4 EA 4 18
089-06008-0006 SCR FHP 4-40X318 EA - 9
089-06008-0007 SCR FHP 4-40X7/16 EA 4 -
030-03039-0000 CONN, PLUG,DPX3 EA 1 1
030-02346-0001 CONN SUB-D CA 9S EA 1 1
NOTE
Pins for the SG 464 connector must be ordered separately under P/N 030-01311-0000
(QTY 1), -0001 (QTY 10), -0002 (QTY 50), or -0003 (QTY 100).
1.4.1.2 SG 465 Mounting Rack Installation Kits
The SG 465 mounting rack installation kit is available in one version P/N 050-02719-0003 only,
other versions are listed for reference only. Installation kits P/N 050-02719-0000 and P/N 050-
02719-0001, are pre HIRF and Lightning kits and are not approved for new installations. Use only
installation kit P/N 050-02719-0003 for new installations or installations requiring HIRF and Light-
ning approval.
The SG 465 mounting rack installation kits, P/N 050-02719-0000 and P/N 050-02719-0002 are
used when a plenum kit and blower are used to cool the SG 465. The SG 465 installation kits, P/
N 050-02719-0001 and P/N 05002719-0003 are used when a fan is mounted in the rack of the SG
465 for cooling. The kit contents are shown below.
SG 465 INSTALLATION MOUNTING RACK KITS

050-02719-0000 INST KIT 465 (RAM) (No longer available)
050-02719-0001 INST KIT 465 (FAN) (No longer available)
050-02719-0002 INSTL KIT HIRF RAM (No longer available)
050-02719-0003 INSTL KIT HIRF FAN
P/N DESCRIPTION UM 0000 0001 0002 0003

030-01094-0002 CONNECTOR 12/24 P EA - - 4 4
030-01311-0000 CNTCT 030-2259-000 EA - - - 200
030-01432-0000 TERMINAL CONN EA - - 96 96
030-02351-0000 HOOD/LVR ASSY ST E EA 1 1 - -
030-02351-0005 HOOD/LVR ASSY SID E EA - - 1 1
047-09171-0001 COVER PLT W/F EA 1 - 1 -
047-09823-0002 CONN PLATE EA - - 1 1
047-09824-0002 COVER HIRF EA - - 1 -
047-09830-0002 CVR HIRF SHRT W/HW EA - - - 1
071-00061-0000 SYS CONFIG MOD EA 1 1 1 1
071-01464-0000 MTG RACK A SG465 EA 1 - - -

071-01464-0001 MTG RACK ASSY EA - 1 - -

071-01521-0000 MTG RACK ASY SG465 EA - - 1 -
071-01521-0001 RACK ASY SHORT 465 EA - - - 1
089-05878-0010 SCR PHP 4-40X5/8 EA - - 8 8
089-06008-0004 SCR FHP 4-40X1/4 EA 4 4 14 14
089-06008-0007 SCR FHP 4-40X7/16 EA 8 8 8 8
089-06012-0005 SCR FHP 6-32X5/16 EA 4 - 4 -
089-06012-0006 SCR FHP 6-32X3/8 EA - - 8 8
089-08231-0000 WASHER FLAT EA 4 4 4 4
090-00959-0001 1DX1 PLUG EA 2 - 2 -
150-00042-0010 SHRINK TUBING 0.187 A IN - - 48 48
030-02707-0002 CONN PLUG DPX2 W/H (P4651) EA 1 1 1 1
030-02707-0000 CONN DPX2MA-A106P- (P4652) EA 1 1 1 1
030-02346-0001 CONN SUB-D CA 9S (P4653) EA 1 1 1 1
NOTE
SG 465 connector pins P/N 030-01311-0000 must be ordered separately with kit P/N
050-02719-0000, kit P/N 050-02719-0001, and kit P/N 050-02719-0002. It is not nec-
essary to order SG 465 connector pins when ordering kit P/N 050-02719-0003, as they
are already included.
NOTE
The SG 465 fan kit must be ordered separately (see section 1.5.1.B.).
1.4.2 ED 461, ED 462 INSTALLATION KIT
The ED 461, ED 462 Installation Kit is available in four versions P/N 050-02645-0001, -0003, -
0005, and -0007.
ED 461, ED 462 INSTALLATION KITS

050-02645-0001 INSTALL KIT CRIMP - WITHOUT RACK, RAM AIR
050-02645-0003 INSTALL KIT CRIMP - WITH RACK, RAM AIR
050-02645-0005 INSTALL KIT CRIMP - WITHOUT RACK, COOLING ON DU
050-02645-0007 INSTALL KIT CRIMP - WITH RACK, COOLING ON DU
P/N DESCRIPTION UM 0001 0003 0005 0007

030-01157-0011 SOCKET CRMP 20G EA 49 49 49 49
030-01176-0010 CONN SUB-D HSG 50S EA 1 1 1 1
030-01188-0000 PIN POLRZTN FEMALE EA 1 1 1 1
030-01428-0000 EMI HOOD W/LCK 50P EA 1 1 1 1
047-08625-0002 RACK MTG EA - 1 - 1
073-05159-0001 HOSE CONNECTOR EA 1 1 - -
073-05161-0002 PLATE CONN EA - 1 - -
073-05161-0005 PLATE CONN EA - - - 1
076-01989-0001 INSERT RACK EA - 4 - 4

076-01990-0001 SLEEVE BACK OUT EA - 1 - 1

076-01991-0001 SCREW RETAINING EA - 1 - 1
076-02092-0001 SCREW SPECIAL EA - 2 - 2
089-05115-0014 SCR FHP 6-32X7/8 EA - 1 - 1
089-05878-0003 SCR PHP 4-40X3/16 EA 2 2 - -
089-05878-0005 SCR PHP 4-40X5/16 EA - 2 - 2
089-05878-0007 SCR PHP 4-40X7/16 EA - 2 - 2
089-05903-0005 SCR PHP 4-40X5/16 EA - 4 - 4
089-06004-0003 SCR FHP 2-56X3/16 EA - 16 - 16
089-06167-0012 SCR FHP 6-32X3/4 EA - 2 - 2
089-08389-0001 SPRING WASHEF EA - 1 - 1
090-00265-0000 PIN GROOVE 0.046X.250 EA - 1 - 1
187-01668-0000 CUSHION EA - 1 - -
1.4.3 ED 462 INCLINOMETER INSTALLATION KIT
When the ED 462 is used as an attitude director indicator (ADI), an inclinometer is mounted on
the front panel. The Inclinometer Installation Kits is available in two versions, P/N 050-02643-
0000 and -0001. The -0000 is for use with ED 462 units with black faceplates and the -0001 with
gray faceplates. The kit contents are shown below.
ED 462 INCLINOMETER INSTALLATION KITS
KIT NUMBER DESCRIPTION ED 462 VERSION

050-02643-0000 INSTALLATION KIT-BLACK FACEPLATE -0100, -0200, -0500, -0600, -1100, -1200,
-1500, -1600, -2100, -2200, -2500,
-2600, -3100, -3200, -3500, -3600
050-02643-0001 INSTALLATION KIT-GRAY FACEPLATE -0300, -0400, -0700, -0800, -1300, -1400,
-1700, -1800, -2300, -2400, -2700, -2800,
-3300, -3400, -3700, -3800

006-01138-0000 INCLN ASST EA 1 1
012-01221-0000 CUSHION EA 2 2
037-00023-0002 INCLINOMETER EA 1 1
047-07338-0001 SPRING CLIP W/F EA 1 1
073-05150-0002 HOUSING INCLINOMTR EA 1 -
073-05150-0003 HOUSING INCLINOMTR EA - 1
089-06340-0004 SCR PHP 2.56XI/4 EA 2 -
089-06435-0004 SCR PHP 2-56XI/4 EA - 2
1.4.4 ED 551, ED 551A INSTALLATION KIT
The ED 551, ED 551A Installation Kit is available in two versions, P/N 050-02841-0001 and -0004.
The kit contents are shown below.
ED 551, ED 551A INSTALLATION KITS


050-02841-0001 INSTALL KIT CRIMP
050-02841-0004 INSTALL KIT CRIMP 90°
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION UM 0001 0004

030-01272-0003 EMI BCKSHL 90 EA - 1
030-01427-0000 EMI BCKSHL ASSY DV EA 1 -
030-02055-0007 CONN PLUG CRMP32PF EA 1 1
NOTE
The mounting tray must be ordered separately as P/N 047-07537-0009 (standard) or
P/N 047-08496-0002 (side mount).
1.4.5 ED 551, ED 551A INCLINOMETER INSTALLATION KIT
When the ED 551 and ED 551A are used as an attitude director indicator (ADI), an inclinometer
is mounted on the front panel. The Inclinometer Installation Kit, P/N 050-02506-0000/-0001, is
available in two versions. The -0000 is for use with ED 551 and ED 551A units with black face-
plates and the -0001 with gray faceplates. The kit contents are shown below.
ED 551, ED 551A INCLINOMETER INSTALLATION KITS
KIT NUMBER DESCRIPTION ED 551, ED 551A

050-02506-0000 INSTALLATION KIT-BLACK FACEPLATE -0100, -0200, -1100, -1200, -2100, -2200,
-3100, -3200
050-02506-0001 INSTALLATION KIT-GRAY FACEPLATE -0300, -0400, -1300, -1400, -2300, -2400,
-3300, -3400

012-05081-0001 LEVEL EA 1 1
088-02372-0001 HOUSING EA 1 -
088-02372-0002 HOUSING EA - 1
089-07384-0001 CAPTIVE SCREW EA 2 -
1.4.6 CP 113F INSTALLATION KIT
The CP 113F Installation Kit (P/N 050-02371-0001) contents are shown below.
CP 113F INSTALLATION KIT

050-02371-0001 INSTALLATION KIT
Kit P/N 050-02371- PARTS LIST
P/N DESCRIPTION UM 0001

030-01428-0000 EM HOOD W/LCK 5 EA 1
030-02784-0000 CONN EA 1
1.4.7 CP 466A, CP 466B INSTALLATION KIT
The CP 466A, CP 466B Installation Kit P/N 050-02371-0001 is no longer available. Use kit P/N
050-02684-0001 shown in section 1.4.8.
1.4.8 CP 466A, CP 466B, CP 467, CP 468, CP 469, CP 469A INSTALLATION KIT
The CP 466A, CP 466B, CP 467, CP 468, CP 469, CP 469A Installation Kit P/N 050-02684-0001
contents are shown below.
NOTE
The CP 469A requires 2 each kits P/N 050-02684-0001.
CP 466A, CP 466B, CP 467, CP 468, CP 469, CP 469A INSTALLATION KIT

050-02684-0001 INSTALLATION KIT-CRIMP CONNECTOR

030-01157-0011 SOCKET CRMP 20G EA 49
030-01176-0010 HSG CONN 50S EA 1
030-01188-0000 PIN POLRZTN FEMALE EA 1
030-01428-0000 EMI HOOD W/LCK SOP EA 1
1.4.9 CP 469A INSTALLATION KIT
The CP 469A Installation Kit P/N 050-03186-0000 is no longer available. Use 2 ea. kit P/N 050-
02684-0001 shown in section 1.4.8.
NOTE
The CP 469A programming diskette P/N 222-00337-0101 and computer interface ca-
ble P/N 155-02794-0002 used for entering data into the CP 469A checklist must be or-
dered separately. They are not included in the installation kit.

1.4.10 CP 470 INSTALLATION KIT
The CP 470 Installation Kit (P/N 050-03041-0000) contents are shown below.
CP 470 INSTALLATION KIT

050-03041-0000 INSTALLATION KIT

030-01157-0011 SOCKET CRMP 20G EA 14
030-01188-0000 PIN POLRZTN FEMALE EA 1
030-01428-0002 EMI HOOD W/LCK 15P EA 1
030-03153-0000 HSG CONN 15P TIN EA 1
047-09728-0002 NUT PLATE CP470 EA 1
089-06368-0010 SCR FHP BK4-40X5/8 EA 4
089-06457-0010 SCR FHP GY4-40X5/8 EA 4
1.5 ACCESSORIES REQUIRED BUT NOT SUPPLIED
1.5.1 COOLING KITS
External cooling is required for EFS 40/EFS 50 system units not having a self contained cooling
blower. Fan Kits for the SG 464 and SG 465 are the preferred cooling system for those units.
The SG 465 requires a source of cooling air capable of providing at least 30 CFM at sea level.
This is a minimum requirement and will not be sufficient in some situations. Three fan kits and a
KA 33 blower are all offered by Bendix/King as cooling options for the SG 465 to satisfy most sit-
uations.
The effectiveness of cooling fans and blowers is limited primarily by two conditions: air density (al-
titude) and air temperature. Both of these conditions apply to the cooling air in the equipment rack
where the SG 465 is installed. If the temperature of the cooling air is maintained below +10° C.
then the three cooling fans will all provide adequate cooling at all altitudes up to 55,000 ft. If, how-
ever, the temperature of the cooling air is allowed to reach or exceed +25° C (+70° C max), then
air density (altitude) becomes the limiting factor and maximum operating altitude (at the equipment
rack) must be considered when selecting the cooling option.
The SG 465 monitors both temperature and flow rate of the cooling air. It will supply power to the
fan or blower at +10° C and remove power at -10° C. The SG 465 cooling flag will activate when
air temperature at the DPX board sensor exceeds +35° C and the cooling air flow rate drops below
the threshold level. The temperature at the sensor can be 10° C higher than ambient air temper-
ature at the fan or flower inlet. The SG 465 prior to 06 software enables the air flow sensor at +25°
C. The threshold level of the air flow sensor is set to approximate the maximum altitude limits listed

for each of the cooling options. The following table will aid in the selection of cooling options for
the SG 465.
TABLE 1-38 SG 465 COOLING OPTIONS
CFM RATING
COOLING OPTION P/N MAX ALT. (FT)
(SEA LEVEL)
KA 33 BLOWER 071-04037-0002 36* 45,000*
FAN KIT 071-04056-0000 31 30,000
FAN KIT 071-04056-0001** 37 40,000
FAN KIT 071-04056-0002 65 55,000
* Approximate values
**No longer available
When using the KA 33 Cooling Blower with the SG 464 a Plenum Kit is required in addition to the
blower. The KA 33 Cooling Blower is available with either two or six air output ports. The part num-
bers of these units are shown below.
1.5.1.A. SG 464 Fan Kit P/N 071-04057-0000

Kit P/N 071-04057-0000 is no longer available, and is shown for reference only.
P/N DESCRIPTION UM 0000 VENDOR PART NUMBER

047-09427-0002 PLENUM RACK W/HDWR EA 1
075-05091-0002 SPCR RACK MTG W/HDWR EA 2
089-05907-0020 SCRW PHP 6-32 X 1 1/4 EA 4
089-06008-0005 SCRW FHP 4-40 X 5/16 EA 4
148-05176-0000 D.C. FAN (24 V. AA) EA 1
1.5.1.B. SG 465 Fan Kits
SG 465 FAN KITS
KIT P/N DESCRIPITION

071-04056-0000 FAN KIT 31CFM
071-04056-0001 FAN KIT 37CFM (No longer available. Shown for reference only)
071-04056-0002 FAN KIT 65CFM
P/N DESCRIPTION UM -0000 -0001 -0002

075-05087-0001 SPCR MTG RACK W/F EA 2 - -
075-05111-0002 SPACER RACK 1-3/4 A EA - 2 2
089-05882-0007 SCR PHP 6-32X7/16 EA 4 3 3

089-06421-0004 SCR PHP 8-32X17/32 A EA - 4 4

148-05170-0000 FAN EA - 1 -
148-05174-0000 FAN BRUSHLESS DC EA 1 - -
148-05183-0000 FAN 28 V ECDC A EA - - 1
1.5.1.C. KA 33 Cooling Blower, 6 Ports (0.625 in. dia.), 28 Vdc P/N 071-04037-0001 (For ED
461, ED 462, SG 464)
1.5.1.D. KA 33 Cooling Blower, 2 Ports (1.0 in. dia.), 28 Vdc P/N 071-04037-0002 (For SG 465)
1.5.1.E. KA 33 Installation Kits
The KA 33 installation kit (P/N 050-02204-0000/-0001) is available in two versions. The
-0000 version kit is used with KA 33 P/N 071-04037-0001, and the -0001 kit is used
with KA 33 P/N 071-04037-0002. The kits and their contents are listed below.
KA 33 INSTALLATION KITS

050-02204-0000 KA 33 INSTALLATION KIT, 6 PORTS (0.625 in. OD dia.)
050-02204-0001 KA 33 INSTALLATION KIT, 2 PORTS (1.0 in. OD dia.)
P/N DESCRIPTION UM 0000 0001 VENDOR PART NUMBER

030-02551-0000 TERMINAL FEMALE EA 2 2
030-02549-0000 CONNECTOR RECEPTACLEEA 1 1
090-00959-0000 .6251DX1 PLUG EA 5 -
090-00959-0001 1.001DX1 PLUG EA - 1
091-00031-0004 NYLON CABLE CLAMP EA 2 -
150-00038-0000 .625 IN DIAMTER DUCT 3 FTEA 2 -
150-00038-0001 1.0 IN DIAMETER DUCT 4 FTEA - 2
1.5.1.F. Plenum Kit for SG 464 (required for KA 33 cooling only) P/N 050-02862-0000
Kit P/N 050-02862-0000 is no longer available, and is shown for reference only.
P/N DESCRIPTION UM 0000 VENDOR PART NUMBER

050-02204-0000 Fan Install kit EA 1
075-05090-0001 Spacer W/FIN EA 1
089-06008-0005 Screw FPH 4-40 x 5/16 EA 4
200-04980-0000 Plenum Assy EA 1
1.5.2 KA 163A PITCH AND ROLL COMMAND BAR ADAPTER
The KA 163A Pitch and Roll Command Bar Adapter is designed to transform pitch and roll com-
mand bar outputs from various flight directors to a level that is compatible with the Bendix/King
EFS 40/50.

1.5.2.A. The KA 163A P/N 071-01303-0001, is available in one version only.

1.5.2.B. The KA 163A Installation kit, P/N (050-02309-0001) contains the following parts:
KA 163A INSTALLATION KIT P/N 050-02309- PARTS LIST
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION -0001 VENDOR PART NUMBER

030-01157-0011 SOCKET CRIMP 20G 20 POSITRONIC FC6020D-14
030-01173-0000 HOUSING CONN 25S 1 POSITRONIC RD25F00000
030-01186-0000 CONTACT SKT CRIMP 4 POSITRONIC FC6018D
030-01188-0000 FEMALE POLRZTN PIN 1 BENDIX/KING
030-02351-0002 HOOD/LVR ASSY ST E 1 POSITRONIC D25000JVL0-476
1.5.3 SU 463 SWITCHING UNIT
The SU 463 switching unit provides the reversionary mode switching for the EFS 40/EFS 50 three
tube (EADI/EHSI with MFD), four tube (dual EADI/HSI), and five tube (dual EADI/EHSI with MFD)
installations. Its primary purpose is to provide switching of signals between the symbol generator,
display units, control panels and power buses. A few spare relay contacts are available for other
switching needs.
The SU 463 monitors panel-mounted momentary push annunciator switches for activation by the
flight crew. The switch activation will activate a requested mods if it is allowed simultaneously with
the other active modes, or will deactivate an active mode (deactivation is always allowed regard-
less of the active modes currently active). In addition some mode request will cancel other previ-
ously selected modes while activating the requested mode. Programming pins on the unit connec-
tor select whether mode preemption is allowed. If a switch becomes stuck in the activated position
for more than seven seconds it will be ignored.
1.5.3.A. The versions of the SU 463 with their respective characteristics are shown below.
Some versions of the SU 463 are no longer available, and are shown for reference
only.
TABLE 1-39 SU 463 VERSION CHARACTERISTICS
SU 463 071-00074- 0100 0200 0300 0400 0500
EFS 40 3-TUBE* X
EFS 40/EFS 50 4-TUBE X
EFS 40 3-TUBE/ 5-TUBE X
EFS 50 3-TUBE* X
EFS 50 3-TUBE/ 5-TUBE X
*No longer available
1.5.3.B. SU 463 Installation Kit Contents

The SU 463 Installation Kit is available in one version P/N 050-02899-0002. Contents
of the installation kit is shown below.
SU 463 INSTALLATION KIT P/N 050-02899- PARTS LIST
P/N DESCRIPTION 0002 VENDOR PART NUMBER

030-01094-0002 CONNECTOR 12/24 P 3
030-01311-0000 CNTCT 030-2259-000 400
030-01432-0000 TERMINAL CONN 72
047-09592-0001 SHIM CON MTG W/FIN 1
047-09820-0002 CONN PLATE 1
047-09821-0002 COVER HERF 1
047-09822-0001 GROUND BLOCK 2
071-01520-0000 MTG RACK ASY SU463 1
089-05878-0010 SCR PHP 4-40X5/8 6
089-05903-0007 SCR PHP 4-40X7/16 4
089-06008-0004 SCR FHP 4-40X1/4 10
089-06008-0006 SCR FHP 4-40X3/8 4
089-06008-0008 SCR FHP 4-40X1/2 8
030-03085-0000 CONN PLUG DPX4MA (P4631) 1 ITT CANNON DPX4MA-A424P-33-03-FO
030-03093-0000 CONN PLUG DPX (P4632) 1 ITT CANNON DPXBMA
1.5.4 SU 463 SWITCH/ANNUNCIATORS

Refer to Figure 2-21 for installation drawing.
1.5.4.A. CMPST/DISP SWITCH/ANNUNCIATOR

A CMPST/DISP switch /annunciator Is available to provide both the annunciation and
a switch contact to energize the switching relays of the SU 463 switching unit.
1.5.4.A.1 CMPST/DISP switch/annunciator with 28 V lighting is available under P/N 031-

00535-0041.
1.5.4.A.2 CMPST/DISP switch /annunciator with 5 V lighting is available under P/N 031-
00535-0042.
1.5.4.B. ADI/DOWN SWITCH/ANNUNCIATOR

An ADI/DOWN switch/annunciator is available to provide both the annunciation and a
switch contact to energize the switching relays of the SU 463 switching unit.
1.5.4.B.1 ADI/DOWN switch/annunciator with 28 V lighting is available under P/N 031-

00535-0045.
1.5.4.B.2 ADI/DOWN switch/annunciator with 5 V lighting is available under P/N 031-00535-
0046.
1.5.4.C. COPY/XSIDE SWITCH/ANNUNCIATOR

A COPY/XSIDE switch/annunciator is available to provide both the annunciation and
a switch contact to energize the switching relays of the SU 463 switching unit.

1.5.4.C.1 COPY/XSIDE switch/annunciator with 28 V lighting is available under P/N 031-

00535-0047.
1.5.4.C.2 COPY/XSIDE switch/annunciator with 5 V lighting is available under P/N 031-
00535-0048.
1.5.4.D. SG/STBY SWITCH/ANNUNCIATOR

An SG/STBY switch/annunciator is available to provide both the annunciation and a
switch contact to energize the switching relays of the SU 463 switching unit.
1.5.4.D.1 SG/STBY switch/annunciator with 28 V lighting is available under P/N 031-00535-

0049.
1.5.4.D.2 SG/STBY switch/annunciator with 5 V lighting is available under P/N 031-00535-
0050.
1.5.4.E. DUAL STBY/SG SWITCH/ANNUNCIATOR

A DUAL SG/STBY switch/annunciator is available to provide both the annunciation
and a switch contact to energize the switching relays of the SU 463 switching unit.
1.5.4.E.1 DUAL STBY/SG switch/annunciator with 28 V lighting is available under P/N 031-
00535-0051.
1.5.4.E.2 SG/STBY switch /annunciator with 5 V lighting is available under P/N 031-00535-
0052.
1.5.5 JOYSTICK/ENTER Switch Kit

Refer to Figure 2-22 for installation drawing.
A JOYSTICK/ENTER Switch Kit, P/N 050-03139-0000, is available in one version. It contains the
following parts:
JOYSTICK/ENTER SWITCH KIT 050-03139- PARTS LIST
PART NUMBER DESCRIPTION 0000

057-05563-0000 DECAL JOYSTICK SWITCH 1
057-05563-0001 DECAL ENTER SW 1
031-00330-0000 SWITCH, PB 1
031-00764-0000 SW 9 POS JOYSTICK 1
1.5.6 CRIMPING TOOLS AND POSITIONERS
1.5.6.A. For the SU 463 and SG 464, SG 465

Refer to Figure 1-1.
CRIMPING TOOL: POSITIONER:

P/N 005-02012-0034 P/N 005-02012-0035
MIL M22520/2-01 MIL M22520/2-23

1.5.6.B. For the KA 163A, ED 461, ED 462, and CP 467, CP 468, CP 469, CP 469A, CP 470:

P/N 005-02012-0021 P/N 005-02012-0023
POSITRONIC P/N 9507-0-0-0 POSITRONIC P/N 9502-5-0-0 20-30 AWG
BUCHANAN P/N 612118 POSITRONIC P/N 9502-11-0-0 18 AWG
MIL MS3198-1 BUCHANAN P/N 612513
MIL MS3198-5P
1.5.6.C. For the ED 551, ED 551A:

P/N 005-02012-0017 P/N 005-02012-0037
M22520/1-01 M22520/1-02
1.5.7 INSERTION/ EXTRACTION TOOLS
1.5.7.A. For the SG 464, SG 465 and SU 463:

P/N 005-02012-0036
CT&DS P/N CIET-22
1.5.7.B. For the KA 163A, ED 461, ED 462, and CP 467, CP 468, CP 469, CP 469A, CP 470:
P/N 005-02012-0025
AMP P/N 91067-2
POSITRONICS M81969/1-02
MIL M24308/18-2
1.5.7.C. For the ED 551, ED 551A:
INSTALLING TOOL REMOVAL TOOL

P/N 005-02012-0031 P/N 005-02012-0030
M81969/17-03 M81969/19-07

FIGURE 1-1 Crimping Tool and Positioner For SU 463, SG 464, SG 465 (Apr/92)
FIGURE 1-2 Crimping Tool and Positioner For ED 461, ED 462, CP 467, CP 468, CP 469,
CP 469A, CP 470 (Apr/92)

FIGURE 1-3 Insertion/Extraction Tool For KA 163A, ED 461, ED 462, CP 467, CP 468,
CP 469, CP 469A, CP 470 (Apr/92)
FIGURE 1-4 Insertion/Extraction Tool For SU 463, SG 464, SG 465 (Apr/92)
1.5.8 DZUS MOUNTING RAILS
Required for CP 113F, CP466A, CP 466B, CP 467, CP 468, CP 469, CP 469A installations. Avail-
able in one foot sections as follows:
1.5.8.A. Straight Type P/N 092-00045-0000

1.5.8.B. Angle Type P/N 092-00050-0000
1.5.9 VIDEO AND DEFLECTION SHIELDED WIRE
Shielded wire of at least 85% minimum coverage using a braided shield must be used for the vid-
eo, mode and deflection wiring between the symbol generators and display units. Wire meeting
these shield coverage requirements is available from Bendix/King under P/N 025-05012-0000.
This wire is available from THERMAX WIRE CORP under their designation 24-TE-1936(2)SXE.
Bendix/King wire, P/N 025-05114-0000, may be used as an alternative. It is available from PIC
WIRE under their D620224 designation.
1.6 LICENSE REQUIREMENTS
There are no license requirements for the EFS 40 Electronic Flight Instrumentation System.
1.7 SUMMARY OF INPUT & OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS
TABLE 1-40 INPUT & OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS
INPUT/OUPUT DESCRIPTION/SCALING PARAMETER
GYRO INPUTS:
REF. 1, REF. 2 26 Vac 400 Hz
HEADING 1, HEADING 2 STANDARD 3-WIRE ARINC-407 XYX 11.8 Vrms SYNCHRO
COMPASS 1 SUPERFLAG, INDICATES VALID COMPASS INPUT 28 V = VALID

COMPASS 2 SUPERFLAG
MAG/TRUE 1, MAG/TRUE 2 IDENTIFIES HDG INPUT AS EITHER MAGNETIC OR TRUE GND = TRUE/OPEN =
MAGNETIC
PITCH 1, PITCH 2 STANDARD 3-WIRE ARINC-407 XYZ 11.8 Vrms SYNCHRO
ROLL 1, ROLL 2 STANDARD 3-WIRE ARINC-407 XYZ 11.8 Vrms SYNCHRO
VG 1 SUPERFLAG, VG 2 INDICATES VALID VG INPUT 28 V VALID

SUPERFLAG
DG CROSS-SIDE INDICATES CROSS-SIDE DG GYRO CONFIGURATION IS ACTIVE GND = CROSS-SIDE
VG CROSS-SIDE INDICATES CROSS-SIDE VG GYRO CONFIGURATION IS ACTIVE GND = CROSS-SIDE
RATE OF TURN DURING SG CONFIGURATION THE ROT INPUT SCALED IS

SELECTED:
COLLINS FCS-80 333 mV/DEG/SEC
KING KFC SW/325 200 mV/DEG/SEC
SPERRY SPZ 500/600/800 666 mV/DEG/SEC
ROT SUPERFLAG INDICATES VALID RATE OF TURN INPUT 28 V (250 mA

SOURCE) = VALID
ARINC 429 AHRS 1, ARINC (HDG, P/R ATTITUDE & YAW RATE (KDA 430))
429 2

ADF INPUTS:
ADF 1, ADF 2 DC SIN & REFERENCE OR AC AS SELECTED WHEN SG IS CON-

FIGURED
DC COS & REFERENCE OR AC AS SELECTED WHEN SG IS CON-

FIGURED
ADF 1 & ADF 2 INPUTS MAY BE CONFIGURED AS FOLLDWS:
AC (STANDARD XYZ 11.8

Vrms MAX)
DC SIN & REF /DC COS & REF (BENDIX) 0.0 +/-3.0 Vdc
DC SIN & REF /DC COS & REF (COLLINS: RCR 650) 5.0 +/-2.6 Vdc
DC SIN & REF /DC COS & REF (COLLINS: ADF60B) 0.0 +/-8.0 Vdc
DC SIN & REF /DC COS & REF (KING:) 4.5 +/-3.0 Vdc
DC SIN & REF /DC COS & REF (KING:) 0.0 +/-3.0 Vdc
ADF 1 FLAG, ADF 2 FLAG INDICATES IF ADF SOURCE IS VALID OPEN = ADF
LOCKED, GND =
FLAGGED
ARINC 429 ADF 1, ARINC (BENDIX DFS-43)

429 ADF 2
NAV RECEIVERS INPUTS:
LOC 1, LOC 2 LOC DEV +/- 150 mVdc FULL

SCALE, 1 V MAX
NAV/LOC SUPERFLAG INDICATES IF NAV REC OUTPUT IS VALID 28 V VALID
NAV/LOC FLAG INDICATES IF NAV REC OUTPUT IS VALID 250 mVdc VALID
150 mVdc INVALID
ILS ENERGIZE (LOC ENGAGE) INDICATES ILS MODE IS ACTIVE GND = ILS
G.S. 1, G.S. 2 G.S. DEV +/-150 mVdc FULL

SCALE,=/-1 V MAX
G.S. FLAG INDICATES G.S. INPUT IS VALID 250 mVdc=VALID/150

mVdc=INVALID
NAV 1, NAV 2 SIN & REFERENCE (400 Hz) OR AC AS SELECTED WHEN SG IS

CONFIGURED
COS & REFERENCE (400 Hz) OR AC AS SELECTED WHEN SG IS

CONFIGURED
NAV 1 OR NAV 2 INPUT MAY BE CONFIGURED AS FOLLOWS:
AC (STANDARD XYZ 11.8

Vrms MAX)
SIN & REF/ COS & REF (COLLINS) 8 Vrms
SIN & REF/ COS & REF (KING) 10 Vrms
MARKER BEACON
0 - CYAN 400 Hz (OUTER) ACTIVE= GT 3.24 Vdc

& LT 28 Vdc

M-YELLOW 1300 Hz (MID- ACTIVE= GT 3.24 Vdc

DLE) & LT 28 Vdc
I - WHITE 3000 Hz (INNER) ACTIVE= GT 3.24 Vdc

& LT 28 Vdc
NAV 1 ARINC 429, NAV 2 (INCLUDES ARINC 429 MARKER BEACON)

ARINC 429
DME INPUTS:
DME 1, DME 2 ARINC 568 OR KING SERIAL AS SELECTED WHEN SG IS CON-

FIGURED
DME 1 & DME 2 INPUT WAY BE CONFIGURED AS FOLLOWS:
ARINC 568 (COLLINS DME 40/42)
KING SERIAL (CLK, DAT & SYNC) KTU 709, KDM 706, KNS 81,
KN63
DME I HOLD, DME 2 HOLD THIS INPUT CONFIGURED WHEN THE DME 1 & DME 2 INPUT IS
CONFIGURED
ARINC 568 HOLD = OPEN
KING SERIAL HOLD = GND
429(GOLD) HOLD = GND OR 429
429 SERIES III HOLD = GND OR 429
DME 1 SUPERFLAG, DME 2 INDICATES DME INPUT IS VALID 28 Vdc = VALID

SUPERFLAG
TACAN 1 ENERGIZE, TACAN INDICATES TAC MODE IS ACTIVE (KTU 709) GND = TACAN
2 ENERGIZE
RNAV INPUTS:
RNAV 1, RNAV 2 KING SERIAL (CLOCK, DATA & SYNC) KNS 81
FMS INPUTS:
ARINC 429 MAIN BUS RECEIVER I (GAMA FMS DATA)
ARINC 429 LNAV 112 MAIN BUS RECEIVER 2
FLIGHT CONTROL INPUTS:
PITCH COMMAND THIS INPUT MAY BE CONFIGURED TO ONE OF THE FOLLOWING

CONFIGURATIONS DURING SG CONFIGURATION
KFC 250 (4”), KFC 300, KFC 325 1 Vdc/DEG, + = UP +/-

15 DEG
KFC 200, KFC 225, KFC 275 0.453 Vdc/DEG, + =

UP +/-15 DEG
ALL OTHER 0.400 Vdc/DEG, 12V

or discrete = OUT OF
VIEW
ROLL COMMAND THIS INPUT MAY BE CONFIGURED TO ONE OF THE FOLLOWING

CONFIGURATIONS DURING SG CONFIGURATION.

KFC 250 (4”), KFC 300, KFC 325 0.75 Vdc/DEG + = RT

+/-20 DEG
KFC 200, KFC 225, KFC 275 0.168 Vdc/DEG + =

RT +/-20 DEG
ALL OTHER 0.400 Vdc/DEG
AP MODES (DISCRETES WITH KFC 200/250/300)
1. FD ENGAGE (COMMAND BARS) GND = NOT IN VIEW,

OPEN = IN VIEW
2. FD SUPERFLAG 28 V = VALID
AP REF 26 Vac 400 Hz FROM AP INPUT REF.
ARINC 429 FLIGHT CON- (PITCH & ROLL COMMAND)

TROL
RADIO ALTIMETER
INPUTS:
ANALOG RA THIS INPUT WAY BE CONFIGURED TO ONE OF THE FOLLOWING

CONFIGURATIONS DURING SG CONFIGURATION.
1. ARINC 552
2. DUAL SLOPES 20 mV/FT (-20 TO 500

FT)
3. 3 mV/FT (500 TO
2,500 FT)
4. -4 mV/FT (0 TO 2000
FT)
5. 10 mV/FT (0 TO 1000
FT)
DH SELECT (IF APPLICABLE) CLOSE = DH, OPEN

= NO DH
RADIO ALTIMETER SUPER- 28 V = VALID

FLAG
ARINC 429 RADIO ALTIME-

TER
NOTE: CONTROL PANEL PROVIDES RA SWITCH & RA TEST

SWITCH TO GROUND
MLS INPUTS:
ARINC 429 MILS 1, ARINC

429 MLS 2
AIR DATA INPUTS:
SPEED POINTER 10 KNOTS FULL SCALE 200 mVdc/KNOT
SPEED POINTER SUPER- INDICATES VALID SPED POINTER INPUT 28 V (250 mA

FLAG SOURCE) = VALID
ADA/IAS GND = AOA, OPEN =

IAS

ARINC 429 AIR DATA (KDC 481)
HOVER MODE INPUTS:
VX (+ FORWARD) (NOT: VX USES GLIDESLOPE INPUT) 3.75 uA/KT, +/- 40KTS

RANGE
VY (+ RIGHT) (NOTE: VY USES LOCALIZER INPUT) 3.75 uA/KT, +/- 40KTS

RANGE
FLAG VALID (NOTE: FLAG VALID USES GLIDESLOPE VALID INPUT) +28 Vdc=VALID/
OPEN=INVALID
FLAG MEMORIZE (NOTE: FLAG MEMORIZE USES LOCALIZER VALID INPUT) NOT IN MEM=+28/
OPEN=IN MEM
CABLE MODE INPUTS:
X (NOTE: X USES GLIDES- 13.33 mVdc/DEG, +/- 12 DEG RANGE +X = FORWARD

LOPE INPUT)
Y (NOTE: Y USES LOCAL- 13.33 mVdc/DEG +Y = RIGHT

IZER INPUT)
FLAG (NOTE: FLAG USES +28 V =FLAG VALID, OPEN = INVALID

GLIDESLOPE VALID INPUT)
THRUST (NOTE: THRUST USES LOCALIZER VALID INPUT) +28 V =IN THRUST,
OPEN =NOT IN
THRUST
HOMING MODE INPUTS:
SENSITIVITY (NOTE: SENSITIVITY USES GS INPUT) +/-150 mVdc RANGE
DEVIATION (NOTE: DEVIATION USES LOCALIZER INPUT) +/-15 mVdc/DEG, +/-

10 DEG RANGE
FLAG (NOTE: SENSITIVITY VAL USES GS VAL INPUT) +28 V =FLAG VALID,
OPEN =INVALID
FLAG (NOTE: HOMING VAL USES LOC VAL INPUT) +28 V =FLAG VALID,
OPEN =INVALID
MISCELLANEOUS INPUTS:
COMPOSITE GND = COMPOSITE
COPY GND = COPY
STANDBY GND = STANDBY
EFS/TEST GND = TEST
MDF SLAVED 1/2 OPEN = 1, OPEN 2
SINGLE/DUAL CUE GND = DUAL CUE
ARINC 429 HSI DATA
ARINC 429 ADI DATA
ARINC 429 CROSSTALK
ARINC 429 CHECKLIST
ARINC 429 TCAS RCVR

OUTPUTS:
COURSE DATUM: 22.5 Vrms SIN (THETA) 400 Hz 393 mV/DEG
HEADING DATUM: 22.5 Vrms SIN (THETA) 400 Hz 393 mV/DEG
LATERAL DEVIATION: DC 150 mV FULL SCALE (LINEAR TO 300 mV)
VOR +/- 10 DEG FULL SCALE 1.5 mV/0.1 DEG
LOC 155 DDM FULL SCALE
ADF +/- 10 DEG FULL SCALE 1.5 mV/0.1 DEG
RNAV ENR +/- 5 nm FULL SCALE 0.3333 mV/1 nm
RNAV APP +/- 1.25 nm FULL SCALE 0.00833 mV/1 nm
MLS SAME AS LOC
VERTICAL DEVIATION: DC 150 mV FULL SCALE (LINEAR TO 300 mV)
G.S. G.S. 175 DDM FULL SCALE
MLS SAME AS GS
LATERAL DEVIATION 28 Vdc 28 V VALID

SUPERFLAG:
VERTICAL DEVIATION
SUPERFLAG:
BACK COURSE:
ILS ENERGIZE (LOC

ENGAGE)
TO/FROM DC +/- 100 mV FULL

SCALE
TO + 100 mV = TO
FROM + 100 mV = FROM
1/2 SELECT: NO. 1 OR NO. 2 SYSTEM OPEN = 1, GND = 2
MODE CHANGE: (INDICATES MOMENTARILY THAT THE OPERATOR HAS 0.5 SEC PULSE 28 V
SELECTED A NEW NAVIGATION SENSOR)
ARINC 429 OUTPUTS:
ARINC 429 CROSS TALK (PROVIDES CROSSTALK DATA TO OTHER SYMBOL GENERA-
TORS)
ARINC 429 HSI TALK (PROVIDES A MEANS OF TESTING COMMUNICATION FROM

EHSI PORTION OF THE SYMB0L GENERATOR TO THE EADI POR-
TION.)
ARINC 429 ADI DATA (PROVIDES A MEANS OF TESTING COMMUNICATION FROM

EADI PORTION OF THE SYMBOL GENERATOR TO THE EHSI
PORTION)
ARINC 429 EFS GENERAL (GENERAL:GENERAL PURPOSE SYSTEM OUTPUTS. PRIMARY

USER IS EXPECTED TO BE AUTOPILOTS AND SOME FMS SYS-
TEMS)

ARINC LNAV (SPECIFIC: DEDICATED BUS FOR COMMUNICATION WITH BEN-

DIX/KING FMS COMPUTERS.)
ARINC 429 SPARE
FMS SELECT: (INDICATES THAT FMS SYSTEM HAS BEEN SELECTED FOR DIS- GND = FMS
PLAY)
RNAV SELECT: (INDICATES THAT RNAV HAS BEEN SELECTED FOR DISPLAY) GND = RNAV
DECISION HEIGHT OUT: (INDICATES THAT THE RADAR ALTIMETER IS LESS THAN THE
SELECTED DECISION HEIGHT (EADI FUNCTION))
ATTITUDE MISCOMPARE: (INDICATES THAT THE PITCH OR ROLL ATTITUDE COMPARISON GND = MISCOMPARE
CRITERIA HAVE BEEN EXCEEDED)
VNAV (INDICATES THAT VNAV IS BEING DISPLAYED) GND = VNAV
MLS SELECT: (INDICATES THAT MLS HAS BEEN SELECTED FOR DISPLAY) GND = MLS
NAV SELECT: (INDICATES THAT NAV HAS BEEN SELECTED FOR DISPLAY) GND = NAV
ADF SELECT: (INDICATES THAT ADF HAS BEEN SELECTED FOR DISPLAY) GND = ADF
HSI VALID: (INDICATES THAT HSI SYMBOL GENERATOR SYSTEM OUTPUTS 27.5 Vdc VALID
ARE VALID. INTERNAL SELF TESTS OR ANY INVALID HEADING
CONDITION MAY SET THIS.)
ADI VALID: (INDICATES THAT ADI SYMBOL GENERATOR SYSTEM OUTPUTS 27.5 Vdc VALID
ARE VALID. INTERNAL SELF TESTS OR ANY INVALID HEADING
CONDITION MAY SET THIS.)
TACAN SELECT: (INDICATES THAT TACAN IS BEING DISPLAYED.) GND = TACAN
CABLE MODE: (INDICATES THAT CABLE IS BEING DISPLAYED.) GND = CABLE
HOMING SELECT: (INDICATES THAT HOMING IS BEING DISPLAYED.) GND = HOMING
HOVER SELECT: (INDICATES THAT DOPPLER IS BEING DISPLAYED.) GND = HOVER
TCAS VALID: (INDICATES THAT TCAS OUT IS VALID.) GND = VALID

THIS PAGE RESERVED

SECTION II
INSTALLATION
2.0 INTRODUCTION
This section provides information and suggestions to aid you In installing the EFS 40/EFS 50. We
recommend that you follow these suggestions closely to assure the best possible performance
from the equipment.
2.1 UNPACKING AND INSPECTING EQUIPMENT
Unpack the equipment carefully and examine each item carefully, inspecting it for evidence of
damage that may have happened during shipment. You will need to save the shipping container
and all packing materials should a damage claim need to be filed. It is a good idea to save the
shipping container and packing material anyway for shipping or storing the equipment.
2.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
The EFS 40/EFS 50 is designed to be flexible in terms of location of the units. The installation of
the EFS 40/EFS 50 will conform to the requirements of the customer, the installing agency, and
airframe constraints. The following suggestions and requirements will help you with installation
and provide you with long, satisfactory service from your equipment.
2.2.1 GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
2.2.1.1 General Cooling Considerations
Limiting the maximum operating temperature of any avionics is the most important consideration
to make when planning your equipment installation. While modern components generate much
less heat, the amount of components that fits into a unit is much greater. So the need for forced-
air cooling is still with us. A typical panel or avionics rack with multiple units generating heat can
cause temperature problems if adequate forced-air cooling is not present.
CAUTION
DO NOT DRILL HOLES IN PRESSURIZED AIRFRAMES
2.2.1.2 HIRF And Lighting Protection
The harness shielding and shield termination techniques described in this manual are identical to
those specified for the test harness used for HIRF and lightning certification testing. Further infor-
mation on bonding, backshells, shielding, and cable routing can be found in Bendix/King Installa-
tion Bulletin 332, P/N 600-09332-0000, Installation Techniques for HIRF and Lightning Protection.

Adherence to the information in this manual and in the installation bulletin is essential to establish
a certified HIRF and lightning installation environment.
Should grounding the shields at both ends of a wire cause unacceptable interference due to noise
sources on an aircraft. Double shielded wire may be substituted for single shielded wire shown in
this manual. The outer shield must be grounded at both ends to comply with HIRF and Lightning
requirements. The inner shield may then be grounded at a single end to protect against the aircraft
noise source. Normally the inner shield is grounded at the source end of the signal carried by the
wire. Planning to install double shielded wire for low level signals known to have a history of inter-
ference may be easier than later adding the double shielded wire into the aircraft harness.
2.2.2 SG 464 INSTALLATION
The SG 464 is mounted remotely. Refer to Figure 2-1 or Figure 2-2 for the SG 464 installation
drawing.
2.2.2.A. Cooling Considerations

The SG 464 requires a source of cooling air. There are two methods for cooling the SG
464. The SG 464 mounting rack has provisions for either external cooling or can be
equipped with a cooling fan on the bottom of the rack.
2.2.2.B. Installation Procedures For Fan Kits (071-04057-0000)

Select a mounting location that will allow at least 1 inch of free air space above and
behind the unit. Mark, punch, and drill the mounting holes to accommodate #6-32
mounting screws using the location dimensions show in Figure 2-1. Attach spacers to
the airframe with six (6) installer supplied #6 screws. These spacers will provide a min-
imum of 0.25 inch air space below the bottom of the fan require for proper operation.
The fan gets power from the SG 464. Secure the mounting rack to the spacers with
four (4) installer supplied #6 screws. Attach the harness connectors to the mounting
rack. Slide the SG 464 into the mounting rack and secure it with the locking device on
the front of the rack. Tighten the knob on the locking device until the unit is firmly se-
cured and safety wire knob to locking device.
2.2.2.C. Installation Procedures For Systems using alternative KA 33 Blowers.

mounting screws using the location dimensions shown in Figure 2-1. Attach spacer to
the airframe with two (2) installer supplied #6 screws. Attach SG 464 Plenum to the
airframe with two (2) installer supplied #6 screws. Secure the mounting rack to the
spacer and SG 464 Plenum with four (4) installer supplied #6 screws. Attach the har-
ness connectors to the mounting rack. Slide an air duct over each of the two cooling
air ports on the SG 464 Plenum. Slide the SG 464 into the mounting rack and secure
it with the locking devices on the front of the rack. Tighten the knobs on the locking de-
vices until the unit is firmly secured and safety wire knob to locking device.
2.2.3 SG 465 INSTALLATION

The SG 465 is mounted remotely. Refer to Figure 2-3, Figure 2-4, Figure 2-5, or Figure 2-6 for the
SG 465 installation drawing.

The SG 465 requires a source of cooling air. There are two methods for cooling the SG
465. The SG 465 mounting rack has provisions for either external cooling or can be
equipped with a cooling fan on the bottom of the rack.
2.2.3.B. Installation Procedures For Fan Kit P/N 071-04056-0000,-0001,-0002

The SG 465 mounting rack must be modified before installing the fan kit. Remove and
discard cover plate P/N 047-09171-0011 fastened to the bottom side of the SG 465
mounting with four (4) screws. Mount fan to SG 465 mounting rack using four (4) in-
staller supplied #6 screws in position previously occupied by removed cover plate. In-
sure tube cap over air input inlet of the SG 465 mounting rack are in place.
mounting screws using the location dimension shown in Figure 2-3, Figure 2-4, Figure
2-5, or Figure 2-6 as required. Secure two spacers, P/N 075-05087-0001 to airframe
with four (4) installer supplied #8 screws. These spacers will provide the minimum of
0.25 inch air space below the bottom of the fan required for proper operation. Secure
the mounting rack with fan to spacers using four (4) installer supplied #8 screws. The
fan gets its power from the SG 465. Attach the harness connectors to mounting rack.
Slide the SG 465 into the mounting rack and secure it with the locking devices on the
front of the rack. Tighten knobs on the locking devices until the unit is firmly secured
and safety wire knob to locking device.
2.2.3.C. Installation Procedures For Systems Using Alternative KA 33 Blower

mounting screws using the location dimensions shown in Figure 2-3, Figure 2-4, Figure
2-5 or Figure 2-6 as required. Secure the mounting rack to the airframe with four (4)
installer supplied #8 screws. Attach the harness connectors to the mounting rack. Re-
move caps over air inlets, slide an air duct over each of the two cooling air ports on the
mounting rack. Slide the SG 465 into the mounting rack and secure it with the locking
devices on the front of the rack. Tighten the knobs on the locking devices until the unit
is firmly secured and safety wire knob to locking device.
2.2.4 ED 461, ED 462 INSTALLATION
The ED 461 and ED 462 are mounted in the aircraft panel. The units can be mounted directly to
the panel or can be installed using a mounting rack.

The ED 461 EHSI and ED 462 EADI/EHSI panel-mounted display units require a
source of cooling air. Both units are available with provisions for external forced air
cooling or are available with a fan blower installed on the rear of the unit to provide

cooling. A single outlet on a KA 33 cooling blower, P/N 071-04037-0001, will supply an

adequate supply of external cooling air.
2.2.4.B. Installation Without Mounting Rack

Select a mounting location that is within easy reach and clearly visible to the pilot which
also conforms to a basic “T” panel configuration. This location must also allow sufficient
clearance at the rear of the unit for connectors, cables, and the external cooling air
hose, if installed, or air movement when cooling fan is used instead or air hose. Cut the
panel opening and prepare the mounting holes as shown in Figure 2-7 for the ED 461,
Figure 2-9 for ED 462-0100/-0800 and Figure 2-10 for the ED 462-1100/-1800 ver-
sions. Attach the cooling hose and proper harness connector to the unit and slide the
unit into the panel. Secure the unit with the bolts provided in the installation kit.
2.2.4.C. Installation With Mounting Rack

clearance at the rear of the unit for connectors, cables, the external cooling air hose if
installed or air movement when cooling fan is used instead of air hose. Cut the panel
opening and prepare the mounting holes as shown in Figure 2-8 for the ED 461 and
ED 462.
2.2.5 ED 551, ED 551A INSTALLATION
The ED 551 and ED 551A EADI/EHSI are panel-mounted display units.

An internal fan blower provides cooling for the unit.
2.2.5.B. Installation
clearance at the rear of the unit for connectors, cables, and the external cooling air
hose, if installed. Cut the panel opening and prepare the mounting holes as shown in
Figure 2-11. Slide the unit into the panel. Secure the unit with the bolts provided in the
installation kit.
2.2.6 CP 113F INSTALLATION
The CP 113F is mounted in the aircraft panel using Dzus rails and fasteners. Select a mounting
location that is within easy reach and clearly visible to the pilot. This location must also allow suf-
ficient clearance at the rear of the unit for connectors. Cut the panel opening as shown in Figure
2-12 and mount the Dzus rails on either side of the cutout. Attach the harness connector to the CP
113F and slide the unit into the panel. Secure the unit with the Dzus fasteners on either side of the
faceplate.

2.2.7 CP 466, CP 466B INSTALLATION
The CP 466 and CP 466B are mounted in the aircraft panel using Dzus rails and fasteners. Select
a mounting location that is within easy reach and clearly visible to the pilot. This location must also
allow sufficient clearance at the rear of the unit for connectors. Cut the panel opening as shown
in Figure 2-13 and mount the Dzus rails on either side of the cutout. Attach the harness connector
to the CP 466 or CP 466B and slide the unit into the panel. Secure the unit with the Dzus fasteners
on either side of the faceplate.
2.2.8 CP 467, CP 468, CP 469 INSTALLATION
The CP 467, CP 468, and CP 469 are mounted in the aircraft panel using Dzus rails and fasteners.
Select a mounting location that is within easy reach and clearly visible to the pilot. This location
must also allow sufficient clearance at the rear of the unit for connectors. Cut the panel opening
as shown in Figure 2-14 and mount the Dzus rails on either side of the cutout. Attach the harness
connector to the CP 467, CP 468, or CP 469 and slide the unit into the panel. Secure the unit with
the Dzus fasteners on either side of the faceplate.
2.2.9 CP 469A INSTALLATION
The CP 469A is mounted in the aircraft panel using Dzus rails and fasteners. Select a mounting
location that is within easy reach and clearly visible to the pilot. This location must also allow suf-
ficient clearance at the rear of the unit for connectors. Cut the panel opening as shown in Figure
2-15 and mount the Dzus rails on either side of the cutout. Attach the harness connector to the CP
469A and slide the unit into the panel. Secure the unit with the Dzus fasteners on either side of
the faceplate.
2.2.10 CP 470 INSTALLATION
The CP 470 is mounted in the aircraft panel. Select a mounting location that is within easy reach
and clearly visible to the pilot. This location must also allow sufficient clearance at the rear of the
unit for connectors. Cut the panel opening, mark, punch and drill holes to accommodate mounting
screw as shown in Figure 2-16. Attach the harness connector to the CP 470 and slide the unit into
the panel. Secure the unit with four mounting screws.
CAUTION
2.2.11 KA 33 INSTALLATION
Refer to Figure 2-17 for the KA 33-01 and Figure 2-18 for the KA 33-02. Select a mounting location
that will allow a minimum of one inch clearance in front of the air intake. Additionally, the fan should
not be mounted more than 36 inches from the avionics stack. Avoid locations that will allow cold
air from the air conditioner or hot air from the heater to be drawn through the KA 33. Drill the

mounting holes as shown in the appropriate figure and secure the unit to the airframe with #8
screws (installer supplied). Connect the air ducts to the output ports as required.
2.2.12 KA 163A INSTALLATION
Refer to the Outline and Mounting Drawing, Figure 2-19, for the KA 163A mounting dimensions.
The KA 163A is rigid mounted. Mark, punch and drill four mounting holes. Use four #6 screws and
the four holes drilled to secure the flanges of the KA 163A in place.
CAUTION
2.2.13 SU 463 EFIS REVERSIONARY SWITCHING UNIT INSTALLATION
The SU 463 is mounted remotely. Refer to Figure 2-20 for the SU 463 installation drawing. Select
a mounting location that will allow at least 1 inch of free air space above and behind the unit. Mark,
punch, and drill the mounting holes to accommodate #6-32 mounting screws using the location
dimensions show in Figure. 2-20. Secure the mounting rack to the spacers with four (4) installer
supplied #6 screws. Attach the harness connectors to the mounting rack. Slide the SU 463 into
the mounting rack and secure it with the locking device on the from of the rack. Tighten the knob
on the locking device until the unit is firmly secured and safety wire knob to locking device.
CAUTION
2.2.14 ANNUNCIATOR UNIT AND SWITCH ANNUNCIATORS.
A sample switch annunciator installation drawing is illustrated in Figure 2-21 for Bendix/King an-
nunciator units and switch/annunciators P/N 031-00535-0000/-0100.
CAUTION
2.2.15 JOYSTICK/ENTER SWITCH
A JOYSTICK/ENTER SWITCH installation drawing is illustrated in Figure 2-22 for Bendix/King

JOYSTICK SWITCH P/N 031-00764-0000 and ENTER SWITCH P/N 031-00330-0000.
CAUTION

2.2.16 HARNESS AND CABLE FABRICATION
The installing agency must supply and fabricate all cables external to the units. The connectors
required are supplied in the installation kits. The lengths and routing of the external must be care-
fully studied and planned before attempting installation of the equipment. Use good quality strand-
ed wire with at least 600 V insulation that will not support a flame. Allow adequate space for instal-
lation of cable and connectors. Avoid sharp bends and placing the cables too near the aircraft con-
trol cables.

THIS PAGE RESERVED

FIGURE 2-1 SG 464 (Non-HIRF) Installation Drawing

SHEET 1 of 2 (Dwg No 155-05718-0000, Rev 1, Sht 1)



FIGURE 2-2 SG 464 (HIRF) Installation Drawing








FIGURE 2-3A SG 465 Short Rack (Non-HIRF) Installation Drawing


FIGURE 2-3A SG 465 Short Rack (Non-HIRF) Installation Drawing






FIGURE 2-5 SG 465 Short Rack (HIRF) Installation Drawing


FIGURE 2-5 SG 465 Short Rack (HIRF) Installation Drawing


FIGURE 2-6 SG 465 High Altitude, Short Rack (HIRF) Installation Drawing

FIGURE 2-6 SG 465 High Altitude, Short Rack (HIRF) Installation Drawing

FIGURE 2-7 ED 461 All Versions Without Mounting Rack, Installation Drawing
(Dwg No 155-01576-0000, Rev 11, Sht 1)

FIGURE 2-8 ED 461/ED 462 All Versions With Mounting Rack, Installation Drawing

FIGURE 2-8 ED 461/ED 462 All Versions With Mounting Rack, Installation Drawing

FIGURE 2-9 ED 462 -0100/-0800, -2100/-2800 Versions (Standard Back) Without Mounting Rack, Installation Drawing
(Dwg No 155-01576-0000, Rev 11, Sht 2)

FIGURE 2-10 ED 462 -1100/-1800, -3100/-3800 Versions (Inverted Back) Without Mounting Rack, Installation Drawing
(Dwg No 155-01576-0000, Rev 11, Sht 3)

FIGURE 2-11 ED 551/ED 551A Installation Drawing

SHEET 1 of 2 (Dwg No 155-05763-0000, Rev AA, Sht 1)

FIGURE 2-11 ED 551/ED 551A Installation Drawing


FIGURE 2-12 CP 113F Installation Drawing

(Dwg No 300-04550-0000, Rev BB, Sht 1)

FIGURE 2-13 CP 466A Installation Drawing




FIGURE 2-13A CP 466B Installation Drawing


FIGURE 2-13A CP 466B Installation Drawing


FIGURE 2-14 CP 467/CP 468/CP 469 Installation Drawing


FIGURE 2-14 CP 467/CP 468/CP 469 Installation Drawing



(Dwg No 155-05994-0000, Rev AA)

FIGURE 2-16 CP 470 Installation Drawing


FIGURE 2-16 CP 470 Installation Drawing


FIGURE 2-17 KA 33 -01 Version Blower Installation Drawing

(Dwg No 155-05574-0000, Rev 5)

FIGURE 2-18 KA 33 -02 Version Blower Installation Drawing

(Dwg No 155-05574-0001, Rev 0)

FIGURE 2-19 KA 163A Installation Drawing

(Dwg No 155-05665-0000, Rev 0)

FIGURE 2-20 SU 463 (Non-HIRF) Installation Drawing

(Dwg No 155-05785-0000, Rev 0)

FIGURE 2-20A SU 463 (HIRF Rack) Installation Drawing


FIGURE 2-20A SU 463 (HIRF Rack) Installation Drawing


FIGURE 2-21 Annunciator Unit And Switch Annunciator Unit Installation Drawing
SHEET 1 of 2 (Jun/2000)

FIGURE 2-21 Annunciator Unit And Switch Annunciator Unit Installation Drawing
SHEET 2 of 2 (Jun/2000)

FIGURE 2-22 JOYSTICK/ENTER Switch Installation Drawing

(Dwg No 155-05826-0000, Rev 0)

SECTION III
SYSTEM PLANNING
3.1 INTRODUCTION
Section III contains information relative to EFS 40/EFS 50 system requirements, options available
to the system planner, and the electrical characteristics of the various interfaces. Pin function de-
scriptions and interconnect diagrams are also contained in this section. Section 3.18 is an index
arranged by unit connector pin numbers and by pin function names referenced to the section num-
ber of pin function descriptions within Section III.
Figure 3-1 is an EFS 40 EADI/ EHSI System Block Diagram and Figure 3-2 is an EFS 40 EHSI
System Block Diagram.
Section III is divided into major sections by interface type or major topic. Each major section de-
scribes in detail the specifications for particular types of interfaces with your particular EFS 40/
EFS 50 system. The general format used within each interface type section uses the following
subsections:
3.X.1 Applicable Part Numbers.

3.X.2 Function.
3.X.3 Requirements and Limitations
3.X.4 Electrical Characteristics
3.X.5 Interface
3.1.1 APPLICABLE PART NUMBERS SUBSECTION DESCRIPTION
The versions of the EFS 40/EFS 50 system component units allow interface to various avionics
systems made by other manufacturers. The interface capabilities of each version of the EFS 40/
EFS 50 system component units are described in the 3.X.1 subsection. Specific differences be-
tween other versions may be found in Section 3.X.4 Electrical Characteristics.
Compatibility of unit versions is indicated by a part number matrix. Each column in the matrix rep-
resents a consecutive or related set of version numbers that increment from the left column to the
right. The numbers in the matrix indicate the version of the unit which are the last four digits of the
Bendix/King part number assigned to the unit. All applicable versions of an individual unit are rep-
resented in this matrix. A column may contain a version number, a dash or be blank. If a version
number is present in the matrix, the given version of the unit is compatible with the interface being
described. Numbers under the version number indicate the number of a hardware modification
which is required for the unit to be compatible with the interface being described. If dashes are
found in place of a number, the unit is not compatible. If blanks are found in the matrix, the com-
patibility of the part number was not determined at the time of publication of this manual. In this
case, you will need to contact Bendix/King Product Support for the latest information.

In January 1989 Bendix/King changed from a nine digit to a twelve digit part numbering system.
The new larger numbers incorporate the software version into the last two digits of the part number
of units that contain software. These software version digits are 00 on units that do not contain
software. The two digits immediately preceding the software version indicate the hardware version
of the unit. A separate four digit software sticker, on software units, repeats the last two digits of
the unit part number (software version) as its first two digits and incorporates the software modi-
fication status as its last two digits. Both software version and modification status begin with 01.
Each time a new software version is established its modification status begins with 01. Different
software versions imply different operational features and/or interface capabilities and software
modifications imply software repairs (bug fixes) to insure proper operation of these features and
interfaces. Software version upgrades frequently require hardware modifications to the unit.
These hardware modifications accompanying software version upgrades do not necessarily
change the hardware version of the unit.
UNIT PART NUMBER YYY-ZZZZZ-HHSS

SOFTWARE ID STICKER SS/XX
HARDWARE VERSION HH
SOFTWARE VERSION SS
SOFTWARE MODIFICATION STATUS XX
This manual, when referring to operational features and/or interface capabilities of software, may
specify either the four digit software version or the two digit software release number. The four
digit software version number ‘SS/XX’ is the same number displayed on the software ID sticker on
the unit. The two digit software release ‘SS’ is the same as the last two digits of the unit part num-
ber and the first two digits of the software ID sticker.
This manual references only the new twelve digit part numbers. EFS 40/EFS 50 component units
produced before January 1989 displaying nine digit part numbers are equivalent to twelve digit
part numbers as shown below:
UNIT NINE DIGIT TWELVE DIGIT
ED 461 066-3123-00 066-03123-0100

ED 461 066-3123-01 066-03123-0200
ED 461 066-3123-02 066-03123-0300
ED 461 066-3123-03 066-03123-0400
ED 461 066-3123-04 066-03123-0500
ED 461 066-3123-05 066-03123-0600
ED 461 066-3123-06 066-03123-0700
ED 461 066-3123-07 066-03123-0800
ED 462 066-3125-00 066-03125-0100
ED 462 066-3125-01 066-03125-0200
ED 462 066-3125-02 066-03125-0300
ED 462 066-3125-03 066-03125-0400
ED 462 066-3125-04 066-03125-0500
ED 462 066-3125-05 066-03125-0600
ED 462 066-3125-06 066-03125-0700
ED 462 066-3125-07 066-03125-0800
ED 462 066-3125-10 066-03125-1100

EFS 40/EFS 50
ED 462 066-3125-11 066-03125-1200

ED 462 066-3125-12 066-03125-1300
ED 462 066-3125-13 066-03125-1400
ED 462 066-3125-14 066-03125-1500
ED 462 066-3125-15 066-03125-1600
ED 462 066-3125-16 066-03125-1700
ED 462 066-3125-17 066-03125-1800
SG 464 066-4020-00 066-04020-0203

SG 464 066-4020-01 066-04020-0103
SG 465 066-4021-00 066-04021-02SS

SG 465 066-4021-01 066-04021-01SS
SG 465 066-4021-04 066-04021-04SS
SG 465 066-4021-05 066-04021-05SS
SG 465 066-4021-11 066-04021-11SS
SG 465 066-4021-12 066-04021-12SS
SG 465 066-4021-14 066-04021-14SS
SG 465 066-4021-15 066-04021-15SS
SG 465 066-4021-17 066-04021-17SS
SG 465 066-4021-50 066-04021-50SS
Where SS = software release 01, 02, or 03/05/11/12/14/15/17/50
CP 467 071-1439-00 071-01439-0100

CP 467 071-1439-01 071-01439-0200
CP 467 071-1439-02 071-01439-0300
CP 467 071-1439-03 071-01439-0400
CP 467 071-1439-04 071-01439-0500
CP 467 071-1439-05 071-01439-0600
CP 468 071-1439-10 071-01439-1100

CP 468 071-1439-11 071-01439-1200
CP 468 071-1439-12 071-01439-1300
CP 468 071-1439-13 071-01439-1400
CP 468 071-1439-14 071-01439-1500
CP 468 071-1439-15 071-01439-1600
3.1.2 FUNCTION SUBSECTION DESCRIPTION
Detailed information concerning the purpose and operation of the interface are described in this
section.

EFS 40/EFS 50
3.1.3 REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS SUBSECTION DESCRIPTION
Any operational requirements or limitations relating to the interface are described in this section.
Widely followed regulatory requirements may also be described here. Regionally enforced re-
quirements vary greatly and adherence to them remain the responsibility of the installing agency.
3.1.4 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS SUBSECTION DESCRIPTION
The electrical characteristics and format of the interface signals are described in this section. Any
version related differences in signal format are also described here. Pin and line names with lines
over them generally indicate active low signals, although the absence of a line over the name does
not necessarily indicate an active high.
NOTE
Lowercase pin letter designators are shown as underlined uppercase letters.
3.1.5 INTERFACE SUBSECTION DESCRIPTION
Interconnect drawings for units that are often installed are found in this section. The unit connector
designator for Bendix/King products consist of a “P” followed by the numeric portion of the unit
nomenclature and alpha model suffix (if assigned), followed by the number of the connector on
the unit. For example, connector number 1A on the SG 465 would be P4651A.
The harness shielding and shield termination techniques described in this manual are identical to
those specified for the test harness used for HIRF and lightning certification testing. Further infor-
mation on bonding, backshells, shielding, and cable routing can be found in Bendix/King Installa-
tion Bulletin 332, P/N 600-09332-0000, Installation Techniques for HIRF and Lightning Protection.
Adherence to the information in this manual and in the installation bulletin is essential to establish
a certified HIRF and lightning installation environment.
Should grounding the shields at both ends of a wire cause unacceptable interference due to noise
sources on an aircraft; double shielded wire may be substituted for single shielded wire shown in
this manual. The outer shield must be grounded at both ends to comply with HIRF and Lightning
requirements. The inner shield may then be grounded at a single end to protect against the aircraft
noise source. Normally the inner shield is grounded at the source end of the signal carried by the
wire. Planning to install double shielded wire for low level signals known to have a history of inter-
ference may be easier than later adding the double shielded wire into the aircraft harness.
Page 3-4 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010

FIGURE 3-1 EFS 40 EADI/EHSI System Block Diagram

(Dwg No 696-00698-0006, Rev 1)

FIGURE 3-2 EFS 40 EHSI System Block Diagram

(Dwg No 696-00698-0007, Rev 2)

3.2 INTRASYSTEM
3.2.1 INTRASYSTEM APPLICABLE PART NUMBERS
3.2.1.A. Symbol Generators

NOTE
In installations using more than one symbol generator, all symbol generators must
have identical software version numbers. Symbol generators with ADI capability shall
not be interfaced to symbol generators with HSI only capability.
3.2.1.A.1. Symbol Generators for Electronic Attitude and Horizontal Situation Indicators
The following part numbers of the SG 465 will drive both electronic attitude and hor-
izontal situation indicators:
SG 465 066-04021-
- 01XX 02XX - - - - - - -
- 11XX 12XX - - - 16XX 17XX - -
50XX - - - - - - - - -
3.2.1.A.2. Symbol Generators for Electronic Horizontal Situations Indicators
The following part numbers of the SG 464 and SG 465 will drive only electronic hor-
izontal situation indicators:
SG 464 066-04020-
- 01XX 02XX - - - - - - -
- 11XX 12XX - - - - - - -
SG 465 066-04021-
- - - - 04XX 05XX - - - -
- - - - 14XX 15XX - - - -
3.2.1.B. Electronic Displays
3.2.1.B.1. Electronic Displays for the EFS 40
The ED 461 and ED 462 are four by four inch electronic displays. The following part
numbers of the ED 461 and ED 462 are compatible with all part numbers of the SG
464 and SG 465:
ED 461 066-03123-
- 0100 0200 0300 0400 0500 0600 0700 0800 -

- 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 -
ED 462 066-03125-
- 0100 0200 0300 0400 0500 0600 0700 0800 -
- 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800 -
- - - 2300 2400 2500 2600 2700 2800 -
- 3100 3200 3300 3400 3500 3600 3700 3800 -
3.2.1.B.2. Electronic Displays for the EFS 50
The ED 551 is a five by five inch electronic display. The following part numbers of
the ED 551 are compatible with the following part numbers of the SG 464 and SG
465:
ED 551 066-03137-
- 0100 0200 0300 0400 - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - -
- 2100 2200 2300 2400 - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - -
SG 464 066-04020-
- - - - - - - - - -
- 11XX 12XX - - - - - - -
SG 465 066-04021-
- - - - - - - - - -
- 11XX 12XX - 14XX 15XX 16XX 17XX - -
50XX - - - - - - - - -
The ED 551A is a five by five inch electronic display. The following part numbers
of the ED 551A are compatible with all part numbers of the SG 464 and SG 465
when the symbol generators contain Software version 0501 and above. Symbol
generators that contain earlier software versions will not clip the horizon line at the
display edge; this allows the horizon line to continue beyond the normal edge of the
display:
ED 551A 066-03137-
- - - - - - - - - -
- 1100 1200 1300 1400 - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - -
- 3100 3200 3300 3400 - 3600 - - -
3.2.1.C. Control Panels

It is recommended that the CP 467 not be used with symbol generators configured only
for horizontal situation indicators since the electronic attitude indicator controls on the
control panel would not be functional. The CP 469 and CP 469A are only for use with
symbol generators configured for use as an MFD SG. The CP 470 is only for use with
symbol generators with electronic attitude capability. Noting these exception, the fol-
lowing part numbers of the CP 467, CP 468, CP 469 and CP 470 control panels are
compatible with all part numbers of the SG 464 and SG 465:
CP 467 071-01439-
- 0100 0200 0300 0400 0500 0600 - - -
- - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - -
- 3100 3200 3300 - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - -
CP 468 071-01439-
- - - - - - - - - -
- 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 - - -
- 2100 2200 2300 2400 2500 2600 - - -
- - - - - - - - - -
- 4100 4200 4300 4400 - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - -
CP 469 071-01439-
- - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - -
- 5100 5200 - - - - - - -
CP 469A 071-01511-
- 01XX 02XX - - - - - - -
CP 470 071-01517-
- 0100 0200 0300 0400 - - - - -
3.2.1.D. Switching Units
The following part numbers of the SU 463 switching units are compatible with all part
numbers of the SG 464 and SG 465:
SU 463 071-00074-

- 0100 0200 0300 0400 0500 - - - -
3.2.2 INTRASYSTEM FUNCTION
3.2.2.1 Symbol Generators
The SG 464 and SG 465 symbol generators receive information from other systems such as atti-
tude and heading reference, airdata, navigation, weather radar. and flight control. This information
is processed into deflection signals and multicolor video signals that are sent to the electronic dis-
plays. Additionally. the symbol generator serves as a concentrator of navigation information and
sends the displayed navigation information to the flight control system.
The SG 464 symbol generator is only capable of driving an electronic horizontal situation indicator
(EHSI) display. Some part numbers of the SG 465 are capable of driving an EHSI display and an
electronic attitude director indicator (EADI). Refer to Section 3.2.1 Intrasystem Applicable Part
Numbers for a description of the capabilities of each version of the SG 464 and SG 465.
The symbol generator is constantly performing internal diagnostic testing and can display a variety
of maintenance pages to facilitate both installation and troubleshooting. When dual attitude and
heading inputs are provided to a symbol generator, the symbol generator provides annunciation
on the display unit in the event that differences between the side-one and side-two inputs exceed
established tolerances. For dual EADI/EHSI and dual EADI/EHSI with MFD installations, where
an ARINC 429 Cross-talk bus is connected between symbol generators, a comparison is made of
attitude, heading, glideslope, localizer, radio altitude, and MLS horizontal and vertical deviation
data as processed within and displayed by each symbol generator. Annunciation is provided by
the symbol generator on the display unit in the event that differences between the side-one and
side-two displayed inputs exceed established tolerances. The Cross-talk bus is also used to an-
nunciate on the display unit when both pilot and copilot are displaying the same source of naviga-
tion, heading or attitude data and to provide CAT II ILS monitoring. Symbol generator discrete in-
terfaces, combined with panel-mounted annunciator switches and external relays, allow for a
number of reversionary mode combinations should a symbol generator or display unit fall.
When installed with Bendix/King KNS 81 RNAV or with a an ARINC 429 Long Range NAV (LRN)
conforming to GAMA data formats, the symbol generator will accept inputs from an external me-
chanical joystick to position a waypoint on the EHSI or MFD (multifunction display) map display.
The coordinates of the waypoint are then sent to the LRN or to the KNS 81 where they can be
used for navigation.
Specific symbol generator installations are configured using a menu driven program presented on
the display unit. The resulting configuration data is stored both in the symbol generator and in a
configuration module attached to the mounting rack. This configuration module remains with the
aircraft and is used to transfer the configuration information to replacement symbol generators.
Whenever the configuration stored in the configuration module and the configuration stored in the
symbol generator differ, you will be asked to choose one to use. This feature allows for one symbol
generator to configure a fleet of aircraft or for a single aircraft to configure several symbol gener-
ators.

3.2.2.2 Electronic Displays
The ED 461 and ED 462 are both four by four inch multicolor electronic displays. The ED 461 in-
cludes the mode, course, and heading selectors, and the brightness control necessary for an in-
stallation using an EHSI only. The ED 462 may be used either as an EADI or EHSI. An inclinom-
eter is mounted on the front bezel of the ED 462 when it is used as an EADI. Both electronic dis-
plays receive power from the symbol generator.
The ED 551 and ED 551A are both five by five inch multicolor electronic displays. Both the ED 551
and the ED 551A may be used either as an EADI or EHSI. An inclinometer is mounted on the front
bezel when either is used as an EADI. Neither electronic display receives power from the symbol
generator.
The display format of installations using the ED 461, ED 462 and ED 551A are all identical with
the exception that the ED 551A display is scaled larger than the other two displays. The display
format of the installations using the ED 551 is different from the other displays. The ED 551 display
has the same size compass rose and character size as the ED 461 and ED 462 displays but the
information is spread out eliminating the need to write over the compass rose and horizon display
when pointer scales are displayed.
3.2.2.3 Control Panels
The CP 467 control panel provides mode, course, and heading selectors along with the system
test, radio altimeter test, DH set and DH test signals, and the EADI and EHSI brightness controls.
Versions of the CP 468 control panel provide mode, course, and heading selectors along with the
system test, and the brightness control for an EHSI only installation. Other versions of the CP 468
control panel provide mode, course. and heading selectors along with the system test. and the
EADI and EHSI brightness controls for EADI/EHSI installations that do not include a radio altime-
ter interface.
The CP 469 control panel is used to control the multifunction display. The CP 469 control panel
provides mode and course selectors along with the system test, course select source, and the
MFD brightness control.
The CP 469A control panel provides all of the CP 469 functions and also provides a TCAS select
button, a joystick and joystick enter button. checklist buttons and the checklist memory.
The CP 470 control panel is used in EADI/EHSI installations that include a radio altimeter interface
but do not include a CP 467. The CP 470 control panel provides radio altimeter test, DH set and
DH test signals, and the EADI brightness control.
The control panels (with the exception of the CP 470 which requires no power, and the CP 469A
which is powered from the aircraft power bus) receive power from the symbol generator. Two con-
trol panels can operate in parallel for tandem trainer applications.

3.2.2.4 Switching Units
The SU 463 switching unit provides the reversionary mode switching for the EFS 40 and EFS 50
three tube EADI/EHSI with MFD), four tube (dual EADI/EHSI), and five tube (dual EADI/EHSI with
MFD) installations. The SU 463 provides switching of signals between the symbol generator, dis-
play units, control panels and power buses. A few spare relay contacts are available for other
switching needs.
3.2.2.5 Tandem Symbol Generators
Symbol generator software release 0701 added tandem symbol generator interface capability.
The tandem symbol generator configuration was developed for tandem cockpit aircraft with dual
EADI/EHSIs and two symbol generators. The tandem configuration option causes both symbol
generators to have synchronized display content and format. Since the two symbol generators re-
main synchronized the option is available to have each symbol generator drive the EADI display
unit of the other cockpit. This prevents either cockpit from losing both EADI and EHSI with the loss
of both halves of a single symbol generator. When display units are cross-wired this way it is rec-
ommended that the DH set and DH on/off control panel signals also be cross-wired to eliminate
the X-talk synchronization delay during DH set. When the DH’s are cross-wired a heavy ground
strap is connected between the symbol generators to insure both are always at the same ground
potential.
For tandem symbol generator installations, both symbol generators are configured as symbol gen-
erator #1 but one symbol generator is configured as the master and the other as the slave. Each
symbol generator is controlled by its own control panel and the X-talk busses between the symbol
generators then automatically change the other symbol generator, within half a second, to match
the one just changed by the control panel. During simultaneous operation of the control panels,
the control panel of the master symbol generator is used.
Boxes normally displayed to indicate that both pilots are displaying the same source are not pro-
vided with the tandem symbol generator configuration. Only the master symbol generator is used
to send information to the LNAV. EFIS system failures are not synchronized and failure messages
are only displayed on the symbol generator detecting the fault. Should any of the control panel
controls fail they will be ignored and the other control panel will continue to control both symbol
generators.
Composite is the only recommended reversionary mode for tandem symbol generator configura-
tion.
3.2.3 INTRASYSTEM REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS
In installations using more than one symbol generator, all symbol generators must have identical
software version numbers. Symbol generators with ADI capability shall not be interfaced to symbol
generators with HSI only capability.

Installations utilizing the Standby reversionary mode with an MFD symbol generator must have
the same equipment configuration for all symbol generators. Although it is not necessary in these
installations for all symbol generators to have the same operating configuration. the operating con-
figuration of the MFD symbol generator will determine the EFIS operating characteristics for the
selecting crewmember during Standby reversionary mode.
The ED 461 and ED 462 display units each require a minimum of 10 cubic feet per minute (CFM)
air flow of sea level density air. For the ED 461 and ED 462 display units this may be accomplished
either with a fan mounted on the display unit or may be piped in from an external cooling blower
such as the KA 33. The ED 551 and ED 551A display units are equipped with an internal cooling
fan. An airflow sensor within the display unit will generate a fault indication on the display unit if
insufficient airflow is detected. Refer to 3.2.4.E for more information.
The SG 464 and SG 465 symbol generators require forced air cooling. This requirement can be
met by using either a fan mounted underneath the mounting rack or an external cooling blower
such as the KA 33. For a listing of blowers rated for various altitudes and ambient temperatures
refer to section 2 of this manual. An airflow sensor within the symbol generator will generate a fault
indication on the display unit if insufficient airflow is detected in combination with a high symbol
generator internal temperature. Refer to 3.2.4.R. for more information about the airflow sensor.
The shields of the video, deflection and mode wires should be stripped back as short a distance
as possible at the connection points. The stripped deflection wires and their connecting pins at
bulkhead connectors should be separated as much as possible from the stripped video and mode
wires and their connecting pins. Shielded wire of 85% minimum shield coverage must be used for
the video, deflection and mode wires. If the noise generated by the fast rise times of digital signals
carried on the video and mode wires is allowed to couple into the analog deflection wires, a small
distortion will be visible at the beginning of each stroke on the display unit. Under no circumstanc-
es should the installer exceed 25 feet in the wiring harness between the display unit and symbol
generator.
NOTE
All HIRF and Lightning testing conducted by Bendix/King for the Single EADI/EHSI with
MFD. Dual EADI/EHSI. and Dual EADI/EHSI with MFD configurations included the SU
463 Reversionary Switching Unit. This unit includes backshell connectors and special
care has been taken inside the unit to isolate critical signals. If an installer desires to
install user supplied relays for this switching, the installer will be responsible for all ad-
ditional HIRF and Lighting testing for this installation.
3.2.4 INTRASYSTEM ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
3.2.4.A. Display Power
P4611-1 P4621-1 +27.5 VDC FILTERED POWER

P4611-34 P4621-34 +85 VDC POWER
P4611-33 P4621-33 +30 VDC POWER
P4611-49 P4621-49 -30 VDC POWER
P4611-17 P4621-17 +15 VDC POWER
P4611-50 P4621-50 -15 VDC POWER

P4611-16 P4621-16 +7 VDC POWER

P4611-48 P4621-48 -7 VDC POWER
P4611-2 P4621-2 GROUND
P4611-19 P4621-19 GROUND
P4611-36 P4621-36 GROUND
ED 461, ED 462 display unit power is supplied by the symbol generator. The current
requirements of the display units are as follows:
+27.5 at 450 mA maximum

-30.0 at 100 mA maximum
+7.0 at 1.0 A maximum
P4651B-8 ADI +27.5 VDC FILTERED POWER

P4651B-79 ADI +85 VDC POWER
P4651B-11 ADI -30 VDC POWER
P4651B-105 ADI +5 VDC (TEST)
P4651B-102 ADI GROUND
P4651A-6 P4641A-25 HSI +27.5 VDC FILTERED POWER
P4651A-93 P4641A-12 HSI +85 VDC POWER
P4651A-12 P4641A-14 HSI -30 VDC POWER
P4651A-102 P4641A-27 HSI +5 VDC (TEST)
P4651A-10 P4641A-21 HSI GROUND
The SG 464, SG 465 supplies power to the ED 461, ED 462 display unit. Output volt-
age tolerances and supply current capabilities of the SG 464, SG 465 are as follows:
+27.5 at 3.0 A maximum, the voltage level varies with the aircraft 28 Vdc supply input
+85.0 ± 4.25 Vdc at 350 mA maximum
+30.0 ± 2.00 Vdc at 1.2 A maximum

-30.0 ±2.00 Vdc at 1.2 A maximum

+15.0 ±1.50 Vdc at 2.75 A maximum
-15.0 ±1.50 Vdc at 2.75 A maximum
+7.0 ±0.50 Vdc at 2.0 A maximum
-7.0 ±0.50 Vdc at 2.0 A maximum
The +27.5 Vdc filtered power is internally fused at 3.0 Amp. The +27.5 Vdc power is
filtered aircraft power. It is not produced by the power supply and can continue to be
present when the power supply is not operating. The +7.0 Vdc and the -7.0 Vdc power
are both internally fused at 3.0 Amp. The +85.0 Vdc power is current limited at 0.55
Amp, the +30.0 Vdc and the -30.0 Vdc power are both current limited at 1.7 Amp, and
the +15 Vdc and the -15 Vdc power are both current limited at 4.1 Amp. Current limiting
will fold back all power supply voltages except for the +27.5 Vdc filtered power. The
power supply fold back current monitoring is sensed on the transformer primary. Fold
back currents for secondary voltages assume all other secondary power voltages are
supplying nominal power ratings to a display unit. The +7.0 Vdc power supplies both
the display unit and the control panel. The +5.0 Vdc (test) power is for test purposes
only and is not to be used to power equipment external to the symbol generator. This
output is used to measure the level of the +5.0 Vdc power supply.
3.2.4.B. Display Video
P4611-39, P4621-39 P5511-U, P551A1-U VIDEO RED HI

P4611-38, P4621-38 P5511-V, P551A1-V VIDEO RED LO
P4611-41, P4621-41 P5511-Y, P551A1-Y VIDEO GREEN HI
P4611-40, P4621-40 P5511-Z, P551A1-Z VIDEO GREEN LO
P4611-37, P4621-37 P5511-W, P551A1-W VIDEO BLUE HI
P4611-22, P4621-22 P5511-X, P551A1-X VIDEO BLUE LO
The display unit presents a 100 ohm load between each video HI and LO input. The
received video signal is digital with a signal greater than 0.2 V at the HI input relative
to the LO input producing an ON condition.
P4651B-13 ADI VIDEO RED HI

P4651B-14 ADI VIDEO RED LO
P4651B-26 ADI VIDEO GREEN HI
P4651B-27 ADI VIDEO GREEN LO
P4651B-40 ADI VIDEO BLUE HI
P4651B-41 ADI VIDEO BLUE LO
P4651A-28 P4641A-37 HSI VIDEO RED HI
P4651A-29 P4641A-36 HSI VIDEO RED LO
P4651A-42 P4641A-52 HSI VIDEO GREEN HI
P4651A-43 P4641A-51 HSI VIDEO GREEN LO
P4651A-55 P4641A-79 HSI VIDEO BLUE HI
P4651A-56 P4641A-65 HSI VIDEO BLUE LID
The symbol generator digital video outputs are capable of driving a 20 mA load. OFF
is greater than 2.5 V measured LO relative to HI and ON is greater than 2.5 V mea-
sured HI relative to LO.

3.2.4.C. Display Deflection
P4611-45, P4621-45 P5511-R, P551A1-R X DEFLECTION HI

P4611-46, P4621-46 P5511-P, P551A1-P X DEFLECTION LO
P4611-43, P4621-43 P5511-E, P551A1-E Y DEFLECTION HI
P4611-44, P4621-44 P5511-D, P551A1-D Y DEFLECTION LO
The display units not approved for HIRF and Lightning present a 5 k ohms load be-
tween each deflection HI and LO input. The display units approved for HIRF and Light-
ning present a 25 k ohms load between each deflection HI and LO input. HIRF and
Lightning approved units have the last four digits of the part number greater than or
equal to the following: ED 461 -1100, ED 462 -2300, ED 551 and ED 551A -2100.
Display deflection distance is directly proportional to the deflection voltage applied to

the HI and LO inputs with the center of the display corresponding to 0.0 V for both the
X (horizontal) deflection and the Y (vertical) deflection. A positive X deflection voltage
(HI input relative to LO input) produces a right deflection and a negative voltage a left
deflection. A positive Y deflection voltage (HI input relative to LO input) produces an
upward deflection and a negative voltage a downward deflection.
The symbol generators may be configured, via the configuration menu, at the time of
installation for either a 4.0 V or 5.0 V maximum deflection voltage. A 4.0 V maximum
deflection is used with the ED 461, ED 462, and ED 551A display units and a 5.0 V
maximum deflection voltage is used with the ED 551 display unit.
P4651B-67 ADI X DEFLECTION HI

P4651B-68 ADI X DEFLECTION LO
P4651B-53 ADI Y DEFLECTION HI
P4651B-54 ADI Y DEFLECTION LO
P4651A-82 P4641A-64 HSI X DEFLECTION HI
P4651A-96 P4641A-78 HSI X DEFLECTION LO
P4651A-69 P4641A-50 HSI Y DEFLECTION HI
P4651A-70 P4641A-63 HSI Y DEFLECTION LO
The symbol generator analog deflection outputs are capable of driving a 100 mA load.
Each LO output is internally connected to ground through a 100 ohms resistor. Refer
to 3.2.4.C above for a description of deflection voltage, polarity and configuration
choices.
3.2.4.D. Display Mode
P4611-28, P4621-28 P5511-A, P551A1-A MODE HI

P4611-27, P4621-27 P5511-B, P551A1-B MODE LO
The display unit presents a 100 ohms load between each mode HI and LO input. The
received mode signal is digital with a signal of greater than 0.2 V at the HI input relative

to the LO input producing an ON (stroke mode) condition and a signal of greater than
0.2 V at the LO input relative to the HI input producing an OFF (retrace mode) condi-
tion.
P4651B-2 ADI MODE HI

P4651B-1 ADI MODE LO
P4651A-15 P4641A-38 HSI MODE HI
P4651A-16 P4641A-24 HSI MODE LO
The symbol generator digital mode outputs are capable of driving a 20 mA load. OFF
(retrace mode is greater than 2.0 V measured LO relative to HI and ON (stroke mode)
is greater than 2.0 V measured HI relative to LO.
3.2.4.E. Display Unit Fault
P4611-42, P4621-42 P5511-J, P551A1-J DISPLAY UNIT FAULT
The display unit signals the symbol generator of a loss of cooling air flow in the display
unit through the DISPLAY UNIT FAULT discrete. This output is an open collector tran-
sistor that is used to pull down the voltage of a pull up resistor in the symbol generator.
Loss of air flow is indicated by less than 0.2 V, and sufficient air flow is indicated by
greater than 3.2 V; both measured into a 10 k ohms load. An airflow of greater than 7.5
cubic feet per minute is sufficient, and airflow of less than 5.0 cubic feet per minute will
result in a fault indication. In order to prevent a fault at high altitudes where the cooling
fan cannot move the thinner air at a sufficient rate to satisfy the airflow sensor: the air-
flow sensor is disabled at altitudes above 37,500 feet ±2,500 feet. Cockpit temperature
is normally not high and is seldom a problem at these high altitudes. The airflow sensor
has a ten second activation time.
P4651B-17 ADI DISPLAY UNIT FAULT

P4651A-78 P4641A-59 HSI DISPLAY UNIT FAULT
The display unit signals the symbol generator of a loss of cooling air flow in the display
unit through the DISPLAY UNIT FAULT discrete. Loss of airflow is indicated by less
than 0.8 Vdc or less than 1 k ohms to ground, and sufficient airflow is indicated by
greater than 2.0 Vdc or greater than 20 k ohms to ground. The loss of cooling airflow
in the display unit is annunciated on the affected display unit.
3.2.4.F. Control Panel Power
P4671-17, P4681-17, P4691-17 +7 VDC POWER

P4671-33, P4681-33, P4691-33 +7 VDC POWER
P4671-44, P4681-44, P4691-44 RETURN
P4671-45, P4681-45, P4691-45 RETURN
P469A1-2 AIRCRAFT +27.5 VDC PWR BUS 1
P469A1-42 AIRCRAFT GROUND

The +7 Vdc control panel power is supplied by the symbol generator. The control panel
requires +7.0 ± 0.5 Vdc at 3 mA maximum. The RETURN is to be connected to the
symbol generator, another control panel, or to control panel discretes and not to aircraft
ground directly.
P4652B-100 P4641A-16 CONTROL PANEL +7 VDC POWER

P4652B-57 P4641A-100 CONTROL PANEL RETURN
The +7 Vdc control panel power is supplied by the symbol generators. The symbol gen-
erator provides +7.0 ± 0.35 Vdc at 2.0 A maximum. This voltage is shared with the dis-
play unit. The CONTROL PANEL RETURN is to be connected at the control panel only
and not to aircraft ground directly.
3.2.4.G. Mode Selection
Mode selection logic is according to the following table:
TABLE 3-1 MODE SELECTION LOGIC
MODE LINES
FUNCTION 4 3 2 1
1-2 0 0 0 0
TCAS 0 0 0 1
CRS SEL 0 0 1 0
Heading Synchronize 0 0 1 1
Range Up 0 1 0 0
RMI II 0 1 0 1
Range Down 0 1 1 0
RMI I 0 1 1 1
HSI & ARC II (Maintenance) 1 0 0 0
ARC 1 0 0 1
HSI 1 0 1 0
Course Direct 1 0 1 1
Checklist 1 1 0 0
NAV 1 1 0 1
System Test 1 1 1 0
No Buttons Pressed 1 1 1 1

P4611-9 MODE 1
P4611-10 MODE 2
P4611-11 MODE 3
P4611-12 MODE 4
P4611-24 RETURN
The ED 461 display unit encodes activation of the mode select buttons. The mode lines
are driven to the logic levels indicated by Table 3-1 above. A logic 0 is less than 0.70
V and a logic 1 is open measured relative to RETURN. Each line is capable of driving
up to 1 mA. The RETURN is to be connected to the symbol generator, another control
panel, or to control panel discretes and not to aircraft ground directly.
P4671-7, P4681-7, P4691-7, P469A1-7 MODE 1

P4671-5, P4681-5, P4691-5, P469A1-5 MODE 2
P4671-22, P4681-22, P4691-22, P469A1-22 MODE 3
P4671-6, P4681-6, P4691-6, P469A1-6 MODE 4
P4671-44, P4681-44, P4691-44 RETURN
P469A1-44 JOYSTICK/SWITCH RETURN
The CP 467, CP 468, CP 469 and CP 469A control panels encode activation of the
mode select buttons. The mode lines are driven to the logic levels indicated by the ta-
ble above. For the CP 467, CP 468 and CP 469 a logic 0 is less than 0.45 V and a logic
1 is greater than 2.4 V measured relative to RETURN and each line is capable of driv-
ing up to 2 mA. For the CP 469A a logic 0 is less than 0.6 V and a logic 1 is greater
than 2.4 V measured relative to JOYSTICK/SWITCH RETURN and each line is capa-
ble of driving up to 0.3 mA. The RETURN and JOYSTICK/SWITCH RETURN lines are
to be connected to the symbol generator, another control panel, or to control panel dis-
cretes and not to aircraft ground directly.
P4671-11, P4681-11, P4691-11, P469A1-11 MODE 1 IN

P4671-47, P4681-47, P4691-47, P469A1-47 MODE 2 IN
P4671-16, P4681-16, P4691-16, P469A1-16 MODE 3 IN
P4671-50, P4681-50, P4691-50, P469A1-50 MODE 4 IN
P4671-45, P4681-45, P4691-45, P469A1-45 RETURN
A symbol generator can only accept one set of mode lines. In a tandem or MFD control
panel installation, the mode lines of one control panel are connected to the mode in
lines of the other control panel. The signals are then sent along on the mode lines of
the receiving control panel. A logic 0 is less than 0.8 V and a logic 1 is greater than 2.0
V measured relative to RETURN. The RETURN is to be connected to the symbol gen-
erator, another control panel, or to control panel discretes and not to aircraft ground
directly.
P4652B-98 P4641A-74 CONTROL PANEL MODE 1


The symbol generator senses a logic 0 as less than 0.8 V or less than 1 k ohms to
ground and a logic 1 as greater than 2.0 V or greater than 30 k ohms to ground mea-
sured relative to CONTROL PANEL RETURN. Each line represents a 10 k ohms load.
3.2.4.H. Heading Selection
Each 5.625° (64 per revolution) rotation of the heading select knob results in a change
of state of either the HEADING 1 or HEADING 2 lines. Clockwise verses counter-clock-
wise rotation is described in the following tables: Clockwise Heading/Course/DH Se-
lect Logic, and Counter-Clockwise Heading/Course/DH Select Logic.
TABLE 3-2 CLOCKWISE HEADING/COURSE/DH SELECT LOGIC
LOGIC STATES
CLOCKWISE 1 2 3 4
HEADING 1 or COURSE 1 or DH 1 0 0 1
SELECT 1
SELECT 2
TABLE 3-3 COUNTER-CLOCKWISE HEADING/COURSE/DH SELECT LOGIC
LOGIC STATES
COUNTER-CLOCKWISE 1 2 3 4
SELECT 1
SELECT 2
P4611-15 HEADING 1
P4611-14 HEADING 2
A logic 0 is less than 0.40 V and a logic 1 is open measured relative to RETURN. Each
line is capable of driving up to 1 mA.
P4671-23, P4681-23, P4691-23, P469A1-23 HEADING 1

P4671-8, P4681-8, P4691-8, P469A1-8 HEADING 2
For the CP 467, CP 468 and CP 469 a logic 0 is less than 0.45 V and a logic 1 is greater
than 2.4 V measured relative to RETURN and each line is capable of driving up to 2

mA. For the CP 469A a logic 0 is less than 0.6 V and a logic 1 is greater than 2.4 V
measured relative to RETURN and each line is capable of driving up to 0.3 mA.
P4671-49, P4681-49, P4691-49, P469A1-49 HEADING 1 IN

P4671-32, P4681-32, P4691-32, P469A1-32 HEADING 2 IN
The symbol generator can only accept one set of heading select lines. In a tandem or
MFD control panel installation, the heading select lines of one control panel are con-
nected to the heading select in lines of the other control panel. The signals are then
sent along on the heading select lines of the receiving control panel. A logic 0 is less
than 0.8 V and a logic 1 is greater than 2.0 V measured relative to RETURN.
P4652B-86 P4641A-62 CONTROL PANEL HEADING 1

P4652B-59 P4641A-76 CONTROL PANEL HEADING 2
P4671-20, P4681-20 P4691-20, P469A1-20 EXTERNAL HEADING SYNC

P4671-44, P4681-44 P4691-45, P469A1-45 RETURN
All part numbers of the CP 467 and CP 468 control panels have a heading sync feature
allowing the pilot to slew the EHSI heading bug to the current aircraft heading by pulling
on the HDG knob. Control panels with the last four digits of the part number greater
than or equal to -3000, have the additional capability to accept a heading sync from a
source external to the control panel. The EXTERNAL HEADING SYNC input is activat-
ed by less than 1 ohm measured relative to RETURN.
3.2.4.I. Course Selection
Whenever the course select knob is rotated 5.625° (64 per revolution) the state of ei-
ther the COURSE 1 or COURSE 2 lines changes. Clockwise verses counter-clockwise
rotation is determined as described in Table 3-2 and Table 3-3.
P4611-5 COURSE 1
P4611-4 COURSE 2
A logic 0 is less than 0.40 V and a logic 1 is open measured relative to RETURN. Each
line is capable of driving up to 1 mA.
P4671-10, P4681-10, P4691-10, P469A1-10 COURSE 1

P4671-12, P4681-12, P4691-12, P469A1-12 COURSE 2

P4671-15, P4681-15, P4691-15, P469A1-15 COURSE 1 IN

P4671-31, P4681-31, P4691-31, P469A1-31 COURSE 2 IN
The symbol generator can only accept one set of course select lines. In a tandem or
MFD control panel installation, the course select lines of one control panel are connect-
ed to the course select in lines of the other control panel. The signals are then sent
along on the course select lines of the receiving control panel. A logic 0 is less than 0.8
V and a logic 1 is greater than 2.0 V measured relative to RETURN.
P4652B-99 P4641A-75 CONTROL PANEL COURSE 1

P4652B-72 P4641A-103 CONTROL PANEL COURSE 2
3.2.4.J. Decision Height Selection
Whenever the decision height select knob is rotated 5.6250 (64 per revolution) the
state of either the DECISION HEIGHT 1 or DECISION HEIGHT 2 lines changes.
Clockwise verses counter-clockwise rotation is described in Table 3-2 and Table 3-3.
P4671-14, P4691-14, P469A1-14 DECISION HEIGHT SELECT 1

P4671-13, P4691-13, P469A1-13 DECISION HEIGHT SELECT 2
P4701-10 DECISION HEIGHT SELECT 1
P4701-9 DECISION HEIGHT SELECT 2
P4671-29, P4691-29, P469A1-29 DECISION HEIGHT SELECT 1 IN

P4671-30, P4691-30, P469A1-30 DECISION HEIGHT SELECT 2 IN
The symbol generator can only accept one set of decision height select lines. In a tan-
dem control panel installation, the decision height select lines of one control panel are
connected to the decision height select in lines of the other control panel. The signals
are then sent along on the decision height select lines of the receiving control panel. A
logic 0 is less than 0.8 V and a logic 1 is greater than 2.0 V measured relative to RE-
TURN.
P4671-19, P4691-19, P469A1-19 DECISION HEIGHT ON

P4701-1 DECISION HEIGHT ON

For the CP 467 and CP 469 when activated this line is less than 0.45 V and when in-
active this line is greater than 2.4 V measured relative to RETURN and this line is ca-
pable of driving up to 0.3 mA. For the CP 469A when activated this line is less than 0.6
V and when inactive this line is greater than 2.4 V measured relative to RETURN and
this line is capable of driving up to 0.3 mA.
P4671-36, P4691-36, P469A1-36 DECISION HEIGHT ON IN
The symbol generator can only accept one decision height on line. In a tandem control
panel installation, the DECISION HEIGHT ON line of one control panel is connected to
the DECISION HEIGHT ON IN line of the other control panel. The signal is then sent
along on the DECISION HEIGHT ON line of the receiving control panel. A logic 0 is
less than 0.8 V and a logic 1 is greater than 2.0 V measured relative to RETURN.
P4652B-70 CONTROL PANEL DH SELECT 1

P4652B-97 CONTROL PANEL DH SELECT 2
P4652B-84 CONTROL PANEL DH ON
The symbol generator senses a logic 0 (and DH ON) as less than 0.8 V or less than 1
k ohms to ground and a logic 1 (and DH OFF) as greater than 2.0 V or greater than 30
k ohms to ground measured relative to CONTROL PANEL RETURN. Each line repre-
sents a 10 k ohms load.
3.2.4.K. Control Panel Tandem and External Discretes
CP 467, CP 468 and CP 469 control panels with the last four digits of the part number
greater than or equal to -3100 and all CP 469A control panels have EXTERNAL and
TANDEM discrete inputs to allow these units to be configured for tandem cockpit and
MFD reversionary mode operation.
P4671-26, P4681-26, P4691-26, P469A1-26 EXTERNAL

P4671-27, P4681-27, P4691-27, P469A1-27 TANDEM
P4671-44, P4681-44, P4691-44 RETURN
P469A1-46 RETURN
For installations (including Tandem) that do not require MFD reversionary mode oper-
ation, both the EXTERNAL and TANDEM pins are open. For MFD reversionary mode
installations TANDEM is permanently connected to RETURN (to disable Tandem) and
EXTERNAL is switched between open and RETURN. EXTERNAL is switched to RE-
TURN during Pilot Display Down and Pilot Standby operation and is switched to open
at all other times. It is not possible to include Tandem and reversionary mode operation
in the same installation. The RETURN is to be connected to the symbol generator, an-
other control panel, or to control panel discretes and not to aircraft ground directly.
3.2.4.L. Xtalk Transmitter and Receiver

P4652B-48 P4641C-68 XTALK TRANSMITTER A

P4652B-21 P4641C-82 XTALK TRANSMITTER B
P4652A-68 P4641C-12 XTALK RECEIVER A
P4652A-81 P4641C-62 XTALK RECEIVER B
The Xtalk Transmitter and Receiver is used for communication between symbol gen-
erators in installations using more than one symbol generator. The SG will not transmit
or receive Xtalk when configured as a single EHSI or single EADI/EHSI system.
This high speed serial bus conforms to ARINC 429 electrical characteristics. Labels
shown below with an asterisk are not ARINC standard and may be specific to Bendix/
King products. When information ‘is not available, i.e. equipment not installed or con-
figured, associated label is removed from bus.
LABEL PARAMETER RATE(ms) RELEASE NOTES

045* SELECTED DECISION HEIGHT 100
100* SELECTED COURSE 50 Added by software 0501,
see note 1
101 SELECTED HEADING 50 Added by software 0501,
see note 1
164* RADIO ALTITUDE 50
173* LATERAL DEVIATION 50
174* VERTICAL DEVIATION 50
202* DME/WPT DISTANCE 500 Replaced by label 251 at
SW 0501
251* DISTANCE TO GO 500 Added by software 0501
260* CAT II DISCRETES 100 Added by software 0601
277* EFIS B.I.T. STATUS 500
300* EFIS MODE STATUS 100 See note 2
301* EFIS MODE STATUS & NAV POSN 100 See note 2
303* EFIS DISP MODE & RANGE STATUS100 Added by software 0701
305* EFIS RMI SOURCES 100 Added by software 0701
306* EFIS JOYSTICK X AND ENTER 100 Added by software 0701
307* EFIS JOYSTICK Y 100 Added by software 0701
314 TRUE HEADING 100
320 MAGNETIC HEADING 100
324 PITCH ANGLE 100
325 ROLL ANGLE 100
* Not ARINC standard.
Note 1: Software 0501 broadcast labels 100 and 101 at a 100 ms rate;
software 0601 increased the rate to 50 ms.
Note 2: Before software 0701 labels 300 and 301 were broadcast at a 500 ms rate;
software 0701 increased the rate to 100 ms.

3.2.4.M. Reversionary Modes
The Reversionary Modes became fully operational with symbol generator software re-
lease 0501.
P4611-3, P4621-3 P5511-C, P551A1-C DISPLAY DOWN

P4611-21, P4621-21 P5511-F, P551A1-F DISPLAY DOWN RETURN
The display unit DISPLAY DOWN input is used to reduce the intensity of the green ras-
ter. Greater than 6.7 k ohms to ground selects HSI mode and 0.8 V maximum to
ground selects ADI mode. If HSI mode is selected on an ADI image the brown half of
the ADI display will become yellow and the blue sky half of the display will become cy-
an. If ADI mode is selected on an HSI image. weather normally displayed as yellow will
become brown and green will become yellow/green. DISPLAY DOWN RETURN is for
connection to DISPLAY DOWN and is not to be connected to aircraft ground directly.
P4652A-22 COMPOSITE
P4652B-43 P4641C-21 STANDBY
P4652B-16 P4641C-7 COPY
P4652B-95 DISPLAY DOWN
P4652B-73 P4641C-96 MFD SLAVED 1/2
P4651B-81 P4641B-102 MFD/ HSl
P4652B-94 P4641C-40 SWITCH RETURN
The symbol generator senses a reversionary mode active (and MFD SLAVED 2 and
MFD) as less than 0.8 V or less than 1 k ohms to ground measured relative to CON-
TROL PANEL RETURN. The symbol generator senses a reversionary mode as inac-
tive (and MFD SLAVED 1 and HSI) as greater than 20 k ohms to ground measured
relative to CONTROL PANEL RETURN. Each line represents a 10 k ohms load.
SWITCH RETURN is used to ground the reversionary discretes. The discretes and
SWITCH RETURN should not be connected to aircraft ground directly. Refer to 3.2.5.H
through Q Intrasystem Interfaces for a description of the operational characteristics of
the reversionary modes.
3.2.4.N. Joystick
The Joystick interface became operational with symbol generator software release
0601.
CP469A Outputs:
P469A1-28 JOYSTICK LEFT

P469A1-17 JOYSTICK RIGHT
P469A1-33 JOYSTICK UP
P469A1-35 JOYSTICK DOWN
P469A1-40 JOYSTICK ENTER

When activated the joystick movement and enter outputs are less than 0.9 V measured
relative to JOYSTICK RETURN. When inactive, these lines are greater than 100 k
ohms measured relative to JOYSTICK/SWITCH RETURN. Each line can sink up to 0.4
mA.
CP469A Inputs:
P469A2-36 EXTERNAL JOYSTICK LEFT

P469A2-37 EXTERNAL JOYSTICK RIGHT
P469A2-39 EXTERNAL JOYSTICK UP
P469A2-21 EXTERNAL JOYSTICK DOWN
P469A1-48 EXTERNAL ENTER
P469A2-4 EXTERNAL JOYSTICK RETURN
The control panel senses the activation of an external joystick movement and activa-
tion of external joystick enter as less than 1.35 V or less than 100 ohms to ground and
the absence of external joystick movement and the absence of external joystick enter
as greater than 3.15 V or greater than 300 k ohms measured relative to EXTERNAL
JOYSTICK RETURN. Each line represents a 100 k ohms load. EXTERNAL JOY-
STICK RETURN is used to ground the external joystick movement and external enter
discretes. The discretes and EXTERNAL JOYSTICK RETURN should not be connect-
ed to aircraft ground directly.
P4652A-65 P4641B-90 JOYSTICK LEFT

P4652A-66 P4641B-104 JOYSTICK RIGHT
P4652A-79 P4641B-91 JOYSTICK UP
P4652A-78 P4641B-77 JOYSTICK DOWN
P4652A-93 P4641B-78 JOYSTICK ENTER
P4652A-77 P4641B-101 JOYSTICK RETURN
The symbol generator senses the activation of a joystick movement and activation of
joystick enter as less than 0.8 V or less than 1 k ohms to ground and senses the ab-
sence of joystick movement and the absence of joystick enter as greater than 2.0 V or
greater than 30 k ohms to ground measured relative to CONTROL PANEL RETURN.
Each line represents a 10 k ohms load. JOYSTICK RETURN is used to ground the joy-
stick movement and enter discretes. The discretes and JOYSTICK RETURN should
not be connected to aircraft ground directly.
Refer to 3.13.4 Weather Detection/ Checklist Electrical Characteristics for a descrip-

tion of how the Checklist Receiver and EFS General Transmitter may be used to re-
ceive and send joystick information.
3.2.4.O. Lighting
P4611-7, P4621-7 P5511-E, P551A1-E LIGHTING 28 VOLTS

P4611-13, P4621-13 P5511-D, P551A1-D LIGHTING 5 VOLTS

P4611-8, P4621-8 P5511-C, P551A1-C LIGHTING LO
P4701-14 LIGHTING 28 VOLTS
P4701-15 LIGHTING 5 VOLTS
P4701-13 LIGHTING LO
TABLE 3-4 NOMINAL CURRENT DRAW
NOMINAL CURRENT (mA)
ED 461 ED 462 ED 551 ED 551A CP 470
28 VOLTS 130 40 48 48 80
5 VOLTS 770 220 230 230 240
Either AC or DC voltage may be used to illuminate the incandescent lamps within the
display units and the CP 470 control panel. Lighting voltage is unit version specific. In
order to prevent damage when an incorrect lighting voltage unit is installed, the 5 volt
input is not connected within the 28 volt units and the 28 volt input is not connected
within the 5 volt units.
P4671-37, P4681-37, P4691-37, P469A1-37 LIGHTING +28 VDC

P4671-38, P4681-38, P4691-38, P469A1-38 LIGHTING +5 VDC
P4671-18, P4681-18, P4691-18, P469A1-18 LIGHTING 5 VAC
P4671-34, P4681-34, P4691-34, P469A1-34 LIGHTING LO
less than -3100 use current from the LIGHTING +28 Vdc, +5 Vdc and 5 Vac inputs to
power the electroluminescent lighting within the control panel. Lighting voltage as well
as AC versus DC is unit version specific for the control panels. Connecting too high a
voltage AC instead of DC, or DC instead of AC will damage the power supply for the
electroluminescent lighting within the control panel. In order to prevent damage when
an incorrect lighting voltage unit is installed. The 5 Vac and 5 Vdc inputs are not con-
nected within the 28 Vdc units, the 28 Vdc and 5 Vac inputs are not connected within
the 5 Vdc units, and the 28 Vdc and 5 Vdc inputs are not connected within the 5 Vac
units. Current consumption at 28 Vdc is 74 mA, at 5 Vdc is 319 mA, and at 5 Vac is
285 mA.
P4671-21, P4681-21, P4691-21 +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER

P4671-43, P4681-43, P4691-43 AIRCRAFT GROUND
greater than or equal to -3100 and all CP 469A control panels use current from the
+27.5 Vdc AIRCRAFT POWER input to power the electroluminescent lighting within
the control panel. Voltage from the LIGHTING +28 Vdc, +5 Vdc and 5 Vac inputs is

used to set the lighting intensity. All part numbers of these control panels will accept
any of the three dimming voltages. CP 467, CP 468 and CP 469 current consumption
at the +27.5 Vdc AIRCRAFT POWER input is 75 mA and current consumption for the
dimming inputs is less than 1 mA. The CP 469A +27.5 Vdc AIRCRAFT POWER input
supplies both the electroluminescent lighting and the unit’s electronics. Refer to Sec-
tion 3.16.4.E Miscellaneous Interfaces Electrical Characteristics, Control Panel Power
Inputs for the CP 469A current consumption. The CP 469A dimming inputs current
consumption is less than 1 mA.
P113F1-2, P466A1-2, P466B1-2 PANEL LIGHTS 28 VDC INPUT

P113F1-1, P466A1-1, P466B1-1 PANEL LIGHTS 5 VAC INPUT
P113F1-9, P466A1-9, P466B1-9 LAMP DIMMER COMMON
CP 113F, CP 466A and CP 466B control panels when dimmed by 28 Vdc derive power
for the lighting from the PANEL LIGHTS 28 VDC INPUT. When the units are dimmed
by 5 Vac, power for the lighting is derived from the 28 Vdc POWER input. Current con-
sumption from the PANEL LIGHTS 28 VDC INPUT is 0.51 A maximum and current
consumption from the PANEL LIGHTS 5 VAC INPUT is 1.0 mA maximum.
3.2.4.P. Brightness
P4621-26 P5511-G, P551A1-G BRIGHTNESS

P4621-23 P5511-H, P551A1-H BRIGHTNESS RETURN
P4671-4, P4681-4 HSI BRIGHTNESS
P4671-2, P4681-2 HSI BRIGHTNESS RETURN
P4691-4 P469A1-1 MFD BRIGHTNESS
P4691-2 P469A1-25 MFD BRIGHTNESS RETURN
P4671-1, P4681-1 P4701-4 ADI BRIGHTNESS
P4671-3, P4681-3 P4701-3 ADI BRIGHTNESS RETURN
The brightness controls within the control panel are a rheostat driven by a voltage from
the display unit. Minimum brightness is 1.1 k ohms ±5% and maximum brightness is
11.1 k ohms ±10% resulting in 1.2 ± 0.2 V at minimum brightness and 6.3 ±0.5 V at
maximum brightness. An open brightness line will result in the same brightness as the
rheostat adjusted for maximum brightness. A brightness line shorted to ground will re-
sult in an extremely dim display of less intensity than when the rheostat is adjusted for
minimum brightness.
3.2.4.Q. Configuration Module
P1-4 CONFIG TO SG DATA

P1-2 SG TO CONFIG CHIP SELECT 1
P1-9 SG TO CONFIG CHIP SELECT 2
P1-6 SG TO CONFIG CLOCK
P1-8 SG TO CONFIG DATA
P1-5 +5 VDC POWER
P1-1 POWER GROUND

P4652A-92 P4641B-105 CONFIG TO SG DATA

P4652A-106 P4641B-86 SG TO CONFIG CHIP SELECT 1
P4652A-105 P4641B-92 SG TO CONFIG CHIP SELECT 2
P4652A-64 P4641B-87 SG TO CONFIG CLOCK
P4652A-91 P4641B-100 SG TO CONFIG DATA
P4652A-104 P4641B-66 CONFIGURATION MODULE +5 V
P4652A-103 P4641B-39 CONFIGURATION MODULE GND
The symbol generator is configured for the equipment specific to the installation using
a simple menu driven program displayed on the display unit. The resulting configura-
tion data is stored both in the symbol generator and in a configuration module attached
to the mounting rack. The configuration module is attached to the mounting rack and
remains a part of the aircraft and is used to transfer the configuration to replacement
symbol generators. Whenever the configuration stored in the configuration module and
the configuration stored in the symbol generator differ, the operator is asked to choose
which one to use. This choice allows for one symbol generator to configure a fleet of
aircraft or for a single aircraft to configure several symbol generators.
Configuration module signals are 5 V serial data. The symbol generator reads the con-
figuration module only on power up and when the installer is configuring the system.
The symbol generator writes to the configuration module only when the installer is con-
figuring the system.
3.2.4.R. Symbol Generator Cooling Fan Control
P4652A-102 P4641B-38 FAN HI

P4652A-101 P4641B-74 FAN LO
In order to conserve aircraft power, extend the life of the cooling fan, and increase the
symbol generator internal temperature during times of low ambient temperature, a
temperature sensor is used to measure the internal temperature of the symbol gener-
ator and switch the cooling fan power on and off. The fan power is switched on when
the internal temperature exceeds +10, ±3° C and is switched off below -10, ±3° C. The
FAN HI voltage is derived from the +27.5 Vdc FILTERED POWER and can supply up
to 0.5 amp.
A loss of cooling airflow to the symbol generator is indicated on the display unit. All soft-
ware revision SG 464 symbol generators and SG 465 symbol generators before soft-
ware revision 0601 produce a fault indication if the internal temperature of the symbol
generator is greater than 25, ±3° C and the cooling airflow drops below the threshold
level. Software revision 0601 changed the SG 464 and SG 465 temperature to 35, ±3°
C. The temperature at the sensor can be up to 10° C higher than the cooling air enter-
ing the unit. The airflow sensor has a ten second activation time. Refer to section 2 of
this manual for a listing of cooling blowers rated for various altitude and temperature
combinations.
3.2.4.S. Switching Unit Relays

The SU 463 switching unit contains two types of relays. All relays found on 201 series
boards are signal relays and all relays found on 301 series boards are power relays.
Relay characteristics are listed in the table below.
TABLE 3-5 SU 463 RELAY CHARACTERISTICS
SU 463 RELAY CHARACTERISTICS SIGNAL RELAY POWER RELAY
ENERGIZE CURRENT AT 27.5 Vdc 8.3 mA 17.2 mA
RESISTIVE LOAD CURRENT MAXIMUM 1.0 A 5.0 A
INCANDESCENT LAMP LOAD CURRENT MAXIMUM 0.1 A 1.0 A
INDUCTIVE LOAD CURRENT MAXIMUM 0.2 A 2.0 A
3.2.4.T. Switching Unit Mode Selection
In the text below (1) - indicates pilot and (2) - indicates copilot.
The SU 463 modes are selected by pressing panel-mounted momentary contact an-
nunciator switches to alternately activate or deactivate modes. It is possible to config-
ure the installation, through the programming pins, so that the Display Down and Com-
posite modes engage simultaneously from a single button. Some reversionary modes
are not allowed to be active simultaneously. The SU 463 will either inhibit illegal mode
request or will cancel other previously selected modes while activating the requested
mode. A mode restriction table is found in note one of each of the SU 463 installation
block diagrams found in section 3.2.5.E through J. of this manual. Annunciator test in-
puts allow all the reversionary mode annunciator switches to be illuminated simulta-
neously without changing the state of any of the reversionary switching relays.
P4631A-75 SWITCH RETURN

P4631D-32 SWITCH RETURN
SU 463 three tube switching unit part numbers 071-00074-0100 and -0400:
P4631A-78 COMPOSITE SELECT IN

P4631A-79 DISPLAY DOWN SELECT IN
P4631A-76 SPARE SELECT IN
P4631A-77 STANDBY SELECT IN
SU 463 four tube switching unit part number 071-00074-0200:
P4631A-78 COMPOSITE (1) SELECT IN

P4631A-79 DISPLAY DOWN (1) SELECT IN
P4631A-76 SPARE (1) SELECT IN
P4631A-77 COPY (1) SELECT IN

P4631D-29 COMPOSITE (2) SELECT IN

P4631D-28 DISPLAY DOWN (2) SELECT IN
P4631D-31 SPARE (2) SELECT IN
P4631D-30 COPY (2) SELECT IN
SU 463 five tube switching unit part numbers 071-00074-0300 and -0500:
P4631A-78 COMPOSITE (1) SELECT IN

P4631A-79 DISPLAY DOWN (1) SELECT IN
P4631A-76 SPARE (1) SELECT IN
P4631A-77 STANDBY (1) SELECT IN
P4631D-29 COMPOSITE (2) SELECT IN
P4631D-28 DISPLAY DOWN (2) SELECT IN
P4631D-31 SPARE (2) SELECT IN
P4631D-30 STANDBY (2) SELECT IN
The inactive state of the mode select inputs is greater than 100 k ohms to SWITCH
RETURN. The active state of the mode select inputs is less than 5 ohms to SWITCH
RETURN. If a mode select input is held active for more than 7 seconds the input will
be considered to be a stuck button and will be ignored until the input returns to the in-
active state. The SWITCH RETURN is to be connected to the mode select inputs only
and is not to be connected to aircraft ground directly.
P4631A-13 POWER GROUND

P4631D-34 POWER GROUND
SU 463 three tube switching unit part numbers 071-00074-0100 and -0400:
P4631A-23 COMPOSITE ANNUNCIATE

P4631A-11 DISPLAY DOWN ANNUNCIATE
P4631A-36 SPARE ANNUNCIATE
P4631A-24 STANDBY ANNUNCIATE
SU 463 four tube switching unit part number 071-00074-0200:
P4631A-23 COMPOSITE (1) ANNUNCIATE

P4631A-11 DISPLAY DOWN (1) ANNUNCIATE
P4631A-36 SPARE (1) ANNUNCIATE
P4631A-24 COPY (1) ANNUNCIATE
P4631D-74 COMPOSITE (2) ANNUNCIATE
P4631D-25 DISPLAY DOWN (2) ANNUNCIATE
P4631D-75 SPARE (2) ANNUNCIATE
P4631D-95 COPY (2) ANNUNCIATE

SU 463 five tube switching unit part numbers 071-00074-0300 and -0500:
P4631A-23 COMPOSITE (1) ANNUNCIATE

P4631A-11 DISPLAY DOWN (1) ANNUNCIATE
P4631A-36 SPARE (1) ANNUNCIATE
P4631A-24 STANDBY (1) ANNUNCIATE
P4631D-74 COMPOSITE (2) ANNUNCIATE
P4631D-25 DISPLAY DOWN (2) ANNUNCIATE
P4631D-75 SPARE (2) ANNUNCIATE
P4631D-95 STANDBY (2) ANNUNCIATE
Each ANNUNCIATE output is a DPDT signal relay with both poles operating in parallel.
The signal relay provides continuity to POWER GROUND when the ANNUNCIATE
output is active. Maximum load current for the ANNUNCIATE outputs is not exceed
twice the limits for signal relays described in section 3.2.4.S above.
P4631D-33 ANNUNCIATOR TEST IN

P4631D-46 ANNUNCIATOR TEST IN
Activation of either ANNUNCIATOR TEST input will initiate an annunciator test. Acti-
vation of both ANNUNCIATOR TEST inputs simultaneously will cause no harm to the
unit but will not activate the annunciator test. Annunciator test illuminates all the rever-
sionary mode annunciator switches simultaneously without changing the state of any
of the reversionary switching relays. The inactive state of the ANNUNCIATOR TEST
IN input is greater than 500 k ohms to POWER GROUND and the active state is less
than 10 k ohms to POWER GROUND or less than 0.6 Vdc to POWER GROUND. The
inactive state of the ANNUNCIATOR TEST IN input is less than 1.5 Vdc or Vac (0 to
400 Hz) to POWER GROUND and the active state is 5 to 33 Vdc or Vac (0 to 400 Hz)
to POWER GROUND.
3.2.4.U. Switching Unit Program Pins
Programming strap pins allow the SU 463 logic configuration to be selected at the time
of installation. The XSIDE CANCEL feature, when activated by connection of PRO-
GRAM PIN 1 to PROGRAM GROUND, allows the pilot when selecting a mode that is
not allowed to be active with a currently active copilot mode to cancel the copilot mode
while activating the pilot mode. The DISPLAY DOWN/COMPOSITE feature, when ac-
tivated by connection of PROGRAM PIN 7 to PROGRAM GROUND. allows a single
momentary annunciator switch to be connected to the DISPLAY DOWN SELECT IN
input to activate DISPLAY DOWN and COMPOSITE modes simultaneously. When the
DISPLAY DOWN/COMPOSITE feature is active, if either DISPLAY DOWN or COM-
POSITE is not allowed by the mode restriction logic, then neither mode is activated.
Not all part numbers of SU 463 have circuitry for all PROGRAM inputs; those without
circuitry are indicated in the PROGRAM PIN USAGE table below as NOT AVAILABLE.
PROGRAM inputs listed as SPARE in the table were not used at the time of publication
and may be used later for future configuration needs.

TABLE 3-6 SU 463 PROGRAM PIN USAGE
SU 463 PROGRAM PIN USAGE
THREE TUBE: FOUR TUBE: FIVE TUBE:
PROGRAM 1 SPARE SPARE XSIDE CANCEL
PROGRAM 2 SPARE SPARE SPARE
PROGRAM 5 NOT AVAILABLE SPARE SPARE
PROGRAM 6 NOT AVAILABLE SPARE SPARE
PROGRAM 7 DISP DOWN/COMPOS- DISP DOWN/COMPOS- DISP DOWN/COMPOS-

ITE ITE ITE
PROGRAM 8 SPARE NOT AVAILABLE SPARE
P4631D-40 PROGRAM 1
P4631D-41 PROGRAM 2
P4631D-42 PROGRAM 3
P4631D-43 PROGRAM 4
P4631D-44 PROGRAM 5
P4631D-45 PROGRAM 6
P4631D-23 PROGRAM 7
P4631D-24 PROGRAM 8
P4631D-22 PROGRAM 9
P4631D-99 PROGRAM 10
P4631D-47 PROGRAM GROUND
The inactive state of the program pins is greater than 60 k ohms to PROGRAM
GROUND. The active state of the program pins is less than 750 ohms or less than 0.1
Vdc to PROGRAM GROUND. The PROGRAM GROUND is to be connected to the
program inputs only and is not to be connected to aircraft ground directly.
3.2.5 INTRASYSTEM INTERFACE
3.2.5.A. Tandem Control Panels
Refer to Figure 3-3 for the Tandem Control Panel interface. The SG 464, SG 465 sym-
bol generator is shown interfaced to two CP 467, CP 468 control panels in tandem with
an optional ED 461 display unit and a CP 470 ADI control panel. The symbol generator

can only accept one set of control inputs. In a tandem control panel installation the out-
puts of one control panel are sent to the other control panel. The signals are then sent
to the symbol generator. If a mode, course, heading or DH change is made simulta-
neously from both control panels then only the control panel directly wired to the sym-
bol generator will effect the symbol generator. The control panel indirectly wired to the
symbol generator will only be inhibited when the control panel directly wired to the sym-
bol generator is making a selection. An ED 461 can be used in place of the indirectly
wired control panel but an ED 461 can not be used in place of the directly wired control
panel. CP 467 and CP 468 control panels with the last four digits of the part number
less than -3100 do not have TANDEM and EXTERNAL inputs and operate correctly in
tandem installations.
3.2.5.B. MFD Control Panel
Refer to Figure 3-4 for the MFD Control Panel Interface. A CP 469 or CP 469A MFD
Control Panel is used to select the information displayed on the MFD display during
normal operation. If the pilot’s ADI display or symbol generator should fail the pilot may
select Display Down or Standby reversionary modes. During pilot Display Down the pi-
lot’s lower tube (formerly the HSI) becomes an ADI display and the MFD becomes the
pilot’s HSI. During pilot Standby the MFD symbol generator is relay switched to provide
both the ADI and HSI signals to drive the pilot’s displays. During both reversionary
modes the pilot’s control panel must control the MFD symbol generator. To accomplish
this the pilot’s control panel outputs are connected both to the pilot’s symbol generator
and to the MFD control panel. The MFD control panel outputs are then electronically
switched inside the MFD control panel between the MFD controls and the pilot’s control
panel inputs. The MFD EXTERNAL input when connected to CP RETURN causes the
MFD control panel to ignore the MFD controls and output the pilot’s control panel sig-
nals to the MFD symbol generator. When the MFD EXTERNAL input is open the pilot’s
control panel signals are ignored by the MFD control panel and only the MFD control
operations are output to the MFD symbol generator. The MFD control panel TANDEM
input must be connected to CP RETURN for all MFD CP installations. Connection of
TANDEM to CP RETURN disables the TANDEM configuration circuitry that is common
between the CP 467, CP 468, CP 469, and CP 469A control panels. Relays are used
to switch the MFD SG between the MFD control panel outputs and the copilot’s control
panel outputs during copilot Standby. The MFD does not become the copilot’s HSI dur-
ing copilot Standby.
3.2.5.C. Joystick
The Joystick interface became operational with symbol generator software release
0601.
Refer to Figure 2-22 and Figure 3-5 for the Mechanical Joystick interface. The SG 464,
SG 465 symbol generator is not compatible with the Bendix/King CC 2024D and CC
24024F joysticks.
When installed with an ARINC 429 Long Range NAV conforming to GAMA data for-
mats or with a Bendix/King KNS 81 RNAV the symbol generator will accept inputs from
an external mechanical joystick to position a waypoint on the HSI or MFD map display.

The coordinates of the waypoint are then sent to the Long Range NAV or to the KNS
81 where they can be used for navigation.
It is not necessary to connect the symbol generator joystick and enter discretes when
a CP 469A with checklist capability is installed. The checklist capable CP 469A’s send
the joystick and enter data via the ARINC 429 checklist bus for both the unit mounted
and external mounted joystick and enter switches. The Bendix/King joystick part num-
ber 031-00764-0000 must be mounted at a 45 degree angle for proper joystick orien-
tation.
Refer to 3.13.4 Weather Detection/ Checklist Electrical Characteristics for a descrip-

tion of how the Checklist Receiver and EFS General Transmitter may be used to re-
ceive and send joystick information.
3.2.5.D. Lighting and Brightness
Refer to Figure 3-6 for the Lighting and Brightness interface. An ED 462 ADI display
unit, an ED 462 HSI display unit, and ED 551 and ED 551A display units are shown
interfaced to CP 467, CP 468, CP 469, CP 469A and CP 470 control panels for bright-
ness control. The ED 462, ED 551 and ED 551A ADI display units are shown interfaced
to the aircraft lighting bus for illumination of the ADI inclinometer. The ED 461 HSI dis-
play unit and the CP 113F, CP 466A, CP 466B, CP 467, CP 468, CP 469, CP 469A
and CP 470 control panels are shown interfaced to the aircraft lighting bus for illumina-
tion of the HSI and CP buttons.
Only dual brightness control part numbers of the CP 468 have ADI brightness capabil-
ity.
Each CP 467, CP 468 and CP 469 with the last four digits of the part number less than
-3000, can accept only one lighting voltage. A different unit part number is required for
each lighting voltage. These part number units use the dimming bus inputs to power
the unit lighting.
The CP 467, CP 468 and CP 469 units with the last four digits of the part number equal
to or greater than -3000, require the +27.5 Vdc AIRCRAFT POWER for lighting. These
units use pin 21 (+27.5 Vdc AIRCRAFT POWER) to power the panel lighting and the
lighting +28 Vdc, +5 Vdc or 5 Vac inputs to set the intensity. Any of these units can use
any of the three lighting voltages but only one of the lighting voltage inputs may be
used at a time. Pin 21 (+27.5 Vdc AIRCRAFT POWER) is not a variable voltage input.
This pin is to connect to aircraft power. Pin 43 (AIRCRAFT GROUND) is the ground
return for pin 21.
The CP 469A uses the +27.5 Vdc AIRCRAFT POWER to power both the panel lighting
and the unit electronics. The lighting +28 Vdc, +5 Vdc or 5 Vac inputs are used to set
the panel lighting intensity. Any part number CP 469A can use any of the three lighting
voltages but only one of the lighting voltage inputs may be used at a time.
3.2.5.E. Configuration Module and Symbol Generator Fan

Refer to Figure 3-7 for the Configuration Module and Symbol Generator Fan interface.
The SG 464, SG 465 symbol generator is shown interfaced to the configuration module
and to the Bendix/King KA 33 Remote Mount Blower and the Bendix/King P/N 071-
04056-0000,-0001,-0002 Rack Mount Fan kits.
The symbol generator is configured for the equipment specific to the installation
through a simple menu driven program displayed on the display unit. The resulting con-
figuration data is stored both in the symbol generator and in a configuration module at-
tached to the mounting rack. The configuration module remains a part of the aircraft
and is used to transfer the configuration to replacement symbol generators.
In order to conserve aircraft power, extend the life of the cooling fan, and increase the
symbol generator internal temperature during times of low ambient temperature. a
temperature sensor is used to measure the internal temperature of the symbol gener-
ator and switch the cooling fan power on and off. The fan power is switched on when
the internal temperature exceeds +10, ±3° C and is switched off below -10, ±3° C. The
FAN HI voltage is derived from the +27.5 Vdc FILTERED POWER and can supply up
to 0.5 amp.

FIGURE 3-3 EFS 40/EFS 50 Tandem Control Panel Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0030, Rev 1)

FIGURE 3-4 EFS 40/EFS 50 MFD Control Panel Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0046, Rev 1)

FIGURE 3-5 EFS 40/EFS 50 Mechanical Joystick Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0031, Rev 2)

FIGURE 3-6 EFS 40/EFS 50 Lighting and Brightness Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0033, Rev 5)

FIGURE 3-7 EFS 40/EFS 50 Configuration Module and Symbol Generator Fan Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0032, Rev AB)

3.2.5.F. EFS 40 Single EHSI
Refer to the following figures for the indicated interface:
Figure 3-8 EFS 40 Single EHSI Block Diagram

Figure 3-9 EFS 40 Single EHSI - Control Panel Interface
Figure 3-10 EFS 40 Single EHSI - EHSI Power Interface
Figure 3-11 EFS 40 Single EHSI - EHSI Video Interface
Figure 3-12 EFS 40 Single EHSI - EHSI Deflection Interface
Figure 3-13 EFS 40 Single EHSI - Xtalk and Discrete Interface
A single SG 464 or SG 465 symbol generator is shown interfaced to one ED 461 dis-
play unit, or to one ED 462 display unit with a CP 468 control panel. No reversionary
modes are available for the Single EHSI installation.

THIS PAGE RESERVED

FIGURE 3-8 EFS 40 Single EHSI Block Diagram

(Dwg No 696-00698-0000, Rev 2)

FIGURE 3-9 EFS 40 Single EHSI Control Panel Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0000, Rev 3, Sht 1)

FIGURE 3-10 EFS 40 Single EHSI/EHSI Power Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0000, Rev 3, Sht 2)

FIGURE 3-11 EFS 40 Single EHSI/EHSI Video Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0000, Rev 3, Sht 3)

FIGURE 3-12 EFS 40 Single EHSI/EHSI Deflection Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0000, Rev 3, Sht 4)

FIGURE 3-13 EFS 40 Single EHSI XTALK and Discrete Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0000, Rev 3, Sht 5)

3.2.5.G. EFS 50 Single EHSI
Figure 3-14 EFS 50 Single EHSI Block Diagram

Figure 3-15 EFS 50 Single EHSI - Control Panel Interface
Figure 3-16 EFS 50 Single EHSI - EHSI Power Interface
Figure 3-17 EFS 50 Single EHSI - EHSI Video Interface
Figure 3-18 EFS 50 Single EHSI - EHSI Deflection Interface
Figure 3-19 EFS 50 Single EHSI - Xtalk and Discrete Interface
A single SG 464 or SG 465 symbol generator is shown interfaced to one ED 551 or ED

551A display unit with a CP 468 control panel. No reversionary modes are available for
the Single EHSI installation.

THIS PAGE RESERVED

FIGURE 3-14 EFS 50 Single EHSI Block Diagram

(Dwg No 696-00698-0010, Rev 0)

FIGURE 3-15 EFS 50 Single EHSI Control Panel Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0050, Rev 1, Sht 1)

FIGURE 3-16 EFS 50 Single EHSI/EHSI Power Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0050, Rev 1, Sht 2)

FIGURE 3-17 EFS 50 Single EHSI/EHSI Video Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0050, Rev 1, Sht 3)

FIGURE 3-18 EFS 50 Single EHSI/EHSI Deflection Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0050, Rev 1, Sht 4)

FIGURE 3-19 EFS 50 Single EHSI XTALK and Discrete Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0050, Rev 1, Sht 5)

3.2.5.H. EFS 40 Dual EHSI
Figure 3-20 EFS 40 Dual EHSI Block Diagram

Figure 3-21 EFS 40 Dual EHSI - Control Panel Interface
Figure 3-22 EFS 40 Dual EHSI - EHSI Power Interface
Figure 3-23 EFS 40 Dual EHSI - EHSI Video Interface
Figure 3-24 EFS 40 Dual EHSI - EHSI Deflection Interface
Figure 3-25 EFS 40 Dual EHSI - Xtalk and Discrete Interface
The dual SG 464 or SG 465 symbol generators are each shown interfaced to one ED
461 display unit. A dual EHSI installation using the ED 462 display unit with the CP
468 control panel may be implemented by combining the information found in Figures
3-8 through 3-13 with Figures 3-20 through 3-25.
A Dual EHSI installation allows for the COPY reversionary mode for both pilot posi-
tions. A pilot may select COPY if the other pilot is not already in COPY mode. During
COPY. the video from the cross-side symbol generator is displayed at the pilot position
from which the COPY was initiated. Both displays are identical in every respect. COPY
is annunciated on both display units. A separate, panel-mounted annunciator must be
used to determine the source of the video. Normally, a momentary contact annunciator
switch is used for combined COPY selection and annunciation. One annunciator
switch is used at each pilot position.
During COPY, only the brightness control will remain functional on the on-side ED 461
bezel or control panel. All other control functions must be made from the cross-side.
Power for the on-side ED 461 or ED 462 display unit must continue to be supplied from
the on-side symbol generator. With EFS 40 display units, the COPY mode does not
serve as a backup for symbol generator power supply failures, but does protect against
other symbol generator failure modes.

THIS PAGE RESERVED

FIGURE 3-20 EFS 40 Dual EHSI Block Diagram

(Dwg No 696-00698-0001, Rev 3)

FIGURE 3-21 EFS 40 Dual EHSI Control Panel Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0001, Rev 4, Sht 1)

FIGURE 3-22 EFS 40 Dual EHSI/EHSI Power Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0001, Rev 4, Sht 2)

FIGURE 3-23 EFS 40 Dual EHSI/EHSI Video Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0001, Rev 4, Sht 3)

FIGURE 3-24 EFS 40 Dual EHSI/EHSI Deflection Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0001, Rev 4, Sht 4)

FIGURE 3-25 EFS 40 Dual EHSI XTALK and Discrete Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0001, Rev 4, Sht 5)

3.2.5.I. EFS 50 Dual EHSI
Refer to the following figures for the indicated interface.
Figure 3-26 EFS 50 Dual EHSI Block Diagram

Figure 3-27 EFS 50 Dual EHSI - Control Panel Interface
Figure 3-28 EFS 50 Dual EHSI - EHSI Power Interface
Figure 3-29 EFS 50 Dual EHSI - EHSI Video Interface
Figure 3-30 EFS 50 Dual EHSI - EHSI Deflection Interface
Figure 3-31 EFS 50 Dual EHSI - Xtalk and Discrete Interface
The dual SG 464 or SG 465 symbol generators are each shown interfaced to one ED
551 or ED 551A display unit with a CP 468 control panel.
A Dual EHSI installation allows for the COPY reversionary mode for both pilot posi-
tions. A pilot may select COPY if the other pilot is not already in COPY mode. During
COPY, the video from the cross-side symbol generator is displayed at the pilot position
from which the COPY is initiated. Both displays are identical in every respect. COPY
is annunciated on both display units. A separate, panel-mounted annunciator must be
used to determine the source of the video. Normally, a momentary contact annunciator
switch is used for combined COPY selection and annunciation. One annunciator
switch is used at each pilot position.
Power for the ED 551 or ED 551A display unit is not supplied by the symbol generator
as is the case with ED 461 and ED 462 display units. With EFS 40 display units, the
COPY mode does not serve as a backup for symbol generator power supply failures,
but does protect against other symbol generator failure modes. With EFS 50 display
units, the COPY mode does protect against symbol generator power supply failures.

THIS PAGE RESERVED

FIGURE 3-26 EFS 50 Dual EHSI Block Diagram

(Dwg No 696-00698-0011, Rev 2)

FIGURE 3-27 EFS 50 Dual EHSI Control Panel Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0051, Rev 2, Sht 1)

FIGURE 3-28 EFS 50 Dual EHSI/EHSI Power Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0051, Rev 2, Sht 2)

FIGURE 3-29 EFS 50 Dual EHSI/EHSI Video Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0051, Rev 2, Sht 3)

FIGURE 3-30 EFS 50 Dual EHSI/EHSI Deflection Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0051, Rev 2, Sht 4)

FIGURE 3-31 EFS 50 Dual EHSI XTALK and Discrete Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0051, Rev 2, Sht 5)

3.2.5.J. EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI
Figure 3-32 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI Block Diagram

Figure 3-33 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI - EADI Power Interface
Figure 3-34 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI - EADI Video Interface
Figure 3-35 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI - EADI Deflection Interface
Figure 3-36 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI - Control Panel Interface
Figure 3-37 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI - EHSI Power Interface
Figure 3-38 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI - EHSI Video Interface
Figure 3-39 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI - EHSI Deflection Interface
Figure 3-40 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI - Xtalk and Discrete Interface
A single SG 465 symbol generator is shown interfaced to two ED 462 display units with
a CP 467 control panel, or to one ED 461 and one ED 462 display unit with a CP 470
ADI control panel.
A single EADI/EHSI installation allows for both the DISPLAY DOWN and the COM-
POSITE reversionary modes. Either mode may be selected separately or both may be
selected simultaneously.
During DISPLAY DOWN the attitude display is moved down from the top display unit
to the bottom display. The attitude information displayed on the bottom display is iden-
tical to the information previously displayed on the top display; the HSI information is
lost. Selection of DISPLAY DOWN causes power to be removed from the top ADI sec-
tion of the symbol generator resulting in a blank top display unit. The HSI section of
the symbol is then used to generate the ADI display which is presented on the bottom
display unit. The bottom display unit has its DISPLAY DOWN input grounded during
DISPLAY DOWN to reduce the intensity of the green raster providing the proper brown
earth and blue sky colors of the ADI display.
During COMPOSITE mode both sections of the symbol generator provide a combina-
tion of ADI and HSI data on both display units. If both the ADI section and HSI section
of the symbol generator are operational, then both displays will be identical during
COMPOSITE mode. The displays will consist of an ADI display with a heading tape
added to the horizon line, distance display, selected course display, selected heading
display and vertical and horizontal navigation deviation displays. The bottom display
unit has its DISPLAY DOWN input grounded during COMPOSITE to reduce the inten-
sity of the green raster providing the proper brown earth and blue sky colors of the ADI
display.
Both the ADI and HSI sections of the symbol generator are capable of processing and
displaying attitude and heading, but only the HSI section is capable of processing nav-
igation information. Once navigation information is processed in the HSI section it is
transmitted to the ADI section for display there. Should the HSI section of the symbol
generator fail neither display will include navigation information. Should the ADI sec-
tion of the symbol generator fail the HSI display will provide attitude and navigation in-
formation during COMPOSITE mode.

If DISPLAY DOWN and COMPOSITE modes are both selected the top display unit will
be blank and the HSI section of the symbol generator will present the combination of
ADI and HSI data (COMPOSITE display as described above) on the bottom display.
DISPLAY DOWN protects against a loss of attitude information in the event a failure
should occur in the ADI section of the symbol generator or in the top display unit. The
COMPOSITE mode restores the lost navigation information that occurs during a DIS-
PLAY DOWN and provides heading on the ADI display in the event of a failure in the
HSI section of the symbol generator or the bottom display unit. The combination of the
two modes provide protection against a loss of the ADI section of the symbol generator
or the top display unit and partial protection against the loss of the HSI section of the
symbol generator or the bottom display unit.

FIGURE 3-32 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI Block Diagram

(Dwg No 696-00698-0002, Rev 2)

FIGURE 3-33 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI EADI Power Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0002, Rev 3, Sht 1)

FIGURE 3-34 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI EADI Video Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0002, Rev 3, Sht 2)

FIGURE 3-35 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI EADI Deflection Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0002, Rev 3, Sht 3)

FIGURE 3-36 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI Control Panel Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0002, Rev 3, Sht 4)

FIGURE 3-37 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI EHSI Power Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0002, Rev 3, Sht 5)

FIGURE 3-38 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI EHSI Video Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0002, Rev 3, Sht 6)

FIGURE 3-39 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI EHSI Deflection Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0002, Rev 3, Sht 7)

FIGURE 3-40 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI XTALK and Discrete Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0002, Rev 3, Sht 8)

3.2.5.K. EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI
Figure 3-41 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI Block Diagram

Figure 3-42 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI - EADI Power Interface
Figure 3-43 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI - EADI Video Interface
Figure 3-44 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI - EADI Deflection Interface
Figure 3-45 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI - Control Panel Interface
Figure 3-46 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI - EHSI Power Interface
Figure 3-47 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI - EHSI Video Interface
Figure 3-48 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI - EHSI Deflection Interface
Figure 3-49 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI - Xtalk and Discrete Interface
A single SG 465 symbol generator is shown interfaced to two ED 551 or ED 551A dis-
plays with a CP 467 control panel.
A single EADI/EHSI installation allows for both the DISPLAY DOWN and the COM-
POSITE reversionary modes. Either mode may be selected separately or both may be
selected simultaneously.
display.


FIGURE 3-41 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI Block Diagram

(Dwg No 696-00698-0012, Rev 1)

FIGURE 3-42 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI EADI Power Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0052, Rev 3, Sht 1)

FIGURE 3-43 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI EADI Video Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0052, Rev 3, Sht 2)

FIGURE 3-44 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI EADI Deflection Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0052, Rev 3, Sht 3)

FIGURE 3-45 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI Control Panel Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0052, Rev 3, Sht 4)

FIGURE 3-46 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI EHSI Power Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0052, Rev 3, Sht 5)

FIGURE 3-47 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI EHSI Video Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0052, Rev 3, Sht 6)

FIGURE 3-48 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI EHSI Deflection Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0052, Rev 3, Sht 7)

FIGURE 3-49 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI XTALK and Discrete Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0052, Rev 3, Sht 8)

3.2.5.L. EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI with MFD
Figure 3-50 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI with MFD Block Diagram

Figure 3-51 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI with MFD - EADI Power Interface
Figure 3-52 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI with MFD - EADI Video Interface
Figure 3-53 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI with MFD - EADI Deflection Interface
Figure 3-54 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI with MFD - Control Panel Interface
Figure 3-55 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI with MFD - EHSI Power Interface
Figure 3-56 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI with MFD - EHSI Video Interface
Figure 3-57 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI with MFD - EHSI Deflection Interface
Figure 3-58 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI with MFD - Xtalk and Discrete Interface
Figure 3-59 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI with MFD - Mode Select Interface
Figure 3-60 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI with MFD - Spare Relays Interface
The pilot SG 465 symbol generator is shown interfaced to two ED 462 display units
with a CP 467 control panel. The MFD SG 465 symbol generator is shown interfaced
to one ED 462 display unit with a CP 469 or CP 469A control panel. A single EADI/
EHSI with MFD installation using one ED 462 and one ED 461 with a CP 470 ADI con-
trol panel may be implemented by combining the information found in Figures 3-32
through 3-40 with Figures 3-50 through 3-60.
A Single EADI/EHSI with MFD installation allows for the DISPLAY DOWN, COMPOS-
ITE and STANDBY reversionary modes. Some modes are not allowed simultaneous-
ly. Refer to Note 1 of Figure 3-50 for a table of mode selection restrictions.
display unit. When the pilot selects DISPLAY DOWN the MFD/HSI input on the MFD
symbol generator is grounded instructing the MFD symbol generator to produce the pi-
lot’s HSI display for presentation on the MFD display. At the same time the EXTER-
NAL input to the MFD control panel is grounded to cause the pilot control panel oper-
ations to be sent to the MFD symbol generator for control of the pilot’s HSI display on
the MFD display. When DISPLAY DOWN is selected by the pilot, the pilot’s HSI dis-
play on the MFD will initially have the same data as was displayed on the pilot’s HSI.
The bottom display unit has its DISPLAY DOWN input grounded during DISPLAY
DOWN to reduce the intensity of the green raster providing the proper brown earth and
blue sky colors of the ADI display.

display.
The pilot’s HSI presentation on the MFD display will not become a COMPOSITE dis-
play.
During STANDBY the MFD symbol generator is used to drive both of the pilot’s display
units. Relays switch display unit power, video, deflection and display unit fault from the
pilot’s symbol generator to the MFD symbol generator. Relays switch the control panel
power source from the pilot’s symbol generator to the MFD symbol generator. When
the pilot has selected STANDBY the EXTERNAL input to the MFD control panel is
grounded to cause the pilot control panel operations to be sent to the MFD symbol gen-
erator for continued control of the pilot’s ADI and HSI displays that are now produced
by the MFD symbol generator. When STANDBY is selected, the displays will initially
have the same data displayed that was selected for the MFD display. The pilot is re-
quired to then operate his control panel to change the displayed information from what
was previously displayed on the MFD if that information is not what he wants. STAND-
BY is annunciated on both of the pilot’s display units.
The ED 461 and ED 462 display units are powered by the symbol generator. Each
section (ADI and HSI) of the symbol generator can provide power to only one EFS 40
display unit. During STANDBY the HSI section of the MFD symbol generator is used
to power the pilot’s HSI display unit and no power is provided to the MFD display unit
causing it to be blank.
DISPLAY DOWN and STANDBY are not allowed to be active simultaneously. There
is no restriction on COMPOSITE and STANDBY modes being active simultaneously
and no changes to either mode as a result of the other being active.

STANDBY protects against the loss of the pilot’s symbol generator and provides all the
capabilities that were provided by the pilot’s symbol generator. The MFD offers the
only location for the displaying vertical profile weather radar and checklist data. Other
MFD only displays may be provided in the future. During STANDBY these MFD only
features are no longer available.
NOTE
ED 461 and ED 462 display units must have Mod 1.
Service Bulletin #1 requires that Mod 1 be performed on ED 461 and ED 462 display
units for proper operation during STANDBY. This modification reduces high current
spikes on the +85 VDC power line when this line is switched between symbol genera-
tors during STANDBY switching. Without this modification immediate relay contact
failure will occur in the SU 463.

THIS PAGE RESERVED

FIGURE 3-50 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD Block Diagram

(Dwg No 696-00698-0003, Rev 2)

FIGURE 3-51 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD EADI Power Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0003, Rev AA, Sht 1)

FIGURE 3-52 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD EADI Video Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0003, Rev AA, Sht 2)

FIGURE 3-53 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD EADI Deflection Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0003, Rev AA, Sht 3)

FIGURE 3-54 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD Control Panel Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0003, Rev AA, Sht 4)

FIGURE 3-55 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD EHSI Power Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0003, Rev AA, Sht 5)

FIGURE 3-56 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD EHSI Video Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0003, Rev AA, Sht 6)

FIGURE 3-57 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD EHSI Deflection Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0003, Rev AA, Sht 7)

FIGURE 3-58 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD XTALK and Discrete Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0003, Rev AA, Sht 8)

FIGURE 3-59 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD Mode Select Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0003, Rev AA, Sht 9)

FIGURE 3-60 EFS 40 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD Spare Relays Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0003, Rev AA, Sht 10)

3.2.5.M. EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI with MFD
Figure 3-61 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI with MFD Block Diagram

Figure 3-62 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI with MFD - EADI Power Interface
Figure 3-63 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI with MFD - EADI Video Interface
Figure 3-64 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI with MFD - EADI Deflection Interface
Figure 3-65 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI with MFD - Control Panel Interface
Figure 3-66 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI with MFD - EHSI Power Interface
Figure 3-67 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI with MFD - EHSI Video Interface
Figure 3-68 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI with MFD - EHSI Deflection Interface
Figure 3-69 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI with MFD - Xtalk and Discrete Interface
Figure 3-70 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI with MFD - Mode Select Interface
Figure 3-71 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI with MFD - Spare Relays Interface
The pilot SG 465 symbol generator is shown interfaced to two ED 551 or ED 551A dis-
play units with a CP 467 control panel. The MFD SG 465 symbol generator is shown
interfaced to one ED 551 or ED 551A display unit with a CP 469 or CP 469A control
panel.
A Single EADI/EHSI with MFD installation allows for the DISPLAY DOWN, COMPOS-
ITE and STANDBY reversionary modes. Some modes are not allowed simultaneous-
ly. Refer to Note 1 of Figure 3-61 for a table of mode selection restrictions.
display unit. When the pilot selects DISPLAY DOWN the MFD/HSI input on the MFD
symbol generator is grounded instructing the MFD symbol generator to produce the pi-
lot’s HSI display for presentation on the MFD display. At the same time the EXTER-
NAL input to the MFD control panel is grounded to cause the pilot control panel oper-
ations to be sent to the MFD symbol generator for control of the pilot’s HSI display on
the MFD display. When DISPLAY DOWN is selected by the pilot, the pilot’s HSI dis-
play on the MFD will initially have the same data as was displayed on the pilot’s HSI.
The bottom display unit has its DISPLAY DOWN input grounded during DISPLAY
DOWN to reduce the intensity of the green raster providing the proper brown earth and
blue sky colors of the ADI display.
display.

The pilot’s HSI presentation on the MFD display will not become a COMPOSITE dis-
play.
During STANDBY the MFD symbol generator is used to drive both of the pilot’s display
units. Relays switch display unit power, video, deflection and display unit fault from the
pilot’s symbol generator to the MFD symbol generator. Relays switch the control panel
power source from the pilot’s symbol generator to the MFD symbol generator. When
the pilot has selected STANDBY the EXTERNAL input to the MFD control panel is
grounded to cause the pilot control panel operations to be sent to the MFD symbol gen-
erator for continued control of the pilot’s ADI and HSI displays that are now produced
by the MFD symbol generator. When STANDBY is selected, the displays will initially
have the same data displayed that was selected for the MFD display. The pilot is re-
quired to then operate his control panel to change the displayed information from what
was previously displayed on the MFD if that information is not what he wants. STAND-
BY is annunciated on both of the pilot’s display units.
The ED 551 and ED 551A display units are powered directly from the aircraft +27.5
VDC power and are not powered by the symbol generator. During STANDBY the HSI
section of the MFD symbol generator is used to generate the display for the pilot’s HSI
display unit. Since the display signals are also connected to the MFD display unit and
the power is not removed from the MFD display unit the MFD display unit will provide
the identical display as the pilot’s HSI display unit.


THIS PAGE RESERVED

FIGURE 3-61 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD Block Diagram

(Dwg No 696-00698-0013, Rev 2)

FIGURE 3-62 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD EADI Power Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0053, Rev AA, Sht 1)

FIGURE 3-63 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD EADI Video Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0053, Rev AA, Sht 2)

FIGURE 3-64 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD EADI Deflection Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0053, Rev AA, Sht 3)

FIGURE 3-65 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD Control Panel Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0053, Rev AA, Sht 4)

FIGURE 3-66 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD EHSI Power Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0053, Rev AA, Sht 5)

FIGURE 3-67 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD EHSI Video Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0053, Rev AA, Sht 6)

FIGURE 3-68 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD EHSI Deflection Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0053, Rev AA, Sht 7)

FIGURE 3-69 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD XTALK and Discrete Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0053, Rev AA, Sht 8)

FIGURE 3-70 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD Mode Select Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0053, Rev AA, Sht 9)

FIGURE 3-71 EFS 50 Single EADI/EHSI With MFD Spare Relays Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0053, Rev AA, Sht 10)

3.2.5.N. EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI
Figure 3-72 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI Block Diagram

Figure 3-73 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI - EADI Power Interface
Figure 3-74 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI - EADI Video Interface
Figure 3-75 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI - EADI Deflection Interface
Figure 3-76 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI - Control Panel Interface
Figure 3-77 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI - EHSI Power Interface
Figure 3-78 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI - EHSI Video Interface
Figure 3-79 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI - EHSI Deflection Interface
Figure 3-80 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI - Xtalk and Discrete Interface
Figure 3-81 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI - Mode Select Interface
Figure 3-82 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI - Spare Relays Interface
The pilot SG 465 symbol generator and copilot SG 465 symbol generator are each
shown interfaced to two ED 462 display units with a CP 467 control panel. A Dual
EADI/EHSI installation using, on each side, one ED 462 and one ED 461 with a CP
470 ADI control panel may be implemented by combining the information found in Fig-
ures 3-32 through 3-40 with Figures 3-72 through 3-82.
A Dual EADI/EHSI installation allows for the DISPLAY DOWN, COMPOSITE and
COPY reversionary modes for both pilot and copilot. Some modes are not allowed si-
multaneously. Refer to Note 1 of Figure 3-72 for a table of mode selection restrictions.
display.

If DISPLAY DOWN and COMPOSITE modes are both selected from the same pilot po-
sition the top display unit will be blank and the HSI section of the symbol generator will
present the combination of ADI and HSI data (COMPOSITE display as described
above) on the bottom display.
A pilot may select COPY if the other pilot is not already in COPY mode. During COPY,
the video from the cross-side symbol generator is displayed at the pilot position from
which the COPY is initiated. Both displays are identical in every respect. COPY is an-
nunciated on both display units.
Power for the on-side ED 461 or ED 462 display unit must continue to be supplied from
the on-side symbol generator.
symbol generator or the bottom display unit. With EFS 40 display units, the COPY
mode does not serve as a backup for symbol generator power supply failures, but does
protest against other symbol generator failure modes.

FIGURE 3-72 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI Block Diagram

(Dwg No 696-00698-0004, Rev 1)

FIGURE 3-73 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI EADI Power Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0004, Rev AA, Sht 1)

FIGURE 3-74 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI EADI Video Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0004, Rev AA, Sht 2)

FIGURE 3-75 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI EADI Deflection Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0004, Rev AA, Sht 3)

FIGURE 3-76 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI Control Panel Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0004, Rev AA, Sht 4)

FIGURE 3-77 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI EHSI Power Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0004, Rev AA, Sht 5)

FIGURE 3-78 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI EHSI Video Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0004, Rev AA, Sht 6)

FIGURE 3-79 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI EHSI Deflection Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0004, Rev AA, Sht 7)

FIGURE 3-80 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI XTALK and Discrete Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0004, Rev AA, Sht 8)

FIGURE 3-81 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI Mode Select Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0004, Rev AA, Sht 9)

FIGURE 3-82 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI Spare Relays Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0004, Rev AA, Sht 10)

3.2.5.O. EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI
Figure 3-83 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI Block Diagram

Figure 3-84 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI - EADI Power Interface
Figure 3-85 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI - EADI Video Interface
Figure 3-86 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI - EADI Deflection Interface
Figure 3-87 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI - Control Panel Interface
Figure 3-88 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI - EHSI Power Interface
Figure 3-89 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI - EHSI Video Interface
Figure 3-90 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI - EHSI Deflection Interface
Figure 3-91 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI - Xtalk and Discrete Interface
Figure 3-92 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI - Mode Select Interface
Figure 3-93 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI - Spare Relays Interface
shown interfaced to two ED 551 or ED 551A display units with a CP 467 control panel.
A Dual EADI/EHSI installation allows for the DISPLAY DOWN, COMPOSITE and
COPY reversionary modes for both pilot and copilot. Some modes are not allowed si-
multaneously. Refer to Note 1 of Figure 3-83 for a table of mode selection restrictions.
display.

above) on the bottom display.
A pilot may select COPY if the other pilot is not already in COPY mode. During COPY,
the video from the cross-side symbol generator is displayed at the pilot position from
which the COPY is initiated. Both displays are identical in every respect. COPY is an-
nunciated on both display units.
During COPY, only the brightness control will remain functional on the on-side control
panel. All other control functions must be made from the cross-side.
symbol generator or the bottom display unit. With EFS 40 display units, the COPY
mode does not serve as a backup for symbol generator power supply failures, but does
protest against other symbol generator failure modes. With EFS 50 display units, the
COPY mode does protect against symbol generator power supply failures.

FIGURE 3-83 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI Block Diagram

(Dwg No 696-00698-0014, Rev 1)

FIGURE 3-84 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI EADI Power Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0054, Rev AA, Sht 1)

FIGURE 3-85 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI EADI Video Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0054, Rev AA, Sht 2)

FIGURE 3-86 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI EADI Deflection Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0054, Rev AA, Sht 3)

FIGURE 3-87 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI Control Panel Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0054, Rev AA, Sht 4)

FIGURE 3-88 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI EHSI Power Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0054, Rev AA, Sht 5)

FIGURE 3-89 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI EHSI Video Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0054, Rev AA, Sht 6)

FIGURE 3-90 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI EHSI Deflection Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0054, Rev AA, Sht 7)

FIGURE 3-91 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI XTALK and Discrete Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0054, Rev AA, Sht 8)

FIGURE 3-92 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI Mode Select Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0054, Rev AA, Sht 9)

FIGURE 3-93 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI Spare Relays Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0054, Rev AA, Sht 10)

3.2.5.P. EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI with MFD
Figure 3-94 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI with MFD Block Diagram

Figure 3-95 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI with MFD - EADI Power Interface
Figure 3-96 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI with MFD - EADI Video Interface
Figure 3-97 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI with MFD - EADI Deflection Interface
Figure 3-98 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI with MFD - Control Panel Interface
Figure 3-99 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI with MFD - EHSI Power Interface
Figure 3-100 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI with MFD - EHSI Video Interface
Figure 3-101 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI with MFD - EHSI Deflection Interface
Figure 3-102 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI with MFD - Xtalk and Discrete Interface
Figure 3-103 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI with MFD - Mode Select Interface
Figure 3-104 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI with MFD - Spare Relays Interface
shown interfaced to two ED 462 display units with a CP 467 control panel. The MFD
SG 465 symbol generator is shown interfaced to an ED 462 display unit with a CP 469
or CP 469A control panel. A Dual EADI/EHSI with MFD installation using, on each
side, one ED 462 and one ED 461 with a CP 470 ADI control panel may be implement-
ed by combining the information found in Figures 3-32 through 3-40 with Figures 3-94
through 3-104.
A Dual EADI/EHSI with MFD installation allows for the DISPLAY DOWN, COMPOSITE
and STANDBY reversionary modes for both pilot and copilot. Some modes are not al-
lowed simultaneously. Refer to Note 1 of Figure 3-94 for a table of mode selection re-
strictions.
display unit. When the pilot selects DISPLAY DOWN (but not when the copilot selects
DISPLAY DOWN) the MFD/HSI input on the MFD symbol generator is grounded in-
structing the MFD symbol generator to produce the pilot’s HSI display for presentation
on the MFD display. At the same time the EXTERNAL input to the MFD control panel
is grounded to cause the pilot control panel operations to be sent to the MFD symbol
generator for control of the pilot’s HSI display on the MFD display. When DISPLAY
DOWN is selected by the pilot, the pilot’s HSI display on the MFD will initially have the
same data as was displayed on the pilot’s HSI. The bottom display unit has its DIS-
PLAY DOWN input grounded during DISPLAY DOWN to reduce the intensity of the
green raster providing the proper brown earth and blue sky colors of the ADI display.

display.
above) on the bottom display. The pilot’s HSI presentation on the MFD display will not
become a COMPOSITE display.
During STANDBY the MFD symbol generator is used to drive both of the selecting
crewmember’s display units. Relays switch display unit power, video, deflection and
display unit fault from the selecting crewmember’s symbol generator to the MFD sym-
bol generator. Relays switch the control panel power source from the selecting crew-
member’s symbol generator to the MFD symbol generator. If the pilot has selected
STANDBY the EXTERNAL input to the MFD control panel is grounded to cause the
pilot control panel operations to be sent to the MFD symbol generator for continued
control of the pilot’s ADI and HSI displays that are now produced by the MFD symbol
generator. If the copilot has selected STANDBY, the control panel inputs to the MFD
symbol generator are switched from the MFD control panel to the copilot control panel
to cause the copilot control panel operations to be sent to the MFD symbol generator
for continued control of the copilot’s ADI and HSI displays. When STANDBY is select-
ed, the displays initially have the same data displayed that was selected for the MFD
display. The crewmember is required to then operate their control panel to change the
displayed information from what was previously displayed on the MFD if that informa-
tion is not what they want. STANDBY is annunciated on both of the selecting crew-
members’ display units.
The ED 461 and ED 462 display units are powered by the symbol generator. Each
section (ADI and HSI) of the symbol generator can provide power to only one EFS 40
display unit. During STANDBY the HSI section of the MFD generator is used to power
the selecting crewmember’s HSI display unit and no power is provided to the MFD unit,
causing it to be blank.
Some cross-talk bus features are lost during DISPLAY DOWN. The MFD symbol gen-
erator will not participate in Cross-talk comparisons unless STANDBAY is selected.
During DISPLAY DOWN only the HSI section of the selecting crewmember’s symbol
generator will participate in Cross-talk comparisons and it will be comparing ADI infor-
mation and not HSI information.
Heading miscompares will only be annunciated if the ADI has been configured to dis-
play the heading tape or if COMPOSITE is also active. No annunciations will be pro-

vided to warn when pilot and copilot are displaying the same navigation source and no
CAT II ILS monitoring is provided. During STANDBY relays switch the Cross-talk bus
for two-way communication between the MFD symbol generator and the non-selecting
crewmember’s symbol generator. No cross-talk bus features are lost during STAND-
BY.
DISPLAY DOWN and STANDBY (both at the same crew position) are not allowed to
be active simultaneously. In an EFS 40 installation both crewmembers are not allowed
to select STANDBY simultaneously. There is no restriction on COMPOSITE and
STANDBY modes being active simultaneously and no changes to either mode as a re-
sult of the other being active.
NOTE
ED 461 and ED 462 display units must have Mod 1.
Service Bulletin #1 requires that Mod 1 be performed on ED 461 and ED 462 display
units for proper operation during STANDBY. This modification reduces high current
spikes on the +85 Vdc power line when this line is switched between symbol genera-
tors during STANDBY switching. Without this modification immediate relay contact
failure will occur in the SU 463.

THIS PAGE RESERVED

FIGURE 3-94 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD Block Diagram

(Dwg No 696-00698-0005, Rev 1)

FIGURE 3-95 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD EADI Power Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0005, Rev AA, Sht 1)

FIGURE 3-96 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD EADI Video Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0005, Rev AA, Sht 2)

FIGURE 3-97 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD EADI Deflection Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0005, Rev AA, Sht 3)

FIGURE 3-98 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD Control Panel Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0005, Rev AA, Sht 4)

FIGURE 3-99 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD EHSI Power Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0005, Rev AA, Sht 5)

FIGURE 3-100 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD EHSI Video Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0005, Rev AA, Sht 6)

FIGURE 3-101 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD EHSI Deflection Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0005, Rev AA, Sht 7)

FIGURE 3-102 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD XTALK and Discrete Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0005, Rev AA, Sht 8)

FIGURE 3-103 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD Mode Select Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0005, Rev AA, Sht 9)

FIGURE 3-104 EFS 40 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD Spare Relays Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0005, Rev AA, Sht 10)

3.2.5.Q. EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI with MFD
Figure 3-105 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI with MFD Block Diagram

Figure 3-106 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI with MFD - EADI Power Interface
Figure 3-107 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI with MFD - EADI Video Interface
Figure 3-108 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI with MFD - EADI Deflection Interface
Figure 3-109 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI with MFD - Control Panel Interface
Figure 3-110 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI with MFD - EHSI Power Interface
Figure 3-111 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI with MFD - EHSI Video Interface
Figure 3-112 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI with MFD - EHSI Deflection Interface
Figure 3-113 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI with MFD - Xtalk and Discrete Interface
Figure 3-114 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI with MFD - Mode Select Interface
Figure 3-115 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI with MFD - Spare Relays Interface
shown interfaced to two ED 551 or ED 551A display units with a CP 467 control panel.
The MFD SG 465 symbol generator is shown interfaced to a ED 551 or ED 551A dis-
play unit with a CP 469 or CP 469A control panel.
A Dual EADI/EHSI with MFD installation allows for the DISPLAY DOWN, COMPOSITE
and STANDBY reversionary modes for both pilot and copilot. Some modes are not al-
lowed simultaneously. Refer to Note 1 of Figure 3-105 for a table of mode selection
restrictions.
display unit. When the pilot selects DISPLAY DOWN (but not when the copilot selects
DISPLAY DOWN) the MFD/HSI input on the MFD symbol generator is grounded in-
structing the MFD symbol generator to produce the pilot’s HSI display for presentation
on the MFD display. At the same time the EXTERNAL input to the MFD control panel
is grounded to cause the pilot control panel operations to be sent to the MFD symbol
generator for control of the pilot’s HSI display on the MFD display. When DISPLAY
DOWN is selected by the pilot, the pilot’s HSI display on the MFD will initially have the
same data as was displayed on the pilot’s HSI. The bottom display unit has its DIS-
PLAY DOWN input grounded during DISPLAY DOWN to reduce the intensity of the
green raster providing the proper brown earth and blue sky colors of the ADI display.
display.

above) on the bottom display. The pilot’s HSI presentation on the MFD display will not
become a COMPOSITE display.
During STANDBY the MFD symbol generator is used to drive both of the selecting
crewmember’s display units. Relays switch display unit power, video, deflection and
display unit fault from the selecting crewmember’s symbol generator to the MFD sym-
bol generator. Relays switch the control panel power source from the selecting crew-
member’s symbol generator to the MFD symbol generator. If the pilot has selected
STANDBY the EXTERNAL input to the MFD control panel is grounded to cause the
pilot control panel operations to be sent to the MFD symbol generator for continued
control of the pilot’s ADI and HSI displays that are now produced by the MFD symbol
generator. If the copilot has selected STANDBY the control panel inputs to the MFD
symbol generator are switched from the MFD control panel to the copilot control panel
to cause the copilot control panel operations to be sent to the MFD symbol generator
for continued control of the copilot’s ADI and HSI displays. When STANDBY is select-
ed, the displays initially have the same data displayed that was selected for the MFD
display. The crewmember is required to then operate their control panel to change the
displayed information from what was previously displayed on the MFD if that informa-
tion is not what they want. STANDBY is annunciated on both of the selecting crew-
members’ display units.
In an EFS 50 installation both crewmembers may select ATANDBY simultaneously.

During this dual STANDBY both crewmembers’ displays units and the MFD display will
display identical information. The copilot’s control panel is not operational except for
adjusting the display brightness. The pilot’s control panel is used to control the EFIS.
All the Cross-talk bus features are lost during STANDBY. Lost Cross-talk bus features
include: Miscompare annunciations of attitude, heading, glideslope, localizer, radio al-
titude, and MLS horizontal and vertical deviation data; annunciation of both crewmem-
bers displaying the same navigation, heading or attitude source; and CAT II ILS mon-
itoring. Miscompare computations are still made within the MFD symbol generator for
dual channel inputs and will be annunciated when limits are exceeded. The COPY in-
put to the MFD symbol generator is grounded during dual STANDBY causing a COPY
annunciation to occur on all displays. The COPY discrete also disables the heading,
attitude and radar altitude miscompares annunciations that would occur due to the loss
of the Cross-talk input to the MFD symbol generator. If CAT II monitoring is selected
by a crewmember, CAT II will be displayed in yellow to indicate it is not operational.
The ED 551 and ED 551A display units are powered directly from the aircraft +27.5
VDC power and are not powered by the symbol generator. During STANDBY the HSI

section of the MFD symbol generator is used to generate the display for the pilot’s HSI
display unit. Since the display signals are also connected to the MFD display unit and
the power is not removed from the MFD display unit the MFD display unit will provide
the identical display as the pilot’s HSI display unit.
Some cross-talk bus features are lost during DISPLAY DOWN. The MFD symbol gen-
erator will not participate in Cross-talk comparisons unless STANDBAY is selected.
During DISPLAY DOWN only the HSI section of the selecting crewmember’s symbol
generator will participate in Cross-talk comparisons and it will be comparing ADI infor-
mation and not HSI information.
Heading miscompares will only be annunciated if the ADI has been configured to dis-
play the heading tape or if COMPOSITE is also active. No annunciations will be pro-
vided to warn when pilot and copilot are displaying the same navigation source and no
CAT II ILS monitoring is provided. If CAT II monitoring is selected by a crewmember,
CAT II will be displayed in yellow to indicate it is not operational. During STANDBY
relays switch the Cross-talk bus for two-way communication between the MFD symbol
generator and the non-selecting crewmember’s symbol generator. No cross-talk bus
features are lost when a single crewmember selects STANDBY.
DISPLAY DOWN and STANDBY (both at the same crew position) are not allowed to
be active simultaneously. In an EFS 40 installation both crewmembers are not allowed
to select STANDBY simultaneously. There is no restriction on COMPOSITE and
STANDBY modes being active simultaneously and no changes to either mode as a re-
sult of the other being active.

THIS PAGE RESERVED





FIGURE 3-106 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD EADI Power Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0055, Rev AA, Sht 1)

FIGURE 3-107 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD EADI Video Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0055, Rev AA, Sht 2)

FIGURE 3-108 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD EADI Deflection Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0055, Rev AA, Sht 3)

FIGURE 3-109 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD Control Panel Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0055, Rev AA, Sht 4)

FIGURE 3-110 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD EHSI Power Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0055, Rev AA, Sht 5)

FIGURE 3-111 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD EHSI Video Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0055, Rev AA, Sht 6)

FIGURE 3-112 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD EHSI Deflection Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0055, Rev AA, Sht 7)

FIGURE 3-113 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD XTALK and Discrete Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0055, Rev AA, Sht 8)

FIGURE 3-114 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD Mode Select Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0055, Rev AA, Sht 9)

FIGURE 3-115 EFS 50 Dual EADI/EHSI With MFD Spare Relays Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0055, Rev AA, Sht 10)

3.3 HEADING/ATTITUDE/AHRS/RATE OF TURN
3.3.1 HEADING/ATTITUDE/AHRS/RATE OF TURN APPLICABLE PART NUMBERS
3.3.1.A. Symbol Generators for Heading, Attitude, AHRS and Rate of Turn
The following part numbers of the SG 465 will accept heading, attitude, AHRS, and rate
of turn inputs:
SG 465 066-04021-
- 01XX 02XX - - - - - - -
- 11XX 12XX - - - 1601 1755 - 5000
3.3.1.B. Symbol Generators for Heading and AHRS
The following part numbers of the SG 464 and SG 465 will accept heading and AHRS
inputs only:
SG 464 066-04020-
- 01XX 02XX - - - - - - -
- 11XX 12XX - - - - - - -
SG 465 066-04021-
- - - - 04XX 05XX - - - -
- - - - 14XX 15XX - - - -
3.3.2 HEADING/ATTITUDE/AHRS/RATE OF TURN FUNCTION
Heading information is used to position the HSI compass, position the ADI heading tape, compute
ADF course deviation, and to produce the flight control heading datum and course datum outputs.
In the event of a flagged heading source, the EFIS compass will continue to be positioned by the
heading input, but will display a heading flag in place of the lubber line. While the heading course
is flagged, the head and tail of the course deviation indicator is removed, leaving a course devia-
tion display that is displayed in a fixed horizontal position providing a standard course deviation
indication CDI referenced to the digital selected course. ADF course deviation will not be provided
when heading is flagged. Bearing pointers will continue to be displayed with the ADF bearing
pointer oriented to the aircraft nose (and not necessarily to the correct compass bearing) and the
other pointers oriented to the correct compass card position (and not necessarily to the correct
compass bearing relative to the aircraft nose).
In the event of a heading source failure resulting in a continuously rotating compass, the heading
circuit breaker should be pulled to stop the card. Removal of the XYZ heading input will cause the
compass to rotate randomly. The EFIS monitors the heading flag as the only criterion for display-
ing a heading flag. A valid heading flag with bad compass data could occur as a result of a failure

in the heading source or an open XYZ input wire. Should this occur the pilot should pull the head-
ing source circuit breaker to force the flag and remove potentially misleading information from the
display.
If dual compass systems are both operating with the same reference (magnetic or true reference)
and the two differ by more than 6°, when the aircraft roll is less than 6°, or differ by more than 20°,
when the aircraft roll is greater than 6° or unknown, then the heading compare annunciation will
appear on the HSI and on the ADI if the ADI heading tape is present.
Attitude information is used to position the ADI attitude display. A loss of attitude will cause the
sky and ground symbols to be removed.
If dual attitude systems differ by more than 6° in roll or 5° in pitch, the attitude compare annunci-
ation will appear on the ADI.
Rate of turn information is displayed on the bottom of the ADI display. A loss of rate of turn infor-
mation will cause the rate of turn indicator symbol to be removed. Rate of turn does not have a
comparator monitoring.
An AHRS can provide magnetic heading, attitude, and rate of turn information on a single high
speed ARINC 429 bus.
If a source of true heading is available or if a long range NAV is providing magnetic variation and
valid magnetic heading is available, then the EFIS may be operated in the true heading mode.
True heading may be provided by the XYZ heading source or by the IRU or INS. An external an-
alog discrete wire may be used to switch the EFIS to true heading is available from the IRU or INS.
While the displayed long range NAV is operating in true heading mode, the EFIS will automatically
switch to the true heading display mode and use the magnetic variation information provided by
the long range NAV to convert a magnetic heading source to true heading. VOR and TACAN in-
formation will not be displayed while the EFIS is operating with a true heading unless the long
range NAV provides a valid magnetic valid to allow conversion of the magnetic VOR and TACAN
bearings to true bearings.
All the symbol generators have inputs for two heading sources and the symbol generators with
ADI capability have inputs for two attitude sources. During normal operation, symbol generator
#1 uses the #1 heading and attitude source, symbol generator #2 uses the #2 heading and attitude
source and the MFD symbol generator uses the sour sources corresponding to the states of its
MFD SLAVE discrete. Two-pole alternate action annunciator switches may be used to select,
through discrete inputs on the symbol generator, either the cross-side heading or cross-side atti-
tude source on any of he symbol generators.
3.3.3 HEADING/ATTITUDE/AHRS/RATE OF TURN REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS
A source of heading information is required for all installations. A source of attitude information is
required only for installations that include an ADI display. Rate of turn is optional and is only avail-
able for installations that include an ADI display.

An XYZ and ARINC 429 heading source may not both connected in the same installation unless
one is connected as the on-side and the other as the cross-side source. Attitude and heading
must be provided in the same format i.e. XYZ or ARINC 429 on the same side of the aircraft.
If an XYZ attitude source is used then all symbol generators in the installation must be configured
for and connected to an attitude source on both side 1 and side 2. The second attitude source,
when available, can be either XYZ or 429. If a second attitude source is not part of the installation,
the single XYZ attitude source must be connected to both side 1 and side 2 XYZ attitude inputs of
all symbol generators and all symbol generators must be configured for dual XYZ attitude sources.
This paralleling of XYZ attitude inputs is required to utilize a comparator circuit inside the SG for
detection of a fault that would otherwise be undetected with a single XYZ attitude source.
NOTE
When a single XYZ attitude source is connected in this manner, heading must also be
provided in XYZ format to both side 1 and side 2 heading inputs of all symbol genera-
tors in the installation, and if this heading information is obtained from two separate
heading sources, both must use the same 400 Hz reference.
3.3.4 HEADING/ATTITUDE/AHRS/RATE OF TURN ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
3.3.4.A. 400 Hz Synchro Reference Input
P4651A-101 P4641A-17 REFERENCE 1 H

P4651A-74 P4641A-18 REFERENCE 1 C
P4651B-20 P4641B-19 REFERENCE 2 H

P4651B-47 P4641B-7 REFERENCE 2 C
Each reference input requires 26, ± 0.52 Vac at 400, ± 8 Hz and has an input imped-
ance of no less than 45 k ohms.
The 26 Vac 400 Hz inputs are used only as a reference. Current consumption is less
that 0.3 mA. All 400 Hz signal outputs from the symbol generator are powered from
the 28 Vdc input to the symbol generator. All side-1 400 Hz signal inputs to the symbol
generator must be the same phase as the reference1 input, and all side-2 inputs must
be the same phase as the reference 2 input. Side-1 and side-2 may differ in phase.
Heading and course datum outputs from the symbol generator to the flight control sys-
tem are referenced to the autopilot reference input which may differ in phase from side-
1 and side-2.
3.3.4.B. ARINC 407 Heading Synchro Input
P4651A-57 P4641A-71 HEADING 1 X

P4651A-97 P4641A-57 HEADING 1 Y
P4651A-84 P4641A-56 HEADING 1 Z

P4651B-78 P4641B-8 HEADING 2 X

P4651B-65 P4641B-21 HEADING 2 Y
P4651B-64 P4641B-20 HEADING 2 Z
Three-wire XYZ ARINC 407 format with Z grounded. Input impedance is no less than
37 k ohms. Input voltage to be 11.8, ± 1.18 Vrms.
3.3.4.C. Compass Valid Input
P4651A-100 P4641B-18 COMPASS 1 SUPERFLAG

P4651B-51 P4641C-46 COMPASS 2 SUPERFLAG
Valid: HI (no less than 18.0 Vdc). Invalid: LO (no more than 3.5 Vdc). Input impedance
no less than 360 k ohms.
3.3.4.D. Magnetic/True Mode Input
P4652A-71 P4641B-72 MAGNETIC/TRUE 1

P4652B-3 P4641C-98 MAGNETIC/TRUE 2
MAGNETIC: Greater than 18.0 Vdc or greater than 20 k ohms to ground.

TRUE: Less than 3.0 Vdc or less than 1 k ohms to ground.
Input impedance no less than 10 k ohms.
If a source true heading is available, then the EFIS may be operated in the true heading
mode. True heading may be provided by the XYZ heading source or by the IRU or
INS. The MAGNETIC/TRUE input is used to switch the EFIS to true heading display
when the XYZ heading source is true referenced or when true heading is available from
the IRU or INS. While the displayed long range NAV is operating in true heading mode,
the EFIS will automatically switch to the true heading mode and use the magnetic vari-
ation information provided by the long range NAV to convert a magnetic source to true
reference. VOR and TACAN information will not be displayed while the EFIS is oper-
ating with a true heading display unless the long range NAV provides a valid magnetic
variation to allow conversion of the magnetic VOR and TACAN bearings to true bear-
ings.
3.3.4.E. Compass Source Select Input
P4652B-19 P4641C-59 DG CROSS-SIDE
ON-SIDE: Greater than 18.0 Vdc or greater than 20 k ohms to ground.

CROSS-SIDE: Less than 3.0 Vdc or less than 1 k ohms to ground.

DG CROSS-SIDE determines whether the #1 or #2 heading source is used by the

symbol generator. Grounding DG CROSS-SIDE on symbol generator #1 causes the
#2 heading source to be used. Grounding DG CROSS-SIDE on symbol generator #2
causes the #1 heading source to be used. Grounding DG CROSS-SIDE on the MFD
symbol generator causes the #2 heading source to be used if MFD SLAVE 1/2 is open
and causes the #1 heading source to be used if MFD SLAVE 1/2 is grounded.
3.3.4.F. ARINC 407 Pitch Synchro Input
P4651A-3 PITCH 1 X
P4651A-4 PITCH 1 Y
P4651A-2 PITCH 1 Z
P4651B-36 PITCH 2 X
P4651B-50 PITCH 2 Y
P4651B-23 PITCH 2 Z
3.3.4.G. ARINC 407 Roll Synchro Input
P4651A-17 ROLL 1 X
P4651A-5 ROLL 1 Y
P4651A-30 ROLL 1 Z
P4651B-87 ROLL 2 X
P4651B-101 ROLL 2 Y
P4651B-60 ROLL 2 Z
3.3.4.H. Vertical Gyro Valid Input
P4651A-65 VERITICAL GYRO 1 SUPERFLAG

P4651B-73 VERITICAL GYRO 2 SUPERFLAG
Valid: HI (no less than 18.0 Vdc). Invalid: LO (no more than 3.5 Vdc).
3.3.4.I. Vertical Gyro Source Select Input
P4652B-87 VG CROSS-SIDE

ON-SIDE: Greater than 18.0 Vdc or greater than 20 k ohms to ground.

CROSS-SIDE: Less than 3.0 Vdc or less than 1 k ohms to ground.
VG CROSS-SIDE determines whether the #1 or #2 attitude source is used by the sym-

bol generator. Grounding VG CROSS-SIDE on symbol generator #1 causes the #2
attitude source to be used. Grounding VG CROSS-SIDE on symbol generator #2
causes the #1 attitude source to be used. Grounding VG CROSS-SIDE on the MFD
symbol generator causes the #2 attitude source to be used if MFD SLAVE 1/2 is open
and causes the #1 attitude source to be used if MFD SLAVE 1/2 is grounded.
3.3.4.J. ARINC 429 AHRS Input
The ARINC 429 AHRS receiver became operational with symbol generator software
release 0401. Software release 0601 increases the symbol generator’s ARINC 429 la-
bel processing efficiency and is recommended for AHRS installations.
P4652A-30 P4641B-1 AHRS 1 RECEIVER A

P4652A-4 P4641B-55 AHRS 1 RECEIVER B
P4652B-90 P4641C-38 AHRS 2 RECEIVER A

P4652B-104 P4641C-51 AHRS 2 RECEIVER B
All serial data must conform to ARINC 429 and ARINC 704 or ARINC 705 for electrical
characteristics, content and transmission interval. Labels shown below with an aster-
isk are not ARINC standard and may be specific to Bendix/King products. The AHRS
Receivers are high speed ARINC 429.
The following AHRS labels are used by the EFS 40/EFS 50:
LABEL PARAMETER RELEASE NOTES

270 DISCRETE STATUS
271* DISCRETE STATUS
320 MAGNETIC HEADING
324 PITCH ANGLE
325 ROLL ANGLE
330 YAW RATE – BODY
The following IRU labels are used by the EFS 40/EFS 50:

314 TRUE HEADING
320 MAGNETIC HEADING
324 PITCH ANGLE
325 ROLL ANGLE

330 YAW RATE – BODY
3.3.4.K. Rate of Turn Input
The Rate of Turn interface became operational with symbol generator software release
0501.
P4651B-72 RATE OF TURN +R

P4651B-86 RATE OF TURN +L
The rate of turn may be configured for scale factors of 200 mVdc/Deg/Sec, 333 mVdc/
Deg/Sec, or 666 mVdc/Deg/Sec. The rate of turn has an input impedance of no less
than 100 k ohms. Beginning with symbol generator software release 0801 a configu-
ration was added to allow the EFIS to apply a bank angle correction to yaw rate to more
accurately determine rate of turn. This configuration option should be used only when
the EFIS is supplied yaw rate and not when rate of turn is supplied. The correction
amplifies the yaw rate input by the reciprocal of the cosine of the roll angle.
NOTE
If YAW RATE is provided in the AHRS ARINC 429 input it is not necessary to connect
the Rate of Turn inputs.
3.3.4.L. Rate of Turn Valid
The Rate of Turn interface became operational with symbol generator software release
0501.
P4651B-100 RATE OF TURN SUPERFLAG
3.3.5 HEADING/ATTITUDE/AHRS/RATE OF RATE TURN INTERFACE
3.3.5.A. XYZ Heading Source
Refer to Figure 3-116 for the XYZ Heading Interface. All part numbers of the following
compass systems are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50: Aeronetics Model 9100,
Bendix/King KCS 55A, Bendix/King KCS 305, Collins MCS 65, Collins MC 102, Collins
MC 103, Sperry C14.
For installations using multiple symbol generators, the #1 XYZ heading source is con-
nected to the #1 XYZ heading inputs of all the symbol generators and the #2 heading
source is connected to the #2 XYZ heading input of all the symbol generators. For
EHSI only installations using a single XYZ heading source, the heading source is con-

nected to the #1 XYZ heading inputs of all the symbol generators and the #2 heading
inputs are not connected. For EADI/EHSI installations using a single XYZ attitude
source, the heading source is connected to both #1 XYZ and #2 XYZ heading inputs
of all the symbol generators, see paragraph B. below.
3.3.5.B. XYZ Attitude Source
Refer to Figure 3-117 for the XYZ Attitude interface. All part numbers of the following
attitude systems are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50: Aeronetics RVG 801A, RVG
801 B; Bendix/King KVG 350; Collins 332D-11, 332D-11A; JET VG 206, VG 208; Sper-
ry VG14, VG14A.
For installations using multiple symbol generators, the #1 XYZ attitude source is con-
nected to the #1 XYZ attitude inputs of all the symbol generators and the #2 attitude
source is connected to the #2 XYZ attitude input of all the symbol generators. For in-
stallations using a single XYZ attitude source, the attitude source is connected to both
#1 XYZ and #2 XYZ attitude inputs of all the symbol generators and all symbol gener-
ators are configured for dual XYZ attitude sources. This procedure is required to utilize
internal comparators for detection of faults that would otherwise be undetected with a
single attitude source. In this case XYZ heading must also be provided to both the #1
XYZ and #2 XYZ heading inputs of all symbol generators. If two separate heading
sources are connected, both must use the same 400 Hz reference.
3.3.5.C. VG/DG Reversionary Switching
Refer to Figure 3-118 for the VG/DG Reversionary Switching interface.
For Dual EADI/EHSI with MFD installations it is necessary to switch the MFD VG
Cross-side and DG Cross-Side inputs between the pilot and copilot reversionary
switches. For normal operation the MFD inputs are connected to the pilot’s switches.
When the copilot has selected Standby and the pilot has not simultaneously selected
Standby then the MFD inputs are connected to the copilot’s switches. For Single EADI/
EHSI with MFD installations it is not necessary to switch the MFD inputs and they are
connected directly to the pilot’s switches.
3.3.5.D. AHRS/IRU
The ARINC 429 AHRS receiver became operational with symbol generator release
0401. Software release 0601 increases the symbol generators ARINC 429 label pro-
cessing efficiency and is recommended for AHRS installations.
Refer to Figure 3-119 for the AHRS/IRU interface. All part numbers of the following
IRU/AHRS systems are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50: Bendix/King KAH 460,
Honeywell Laseref, Litef LTR 81.
For installations using multiple symbol generators, the #1 AHRS source is connected
to the #1 AHRS inputs of all the symbol generators and the #2 AHRS source is con-

nected to the #2 AHRS input of all the symbol generators. For installations using a sin-
gle AHRS source, the AHRS source is connected to the #1 AHRS inputs of all the sym-
bol generators and the #2 AHRS inputs are not connected.
3.3.5.E. AHRS Reversionary Switching
Refer to Figure 3-120 for the AHRS Reversionary Switching interface.
For Dual EADI/EHSI with MFD installations it is necessary to switch the MFD VG
Cross-side and DG Cross-Side inputs between the pilot and copilot reversionary
switches. For normal operation the MFD inputs are connected to the pilot’s switches.
When the copilot has selected Standby and the pilot has not simultaneously selected
Standby then the MFD inputs are connected to the copilot’s switches. For Single EADI/
EHSI with MFD installations it is not necessary to switch the MFD inputs and they are
connected directly to the pilot’s switches.
3.3.5.F. Rate of Turn
Refer to Figure 3-121 for the Rate of Turn interface. All part numbers of the following
rate of turn sensors are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50: Bendix/King KRG 332,
Collins APS 65 YRS 65, Collins APS 80 345-7A, APS 80 345-7B, Sperry RG 204
7007453-902, -903.
Rate of Turn input will not operate without a valid flag input. The flag may be derived
from the rate of turn gyro power input to meet this requirement. If the rate of turn gyro
power input is 25 or 115 Vac then it must be rectified and limited to 28 Vdc for use as
the rate of turn flag input to the symbol generator.
For Dual EADI/EHSI with MFD installations it is necessary to switch the MFD Rate of
Turn inputs between the pilot and copilot rate if turn sources. For normal operation the
MFD inputs are connected to the pilot’s Rate of Turn source. When the copilot has se-
lected Standby and the pilot has not simultaneously selected Standby then the MFD
inputs are connected to the copilot’s Rate of Turn source. For Single EADI/EHSI with
MFD installations it is not necessary to switch the MFD inputs and they are connected
directly to the pilot’s Rate of Turn source.

THIS PAGE RESERVED

FIGURE 3-116 EFS 40/EFS 50 XYZ Heading Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0006, Rev 4)

FIGURE 3-117 EFS 40/EFS 50 XYZ Attitude Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0007, Rev 3)

FIGURE 3-118 EFS 40/EFS 50 VG/DG Reversionary Switching Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0036, Rev 2)

FIGURE 3-119 EFS 40/EFS 50 IRU/AHRS Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0008, Rev 2)

FIGURE 3-120 EFS 40/EFS 50 AHRS Reversionary Switching Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0037, Rev 2)

FIGURE 3-121 EFS 40/EFS 50 Rate of Turn Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0009, Rev 4)

3.4 VOR/LOC/GS/MARKER BEACON
3.4.1 VOR/LOC/GS/MARKER BEACON APPLICABLE PART NUMBERS
3.4.1.A. Symbol Generators for VOR, LOC, GS and Marker Beacon
The following part numbers of the SG 465 will accept VOR, LOC, GS and Marker Bea-
con inputs:
SG 465 066-04021-
- 01XX 02XX - - - - - - -
- 11XX 12XX - - - 1601 1755 - 5000
3.4.1.B. Symbol Generators for VOR, LOC and GS
The following part numbers of the SG 464 and SG 465 will accept VOR, LOC and GS
inputs only.
SG 464 066-04020-
- 01XX 02XX - - - - - - -
- 11XX 12XX - - - - - - -
SG 465 066-04021-
- - - - 04XX 05XX - - - -
- - - - 14XX 15XX - - - -
3.4.2 VOR/LOC/GS/MARKER BEACON FUNCTION
Up to two VOR, localizer (LOC), and glideslope (GS) sources may be connected to the EFIS. With
two sources, the pilot selects the on-side or cross-side source for presentation on the course de-
viation display. The course deviation display is automatically switched between VOR and LOC dis-
plays following the selection of a VOR or LOC frequency on the NAV tuning control. The pilot may
select one or both of the VORs to be displayed on the bearing pointers. If a DME distance is as-
sociated with the VOR and the Map mode is selected with sufficient range, a VOR symbol will re-
place the pointer. Symbol generators with software 0501 or later will allow either bearing pointer
to display VOR bearing in installations with a single VOR receiver. The bearing pointer source
annunciation will be VOR without a 1 or 2 adjacent to it.
Only one discrete marker beacon may be connected to each symbol generator at a time. If marker
beacon data is present on both ARINC 429 NAV receivers, only the on-side ARINC 429 source or
t he discrete input is displayed by software before 0501. With 0501 and later software marker bea-
con data from either ARINC 429 receiver or from the discrete input will be displayed. Expanded
localizer, glideslope and the marker beacon information is displayed on the ADI.

In a pilot and copilot EFIS or EHSI installation, localizer and glideslope comparators are provided.
If both crewmembers are displaying ILS then a comparison is made between the two displays and
a comparator annunciation is made on the display if either localizer or glideslope deviations differ
by more than 1/4 of the full scale HSI display width (37.5 mVdc). No comparison of frequency is
made to insure both pilots are tuned to the same frequency; it is only verified that both are tuned
to localizer frequencies.
Category II approach monitors operational with software release 0601. The monitor is activated
by the crew from a panel-mounted switch. The EFIS places marks on the localizer and glideslope
scales to indicate the Category II approach tolerances and displays excessive deviation symbols
when they are exceeded.
3.4.3 VOR/LOC/GS/MARKER BEACON REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS
VOR, LOC, GS and marker beacon are all optional inputs to the EFIS, none are required. Display
of the marker beacon is only available for installations that include an ADI display.
VOR and LOC composite signals are not accepted by the symbol generator. A convertor must be
used to change the VOR composite signal to AC SIN/COS or ARINC 429 digital format and to
change the LOC composite signal to DC deviation voltages or ARINC 429 digital format.
ARINC 429 ILS and NAV data must be provided to the EFIS on a single input port. Separate
ARINC 429 inputs from an ARINC 710 ILS receiver and an ARIC 711 VOR receiver are not ac-
commodated.
3.4.4 VOR/LOC/GS/MARKER BEACON ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS


Each reference input requires 26, ± 0.52 Vac at 400, ± 8 Hz and has been as input
impedance of no less than 45 k ohms.
The 26 Vac 400 Hz are used only as a reference. The current consumption of these
inputs is less than 0.3 mA. All 400 Hz signal outputs from the symbol generator are
powered from the 28 Vdc power input to the symbol generator. All side-1 400 Hz signal
inputs to the symbol generator must be the same phase as the reference 1 input, and
all side-2 inputs must be the same phase as the reference 2 input. However, side-1
and side-2 may differ in phase. Heading and course datum outputs from the symbol
generator to the flight control system are referenced to the autopilot reference input
which may differ in phase from side-1 and side-2.

3.4.4.B. AC SIN/COS OBI Input
P4651A-73 P4641A-30 NAV 1 OBI SIN H

P4651A-60 P4641A-31 NAV 1 OBI COS H
P4651A-87 P4641A-58 NAV 1 OBI SIN/COS C
P4651B-46 P4641B-59 NAV 2 OBI SIN H

P4651B-33 P4641B-32 NAV 2 OBI COS H
P4651B-19 P4641B-46 NAV 2 OBI SIN/COS C
400 Hz AC SIN/COS OBI input. Input impedance is no less than 37 k ohms. An input
voltage maximum of 10.0 Vrms was allowed initially but has been increased to 12.9
Vrms by a hardware change.
3.4.4.C. NAV/Localizer Flag Input
P4651A-75 P4641A-69 NAV/LOC 1 +FLAG

P4651A-62 P4641A-55 NAV/LOC 1 -FLAG
P4651B-48 P4641B-9 NAV/LOC 2 +FLAG

P4651B-21 P4641B-22 NAV/LOC 2 -FLAG
This flag input validates both the AC SIN/COS OBI input and the localizer deviation in-
put. The flag input may be connected either to receive low level meter drive flag volt-
age or superflag level flag voltages. To receive a low level meter drive flag, connect
both the +FLAG and –FLAG inputs to the NAV/localizer receiver. To receive a super-
flag, connect the +Flag input to the NAV/localizer receiver and leave the – FLAG input
open.
When this input is connected to receive a low level meter drive flag, a flagged (invalid)
condition exists when the voltage at the +FLAG input is less than 150 mVdc with re-
spect to the –FLAG input. A not flagged (valid) condition exists when the voltage at
the +FLAG input is greater than 250 mVdc with respect to the –FLAG input. Input im-
pedance is 1 k ohms.
When this input is connected to receive a superflag, a flagged (invalid) condition exists
when the voltage at the +FLAG input is less than 3.5 Vdc with respect to the symbol
generator chassis ground. A not flagged (valid) condition exists when the voltage at
the +FLAG input is greater than 18.0 Vdc with respect to the symbol generator chassis
ground. Input impedance is no less than 360 k ohms.
CAUTION
THE –FLAG INPUT MUST BE OPEN FOR PROPER SUPERFLAG OPERATION. IF
THE –FLAG INPUT IS CONNECTED TO GROUND AND +28 VDC IS CONNECTED
TO THE +FLAG INPUT, THE SYMBOL GENERATOR WILL BE DAMAGED.

3.4.4.D. Localizer Deviation Input
P4651A-21 P4641A-98 LOC 1 DEV +R

P4651A-35 P4641A-84 LOC 1 DEV +L
P4651B-75 P4641B-12 LOC 2 DEV +R

P4651B-61 P4641B-24 LOC 2 DEV +L
Meter drive ± 150 mVdc full scale. This input will accept up to ± 300 mVdc and will
provide signal levels in this range at the Lateral Deviation Outputs for use by the flight
control system. Input impedance is 1 k ohms.
3.4.4.E. ILS Energize Input
P4651A-89 P4641A-97 ILS 1 ENERGIZE IN

P4651B-35 P4641B-85 ILS 2 ENERGIZE IN
These discretes are not used in ARINC 429 installations.

ILS: Less than 3.0 Vdc or less than 1 k ohms to ground.
VOR: Greater than 18.0 Vdc or greater than 20 k ohms to ground.
3.4.4.F. Glideslope Deviation Input
P4651A-32 P4641A-60 GS 1 DEV +UP

P4651A-46 P4641A-85 GS 1 DEV +DN
P4651B-76 P4641B-37 GS 2 DEV +UP

P4651B-62 P4641B-51 GS 2 DEV +DN
Meter drive ± 150 mVdc full scale. This input will accept up to ± 300 mVdc and will
provide signal levels in this range to the Vertical Deviation Outputs for use by the flight
3.4.4.G. Glideslope Flag Input
P4651A-61 P4641A-42 GS 1 +FLAG

P4651A-88 P4641A-28 GS 1 -FLAG
P4651B-49 P4641B-62 GS 2 +FLAG

P4651B-22 P4641B-49 GS 2 -FLAG

This flag input may be connected either to receive low level meter drive flag voltage or
superflag level flag voltages. To receive a low level meter drive flag, connect both the
+FLAG and –FLAG inputs to the glideslope receiver. To receive a superflag, connect
the +Flag input to the glideslope receiver and leave the – FLAG input open.
When connected to receive a low level meter drive flag, a flagged (invalid) condition
exists when the voltage at the +FLAG input is less than 150 mVdc with respect to the
–FLAG input. A not flagged (valid) condition exists when the voltage at the +FLAG in-
put is greater than 250 mVdc with respect to the –FLAG input. Input impedance is 1 k
ohms.
When connected to receive a superflag, a flagged (invalid) condition exists when the
voltage at the +FLAG input is less than 3.5 Vdc with respect to the symbol generator
chassis ground. A not flagged (valid) condition exists when the voltage at the +FLAG
input is greater than 18.0 Vdc with respect to the symbol generator chassis ground. In-
put impedance is no less than 360 k ohms.
CAUTION
THE –FLAG INPUT MUST BE OPEN FOR PROPER SUPERFLAG OPERATION. IF
THE –FLAG INPUT IS CONNECTED TO GROUND AND +28 VDC IS CONNECTED
3.4.4.H. ARINC 429 NAV Input
P4652A-16 P4641B-4 NAV 1 RECEIVER A

P4652A-29 P4641B-30 NAV 1 RECEIVER B
P4652B-38 P4641C-104 NAV 2 RECEIVER A

P4652B-25 P4641C-63 NAV 2 RECEIVER B
All serial data must conform to ARINC 429, ARINC 710 and ARINC 711 for electrical
characteristics, content and transmission interval. The NAV Receivers are low speed
ARINC 429. Label 222 contains the marker beacon discrete bits. The marker beacon
display became operational with software release 0401. The marker display on the
ADI is turned on and off in synchronization with the discrete bits. The following NAV
labels are used by the EFS 40/EFS 50:

034 VOR/ILS FREQUENCY
035 DME FREQUENCY Added by SW 0701
173 LOCALIZER DEVIATION
174 GLIDESLOPE DEVIATION
222 VOR OMNIBEARING
3.4.4.I. Marker Beacon Discrete Input

P4652A-38 MARKER BEACON OUTER

P4652A-39 MARKER BEACON MIDDLE
P4652A-52 MARKER BEACON INNER
P4652A-51 MARKER BEACON RETURN
ACTIVE: Greater than 3.4 Vdc or 3.0 Vac, 28 Vdc maximum relative to MARKER BEA-
CON RETURN.
INACTIVE: Less than 1.8 Vdc or 1.0 Vac relative to MARKER BEACON RETURN.
MARKER BEACON OUTER input impedance of greater than 48 k ohms, MARKER
BEACON MIDDLE input impedance of greater than 15 k ohms, and MARKER BEA-
CON INNER input impedance of greater than 9 k ohms. The marker display on the
ADI is turned on and off in synchronization with the discrete inputs.
NOTE
If Marker Beacon bits are provided in the NAV ARINC 429 Omnibearing label it is not
necessary to connect the Marker Beacon Discrete Inputs.
3.4.4.J. CAT II Enable Discrete Input
The CAT II ENABLE input became operational with software release 0601. This pin
connected to a panel-mounted switch for activation of the Category II approach moni-
tors by the flight crew. Before symbol generator software release 0801, this input was
activated by a momentary contact switch. After release 0801 this input must be held
low or the duration of the Category II operation by a latching switch.
P4652B-18 P4641C-58 CAT II ENABLE
ENABLE: Less than 3.0 Vdc or less than 1 k ohms to ground.

NOT ENABLE: Greater than 18.0 Vdc or greater than 20 k ohms to ground.
3.4.5 VOR/LOC/GS/MARKER BEACON INTERFACE
3.4.5.A. Composite NAV Receiver
Refer to Figure 3-122 for the Composite NAV Receiver interface. All part numbers of
the following NAV receivers when used with the KN 40 Composite NAV Converter are
compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50: Bendix/King KN 53, Bendix/King KX 155, Bendix/
King KX 165. The Bendix/King KN 73 is not compatible with the KN 40.
The KN 40 Composite NAV Convertor is produced in both single channel and dual
channel part number versions. Figure 3-122 assumes a dual channel KN 40. Sheet
one of figure 3-122 may be used for a single channel KN 40 used with NAV 1 but for a
single channel KN 40 to be used with NAV 2 a combination of the two sheets must be
used. To use a single channel KN 40 with NAV 2 use the KN 40 pins from sheet one

and the symbol generator pins from sheet 2 together to generator the correct intercon-
nect information.
The KX 165 Standby/Radial display on the face of the KX 165 will not properly display
radial information unless an OBS resolver load is connected to the KX 165. If an OBS
resolver is not connected to the KX 165 then the KX 165 Rotor C, Stator F, and Ground
must be connected to load resistors mounted inside the KN 40 for this purpose. Do
not connect the KX 165 to the KN 40 load resistors if the KX 165 is connected to a re-
solver.
The KN 40 provides all necessary data for glideslope, localizer, VOR and marker bea-
con on the ARINC 429 output. It is not necessary to connect any of the analog signals
between the KN 40 and the symbol generator. If desired, The KN 40 analog outputs
may be used instead of the ARINC 429 outputs. The symbol generator glideslope in-
puts are connected directly to the navigation receiver and the KN 40 analog outputs
are connected to the symbol generator for this type installation.
If desired, the marker beacon may be connected to the KN 40 for encoding into ARINC
429 instead of connecting the marker beacon receivers into the MFD symbol generator
in dual EADI/EHSI with MFD installations.
3.4.5.B. AC SIN/COS NAV Receiver
Refer to Figure 3-123 for the AC SIN/COS NAV Receiver interface. All part numbers
of he following NAV receivers are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50: Bendix/King
KNR 634, Collins VIR 30A, Collins VIR 31A, Collins VIR 32.
3.4.5.C. ARINC 429 Receiver
Refer to Figure 3-124 for the ARINC 429 NAV Receiver interface. All part numbers of
the following NAV receivers are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50: Bendix/King KNR
634A, Bendix/King VNS 41, Collins VIR-432.
It is not necessary to connect the marker beacon discrete inputs to the symbol gener-
ator when interfacing to any of the above listed ARINC 429 Receivers since they pro-
vide marker beacon bits on the Omnibearing label 222.
The VN 411B is available with either bearing or radial ARINC 429 Omnibearing label
222 outputs. The EFIS must be configured correctly for proper operation. Part number
066-0101-0000 should be configured for 429 RAD and part number 066-0110-0001.
The other NAV receivers listed above should all be configured as 429 BRG.
The KNR 634A requires a photocell or a jumper wire to be connected to the photocell
pins for the ARINC 429 marker beacon bits to operate.
3.4.5.D. Marker Beacon Receiver

Refer to Figure 3-125 for the Marker Beacon Receiver interface. All part numbers of
the following marker beacon receivers are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50 marker
beacon discrete inputs: Bendix/King KMA 20, Bendix/King KR 22, Bendix/King KMA
24, Bendix/King KMR 675, Collins VIR 30A, Collins VIR 31A, VIR 32.
NOTE
Some Collins marker beacon receivers require additional loading of the discrete out-
puts to prevent overloading marker inputs on the EFS 40/EFS 50. Refer to the appro-
priate Collins installation manual.
The following part numbers of the Bendix/King KR 21 and Bendix/King KNR 634 are
compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50 marker beacon discrete inputs:
KR 21 066-01021-
- 0001 - - - - - - - -
KNR 634 066-01078-

0000 - 0002 - 0004 - 0006 - - -
The following part numbers of the Bendix/King KNR 634A are compatible with the EFS
40/EFS 50 marker beacon NAV ARINC 429 inputs:
KNR 634A 066-1078-

10 - 12 - 14 - 16 - - -
It is not necessary to connect the marker beacon discrete inputs to the symbol gener-
ator when interfacing to an ARINC 429 NAV Receiver that provides marker beacon bits
on the Omnibearing label 222.
The KNR 634 and KNR 634A require a photocell or a jumper wire to be connected to
the photocell pins for the ARINC 429 marker beacon discrete outputs to operate.
For Dual EADI/EHSI with MFD installations it is necessary to switch the MFD Marker
Beacon discrete inputs between the pilot and copilot marker beacon discrete sources.
For normal operation the MFD inputs are connected to the pilot’s Marker Beacon
source. When the copilot has selected Standby and the pilot has not simultaneously
selected Standby then the MFD inputs are connected to the copilot’s Marker Beacon
source. For Single EADI/EHSI with MFD installations it is not necessary to switch the
MFD inputs and they are connected directly to the pilot’s Marker Beacon source.

FIGURE 3-122 EFS 40/EFS 50 Composite NAV Receiver Interconnect


FIGURE 3-122 EFS 40/EFS 50 Composite NAV Receiver Interconnect


FIGURE 3-123 EFS 40/EFS 50 AC SIN/COS NAV Receiver Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0011, Rev 2)

FIGURE 3-124 EFS 40/EFS 50 ARINC 429 NAV Receiver Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0012, Rev 2)

FIGURE 3-125 EFS 40/EFS 50 Marker Beacon Receiver Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0013, Rev AA)

3.5 DME/TACAN
3.5.1 DME/TACAN APPLICABLE PART NUMBERS
The following part numbers of the SG 464 and SG 465 will accept DME and TACAN inputs:
SG 464 066-04020-
- 01XX 02XX - - - - - - -
- 11XX 12XX - - - - - - -
SG 465 066-04021-
- 01XX 02XX - 04XX 05XX - - - -
- 11XX 12XX - 14XX 15XX - 17XX 50XX -
3.5.2 DME/TACAN FUNCTION
DME information, when available, is displayed for the selected NAV source associated with the
source deviation display. DME information can be displayed for each of the bearing pointers if
enabled by the pilot. If only one single channel DME is installed and it can be tuned by either NAV
frequency control, the DME information will be displayed when the NAV from which it was tuned
is displayed. It is possible in this case to use discretes out of the EFIS to cause the DME to be
tuned by the selected NAV (VOR, ILS, MLS or FMS) source associated with the course deviation
display. The EFIS annunciates when the DME is tuned to a held frequency and if the DME hold
frequency is provided on the ARINC 429 DME input, the hold frequency is displayed. When a
DME is placed in hold it is displayed with all on-side bearing selections. VOR, TACAN, and MLS
bearing pointer distance is not displayed if the frequency is provided on the ARINC 429 bus and
it does not match the frequency of the NAV source.
Up to two DME sources may be connected simultaneously to the EFIS with up to two TACAN dis-
tance sources if the DME distance and TACAN distance can be provided in different formats for
connections to different distance inputs to the symbol generator. Up to two TACAN bearing sourc-
es may be connected simultaneously with up to two VOR sources if the TACAN bearing and VOR
information can be provided in different formats. Prior to software 0901, when separate TACAN
bearing and VOR bearing inputs are used, separate TACAN and DME inputs must be used. When
configured for this installation configuration, the pilot selects between TACAN bearing/distance
and VOR/DME display with the EFIS NAV button for course deviation and distance display and
with either of the bearing buttons for bearing display. TACAN bearing or VOR bearing is accepted
at both the AC SIN/COS and ARINC 429 NAV inputs. TACAN bearing, along with DME data, is
accepted at the ARINC 429 DME inputs. An ARINC 429 TACAN supports this configuration when
it is installed with an ARINC 429 or AC SIN/COS NAV along with separate TACAN and NAV tuning
controls. In addition, a KN 40 composite NAV convertor also supports this configuration when it
is installed with an ARINC 429 or AC SIN/COS NAV analog with separate TACAN and NAV tuning
controls.

FIGURE 3-125A Stand Alone TACAN vs. Frequency Paired TACAN
The TACAN sensor can be either stand alone with its own frequency control, or it can share a fre-
quency control with the VOR/ILS receiver, referred to as a frequency paired TACAN. The EFS will
look at the TACAN ENERGIZE discrete input to identify the sensor (TCN or VOR) only if the
TACAN is frequency paired. This discrete is ignored by the EFS when the TACAN is stand alone
and TCN is added to the sequence of NAV pushbutton selections. The criteria used by the EFS
to distinguish between these two types of TACAN sensors was changed with software release
0901 to allow a greater variety of frequency paired TACAN installations.
Prior to 0901 software, a TACAN is considered frequency paired if and only if it is configured to
provide bearing information on the same EFS input and in the same format (429 or SIN/COS) as
the VOR/ILS receiver. Any TACAN that does not satisfy this requirement is considered a stand
alone TACAN.
After 0901 software, a TACAN is considered to be frequency paired when either of the following
two conditions exist:
1. The TACAN and VOR/ILS are both configured to provide bearing information on the same
EFS input and in the same format (429 or SIN/COS).

2. The TACAN and DME are both configured to provide distance information on the same EFS
input and in the same format (ARINC 568, King Serial, or ARINC 429).
Any TACAN that does not satisfy either of these two conditions is considered a stand alone
TACAN.
Alternatively, the TACAN bearing and VOR may share a single EFIS input, as is the case when a
composite convertor is shared by the TACAN and VOR. When the installation is configured this
way, the pilot selects either TACAN bearing or VOR display with a switch external to the EFIS.
The Pilot selects a single NAV position using the EFIS NAV and bearing buttons. This may be
annunciated as VOR, LOC or TCN depending on the external switch selection and whether a VOR
or LOC frequency is selected. The external switch, in most installations, is not actually a switch
but a discrete output provided by the KFS 579A NAV/TAC Frequency/Channel Selector. If a
TACAN channel number is displayed in the active window of the KFS 579A, TACAN information
is displayed on the EFIS. If a NAV frequency is displayed in the active window of the KFS 579A,
either VOR or ILS information is displayed on the EFIS, depending on the frequency. This con-
figuration is required when a KTU 709 TACAN shares the composite convertor of a KNR 634 or
KNR 634A NAV receiver or when a KTU 709 TACAN shares the KN 40 composite convertor with
a composite NAV source. This configuration is not possible before software 0901 with an ARINC
429 TACAN since the TACAN bearing information is provided on a different input than the VOR
bearing.
A frequency paired TACAN may supply distance information for both the TACAN and the VOR or
a separate DME may supply the distance information for the VOR. The separate DME must be
connected to the EFIS on a different input than the input used for the TACAN distance.
When two MLSs are not installed in a dual multi-channel DME installation, then one or two of the
DME directed frequency channels will contain redundant information. When redundant distance
information is available one is considered primary and one is considered secondary. When the
primary source is not available (generally as a result of an equipment or wiring failure) then the
secondary source is used for the display and an annunciation is provided in the upper right corner
of the HSI to indicate that the EFIS has reverted to the secondary source. Refer to 3.5.3.F Dual
ARINC 429 DME interface for more information on redundant DME information.
Refer to Section 3.8 RNAV for a description of DME and TACAN usage with an RNAV.
3.5.3 DME/TACAN REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS
DME and TACAN are both optional inputs to the EFIS, neither is actually required.
TACAN composite (simulated VOR composite) is NOT accepted by the symbol generator. A con-
vertor must be used to change the TACAN composite signal to AC SIN/COS or ARINC 429 NAV
digital format.
When two TACANs are installed, both must be configured the same with respect to whether the
TACANs share a symbol generator input with the VOR or utilize symbol generator input separate
from the VOR.

The EFIS does not expect DME HOLD when displaying TACAN. A TACAN should only be placed
in HOLD when it is frequency paired to the VOR and is providing distance information for that
VOR.
When a single-single channel DME (King serial, ARINC 568 or ARINC 429) is installed with the
EFS 40/EFS 50 the following applies. When the DME tuning is switched between sides the dis-
tance associated with the bearing must and will switch sides. When hold is selected the bearing
distance continues to switch sides with the DME tuning switch. When the DME is in hold the pilot
must not assume that either the side on which the distance is displayed or the NAV aid displayed
with have any correlation to the system that provided the held frequency. Some certification agen-
cies have not allowed the EFIS to automatically switch the DME tuning source based on the EFS
course deviation display source. The agency stated that a panel mounted DME tuning source se-
lect switch would be more easily understood by the flight crew than automatic switching by the
EFIS. The panel mounted switch does not provide any indication of the source of the DME hold
frequency, but the bearing distance will only switch sides when the pilot operates the switch, and
not whenever the course deviation display source side is changed, as is the case when the EFIS
automatically switches the DME tuning source.
The King format serial DME information requires a DME master controller to determine when the
DME, RNAV and Frequency Selector may broadcast on this common bus. If a KN 63 DME, KDM
706 DME, or a KTU 709 TACAN is installed a KPI 553A or KDI 574 DME master controller, a KN
40 or KDA 689-01 must be installed to provide the master controller function. The KDI 572 Master
DME Indicator cannot be used with the EFS 40/EFS 50 since the NAV 1/HOLD/NAV 2 switch on
the KDI 572 does not connect to the KDI 572 unit connector and therefore cannot be sensed by
the EFIS.
MLS distance must be provided to the symbol generator on the same input as the VOR distance.
Single symbol generator installations do not require a multi-channel DME. Installations that in-
clude pilot and copilot symbol generators, MLS and VOR require a multi-channel DME. For instal-
lations that include dual DMEs, pilot and copilot symbol generators, MLS and VOR the DM 441A
is not compatible and only specific part numbers of the DM 441B are compatible. For installations
that do not include a Bendix/King RMS 555 Radio Management Unit and do include one or more
MLS receivers only the 066-01107-0010 part number of the Bendix/King DM 441B is compatible
with the EFS 40/EFS 50. For installations that do include an RMS 555 Radio Management Unit
only the 066-01107-0001 part number of the DM 441B is compatible with both the RMS 555 and
the EFS 40/EFS 50. For installations that include one or more MLS receivers the Bendix/King DM
441A is not compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50.
3.5.4 DME/TACAN ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
3.5.4.A. Synchronous Serial DME Input
P4652A-94 P4641B-68 DME 1 CLOCK

P4652A-80 P4641B-69 DME 1 DATA
P4652A-82 P4641B-70 DME 1 SYNC
P4652A-95 P4641B-56 DME 1 RETURN

P4652B-78 P4641C-11 DME 2 CLOCK

P4652B-79 P4641C-23 DME 2 DATA
P4652B-92 P4641C-36 DME 2 SYNC
P4652B-77 P4641C-10 DME 2 RETURN
The Synchronous Serial DME inputs may be configured at installation to accept either
King format serial data or ARINC 568 format serial data. The CLOCK, DATA and
SYNC each are greater than 150 k ohms impedance with respect to RETURN.
The King format serial is a bi-directional bus containing DME/TACAN/RNAV tuning,

range, velocity, and time to go information for both the station and the RNAV waypoint.
A DME master controller is required for this bus to operate properly. Refer to 3.5.3
DME/TACAN Requirements and Limitations and to the notes of appropriate interface
drawings for further information concerning equipment that provides the master con-
troller function.
When configured in the ARINC 568 format, all serial data must conform to ARINC 568
for electrical characteristics, content and transmission interval. The following DME la-
bel is used by the EFS 40/EFS 50; ground speed and time to station are computed by
the EFIS from the DME Distance label:
201 DME DISTANCE (BCD)
3.5.4.B. DME Superflag Input
P4652A-9 P4641B-5 DME 1 SUPERFLAG

P4652A-35 P4641C-28 DME 2 SUPERFLAG
Valid: HI (no less than 18.0 Vdc).

Invalid: LO (no more than 3.5 Vdc).
NOTE
The DME Superflag input is only used for ARINC 568 data. It is not necessary to con-
nect the DME Superflag for a King format serial installation or for an ARINC 429 instal-
lation.
3.5.4.C. DME Hold Input
P4652A-8 P4641B-17 DME 1 HOLD

P4652B-44 P4641C-47 DME 2 HOLD
The DME hold inputs may be configured at installation to accept either a HI or a LO as

the hold state. When the DME is configured for ARINC 568 DME the active state is HI.
When the DME is configured for King format serial or ARINC 429 the active state is LO.

The DME HOLD discrete input is OR’d with the ARINC 429 hold bits so that either input
will produce a DME hold indication on the EFIS.
LO: Less than 3.0 Vdc or less than 1 k ohms to ground.

HI: Greater than 18.0 Vdc or greater than 20 k ohms to ground.
Input impedance greater than 10 k ohms.
NOTE
If hold bits are provided in the ARINC 429 DME Frequency label, it is not necessary to
connect the DME hold inputs.
3.5.4.D. ARINC 429 DME/TACAN Input
P4652A-2 P4641B-3 DME 1 RECEIVER A

P4652A-28 P4641B-29 DME 1 RECEIVER B
P4652B-39 P4641C-77 DME 2 RECEIVER A

P4652B-52 P4641C-76 DME 2 RECEIVER B
All serial data must conform to ARINC 429 and ARINC 709 for electrical characteris-
tics, content and transmission interval. The DME Receivers are low speed ARINC 429.
The following DME labels are used by the EFS 40/EFS 50 when the input is configured
as a single channel DME input:
002 TIME TO GO
012 GROUND SPEED
035 DME FREQUENCY
202 DME DISTANCE
The following DME labels are used by the EFS 40/EFS 50 when the input is configured
as a multichannel scanning DME input:
012 GROUND SPEED

035 DME FREQUENCY
202 DME DISTANCE
252 TIME TO GO
The ARINC 429 TACAN interface became operational with software 0301. The follow-
ing DME/TACAN labels are used by the EFS 40/EFS 50 when the input is configured
as a TACAN input:
002 TIME TO GO
012 GROUND SPEED
035 DME FREQUENCY

141 TUNING/MODE DATA Added by SW 0801

202 DME DISTANCE
222 VOR (TACAN) OMNIBEARING
The ARN 118 TACAN interface is available in Symbol Generator 066-04021-17XX.

This TACAN provides uniquely defined 429 data which the EFS 40/EFS 50 receives
on one or both of the DME input ports. When configured for an ARN 118 TACAN, the
following labels are used by the EFS 40/EFS 50:
141 TUNING/MODE DATA (No parity)

201 DISTANCE (No parity)
222 TACAN AZIMUTH
362 RANGE RATE
3.5.4.E. TACAN Energize Input
P4652A-34 P4641B-44 TACAN 1 ENERGIZE IN

P4652B-17 P4641C-19 TACAN 2 ENERGIZE IN
TCN: Less than 3.0 Vdc or less than 1 k ohms to ground.

VOR: Greater than 18.0 Vdc or greater than 20 k ohms to ground.
Input impedance greater than 10 k ohms.
If data coming into a single NAV input (AC SIN/COS or ARINC 429) can externally be
switched between NAV and TACAN information, the TACAN ENERGIZE IN inputs are
determine which is presently connected to the EFIS. If NAV and TACAN information
are connected to separate EFIS inputs, the TACAN ENERGIZE IN input is not used.
3.5.5 DME/TACAN INTERFACE
3.5.5.A. Dual King Serial DME
Refer to Figure 3-126 for the Dual King Serial DME interface. All part numbers of the
following DME receivers are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50: Bendix/King KN 62,
Bendix/King KN 62A, Bendix/King KN 63, Bendix/King KN 64, Bendix/King KDM 706.

A DME master controller is required for this bus to operate properly. The master con-
troller activates the various request lines to instruct each unit to broadcast its data.
When requested a unit transmits its data via the Clock and Data lines. The EFIS is a
receiver only of this data and does not transmit. The DME Sync (Request) input to the
EFIS indicates when the DME data is on the bus.

The KN 62, KN 62A, KN 64 and KDM 706A serve as their own master controllers and
do not require an external master controller. A master controller such as the KDI 574
may not be used with the KN 62, KN 62A or KN 64; DME Request is an output on these
units. The KDM 706A has both a DME Request input pin and output pin allowing it to
work with or without a master controller. The DME request input is connected to the
master controller when it is installed, and when a master controller is not installed the
KDM 706A DME Request input is connected to the KDM 706A DME Request output.
The KDM 706A ARINC 429 installation requires less wiring.
When a true DME master controller such as KDI 574 or KPI 553A is not installed, then
a KN 40 or KDA 6890-01 can be used to activate the KN 63 or KDM 706A DME Re-
quest input.
3.5.5.B. Single King Serial DME without KDI 574
Refer to Figure 3-127 for the Single King Serial DME without KDI 574 interface. All part
numbers of the following DME receivers are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50: Ben-
dix/King KN 62, Bendix/King KN 62A, Bendix/King KN 63, Bendix/King KN 64, Bendix/
King KDM 706.
All the text in Section 3.5.5.A Dual King Serial DME applies equally to the Single King
Serial DME without KDI 574. The NAV receivers, in addition to monitoring the RNAV/
CHANNEL Request inputs also monitor the DME Common inputs and will not transmit
on the bus until both are active. The DME Common is active low and is switched be-
tween the two NAV receivers by the NAV 1/NAV 2 relay. The EFIS will not display King
Serial DME information if DME Sync (Request) is removed. Red dashes are displayed
in place of the distance display when the DME Sync is removed. The DME Sync is
switched between the symbol generator side-1 and side-2 inputs by the NAV 1/NAV 2
relay.
When the DME tuning is switched between sides the distance associated with the
bearing must and will switch sides. When hold is selected the bearing distance con-
tinues to switch sides with the DME tuning switch. When the DME is in hold the pilot
must not assume that either the side on which the distance is displayed or the NAV aid
it is displayed with have any correlation to the system that provided the held frequency.
3.5.5.C. Single King Serial DME with KDI 574
Refer to Figure 3-128 for the Single King Serial DME with KDI 574 interface. All part
numbers of the following DME receivers are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50: Ben-
dix/King KN 63, Bendix/King KDM 706.

When requested a unit transmits its data via the Clock and Data lines. The EFIS is a

receiver only of this data and does not transmit. The DME Sync (Request) input to the
EFIS indicates when the DME data is on the bus.
The EFIS will not display King Serial DME information if DME Sync (Request) is re-
moved. Red dashes are displayed in place of the distance display when the DME Sync
is removed. The DME Sync is switched between the symbol generator side-1 and
side-2 inputs by the NAV 1/NAV 2 relay.
3.5.5.D. Dual ARINC 568 DME
NOTE
SG 464/SG 465 MUST HAVE MOD 1
Refer to Figure 3-129 for the Dual ARINC 568 DME interface. All part numbers of the
following DME receivers are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50: Collins DME 40, Col-
lins DME 42.
A superflag must be supplied to the EFIS for the proper display of ARINC 568 informa-
tion. When the flag is invalid red dashes are displayed in place of the distance display.
If a superflag is not supplied by the DME and the SSM (Sign Status Matrix) of the data
words are operational from the DME, the superflag input may be connected to the
DME’s 28 volt power input. When the data word’s SSM is set to NCD (No Computed
Data), dashes of the same color as the display replace the distance display. If the data
word’s SSM from the DME are always set to Valid Data and the DME superflag output
is operational the EFIS will function properly.
3.5.5.E. Single ARINC 568 DME
NOTE
SG 464/SG 465 MUST HAVE MOD 1
Refer to Figure 3-130 for the Single ARINC 568 DME interface. All part numbers of the
following DME receivers are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50: Collins DME 40, Col-
lins DME 42.
All the text in Section 3.5.5.D Dual ARINC 568 DME applies equally to the Single
ARINC 568 DME. The EFIS will not display ARINC 568 DME information if the super-
flag is removed. Red dashes are displayed in place of the distance display when the
superflag is removed. The superflag is switched between the symbol generator side-
1 and side-2 inputs by the NAV 1/NAV 2 relay.

3.5.5.F. Dual ARINC 429 DME
Refer to Figure 3-131 for the Dual ARINC 429 DME Receiver interface. All part num-
bers of the following DME receivers are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50: Bendix/
King KDM 706A, COLLINS DME-442. For installations that do not include a Bendix/
King RMS 555 Radio Management Unit and do include one or more MLS receivers
only the 066-01107-0010 part number of the Bendix/King DM 441B is compatible with
the EFS 40/EFS 50. For installations that do include a RMS 555 Radio Management
Unit only the 066-01107-0001 part number of the DM 441B is compatible with both the
RMS 555 and the EFS 40/EFS 50. For installations that include one or more MLS re-
ceivers the Bendix/King DM 441A is not compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50.
Four combinations of VOR and MLS equipment are possible with dual multi-channel
DMEs. For each combination the VOR and/or MLS must be connected to the DME to
utilize the directed frequency channels as listed in the tables below.
TABLE 3-7 DUAL DME #1
Dual Multi-Channel DME 1 with Two VORs and
One MLS as One MLS as

Directed Frequency No MLSs MLS 1 MLS 2 Two MLSs
1 VOR 1 VOR 1 VOR 1 VOR 1
2 VOR 2 MLS 1 VOR 2 MLS 1
TABLE 3-8 DUAL DME #2
Dual Multi-Channel DME 2 with Two VORs and
Directed Frequency No MLSs One MLS as One MLS as Two MLSs

MLS 1 MLS 2
1 VOR 1 VOR 1 MLS 2 MLS 2
2 VOR 2 VOR 2 VOR 2 VOR 2
When two MLSs are not installed in a dual multi-channel DME installation, then one or
two of the DME directed frequency channels will contain redundant information. When
redundant distance information is available one is considered primary and one is con-
sidered secondary. When the primary source is not available (generally as a result of
an equipment or wiring failure) then the secondary source is used for the display and
an annunciation is provided in the upper right corner of the HSI to indicate that the EFIS
has reverted to the secondary source. The annunciation is provided for a crewmember
that is displaying a secondary source of distance for the course deviation display or ei-
ther bearing pointer. If more than one of the distance displays on the HSI is displaying
a secondary source then more than one annunciation will be displayed in an overwrit-
ten format on the HSI. Annunciation is only provided on the crewmember’s HSI that is

displaying the secondary source and no annunciation is made on the other crewmem-
ber’s HSI unless that crewmember is also displaying a secondary source.
The primary source of distance for VOR 1 (for both crewmembers) is DME 1 and for
VOR 2 is DME 2. The secondary source is the other DME. Any time secondary dis-
tance source is displayed a DME 1 or DME 2 annunciation in either green or yellow is
provided, always enclosed in a yellow box. The DME number indicates the number of
the secondary source DME that is providing the distance information. If the secondary
DME source is the on-side DME the annunciation is green and if the secondary DME
source is the off-side source DME the annunciation is yellow.
3.5.5.G. Single Single-Channel ARINC 429 DME
Refer to Figure 3-132 for the Single ARINC 429 DME interface. All part numbers of the
Bendix/King KDM 706A are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50.
The Single Single-Channel ARINC 429 interface is divided into two sheets to show the
simplified wiring allowed by symbol generator 0701 and later software releases when
combined with KDM 706A part numbers 066-01066-0024 and above. As shown on
sheet two, the new software uses the SDI bits of label 202 DME DISTANCE to deter-
mine if the DME was tuned by NAV/MLS 1 or NAV/MLS 2. The DME output is then
connected to both DME inputs to the symbol generator and the SDI input pins to the
KDM 706A are switched with the tuning information into the KDM 706A. Sheet one us
used for interfacing older software symbol generators and older KDM 706As. New
software symbol generators and new KDM 706As can still be wired according to sheet
one if desired.
If sheet one is used with symbol generator software 0701 and above, the KDM 706A
must broadcast SDI 01 in label 202 DME DISTANCE when tuned by NAV/MLS 1, SDI
10 when tuned by NAV/MLS 2, or SDI 00 at all times. For KDM 706As with software
revision 4 and later both SDI pins are open for SDI 00, before revision 4 both SDI pins
are connected to ground for SDI 00.
A single DME may be wired to always be tuned by a single NAV/MLS, be wired to be

switched between NAV and MLS tuning, and/or be wired to switch between the pilot’s
and copilot’s tuning sources. When no DME tuning switching is installed, the DME is
wired directly into the symbol generator input corresponding to the side number of the
tuning source.
The EFIS expects MLS distance data to be input on the same DME input as the VOR
distance whenever MLS is selected for presentation on the course deviation display.
The symbol generator MLS SELECT OUT output is used to switch the DME tuning to
the MLS. The DME data must then be connected to the symbol generator input corre-
sponding to the side number of the displayed MLS. Simultaneous connection to both
DME inputs is allowed with the units shown on sheet two. For this installation the SDI
bits in label 035 DME FREQUENCY are set to indicate side one or side two; the SDI
may not be set to 00 (all-call) for this installation.

DME tuning selection of side-1 and side-2 for the NAV and MLS may be from a panel-
mounted switch or from the EFIS. When performed by the EFIS, the DME is tuned by
side-2 only when NAV 2 or MLS 2 is selected on the source deviation display. At other
times it is tuned by side-1. The panel-mounted switch offers greater flexibility by allow-
ing the DME to be associated with a source other than the one displayed on the course
deviation display but does require additional panel space and increases pilot workload.
3.5.5.H. Single Multi-Channel ARINC 429 DME
Refer to Figure 3-133 for the Single ARINC 429 Receiver interface. All part numbers
of the following DME receivers are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50: COLLINS
DME-442. For installations that do not include a Bendix/King RMS 555 Radio Manage-
ment Unit and do include one or more MLS receivers only the 066-01107-0010 part
number of the Bendix/King DM 441B is compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50. For in-
stallations that do include a Bendix/King RMS 555 Radio Management Unit only the
066-01107-0001 part number of the DM 441B is compatible with both the RMS 555
and the EFS 40/EFS 50. For installations that include one or more MLS receivers the
Bendix/King DM 441A is not compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50.
A single multi-channel DME may be connected to the symbol generator side-1 or side-
2 DME inputs and configured as the side-1 or side-2 DME. The one and two directed
frequency channels may be then be used to obtain distance information for two VORs,
two MLSs, or a single VOR with a single MLS. DME tuning from the VOR and/or MLS
must be connected to the DME to utilize the directed frequency channels as listed in
the tables below.
TABLE 3-9 SINGLE MULTICHANNEL DME SIDE-1
Single Multi-Channel DME as side-1 DME
Directed Frequency Two VORs Two MLSs One VOR and one MLS
1 VOR 1 MLS 2 VOR 1
2 VOR 2 MLS 1 MLS 1
Directed Frequency Two VORs Two MLSs One VOR and one MLS
1 VOR 1 MLS 2 MLS 2

2 VOR 2 MLS 1 VOR 2
Beginning with symbol generator software 0801 a configuration option was added to
allow a single DM 441B to provide distance for two VORs and a single MLS. For this
configuration the MLS SELECT OUT of the symbol generator is used to switch the
DME tuning input from the VOR source to the MLS source when MLS is displayed on
the EFIS. In a dual symbol generator installation the number one symbol generator
directed frequency one tuning input and the number two symbol generator MLS SE-
LECT OUT switches the MLS tuning output into the DME directed frequency two tuning
input. When an RMS 555 Radio Management System is installed, the radio manage-
ment system redirects the tuning information based on selected source information it
receives from the symbol generator’s EFS General Transmitter and relays are not re-
quired.
3.5.5.I. Dual ARINC 429 TACAN
The ARINC 429 TACAN interface became operational with software 0301. Refer to
Figure 3-134 for the Dual ARINC 429 TACAN Receiver interface. The 066-1073-02
part number of the Bendix/King KRT 707 TACAN is compatible with the EFS 40/EFS
50. The KRT 707 provides TACAN bearing to the EFIS on ARINC 429 label 222 VOR
(TACAN) Bearing.
The EFIS does not allow DME HOLD when displaying TACAN. A TACAN can only be
placed in HOLD when it is providing distance information for a VOR/LOC in an instal-
lation that uses a single symbol generator input for TACAN and VOR bearing. Since
the KRT 707 supplies TACAN bearing on the ARINC 429 and the VOR bearing cannot
be provided on this same input, the KRT 707 may not be placed in hold when installed
with the EFIS. In addition since the TACAN and VOR bearings must be provided to
the EFIS on separate inputs from the KRT 707, then the TACAN and DME distances
must be provided to the EFIS on separate inputs.
3.5.5.J. Composite KTU 709 TACAN
Refer to Figure 3-135 for the Composite KTU 709 TACAN interface. The KTU 709
TACAN when used with the KN 40 Composite NAV Convertor is compatible with the
EFS 40/EFS 50.
The KN 40 Composite NAV Convertor is produced in both single channel and dual
channel part number versions. Figure 3-135 assumes a dual channel KN 40. Sheet
one of Figure 3-135 may be used for a single channel KN 40 used with NAV/TACAN 1
but for a single channel KN 40 to be used with NAV/TACAN 2 a combination of the two
sheets must be used. To use a single channel KN 40 with NAV/TACAN 2 use the KN
40 pins from sheet one and the symbol generator pins from sheet 2 together to gener-
ate the correct interconnect information.

The KN 40 provides all necessary data for glideslope, localizer, VOR and marker bea-
con on the ARINC 429 output. It is not necessary to connect any of the analog signals
between the KN 40 and the symbol generator. If desired, the KN 40 analog outputs
may be used instead of the ARINC 429 outputs. The symbol generator glideslope in-
puts are connected directly to the navigation receiver and the KN 40 analog outputs
are connected to the symbol generator for this type installation.
If desired, the marker beacon may be connected to the KN 40 for encoding into ARINC
429 instead of connecting the marker beacon directly to the symbol generator. This
can eliminate the need for relay switching of dual marker beacon receivers into the
MFD symbol generator in dual EADI/EHSI with MFD installations.
If the KFS 579A TACAN only control is installed the KTU 709 can not be used to pro-
vide DME distance for a VOR/LOC and the KN 40 will not be used as a VOR/LOC con-
vertor but only as a TACAN convertor. For this installation the KTU 709 is connected
to the KN 40 Composite input and the KN 40 External Composite and select are not
used. The EFIS ARINC 429 DME input may be used for a VOR/LOC DME input and
the NAV inputs not used by the TACAN bearing can be used for a VOR/LOC.
If the KFS 579A NAV/TACAN control is installed the KTU 709 is used to provide DME
distance for the VOR/LOC and the KN 40 is used as a VOR/LOC convertor when a
VOR/LOC frequency is displayed on the KFS 579A control. For this installation the
KTU 709 is connected to the KN 40 External Composite input and the External Com-
posite Select input is driven active low when a TACAN channel is displayed on the KFS
579A control. The KN 40 Composite, glideslope and marker beacon are then connect-
ed to the VOR/LOC receiver. The EFIS ARINC 429 DME input may not be used by a
VOR/LOC DME and the NAV inputs not used by the TACAN bearing may not be used
for a VOR/LOC input.

When requested a unit transmits its data via the Clock and Data lines. The KN 40 DME
Request and RNAV Request outputs can replace the DME master controller if the mas-
ter controller is not connected to the TACAN. The EFIS is a receiver only of this data
and does not transmit. The DME Sync (Request) input to the EFIS indicates when the
DME data is on the bus.
The EFIS does not allow DME hold when displaying TACAN. A TACAN can only be
placed in hold when it is providing information for a VOR/LOC in an installation that
uses a single symbol generator input for TACAN and VOR bearing. The KFS 579A
NAV/TACAN control TACAN output can be used to deactivate hold to meet this re-
quirement. Hold must then be manually activated when the control is switched from
TACAN to NAV mode. DME hold is not possible with installations that use the KFS
579A TACAN only control.
3.5.5.K. KTU 709 TACAN with KNR 634

Refer to Figure 3-136 for the KTU 709 TACAN with KNR 634 interface. The KTU 709
TACAN when used with the KNR 634 is compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50.
When the KFS 579A NAV/TACAN control is installed the KTU 709 is used to provide
DME distance for the VOR/LOC and the KNR 634 is used as a VOR/LOC receiver/con-
vertor when a VOR/LOC frequency is displayed on the KFS 579A control. For this in-
stallation the KTU 709 is connected to the KNR 634 Composite input and the External
VOR/LOC input is driven active low when a TACAN channel is displayed on the KFS
579A control. The EFIS ARINC 429 DME input may not be used by a VOR/LOC DME
and the NAV inputs not used by the TACAN bearing may not be used for a VOR/LOC
input.

When requested a unit transmits its data via the Clock and Data lines. The KN 40 DME
Request and RNAV Request outputs can replace the DME master controller if the mas-
ter controller is not connected to the TACAN. The EFIS is a receiver only of this data
and does not transmit. The DME Sync (Request) input to the EFIS indicates when the
DME data is on the bus.
The EFIS does not allow DME hold when displaying TACAN. A TACAN can only be
placed in hold when it is providing information for a VOR/LOC in an installation that
uses a single symbol generator input for TACAN and VOR bearing. The KFS 579A
NAV/TAC control TACAN output can be used to deactivate hold to meet this require-
ment. Hold must then be manually activated when the control is later switched to NAV
mode and must not automatically activate when the control is switched from TACAN to
NAV mode. DME hold is not possible with installations that use the KFS 579A TACAN
only control.

THIS PAGE RESERVED

FIGURE 3-126 EFS 40/EFS 50 Dual King Serial DME Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0014, Rev 2)

FIGURE 3-127 EFS 40/EFS 50 Single King Serial DME Without KDI 574 Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0039, Rev AA)

FIGURE 3-128 EFS 40/EFS 50 Single King Serial DME With KDI 574 Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0040, Rev AA)

FIGURE 3-129 EFS 40/EFS 50 Dual ARINC 568 DME Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0015, Rev AA)

FIGURE 3-130 EFS 40/EFS 50 Single ARINC 568 DME Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0041, Rev AA)

FIGURE 3-131 EFS 40/EFS 50 Dual ARINC 429 DME Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0016, Rev 4)

FIGURE 3-132 EFS 40/EFS 50 Single Single-Channel ARINC 429 DME Interconnect

FIGURE 3-132 EFS 40/EFS 50 Single Single-Channel ARINC 429 DME Interconnect

FIGURE 3-133 EFS 40/EFS 50 Single Multi-Channel ARINC 429 DME Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0047, Rev 1)

FIGURE 3-134 EFS 40/EFS 50 ARINC 429 TACAN Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0038, Rev 3)

FIGURE 3-135 EFS 40/EFS 50 Composite KTU 709 Interconnect


FIGURE 3-135 EFS 40/EFS 50 Composite KTU 709 Interconnect


FIGURE 3-136 EFS 40/EFS 50 KTU 709 With KNR 634 Interconnect

FIGURE 3-136 EFS 40/EFS 50 KTU 709 With KNR 634 Interconnect

3.6 MLS
3.6.1 MLS APPLICABLE PART NUMBERS
The MLS interface became operational (deviation only) with symbol generator software 0701. Do
not configure units with software 0701 for RMI pointers. MLS map symbols and RMI pointers are
displayed with symbol generator software 0801.
The following part numbers of the SG 464 and SG 465 will accept MLS inputs:
SG 464 066-04020-
- 01XX 02XX - - - - - - -
- 11XX 12XX - - - - - - -
SG 465 066-04021-
- 01XX 02XX - 04XX 05XX - - - -
- 11XX 12XX - 14XX 15XX 1601 1755 - 5000
3.6.2 MLS FUNCTION
Up to two MLS sources may be connected simultaneously to the EFIS. With two sources, the pilot
selects the on-side or cross-side source for presentation on the course deviation display. The pilot
may select one or both of the MLSs to be displayed on the bearing pointers. Beginning with sym-
bol generator software 0801, if a DME distance is associated with the MLS and the map mode is
selected with sufficient range, a MLS symbol will replace the pointer. Either bearing pointer may
be used to display MLS bearing in installations with a single MLS receiver; the bearing pointer
source annunciation will be MLS without a 1 or a 2 adjacent to it.
MLS azimuth (course) selection is not made from the EFIS. The EFIS course select knob is not
active when MLS is selected for presentation on the course deviation display. The azimuth or
back azimuth angle sent from the MLS replaces the CRS/TDK display with AZ or BAZ respective-
ly. In addition above the vertical deviation scale the selected descent angle, sent from the MLS,
is displayed in tenths of a degree.
In a pilot and copilot EFIS or EHSI installation, lateral and vertical comparators are provided. I
both crewmembers are displaying MLS then a comparison is made between the two displays and
a comparator annunciation is made on the display if either lateral or vertical deviations differ by
more than 1/4 of the full scale HSI display width (37.5 mVdc). No comparison of frequency is
made to insure both pilots are tuned to the same frequency; it is only verified that both are tuned
to MLS frequencies.
Category II approach monitors are activated by the crew from a panel-mounted switch. The EFIS
places marks on the lateral and vertical scales to indicate the Category II approach tolerances and
displays excessive deviation symbols when they are exceeded.

3.6.3 MLS REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS
MLS is an optional input to the EFIS, it is not required. Only ARINC 429 MLS may be interfaced
to the EFIS 40/EFS 50. MLS distance must be provided to the symbol generator on the same in-
put as the VOR distance.
Installations that include pilot and copilot symbol generators, MLS and VOR require a multi-chan-
nel DME. For installations that include dual DMEs, pilot and copilot symbol generators, MLS and
VOR the DM 441A is not compatible and only specific part numbers of the DM 441B are compat-
ible. For installations that do not include a Bendix/King RMS 555 Radio Management Unit and do
include one or more MLS receivers only the 066-01107-0010 part number of the Bendix/King DM
441B is compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50. For installations that do include a Bendix/King RMS
555 Radio Management Unit and also include one or more MLS receivers only the 066-01107-
0001 part number of the Bendix/King DM 441B is compatible with both the RMS 555 and the EFS
40/EFS 50. For installations that one or more MLS receivers only the Bendix/King DM 441A is not
compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50.
3.6.4 MLS ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
P4652A-41 P4641B-28 MLS 1 RECEIVER A

P4652A-14 P4641B-42 MLS 1 RECEIVER B
P4652B-36 P4641C-91 MLS 2 RECEIVER A

P4652B-50 P4641C-92 MLS 2 RECEIVER B
The ARINC 429 MLS interface became operational with software 0701. All serial data must con-
form to ARINC 429 and ARINC 737 for electrical characteristics, content and transmission inter-
val. The MLS Receivers are low speed ARINC 429. The following MLS labels are used by the
EFS 40/EFS 50:
035 DME FREQUENCY

036 MLS FREQUENCY
153 MLS SELECTED AZIMUTH ANGLE
155 MLS SELECTED GLIDEPATH ANGLE
161 MLS DATA WORD #4
165 MLS AZIMUTH ABOSULTE ANGLE
173 LOCALIZER (MLS) DEVIATION
174 GLIDESLOPE (MLS) DEVIATION
175 MLS SELECTED BACK AZIMUTH ANGLE
176 MLS BACK AZIMUTH ANGLE
270 MLS DISCRETE STATUS
3.6.5 MLS INTERFACE

Refer to Figure 3-137 for the ARINC 429 MLS interface. All part numbers of the Bendix/King MLS
21A are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50.

THIS PAGE RESERVED

FIGURE 3-137 EFS 40/EFS 50 ARINC 429 MLS Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0048, Rev 0)

3.7 ADF
3.7.1 ADF APPLICABLE PART NUMBERS
The following part numbers of the SG 464 and SG 465 will accept ADF inputs:
SG 464 066-04020-
- 01XX 02XX - - - - - - -
- 11XX 12XX - - - - - - -
SG 465 066-04021-
- 01XX 02XX - 04XX 05XX - - - -
- 11XX 12XX - 14XX 15XX 1601 1755 - 5000
3.7.2 ADF FUNCTION
Up to two ADF sources may be connected simultaneously to the EFIS. The pilot can select the
on-side or cross-side source for presentation on the course deviation display. The ADF course de-
viation display is scaled for a ±150 deflection to the last dot. The pilot may select one or both of
the ADFs to be displayed on the bearing pointers. Before symbol generator software 0501. if a
single ADF was installed, it could be wired and configured to be displayed as ADF 1, ADF 2, or
both ADF 1 and ADF 2. Symbol generators with software 0501 and later will allow either bearing
pointer to display ADF bearing in installations with a single ADF receiver. The bearing pointer
source annunciation will be ADF without a 1 or 2 adjacent to it.
3.7.3 ADF REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS
ADF is an optional input to the EFIS. It is not required.
The EFS 40/EFS 50 requires an ADF flag. Analog ADF sources must provide a superflag signal.
If an analog ADF source does not provide an operational superflag signal, it must be configured
to be displayed on the bearing pointer only. If an analog ADF source does not provide a superflag
signal it must be configured so that the ADF is not displayed on the course deviation display.
Coupling of the ADF to the flight control system is not allowed unless flight tested and approved
by local certification authorities. Contact Bendix/King product support for the latest information on
ADF and flight control equipment currently approved for ADF coupling to the flight control system
through the EFS 40/EFS 50.
3.7.4 ADF ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
3.7.4.A. 400 Hz Synchro Reference



Each reference input requires 26, ±0.52 Vac at 400, ±8 Hz and has an input impedance
of no less than 45 k ohms.
The 26 Vac 400 Hz reference inputs are used only as a reference. Current consump-
tion is less than 0.3 mA. All 400 Hz signal outputs from the symbol generator are pow-
ered by the 28 Vdc input to the symbol generator. All side-1 400 Hz signal inputs to the
symbol generator must be the same phase as the reference 1 input, and all side-2 in-
puts must be the same phase as the reference 2 input. Side-1 and side-2 may differ in
phase. Heading and course datum outputs from the symbol generator to the flight con-
trol system are referenced to the autopilot reference input which may differ in phase
from side-1 and side-2.
3.7.4.B. DC SIN/COS and XYZ Synchro Input
P4651A-77 P4641A-41 ADF 1 SIN HI / X

P4651A-64 P4641A-54 ADF 1 COS HI / Y
P4651A-63 P4641A-68 ADF 1 SIN/COS LO / Z
P4651B-45 P4641B-35 ADF 2 SIN HI / X

P4651B-32 P4641B-61 ADF 2 COS HI / Y
P4651B-18 P4641B-48 ADF 2 SIN/COS LO / Z
The analog ADF bearing inputs may be configured at installation to accept either DC
SIN/COS or XYZ synchro formats. The SIN HI / X and COS HI / Y inputs are each
greater than 46 k ohms impedance with respect to SIN/COS LO / Z. The DC SIN/COS
LO / Z input voltage is to be no more than ± 10 Vdc with respect to ground. The DC
SIN HI / X and DC COS HI input voltage is to be no more than ± 15 Vdc with respect
to ground. The DC SIN HI / X and DC COS HI / Y input voltage is to be no more than
± 18 Vdc with respect to DC SIN/COS LO / Z. The XYZ synchro format is ARINC 407
with Z grounded and input voltage to be 11.8 ± 1.18 Vrms.
NOTE
The 26 Vac 400 Hz reference inputs must be connected for proper DC SIN/COS operation.
3.7.4.C. ADF Flag
P4651A-76 P4641A-83 ADF 1 SUPERFLAG

P4651B-6 P4641B-99 ADF 2 SUPERFLAG

3.7.4.D. ARINC 429 ADF Input
P4652A-43 P4641B-43 ADF 1 RECEIVER A

P4652A-42 P4641B-16 ADF 1 RECEIVER B
P4652B-65 P4641C-90 ADF 2 RECEIVER A

P4652B-66 P4641C-103 ADF 2 RECEIVER B
tics, content and transmission interval. The ADF Receivers are low speed ARINC 429.
The following ADF label is used by the EFS 40/EFS 50:
162 ADF BEARING
3.7.5 ADF INTERFACE
3.7.5.A. DC SIN/COS ADF
Refer to Figure 3-138 for the DC SIN/COS ADF interface. All part numbers of the fol-
lowing ADF receivers are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50: Bendix/King KR 87,
Bendix/King KDF 806, Collins ADF-60B, Collins ADF 650A. KR 87-00 through -03 and
KDF 806-00 are limited to BRG pointer display only.
3.7.5.B. XYZ ADF
Refer to Figure 3-139 for the XYZ ADF interface. All part numbers of the following ADF
receivers are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50: Bendix/King KDF 806, Collins ADF-
60A. KDF 806-00 is limited to BRG pointer display only.
3.7.5.C. ARINC 429 ADF
Refer to Figure 3-140 for the ARINC 429 ADF interface. All part numbers of the follow-
ing ADF receivers are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50: Bendix/King DFS 43, COL-
LINS ADF-462.

THIS PAGE RESERVED

FIGURE 3-138 EFS 40/EFS 50 DC SIN/COS ADF Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0019, Rev 2)

Fig 3-139 EFS 40/EFS 50 XYZ ADF Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0020, Rev 2)

FIGURE 3-140 EFS 40/EFS 50 ARINC 429 ADF Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0021, Rev 2)

3.8 RNAV
3.8.1 RNAV APPLICABLE PART NUMBERS
The RNAV interface became operational with symbol generator software 0201.
The following part numbers of the SG 464 and SG 465 will accept RNAV inputs:
SG 464 066-04020-
- 01XX 02XX - - - - - - -
- 11XX 12XX - - - - - - -
SG 465 066-04021
- 01XX 02XX - 04XX 05XX - - - -
- 11XX 12XX - 14XX 15XX 1601 1755 - 5000
3.8.2 RNAV FUNCTION
Up to two KNS 81 RNAVs may be connected simultaneously to the EFIS. Each KNS 81 may take
the place of a VOR/ILS receiver or may be installed in addition to the VOR/ILS receiver. When a
VOR/ILS receiver is not installed on the same side of the aircraft as the RNAV then the KNS 81
may be configured to take the place of the VOR/ILS, receiver. For this installation the KNS 81 may
be configured as the VOR/ILS causing the EFIS to display the KNS 81 modes (VOR, LOC, TCN,
or RNV) as the course deviation display and bearing source annunciations. When the KNS 81 is
configured as the RNAV receiver (required when a VOR/ILS receiver is installed on the same side
of the aircraft as the KNS 81) the course deviation display and bearing source annunciations will
always be NAV independent of the KNS 81 mode selection. Beginning with symbol generator soft-
ware 0301, up to two RNAVs may be interfaced simultaneously with up to two LNAVs in an EFS
40/EFS 50 installation. Before symbol generator software 0301 both an RNAV and LNAV could
be interfaced simultaneously, however, one had to be interfaced as the on-side system and the
other as the cross-side system.
The pilot selects the on-side or cross-side RNAV source for presentation on the course deviation
display. The pilot may select one or both of the RNAVs to be displayed on the bearing pointers. If
a DME or waypoint distance is associated with the RNAV bearing and the map mode is selected
with sufficient range then a VOR or waypoint symbol will replace the pointer. Symbol generators
with software 0501 or later will allow either bearing pointer to display RNAV bearing in installations
with a single RNAV receiver. The bearing pointer source annunciation appears without a 1 or 2
adjacent to it.
When the KNS 81 is selected for presentation on the course deviation display and the map mode
is selected, the KNS 81 waypoints are displayed. Only waypoints based on the same frequency
as the KNS 81 active frequency can be displayed, and then only when the KNS 81 is receiving
both a valid bearing and distance from a VOR/DME or TACAN station. The displayed waypoints
are numbered to match the ten KNS 81 waypoints numbered 0 through 9.

Symbol generators with software 0601 or later support EFIS joystick operation. The EFIS joystick
can be used to position a waypoint for entry into KNS 81 waypoint 0. The waypoint is defined by
the bearing and distance to the KNS 81 active frequency. The waypoint is displayed on the EFIS
while the joystick is operated and the waypoint coordinates are sent to the KNS 81 when the joy-
stick enter button is pressed.
Distance information provided by a DME or TACAN to a KNS 81 configured as a VOR/ILS, must

also be provided to the EFS and the format of this information must be King Serial. A DME or
TACAN providing distance information to a KNS 81 configured as an RNAV, will not be monitored
by the EFS.
3.8.3 RNAV REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS
RNAV is an optional input to the EFIS, it is not required.
Refer to paragraph 3.8.5 RNAV Interface for a table of KNS 81 part numbers that are compatible
with the EFS 40/EFS 50.
3.8.4 RNAV ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
King Synchronous Serial RNAV
P4652A-69 P4641B-95 KNS 81 1 CLOCK

P4652A-96 P4641B-81 KNS 81 1 DATA
P4652A-55 P4641B-82 KNS 81 1 SYNC
P4652A-83 P4641B-25 KNS 81 1 RETURN
P4652B-91 P4641C-24 KNS 81 2 CLOCK

P4652B-106 P4641C-37 KNS 81 2 DATA
P4652B-105 P4641C-50 KNS 81 2 SYNC
P4652B-93 P4641C-94 KNS 81 2 RETURN
This is a Bendix/King format serial bidirectional bus. Information sent from the KNS 81 includes
the following: The waypoint parameters of frequency, radial, distance and mode for all waypoints;
the aircraft bearing and distance from the station; the selected course, and groundspeed and time
to go to the station/ waypoint; the bearing and distance from the active waypoint when the KNS
81 is operating in RNAV or VOR PAR modes.
Symbol generators with software 0601 or later support EFIS joystick operation. The EFS 40/EFS
50 sends the joystick waypoint parameters of frequency, radial and distance to the KNS 81 follow-
ing an EFIS joystick entry. The CLOCK, DATA and SYNC each are greater than 150 k ohms im-
pedance with respect to RETURN.

3.8.5 RNAV INTERFACE
Refer to Figure 3-141 for the Bendix/King KNS 81 RNAV interface. The following KNS 81 part
numbers are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50 RNAV interface:
KNS 81 066-4010
- - - - - - - - - -
- - 12 13 - 16 17 - -
- 21 - - - - - - - -
- - 32 33 - - 36 37 - 39
- - - - - - - - - -
- - - - - - - - - -
- 62 - 63 - - 66 67 - -
- 71 - - - - - - - -
- - 82 83 - - 86 87 - 89
- 91 92 93 94 - - - - -
NOTES
TACAN versions of the KNS 81 are only compatible with EFS 40/EFS 50 symbol gen-
erators with software 0601 or later.
If a KNS 81 installation does not include a DME distance indicator (other than the EFS
40/EFS 50 display) then the KNS 81 must be a -91, -92, -93 or -94 part number. These
units do not have a RAD (radial) pushbutton which would have no function in these in-
stallations.
The KNS 81 will not provide groundspeed and TTS information for display on the EFIS unless an
OBS resolver load is connected to the KNS 81. If an OBS resolver is not connected to the KNS
81 then the KNS 81 OBS RESOLVER H must be connected to OBS RESOLVER D to simulate a
load. Do not connect these OBS RESOLVER pins to each other if the KNS 81 is connected to a
resolver.
The DME bus is a King format serial bidirectional bus containing DME/TACAN/RNAV tuning,
range, velocity, and time to go information for both the station and the RNAV waypoint. A DME
master controller is required for this bus to operate properly. The master controller activates the
various request lines to instruct each unit to broadcast its data. When requested a unit transmits
its data via the Clock and Data lines. The EFIS is a receiver only of this data and does not transmit.
The RNAV bus is a King format serial bidirectional bus containing the following information from
the RNAV: Waypoint parameters of frequency, radial, distance and mode for all waypoints: aircraft
bearing and distance from the station: selected course, groundspeed and time to go to the station/
waypoint; and bearing and distance from the active waypoint when the KNS 81 is operating in
RNAV or VOR PAR modes. The RNAV may receive waypoint parameters for any of the waypoints
on this bus. The joystick waypoint is sent to the RNAV and received as waypoint zero.

Localizer and glideslope deviation and flags are not broadcast on the RNAV bus. ILS energize is
broadcast on the bus. The analog localizer and glideslope deviation and flags are connected di-
rectly to the symbol generator when the KNS 81 is the only analog VOR/ILS receiver on that side
of the aircraft. When another analog VOR/ILS receiver is installed on the same side of the aircraft
as the KNS 81 then relays are used to switch these signals to the symbol generator from the KNS
81 and the other VOR/ILS receiver based on which receiver is displayed on the EFIS. The RNAV
SELECT OUT and 1/2 SELECT OUT symbol generator outputs are used to energize the relay.
The analog ILS ENERGIZE input to the symbol generator is ignored by the EFIS when the RNAV
is displayed since this information is read from the RNAV bus by the symbol generator.
The activation logic for the RNAV SELECT OUT, NAV SELECT OUT and TACAN SELECT OUT
differs based upon whether the KNS 81 is configured as a VOR/ILS or an RNAV. When a VOR/
ILS receiver is not installed on the same side of the aircraft as the RNAV then the KNS 81 may be
configured to take the place of the VOR/ILS receiver. For this installation the KNS 81 may be con-
figured as the VOR/ILS causing the EFIS to display the KNS 81 modes (VOR, LOC, TCN, or RNV)
as the course deviation display and bearing source annunciations. When the KNS 81 is configured
as the RNAV receiver (required when a VOR/ILS receiver is installed on the same side of the air-
craft as the RNAV) the course deviation display and bearing source annunciations will always be
NAV, independent of the KNS 81 mode selection.
When the KNS 81 is configured as a VOR/ILS, RNAV SELECT OUT is active only when the KNS
81 is selected for display on the EFIS course deviation display and is in the RNV ENR or RNV
APR modes. NAV SELECT OUT is active whenever the KNS 81 is selected for display on the
EFIS course deviation display. TACAN SELECT OUT is active whenever the KNS 81 is selected
for display on the EFIS course deviation display and is in a TACAN mode of operation.
When the KNS 81 is configured as an RNAV, RNAV SELECT OUT is active whenever the KNS
81 is selected for display on the EFIS course deviation display. NAV SELECT OUT and TACAN
SELECT OUT are never active when the KNS 81 is selected for display on the EFIS course devi-
ation display. NAV SELECT OUT is active whenever the VOR/ILS receiver is selected for display
on the EFIS course deviation display and also whenever the TACAN receiver is selected for dis-
play on the EFIS course deviation display receiver if a NAV/TAC control is used. TACAN SELECT
OUT is active whenever the TACAN (not associated with the KNS 81) is selected for display on
the EFIS course deviation display.
Independent of the KNS 81 configuration, the ILS ENERGIZE OUT is active whenever the KNS
81 is selected for display on the EFIS course deviation display and is in the LOC mode of opera-
tion.

FIGURE 3-141 EFS 40/EFS 50 KNS 81 RNAV Interconnect


FIGURE 3-141 EFS 40/EFS 50 KNS 81 RNAV Interconnect


3.9 LNAV/VNAV
3.9.1 LNAV/VNAV APPLICABLE PART NUMBERS
The following part numbers of the SG 464 and SG 465 will accept LNAV and VNAV inputs:
SG 464 066-04020
- 01XX 02XX - - - - - - -
- 11XX 12XX - - - - - - -
SG 465 066-04021
- 01XX 02XX - 04XX 05XX - - - -
- 11XX 12XX - 14XX 15XX 1601 1755 - 5000
3.9.2 LNAV/VNAV FUNCTION
Up to two LNAVs may be connected simultaneously for display on the EFIS. Before symbol gen-
erator software 0801, each symbol generator provided only one LNAV output (selected course.
heading and joystick waypoint) for connection to only one of the LNAVs. Beginning with symbol
generator software 0801, it is possible to connect a single symbol generator LNAV output to two
KLN 90 LNAVs. Beginning with symbol generator software 0301, up to two LNAVs may be inter-
faced simultaneously with up to two RNAVs in an EFS 40/EFS 50 installation. Before symbol gen-
erator software 0301 both an LNAV and RNAV could be interfaced simultaneously, however, one
must have been interfaced as the on-side system and the other must have been interfaced as the
cross-side system. The pilot selects the on-side or cross-side LNAV source for presentation on
the course deviation display. The Bendix/King KNS 660 can be displayed while it is operating in
the VOR, TAC, RNAV ENR or RNAV APR mode/sensor combinations. The LOC mode/sensor
combination will result in a flagged display on the EFIS. The pilot may select one or both of the
LNAVs to be displayed on the bearing pointers. If a DME or waypoint distance is associated with
the LNAV bearing and the map mode is selected with sufficient range then a waypoint symbol will
replace the pointer. Symbol generators with software 0501 or later will allow either bearing pointer
to display LNAV bearing in installations with a single LNAV receiver. The bearing pointer source
annunciation appears without a 1 or 2 adjacent to it.
When the symbol generator is configured for wind vector display, anytime the LNAV is providing
wind speed and direction information a wind vector is displayed on the HSI. When the symbol gen-
erator is configured for drift angle display and the LNAV is selected for display on the course de-
viation display and the LNAV is providing drift information, a drift angle bug is displayed on the HSI
compass rose. In a single LNAV installation the wind vector may be displayed on all EHSIs. In a
dual LNAV installation the on-side LNAV wind vector is displayed. The drift angle information is
taken from the LNAV selected for display.
The EFIS uses the magnetic variation sent from the LNAV selected for presentation on the course
deviation display. When an LNAV is not selected as the course deviation display source, the on-
side LNAV is used as the source of magnetic variation. Beginning with symbol generator software

EFS 40/EFS 50
0801, the EFIS will use magnetic variation from the off-side LNAV when it is not available from the
on-side LNAV.
When the LNAV is selected for presentation on the course deviation display and the map mode is
selected the LNAV map points are displayed. Up to 15 map points may be displayed. The dis-
played points can consist of flight plan points with connecting course lines, nearby navaids or
nearby airports. Navaids displayed include VOR/DMEs and VORTACs only. The pilot may select
one of three LNAV map display formats. First, a flight plan with alphanumeric identifiers. Second.
a flight plan with the current TO waypoint and any airports in the flight plan identified with alpha-
numerics along with the nearest airports identified with alphanumerics. Third, a flight plan with the
current TO waypoint and any navaids in the flight plan identified with alphanumerics along with the
nearest navaids identified with alphanumerics. Before symbol generator software 0601, the algo-
rithm to limit the display to fifteen map points gave priority to the flight plan points. If the flight plan
points within the selected display range numbered less than fifteen, the nearest airports or navaids
could be displayed to bring the count up to fifteen. The nearest airports or navaids that are closest
to the aircraft are given priority to bring the count up to fifteen. The map point display algorithm
was changed beginning with symbol generator software 0601. This software limits the number of
nearest airports and nearest navaids displayed to a maximum of ten when the nearest airports or
nearest navaids map formats are selected by the pilot. With the nearest airports and nearest na-
vaids limited to ten, up to five, and no more than five, additional flight plan points are displayed.
When a nearest navaid or airport is also a flight plan point, the flight plan point is displayed and
the duplicate nearest navaid or airport is not displayed. The non-displayed duplicate navaid or air-
port is not counted in the maximum of ten.
Symbol generators with software 0601 or later support EFIS joystick operation. The EFIS joystick
is used to position a waypoint for entry into the displayed LNAV. The waypoint is defined as a lat-
itude and longitude. The waypoint along with its latitude and longitude is displayed on the EFIS
while the joystick is operated and the waypoint coordinates are sent to the LNAV when the joystick
enter button is pressed.
VNAV became operational with symbol generator software 0401. Before symbol generator soft-
ware 0801 VNAV was only accepted from an FMS source. Beginning with software 0801 VNAV
is accepted from all LNAV sources i.e. FMS, Omega, GPS and Loran. VNAV angle display and
configuration options to not display VNAV angle or to never display VNAV are added by symbol
generator software 0801. VNAV angle and deviation are displayed on the vertical deviation scale
of the HSI with a VN annunciation on the pointer. When angular VNAV data is provided to the EFIS
by a Bendix/King LNAV, ANG is annunciated above the vertical scale. When linear VNAV data is
provided to the EFIS, FT is annunciated above the vertical scale. Angular data is displayed as
±10° to the last dot. Deviation data is displayed as ±1000 feet to the last dot while the LNAV is in
an enroute mode and, before symbol generator software 0801, ±500 feet while the LNAV is in an
approach mode. Beginning with symbol generator software 0801. The deflection to the last dot
during approach can be configured as ±1000 feet, ±500 feet, ±250 feet, or ±200 feet.
The release of SW 15 allows a GPS sensor with WAAS approach capability to provide valid ver-
tical and lateral guidance on the display and to the autopilot during approach mode. This is done
by driving display and all the outputs to the autopilot on the EFIS to appear as an ILS during ap-
proach mode. The ILS Energize is set low when the GPS enters approach mode. The lateral and
vertical flags are set valid, provided the GPS is providing valid signals to the EFIS. This in effect
allows the system to perform an ILS like approach using the GPS sensor.

EFS 40/EFS 50
The release of SW 16 allows a GPS sensor with WAAS approach capability to provide valid ver-
tical and lateral guidance on the display and to the autopilot during approach mode. This is done
by allowing the GPS outputs for vertical and lateral deviations to continue to be used by the Auto-
pilot from enroute mode through approach mode.
For SW release 15 and later, there are several configuration pages associated with the WAAS ap-
proach capabilities. First, there is the VARIABLE VNAV configuration found on configuration page
96. LNAV sides one and two can be programmed independently to utilize the WAAS approach
capabilities. Configuring the VARIABLE VNAV to VAR will allow the EFIS to do the following:
• Obtain maximum vertical scaling from the LNAV

• SW 15 only: Energize the ILS output during GPS approach mode
• SW 16 only: EFIS outputs GPS data and GPS as the active Sensor to the Autopilot
during GPS Valid WAAS Approach.
• Display GP as the vertical scale annunciator during GPS approach
• May provide valid vertical data to the autopilot, both analog and digital during GPS
approach mode, depending on the VERT APR configuration
When the GPS is providing valid vertical guidance data to the EFIS, the vertical outputs to the au-
topilot are dependent on the GPS WAAS approach type and the configuration of the VERT APR
pages. There are four WAAS approach types received on label 261 that the EFIS will recognize:
LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, LP, and LPV. The vertical guidance data will be valid to the autopilot when
the WAAS approach type being received from the GPS and the VERT APR type for that WAAS
approach type is configured YES. For example, if the GPS is transmitting LPV as the approach
type then the LPV VERT APR configuration must be YES in order for the vertical guidance data
to be valid to the autopilot. If LPV VERT APR is configured NO, then the vertical valid flag and
label 174 on the autopilot bus will be invalid. There is a special case when all four VERT APR op-
tions (configuration pages 97-100) are set to YES then label 261 is not required for providing valid
vertical data to the autopilot. Also the vertical scale is always displayed on the HSI when valid ver-
tical data is being received from the GPS independent of the VERT APR configuration. The ADI
will only display the vertical scale when valid vertical data is being provided to the autopilot.
Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Page 3-408.1

EFS 40/EFS 50
3.9.3 LNAV/VNAV REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS
LNAV and VNAV are both optional inputs to the EFIS. Neither is required. Beginning with symbol
generator software 0301, up to two LNAVs may be interfaced simultaneously with up to two
RNAVs in an EFS 40/EFS 50 installation. Before symbol generator software 0301 both an LNAV
and RNAV could be interfaced simultaneously, however, one must have been interfaced as the
on-side system and the other must have been interfaced as the cross-side system. Beginning with
symbol generator software 0801, it became possible to connect a single symbol generator LNAV
output to two KLN 90 LNAVs.
Only one joystick may be connected to only one symbol generator at a time. Multiple joysticks may
not be connected to a single symbol generator at the same time and multiple symbol generators
may not be connected to a single joystick at the same time. Not all symbol generators in a multi
symbol generator installation may have joysticks. In a single EADI/EHSI with MFD installation ei-
ther the symbol generator driving the HSI or the MFD symbol generator may have a joystick but
not both. In a dual EADI/EHSI installation (without MFD) both symbol generators may have joy-
sticks. For this installation either symbol generator may provide joystick information to either
LNAV. In a dual EADI/EHSI with MFD installation either the MFD symbol generator or one or both
of the EHSI symbol generators may have joysticks. If the MFD has a joystick it must be the only
symbol generator with a joystick. For this installation the MFD symbol generator may provide joy-
stick data to either LNAV.
Due to the varied interpretation of the GAMA General Aviation Subset of the ARINC 429 specifi-
cation, it should not be assumed that any GAMA 429 LNAV is compatible with the EFS 40/EFS
50 unless the LNAV has been connected to the EFIS and evaluated in all intended operating
modes. A table of LNAVs that have been found to be compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50 can be
found in paragraph 3.9.5 LNAV Interface. Contact Bendix/King product support for the latest infor-
mation on compatibility of LNAVs not listed in paragraph 3.9.5.
Most installers are disabling the display of data from a VOR, TACAN or DME while it is under Auto
Tune control of an LNAV that is automatically selecting stations from a navaid database. Some
certification agencies may require disabling. Contact your local certification agency to determine
their current policy. The most common policy is to disable the CD1 display of the auto tuned na-
vaid, but to allow RMI and DME display of the auto tuned navaid. Only the multichannel DME
channel paired with the NAV should be allowed; the Rho-Rho DME channel and single channel
DME displays should be disabled. A detailed description of auto tune considerations for the KNS
660 may be found in paragraph 3.2.3 FMS/NAV CTL Switching Requirements and Limitations in
the KNS 660 System Manual number 006-05596-0000.
When both pilot and copilot are provided EFIS displays that allow viewing of the cross-side VOR
or TACAN CDI display, then FMS/NAV CTL switching of the KNS 660 should not be allowed. In
these installations, the KNS 660 should either have a dedicated VOR or TACAN sensor that can
not be viewed directly on the EFIS or the KNS 660 should not use a VOR or TACAN sensor. An
alarming situation could occur in a dual EFIS installation with FMS/NAV CTL switching where the
cross-side VOR or TACAN display is flagged whenever the KNS 660 is tuning. For example,
should the pilot be navigating from the cross-side VOR or TACAN that is flight director or autopilot
coupled, the copilot may not notice this and select his KNS 660 for display on his EFIS which will
flag the pilot’s display and change the autopilot mode. When FMS/NAV CTL switching in a dual
Page 3-408.2 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Rev 8, May/2008

EFS 40/EFS 50
EFIS installation is desired, the installer should obtain approval from the local certification author-
ity before beginning the installation. The KNS 660 will not accept 429 selected course on label
100 while NAV CTL mode is active.
Since VNAV requirements vary greatly from one approval agency to the next, the certification im-
plications of any VNAV installation should be thoroughly researched prior to committing to accom-
plish the installation. Listed below are Bendix/King recommendations and policy for both IFR and
VFR installations:
Rev 8, May/2008 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Page 3-409

3.9.3.A. IFR Installations
Bendix/King will not support any IFR VNAV or AUTO 3D VNAV installations unless the
following stipulations are met:
1. The installation is approved through an aircraft type certificate (TC), supple-

mental type certificate (STC), or equivalent international approval method.
2. Bendix/King elects to participate in the TC or STC effort.
3. Flight control coupling of the VNAV and/or AUTO 3D VNAV is limited to the
Bendix/King KFC 400 Flight Control System or other TC/STC’d flight control
system.
3.9.3.B. VFR Installations (Advisory VNAV)
Some LNAVs provide outputs of Advisory VNAV data for those applications where it
can be included as part of an approved installation. Before beginning an installation
that will incorporate Advisory VNAV, a thorough analysis of the installation should be
accomplished with the installer’s local FAA Office (Flight Standard District Office, Gen-
eral Aviation District Office, or Manufacturing Inspection District Office) or an equiva-
lent international approval agency, to insure that the advisory VNAV can be approved
for use once the installation is completed.
The following two items are typically included in the requirements which an Advisory
VNAV installation must meet:
1. The VNAV feature should be placarded VFR USE ONLY.

2. VNAV data may be displayed on the LNAV Control Display Unit. This display
may be the only VNAV display. The LNAV may also provide VNAV data to be
displayed on an indicator. This indicator may not be the EHSI. A separate indi-
cator dedicated to the LNAV may be used. Switching should not be used to al-
low other navigation information to be displayed on this indicator. Annunciation
is required to indicate whether VNAV data is displayed as angle or deviation if
the LNAV is capable of providing both formats.
3.9.4 LNAV/VNAV ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
3.9.4.A. ARINC 429 LNAV Transmitter
P4652B-47 P4641C-56 LNAV TRANSMITTER A

P4652B-20 P4641C-83 LNAV TRANSMITTER B
All serial data must conform to ARINC 429 and GAMA General Aviation Subset of
ARINC 429 for electrical characteristics, content and transmission interval. Labels
shown below with an asterisk are not GAMA standard and may be specific to Bendix/
King products. The LNAV Transmitter is low speed ARINC 429. The following LNAV
labels are transmitted by the EFS 40/EFS 50:


100 SELECTED COURSE 200
101 SELECTED HEADING 500 Added by SW 1401
102 SELECTED ALTITUDE 100 Added by SW 1201
113 MESSAGE CHECKSUM 100
204 BARO CORRECTED ALTITUDE 100 Added by SW 1201
210 TRUE AIRSPEED 100 Added by SW 1201
212 ALTITUDE RATE 100 Added by SW 1201
270 DGC STATUS 100 Added by SW 1201
300* EFIS MODE STATUS 500
303 MESSAGE LENGTH/TYPE/ 100
NUMBER
306 NAV/WPT/APT LATITUDE 100
307 NAV/WPT/APT LONGITUDE 100
314 TRUE HEADING 50
320 MAGNETIC HEADING 50
324 PITCH ANGLE 100 Added by SW 1401
325 ROLL ANGLE 100 Added by SW 1401
333 BODY NORMAL ACCELERATION 50 Added by SW 1401
371 SPECIFIC EQUIPMENT IDENT 500
377 EQUIPMENT HEX ID CODE 500
*Not GAMA Standard
The GNS-XLS and the GlobalStar 2100 are in the same family known as Global FMS
products. In software version 12, EFIS output label 270 and 4 Air Data labels (101,
204, 210, and 212) were added to the FMS output bus at the request of the GNS-XLS
FMS products. SGs with software versions 12 and 13 will accept these Air Data labels,
assuming the Air Data input was enabled. This was true only when the SG was con-
figured for Fast/Slow Air Data.
The GlobalStar 2100 FMS requested additional labels, so beginning with software ver-
sion 14, a new configuration option (FMS Output Bus) allows the additional labels of
101, 324, 325, and 333 to be accepted, and enables the Air Data inputs regardless of
the Fast/Slow Air Data configuration. When the FMS Output Bus is configured for
“NORMAL,” the FMS output bus will contain the labels of the original set that was pro-
vided before software version 12. When configured for “CONCENTRATED,” the FMS
output bus will contain the original set of labels, plus those added for software version
12 (102, 204, 210, 212, 270), plus those added for software version 14 (101, 324, 325,
333) regardless of the Fast/Slow Air Data configuration.
3.9.4.B. ARINC 429 LNAV Receiver
P4652A-67 P4641B-15 LNAV 1 RECEIVER A

P4652A-53 P4641B-14 LNAV 1 RECEIVER B

EFS 40/EFS 50
P4652B-64 P4641C-105 LNAV 2 RECEIVER A

P4652B-63 P4641C-65 LNAV 2 RECEIVER B
The EFIS my be configured to accept either GAMA or Nadir Crouzet ARINC 429 data.
3.9.4.B.1. GAMA ARINC 429
All serial data must conform to ARINC 429 and GAMA General Aviation Subset of
ARINC 429 for electrical characteristics, content and transmission interval. Labels
shown below with an asterisk are not GAMA standard and may be specific to Ben-
dix/King products. The LNAV Receivers are low speed ARINC 429. The following
GAMA LNAV labels are used by the EFS 40/EFS 50 (all of these labels are not pro-
vided by any one LNAV. Various labels are used from the total list of labels based
upon the configured LNAV selection):

074 FLIGHT PLAN HEADER RECORD
075 ACTIVE WAYFOINT
100* SELECTED COURSE
113 MESSAGE CHECKSUM
114 DESIRED TRACK (true)
115 WAYPOINT BEARING (true)
116 CROSS TRACK DISTANCE
117* VERTICAL DEVIATION Angle added by software 0801
121 HORIZONTAL COMMAND
122 VERTICAL COMMAND
147 MAGNETIC VARIATION
251 DISTANCE TO GO
252 TIME TO GO
261 GPS DISCRETE WORD 1 Added by software 1501
275 LRN STATUS WORD
300 STN MAG VAR. TYPE AND CLASS
301 MESSAGE CHARACTERS 7-9
303 MESSAGE LENGTH/TYPE/NUMBER
306 NAV/WPT/AP LATITUDE
307 NAV/WPT/AP LONGITUDE
310 PRESENT POSITION LATITUDE
311 PRESENT POSITION LONGITUDE
312 GROUND SPEED
315 WIND SPEED
316 WIND DIRECTION (true)
321 DRIFT ANGLE
326 LATERAL SCALE FACTOR Added by software 1101
Page 3-412 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Rev 8, May/2008

EFS 40/EFS 50
327 VERTICAL SCALE FACTOR Added by software 1501

*Not GAMA Standard
Software version 11 added label 326 to accept variable lateral deviation scaling from
an LNAV.
Software versions 15 and 16 added label 261 to accept GPS WAAS approach type
from an LNAV and added label 327 to accept variable vertical deviation scaling from
an LNAV.
3.9.4.B.2. Nadir Crouzet ARINC 429
The Nadir Crouzet LNAV interface became operational with symbol generator soft-
ware release 0401.
All serial data must conform to ARINC 429 for electrical characteristics. Labels
shown below with an asterisk are not ARINC 429 standard and may be specific to
Nadir Crouzet products. The LNAV receivers are low speed ARINC 429. The fol-
lowing Nadir Crouzet LNAV labels are used by the EFS 40/EFS 50:

040* FROM WAYPOINT LATITUDE
041* FROM WAYPOINT LONGITUDE
042* TO WAYPOINT LATITUDE
042* CENTER POINT LATITUDE
043* TO WAYPOINT LONGITUDE
043* CENTER POINT LONGITUDE
044* TO + 1 WAYPOINT LATITUDE
045* TO + 1 WAYPOINT LONGITUDE
105* FROM WAYPOINT IDENT
106* CENTER POINT IDENT
106* TO WAYPOINT IDENT
107* TO + 1 WAYPOINT IDENT
114* DESIRED TRACK (magnetic)

EFS 40/EFS 50
116 CROSS TRACK DISTANCE

121 HORIZONTAL COMMAND SIGNAL
122 VERTICAL COMMAND SIGNAL
176* TO + 6 WAYPOINT [DENT
251* DISTANCE TO GO
252 TIME TO GO
270* DISCRETE STATUS
304* DECLINATION
312 GROUND SPEED
315 WIND SPEED
321 DRIFT ANGLE
372 WIND DIRECTION (magnetic)
*Not ARINC Standard
3.9.5 LNAV/VNAV INTERFACE
Refer to Figure 3-142 and 3-142A for the ARINC 429 Long Range NAV interface for all units other
than the Garmin 430/530. For the Garmin 430/530, refer to Figure 3-142B.
The following part numbers of the following units are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50:
All part numbers of the Bendix/King KLN 88 are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50. Symbol gen-
erator software 0801 and a relay driven from the symbol generator 1/2 SELECT OUT output is
necessary when two KLN 88s are to be used with a single symbol generator. For this dual KLN
88 with single symbol generator installation the EFIS must be configured to provide a valid LNAV
TRANSMITTER label 100 SELECTED COURSE when the off-side LNAV is displayed. The relay
is used to direct the symbol generator LNAV TRANSMITTER to the displayed KLN 88. Without
the relay both KLN 88s selected course will change when either KLN 88 is displayed on the EFIS
and the EFIS course selector is operated.

EFS 40/EFS 50
All part numbers of the Bendix/King KLN 90 are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50. Symbol gen-
erator software 0801 is required for correct operation of two KLN 90s with a single symbol gener-
ator. For this dual KLN 90 with single symbol generator installation the EFIS must be configured
to provide a valid LNAV TRANSMITTER label 100 SELECTED COURSE when the off-side LNAV
is displayed. The KLN 90/ KLN 900 series of products, which includes the KLN 90, KLN 90A, KLN
90B, and the KLN 900, may have two LNAVs connected simultaneously to a single symbol gen-
erator’s LNAV TRANSMITTER output. These products use the SDI bits in label 100 SELECTED
COURSE to determine which KLN 90( ) or KLN 900 selected course should be changed by the
EFIS.
Bendix/King KNC 667 066-4011-

- - - - - - - - 08 09
- - - - - - - - - -
- - - - 24 25 26 27 28 -
Mod10 Mod10
- - - - 34 35 - - - -
40 41 - - 44 45 - - 48 49
50 - - 53 - - - - - -
Bendix/King KNC 667 066-4022-XX All part numbers.

Bendix/King KNC 667 066-4030-XX All part numbers.
Foster LNS 616B, DI 681 part number 805D0570-02 is compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50. Only
one navigation facility can be displayed on the EFIS nearest navaids display and no nearest air-
ports are displayed. Other features of the Foster system may not be supported by the EFS 40/EFS
50.
GNS X SCN 15.6 and above is compatible. VNAV and pseudo VORTAC modes are not supported
by the EFS 40/EFS 50. Other GNS X modes may not be supported by the EFS 40/EFS 50.
GNS X 400-014141-0101 is not compatible

GNS X 400-014141-0202 Mod 15 and later are compatible
GNS X 400-014141-0251 is compatible

EFS 40/EFS 50
UNS 1 A, UNS 1 B 3D non precision mode is not supported by the EFS 40/EFS 50. Other UNS
1 A, UNS 1 B modes may not be supported by the EFS 40/EFS 50. The following part numbers of
the UNS 1 A, UNS 1 B are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50:
UNS 1 1161-1-XX UNS 1 1180-1-XX

UNS 1A 1161-2-XX UNS 1A 1161-21-XXX
UNS 1A 1161-30-XXX UNS 1A 1180-2-XX
UNS 1A 1180-21-XXX UNS 1A 1180-24-XX
UNS 1A 1180-30-XX UNS 1B 1190-01-XXXX
UNS 1B 1190-02-XXXX UNS 1B 1190-03-XXXX
Canadian Marconi CMA 900 NMS (GPS) part number 100-601400-200 is compatible with the EFS
40/EFS 50. The bearing display, drift angle display, deviation and distance display and flight plan
waypoint map display data from the CMA 900 have all been demonstrated to display properly on
the EFS 40/EFS 50. VNAV and nearest airport and navaid displays were not operational at time
of publication.
Configuration with SW Version 15 or 16 for use with Garmin G530W/G430W type GPS: At the
time of the EFIS SW 15 and SW 16 TSO activity, the Garmin configuration is GAMA 429 with
VNAV set to Enable Labels 117 and 327. This configuration ensures that the 429 output data from
the GPS contains the necessary approach type and approach validity necessary for the 429 data
interface to the EFIS 40/50.

FIGURE 3-142 EFS 40/EFS 50 ARINC 429 Long Range NAV Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0023, Rev AA)

FIGURE 3-142A EFS 40/EFS 50 ARINC 429 Dual LNAV Without SG2 Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0072, Rev -)

EFS 40/EFS 50
FIGURE 3-142B EFS 40/50 ARINC 429 Garmin 430/530

(Sheet 1 of 2)

EFS 40/EFS 50
FIGURE 3-142B EFS 40/50 ARINC 429 Garmin 430/530

(Sheet 2 of 2)

3.10 AIR DATA/ COLLECTIVE
3.10.1 AIR DATA/ COLLECTIVE APPLICABLE PART NUMBERS
The air data speed pointer became operational with symbol generator software 0501.
The collective display became operational with symbol generator software 0601.
The following part numbers of the SG 465 will accept Air Data/ Collective inputs:
SG 465 066-04021-
- 01XX 02XX - - - - - - -
- 11XX 12XX - - - 1601 1755 - 5000
3.10.2 AIR DATA/ COLLECTIVE FUNCTION
Only one air data/ collective source may be connected to the EFIS at a time. Either indicated air-
speed or angle of attack information from the air data may be used to drive the speed pointer dis-
play. The collective display is driven by the helicopter flight computer. Analog collective is input to
the speed pointer inputs. ARINC 429 collective is input to the FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM RE-
CEIVER and not to the AIR DATA RECEIVER. The speed pointer/ collective display is a vertical
display located opposite the vertical deviation display on the ADI. An annunciation is placed on
the pointer to indicate what data the EFIS is using to drive the speed pointer; AN for angle of at-
tack, AS for airspeed, CO for collective. The annunciation is switched between indicated airspeed
and angle of attack by a discrete input for the analog inputs and by a discrete bit in the ARINC 429
label for the ARINC 429 input. When the EFIS is configured at installation for collective, no annun-
ciation switching is allowed. Scale factors for the pointer scale when data is provided by ARINC
429 are: ±10 degrees for angle of attack, ±10 kts for airspeed, and ±100% for collective. The scale
factor for the display of analog data varies with the scaling of the source and may be adjusted with
scaling resistors in the installation wiring. The pointer scale is removed when the ARINC 429 label
is received as no computed data or the data is sent as more than 30% of full scale on either the
fast or slow side.
3.10.3 AIR DATA/ COLLECTIVE REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS
Air data is an optional input to the EFIS, it is not required. Display of the air data speed pointer is
only available for installations that include an ADI display. If the EFIS is configured at installation
for display of the speed pointer then either airspeed or angle of attack can be provided to the EFIS
based on the state of a discrete input. If the EFIS is configured at Installation for display of the
collective then only collective information may be displayed.
3.10.4 AIR DATA/ COLLECTIVE ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
3.10.4.A. Speed Pointer Input
P4651A-58 SPEED POINTER +FAST

P4651A-99 SPEED POINTER +SLOW
This input may accept angle of attack, airspeed or collective inputs.
Meter drive ± 2.0 Vdc or ± 2.2 Vdc full scale. Input impedance is 1 k ohms.
When configured for a one dot scale, 2.0 Vdc at SPEED POINTER +FAST with respect
to SPEED POINTER +SLOW produces a full-scale (center of reference mark) fast in-
dication. The pointer continues to move until 2.4 Vdc is reached at which point the
pointer is removed from the display. 0.0 Vdc produces a centered indication. 2.0 Vdc
at SPEED POINTER +SLOW with respect to SPEED POINTER +FAST produces a full
scale slow indication.
Refer to 3.10.5.A Air Data/ Collective Interface for information on the use of scaling re-
sistors in the installation wiring for accommodating higher input voltages.
3.10.4.B. Speed Pointer Flag Input
P4651A-85 SPEED POINTER SUPERFLAG
Input impedance no less than 360 k ohms. A valid SPEED POINTER SUPERFLAG is
required for display of the analog SPEED POINTER inputs.
3.10.4.C. Angle of Attack / Indicated Airspeed Select Input
P4652B-32 AOA/IAS
AOA: Less than 3.0 Vdc or less than 1 k ohms to ground.

IAS: Greater than 18.0 Vdc or greater than 20 k ohms to ground.
3.10.4.D. ARINC 429 Air Data Input
P4652A-54 AIRDATA RECEIVER A

P4652A-40 AIRDATA RECEIVER B
tics. The air data receiver is low speed ARINC 429. Only label 142 is actually used by
the EFIS. All other labels are received by the EFIS to be passed through to the LNAV.
Prior to software version 12, only label 142 was received by the air data receiver. SGs
with software versions 12 and 13 also accept labels 102, 204, 210, and 212, on this
input, but only if the SG is configured for Fast/Slow Air Data. Beginning with software
version 14, a new configuration option (FMS Output Bus) allows those labels to be ac-
cepted regardless of the Fast/Slow Air Data configuration. See section 3.9.4 (ARINC
429 LNAV Transmitter) for further details.

The following air data labels are accepted by the EFS 40/EFS 50:

102 SELECTED ALTITUDE Added by software 1201
142 FLIGHT DIRECTOR FAST/SLOW
DEVIATION
204 BARO CORRECTED ALTITUDE Added by software 1201
210 TRUE AIRSPEED Added by software 1201
212 ALTITUDE RATE Added by software 1201
3.10.5 AIR DATA/ COLLECTIVE INTERFACE
NOTE
The air data speed pointer interface became operational at symbol generator software
0501. The collective pointer display became operational at symbol generator software
0601. The offset voltage configuration option became available at symbol generator
software 0701.
3.10.5.A. Analog Air Data/ Collective
Refer to Figure 3-143 for the Analog Air Data interface.
The analog Speed Pointer inputs may interface to systems providing voltages in ex-
cess of ±2.2 Vdc by placing a resistor in series with the SPEED POINTER +FAST in-
put. The resistor value is selected to provide a full scale voltage of ±2.2 Vdc across the
1 k ohms impedance of the Speed Pointer input. The formula for the resistance value
of the series resistor is:
Voltage range = absolute value (full scale fast voltage - full scale slow voltage)
Series resistance in k ohms = (voltage range / 4) -1
3.10.5.B. ARINC 429 Air Data
Refer to 3.12 Flight Control for ARINC 429 Collective Interface.
Refer to Figure 3-144 for the ARINC 429 Air Data interface.The following part numbers
of the Bendix/King KDC 481/KDC 481T are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50:
KDC 481/KDC 481T 065-0082-

- 01 02 03 04 - - - - -
SW 06
10 11 12 - 14 - - - - -

THIS PAGE RESERVED

FIGURE 3-143 EFS 40/EFS 50 Analog Airdata Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0035, Rev 2)

FIGURE 3-144 EFS 40/EFS 50 ARINC 429 Airdata Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0024, Rev 2)

3.11 RADIO ALTIMETER
3.11.1 RADIO ALTIMETER APPLICABLE PART NUMBERS
The radio altimeter interface, for display on the EADI, became operational with symbol generator
software 0401.
The radio altimeter interface, for display on the EHSI, became operational with symbol generator
software 0701.
The following part numbers of the SG 465 will accept Radio Altimeter inputs for display on the
EHSI only:
SG 465 066-04021-
- - - - 04XX 05XX - - - -
- - - - 14XX 15XX - - - -
The following part numbers of the SG 465 will accept Radio Altimeter inputs for display on the
EADI:
SG 465 066-04021-
- 01XX 02XX - - - - - - -
- 11XX 12XX - - - 1601 1755 - 5000
3.11.2 RADIO ALTIMETER FUNCTION
Only one radio altimeter source may be connected to a symbol generator at one time. The radio
altimeter digital height is displayed on the EFIS ADI whenever a valid altitude of less than 2,500
feet (or the configured maximum range of the radio altimeter) is input to the EFIS. When ILS or
MLS is selected for presentation on the course deviation display a rising runway symbol can be
configured for display on the EFIS ADI to indicate course deviation left or right and radio altitude.
The rising runway symbol begins to grow in size when the radio altimeter height is below 200 feet.
The radio altimeter decision height is displayed on the EFIS ADI any time the radio altimeter height
is displayed and any time the DH select knob on the EFIS control panel is activated. A decision
height annunciation is displayed on the EFIS ADI when the radio altimeter height is less than the
selected decision height. When activated, the DH annunciation flashes for 10 seconds and then
remains on solid until the radio altitude height becomes greater than the selected decision height
or until the decision height selector is turned to the off setting. An EFIS discrete output is active
during the first two seconds of the time the DH annunciation is flashing. This discrete output may
be used to activate an aural alert, or for other purposes.
Radio altimeter height display on the EHSI was added to SG 464 and SG 465 by symbol generator
software 0701. This configuration option is only allowed in an EHSI only installation without an
EADI. Whenever the radio altimeter height is less than 1,000 feet the height is displayed on the
EHSI. No decision height selection or annunciation is supported with the HSI only interface.

Three possible configurations exist for the installation of a radio altimeter indicator with the EFS
40/EFS 50 ADI: The DH select and annunciation, radio altitude display and self test selection may
be performed by the EFIS eliminating the need to install the radio altimeter indicator. The EFIS
may be configured to only serve as an additional display of the DH annunciation provided by the
radio altimeter indicator. Or the radio altimeter indicator and EFIS may both be used to indepen-
dently and simultaneously select and annunciate DH, display radio altitude and provide self test
selection.
3.11.3 RADIO ALTIMETER REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS
Radio altimeter is an optional input to the EFIS, it is not required. Before symbol generator soft-
ware 0701, display of radio altimeter data was only available for installations that include an ADI
display. The radio altimeter may not be displayed on both the ADI and HSI. The symbol generator
must be configured for HSI only in order to configure for radio altimeter display on the HSI.
Symbol generator software 0601 and above is required for proper operation of the radio altimeter
miscompare in a multi symbol generator installation.
Symbol generator software 0701 and above is required for proper interface to a dual slope (20mV/
ft. and 3mV/ft.) type radio altimeter with a minimum altitude output of -20 ft. Earlier versions of soft-
ware will display radio altitude 20 ft. higher than actual altitude provided by this type of radio altim-
eter.
3.11.4 RADIO ALTIMETER ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
3.11.4.A. Analog Radio Altimeter Input
P4651B-98 P4641B-23 RADIO ALTIMETER LO

P4651B-71 P4641B-11 RADIO ALTIMETER HI
Input level up to 26 Vdc. Input impedance of no less than 261 k ohms
The RADIO ALTIMETER inputs are to be used with radio altimeters providing less than
26 Vdc. Several formats can be accommodated by configuration options: ARINC
552A; ±4mV/ft. linear up to 2500 feet; ±10 mV/ft. linear up to 2500 feet: and dual slope
of 20 mV/ft. linear from -20 to +500 ft. and 3 mV/ft. linear from 500 to 2500 feet. RADIO
ALTIMETER HI, must always have a positive voltage with respect to RADIO ALTIME-
TER LO.
Radio altimeters with negative going outputs may name their outputs the opposite of
the EFIS with respect to Hl and LO. The Bendix/King KRA 405 for example provides -
10mV/ft. Its LO output is internally connected to ground and its Hl output is an increas-
ingly greater negative voltage with an increase in altitude. For this unit the HI Radio
Altimeter output must be connected to the LO EFIS input and vice versa.
3.11.4.B. Radio Altimeter Superflag Input

P4651B-99 P4641B-98 RADIO ALTIMETER SUPERFLAG
3.11.4.C. ARINC 429 Radio Altimeter Input
P4652A-3 P4641A-89 RADIO ALTIMETER RECEIVER A

P4652A-15 P4641A-90 RADIO ALTIMETER RECEIVER B
tics, content and transmission interval. The Radio Altimeter Receiver is low speed
ARINC 429. The following Radio Altimeter label is used by the EFS 40/EFS 50:
164 RADIO HEIGHT
3.11.4.D. Decision Height Select Input
P4652B-13 DECISION HEIGHT SELECT IN
DH: Less than 3.0 Vdc or less than 1 k ohms to ground. Not DH: Greater than 18.0 Vdc
or greater than 20 k ohms to ground.
Activation of the DECISION HEIGHT SELECT IN causes the decision height annunci-
ation to be displayed on the EFIS ADI when the EFIS is configured for this method of
operation. This input can be activated by a radio altimeter indicators decision height
annunciation output.
3.11.4.E. Decision Height Select Output
P4652B-88 DECISION HEIGHT SELECT OUT
DH: LO (no more than 1.5 Vdc at 250 mA). Not DH: HI (open).
DECISION HEIGHT SELECT OUT is active for two seconds beginning with the activa-
tion of the DH annunciation. This output can be used to activate an aural alert.
3.11.4.F. Radio Altimeter Test Outputs
P4671-24 RADIO ALTIMETER TEST

P4671-9 RADIO ALTIMETER RETURN
P4701-6 RADIO ALTIMETER TEST 1
RETURN


RETURN
When active this line provides less than 1 ohm measured relative to the corresponding
RADIO ALTIMETER RETURN. When inactive this line is open. This line can conduct
up to 0.5 Amp.
3.11.5 RADIO ALTIMETER INTERFACE
3.11.5.A. ANALOG RADIO ALTIMETER
Refer to Figure 3-145 for the Analog Radio Altimeter interface. All part numbers of the
following radio altimeters are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50: Bendix/King KRA
405, Collins ALT 50 and Collins ALT 55.
3.11.5.B. ARINC 429 RADIO ALTIMETER
Refer to Figure 3-146 for the ARINC 429 Radio Altimeter interface.

FIGURE 3-145 EFS 40/EFS 50 Analog Radio Altimeter Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0025, Rev AA)

FIGURE 3-146 EFS 40/EFS 50 ARINC 429 Radio Altimeter Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0034, Rev AA)

3.12 FLIGHT CONTROL
3.12.1 FLIGHT CONTROL APPLICABLE PART NUMBERS
3.12.1.A. Symbol Generators for Flight Director Inputs and Flight Control Outputs
The following part numbers of the SG 465 will accept flight director inputs and provide
flight control outputs:
SG 465 066-04021-
- 01XX 02XX - - - - - - -
- 11XX 12XX - - - 1601 1755 - 5000
3.12.1.B. Symbol Generators for Flight Control Outputs
The following part numbers of the SG 464 and SG 465 will provide flight control outputs
only:
SG 464 066-04020-
- 01XX 02XX - - - - - - -
- 11XX 12XX - - - - - - -
SG 465 066-04021-
- - - - 04XX 05XX - - - -
- - - - 14XX 15XX - - - -
3.12.2 FLIGHT CONTROL FUNCTION
Only one flight control input (flight director command bars and flight control annunciations) may
be connected to a symbol generator at one time. The symbol generator flight control outputs (lat-
eral and vertical deviations, and heading and course datums) may be connected to more than one
flight control system.
The EFIS can serve as the NAV source selector for the flight control system. This is accomplished
by connecting the EFIS lateral and vertical deviation outputs (analog or ARINC 429) to the flight
control system. The NAV source displayed on the course deviation display always drives the EFIS
lateral and vertical deviation outputs. Since selecting another NAV source for display on the EFIS
will cause the flight control system to immediately respond to the new source, the EFIS provides
a mode change output to take the flight control system out of the NAV mode whenever the EFIS
NAV source is changed.
It is recommended that the EFIS mode change output be used with all flight control systems that
will accept a lateral clear input (also the mode change output can be used to interrupt the flight
control lateral flag input for the same result). It is not recommended that the mode change output

be used to disengage the flight control system, but only to clear the flight control system lateral
mode. Independent of whether the mode change output is used or is not used the operational ef-
fect to the flight control system resulting from changing the EFIS NAV source should be clearly
described in the Aircraft Flight Manual Supplement.
Beginning with symbol generator software 0401, the EFIS EADI began displaying flight control
mode annunciation for flight control systems that provide properly formatted ARINC 429 style
mode data. Attitude hold airdata select command annunciations were added with software 0501.
Mis-trim and trim failure annunciations were added with software 0601. Flashing A/P mode annun-
ciations were changed from green to yellow with software 0801.
Interface to the KFC 500 flight control system was added with software 0901. KFC 500 mode an-
nunciations SAS and DNT were added with software 1301. The pitch offset sync feature was also
added with software 1301.
3.12.3 FLIGHT CONTROL REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS
Flight control is an optional input/output to the EFIS. It is not required. Flight control mode annun-
ciation became operational with symbol generator software 0401. Display of flight control mode
annunciation is only available for installations that include an ADI display and then only if the flight
control system provides specially formatted ARINC 429 style mode data.
The EFIS provides AC course and heading datum only. Flight control systems designed for DC
datums (includes Bendix/King KFC 150 and KFC 200) require an adapter (KA 118-01).
Flight control systems that provide pitch and roll command bar drive voltages of less than 400
mVdc/deg require an amplifier adapter for use with the EFS 40/EFS 50. The Bendix/King KA 163A
Pitch and Roll Command Adapter can be used for this purpose and provides an adjustable gain
of from 2.55 to 28 to amplify the command bar drive voltages to 400 mVdc/deg.
The Bendix/King KFC 150, KFC 200, KFC 250 (three inch), and KFC 275 flight control systems
require the use of the Bendix/King KG 253, KI 254, KI 256 or KG 258 attitude gyro/indicators for
pitch and roll information. This pitch and roll format is not compatible with the XYZ format used by
the EFIS. These installations cannot use the EFIS ADI but must continue to use the KG 253, KI
254, KI 256 or KG 258 as the ADI indicator. Special mods allow a KFC 200 EADI interface. Con-
tact Customer Service for applicable mods.
Although the EFIS will provide the ADF to the flight control system on the EFIS lateral deviation
outputs; ADF coupling to the autopilot is not allowed until the aircraft has been flight tested and
approved for ADF coupled flight.
3.12.4 FLIGHT CONTROL ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
P4651B-88 P4641A-95 AUTOPILOT REFERENCE H

P4651B-74 P4641A-81 AUTOPILOT REFERENCE C
The autopilot reference input requires 26 ± 0.52 Vac at 400 ± 8 Hz and has an input
impedance of no less than 45 k ohms
The 26 Vac 400 Hz reference inputs are used only as a reference. Current consump-
tion is less than 0.3 mA. All 400 Hz signal outputs from the symbol generator are pow-
ered from the 28 Vdc input to the symbol generator. All side-1 400 Hz signal inputs to
the symbol generator must be the same phase as the reference 1 input, and all side-2
inputs must be the same phase as the reference 2 input. Side-1 and side-2 may differ
in phase. Heading and course datum outputs from the symbol generator to the flight
control system are referenced to the autopilot reference input which may differ in phase
from side-1 and side-2.
3.12.4.B. Course Datum Output
P4651A-59 P4641A-43 COURSE DATUM H

P4651A-86 P4641A-44 COURSE DATUM C
400 HZ AC voltage capable of driving no less than a 10 k ohms load. Output voltage
is 22.5 Vrms multiplied by the sine of the angle (393 mV/deg at 0 degrees) resulting in
a range of ± 90 degrees. The signal is in phase with the autopilot reference when the
course pointer is to the right of the lubber line. Beginning with symbol generator soft-
ware 0801, configurations for 300 mV/deg and 206 mV/deg scale factors were added.
3.12.4.C. Heading Datum Output
P4651B-24 P4641B-10 HEADING DATUM H

P4651B-38 P4641B-36 HEADING DATUM C
400 HZ AC voltage capable of driving no less than a 10 k ohms load. Output voltage
is 22.5 Vrms multiplied by the sine of the angle (393 mV/deg at 0 degrees) resulting in
a range of ± 90 degrees. The signal is in phase with the autopilot reference when the
heading bug is to the right of the lubber line. Beginning with symbol generator software
0801, configurations for 300 mV/deg and 206 mV/deg scale factors were added.
3.12.4.D. Symbol Generator Valid Outputs
P4651B-7 P4641C-30 HSI VALID OUT
Valid: HI (no less than 18.0 Vdc at up to 250 mA). Invalid: LO (no more than 3.5 Vdc).
The HSI VALID OUT is invalid whenever the EFIS is operating in a non normal mode
such as TEST mode, whenever the selected heading input is invalid, or whenever the
symbol generator internal diagnostics indicate a failure within the HSI section of the
symbol generator. The HSI VALID is also invalid when DISPLAY DOWN reversionary
mode has been activated but will become valid if COMPOSITE reversionary mode is

active simultaneously with DISPLAY DOWN. This output may be used to drive a lateral
flag or compass valid input to the flight control system.
P4652A-24 ADI VALID OUT
The ADI VALID OUT is invalid whenever the EFIS is operating in a non normal mode
such as TEST mode, whenever the selected attitude input is invalid, or whenever the
symbol generator internal diagnostics indicate a failure within the ADI section of the
symbol generator. This output may be used to drive a vertical flag or VG valid input to
the flight control system.
3.12.4.E. To/From Output
P4651A-51 P4641A-46 +TO OUT

P4651A-31 P4641A-32 +FROM OUT
Low level flag drive ± 100 ± 10 mVdc. Current drive capability is no less than 5 mA.
The To/From output follows the To/From indication displayed on the EFIS HSI display.
When the To/From is removed from the display, such as when LOC is displayed, the
To/From output voltage goes to 0.0 ± 10 mVdc.
3.12.4.F. Lateral Deviation Output

NOTE
Symbol generators with software before 0402 had the +L and +R reversed from that
shown below and must be rewired to match below, for proper operation.
P4651A-33 P4641A-73 LATERAL DEV +L

P4651A-47 P4641A-86 LATERAL DEV +R
Meter drive ±150 mVdc full scale. This output will provide up to ±300 mVdc. Current
drive capability is no less than 5 mA. The lateral deviation output follows the course
deviation displayed on the EFIS HSI display. The lateral deviation is not reversed when
the EFIS senses a back course condition.
3.12.4.G. Lateral Deviation Superflag Output
P4651A-19 P4641A-96 LATERAL DEV SUPERFLAG
The lateral deviation superflag output follows the course deviation flag displayed on the
EFIS HSI display.
3.12.4.H. Vertical Deviation Output

NOTE

Symbol generators with software before 0402 had the +UP and +DN reversed from that
shown below and must be rewired to match below, for proper operation.
P4651A-34 P4641A-99 VERTICAL DEV +UP

P4651A-48 P4641A-33 VERTICAL DEV +DN
Meter drive ±150 mVdc full scale. This output will provide up to ± 300 mVdc. Current
drive capability is no less than 5 mA. The vertical deviation output follows the vertical
deviation indication displayed on the EFIS HSI display. The deviation may originate
from a VNAV, ILS or MLS glideslope but not from a speed pointer source. The glides-
lope deviation continues to be present on the vertical deviation output even though the
glideslope display is removed from the EFIS HSI during back course.
3.12.4.I. Vertical Superflag Output
P4651A-20 P4641A-82 VERTICAL DEV SUPERFLAG OUT
Valid: HI (no less than 18.0 Vdc at 250 mA). Invalid: LO (no more than 3.5 Vdc). The
vertical deviation superflag output follows the vertical deviation flag displayed on the
EHSI display. The vertical deviation superflag may originate from a VNAV, ILS or MLS
glideslope but not from a speed pointer source. The glideslope flag continues to be
present on the vertical deviation superflag output even though the glideslope display
is removed from the EFIS HSI during back course.
3.12.4.J. Source Selection Discrete Outputs
The following eight outputs are provided to annunciate the selected source of the EHSI
course deviation display. They may be used to illuminate lamps, engage relays, or be
sensed directly by other systems. The outputs are open collector transistors. When ac-
tive, the transistor is turned on and conducting which provides a ground path for a load
such as a lamp or relay which is pulled up to a maximum voltage of +33 Vdc at a max-
imum current of 250 mA.
NAV SELECT OUT: When active. indicates that a NAV source is selected as the
course deviation display. If the unit selected is a VOR/LOC then this output is active
during VOR and LOC. If the unit selected is a single nav convertor shared by both a
VOR and a TACAN then this output is active anytime the unit is selected. If the unit
selected is a stand alone TACAN then this output is never active when the TACAN is
selected as the course deviation display. Refer to paragraph 3.8.5 RNAV Interface for
a description of the activation logic of this output when a KNS 81 RNAV is selected as
the course deviation display and it is operating in the VOR, VOR PAR, LOC or TAC
modes. This output is never active when an LNAV is selected as the course deviation
display even though the LNAV may have VOR or LOC modes.
ADF SELECT OUT: When active, indicates that an ADF source is selected as the
course deviation display.

EFS 40/EFS 50
1/2 SELECT OUT: When active, indicates that a navigation source from the number
two side of the aircraft has been selected as the course deviation display. If a naviga-
tion source is connected as a number two side input and a navigation source of the
same type is not connected to the number one side input, then when the source has
been selected as the course deviation display, the source will not have a side number
associated with the source annunciation on the EHSI and the 1/2 SELECT will remain
inactive.
LNAV SELECT OUT: When active indicates that an LNAV source is selected as the
course deviation display. Software 15 introduced a configuration item LNAV SELECT
OUT ENROUTE ONLY that when set to 1:ENROUTE ONLY inhibits the LNAV SE-
LECT OUT from going low when a GPS is in approach mode.
RNAV SELECT OUT: When active indicates that an RNAV source is selected as the
course deviation display. Refer to paragraph 3.8.5 RNAV Interface for a description of
the activation logic of this output when a KNS 81 RNAV is selected as the course de-
viation display and it is operating in the VOR, VOR PAR, LOC, TAC and RNV modes.
This output is never active when LNAV is selected as the course deviation display even
though the LNAV may have RNAV modes.
MILS SELECT OUT: When active, indicates that a MLS source is selected as the
ILS ENERGIZE OUT: When active, indicates that a LOC source is selected as the
viation display and it is operating in the LOC mode. This output is never active when
LNAV is selected as the course deviation display even though the LNAV may have
LOC modes, except with software version 15 when configured for variable VNAV, refer
to paragraph 3.9.2.
TACAN SELECT OUT: When active, indicates that a TACAN source is selected as the
viation display and it is operating in the TAC and/or RNV modes. This output is never
active when LNAV is selected for display on the course deviation display even though
the LNAV may have TACAN modes.
CABLE SELECT OUT: When active, indicates that a CABLE source is selected as the
HOMING SELECT OUT: When active, indicates that a HOMING source is selected as
the course deviation display.
HOVER SELECT OUT: When active, indicates that a HOVER source is selected as

EFS 40/EFS 50
P4651A-9 P4641C-87 VNAV SELECT OUT

P4652A-19 P4641C-99 NAV SELECT OUT
P4652A-33 P4641C-26 ADF SELECT OUT
P4652A-7 P4641C-86 1/2 SELECT OUT
P4652A-17 P4641B-71 LNAV SELECT OUT
P4652B-74 P4641C-102 RNAV SELECT OUT
P4652B-75 P4641C-88 MLS SELECT OUT
P4652B-102 P4641C-61 ILS ENERGIZE OUT
P4652B-61 P4641C-101 TACAN SELECT OUT
P4652A-6 P4641C-73 CABLE SELECT OUT
P4652A-45 P4641C-100 HOMING SELECT OUT
P4652A-18 P4641C-74 HOVER SELECT OUT
Active: LO (no more than 1.5 Vdc at 250 mA). Inactive: HI (open).
3.12.4.K. Attitude Miscompare Output
P4652A-32 ATTITUDE MISCOMPARE OUT
When active, indicates that the roll or pitch attitude compare limits have been exceed-
ed.
3.12.4.L. Mode Change Output
P4652A-12 P4641C-16 MODE CHANGE OUT

The Mode Change Output pulses from open to +28 Vdc for approximately 0.5 seconds
(before symbol generator software 0801) when the course deviation display source or
side selection is changed. Symbol generator software 0801 and after changed the time
interval to 0.8 ±0.2 seconds. Current drive capability is no less than 250 mA. The mode
change output is activated only when the source or side change is made on the EFIS
NAV or 1/2 buttons. The mode change is not activated if the 1/2 button is pressed and
there is only a single system for this NAV source. The mode change is not activated if
a frequency change, or mode change is made on the NAV source unit; this includes
changing the RNAV or LNAV mode from or to VOR, VOR PAR, LOC, TAC, RNAV APR
or RNAV ENR. Software 15 introduces a mode change when transiting from enroute
to approach or approach to enroute mode for the GPS when configured with VARI-
ABLE VNAV as YES. Software 16 does not institute a mode change. It continues to
output GPS data.
3.12.4.M. Back Course Output
P4652A-50 P4641C-43 BACK COURSE OUT
Active: HI (no less than 18.0 Vdc at 250 mA). Inactive: LO (no more than 3.5 Vdc).
The back course output is active only when the selected heading source is valid, a LOC
source is selected as the course deviation display and the selected course is greater
than 105° from the lubber line.

EFS 40/EFS 50
3.12.4.N. Pitch Command Input
P4651A-45 PITCH COMMAND +DN

P4651A-18 PITCH COMMAND +UP
Meter drive is configurable up to ±15.0 Vdc for ±15 degrees. Input impedance is 300 k
ohms.
The EFIS may be configured to remove the command bars when the pitch command
input voltage exceeds a certain level. For this configuration the FD ENGAGE input is
ignored.
3.12.4.O. Roll Command Input
P4651A-98 ROLL COMMAND +L

P4651A-71 ROLL COMMAND +R
Meter drive is configurable up to ± 15.0 Vdc for ±20 degrees. Input impedance is 300
k ohms.
3.12.4.P. Flight Director Valid Input
P4652B-6 FD VALID
When the FD VALID input is invalid the FD flag annunciation is displayed.
3.12.4.Q. Flight Director Engage Input
P4652B-4 FD ENGAGE
Out of View: Less than 3.0 Vdc or less than 1 k ohms to ground.
In View: Greater than 18.0 Vdc or greater than 20 k ohms to ground.
The EFIS may be configured to remove the command bars when the pitch command
input voltage exceeds a certain level. For this configuration the FD ENGAGE input is
ignored.
3.12.4.R. Flight Director Command Bar Cue Style Select
P4652B-14 FD COMMAND BAR SELECT
Dual Cue: Less than 3.0 Vdc or less than 1 k ohms to ground.
Single Cue: Greater than 18.0 Vdc or greater than 20 k ohms to ground.
Page 3-444 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Rev 8, May/2008

The FD COMMAND BAR SELECT input became operational with symbol generator
software 0401. This input will have no effect if the symbol generator is configured to
always be dual cue or always to be single cue.
3.12.4.S. Autopilot Left/Right Input
P4652A-21 P4641B-31 AUTOPILOT LEFT/RIGHT
Right: Less than 3.0 Vdc or less than 1 k ohms to ground

Left: Greater than 18.0 Vdc or greater than 20 k ohms to ground.
The AUTOPILOT LEFT/RIGHT input became operational with symbol generator soft-
ware 0401. This input is used in a dual EFIS installation to indicate which symbol gen-
erator is driving the flight control system. The flight control mode annunciations are
then displayed on the proper EFIS according to the state of this discrete. In addition an
arrow is displayed on the EFIS that is not driving the flight control system. The arrow
will point in the direction of the other EFIS display if the installation has symbol gener-
ator #1 on the left hand side of the aircraft and symbol generator #2 on the right hand
side of the aircraft. Beginning with symbol generator software 0801 a configuration op-
tion was added to reverse the direction the arrow points allowing symbol generator #1
on the right hand side of the aircraft and symbol generator #2 on the left hand side of
the aircraft. Arrow direction will have no directional meaning in a tandem (front seat
back seat) installation.
3.12.4.T. Pitch Offset Synchronization
P4652A-85 PITCH OFFSET SYNC-ADI

P4651A-49 PITCH OFFSET SYNC-HSI
Toggle ON/OFF: Less than 3.0 Vdc or less than 1 k ohms to ground.
No Change: Greater than 18.0 Vdc or greater than 20 k ohms to ground.
The pitch offset sync inputs became operational with symbol generator software 13/01.
Pitch offset sync must be configured for these inputs to be recognized. Two inputs are
provided, one for the ADI section, and one for the HSI section of the symbol generator.
The two inputs should be connected together from a single momentary switch, the ef-
fect being that both the HSI and ADI inputs see the momentary action in parallel. The
momentary switch is used to select/deselect pitch offset mode. When the switch se-
lects pitch offset mode, the ADI horizon line will be offset to the current aircraft pitch,
up to a limit of 10 degrees. When the switch de-selects pitch offset mode, the offset will
be removed and absolute pitch will be re-established.
Pitch offset mode applies to ADI displays only. When the EFS is operating in normal,
non-reversionary mode, the pitch offset will be seen only on the ADI DU. The pitch off-
set discrete going into the ADI will drive this action. When the EFS is in ADI DOWN or
COMPOSITE mode, the HSI DU shows an attitude display, and hence will have the
ability for pitch offset mode. The input into the HSI board is required so that the HSI

can perform pitch sync during these reversionary modes. Whenever there is a power
reset, and this includes activating ADI DOWN and COMPOSITE modes, the pitch off-
set mode will be turned off and absolute pitch will be displayed. Pitch offset sync mode
must be re-established by the momentary switch after any power reset. A mismatch of
ADI displays, with one in pitch sync mode and one not, may occur if both ADI DOWN
and COMPOSITE switches are installed in the same aircraft. This leads to a limitation
that an installation may have either ADI DOWN or COMPOSITE but not both.
NOTE
Pitch offset sync is a feature intended for use on rotary wing aircraft only, and is not
intended for use on fixed wing aircraft.
3.12.4.U. ARINC 429 Flight Control System Input
P4652B-37 P4641B-96 FCS RECEIVER A

P4652B-24 P4641B-84 FCS RECEIVER B
The FCS Receiver became operational with symbol generator software 0401, with
modifications at 0501 and 0601.
tics, content and transmission interval. Labels shown below with an asterisk are not
ARINC standard and may be specific to Bendix/King products. The FCS Receiver is
low speed ARINC 429. The following FCS labels are used by the EFS 40/EFS 50:

074* I/0 STRAPS
075* SENSOR DIAGNOSTICS
076* SERVO DIAGNOSTICS
077* PROCESSOR DIAGNOSTICS
101 SELECTED HEADING Added by software 0901
102 SELECTED ALTITUDE Added by software 0501
103 SELECTED INDICATED AIRSPEED Added by software 0501
106 SELECTED MACH Added by software 0501
140 FLIGHT DIRECTOR ROLL
141 FLIGHT DIRECTOR PITCH
142* COLLECTIVE DEVIATION Added by software 0601
172* SELECTED VERTICAL SPEED Added by software 0501
224* X CABLE DEVIATION Added by software 0501
225* Y CABLE DEVIATION Added by software 0501
226* LONGITUDINAL VELOCITY Added by software 0501
227* LATERAL VELOCITY Added by software 0501
271* PITCH DISCRETE DATA
272* PITCH DISCRETE Added by software 0501
273* ROLL DISCRETE Added by software 0501

274* COLLECTIVE DATA Added by software 0601

275* ARMED MODE DISCRETE Added by software 0501
276* ROLL DISCRETE
277* FLIGHT CONTROL DISCRETE
*Not ARINC Standard
3.12.4.V. ARINC 429 EFS General Transmitter
P4652B-8 P4641C-81 EFS GENERAL TRANSMITTER A

P4652B-34 P4641C-69 EFS GENERAL TRANSMITTER B
All serial data must conform to ARINC 429 for electrical characteristics, content and
transmission interval. The EFS General Transmitter is low speed ARINC 429. Labels
shown below with one asterisk are not ARINC standard and may be specific to Bendix/
King products. The following labels are transmitted by the EFS 40/EFS 50:

100* SELECTED COURSE 500
101 SELECTED HEADING 500
121* HORIZONTAL COMMAND 100
122* VERTICAL COMMAND 100
147* MAGNETIC VARIATION 500
164* RADIO ALTITUDE 100
173* LATERAL DEVIATION 50
174* VERTICAL DEVIATION 50
202* DME DISTANCE 500 Added by software 0501
251* DISTANCE TO GO 500
276 EFS CONFIG/OPERATING STATUS500 Added by software 0801
277* EFS BUILT IN TEST STATUS 500 Added by software 0801
314** TRUE HEADING 100 Changed from 50 ms by
software 0801
320** MAGNETIC HEADING 100 Changed from 50 ms by
software 0801
324 PITCH ANGLE 50 Added by software 0801
325 ROLL ANGLE 50 Added by software 0801
371* SPECIFIC EQUIPMENT ID 500
377 EQUIPMENT ID 500
* Not ARINC Standard
** Beginning at software 0801, either label 314 or 320 is transmitted, not both.
3.12.4.W. KA 163A Pitch and Roll Command Inputs

P163A1-14 PITCH COMMAND +DN IN

P163A1-2 PITCH COMMAND +UP IN
P163A1-8 ROLL COMMAND +R IN
P163A1-20 ROLL COMMAND +L IN
Gain adjustable for ±464 mVdc to ±5.1 Vdc full scale. Input impedance is 100 k ohms.
3.12.4.X. KA 163A Pitch and Roll Command Outputs
P163A1-16 PITCH COMMAND +UP OUT

P163A1-9 ROLL COMMAND +R OUT
P163A1-1 PITCH/ROLL COMMAND OUT
GROUND
Maximum output level ±13.0 Vdc. Capable of driving no less that a 100 k ohms load.
Gain adjustable from 2.55 to 28 times the input voltage.
3.12.5 FLIGHT CONTROL INTERFACE
3.12.5.A. EHSI Only
The Bendix/King KFC 150 and KFC 200 (unless specially modified) are not compatible
with the EFIS ADI; a Bendix/King KG 253, KI 254, KI 256 or KG 258 must be used to
provide attitude information to the flight control system and these attitude sources will
not drive the EFIS attitude inputs. Refer to Figure 3-147 for the EHSI only interface to
the Bendix/King KFC 150, KFC 200, KFC 250 and KFC 275. All part numbers of the
Bendix/King KFC 150, KFC 200, and KFC 275 and 3 inch part numbers of the KFC 250
are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50, when the Bendix/King KA 118 P/N 071-
01095-0001 is used.
3.12.5.B. Bendix/King KFC 250
The three inch Bendix/King KFC 250 is not compatible with the EFIS ADI; a Bendix/
King KG 253, KI 254, KI 256 or KG 258 must be used to provide attitude information
to the three inch flight control system and these attitude sources will not drive the EFIS
attitude inputs. Refer to Figure 3-147 for the KFC 250 EHSI only interface. The four
inch Bendix/King KFC 250 is compatible with the EFIS ADI. Refer to Figure 3-148 for
the Bendix/King KFC 250 interface. All part numbers of the Bendix/King KFC 250 with
four inch adapter cards are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50.
CAUTION
The DG only mode should not be configured on EFS when interfaced to a KFC 250.
See certification section of this manual.

3.12.5.C. Bendix/King KFC 325
The Bendix/King KFC 325 is compatible with the EFIS ADI. Refer to Figure 3-149 for
the Bendix/King KFC 325 interface.
The 065-0064-01 part number of the Bendix/King KFC 325 is compatible with the EFS
40/EFS 50 but does not have ARINC 429 Transmit or Receive interface capability.
The following part numbers of the Bendix/King KFC 325 are compatible with the EFS
40/EFS 50 and have ARINC 429 transmit capability only to the symbol generator
ARINC 429 Flight Control System Input only. These part numbers of the KFC 325 pro-
vide flight control mode annunciation information for display on the EFIS. These part
numbers will not accept the symbol generator ARINC 429 General Transmitter and all
the analog wires shown on Figure 3-149 must be connected.
ARINC 429 Transmit Capability Only:

KCP 220 065-0064-
- - - - 05 06 07 08 - -
- 12 - - - - - - - -
The 065-0064-15 and -20 part numbers of the Bendix/King KCP 220 are compatible
with the EFS 40/EFS 50 and have ARINC 429 transmit and receive capability to the
symbol generator ARINC 429 Flight Control System Input and EFS General Transmit-
ter. These part numbers of the KCP 220 provide flight control mode annunciation infor-
mation for display on the EFIS and eliminate the need to connect the analog pitch and
roll command bar drive, glideslope flag, localizer energize, command bar retract and
fight director valid signals. The analog vertical deviation, lateral deviation, course da-
tum and heading datum are not eliminated by the ARINC 429 and are required to be
connected.
ARINC 429 Transmit and Receive Capability:

KCP 220 065-0064-
- - - - 15 - - - - 20
3.12.5.D. Bendix/King KFC 400
The Bendix/King KFC 400 is compatible with the EFIS ADI. All part numbers of the
Bendix/King KFC 400 are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50 through the symbol gen-
erator ARINC 429 Flight Control System Input and the ARINC 429 EFS General Trans-
mitter.
Although not shown on the interface drawings, it is necessary to switch the AHRS and
DG/VG inputs to the KFC 400 to match the source displayed on the EFIS when more
than one attitude and direction source are installed in the aircraft. Switching is neces-
sary when a panel mount system 1/2 switch is installed for AHRS or DG/VG switching
and during switching for the COPY and STANDBY reversionary modes.

Refer to Figure 3-150 for the Four Tube Single Bendix/King KFC 400 interface.
Refer to Figure 3-151 for the Four Tube Dual Bendix/King KFC 400 interface.
Refer to Figure 3-152 for the Five Tube Single Bendix/King KFC 400 interface.
Refer to Figure 3-153 for the Five Tube Dual Bendix/King KFC 400 interface.
3.12.5.E. Bendix/King KA 163A
Refer to Figure 3-154 for the Bendix/King KA 163A interface. All part numbers of the
KA 163A are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50.
3.12.5.F. Bendix/King KFC 500
Refer to Figure 3-154A for the Four Tube Single Bendix/King KFC 500 interface.
Refer to Figure 3-154B for the Five Tube Single Bendix/King KFC 500 interface.

FIGURE 3-147 EFS 40/EFS 50 EHSI Only Flight Control Interconnect


FIGURE 3-147 EFS 40/EFS 50 EHSI Only Flight Control Interconnect


FIGURE 3-147A EFS 40/EFS 50 EADI/EHSI KFC 200 Flight Control Interconnect

FIGURE 3-147A EFS 40/EFS 50 EADI/EHSI KFC 200 Flight Control Interconnect

FIGURE 3-148 EFS 40/EFS 4” 50 KFC 250 Flight Control Interconnect (3 Tube Single)

FIGURE 3-148 EFS 40/EFS 50 4” KFC 250 Flight Control Interconnect (3 Tube Single)

FIGURE 3-148A EFS 40/EFS 50 4” KFC 250 Flight Control Interconnect (5 Tube Single)

FIGURE 3-148A EFS 40/EFS 50 4” KFC 250 Flight Control Interconnect (5 Tube Single)

FIGURE 3-149 EFS 40/EFS 50 KFC 325 Flight Control Interconnect






FIGURE 3-150 EFS 40/EFS 50 KFC 400 Flight Control Interconnect (4 Tube SIngle)
(Dwg No 155-01601-0057, Rev 1)

FIGURE 3-151 EFS 40/EFS 50 KFC 400 Flight Control Interconnect (4 Tube Dual)
(Dwg No 155-01601-0058, Rev 1)

FIGURE 3-152 EFS 40/EFS 50 KFC 400 Flight Control Interconnect (5 Tube Single)
(Dwg No 155-01601-0029, Rev 1)

FIGURE 3-153 EFS 40/EFS 50 KFC 400 Flight Control Interconnect (5 Tube Dual)
(Dwg No 155-01601-0056, Rev 1)

FIGURE 3-154 EFS 40/EFS 50 KA 163A Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0049, Rev 0)

FIGURE 3-154A EFS 40/EFS 50 KFC 500 Flight Control Interconnect (4 Tube Single)
SHEET 1 of 2 (Dwg No 155-01601-0069, Rev -, Sht 1)

FIGURE 3-154A EFS 40/EFS 50 KFC 500 Flight Control Interconnect (4 Tube Single)

FIGURE 3-154B EFS 40/EFS 50 KFC 500 Flight Control Interconnect (5 Tube Single)

FIGURE 3-154B EFS 40/EFS 50 KFC 500 Flight Control Interconnect (5 Tube Single)

Honeywell International Inc.
23500 West 105th Street
Olathe, Kansas 66061-8425
U.S.A.
CAGE: 22373
Telephone: (800) 601-3099 (Toll-Free U.S.A./Canada)
Telephone: (602) 365-3099 (International Direct)
Telephone: 00-800-601-30999 (EMEA Toll-Free)
Telephone: 420-234-625-500 (EMEA Direct)
Web site: http://portal.honeywell.com/wps/portal/aero
Bendix/King
System Installation Manual
Volume II - System Planning (Cont), Post Installation
Checks, Certification, Operation, and
Appendixes A, B, and C
EFS 40/EFS 50 Electronic Flight

Instrument System
This document contains technical data and is subject to U.S. export regulations. These commodities,
technology, or software were exported from the United States in accordance with the export administration
regulations. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited.
ECCN: 7E994, NLR Eligible.
Page T-1
Publication Number 006-00698-0007, Revision 9 Initial 1 Apr 1992
Revised 19 Oct 2010
EFS 40/EFS 50
Honeywell – Confidential
THIS COPYRIGHTED WORK AND ALL INFORMATION ARE THE PROPERTY OF HONEYWELL
INTERNATIONAL INC., CONTAIN TRADE SECRETS AND MAY NOT, IN WHOLE OR IN PART, BE USED,
DUPLICATED, OR DISCLOSED FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT PRIOR WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
HONEYWELL INTERNATIONAL INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
Honeywell Materials License Agreement

The documents and information contained herein ("the Materials") are the proprietary data of Honeywell
International Inc. and Honeywell Intellectual Properties Inc. (collectively "Honeywell"). These Materials are
provided for the exclusive use of Honeywell Service Centers; Honeywell-authorized repair facilities; operators
of Honeywell aerospace products subject to an applicable product support agreement, their wholly
owned-subsidiaries or a formally designated third party service provider; and direct recipients of Materials from
Honeywell's Aerospace Technical Publication Distribution. The terms and conditions of this License
Agreement govern your use of these Materials, except to the extent that any terms and conditions of another
applicable agreement with Honeywell regarding the operation, maintenance, or repair of Honeywell aerospace
products conflict with the terms and conditions of this License Agreement, in which case the terms and
conditions of the other agreement will govern. However, this License Agreement will govern in the event of a
conflict between its terms and conditions and those of a purchase order or acknowledgement.
1. License Grant - If you are a party to an applicable product support agreement, a Honeywell Service Center
agreement, or an authorized repair facility agreement, Honeywell hereby grants you a limited, non-exclusive
license to use these Materials to operate, maintain, or repair Honeywell aerospace products only in
accordance with that agreement.
If you are a direct recipient of these Materials from Honeywell’s Aerospace Technical Publication Distribution
and are not a party to an agreement related to the operation, maintenance or repair of Honeywell aerospace
products, Honeywell hereby grants you a limited, non-exclusive license to use these Materials to maintain or
repair the subject Honeywell aerospace products only at the facility to which these Materials have been
shipped ("the Licensed Facility"). Transfer of the Materials to another facility owned by you is permitted only if
the original Licensed Facility retains no copies of the Materials and you provide prior written notice to
Honeywell.
2. Rights In Materials - Honeywell retains all rights in these Materials and in any copies thereof that are not
expressly granted to you, including all rights in patents, copyrights, trademarks, and trade secrets. No license
to use any Honeywell trademarks or patents is granted under this License Agreement.
3. Confidentiality - You acknowledge that these Materials contain information that is confidential and
proprietary to Honeywell. You agree to take all reasonable efforts to maintain the confidentiality of these
Materials.
4. Assignment And Transfer - This License Agreement may be assigned to a formally designated service
designee or transferred to a subsequent owner or operator of an aircraft containing the subject Honeywell
aerospace products. However, the recipient of any such assignment or transfer must assume all of your
obligations under this License Agreement. No assignment or transfer shall relieve any party of any obligation
that such party then has hereunder.
5. Copies of Materials - Unless you have the express written permission of Honeywell, you may not make or
permit making of copies of the Materials. Notwithstanding the foregoing, you may make copies of only portions
of the Material for your internal use. You agree to return the Materials and any copies thereof to Honeywell
upon the request of Honeywell.
Page T-2
19 Oct 2010
EFS 40/EFS 50
6. Term - This License Agreement is effective until terminated as set forth herein. This License Agreement will
terminate immediately, without notice from Honeywell, if you fail to comply with any provision of this License
Agreement or will terminate simultaneously with the termination or expiration of your applicable product
support agreement, authorized repair facility agreement, or your formal designation as a third party service
provider. Upon termination of this License Agreement, you will return these Materials to Honeywell without
retaining any copies and will have one of your authorized officers certify that all Materials have been returned
with no copies retained.
7. Remedies - Honeywell reserves the right to pursue all available remedies and damages resulting from a
breach of this License Agreement.
8. Limitation of Liability - Honeywell does not make any representation regarding the use or sufficiency of the
Materials. THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, EXPRESS, IMPLIED
OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, (i) WARRANTIES ARISING FROM COURSE OF
PERFORMANCE, DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE, WHICH ARE HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED, OR
(ii) WARRANTIES AGAINST INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS OF THIRD
PARTIES, EVEN IF HONEYWELL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF ANY SUCH INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT
WILL HONEYWELL BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,
SPECIAL DAMAGES, INDIRECT DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF REVENUES, OR LOSS OF
USE, EVEN IF INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS WILL APPLY REGARDLESS OF WHETHER
LIABILITY ARISES FROM BREACH OF CONTRACT, WARRANTY, TORT (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO NEGLIGENCE), BY OPERATION OF LAW, OR OTHERWISE.
9. Controlling Law - This License shall be governed and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of
New York without regard to the conflicts of laws provisions thereof. This license sets forth the entire
agreement between you and Honeywell and may only be modified by a writing duly executed by the duly
authorized representatives of the parties.
Safety Advisory
WARNING: BEFORE THE MATERIALS CALLED OUT IN THIS PUBLICATION ARE USED, KNOW THE
HANDLING, STORAGE AND DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER OR
SUPPLIER. FAILURE TO OBEY THE MANUFACTURERS’ OR SUPPLIERS’ RECOMMENDATIONS CAN
RESULT IN PERSONAL INJURY OR DISEASE.
This publication describes physical and chemical processes which can make it necessary to use chemicals,
solvents, paints, and other commercially available materials. The user of this publication must get the Material
Safety Data Sheets (OSHA Form 174 or equivalent) from the manufacturers or suppliers of the materials to be
used. The user must know the manufacturer/supplier data and obey the procedures, recommendations,
warnings and cautions set forth for the safe use, handling, storage, and disposal of the materials.
Warranty/Liability Advisory
WARNING: HONEYWELL ASSUMES NO RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY HONEYWELL EQUIPMENT WHICH
IS NOT MAINTAINED AND/OR REPAIRED IN ACCORDANCE WITH HONEYWELL’S PUBLISHED
INSTRUCTIONS AND/OR HONEYWELL’S FAA/SFAR 36 REPAIR AUTHORIZATION. NEITHER DOES
HONEYWELL ASSUME RESPONSIBILITY FOR SPECIAL TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT FABRICATED
BY COMPANIES OTHER THAN HONEYWELL.
WARNING: INCORRECTLY REPAIRED COMPONENTS CAN AFFECT AIRWORTHINESS OR DECREASE
THE LIFE OF THE COMPONENTS. INCORRECTLY FABRICATED SPECIAL TOOLING OR TEST
EQUIPMENT CAN RESULT IN DAMAGE TO THE PRODUCT COMPONENTS OR GIVE UNSATISFACTORY
RESULTS.
Page T-3
19 Oct 2010
EFS 40/EFS 50
Copyright - Notice
Copyright 1992, 2010 Honeywell International Inc. All rights reserved.
Honeywell is a registered trademark of Honeywell International Inc.
All other marks are owned by their respective companies.
Page T-4
19 Oct 2010
EFS 40/EFS 50
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES - VOLUME II

Title 3-502 Nov/2000
T-1 19 Oct 2010 3-503 Nov/2000
T-2 19 Oct 2010 3-504 Nov/2000
T-3 19 Oct 2010 F 3-505 Nov/2000
T-4 19 Oct 2010 3-506 Blank
F 3-507 Nov/2000
List of Effective Pages - Volume II
3-508 Blank
LEP-1 19 Oct 2010
F 3-509 Nov/2000
LEP-2 19 Oct 2010
3-510 Blank
LEP-3 19 Oct 2010
F 3-511 Nov/2000
LEP-4 19 Oct 2010
3-512 Blank
LEP-5 19 Oct 2010
F 3-513 Nov/2000
LEP-6 19 Oct 2010
3-514 Blank
LEP-7 19 Oct 2010
F 3-515 Nov/2000
LEP-8 19 Oct 2010
3-516 Blank
LEP-9 19 Oct 2010
F 3-517 Nov/2000
LEP-10 19 Oct 2010
3-518 Blank
LEP-11 19 Oct 2010
F 3-519 Nov/2000
LEP-12 19 Oct 2010
3-520 Blank
LEP-13 19 Oct 2010
F 3-521 Nov/2000
LEP-14 19 Oct 2010
3-522 Blank
LEP-15 19 Oct 2010
F 3-523 Nov/2000
LEP-16 19 Oct 2010
3-524 Blank
LEP-17 19 Oct 2010
F 3-525 Nov/2000
LEP-18 19 Oct 2010
3-526 Blank
Section III F 3-527 Nov/2000
System Planning (Cont) 3-528 Blank
3-491 Nov/2000 F 3-529 Nov/2000
3-492 Nov/2000 3-530 Blank
3-493 Nov/2000 F 3-531 Nov/2000
3-494 Nov/2000 3-532 Blank
3-495 Nov/2000 3-533 Nov/2000
3-496 Nov/2000 3-534 Nov/2000
3-497 Nov/2000 3-535 Nov/2000
3-498 Nov/2000 3-536 Nov/2000
3-499 Nov/2000 F 3-537 Nov/2000
3-500 Nov/2000 3-538 Blank
3-501 Nov/2000 3-539 Nov/2000


EFS 40/EFS 50

3-540 Nov/2000 F 3-579 Nov/2000
3-541 Nov/2000 3-580 Blank
3-542 Nov/2000 F 3-581 Nov/2000
3-543 Nov/2000 3-582 Blank
3-544 Nov/2000 F 3-583 Nov/2000
3-545 Nov/2000 3-584 Blank
3-546 Nov/2000 F 3-585 Nov/2000
3-547 Nov/2000 3-586 Blank
3-548 Nov/2000 F 3-587 Nov/2000
F 3-549 Nov/2000 3-588 Blank
3-550 Blank F 3-589 Nov/2000
F 3-551 Nov/2000 3-590 Blank
3-552 Blank F 3-591 Nov/2000
F 3-553 Nov/2000 3-592 Blank
3-554 Blank F 3-593 Nov/2000
F 3-555 Nov/2000 3-594 Blank
3-556 Blank F 3-595 Nov/2000
3-557 Nov/2000 3-596 Blank
3-558 Nov/2000 F 3-597 Nov/2000
3-559 Nov/2000 3-598 Blank
3-560 Nov/2000 F 3-599 Nov/2000
3-561 Nov/2000 3-600 Blank
3-562 Nov/2000 F 3-601 Nov/2000
3-563 Nov/2000 3-602 Blank
3-564 Nov/2000 F 3-603 Nov/2000
3-565 Nov/2000 3-604 Blank
3-566 Nov/2000 F 3-605 Nov/2000
F 3-567 Nov/2000 3-606 Blank
3-568 Blank F 3-607 Nov/2000
3-569 Nov/2000 3-608 Blank
3-570 Nov/2000 F 3-609 Nov/2000
F 3-571 Nov/2000 3-610 Blank
3-572 Blank F 3-611 Nov/2000
F 3-573 Nov/2000 3-612 Blank
3-574 Blank F 3-613 Nov/2000
F 3-575 Nov/2000 3-614 Blank
3-576 Blank F 3-615 Nov/2000
F 3-577 Nov/2000 3-616 Blank
3-578 Blank F 3-617 Nov/2000


EFS 40/EFS 50

3-618 Blank 3-656 Nov/2000
F 3-619 Nov/2000 3-657 Nov/2000
3-620 Blank 3-658 Nov/2000
F 3-621 Nov/2000 3-659 Nov/2000
3-622 Blank 3-660 Nov/2000
F 3-623 Nov/2000 3-661 Nov/2000
3-624 Blank 3-662 Nov/2000
F 3-625 Nov/2000 3-663 Nov/2000
3-626 Blank 3-664 Nov/2000
F 3-627 Nov/2000 3-665 Nov/2000
3-628 Blank 3-666 Nov/2000
F 3-629 Nov/2000 3-667 Nov/2000
3-630 Blank 3-668 Nov/2000
F 3-631 Nov/2000 3-669 Nov/2000
3-632 Blank 3-670 Nov/2000
F 3-633 Nov/2000 3-671 Nov/2000
3-634 Blank 3-672 Nov/2000
F 3-635 Nov/2000 3-673 Nov/2000
3-636 Blank 3-674 Nov/2000
F 3-637 Nov/2000 3-675 Nov/2000
3-638 Blank 3-676 Nov/2000
3-639 Nov/2000 3-677 Nov/2000
3-640 Nov/2000 3-678 Nov/2000
3-641 Nov/2000 3-679 Nov/2000
3-642 Nov/2000 3-680 Nov/2000
3-643 Nov/2000 3-681 Nov/2000
3-644 Nov/2000 3-682 Nov/2000
3-645 Nov/2000 3-683 Nov/2000
3-646 Nov/2000 3-684 Nov/2000
3-647 Nov/2000 3-685 Nov/2000
3-648 Nov/2000 3-686 Nov/2000
3-649 Nov/2000 3-687 Nov/2000
3-650 Nov/2000 3-688 Nov/2000
3-651 Nov/2000 3-689 Nov/2000
3-652 Nov/2000 3-690 Nov/2000
3-653 Nov/2000 3-691 Nov/2000
3-654 Nov/2000 3-692 Nov/2000
3-655 Nov/2000 3-693 Nov/2000


EFS 40/EFS 50

3-694 Nov/2000 3-733 Nov/2000
3-695 Nov/2000 3-734 Nov/2000
3-696 Nov/2000 3-735 Nov/2000
3-697 Nov/2000 3-736 Nov/2000
3-698 Nov/2000 3-737 Nov/2000
3-699 Nov/2000 3-738 Nov/2000
3-700 Nov/2000 3-739 Nov/2000
3-701 Nov/2000 3-740 Nov/2000
3-702 Nov/2000 3-741 Nov/2000
3-703 Nov/2000 3-742 Nov/2000
3-704 Nov/2000 3-743 Nov/2000
3-705 Nov/2000 3-744 Nov/2000
3-706 Nov/2000 3-745 Nov/2000
3-707 Nov/2000 3-746 Nov/2000
3-708 Nov/2000 3-747 Nov/2000
3-709 Nov/2000 3-748 Nov/2000
3-710 Nov/2000 3-749 Nov/2000
3-711 Nov/2000 3-750 Nov/2000
3-712 Nov/2000 3-751 Nov/2000
3-713 Nov/2000 3-752 Nov/2000
3-714 Nov/2000 3-753 Nov/2000
3-715 Nov/2000 3-754 Nov/2000
3-716 Nov/2000 3-755 Nov/2000
3-717 Nov/2000 3-756 Nov/2000
3-718 Nov/2000 3-757 Nov/2000
3-719 Nov/2000 3-758 Nov/2000
3-720 Nov/2000 3-759 Nov/2000
3-721 Nov/2000 3-760 Nov/2000
3-722 Nov/2000 3-761 Nov/2000
3-723 Nov/2000 3-762 Nov/2000
3-724 Nov/2000 3-763 Nov/2000
3-725 Nov/2000 3-764 Nov/2000
3-726 Nov/2000 3-765 Nov/2000
3-727 Nov/2000 3-766 Nov/2000
3-728 Nov/2000 3-767 Nov/2000
3-729 Nov/2000 3-768 Nov/2000
3-730 Nov/2000 3-769 Nov/2000
3-731 Nov/2000 3-770 Nov/2000
3-732 Nov/2000 3-771 Nov/2000


EFS 40/EFS 50

3-772 Nov/2000 3-810 Nov/2000
3-773 Nov/2000 3-811 Nov/2000
3-774 Nov/2000 3-812 Nov/2000
3-775 Nov/2000 3-813 Nov/2000
3-776 Nov/2000 3-814 Nov/2000
3-777 Nov/2000 3-815 Nov/2000
3-778 Nov/2000 3-816 Nov/2000
3-779 Nov/2000 3-817 Nov/2000
3-780 Nov/2000 3-818 Nov/2000
3-781 Nov/2000 3-819 Nov/2000
3-782 Nov/2000 3-820 Nov/2000
3-783 Nov/2000 3-821 Nov/2000
3-784 Nov/2000 3-822 Nov/2000
3-785 Nov/2000 3-823 Nov/2000
3-786 Nov/2000 3-824 Nov/2000
3-787 Nov/2000 3-825 Nov/2000
3-788 Nov/2000 3-826 Nov/2000
3-789 Nov/2000 3-827 Nov/2000
3-790 Nov/2000 3-828 Nov/2000
3-791 Nov/2000 3-829 Nov/2000
3-792 Nov/2000 3-830 Nov/2000
3-793 Nov/2000 3-831 Nov/2000
3-794 Nov/2000 3-832 Nov/2000
3-795 Nov/2000 3-833 Nov/2000
3-796 Nov/2000 3-834 Nov/2000
3-797 Nov/2000 3-835 Nov/2000
3-798 Nov/2000 3-836 Nov/2000
3-799 Nov/2000 3-837 Nov/2000
3-800 Nov/2000 3-838 Nov/2000
3-801 Nov/2000 3-839 Nov/2000
3-802 Nov/2000 3-840 Nov/2000
3-803 Nov/2000 3-841 Nov/2000
3-804 Nov/2000 3-842 Nov/2000
3-805 Nov/2000 3-843 Nov/2000
3-806 Nov/2000 3-844 Nov/2000
3-807 Nov/2000 3-845 Nov/2000
3-808 Nov/2000 3-846 Nov/2000
3-809 Nov/2000 3-847 Nov/2000


EFS 40/EFS 50

3-848 Nov/2000 4-21 Nov/2000
3-849 Nov/2000 4-22 Nov/2000
3-850 Nov/2000 4-23 Nov/2000
3-851 Nov/2000 4-24 Nov/2000
3-852 Nov/2000 4-25 Nov/2000
3-853 Nov/2000 4-26 Nov/2000
3-854 Nov/2000 4-27 Nov/2000
3-855 Nov/2000 4-28 Nov/2000
3-856 Nov/2000 4-29 Nov/2000
3-857 Nov/2000 4-30 Nov/2000
3-858 Nov/2000 4-31 Nov/2000
3-859 Nov/2000 4-32 Nov/2000
3-860 Nov/2000 4-33 Nov/2000
3-861 Nov/2000 4-34 Nov/2000
3-862 Nov/2000 4-35 Nov/2000
3-863 Nov/2000 4-36 Nov/2000
3-864 Nov/2000 4-37 Nov/2000
Section IV 4-38 Nov/2000
Post Installation Checks 4-39 Nov/2000
4-1 * 19 Oct 2010 4-40 Nov/2000
4-2 Nov/2000 4-41 Nov/2000
4-3 Nov/2000 4-42 Nov/2000
4-4 Nov/2000 4-43 Nov/2000
4-5 Nov/2000 4-44 Nov/2000
4-6 Nov/2000 4-45 Nov/2000
4-7 Nov/2000 4-46 Nov/2000
4-8 Nov/2000 4-47 Nov/2000
4-9 Nov/2000 4-48 Nov/2000
4-10 Nov/2000 4-49 Nov/2000
4-11 Nov/2000 4-50 Nov/2000
4-12 Nov/2000 4-51 Nov/2000
4-13 Nov/2000 4-52 Nov/2000
4-14 Nov/2000 4-53 Nov/2000
4-15 Nov/2000 4-54 Nov/2000
4-16 Nov/2000 4-55 Nov/2000
4-17 Nov/2000 4-56 Nov/2000
4-18 Nov/2000 4-57 Nov/2000
4-19 Nov/2000 4-58 Nov/2000
4-20 Nov/2000 4-59 Nov/2000


EFS 40/EFS 50

4-60 Nov/2000 4-98 Nov/2000
4-61 Nov/2000 4-99 Nov/2000
4-62 Nov/2000 4-100 Nov/2000
4-63 Nov/2000 4-101 Nov/2000
4-64 Nov/2000 4-102 Nov/2000
4-65 Nov/2000 4-103 Nov/2000
4-66 Nov/2000 4-104 Nov/2000
4-67 Nov/2000 4-105 Nov/2000
4-68 Nov/2000 4-106 Nov/2000
4-69 Nov/2000 4-107 Nov/2000
4-70 Nov/2000 4-108 Nov/2000
4-71 Nov/2000 4-109 Nov/2000
4-72 Nov/2000 4-110 Nov/2000
4-73 Nov/2000 4-111 Nov/2000
4-74 Nov/2000 4-112 Nov/2000
4-75 Nov/2000 4-113 Nov/2000
4-76 Nov/2000 4-114 Nov/2000
4-77 Nov/2000 4-115 Nov/2000
4-78 Nov/2000 4-116 Nov/2000
4-79 Nov/2000 4-117 Nov/2000
4-80 Nov/2000 4-118 Nov/2000
4-81 Nov/2000 4-119 Nov/2000
4-82 Nov/2000 4-120 Nov/2000
4-83 Nov/2000 4-121 Nov/2000
4-84 Nov/2000 4-122 Nov/2000
4-85 Nov/2000 4-123 Nov/2000
4-86 Nov/2000 4-124 Nov/2000
4-87 Nov/2000 4-125 Nov/2000
4-88 Nov/2000 4-126 Nov/2000
4-89 Nov/2000 4-127 Nov/2000
4-90 Nov/2000 4-128 Nov/2000
4-91 Nov/2000 4-129 Nov/2000
4-92 Nov/2000 4-130 Nov/2000
4-93 Nov/2000 4-131 Nov/2000
4-94 Nov/2000 4-132 Nov/2000
4-95 Nov/2000 4-133 Nov/2000
4-96 Nov/2000 4-134 Nov/2000
4-97 Nov/2000 4-135 Nov/2000


EFS 40/EFS 50

4-136 Nov/2000 4-175 Nov/2000
4-137 Nov/2000 4-176 Nov/2000
4-138 Nov/2000 4-177 Nov/2000
4-139 Nov/2000 4-178 Nov/2000
4-140 Nov/2000 4-179 Nov/2000
4-141 Nov/2000 4-180 Nov/2000
4-142 Nov/2000 4-181 Nov/2000
4-143 Nov/2000 4-182 Nov/2000
4-144 Nov/2000 4-183 Nov/2000
4-145 Nov/2000 4-184 Nov/2000
4-146 Nov/2000 4-185 Nov/2000
4-147 Nov/2000 4-186 Nov/2000
4-148 Nov/2000 4-187 Nov/2000
4-149 Nov/2000 4-188 Nov/2000
4-150 Nov/2000 4-189 Nov/2000
4-151 Nov/2000 4-190 Nov/2000
4-152 Nov/2000 4-191 Nov/2000
4-153 Nov/2000 4-192 Nov/2000
4-154 Nov/2000 4-193 Nov/2000
4-155 Nov/2000 4-194 Nov/2000
4-156 Nov/2000 4-195 Nov/2000
4-157 Nov/2000 4-196 Nov/2000
4-158 Nov/2000 4-197 Nov/2000
4-159 Nov/2000 4-198 Nov/2000
4-160 Nov/2000 4-199 Nov/2000
4-161 Nov/2000 4-200 Nov/2000
4-162 Nov/2000 4-201 Nov/2000
4-163 Nov/2000 4-202 Nov/2000
4-164 Nov/2000 4-203 Nov/2000
4-165 Nov/2000 4-204 Nov/2000
4-166 Nov/2000 4-205 Nov/2000
4-167 Nov/2000 4-206 Nov/2000
4-168 Nov/2000 4-207 Nov/2000
4-169 Nov/2000 4-208 Nov/2000
4-170 Nov/2000 4-209 Nov/2000
4-171 Nov/2000 4-210 Nov/2000
4-172 Nov/2000 4-211 Nov/2000
4-173 Nov/2000 4-212 Nov/2000
4-174 Nov/2000 4-213 Nov/2000


EFS 40/EFS 50

4-214 Nov/2000 4-252 Nov/2000
4-215 Nov/2000 4-253 Nov/2000
4-216 Nov/2000 4-254 Nov/2000
4-217 Nov/2000 4-255 Nov/2000
4-218 Nov/2000 4-256 Nov/2000
4-219 Nov/2000 4-257 Nov/2000
4-220 Nov/2000 4-258 Nov/2000
4-221 Nov/2000 4-259 Nov/2000
4-222 Nov/2000 4-260 Nov/2000
4-223 Nov/2000 4-261 Nov/2000
4-224 Nov/2000 4-262 Nov/2000
4-225 Nov/2000 4-263 Nov/2000
4-226 Nov/2000 4-264 Nov/2000
4-227 Nov/2000 4-265 Nov/2000
4-228 Nov/2000 4-266 Nov/2000
4-229 Nov/2000 4-267 Nov/2000
4-230 Nov/2000 4-268 Nov/2000
4-231 Nov/2000 4-269 Nov/2000
4-232 Nov/2000 4-270 Nov/2000
4-233 Nov/2000 4-271 Nov/2000
4-234 Nov/2000 4-272 Nov/2000
4-235 Nov/2000 4-273 Nov/2000
4-236 Nov/2000 4-274 Nov/2000
4-237 Nov/2000 4-275 Nov/2000
4-238 Nov/2000 4-276 Nov/2000
4-239 Nov/2000 4-277 Nov/2000
4-240 Nov/2000 4-278 Nov/2000
4-241 Nov/2000 4-279 Nov/2000
4-242 Nov/2000 4-280 Nov/2000
4-243 Nov/2000 4-281 Nov/2000
4-244 Nov/2000 4-282 Nov/2000
4-245 Nov/2000 4-283 Nov/2000
4-246 Nov/2000 4-284 Nov/2000
4-247 Nov/2000 4-285 Nov/2000
4-248 Nov/2000 4-286 Nov/2000
4-249 Nov/2000 4-287 Nov/2000
4-250 Nov/2000 4-288 Nov/2000
4-251 Nov/2000 4-289 Nov/2000


EFS 40/EFS 50

4-290 Nov/2000 4-329 Nov/2000
4-291 Nov/2000 4-330 Nov/2000
4-292 Nov/2000 4-331 Nov/2000
4-293 Nov/2000 4-332 Nov/2000
4-294 Nov/2000 4-333 Nov/2000
4-295 Nov/2000 4-334 Nov/2000
4-296 Nov/2000 4-335 Nov/2000
4-297 Nov/2000 4-336 Nov/2000
4-298 Nov/2000 4-337 Nov/2000
4-299 Nov/2000 4-338 Nov/2000
4-300 Nov/2000 4-339 Nov/2000
4-301 Nov/2000 4-340 Nov/2000
4-302 Nov/2000 4-341 Nov/2000
4-303 Nov/2000 4-342 Nov/2000
4-304 Nov/2000 4-343 Nov/2000
4-305 Nov/2000 4-344 Nov/2000
4-306 Nov/2000 4-345 Nov/2000
4-307 Nov/2000 4-346 Nov/2000
4-308 Nov/2000 4-347 Nov/2000
4-309 Nov/2000 4-348 Nov/2000
4-310 Nov/2000 4-349 Nov/2000
4-311 Nov/2000 4-350 Nov/2000
4-312 Nov/2000 4-351 Nov/2000
4-313 Nov/2000 4-352 Nov/2000
4-314 Nov/2000 4-353 Nov/2000
4-315 Nov/2000 4-354 Nov/2000
4-316 Nov/2000 4-355 Nov/2000
4-317 Nov/2000 4-356 Nov/2000
4-318 Nov/2000 4-357 Nov/2000
4-319 Nov/2000 4-358 Nov/2000
4-320 Nov/2000 4-359 Nov/2000
4-321 Nov/2000 4-360 Nov/2000
4-322 Nov/2000 4-361 Nov/2000
4-323 Nov/2000 4-362 Nov/2000
4-324 Nov/2000 4-363 Nov/2000
4-325 Nov/2000 4-364 Nov/2000
4-326 Nov/2000 4-365 Nov/2000
4-327 Nov/2000 4-366 Nov/2000
4-328 Nov/2000 4-367 Nov/2000


EFS 40/EFS 50

4-368 Nov/2000 4-406 Nov/2000
4-369 Nov/2000 4-407 Nov/2000
4-370 Nov/2000 4-408 Nov/2000
4-371 Nov/2000 4-409 Nov/2000
4-372 Nov/2000 4-410 Nov/2000
4-373 Nov/2000 4-411 Nov/2000
4-374 Nov/2000 4-412 Nov/2000
4-375 Nov/2000 4-413 Nov/2000
4-376 Nov/2000 4-414 Nov/2000
4-377 Nov/2000 4-415 Nov/2000
4-378 Nov/2000 4-416 Nov/2000
4-379 Nov/2000 4-417 Nov/2000
4-380 Nov/2000 4-418 Nov/2000
4-381 Nov/2000 4-419 Nov/2000
4-382 Nov/2000 4-420 Nov/2000
4-383 Nov/2000 4-421 Nov/2000
4-384 Nov/2000 4-422 Nov/2000
4-385 Nov/2000 4-423 Nov/2000
4-386 Nov/2000 4-424 Nov/2000
4-387 Nov/2000 4-425 Nov/2000
4-388 Nov/2000 4-426 Nov/2000
4-389 Nov/2000 4-427 Nov/2000
4-390 Nov/2000 4-428 Nov/2000
4-391 Nov/2000 4-429 Nov/2000
4-392 Nov/2000 4-430 Nov/2000
4-393 Nov/2000 4-431 Nov/2000
4-394 Nov/2000 4-432 Nov/2000
4-395 Nov/2000 4-433 Nov/2000
4-396 Nov/2000 4-434 Nov/2000
4-397 Nov/2000 4-435 Nov/2000
4-398 Nov/2000 4-436 Nov/2000
4-399 Nov/2000 4-437 Nov/2000
4-400 Nov/2000 4-438 Nov/2000
4-401 Nov/2000 4-439 Nov/2000
4-402 Nov/2000 4-440 Nov/2000
4-403 Nov/2000 4-441 Nov/2000
4-404 Nov/2000 4-442 Nov/2000
4-405 Nov/2000 4-443 Nov/2000


EFS 40/EFS 50

4-444 Nov/2000 4-483 Nov/2000
4-445 * 19 Oct 2010 4-484 Nov/2000
4-446 Nov/2000 4-485 Nov/2000
4-447 Nov/2000 4-486 Nov/2000
4-448 Nov/2000 4-487 Nov/2000
4-449 Nov/2000 4-488 Nov/2000
4-450 Nov/2000 4-489 Nov/2000
4-451 Nov/2000 4-490 Nov/2000
4-452 Nov/2000 4-491 Nov/2000
4-453 Nov/2000 4-492 Nov/2000
4-454 Nov/2000 4-493 Nov/2000
4-455 Nov/2000 4-494 Nov/2000
4-456 Nov/2000 4-495 Nov/2000
4-457 Nov/2000 4-496 Nov/2000
4-458 Nov/2000 4-497 Nov/2000
4-459 Nov/2000 4-498 Nov/2000
4-460 Nov/2000 4-499 Nov/2000
4-461 Nov/2000 4-500 * 19 Oct 2010
4-462 Nov/2000 4-501 Nov/2000
4-463 Nov/2000 4-502 Nov/2000
4-464 Nov/2000 4-503 Nov/2000
4-465 Nov/2000 4-504 Nov/2000
4-466 Nov/2000 4-505 Nov/2000
4-467 Nov/2000 4-506 Nov/2000
4-468 Nov/2000 4-507 Nov/2000
4-469 Nov/2000 4-508 Nov/2000
4-470 Nov/2000 4-509 Nov/2000
4-471 Nov/2000 4-510 Nov/2000
4-472 Nov/2000 4-511 Nov/2000
4-473 Nov/2000 4-512 Nov/2000
4-474 Nov/2000 4-513 Nov/2000
4-475 Nov/2000 4-514 Nov/2000
4-476 Nov/2000 4-515 Nov/2000
4-477 Nov/2000 4-516 Nov/2000
4-478 Nov/2000 4-517 Nov/2000
4-479 Nov/2000 4-518 Nov/2000
4-480 Nov/2000 4-519 Nov/2000
4-481 Nov/2000 4-520 Nov/2000
4-482 Nov/2000 4-521 Nov/2000


EFS 40/EFS 50

4-522 Nov/2000 4-544.16 May/2008
4-523 Nov/2000 4-544.17 May/2008
4-524 Nov/2000 4-544.18 * 19 Oct 2010
4-525 Nov/2000 4-544.19 * 19 Oct 2010
4-526 Nov/2000 4-544.20 May/2008
4-527 Nov/2000 4-544.21 May/2008
4-528 Nov/2000 4-544.22 May/2008
4-529 Nov/2000 4-544.23 May/2008
4-530 Nov/2000 4-544.24 May/2008
4-531 Nov/2000 4-544.25 May/2008
4-532 Nov/2000 4-544.26 May/2008
4-533 Nov/2000 4-544.27 May/2008
4-534 Nov/2000 4-544.28 May/2008
4-535 Nov/2000 4-544.29 May/2008
4-536 Nov/2000 4-544.30 May/2008
4-537 Nov/2000 4-544.31 May/2008
4-538 Nov/2000 4-544.32 May/2008
4-539 Nov/2000 4-544.33 May/2008
4-540 Nov/2000 4-544.34 May/2008
4-541 Nov/2000 4-544.35 May/2008
4-542 Nov/2000 4-544.36 May/2008
4-543 Nov/2000 4-544.37 May/2008
4-544 Nov/2000 4-544.38 May/2008
4-544.1 May/2008 4-544.39 May/2008
4-544.2 May/2008 4-544.40 May/2008
4-544.3 May/2008 4-544.41 May/2008
4-544.4 * 19 Oct 2010 4-544.42 May/2008
4-544.5 May/2008 4-544.43 May/2008
4-544.6 May/2008 4-544.44 May/2008
4-544.7 May/2008 4-544.45 May/2008
4-544.8 May/2008 4-544.46 May/2008
4-544.9 May/2008 4-544.47 May/2008
4-544.10 May/2008 4-544.48 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.11 May/2008 4-544.49 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.12 * 19 Oct 2010 4-544.50 May/2008
4-544.13 May/2008 4-544.51 May/2008
4-544.14 May/2008 4-544.52 May/2008
4-544.15 May/2008 4-544.53 May/2008


EFS 40/EFS 50

4-544.54 May/2008 4-544.93 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.55 May/2008 4-544.94 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.56 May/2008 4-544.95 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.57 May/2008 4-544.96 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.58 May/2008 4-544.97 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.59 May/2008 4-544.98 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.60 May/2008 4-544.99 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.61 May/2008 4-544.100 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.62 May/2008 4-544.101 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.63 May/2008 4-544.102 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.64 May/2008 4-544.103 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.65 * 19 Oct 2010 4-544.104 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.66 * 19 Oct 2010 4-544.105 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.67 * 19 Oct 2010 4-544.106 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.68 * 19 Oct 2010 4-544.107 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.69 * 19 Oct 2010 4-544.108 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.70 * 19 Oct 2010 4-544.109 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.71 * 19 Oct 2010 4-544.110 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.72 * 19 Oct 2010 4-544.111 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.73 * 19 Oct 2010 4-544.112 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.74 * 19 Oct 2010 4-544.113 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.75 * 19 Oct 2010 4-544.114 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.76 * 19 Oct 2010 4-544.115 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.77 * 19 Oct 2010 4-544.116 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.78 * 19 Oct 2010 4-544.117 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.79 * 19 Oct 2010 4-544.118 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.80 * 19 Oct 2010 4-544.119 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.81 * 19 Oct 2010 4-544.120 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.82 * 19 Oct 2010 4-544.121 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.83 * 19 Oct 2010 4-544.122 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.84 * 19 Oct 2010 4-544.123 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.85 * 19 Oct 2010 4-544.124 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.86 * 19 Oct 2010 4-544.125 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.87 * 19 Oct 2010 4-544.126 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.88 * 19 Oct 2010 4-544.127 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.89 * 19 Oct 2010 4-544.128 * 19 Oct 2010
4-544.80 * 19 Oct 2010 4-545 Nov/2000
4-544.91 * 19 Oct 2010 4-546 Nov/2000
4-544.92 * 19 Oct 2010 4-547 Nov/2000


EFS 40/EFS 50

4-548 Nov/2000 4-586 Nov/2000
4-549 Nov/2000 4-587 Nov/2000
4-550 Nov/2000 4-588 Nov/2000
4-551 Nov/2000 4-589 Nov/2000
4-552 Nov/2000 4-590 Nov/2000
4-553 Nov/2000 4-591 Nov/2000
4-554 Nov/2000 4-592 Nov/2000
4-555 Nov/2000 4-593 Nov/2000
4-556 Nov/2000 4-594 Nov/2000
4-557 Nov/2000 4-595 Nov/2000
4-558 Nov/2000 4-596 Nov/2000
4-559 Nov/2000 4-597 Nov/2000
4-560 Nov/2000 4-598 Nov/2000
4-561 Nov/2000 4-599 Nov/2000
4-562 Nov/2000 4-600 Nov/2000
4-563 Nov/2000 4-601 Nov/2000
4-564 Nov/2000 4-602 Nov/2000
4-565 Nov/2000 4-603 Nov/2000
4-566 Nov/2000 4-604 Nov/2000
4-567 Nov/2000 4-605 Nov/2000
4-568 Nov/2000 4-606 Nov/2000
4-569 Nov/2000 4-607 Nov/2000
4-570 Nov/2000 4-608 Nov/2000
4-571 Nov/2000 4-609 Nov/2000
4-572 Nov/2000 4-610 Nov/2000
4-573 Nov/2000 4-611 Nov/2000
4-574 Nov/2000 4-612 Nov/2000
4-575 Nov/2000 4-613 Nov/2000
4-576 Nov/2000 4-614 Nov/2000
4-577 Nov/2000 4-615 Nov/2000
4-578 Nov/2000 4-616 Nov/2000
4-579 Nov/2000 4-617 Nov/2000
4-580 Nov/2000 4-618 Nov/2000
4-581 Nov/2000 4-619 Nov/2000
4-582 Nov/2000 4-620 Nov/2000
4-583 Nov/2000 4-621 Nov/2000
4-584 Nov/2000 4-622 Nov/2000
4-585 Nov/2000 4-623 Nov/2000


EFS 40/EFS 50

4-624 Nov/2000 4-663 * 19 Oct 2010
4-625 Nov/2000 4-664 Nov/2000
4-626 Nov/2000 4-665 Nov/2000
4-627 Nov/2000 4-666 Nov/2000
4-628 Nov/2000 4-667 Nov/2000
4-629 Nov/2000 4-668 Nov/2000
4-630 Nov/2000 Section V
4-631 * 19 Oct 2010 Certification
4-632 Nov/2000 5-1 Nov/2000
4-633 Nov/2000 5-2 Nov/2000
4-634 Nov/2000 5-3 Nov/2000
4-635 Nov/2000 5-4 Nov/2000
4-636 Nov/2000 5-5 Nov/2000
4-637 Nov/2000 5-6 Nov/2000
4-638 Nov/2000 5-7 Nov/2000
4-639 Nov/2000 5-8 Nov/2000
4-640 Nov/2000 5-9 Nov/2000
4-641 Nov/2000 5-10 Nov/2000
4-642 Nov/2000 5-11 Nov/2000
4-643 Nov/2000 5-12 Nov/2000
4-644 Nov/2000 5-13 Nov/2000
4-645 Nov/2000 5-14 Nov/2000
4-646 Nov/2000 5-15 Nov/2000
4-647 Nov/2000 5-16 Nov/2000
4-648 Nov/2000 5-17 Nov/2000
4-649 Nov/2000 5-18 Nov/2000
4-650 Nov/2000
Section VI
4-651 Nov/2000 Operation
4-652 Nov/2000
6-1 * 19 Oct 2010
4-653 Nov/2000
6-2 Nov/2000
4-654 Nov/2000
4-655 Nov/2000 Appendix A
Environmental Qualification Forms
4-656 * 19 Oct 2010
4-657 Nov/2000 A-1 Nov/2000
4-658 Nov/2000 A-2 Nov/2000
4-659 Nov/2000 A-3 Nov/2000
4-660 Nov/2000 A-4 Nov/2000
4-661 Nov/2000 A-5 Nov/2000
4-662 Nov/2000 A-6 Nov/2000


EFS 40/EFS 50

A-7 Nov/2000 B-3 Nov/2000
A-8 Nov/2000 B-4 Nov/2000
A-9 Nov/2000 Appendix C
A-10 Nov/2000 Flight Manual Supplement (Generic Example)
A-11 Nov/2000 C-1 Nov/2000
A-12 Nov/2000 C-2 Nov/2000
A-13 Nov/2000 C-3 Nov/2000
A-14 Nov/2000 C-4 Nov/2000
A-15 Nov/2000 C-5 Nov/2000
A-16 Nov/2000 C-6 * 19 Oct 2010
A-17 Nov/2000 C-7 * 19 Oct 2010
A-18 Nov/2000 C-8 Nov/2000
A-19 Nov/2000 C-9 Nov/2000
A-20 Nov/2000 C-10 Nov/2000
A-21 Nov/2000 C-11 Nov/2000
A-22 Nov/2000 C-12 Nov/2000
A-23 * 19 Oct 2010 C-13 Nov/2000
A-24 * 19 Oct 2010 C-14 Nov/2000
A-25 Nov/2000 C-15 Nov/2000
A-26 Nov/2000 C-16 Nov/2000
A-27 Nov/2000 C-17 Nov/2000
A-28 Nov/2000 C-18 Nov/2000
A-29 Nov/2000
A-30 Nov/2000
A-31 Nov/2000
A-32 Nov/2000
A-33 Nov/2000
A-34 Nov/2000
A-35 Nov/2000
A-36 Nov/2000
A-37 Nov/2000
A-38 Nov/2000
A-39 Nov/2000
A-40 Nov/2000
Appendix B
Sample Attachment to FAA Form 337
B-1 Nov/2000
B-2 Nov/2000


EFS 40/EFS 50
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

CONTINUED FROM VOLUME I

THIS PAGE RESERVED

3.13 WEATHER DETECTION/ EGPWS/ CHECKLIST
3.13.1 WEATHER DETECTION/ EGPWS/ CHECKLIST APPLICABLE PART NUMBERS
3.13.1.A. Symbol Generators for Weather Radar, Lightning, and EGPWS Interface
The weather radar interface became operational with symbol generator software re-
lease 0201. To take advantage of improvements in VP fault and radar fault processing
and display and to allow dual tilt operation, software 0401 and above is recommended
for installations that include weather radar.
The RDR 1400 weather radar system interface became operational with symbol gen-
erator software 0401.
The vertical profile weather radar interface became operational with symbol generator
software 0501.
The lightning interface became operational with symbol generator software 0601.
The Enhanced Ground Proximity Warning System (EGPWS) interface became opera-
tional with symbol generator software 1401.
The following part numbers of the SG 464 and SG 465 will accept Weather Radar and
Lightning inputs:
SG 464 066-04020-
- 01XX - - - - - - - -
- 11XX - - - - - - - -
SG 465 066-04021-
- 01XX - - 04XX - - - - -
- 11XX - - 14XX - - - - -
The following part numbers of the SG 465 will accept EGPWS inputs:
SG 465 066-04021-
- 11XX - - 14XX - - - - -
3.13.1.B. Symbol Generators for Checklist Interface
The checklist interface became operational with symbol generator software release
0801.

The following part numbers of the SG 464 and SG 465 will accept Checklist inputs:
SG 464 066-04020-
- 01XX 02XX - - - - - - -
- 11XX 12XX - - - - - - -
SG 465 066-04021-
- 01XX 02XX - 04XX 05XX - - - -
- 11XX 12XX - 14XX 15XX - - - -
3.13.1.C. Radar Control Panels with Dual Tilt
The following part numbers of the CP 113F are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50:
CP 113F 071-01337-
0010 0011 - - - - - - - -
3.13.1.D. RDS 81/RDS 82/RDS 84 Radar Control Panels
The following part numbers of the CP 466A are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50:
CP 466A 071-01438-
- 01XX 02XX 03XX 04XX 05XX 06XX 07XX 08XX -
10XX 11XX 12XX - - - - - - -
3.13.1.E. RDS 86 Radar Control Panels
The following part numbers of the CP 466B are compatible with the EFS40/EFS 50:
CP 466B 071-01493-
- - - - - 05XX 06XX 07XX 08XX 09XX
10XX 11XX 12XX - - - - - - -
3.13.1.F. MFD Control Panels with Checklist interface
The following part numbers of the CP 469A provide Checklist outputs:
CP 469A 071-01511-
- 01XX 02XX - - - - - - -
3.13.2 WEATHER DETECTION/ EGPWS/ CHECKLIST FUNCTION

Only one weather radar source may be connected to the EFIS at one time. Only one lightning
source may be connected to the EFIS at one time. Only one EGPWS may be connected to the
EFIS at one time. A weather radar source and lightning source may be connected simultaneously
to the EFIS. EGPWS and weather radar may both be part of the same installation; however the
EFIS can only receive data from one source at a time (EGPWS or Wx). A relay must be installed
to switch between EGPWS and Wx. The pilot selects the weather for display on the EHSI and/or
the MFD display. Vertical profile weather radar and the weather only display format are only avail-
able on the MFD. Terrain (EGPWS) data is only available for display on the MFD. EFIS display
range is always controlled by the EFIS control panel or ED 461 bezel mounted range buttons. If
the installation includes a radar indicator, then an EFIS radar control panel can not be used and
the EFIS weather radar control functions of tilt gain and mode are determined by the radar indica-
tor. If the installation does not include a radar indicator, then an EFIS radar control panel must be
used to provide these control functions. Only a single EFIS radar control panel may be interfaced
to the EFS 40/EFS 50 with software versions 0801 and below. Software version 0901 allows mul-
tiple radar control panels to be used, if SDI matching is configured on the EFIS. In a dual EFIS
installation the pilot and copilot displays are updated on alternate sweeps of the radar. One is up-
dated during the left to right sweep and the other is updated during the right to left sweep. A dual
radar control panel (CP 113F) can be used to provide dual tilt control if desired.
If a radar indicator is not installed then an EFIS radar control panel must be installed to control the
radar. The CP 113F may be used with the RDS 86 radar and provides dual tilt capability. The CP
466A may be used with the RDS 81, RDS 82, RDS 84, and RDR 2000 radars and the CP 466B
may be used with the RDS 86 and RDR 2100 radars. Part number versions of the CP 466A and
CP 466B provide vertical profile and lightning detection controls.
Lightning information may be displayed by the EFS 40/EFS 50 in installations with or without a
weather radar installed. A radar control panel (RCP) is not required if a weather radar is not in-
stalled, since the EFS automatically displays lightning information when a weather format is se-
lected for display.
If lightning detection and weather radar are both included in the installation, and an RCP is not
included in the installation, then both weather radar and lightning information will be displayed at
the same time by the EFS. If an RCP is included in the installation, it must be a version with a
lightning selection button to allow lightning information to be displayed on the EFS 40/EFS 50.
CP 466A and CP 466B with software version 02 (last two digits of P/N are 02) can be used as
direct replacements for the equivalent part number RCP with 01 software, and have the additional
capability to interface with RDR 2000 and RDR 2100 weather radars when interfaced to EFS with
0901 or later software.
EFS 40/EFS 50 software release 1401 was the first to provide an integrated solution for the display
of terrain data from a Honeywell Enhanced Ground Proximity Warning System (EGPWS). Prior
to software version 14, terrain data could be displayed by imitating the I/O of an ARINC 708 weath-
er radar. The terrain data was displayed with “TERR” embedded in the ARINC 453 scan data,
while weather annunciations were still being displayed in the lower corner of the display. Software
release 1401 produces a truly integrated EFIS to EGPWS interface with EGPWS mode informa-
tion displayed on the lower portion of the display.

The checklist interface became operational with symbol generator software 0801. The checklist
interface allows checklist text from a checklist control panel or maintenance or other text data to
be displayed on the MFD display. The CP 469A MFD control panel with checklist capability is used
to generate and control the display of checklist information on the EFIS. Checklist information may
be transferred to and from a computer with RS 232 communication capability. The computer is
used to produce the user defined checklist data and load it into the CP 469A. Emergency discrete
inputs, when grounded, may be used to advance to user defined locations in the checklist.
3.13.3 WEATHER DETECTION/ EGPWS/ CHECKLIST REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS
Weather radar, lightning, EGPWS, and checklist are all optional inputs to the EFIS, none are re-
quired. Display of the checklist, vertical profile weather radar, weather only display format, and
EGPWS are only available for display on an MFD.
The ARINC 453 weather data output of the weather radar sensor is provided to all the symbol gen-
erators in an installation that are to provide a weather display. In addition, the original source of
ARINC 429 radar control information (from radar indicator or radar control panel) is provided to all
the symbol generators in the installation that are to provide a weather display. Each symbol gen-
erator then combines this control information with the EFIS range selection creating a new set of
radar control words which may be supplied to the radar sensor. Each symbol generator, in effect,
becomes a new source of radar control information for the radar sensor. The RDS 81, 82, 84, and
86 weather radar systems will accept two separate control inputs which are complied with on al-
ternate sweeps of the radar antenna. This allows the pilot and copilot to select different ranges
and (when a CP 113F is installed) different tilt settings with a single radar sensor installation.
When more than two sources of radar control information are available, such as installations with
three symbol generators or two symbol generators and a weather radar indicator, any two can pro-
vide control information to the radar sensor. The display associated with the third, unconnected
control source will only display weather when its range matches either of the connected sources.
RDR 2000/RDR 2100 radars allow a third control source to be connected, although only two
sources will be used at any given time.
The RDR 1400 radar system requires an NC 104 interface unit to interface to the EFS 40/EFS 50.
For this installation, all radar control functions except for range must be provided by the IN 2025B
radar indicator. The NC 104B monitors certain communications between the radar indicator and
R/T, converts this information to ARINC 708 format, and then provides both control information
and weather data to either one or two EFS 40/EFS 50 symbol generators.
The EFIS system may be configured to include both radar and EGPWS, but the two ARINC 453
sources must share a single ARINC 453 input port to the EFIS. The two sources are switched by
an external relay controlled by the EGPWS. A TERRAIN SELECTED input discrete is required by
the EFIS to determine whether radar or terrain is being processed.
The TERRAIN SELECTED input discrete from the EGPWS to the MFD EFIS will have the effect
of initiating Terrain display mode. This discrete is set by the EGPWS when it is requesting that
terrain be displayed on the EFIS, whether the request originated from a manual selection, or from
the EGPWS detection of a Warning or Caution terrain situation. The EFIS will receive the TER-
RAIN SELECTED discrete, change its display mode to Terrain, and display the current terrain
data as it is received from the EGPWS.

To accommodate manual selection of Terrain, an external Terrain selection button is added to the
cockpit panel. That button is dedicated to the MFD and is read by the EGPWS unit.
If the TERRAIN SELECTED discrete indicates Terrain, the EFIS also monitors the POP-UP dis-
crete. If the Pop-Up mode is indicated, when the EGPWS has detected a Warning/Caution situ-
ation, the EFIS will automatically set the display mode to ARC Terrain, and set the range to 10
nm. If the Terrain data is manually requested via the Terrain selection button, Terrain data will be
displayed, but the display mode and the range will not be automatically modified. If the TERRAIN
SELECTED discrete does not indicate Terrain, the POP-UP discrete will not be monitored.
When the TERRAIN SELECTED discrete returns to a non-Terrain state, terrain data processing
will be halted and the terrain scan data will be cleared. If radar is configured, weather processing
will resume.
When the Terrain discrete changes from an OFF (not Selected) state to an ON (Selected) state,
the display mode will automatically change to Terrain, and if in Pop-Up, the display will be in ARC
mode with a 10 nm range. Once in Terrain mode, the user may change the EFIS mode by press-
ing the ARC, HSI, or range keys. The sequence of display modes available to the user is the same
as it would be if Weather was configured. There will be Weather, non-Weather, and map, non-
map combinations as before but weather modes become Terrain modes as long as the TERRAIN
SELECTED discrete is set.
3.13.4 WEATHER DETECTION/ EGPWS/ CHECKLIST ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
3.13.4.A. Radar Control Receiver
P4652B-9 P4641C-22 RADAR CONTROL RECEIVER A

P4652B-35 P4641C-9 RADAR CONTROL RECEIVER B
tics, content and transmission interval. Labels shown below with an asterisk are not
ARINC standard and may be specific to Bendix/King products. The Radar Control Re-
ceiver is low speed ARINC 429. The following Radar Control labels are used by the
EFS 40/EFS 50:

270 WX CONTROL WORD 1
271 WX CONTROL WORD 2
273* PROFILE CONTROL Added by software 0501
300* RCP SELECTED MODE
301* RCP SELECTED SWITCHES
302* RCP SELECTED CPU RESULT
303* RCP STATUS CHANGE ACTIVITY
304* RCP DUAL TILT INDEX
305* RCP ROLL TRIM TILT
306* RCP SEARCH BEACON GAIN

307 RCP FORMATTED SWITCHES Added by SG software 0901,

RCP SW 02
*Not ARINC Standard
A radar indicator can provide labels 270, 271, and 273. A radar control panel can pro-
vide labels 300, 301, 302, 303, 304, 305 and 306. A radar control panel with 02 soft-
ware also provides label 307.
3.13.4.B. Radar Receiver-Transmitter/ EGPWS Processor Control Transmitter
P4652B-68 P4641C-67 R/T TRANSMITTER A

P4652B-81 P4641C-54 R/T TRANSMITTER B
NOTE: EGPWS interfaces with SG 465 only.
tics, content, and transmission interval. Labels shown below with an asterisk are not
ARINC standard and may be specific to Bendix/King products. The Radar Transmitter-
Receiver/ EGPWS Processor Control Transmitter is low speed ARINC 429. The follow-
ing Radar Control labels are broadcast by the EFS 40/EFS 50:

270 WX CONTROL WORD 1 167
271 WX CONTROL WORD 2 167
273* PROFILE CONTROL WORD 167 Added by software 0501
274* NC 104 RANGE CONTROL 50 Added by software 0401
*Not ARINC Standard
3.13.4.C. R/T Receiver
P4652B-22 P4641C-35 R/T RECEIVER 453 A

P4652B-49 P4641C-49 R/T RECEIVER 453 B
NOTE: EGPWS interfaces with SG 465 only.
tics, content, and transmission interval. The EFS 40/EFS 50 will not accept labels fast-
er than a 7 ms transmission interval. Labels shown below with an asterisk are not
ARINC standard and may be specific to Bendix/King products.
The following labels are received by the EFS 40/EFS 50 from the weather radar R/T:

055 WEATHER DATA

170 MAINTENANCE DATA

171* VERTICAL PROFILE WEATHER RADARAdded by software 0501
*Not ARINC Standard
The following labels are received by the EFS 40/EFS 50 from the EGPWS processor:

025* TERRAIN HEADER TEXT LABEL Added by software 1401
055* TERRAIN DATA Added by software 1401
*Not ARINC Standard
Terrain is provided to the EFIS on ARINC 453 label 055, the same label currently used
for Weather radar intensity data. When received, this ARINC 453 data is radial (rho-
theta) data and must be converted to x-y data for use by the bit mapped display and
multiplexed with the normal HSI information. Label 055 has a 64-bit header followed
by 1536 bits divided into 512 range bins of 3 bits each. The EFIS uses its capability to
process weather data to receive label 055 when in EGPWS mode, and to perform the
scan conversion algorithm identical to that used for weather.
When in EGPWS mode, the EFIS will display 180 degrees of scan angle. When in
Weather mode, the EFIS will revert to the configured selection for a scan angle.
3.13.4.D. Lightning Receiver
P4652B-80 P4641C-53 LIGHTNING RECEIVER A

P4652B-67 P4641C-80 LIGHTNING RECEIVER B
All serial data must conform to ARINC 429 for electrical characteristics. Labels shown
below with an asterisk are not ARINC standard and may be specific to Bendix/King
products. The Lightning Receiver is low speed ARINC 429. The following labels are re-
ceived by the EFS 40/EFS 50:
LABEL PARAMETER
001* DATA STRING PREAMBLE AND FAULT STATUS
100* thru 176* PRIORITIZED LIGHTNING CELL DATA
300* DATA STREAM TERMINATION WORD
371 EQUIPMENT/MANUFACTURER ID
*Not ARINC Standard
3.13.4.E. Terrain Select Superflag Input
P4651A-22 TERRAIN SELECT SUPERFLAG IN
TERRAIN SELECTED: HI (no less than 18.0 Vdc)

TEERRAIN NOT SELECTED: LO (no more than 3.5 Vdc)

This discrete must be provided to the MFD SG and also to a relay that selects which
453 data (terrain or Wx) is received by the SG.
3.13.4.F. Terrain Pop-Up Discrete Input
POP-UP Active: Less than 3.0 Vdc or less than 1 k ohms to ground.
POP-UP Inactive: Greater than 18.0 Vdc or greater than 20 k ohms to ground.
The POP-UP input discrete distinguishes between manual selection of terrain from a
panel-mounted switch and a Terrain/Obstacle treat condition (pop-up condition) deter-
mined internally by the EGPWS unit. In pop-up, the EFIS will automatically set the dis-
play range to 10 nm and change the mode to ARC Terrain.
3.13.4.G. Checklist Receiver
P4652A-27 P4641B-41 CHECKLIST RECEIVER A

P4652A-26 P4641B-27 CHECKLIST RECEIVER B
The EFIS may be configured to either accept high speed ARINC 429 Checklist infor-
mation on this bus or to accept low speed ARINC 429 LNAV joystick information from
another symbol generator.
3.13.4.G.1. Checklist Configuration
The checklist configuration of the Checklist receiver became operational with sym-
bol generator software 0801.
All serial data must conform to ARINC 429 for electrical characteristics. Labels
shown below with an asterisk are not ARINC standard and may be specific to Ben-
dix/King products. The Checklist Receiver. when configured for checklist, is high
speed ARINC 429. The following checklist labels are received by the SG 464/SG
465:

300* JOYSTICK SWITCH ACTIVITY
355* BEGINNING OF PAGE RECORD
356* INITIAL CHECKLIST WORD
356* CHECKLIST CONTROL WORD
356* FINAL CHECKLIST WORD
357* END OF PAGE RECORD
*Not ARINC Standard

3.13.4.G.2. LNAV Joystick Configuration
The LNAV joystick configuration for the Checklist receiver became operational with
symbol generator software 0601.
All serial data must conform to ARINC 429 for electrical characteristics. The Check-
list Receiver. when configured for LNAV joystick, is low speed ARINC 429. Refer
to 3.9.4.B LNAV/VNAV Electrical Characteristics LNAV Transmitter for a list of la-
bels contained on this bus.
3.13.4.H. MFD Control Panel ARINC 429 Transmitter
P469A2-10 EFS ARINC 429 TRANSMITTER A

P469A2-25 EFS ARINC 429 TRANSMITTER B
products. The EFS ARINC 429 transmitter is high speed ARINC 429. The following la-
bels are broadcast by the CP 469A:

300* JOYSTICK SWITCH ACTIVITY 100
355* BEGINNING OF PAGE RECORD See Note 1
356* INITIAL CHECKLIST WORD See Note 1
356* CHECKLIST CONTROL WORD See Note 1
356* FINAL CHECKLIST WORD See Note 1
357* END OF PAGE RECORD See Note 1
NOTE 1: Labels 355, 356 and 357 are only sent when the symbol generator requests
that maintenance, checklist or external data be sent. These labels may be sent as
quickly as one label from the group every one millisecond.
3.13.4.I. MFD Control Panel ARINC 429 Receiver
P469A2-8 EFS ARINC 429 RECEIVER A

P469A2-9 EFS ARINC 429 RECEIVER B
products. The EFS ARINC 429 Receiver is low speed ARINC 429. The following labels
are used by the CP 469A:

301* EFS MODE STATUS
* Not ARINC Standard

3.13.4.J. MFD Control Panel External ARINC 429 Receiver
P469A2-28 EXTERNAL ARINC 429 SELECT 1

P469A2-44 EXTERNAL ARINC 429 SELECT 2
ACTIVE: Less than 1.35V or less than 1000 to RETURN.

INACTIVE: Greater than 3.15V or greater than 300 k ohms to RETURN.
Each SELECT line represents a 100 k ohms load.
TABLE 3-11 MFD CONTROL PANEL EXTERNAL ARINC 429 RECEIVER
EXTERNAL ARINC 429 EFS ARINC 429 OUT SENDS

SELECT
1 2
RETURN RETURN EXTERNAL ARINC 429 IN 1
RETURN OPEN EXTERNAL ARINC 429 IN 2
OPEN RETURN EXTERNAL ARINC 429 IN 3
OPEN OPEN CHECKLIST
P469A2-26 EXTERNAL ARINC 429 RECEIVER 1 A

P469A2-27 EXTERNAL ARINC 429 RECEIVER 1 B


The EXTERNAL ARINC 429 Receivers were not operational at time of publication.
3.13.4.K. MFD Control Panel External Up/Down and Enter Inputs
P469A2-5 EXTERNAL UP
P469A2-22 EXTERNAL DOWN
Activated by less than 100 ohms to Joystick/Switch Return. These inputs to the CP
469A can be connected to a remote momentary switch to allow remote operation of the
checklist up and down selection. These inputs are in parallel with the UP and DOWN
pushbuttons on the front panel of the CP 469A.

3.13.4.L. MFD Control Panel Emergency Discrete Inputs
P469A2-1 EMERGENCY 1
ACTIVE: Less than 1.35 V or less than 100 ohms to RETURN.

INACTIVE: Greater than 3.15 V or greater than 300 k ohms to RETURN.
Each EMERGENCY line represents a 100 k ohms load.
When two emergency discrete inputs are active simultaneously, the lower number in-
put overrides the higher number input.
3.13.4.M. MFD Control Panel Checklist Valid
P469A2-6 CHECKLIST VALID
VALID: Greater than 25.5 Vdc.

INVALID: Greater than 100 k ohms to ground.
Source up to a 200 mA load.
P469A2-23 CHECKLIST VALID
VALID: Less than 2.0 Vdc.

INVALID: Greater than 100 k ohms to ground.
Sink up to a 200 mA load.
3.13.4.N. MFD Control Panel RS 232
P469A2-16 RS 232 RECEIVER

P469A2-17 RS 232 TRANSMITTER
P469A2-33 RS 232 RETURN
HI: +9.5 Vdc ± 5%

LO: -10.3 Vdc ± 5%
*4800, 9600, 19200 baud. 1 stop bit, 1 start bit, 8 data bits, no parity.
* Depending on DEU setup.

3.13.4.O. Radar Control Panel ARINC 429 Transmitter
P113F1-25 P466A1-25 P466B1-25 CONTROL DATA TRANSMITTER A

P113F1-8 P466A1-8 P466B1-8 CONTROL DATA TRANSMITTER B
products. The Control Data transmitter is low speed ARINC 429. The following labels
are broadcast by the control panel:

300* SELECTED MODE 35
301* SELECTED SWITCHES 35
302* CPU RESULTS 35
303* STATUS CHANGE 35
304* DUAL TILT INDEX 35
305* ROLL TRIM/TILT 35
306* SEARCH GAIN/ BEACON GAIN 35
*Not ARINC Standard
3.13.4.P. Radar Control Panel Receiver/Transmitter ON/OFF
P113F1-37 P466A1-37 P466B1-37 RECEIVER/TRANSMITTER

ON/OFF
ON: Less than 0.5 Vdc to ground.

OFF: Greater than 1 M ohms to ground.
Sink up to a 250 mA load and up to 50 Vdc open circuit.
3.13.5 WEATHER DETECTION/ EGPWS/ CHECKLIST INTERFACE
3.13.5.A. Dual Symbol Generator. Weather Radar without Indicator
Refer to Figure 3-155 for the Dual Symbol Generator, Weather Radar without Indicator
interface. All part numbers of the Bendix/King RDS 81 Weather Radar System and all
part numbers of the CP 466A, CP 466B, and CP 113F are compatible with the EFS 40/
EFS 50. The following RDS 82, RDS 84, and RDS 86 Weather Radar System part
numbers are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50.
RDS 82 System
RS 181 071-01315-0000, -0300
IN 182 066-03084-0000, -0001, -0002, -0003, -0030, -0031, -0032, -0033
RDS 84 System

RS 841 071-01318-0000, -0030

IN 842 066-03085-0000, -0001, -0030, -0031
RDS 86 System
RS 861 071-01319-0000, -0030
IN 862 066-03086-0000, -0001, -0030, -0031
3.13.5.B. Dual Symbol Generator. Weather Radar with Indicator
Refer to Figure 3-156 for the Dual Symbol Generator, Weather Radar with Indicator in-
terface. Refer to 3.13.5.A above for radar system and control panel part numbers com-
patible with the EFS 40/EFS 50.
3.13.5.C. Three Symbol Generator, Weather Radar without Indicator
Refer to Figure 3-157 for the Three Symbol Generator, Weather Radar without Indica-
tor interface. Refer to 3.13.5.A above for radar system and control panel part numbers
compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50.
3.13.5.D. RDR 1400 Weather Radar
Refer to Figure 3-158 for the RDR 1400 Weather Radar interface. The RDR 1400 must
be installed with its radar indicator, an EFIS radar control panel is not available for the
RDR 1400. All part numbers of the Bendix/King RDS 1400 Weather Radar System and
the Bendix/King NC 104 066-04017-0003 part number are compatible with the EFS 40/
EFS 50.
3.13.5.E. Lightning Detection
Refer to Figure 3-159 for the Lightning Detection interface. The B.F. Goodrich WX
1000E (429 EFIS) part number 78-8060-6086-5 is compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50.
3.13.5.F. Checklist
Refer to Figure 3-160 for the Checklist interface. All part numbers of the Bendix/King
CP 469A are compatible with the EFS 40/EFS 50.
3.13.5.G. RDR 2000/RDR 2100 Weather Radar
Refer to Figures 3-160A through 3-160D for the RDR 2000/RDR 2100 Weather Radar
interfaces.
Figure 3-160A is for 2 SGs and 1 indicator.
Figure 3-160B is for 3 SGs and 1 control panel.
Figure 3-160C is for 3 SGs and 3 control panels.
Figure 3-160D is for 2 SGs, 1 indicator, and 2 control panels.

3.13.5.H. EGPWS MK V, MK VI, MK VII, MK VIII
Refer to Figure 3-160E for the EGPWS MK V, MK VI, MK VII, MK VIII interfaces.
Figure 3-160E sheet 1 is for 3 SGs (Five Tube System).
Figure 3-160E sheet 2 is for 2 SGs (Three Tube System).
Figure 3-160E sheet 3 is for 1 SG (MFD Only System).
Figure 3-160E sheet 4 contains notes relevant to sheet 1, sheet 2, and sheet 3 inter-
faces.

FIGURE 3-155 EFS 40/EFS 50 Dual Symbol Generator, Weather Radar W/O Indicator Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0044, Rev 2)

FIGURE 3-156 EFS 40/EFS 50 Dual Symbol Generator, Weather Radar With Indicator Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0045, Rev 2)

FIGURE 3-157 EFS 40/EFS 50 Three Symbol Generator, Weather Radar W/O Indicator Interconnect
(Dwg No 155-01601-0059, Rev 1)

FIGURE 3-158 EFS 40/EFS 50 RDR 1400 Weather Radar Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0060, Rev AA)

FIGURE 3-159 EFS 40/EFS 50 Lightning Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0066, Rev AA)

FIGURE 3-160 EFS 40/EFS 50 Checklist Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0061, Rev AA)

FIGURE 3-160A EFS 40 /EFS 50 RDR 2000/RDR 2100 Weather Radar Interconnect (2 SG, 1 Ind)
(Dwg No 155-01636-0061, Rev 2)

FIGURE 3-160B EFS 40 /EFS 50 RDR 2000/RDR 2100 Weather Radar Interconnect (2 SG, 1 MFD, 1 CP)
(Dwg No 155-01636-0059, Rev 2)

FIGURE 3-160C EFS 40 /EFS 50 RDR 2000/RDR 2100 Weather Radar Interconnect (2 SG, 1 MFD, 3 CP)
(Dwg No 155-01636-0060, Rev 2)

FIGURE 3-160D EFS 40 /EFS 50 RDR 2000/RDR 2100 Weather Radar Interconnect (2 SG, 1 Ind, 2 CP)
(Dwg No 155-01636-0062, Rev 2)

FIGURE 3-160E EFS 40/EFS 50 MK V, MK VI, MK VII, MK VIII EGPWS Interconnect

SHEET 1 of 4 (Dwg No 155-01601-0071, Rev A, Sht 1)







3.14 TCAS INTERFACE
3.14.1 TCAS INTERFACE APPLICABLE PART NUMBERS
The TCAS interface is to become operational with symbol generator software 0801.
The following part numbers of the SG 464 and SG 465 will accept TCAS inputs:
SG 464 066-04020-
- 01XX 02XX - - - - - - -
- 11XX 12XX - - - - - - -
SG 465 066-04021-
- 01XX 02XX - 04XX 05XX - - - -
- 11XX 12XX - 14XX 15XX 1601 1755 - 5000
3.14.2 TCAS INTERFACE FUNCTION
Only one TCAS processor may be connected to a symbol generator at a time. TCAS traffic can
be presented on each EHSI and MFD display, no TCAS information can be presented on the
EADI.
When TCAS is selected, TCAS traffic will overlay most of the existing display modes on the EHSI
and MFD displays. An additional TCAS ONLY display mode (both ARC and HSI) is provided on
the MFD display only. The selection of TCAS will not remove any of the existing display elements
such as MAP reference points, however certain display modes can not be active at the same time
as TCAS. Refer to the TCAS Requirements and Limitations section below for a list of display
modes not compatible with TCAS. TCAS display range is controlled by the appropriate EFS 40/
EFS 50 control panel. When provided, above/normal/below and actual/relative altitude selections
will be made on the TCAS/MODE S control panel.
3.14.3 TCAS INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS
Each EFS 40/EFS 50 display capable of providing TCAS information must have its own TCAS se-
lect switch. A TCAS push button is provided on the CP 469A, MFD control panel, for this purpose.
All remaining EFS 40/EFS 50 control panels require the use of a separate, stand alone momentary
contact switch for TCAS selection.
TCAS II systems utilize two different types of displays: A traffic display and a resolution display.
Each EFS 40/EFS 50 EHSI and MFD display can function as a traffic display only. No TCAS in-
formation is provided on the EADI and resolution advisory (RA) information is not presented on
any EFS 40/EFS 50 display.

The EFS 40/EFS 50 is capable of displaying a maximum of 20 TCAS intruders. If the TCAS pro-
cessor provides data for more than 20. the EFS will display the 20 intruders presenting the great-
est threat as determined by the TCAS processor.
Checklist, vertical profile weather, cable and hover can not be active at the same time as TCAS.
Selection of TCAS or checklist while the other is active will activate the most recent selection and
cancel the other. Selecting TCAS while vertical profile is displayed will activate TCAS and cancel
vertical profile. Selecting vertical profile while TCAS is displayed will have no effect (vertical profile
is inhibited while TCAS is active). TCAS display is inhibited while cable or hover modes are active,
however, a memory of TCAS selection is maintained during these modes and that selection is re-
instated when these modes are no longer active.
3.14.4 TCAS INTERFACE ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
3.14.4.A. TCAS Receiver
P4652A-1 P4641A-77 TCAS RECEIVER A

P4652A-13 P4641A-92 TCAS RECEIVER B
tics. content and transmission interval. The TCAS Receiver is high speed ARINC 429.
The following labels are received by the EFS 40/EFS 50:

013 TCAS DISPLAY CONTROL
015 ALTITUDE LIMITS See note 1
130 INTRUDER RANGE
131 INTRUDER ALTITUDE
132 INTRUDER BEARING
203 PRESSURE ALTITUDE
204 CORRECTED ALTITUDE See note 2
270 VERTICAL RESOLUTION (includes TCAS test/fail)
274 TCAS STATUS
350 TCAS FAULT SUMMARY
351 MODE-S MAINTENANCE
357 REQUEST TO SEND (INTRUDER FILE)
357 END OF TRANSMISSION (INTRUDER FILE)
NOTE 1: If label 015 is not provided, the EFIS will use the default values of A=2700
and B=8700 feet for the altitude limits.
NOTE 2: If label 204 is not provided, the EFIS will use label 203 to display actual alti-
tude (Flight Level) of the intruders.
Intruder data is organized as a file consisting of labels 130, 131 and 132 for the intruder
with the greatest threat. followed by labels 130, 131 and 132 for the intruder with the

second greatest threat, and so on until all intruders under surveillance are provided (up
to 31 max). Label 357 is used to identify the beginning and end of this file (even when
no intruders are provided) and is sent twice per second.
3.14.4.B. TCAS Valid Output
P4652A-11 P4641C-44 TCAS VALID
Valid: LO (no more than 1.5 Vdc at 250 mA). Not Valid: HI (open).
This output is invalid during any of the three following conditions: The EFS display or
associated symbol generator have faults that could prevent the proper display of TCAS
traffic. The intruder file (label 357) is missing or invalid. Following a TCAS functional
test (as indicated on label 270) for one to five seconds.
This output is intended as an indication of display health. The TCAS processor may
use this information to determine if an operational traffic display is available in the air-
craft. When more than one TCAS traffic display is connected to the same TCAS 429
output port of the TCAS processor, only one of these displays should be allowed to pro-
vide this TCAS VALID discrete to the processor. A dedicated TCAS traffic display
should be given priority over a part-time or multi-function display for supplying this dis-
crete.
3.14.4.C. TCAS Select Input
P4651A-36 TCAS SELECT
Toggle ON/OFF: Less than 3.0 Vdc or less than 1 k ohms to ground.
No Change: Greater than 18.0 Vdc or greater than 20 k ohms to ground.
This input became active with software release 10/01. A remote momentary switch can
be used with this input to select and de-select TCAS for display on EHSI or MFD.
3.14.4.D. Control Panel External TCAS Selection
P469A1-41 EXTERNAL TCAS
Activated by less than 100 ohms to ground. This input to the CP 469A can be connect-
ed to a remote momentary switch to allow TCAS selection on the MFD display. This
input is in parallel with the TCAS select pushbutton on the front panel of the CP 469A.
3.14.5 TCAS INTERFACE
Refer to Figure 3-161 for the TCAS interface.

THIS PAGE RESERVED

FIGURE 3-161 EFS 40/EFS 50 TCAS Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0062, Rev AB)

3.15 HOVER/CABLE/HOMING
3.15.1 HOVER/CABLE/HOMING APPLICABLE PART NUMBERS
The hover interface became operational with symbol generator software 0401. The heading bug,
heading output and lateral and vertical deviation outputs became operational during hover display
with software 0501.
The cable interface became operational with symbol generator software 0401; the heading bug.
heading output and lateral and vertical deviation outputs became operational during cable display
with software 0501. A configuration option to declutter the optimum cable position circle without
displaying a flag was added with software 0701.
The homing interface became operational with symbol generator software 0501.
The following part numbers of the SG 464 and SG 465 will accept Hover, Cable and Homing in-
puts:
SG 464 066-04020-
- 01XX 02XX - - - - - - -
- 11XX 12XX - - - - - - -
SG 465 066-04021-
- 01XX 02XX - 04XX 05XX - - - -
- 11XX 12XX - 14XX 15XX 1601 1755 - 5000
3.15.2 HOVER/CABLE/HOMING FUNCTION
Only a single hover source may be connected to the EFIS at a time. The hover source is annun-
ciated as DOPP indicating a doppler sensor as the source of hover information. The hover display
has dual concentric circles inside the compass card that with the compass card represent refer-
ence values for velocity and target range. The inner circle represents 10 KTS and 0.2 NM, the out-
er circle 20 KTS and 0.4 NM, and the compass card 30 KTS and 0.6 NM of velocity and target
waypoint distance respectively. Cross bars, the length of the compass cards diameter. indicate
the aircraft’s current left/right and forward/aft velocity as provided by the doppler sensor. A target
waypoint, wind vector and groundspeed are displayed when this data is provided by an LNAV. The
on-side LNAV source is displayed when available with the cross-side source accepted when the
on-side source is not installed. A configuration option allows flight control (coupler) data to be pre-
sented on the hover display. The flight control system can position a velocity tendency circle on
the display. The tendency circle is displayed as a dashed circle when the winchman has control.
A velocity valid discrete input replaces the velocity cross bars with a red X when set invalid. A
memory discrete input places an orange “MEMORY” annunciation above the symbolic aircraft and
changes the velocity cross bars and circles to orange to alert the pilot when the doppler has gone
into memory mode.

Only a single cable source may be connected to the EFIS at a time. The cable source is annunci-
ated as CAB. The cable display has dual concentric circles inside the compass card that with the
compass card represent reference values for cable angle as provided by the cable position sen-
sor. The white inner circle represents 6 degrees. the yellow outer circle 12 degrees, and the com-
pass card 18 degrees. Cross bars, the length of the compass cards diameter, indicate the aircraft’s
current left/right and forward/aft cable angle as provided by the cable position sensor. A wind vec-
tor is displayed when this data is provided by an LNAV. The on-side LNAV source is displayed
when available with the cross-side source accepted when the on-side source is not installed. A
configuration option allows flight control (coupler) data to be presented on the cable display. The
flight control system can position an optimum cable position circle on the display. The optimum
position circle is displayed as a dashed circle when the winchman has control. A position valid dis-
crete input replaces the cable position cross bars with a red X when set invalid. A thrust discrete
input changes the cable position cross bars and the 12 degree circle to orange to alert the pilot
when thrust is active.
Up to two homing sources may be connected to the EFIS at a time. The homing source is annun-
ciated as HOM. The pilot can select the on-side or cross-side source for presentation on the
course deviation display. The homing sensor cannot be displayed on the bearing pointers. Bearing
pointer displays of other sensors are allowed in homing mode just as they are with the standard
EHSI display. The homing sensor is displayed similar to the standard EHSI display. but since only
left/right and no bearing information is supplied, the alphanumeric selected course display and the
course pointer head and tail are removed. In addition, the homing deviation scale and pointer are
always oriented vertically. The deviation scale factor is relative: not scaled to angle or to distance.
When the homing receiver includes a sensitivity output it is displayed where the glideslope devia-
tion is normally displayed. Wind vector and map may be displayed when this data is provided by
an LNAV. The on-side LNAV source is displayed when available with the cross-side source ac-
cepted when the on-side source is not installed.
3.15.3 HOVER/CABLE/HOMING REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS
Only a single hover source may be connected to the EFIS at a time. External switching may be
used to switch more than one hover source to the EFIS, one at a time, but the DOPP source an-
nunciation will not include a side number. External switch labeling/annunciation will be required to
indicate the system number for this type installation. Although the analog lateral and vertical de-
viation and flag outputs will match the hover inputs, the ARINC 429 outputs will remain centered
and flagged. Although the analog and ARINC 429 selected heading outputs will be operational.
the selected course outputs will remain flagged during hover display.
Only a single cable source may be connected to the EFIS at a time. External switching may be
used to switch more than one cable source to the EFIS, one at a time, but the CAB source annun-
ciation will not include a side number. External switch labeling/annunciation will be required to in-
dicate the system number for this type installation. Although the analog lateral and vertical devia-
tion and flag outputs will match the cable inputs (the position flag input to the GS flag input pins is
used to generate both the lateral and vertical flag outputs), the ARINC 429 outputs will remain cen-
tered and flagged. Although the analog and ARINC 429 selected heading outputs will be opera-
tional, the selected course outputs will remain flagged during cable display.
Although the analog lateral and vertical deviation and flag outputs will match the homing deviation
and sensitivity inputs. the ARINC 429 outputs will remain centered and flagged. Although the an-

alog and ARINC 429 selected heading outputs will be operational, the selected course outputs will
remain flagged during homing display.
3.15.4 HOVER/CABLE/HOMING ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
3.15.4.A. HOVER
The side-1 localizer and glideslope deviation and valid inputs take on the alternate
function of hover velocity deviation and valid inputs when the symbol generator is con-
figured for hover and the hover source is selected as the course deviation display.
While hover is displayed the HOVER SELECT OUT output is active.
3.15.4.A.1. Hover Memory and Velocity Flag (NAV/Localizer and Glideslope Flag) inputs
P4651A-75 P4641A-69 NAV/LOC 1 +FLAG MEMORY +FLAG

P4651A-62 P4641A-55 NAV/LOC 1-FLAG MEMORY -FLAG
Flagged (invalid): In Memory

Not Flagged (Valid): Not In Memory
P4651A-61 P4641A-42 GS 1 +FLAG VEL +FLAG

P4651A-88 P4641A-28 GS 1 -FLAG VEL -FLAG
Flagged (invalid): Velocity Deviation Invalid

Not Flagged (Valid): Velocity Deviation Valid
The flag input may be connected either to receive low level meter drive flag voltages
or superflag level flag voltages. To receive a low level meter drive flag. connect both
the +FLAG and -FLAG inputs to the hover system. To receive a superflag, connect the
+FLAG input to the hover system and leave the -FLAG input open.
spect to the -FLAG input. A not flagged (valid) condition exists when the voltage at the
+FLAG input is greater than 250 mVdc with respect to the -FLAG input. Input imped-
ance is 1 k ohms.
generator chassis ground. A not flagged (valid) condition exists when the voltage at the
+FLAG input is greater than 18.0 Vdc with respect to the symbol generator chassis
CAUTION

THE -FLAG INPUT MUST BE OPEN FOR PROPER SUPERFLAG OPERATION. IF

THE -FLAG INPUT IS CONNECTED TO GROUND AND +28 VDC IS CONNECTED
3.15.4.A.2. Hover Lateral Velocity Deviation (Localizer Deviation) Input
P4651A-21 P4641A-98 LOC 1 DEV +R VEL Y DEV +R

P4651A-35 P4641A-84 LOC 1 DEV +L VEL Y DEV +L
Meter drive ±112.5 mVdc to outside edge of compass card, ±37.5 mVdc to edge of in-
ner circle and ±75.0 mVdc to edge of outer circle. This input will accept up to ±300
mVdc and will provide signal levels in this range at the Lateral Deviation Outputs for
use by the flight control system. Input impedance is 1 k ohms.
3.15.4.A.3. Hover Longitudinal Velocity Deviation (Glideslope Deviation) Input
P4651A-32 P4641A-60 GS 1 DEV +UP VEL X DEV +FWD

P4651A-46 P4641A-85 GS 1 DEV +DN VEL X DEV +AFT
Meter drive ±112.5 mVdc to outside edge of compass card, ±37.5 mVdc to edge of in-
ner circle and ±75.0 mVdc to edge of outer circle. This input will accept up to ±300
mVdc and will provide signal levels in this range to the Vertical Deviation Outputs for
use by the flight control system. Input impedance is 1 k ohms.
3.15.4.A.4. Hover Source Select Discrete Output
P4652A-18 P4641C-74 HOVER SELECT OUT
HOVER SELECT OUT: When active. indicates that the HOVER source is selected as
3.15.4.A.5. Hover Flight Control Input
A configuration option allows flight control (coupler) data to be presented on the hover
display. The flight control system ARINC 429 label 226 LONGITUDINAL VELOCITY
and label 227 LATERAL VELOCITY commands can be used to position a tendency
circle on the hover display. A winchman bit in label 226 causes the tendency circle to
be displayed as dashed when it is set, indicating winchman control. Refer to 3.12.4.T
ARINC 429 Flight Control System Input for additional information on this interface.
3.15.4.A.6. Hover LNAV Input

If an LNAV system provides the following ARINC 429 labels a target waypoint. wind
vector and groundspeed are provided on the hover display. The on-side LNAV
source is displayed when available with the cross-side LNAV source accepted
when the on-side is not available. Labels shown below with an asterisk are not
ARINC 429 standard and may be specific to Nadir Crouzet products. Refer to
3.9.4.13.2 ARINC 429 LNAV Receiver for additional information on this interface.
LABEL PARAMETER
106* CENTER POINT IDENT (SDI=01)
042* CENTER POINT LATITUDE (SDI=01)
043* CENTER POINT LONGITUDE (SDI=01)
304* DECLINATION
312 GROUND SPEED
315 WIND SPEED
321 DRIFT ANGLE
*Not ARINC Standard
3.15.4.B. CABLE
The side-2 localizer and glideslope deviation and valid inputs take on the alternate
function of cable position deviation and valid inputs when the symbol generator is con-
figured for cable and the cable source is selected as the course deviation display.
While cable is displayed the CABLE SELECT OUT output is active.
3.15.4.B.1. Cable Thrust and Position Flag (NAV/Localizer and Glideslope Flag) Inputs
P4651B-48 P4641B-9 NAV/LOC 2 +FLAG THRUST +FLAG

P4651B-21 P4641B-22 NAV/LOC 2 -FLAG THRUST -FLAG
Flagged (invalid): Not In Thrust

Not Flagged (Valid): In Thrust
P4651B-49 P4641B-62 GS 2 +FLAG POSITION +FLAG

P4651B-22 P4641B-49 GS 2 -FLAG POSITION -FLAG
Flagged (invalid): Position Deviation Invalid

Not Flagged (Valid): Position Deviation Valid
or superflag level flag voltages. To receive a low level meter drive flag, connect both
the +FLAG and -FLAG inputs to the cable sensor. To receive a superflag. connect the
+FLAG input to the cable sensor and leave the -FLAG input open.

When this input is connected to receive a low level meter drive flag. a flagged (invalid)
ance is 1 k ohms.
CAUTION
TO THE +FLAG INPUT. THE SYMBOL GENERATOR WILL BE DAMAGED.
3.15.4.B.2. Cable Lateral Position Deviation (Localizer Deviation) Input
P4651B-75 P4641B-12 LOC 2 DEV +R POS Y DEV +R

P4651B-61 P4641B-24 LOC 2 DEV +L POS Y DEV +L
Meter drive ±240 mVdc to outside edge of compass card, ±80 mVdc to edge of inner
circle and ±160 mVdc to edge of outer circle. This input will accept up to ±300 mVdc
and will provide signal levels in this range at the Lateral Deviation Outputs for use by
the flight control system. Input impedance is 1 k ohms.
3.15.4.B.3. Cable Longitudinal Position Deviation (Glideslope Deviation) Input
P4651B-76 P4641B-37 GS 2 DEV +UP POS X DEV +FWD

P4651B-62 P4641B-51 GS 2 DEV +DN POS X DEV +AFT
Meter drive ±240 mVdc to outside edge of compass card, ±80 mVdc to edge of inner
circle and ±160 mVdc to edge of outer circle. This input will accept up to ±300 mVdc
and will provide signal levels in this range to the Vertical Deviation Outputs for use by
the flight control system. Input impedance is 1 k ohms.
3.15.4.B.4. Cable Source Select Discrete Output
P4652A-6 P4641C-73 CABLE SELECT OUT
Active: LO (no more than 1.5 Vdc at 250 mA).

Inactive: HI (open).

CABLE SELECT OUT: When active, indicates that the CABLE source is selected as
3.15.4.B.5. Cable Flight Control Input
A configuration option allows flight control (coupler) data to be presented on the cable
display. The flight control system ARINC 429 label 224 X CABLE DEVIATION and la-
bel 225 Y CABLE DEVIATION commands can be used to position an optimum cable
position circle on the cable display. Refer to 3.12.4.T ARINC 429 Flight Control System
Input for additional information on this interface.
3.15.4.B.6. Cable LNAV Input
If an LNAV system provides the following ARINC 429 labels a wind vector is provided
on the cable display. The on-side LNAV source is displayed when available with the
cross-side LNAV source accepted when the on-side is not available. Labels shown be-
low with an asterisk are not ARINC 429 standard and may be specific to Nadir Crouzet
products. Refer to 3.9.4.8.2 ARINC 429 LNAV Receiver for additional information on
this interface.
LABEL PARAMETER
304* DECLINATION
315 WIND SPEED
*Not ARINC Standard
3.15.4.C. HOMING
The localizer and glideslope deviation and valid inputs take on the alternate function of
homing and sensitivity deviation and valid inputs when the symbol generator is config-
ured for homing and a homing source is selected as the course deviation display. Bear-
ing pointers and wind vector are displayed on the homing display as they are on the
standard EHSI presentations. While homing is displayed the HOMING SELECT OUT
output is active.
3.15.4.C.1. Homing Deviation and Sensitivity Flag (NAV/Localizer and Glideslope Flag) Input
P4651A-75 P4641A-69 NAV/LOC 1 +FLAG HOMING 1 +FLAG

P4651A-62 P4641A-55 NAV/LOC 1 -FLAG HOMING 1 -FLAG
P4651B-48 P4641B-9 NAV/LOC 2 +FLAG HOMING 2 +FLAG
P4651B-21 P4641B-22 NAV/LOC 2 -FLAG HOMING 2 -FLAG
P4651A-61 P4641A-42 GS 1 +FLAG SENS 1 +FLAG
P4651A-88 P4641A-28 GS 1 -FLAG SENS 1 -FLAG
P4651B-49 P4641B-62 GS 2 +FLAG SENS 2 +FLAG
P4651B-22 P4641B-49 GS 2 -FLAG SENS 2 -FLAG

or superflag level flag voltages. To receive a low level meter drive flag, connect both
the +FLAG and -FLAG inputs to the homing receiver. To receive a superflag, connect
the +FLAG input to the homing receiver and leave the -FLAG input open.
ance is 1 k ohms.
CAUTION
3.15.4.C.2. Homing Deviation (Localizer Deviation) Input
P4651A-21 P4641A-98 LOC 1 DEV +R HOMING 1 DEV +R

P4651A-35 P4641A-84 LOC 1 DEV +L HOMING 1 DEV +L
P4651B-75 P4641B-12 LOC 2 DEV +R HOMING 2 DEV +R
P4651B-61 P4641 B-24 LOC 2 DEV +L HOMING 2 DEV +L
Meter drive ±150 mVdc full scale. This input will accept up to ±300 mVdc and will pro-
vide signal levels in this range at the Lateral Deviation Outputs for use by the flight con-
trol system. Input impedance is 1 k ohms.
3.15.4.C.3. Sensitivity Deviation (Glideslope Deviation) Input
P4651A-32 P4641A-60 GS 1 DEV +UP SENS 1 DEV +UP

P4651A-46 P4641A-85 GS 1 DEV +DN SENS 1 DEV +DN
P4651B-76 P4641B-37 GS 2 DEV +UP SENS 2 DEV +UP
P4651B-62 P4641B-51 GS 2 DEV +DN SENS 2 DEV +DN
Meter drive ±150 mVdc full scale. This input will accept up to ±300 mVdc and will pro-
vide signal levels in this range to the Vertical Deviation Outputs for use by the flight
3.15.4.C.4. Homing Source Select Discrete Output

P4652A-45 P4641C-100 HOMING SELECT OUT
HOMING SELECT OUT: When active. indicates that a HOMING source is selected as
3.15.5 HOVER/CABLE/HOMING INTERFACE
3.15.5.A. HOVER
Refer to Figure 3-162 for the HOVER interface. In addition to the connections to NAV
and glideslope inputs. additional information may be presented on the hover display
from the LNAV and Flight Control inputs. Refer to the LNAV and Flight Control interface
sections of this manual for additional information an these interfaces.
3.15.5.B. CABLE
Refer to Figure 3-163 for the CABLE interface. In addition to the connections to NAV
and glideslope inputs. additional information may be presented on the cable display
from the LNAV and Flight Control inputs. Refer to the LNAV and Flight Control interface
sections of this manual for additional information on these interfaces.
3.15.5.C. HOMING
Refer to Figure 3-164 for the HOMING interface.

THIS PAGE RESERVED

FIGURE 3-162 EFS 40/EFS 50 Hover Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0063, Rev 0)

FIGURE 3-163 EFS 40/EFS 50 Cable Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0064, Rev 0)

FIGURE 3-164 EFS 40/EFS 50 Homing Interconnect


FIGURE 3-164 EFS 40/EFS 50 Homing Interconnect


3.16 MISCELLANEOUS INTERFACES
3.16.1 MISCELLANEOUS INTERFACES APPLICABLE PART NUMBERS
Unless otherwise indicated. all interfaces listed in Paragraph 3.16.4 are available on all part num-
bers of the EFS 40/EFS 50 units.
3.16.2 MISCELLANEOUS INTERFACES FUNCTION
Refer to the individual parts of Paragraph 3.16.4 for the function of each interface.
3.16.3 MISCELLANEOUS INTERFACES REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS
Refer to the individual parts of Paragraph 3.16.4 for the requirements and limitations of each in-
terface.
3.16.4 MISCELLANEOUS INTERFACES ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
3.16.4.A. Symbol Generator HSI Power Inputs
P4651A-92 P4641A-6 HSI +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER

P4651A-90 P4641A-8 HSI AIRCRAFT POWER GROUND

All part numbers of the SG 464 and SG 465 have a momentary current surge when
power is first applied. This 20 A, 100 microsecond surge will not trip a circuit breaker
but may cause a fast acting current limited power supply to shut down and not power
the symbol generator.
The symbol generator current consumption varies greatly depending on input supply
voltage and the loads the symbol generator drives. As the input supply voltage de-
creases the symbol generator power supply draws more current to keep the input pow-
er level approximately the same. Current consumption at 28 and 18 volt input levels
are shown in the tables below; consumption for voltages between these values may be
approximated with a linear interpolation.
The largest installation variant consumer of symbol generator power is the 4 inch ED
461 and ED 462 display units. These units are powered solely from the symbol gener-
ator and their presence can increase current consumption for each half of the symbol

generator by from two to nearly four amps. The five inch ED 551 and ED 551A displays
derive all of their power from the aircraft power and draw no current from the symbol
generator. The HSI half of the symbol generator can drive up to seven superflag out-
puts at up to 250 mA per output. These outputs are driven directly by the 28V input to
the symbol generator and will not increase current consumption as input voltage de-
creases. If all outputs are connected and operating up to their maximum level in an in-
stallation this can increase the HSI power input by up to 1.75 Amp. Part numbers of
the symbol generator that contain the weather circuit board consume as much as 300
mA more current than those that do not.
3.16.4.A.1. With Weather Board
The following table list the HSI Aircraft Power input current consumption for both the
SG 464 and SG 465 symbol generator part numbers listed below:
SG 464 066-04020-
- 01XX - - - - - - - -
- 11XX - - - - - - - -
SG 465 066-04021-
- 01XX - - 04XX - - - - -
- 11XX - - 14XX - 1601 1755 - 50XX
TABLE 3-12 SYMBOL GENERATOR HSI POWER INPUTS WITH WEATHER BOARD
SG 464 and SG 465 HSI Aircraft Power Current (Amps) - With Weather Board
No Superflag Loads Seven 250 mA Superflag Loads
Display Size 28 VDC 18 VDC 28 VDC 18 VDC
Four Inch 3.2 5.3 5.0 7.1
Five Inch 1.1 1.7 2.9 3.5
3.16.4.A.2. Without Weather Board
The following table list the HSI Aircraft Power input current consumption for both the
SG 464 and SG 465 symbol generator part numbers listed below:
SG 464 066-04020-
- - 02XX - - - - - - -
- - 12XX - - - - - - -
SG 465 066-04021-
- - 02XX - - 05XX - - - -
- - 12XX - - 15XX - - - -

TABLE 3-13 SYMBOL GENERATOR HSI POWER INPUTS WITHOUT WEATHER BOARD
SG 464 and SG 465 HSI Aircraft Power Current (Amps) Without Weather Board
No Superflag Loads Seven 250 mA Superflag Loads
Display Size 28 VDC 18 VDC 28 VDC 18 VDC
Four Inch 3.0 5.0 4.8 6.8
Five Inch 1.0 1.5 2.8 3.3
3.16.4.B. Symbol Generator ADI Power Inputs
P4651B-92 ADI +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER

P4651B-91 ADI AIRCRAFT POWER GROUND

All part numbers of the SG 465 have a momentary current surge when power is first
applied. This 20 A, 100 microsecond surge will not trip a circuit breaker but may cause
a fast acting current limited power supply to shut down and not power the symbol gen-
erator.
The symbol generator current consumption varies greatly depending on input supply
voltage and the loads the symbol generator drives. As the input supply voltage de-
creases the symbol generator power supply draws more current to keep the input pow-
er level approximately the same. Current consumption at 28 and 18 volt input levels
are shown in the tables below; consumption for voltages between these values may be
approximated with a linear interpolation.
The largest installation variant consumer of symbol generator power is the 4 inch ED
461 and ED 462 display units. These units are powered solely from the symbol gener-
ator and their presence can increase current consumption for each half of the symbol
generator by from two to nearly four amps. The five inch ED 551 and ED 551A displays
derive all of their power from the aircraft power and draw no current from the symbol
generator.
The following table list the ADI Power input current consumption for the SG 465 symbol
generator part numbers listed below:
SG 465 066-04021-
- 01XX 02XX - - - - - - -
- 11XX 12XX - - - 1601 1755 - 50XX

TABLE 3-14 SG 465 ADI AIRCRAFT POWER CURRENT
SG 465 ADI Aircraft Power Current (Amps)
Display Size 28 VDC 18 VDC
Four Inch 2.6 4.4
Five Inch 0.8 1.2
3.16.4.C. Symbol Generator 400 Hz Synchro Reference Inputs
The symbol generator has three 26 Vac 400 Hz reference inputs. The reference inputs
are used only as a reference. Current consumption is less than 0.3 mA for each input.
For additional information on these inputs refer to 3.4.4.A VOR, LOC, GS and Marker
Beacon Electrical Characteristics and 3.12.4.A Flight Control Electrical Characteris-
tics.
3.16.4.D. Five Inch Display Unit Power Inputs
P5511-S P551A1-S +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT PWR BUS 1

P5511-T P551A1-T +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT PWR BUS 1
P5511-M P551A1-M +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT PWR BUS 2

P5511-N P551A1-N +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT PWR BUS 2
P5511-A P551A1-A AIRCRAFT POWER GROUND

P5511-B P551A1-B AIRCRAFT POWER GROUND
The ED 551 and ED 551A five inch display units derive all of their power from the air-
craft power and draw no current from the symbol generator. Each display unit has two
sets of power input pins. The two sets allow connection to two separate aircraft power
busses. The two busses are then diode isolated inside the display unit so that if one
bus fails the other bus will continue to power the display unit but will not feedback into
the failed bus.
The ED 551 and ED 551A five inch display units current consumption varies depending
on input supply voltage. As the input supply voltage decreases the display unit power
supply draws more current to keep the input power level approximately the same. Cur-
rent consumption at 28 and 18 volt input levels are shown in the tables below; con-
sumption for voltages between these values may be approximated with a linear inter-
polation.

TABLE 3-15 FIVE INCH DISPLAY AIRCRAFT POWER CURRENT
Five Inch Display Aircraft Power Current (Amps)
Display Unit 28 VDC 18 VDC
ED 551 2.6 3.7
ED 551A 3.0 4.5
3.16.4.E. Control Panel Power Inputs


The CP 469A has two sets of power input pins. The two sets allow connection to two
separate aircraft power busses. The two busses are then diode isolated inside the con-
trol panel so that if one bus fails the other bus will continue to power the control panel
but will not feedback into the failed bus. The CP 469A consumes a maximum of 1.2
Amps from either or a combination of the two power bus inputs.
The CP 469A uses +27.5 Vdc Aircraft Power to power both its internal electronics and
to power its unit lighting. The lighting voltage inputs to the unit are used to set the light-
ing intensity but do not power the lighting.
P113F1-50 P466A1-50 P466B1-50 RIGHT SIDE +28 VDC

P113F1-34 P466A1-34 P466B1-34 LEFT SIDE +28 VDC
P113F1-46 P466A1-46 P466B1-46 RIGHT SIDE POWER RETURN

P113F1-45 P466A1-45 P466B1-45 LEFT SIDE POWER RETURN
The CP 113F, CP 466A, and CP 466B control panels have two sets of power input
pins.The two sets allow connection to two separate aircraft power busses. The two
busses are then diode isolated inside the display unit so that if one bus fails the other
bus will continue to power the display unit but will not feedback into the failed bus.
The CP 113F, CP 466A, and CP 466B consume a maximum of 0.1 Amps if 28 V light-
ing is used and consume a maximum of 0.36 Amps if 5 Vac lighting is used. Power may
be supplied from either combination of the two power bus inputs.
3.16.4.F. Switching Unit Power Inputs
P4631A-1 +27.5 VDC BUS 1 IN

P4631A-2 +27.5 VDC BUS 1 IN
P4631D-36 +27.5 VDC BUS 2 IN

P4631D-37 +27.5 VDC BUS 2 IN
P4631B-40 +27.5 VDC BUS 1/2 IN

P4631B-41 +27.5 VDC BUS 1/2 IN
P4631B-18 +27.5 VDC BUS 1/2 OUT

P4631B-42 +27.5 VDC BUS 1/2 OUT


The SU 463 spare relays are not powered by the SU 463 power supply inputs. Refer
to 3.2.4.5 Switching Unit Relays for information on power consumption of the SU 463
spare relays.
The three tube SU 463 switching unit has a single power input that supplies both the
pilot and MFD power supplies within the switching unit. The four tube SU 463 switching
unit has two separate power supply inputs that power two independent power supplies;
one for the pilot circuitry and one for the copilot circuitry. The five tube SU 463 switch-
ing unit has three separate power supply inputs that power three independent power
supplies; one for the pilot, one for the copilot and one for the MFD circuitry. Except in
the case of the BUS 1/2 power input as described below; each switching unit power
input should be connected to a separate circuit breaker and when installed in dual pow-
er bus aircraft connect the BUS 1 input to the pilot power bus and the BUS 2 input to
the copilot power bus.
The five tube switching units BUS 1/2 input may be connected to an MFD circuit break-
er or may be connected to the switching unit BUS 1/2 output. The BUS 1/2 output,
through relay switching inside the SU 463, draws power from either the BUS 1 or BUS
2 input. The BUS 1/2 output is normally connected to the BUS 1 input but is connected
to the BUS 2 input when the copilot has selected Standby (and the pilot has not simul-
taneously selected Standby).
The SU 463 has series voltage regulator power supplies and the unit current consump-
tion varies little with changes in the input voltage. The SU 463 consumes very little
power when no reversionary modes are selected; this power consumption is shown in
the table below as Standby. The maximum power supply consumption column in the
table below indicates the current consumption when the maximum number of rever-
sionary modes are simultaneously active.

TABLE 3-16 SU 463 AIRCRAFT POWER CURRENT
SU 463 Aircraft Power Current (milliamperes) - Not Including Spare Relays
Bus 1 Bus 2 Bus 1/2
Version Standby Maxi- Standby Maxi- Standby Maxi-

mum mum mum
EFS 40 Three Tube -0100 30 480 - - - -
EFS 40/EFS 50 Four Tube -0200 20 240 20 240 - -
EFS 40 Five Tube -0300 20 600 20 630 15 60
EFS 50 Three Tube -0400 30 330 - - - -
EFS 50 Five Tube -0500 20 440 20 470 15 30
3.16.4.G. Amplifier Adapter Power Inputs
P163A1-13 26 VAC POWER HI

P163A1-25 26 VAC POWER LO
The KA 163A consumes a maximum of 0.15 Amps.
3.16.4.H. Shield Grounds

NOTE
The Shield Ground pins may not be used for terminating the shields of shielded wire in
HIRF and Lightning approved installations.
P4611-20 P4621-20 SHIELD GROUND
P4631A-46 SHIELD GROUND

P4631B-48 SHIELD GROUND

P4631C-67 SHIELD GROUND

P4631D-59 SHIELD GROUND


P4632-84 SHIELD GROUND








P4671-46 P4681-46 P4691-46 SHIELD GROUND
P5511-G P551A1-G SHIELD GROUND

P5511-F P551A1-F SHIELD GROUND
The SHIELD GROUND pins are connected to chassis ground inside the unit and are
provided as a convenient grounding point for the shield of shielded wiring. The Shield
Ground pins may not be used for terminating the shields of shielded wire in HIRF and
Lightning approved installations.

3.16.4.I. HSI/ADI Grounds
P4641A-35 HSI GROUND

P4651A-24 HSI/ADI GROUND
These HSI, HSI/ADI ground pins may be used for low current ground reference pur-
poses such as connection to a voltmeter or an oscilloscope.
3.16.4.J. Oscilloscope Blanking
P4651A-83 P4641A-106 HSI SCOPE BLANKING
P4651B-80 ADI SCOPE BLANKING
The HSI and ADI displays can be viewed in a monochrome format on an oscilloscope.
The symbol generator X and Y deflection outputs are connected to the oscilloscope X
and Y deflection inputs. The symbol generator scope blanking output is then connect-
ed to the oscilloscope external Z axis input. The symbol generator scope blanking out-
put is +15 Vdc for blanking and less than 0.5 Vdc for not blanking.
3.16.4.K. EFS Test
P4651B-34 P4641C-72 EFS / TEST
The EFS / TEST input is for factory test applications only. Grounding this input allows
test programs to be down loaded into the symbol generator to facilitate factory testing
of the symbol generator. Grounding this input also allows maintenance pages to be dis-
played on the ADI display.
3.16.4.L. HSI and ADI Data Outputs
P4652B-89 P4641C-78 HSI DATA A

P4652B-103 P4641C-64 HSI DATA B
P4652B-76 ADI DATA A

P4652B-62 ADI DATA B
The HSI and ADI Data outputs are for test purposes only. These ARINC 429 type bus-
ses are used inside the symbol generator for communication between the HSI and ADI
sections of the symbol generator.
3.16.5 MISCELLANEOUS INTERFACES
Refer to Figure 3-165 for the Power and Ground interface.

THIS PAGE RESERVED

FIGURE 3-165 EFS 40/EFS 50 Power and Ground Interconnect

(Dwg No 155-01601-0067, Rev 1)

3.17 PIN FUNCTION LISTS
This section contains pin function lists of the EFS 40/EFS 50 system units.

THIS PAGE RESERVED

FIGURE 3-166 Configuration Module Connector P1

(Apr/92)

FIGURE 3-167 CP 113F Connector P113F1

(Apr/92)

FIGURE 3-168 KA 163A Connector P163A1

(Apr/92)

FIGURE 3-169 ED 461 Connector P4611

(Apr/92)


(Apr/92)

FIGURE 3-171 SU 463 Connector P4631A

SHEET 1 of 2 (Apr/92)

FIGURE 3-171 SU 463 Connector P4631A


FIGURE 3-172 SU 463 Connector P4631B


FIGURE 3-172 SU 463 Connector P4631B


FIGURE 3-173 SU 463 Connector P4631C

SHEET 1 of 2 (Aug/2000)

FIGURE 3-173 SU 463 Connector P4631C


FIGURE 3-174 SU 463 Connector P4631D


FIGURE 3-174 SU 463 Connector P4631D


FIGURE 3-175 SU 463 Connector P4632

(Apr/92)

FIGURE 3-176 SG 464 Connector P4641A

(Apr/92)

FIGURE 3-177 SG 464 Connector P4641B

(Apr/92)

FIGURE 3-178 SG 464 Connector P4641C

(Apr/92)


(Aug/2000)


(Aug/2000)


(Aug/2000)





FIGURE 3-183 CP 466A Connector P466A1

(Apr/92)

FIGURE 3-184 CP 466B Connector P466B1

(Apr/92)

FIGURE 3-185 CP 467 Connector P4671









(Apr/92)


(Aug/2000)


(Apr/92)

FIGURE 3-190 CP 470 Connector J4701

(Apr/92)


(Apr/92)

FIGURE 3-192 ED 551A Connector P551A1

(Aug/2000)

3.18 PIN DESIGNATOR /LINE NAME INDEX
3.18.1 Pin Designator Index
Pin number designators are listed in numerical order. Pin number designators men-
tioned in text are indexed to manual section. Pin number designators are indexed to
figure numbers of interconnect drawings.
3.18.1.1 Configuration Module - P1 Pin Designator Index
TABLE 3-17 Configuration Module - P1 Pin Designator Index
Pin
Configuration Module Line Name Section Figure
Designator
P1-1 POWER GROUND 3.2.4.Q 3-7
P1-2 SG TO CONFIG CHIP SELECT 1 3.2.4.Q 3-7
P1-3 NOT USED
P1-4 CONFIG TO SG DATA 3.2.4.Q 3-7
P1-5 +5 VDC POWER 3.2.4.Q 3-7
P1-6 SG TO CONFIG CLOCK 3.2.4.Q 3-7
P1-7 NOT USED
P1-8 SG TO CONFIG DATA 3.2.4.Q 3-7
3.18.1.2 CP 113F - P113F1 Pin Designator Index
TABLE 3-18 CP 113F - P113F1 Pin Designator Index
Pin
CP 113F Line Name Section Figure
Designator
P113F1-1 LIGHTING +5 VDC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P113F1-1 LIGHTING 5 VAC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P113F1-2 LIGHTING +28 VDC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P113F1-3 NOT USED
P113F1-4 NOT USED
P113F1-5 NOT USED

Pin
Designator
P113F1-6 NOT USED
P113F1-7 NOT USED
P113F1-8 429 OUT B 3.13 3-155
P113F1-9 LIGHTING LO 3.2.4.O 3-6
P113F1-10 NOT USED
P113F1-11 NOT USED
P113F1-12 NOT USED
P113F1-13 NOT USED
P113F1-14 NOT USED
P113F1-15 NOT USED
P113F1-16 NOT USED
P113F1-17 NOT USED
P113F1-18 NOT USED
P113F1-19 NOT USED
P113F1-20 NOT USED
P113F1-21 NOT USED
P113F1-22 NOT USED
P113F1-23 NOT USED
P113F1-24 NOT USED
P113F1-25 429 OUT A 3.13 3-155
P113F1-26 NOT USED
P113F1-27 NOT USED
P113F1-28 NOT USED
P113F1-29 NOT USED
P113F1-30 NOT USED
P113F1-31 NOT USED
P113F1-32 NOT USED
P113F1-33 NOT USED
P113F1-34 LEFT SIDE +28 VDC 3.16.4.E 3-165
P113F1-35 NOT USED
P113F1-36 NOT USED
P113F1-37 R/T ON/OFF 3.13 3-155

Pin
Designator
P113F1-38 NOT USED
P113F1-39 NOT USED
P113F1-40 NOT USED
P113F1-41 NOT USED
P113F1-42 NOT USED
P113F1-43 NOT USED
P113F1-44 NOT USED
P113F1-45 LEFT SIDE POWER RETURN 3.16.4.E 3-165
P113F1-46 RIGHT SIDE POWER RETURN 3.16.4.E 3-165
P113F1-47 NOT USED
P113F1-48 NOT USED
P113F1-49 NOT USED
P113F1-50 RIGHT SIDE +28 VDC 3.16.4.E 3-165
3.18.1.3 CP 466A - P466A1 Pin Designator Index
TABLE 3-19 CP 466A - P466A1 Pin Designator Index
Pin
CP 466A Line Name Section Figure
Designator
P466A1-1 LIGHTING +5 VDC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P466A1-1 LIGHTING 5 VAC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P466A1-2 LIGHTING +28 VDC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P466A1-3 EXTERNAL LIGHTING OUT
P466A1-4 NOT USED
P466A1-5 NOT USED
P466A1-6 NOT USED
P466A1-7 NOT USED
P466A1-8 429 OUT B 3.13 3-155, 3-157,

3-160B, 3-160C,
3-160D
P466A1-9 LIGHTING LO 3.2.4.O 3-6
P466A1-10 NOT USED

Pin
Designator
P466A1-11 NOT USED
P466A1-12 NOT USED
P466A1-13 NOT USED
P466A1-14 NOT USED
P466A1-15 NOT USED
P466A1-16 NOT USED
P466A1-17 NOT USED
P466A1-18 NOT USED
P466A1-19 NOT USED
P466A1-20 NOT USED
P466A1-21 NOT USED
P466A1-22 NOT USED
P466A1-23 NOT USED
P466A1-24 NOT USED
P466A1-25 429 OUT A 3.13 3-155, 3-157,

3-160B, 3-160C,
3-160D
P466A1-26 NOT USED
P466A1-27 NOT USED
P466A1-28 NOT USED
P466A1-29 NOT USED
P466A1-30 NOT USED
P466A1-31 NOT USED
P466A1-32 NOT USED
P466A1-33 NOT USED
P466A1-34 LEFT SIDE +28 VDC 3.16.4.E 3-165
P466A1-35 PANEL RETURN
P466A1-36 NOT USED
P466A1-37 R/T ON/OFF 3.13 3-155, 3-157,

3-160B, 3-160C,
3-160D
P466A1-38 NOT USED
P466A1-39 NOT USED

Pin
Designator
P466A1-40 NOT USED
P466A1-41 NOT USED
P466A1-42 CHASSIS GROUND
P466A1-43 NOT USED
P466A1-44 NOT USED
P466A1-45 LEFT SIDE POWER RETURN 3.16.4.E 3-165
P466A1-46 RIGHT SIDE POWER RETURN 3.16.4.E 3-165
P466A1-47 NOT USED
P466A1-48 NOT USED
P466A1-49 REMOTE GROUND
P466A1-50 RIGHT SIDE +28 VDC 3.16.4.E 3-165
3.18.1.4 CP 466B - P466B1 Pin Designator Index
TABLE 3-20 CP 466B - P466B1 Pin Designator Index
Pin
CP 466B Line Name Section Figure
Designator
P466B1-1 LIGHTING +5 VDC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P466B1-1 LIGHTING 5 VAC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P466B1-2 LIGHTING +28 VDC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P466B1-3 EXTERNAL LIGHTING OUT
P466B1-4 NOT USED
P466B1-5 NOT USED
P466B1-6 NOT USED
P466B1-7 NOT USED
P466B1-8 429 OUT B 3.13 3-155, 3-157,

3-160B, 3-160C,
3-160D
P466B1-9 LIGHTING LO 3.2.4.O 3-6
P466B1-10 NOT USED
P466B1-11 NOT USED
P466B1-12 NOT USED

Pin
Designator
P466B1-13 NOT USED
P466B1-14 NOT USED
P466B1-15 NOT USED
P466B1-16 NOT USED
P466B1-17 NOT USED
P466B1-18 NOT USED
P466B1-19 NOT USED
P466B1-20 NOT USED
P466B1-21 NOT USED
P466B1-22 NOT USED
P466B1-23 NOT USED
P466B1-24 NOT USED
P466B1-25 429 OUT A 3.13 3-155, 3-157,

3-160B, 3-160C,
3-160D
P466B1-26 NOT USED
P466B1-27 NOT USED
P466B1-28 NOT USED
P466B1-29 NOT USED
P466B1-30 NOT USED
P466B1-31 NOT USED
P466B1-32 NOT USED
P466B1-33 NOT USED
P466B1-34 LEFT SIDE +28 VDC 3.16.4.E 3-165
P466B1-35 PANEL RETURN
P466B1-36 NOT USED
P466B1-37 R/T ON/OFF 3.13 3-155, 3-157,

3-160B, 3-160C,
3-160D
P466B1-38 NOT USED
P466B1-39 NOT USED
P466B1-40 NOT USED
P466B1-41 NOT USED

Pin
Designator
P466B1-42 CHASSIS GROUND
P466B1-43 NOT USED
P466B1-44 NOT USED
P466B1-45 LEFT SIDE POWER RETURN 3.16.4.E 3-165
P466B1-46 RIGHT SIDE POWER RETURN 3.16.4.E 3-165
P466B1-47 NOT USED
P466B1-48 NOT USED
P466B1-49 REMOTE GROUND
P466B1-50 RIGHT SIDE +28 VDC 3.16.4.E 3-165
3.18.1.5 KA 163A - P163A1 Pin Designator Index
TABLE 3-21 KA 163A - P163A1 Pin Designator Index
Pin
KA 163A Line Name Section Figure
Designator
P163A1-1 PITCH/ROLL COMMAND OUT GROUND 3.12.4.W 3-154
P163A1-2 PITCH COMMAND +UP IN 3.12.4.W 3-154
P163A1-3 SPARE
P163A1-4 NO CONNECT
P163A1-5 SPARE
P163A1-6 KEY
P163A1-7 CHASSIS GROUND 3-154
P163A1-8 ROLL COMMAND +RIGHT IN 3.12.4.W 3-154
P163A1-9 ROLL COMMAND +RIGHT OUT 3.12.4.W 3-154
P163A1-10 NO CONNECT
P163A1-13 26 VAC POWER HI 3.16.4.G 3-154, 3-165
P163A1-14 PITCH COMMAND +DOWN IN 3.12.4.W 3-154
P163A1-16 PITCH COMMAND +UP OUT 3.12.4.W 3-154

TABLE 3-21 KA 163A - P163A1 Pin Designator Index
Pin
Designator
P163A1-18 SPARE
P163A1-20 ROLL COMMAND +LEFT IN 3.12.4.W 3-154
P163A1-25 26 VAC POWER LO 3.16.4.G 3-154, 3-165
3.18.1.6 ED 461 - P4611 Pin Designator Index
TABLE 3-22 ED 461 - P4611 Pin Designator Index
Pin
ED 461 Line Name Section Figure
Designator
P4611-1 +27.5 VDC FILTERED POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-22, 3-37
P4611-2 GROUND 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-22, 3-37
P4611-3 DISPLAY DOWN 3.2.4.M 3-13, 3-25, 3-40
P4611-4 COURSE 2 3.2.4.I 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-21,

3-36
P4611-5 COURSE 1 3.2.4.I 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-21,

3-36
P4611-6 NOT USED
P4611-7* LIGHTING 28 VOLTS 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4611-8 LIGHTING LO 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4611-9 MODE 1 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-21,

3-36, 3-161
P4611-10 MODE 2 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-21,

3-36, 3-161
P4611-11 MODE 3 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-21,

3-36, 3-161
P4611-12 MODE 4 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-21,

3-36, 3-161

Pin
Designator
P4611-14 HEADING 2 3.2.4.H 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-21,

3-36
P4611-15 HEADING 1 3.2.4.H 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-21,

3-36
P4611-16 +7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-3, 3-4, 3-10,

3-22, 3-37
P4611-17 +15 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-22, 3-37
P4611-18 NOT USED
P4611-19 GROUND 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-22, 3-37
P4611-20 SHIELD GROUND 3.16.4.H
P4611-21 DISPLAY DOWN RETURN 3.2.4.M 3-40
P4611-22 VIDEO BLUE LO 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-23, 3-38
P4611-23 NOT USED
P4611-24 RETURN 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-21,

3-36, 3-161
P4611-25 NOT USED
P4611-26 NOT USED
P4611-27 MODE LO 3.2.4.D 3-12, 3-24, 3-39
P4611-28 MODE HI 3.2.4.D 3-12, 3-24, 3-39
P4611-29 POLARIZER KEY
P4611-30 SPARE
P4611-31 SPARE
P4611-32 NOT USED
P4611-33 +30 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-22, 3-37
P4611-34 +85 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-22, 3-37
P4611-35 NOT USED
P4611-36 GROUND 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-22, 3-37
P4611-37 VIDEO BLUE Hl 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-23, 3-38
P4611-38 VIDEO RED LO 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-23, 3-38
P4611-39 VIDEO RED HI 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-23, 3-38
P4611-40 VIDEO GREEN LO 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-23, 3-38
P4611-41 VIDEO GREEN HI 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-23, 3-38

Pin
Designator
P4611-42 DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3.2.4.E 3-11, 3-23, 3-38
P4611-43 Y DEFLECTION HI 3.2.4.C 3-12, 3-24, 3-39
P4611-44 Y DEFLECTION LO 3.2.4.C 3-12, 3-24, 3-39
P4611-45 X DEFLECTION HI 3.2.4.C 3-12, 3-24, 3-39
P4611-46 X DEFLECTION LO 3.2.4.C 3-12, 3-24, 3-39
P4611-47 NOT USED
P4611-48 -7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-22, 3-37
P4611-49 -30 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-22, 3-37
P4611-50 -15 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-22, 3-37
*Part number or configuration dependent
Pin
Designator
P4621-1 +27.5 VDC FILTERED POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-33, 3-37,
3-51, 3-55, 3-73,
3-77, 3-95, 3-99
P4621-2 GROUND 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-33, 3-37,

3-51, 3-55, 3-73,
3-77, 3-95, 3-99
P4621-3 DISPLAY DOWN 3.2.4.M 3-13, 3-40, 3-58,

3-80, 3-102
P4621-4 NOT USED
P4621-5 NOT USED
P4621-6 NOT USED
P4621-8 LIGHTING LO 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4621-9 NOT USED
P4621-10 NOT USED
P4621-11 NOT USED
P4621-12 NOT USED

Pin
Designator
P4621-14 NOT USED
P4621-15 NOT USED
P4621-16 +7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-33, 3-37,

3-51, 3-55, 3-73,
3-77, 3-95, 3-99
P4621-17 +15 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-33, 3-37,

3-51, 3-55, 3-73,
3-77, 3-95, 3-99
P4621-18 NOT USED
P4621-19 GROUND 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-33, 3-37,

3-51, 3-55, 3-73,
3-77, 3-95, 3-99
P4621-21 DISPLAY DOWN RETURN 3.2.4.M 3-40, 3-58, 3-80,

3-102
P4621-22 VIDEO BLUE LO 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-34, 3-38,

3-52, 3-56, 3-74,
3-78, 3-96, 3-100
P4621-23 BRIGHTNESS RETURN 3.2.4.P 3-6
P4621-24 NOT USED
P4621-25 NOT USED
P4621-26 BRIGHTNESS 3.2.4.P 3-6
P4621-27 MODE LO 3.2.4.D 3-12, 3-35, 3-39,

3-53, 3-57, 3-75,
3-79, 3-97, 3-101
P4621-28 MODE HI 3.2.4.D 3-12, 3-35, 3-39,

3-53, 3-57, 3-75,
3-79, 3-97, 3-101
P4621-30 SPARE
P4621-31 SPARE
P4621-32 NOT USED
P4621-33 +30 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-33, 3-37,

3-51, 3-55, 3-73,
3-77, 3-95, 3-99
P4621-34 +85 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-33, 3-37,

3-51, 3-55, 3-73,
3-77, 3-95, 3-99

Pin
Designator
P4621-35 NOT USED
P4621-36 GROUND 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-33, 3-37,

3-51, 3-55, 3-73,
3-77, 3-95, 3-99
P4621-37 VIDEO BLUE Hl 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-34, 3-38,

3-52, 3-56, 3-74,
3-78, 3-96, 3-100
P4621-38 VIDEO RED LO 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-34, 3-38,

3-52, 3-56, 3-74,
3-78, 3-96, 3-100
P4621-39 VIDEO RED HI 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-34, 3-38,

3-52, 3-56, 3-74,
3-78, 3-96, 3-100
P4621-40 VIDEO GREEN LO 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-34, 3-38,

3-52, 3-56, 3-74,
3-78, 3-96, 3-100
P4621-41 VIDEO GREEN HI 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-34, 3-38,

3-52, 3-56, 3-74,
3-78, 3-96, 3-100
P4621-42 DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3.2.4.E 3-11, 3-34, 3-38,

3-52, 3-56, 3-74,
3-78, 3-96, 3-100
P4621-43 Y DEFLECTION HI 3.2.4.C 3-12, 3-35, 3-39,

3-53, 3-57, 3-75,
3-79, 3-97, 3-101
P4621-44 Y DEFLECTION LO 3.2.4.C 3-12, 3-35, 3-39,

3-53, 3-57, 3-75,
3-79, 3-97, 3-101
P4621-45 X DEFLECTION HI 3.2.4.C 3-12, 3-35, 3-39,

3-53, 3-57, 3-75,
3-79, 3-97, 3-101
P4621-46 X DEFLECTION LO 3.2.4.C 3-12, 3-35, 3-39,

3-53, 3-57, 3-75,
3-79, 3-97, 3-101
P4621-47 NOT USED
P4621-48 -7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-33, 3-37,

3-51, 3-55, 3-73,
3-77, 3-95, 3-99
P4621-49 -30 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-33, 3-37,

3-51, 3-55, 3-73,
3-77, 3-95, 3-99
P4621-50 -15 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-33, 3-37,

3-51, 3-55, 3-73,
3-77, 3-95, 3-99

3.18.1.8 SU 463 - P4631A Pin Designator Index
TABLE 3-24 SU 463 - P4631A Pin Designator Index
Pin
SU 463 Line Name Section Figure
Designator
P4631A-1 +27.5 VDC BUS 1 IN 3.16.4.F 3-55, 3-59, 3-70,
3-81, 3-92, 3-103,
3-114, 3-165
P4631A-2 +27.5 VDC BUS 1 IN 3.16.4.F 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3-92, 3-103, 3-114
3-165
P4631A-3 SG 1 ADI X DEFLECTION HI 3-53, 3-64, 3-75,

3-86, 3-97, 3-108
P4631A-4 SG 1 ADI X DEFLECTION LO 3-53, 3-64, 3-75,

3-86, 3-97, 3-108
P4631A-5 SG 1 ADI Y DEFLECTION HI 3-53, 3-64, 3-75,

3-86, 3-97, 3-108
P4631A-6 SG 1 ADI Y DEFLECTION LO 3-53, 3-64, 3-75,

3-86, 3-97, 3-108
P4631A-7 DU 1 ADI X DEFLECTION HI 3-53, 3-64, 3-75,

3-86, 3-97, 3-108
P4631A-8 DU 1 ADI X DEFLECTION LO 3-53, 3-64, 3-75,

3-86, 3-97, 3-108
P4631A-9 DU 1 ADI Y DEFLECTION HI 3-53, 3-64, 3-75,

3-86, 3-97, 3-108
P4631A-10 DU 1 ADI Y DEFLECTION LO 3-53, 3-64, 3-75,

3-86, 3-97, 3-108
P4631A-11* DISPLAY DOWN ANNUNCIATE 3.2.4.T 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-11* DISPLAY DOWN (1) ANNUNCIATE 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631A-12* SG 1 ADI +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER 3-58, 3-80, 3-102,

3-106
P4631A-12* +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER BUS 1 3-62, 3-84
P4631A-13 POWER GROUND 3.2.4.T, 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3.16.4.F 3-92, 3-103, 3-114
3-165
P4631A-14* SG 1 ADI +27.5 VDC FILTERED POWER 3-51, 3-95
P4631A-14* SPARE RELAY 15A COMMON 3-82, 3-93
P4631A-15* SG 1 ADI GROUND 3-51, 3-95

Pin
Designator
P4631A-16* SG 1 ADI GROUND 3-51, 3-95
P4631A-17* SG 1 ADI GROUND 3-51, 3-95
P4631A-18* SG 1 ADI -7 VDC POWER 3-51, 3-95
P4631A-18* SPARE RELAY 15B COMMON 3-82, 3-93
P4631A-19* SG 1 ADI +15 VDC POWER 3-51, 3-95
P4631A-21* AIRCRAFT POWER 3-58
P4631A-21* AIRCRAFT POWER BUS 3-62
P4631A-21* AIRCRAFT POWER BUS 1 3-80, 3-84, 3-102,

3-106
P4631A-22* AIRCRAFT POWER BUS 1 3-80, 3-102
P4631A-23* COMPOSITE ANNUNCIATE 3.2.4.T 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-23* COMPOSITE (1) ANNUNCIATE 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631A-24* STANDBY ANNUNCIATE 3.2.4.T 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-24* COPY (1) ANNUNCIATE 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92
P4631A-24* STANDBY (1) ANNUNCIATE 3.2.4.T 3-103, 3-114
P4631A-25 SG 1 ADI +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER 3-58, 3-80, 3-102
P4631A-26 POWER GROUND 3.2.4.T, 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3.16.4.F 3-92, 3-103, 3-114
3-165
P4631A-27* DU 1 ADI +27.5 VDC FILTERED POWER 3-51, 3-95
P4631A-27* SPARE RELAY 15B NORMALLY OPEN 3-82, 3-93
P4631A-28* DU 1 ADI +15 VDC POWER 3-51, 3-95
P4631A-29* DU 1 ADI -7 VDC POWER 3-51, 3-95
P4631A-29* SPARE RELAY 16A NORMALLY OPEN 3-82, 3-93
P4631A-29* SPARE RELAY 16B NORMALLY CLOSE
P4631A-30* DU 1 ADI GROUND 3-51, 3-95
P4631A-31* DU 1 ADI GROUND 3-51, 3-95
P4631A-32* DU 1 ADI GROUND 3-51, 3-95

Pin
Designator
P4631A-34* SG 1 ADI +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER 3-58, 3-80, 3-102
P4631A-35* SPARE RELAY 15A NORMALLY CLOSE 3-82, 3-93
P4631A-36* SPARE ANNUNCIATE 3.2.4.T 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-36* SPARE (1) ANNUNCIATE 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631A-37* DUAL STANDBY ANNUNCIATE 3-103, 3-114

3-106
P4631A-41* SPARE RELAY 15B NORMALLY CLOSE 3-82, 3-93
P4631A-42* MFD SG SWITCH RETURN 3-113
P4631A-42* DUAL STANDBY NORMALLY OPEN 3-103
P4631A-43* COMPOSITE NORMALLY CLOSE 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-43* COMPOSITE (1) NORMALLY CLOSE 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631A-44* HSI COPY (1) NORMALLY CLOSE 3-81, 3-92
P4631A-44* SPARE NORMALLY CLOSE 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-44* SPARE (1) NORMALLY CLOSE 3-103, 3-114
P4631A-45 SPARE LOGIC OUTPUT 5 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3-92, 3-103, 3-114
P4631A-46 SHIELD GROUND 3.16.4.H

Pin
Designator
P4631A-47* ADI 1 -30 VDC POWER/ +85 VDC POWER 3-51, 3-95
ENABLE
P4631A-47* SPARE RELAY 20 ENABLE 3-71
P4631A-48* SPARE RELAY 16A NORMALLY OPEN
P4631A-48* SPARE RELAY 20B COMMON
P4631A-48* SPARE RELAY 9B COMMON 3-115
P4631A-49* SPARE RELAY 20A COMMON 3-71
P4631A-50* SPARE RELAY 16 ENABLE 3-82, 3-93
P4631A-50* SPARE RELAY 9B NORMALLY CLOSE 3-115
P4631A-51* SPARE RELAY 20A NORMALLY CLOSE 3-71
P4631A-52* ADI STBY (1) OR HSI STBY (1) OUT 3-103, 3-114
P4631A-52* SG 1 ADI COPY 3-81, 3-92
P4631A-53* COMPOSITE NORMALLY OPEN 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-53* COMPOSITE (1) NORMALLY OPEN 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631A-55* HSI COPY (1) NORMALLY OPEN 3-81, 3-92
P4631A-55* SPARE NORMALLY OPEN 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-55* SPARE (1) NORMALLY OPEN 3-103, 3-114
P4631A-56* DISPLAY DOWN NORMALLY CLOSE 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-56* DISPLAY DOWN (1) NORMALLY CLOSE 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114

Pin
Designator
P4631A-57* ADI COPY (1) NORMALLY CLOSE 3-81, 3-92
P4631A-57* STANDBY NORMALLY CLOSE 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-57* STANDBY (1) NORMALLY CLOSE 3-103, 3-114
P4631A-58* DUAL STANDBY NORMALLY CLOSE 3-103

3-92, 3-103, 3-114

3-92, 3-103, 3-114

3-92, 3-103, 3-114

3-92, 3-103, 3-114

3-92, 3-103, 3-114
P4631A-64* HSI STBY (1) OUT OR HSI STBY (2) OUT 3-99, 3-103, 3-114
P4631A-66 CHASSIS GROUND 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3-92, 3-103, 3-114
P4631A-67* ADI COPY (1) NORMALLY OPEN 3-81, 3-92
P4631A-67* STANDBY NORMALLY OPEN 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-67* STANDBY (1) NORMALLY OPEN 3-103, 3-114
P4631A-68* DISPLAY DOWN NORMALLY OPEN 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-68* DISPLAY DOWN (1) NORMALLY OPEN 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631A-69* MFD SG COPY 3-113
P4631A-69* DUAL STANDBY COMMON 3-103
P4631A-70* HSI COPY (1) COMMON 3-81, 3-92
P4631A-70* SPARE (1) COMMON 3-103, 3-114
P4631A-70* SPARE COMMON 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-71* HSI COPY (1) SELECT OUT 3-81, 3-92
P4631A-71* SPARE SELECT OUT 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-71* SPARE (1) SELECT OUT 3-103, 3-114
P4631A-72* ADI COPY (1) SELECT OUT 3-81, 3-92
P4631A-72* STANDBY SELECT OUT 3-51, 3-55, 3-59,

3-70

Pin
Designator
P4631A-72* STANDBY (1) SELECT OUT 3-95, 3-99, 3-103,
3-114
P4631A-73* COMPOSITE SELECT OUT 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-73* COMPOSITE (1) SELECT OUT 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631A-74* DISPLAY DOWN SELECT OUT 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-74* DISPLAY DOWN (1) SELECT OUT 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631A-75 SWITCH RETURN 3.2.4.T 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3-92, 3-103, 3-114
P4631A-76* SPARE SELECT IN 3.2.4.T 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-76* SPARE (1) SELECT IN 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631A-77* COPY (1) SELECT IN 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92
P4631A-77* STANDBY SELECT IN 3.2.4.T 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-77* STANDBY (1) SELECT IN 3.2.4.T 3-103, 3-114
P4631A-78* COMPOSITE SELECT IN 3.2.4.T 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-78* COMPOSITE (1) SELECT IN 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631A-79* DISPLAY DOWN SELECT IN 3.2.4.T 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-79* DISPLAY DOWN (1) SELECT IN 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631A-80* ADI COPY (1) COMMON 3-81, 3-92
P4631A-80* STANDBY (1) COMMON 3-103, 3-114
P4631A-80* STANDBY COMMON 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-81* COMPOSITE COMMON 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-81* COMPOSITE (1) COMMON 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631A-82* DISPLAY DOWN COMMON 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-82* DISPLAY DOWN (1) COMMON 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631A-83* STANDBY (2) AND NOT STANDBY (1) OUT 3-103, 3-114
P4631A-84* DUAL STANDBY SELECT OUT 3-103, 3-114
P4631A-85 SG 1 ADI DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3-52, 3-63, 3-74,

3-85, 3-96, 3-107

Pin
Designator
P4631A-86 DU 1 ADI VIDEO RED HI 3-52, 3-63, 3-74,
3-85, 3-96, 3-107
P4631A-87 DU 1 ADI VIDEO RED LO 3-52, 3-63, 3-74,

3-85, 3-96, 3-107
P4631A-88 DU 1 ADI VIDEO GREEN HI 3-52, 3-63, 3-74,

3-85, 3-96, 3-107
P4631A-89 DU 1 ADI VIDEO GREEN LO 3-52, 3-63, 3-74,

3-85, 3-96, 3-107
P4631A-90 DU 1 ADI VIDEO BLUE HI 3-52, 3-63, 3-74,

3-85, 3-96, 3-107
P4631A-91 DU 1 ADI VIDEO BLUE LO 3-52, 3-63, 3-74,

3-85, 3-96, 3-107
P4631A-92 DU 1 ADI MODE HI 3-53, 3-64, 3-75,

3-86, 3-97, 3-108
P4631A-93 DU 1 ADI MODE LO 3-53, 3-64, 3-75,

3-86, 3-97, 3-108
P4631A-94 SG 1 DISPLAY DOWN 3-58, 3-69, 3-80,

3-91, 3-102, 3-113
P4631A-95 DU 1 HSI DISPLAY DOWN 3-58, 3-69, 3-80,

3-91, 3-102, 3-113
P4631A-96 SG 1 SWITCH RETURN 3-58, 3-69, 3-80,

3-91, 3-102, 3-113
P4631A-96 SWITCH RETURN 3-81, 3-92
P4631A-97 DU 1 HSI DISPLAY DOWN RETURN 3-58, 3-69, 3-80,

3-91, 3-102, 3-113
P4631A-98 DU 1 ADI DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3-52, 3-63, 3-74,

3-85, 3-96, 3-107
P4631A-99 SG 1 ADI VIDEO RED HI 3-52, 3-63, 3-74,

3-85, 3-96, 3-107
P4631A-100 SG 1 ADI VIDEO RED LO 3-52, 3-63, 3-74,

3-85, 3-96, 3-107
P4631A-101 SG 1 ADI VIDEO GREEN HI 3-52, 3-63, 3-74,

3-85, 3-96, 3-107
P4631A-102 SG 1 ADI VIDEO GREEN LO 3-52, 3-63, 3-74,

3-85, 3-96, 3-107
P4631A-103 SG 1 ADI VIDEO BLUE HI 3-52, 3-63, 3-74,

3-85, 3-96, 3-107
P4631A-104 SG 1 ADI VIDEO BLUE LO 3-52, 3-63, 3-74,

3-85, 3-96, 3-107

Pin
Designator
P4631A-105 SG 1 ADI MODE HI 3-53, 3-64, 3-75,
3-86, 3-97, 3-108
P4631A-106 SG 1 ADI MODE LO 3-53, 3-64, 3-75,

3-86, 3-97, 3-108
3.18.1.9 SU 463 - P4631B Pin Designator Index
TABLE 3-25 SU 463 - P4631B Pin Designator Index
Pin
Designator
P4631B-1* MFD SG ADI X DEFLECTION HI 3-53, 3-64, 3-97,
3-108
P4631B-1* DU 2 HSI X DEFLECTION HI 3-79, 3-90
P4631B-2* MFD SG ADI X DEFLECTION LO 3-53, 3-64, 3-97,

3-108
P4631B-2* DU 2 HSI X DEFLECTION LO 3-79, 3-90
P4631B-3* MFD SG ADI Y DEFLECTION HI 3-53, 3-64, 3-97,

3-108
P4631B-3* DU 2 HSI Y DEFLECTION HI 3-79, 3-90
P4631B-4* MFD SG ADI Y DEFLECTION LO 3-53, 3-64, 3-97,

3-108
P4631B-4* DU 2 HSI Y DEFLECTION LO 3-79, 3-90
P4631B-5* MFD SG HSI X DEFLECTION HI 3-57, 3-68, 3-101,

3-112
P4631B-5* SG 2 HSI X DEFLECTION HI 3-79, 3-90
P4631B-6* MFD SG HSI X DEFLECTION LO 3-57, 3-68, 3-101,

3-112
P4631B-6* SG 2 HSI X DEFLECTION LO 3-79, 3-90
P4631B-7* MFD SG HSI Y DEFLECTION HI 3-57, 3-68, 3-101,

3-112
P4631B-7* SG 2 HSI ADI Y DEFLECTION HI 3-79, 3-90
P4631B-8* MFD SG HSI Y DEFLECTION LO 3-57, 3-68, 3-101,

3-112
P4631B-8* SG 2 HSI ADI Y DEFLECTION LO 3-79, 3-90

Pin
Designator
P4631B-9* SPARE RELAY 18B NORMALLY OPEN 3-82, 3-93
P4631B-9* SPARE RELAY 24B NORMALLY OPEN 3-71
P4631B-10* MFD SG ADI -7 VDC POWER 3-51, 3-95
P4631B-10* SPARE RELAY 5-8 POWER 3-82, 3-93
P4631B-11* MFD SG ADI +15 VDC POWER 3-51, 3-95
P4631B-11* SPARE RELAY 6A NORMALLY CLOSE 3-82, 3-93
P4631B-12* SPARE RELAY 6B NORMALLY CLOSE 3-82, 3-93
P4631B-13* MFD SG ADI GROUND 3-51, 3-95
P4631B-16* MFD SG ADI +27.5 VDC FILTERED POWER 3-51, 3-95
P4631B-17* SPARE RELAY 6 ENABLE 3-82, 3-93
P4631B-18* +27.5 VDC BUS 1/2 OUT 3.16.4.F 3-103, 3-114,

3-165
P4631B-19* MFD DU HSI -15 VDC POWER 3-55, 3-99
P4631B-19* SPARE RELAY 26A NORMALLY CLOSE 3-71
P4631B-20* MFD DU HSI GROUND 3-55, 3-99
P4631B-22* MFD SG HSI +30 VDC POWER 3-55, 3-99

Pin
Designator
P4631B-22* SPARE RELAY 20B COMMON 3-82, 3-93
P4631B-22* SPARE RELAY 26B COMMON 3-71
P4631B-23* SPARE RELAY 19A NORMALLY OPEN 3-82, 3-93
P4631B-23* SPARE RELAY 25A NORMALLY OPEN 3-71
P4631B-25* MFD SG HSI +7 VDC POWER
P4631B-25* SPARE RELAY 18B COMMON
P4631B-26* MFD SG HSI GROUND 3-55, 3-99
P4631B-27* MFD SG HSI +27.5 VDC FILTERED POWER 3-55, 3-99
P4631B-27* SPARE RELAY 17A COMMON 3-82, 3-93
P4631B-27* SPARE RELAY 23A COMMON 3-71

Pin
Designator
P4631B-31* SPARE RELAY 23B NORMALLY CLOSE 3-71
P4631B-32* MFD DU HSI +30 VDC POWER 3-55, 3-99
P4631B-36* MFD SG HSI -15 VDC POWER 3-55, 3-99
P4631B-38 SPARE RELAY 25A COMMON 3-71

Pin
Designator
P4631B-40* +27.5 VDC BUS 1/2 IN 3.16.4.F 3-103, 3-114,

3-165
P4631B-41* +27.5 VDC BUS 1/2 IN 3.16.4.F 3-103, 3-114,

3-165
P4631B-41* SPARE RELAY 7 ENABLE 3-60, 3-71, 3-82,

3-93
P4631B-42* +27.5 VDC BUS 1/2 OUT 3.16.4.F 3-99, 3-103,

3-114, 3-165

3-93
P4631B-43* MFD DU HSI +27.5 VDC FILTERED POWER 3-55, 3-99

Pin
Designator
P4631B-48 SHIELD GROUND 3.16.4.H
P4631B-49* SPARE RELAY 19A COMMON
P4631B-50* MFD SG HSI DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3-56, 3-67, 3-100,

3-111
P4631B-50* SG 2 HSI DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3-78, 3-89
P4631B-52* SPARE RELAY 5-8 POWER
P4631B-55* MFD SG DU HSI -30 VDC POWER 3-99
P4631B-55* MFD HSI -30 VDC POWER NORMALLY OPEN
P4631B-56* MFD SG DU HSI +85 VDC POWER 3-99
P4631B-56* MFD HSI +85 VDC POWER NORMALLY OPEN

Pin
Designator
P4631B-57* MFD HSI +27.5 VDC FILT PWR/ GND ENABLE 3-55, 3-99
P4631B-57* SPARE RELAY 23 ENABLE 3-71
P4631B-58* MFD HSI GROUND/ +7 VDC POWER ENABLE 3-55, 3-99
P4631B-60* MFD HSI -7 VDC/ +15 VDC POWER ENABLE 3-55, 3-99
P4631B-63* MFD HSI POWER RELAY POWER 3-55, 3-99
P4631B-63* SPARE RELAY 23-26 POWER 3-71
P4631B-64* MFD DU DISPLAY DOWN 3-69, 3-113
P4631B-65* MFD DU DISPLAY DOWN RETURN 3-69, 3-113
P4631B-67* MFD SG CONTROL PANEL DH SELECT 1 3-98, 3-109
P4631B-67* SPARE RELAY 7B NORMALLY CLOSE 3-60, 3-71, 3-82,

3-93

Pin
Designator
P4631B-68* SPARE RELAY 8A NORMALLY CLOSE 3-60, 3-71, 3-82,

3-93
P4631B-69* MFD SG CONTROL PANEL DH ON 3-98, 3-109

3-93
P4631B-70* MFD COMPOSITE 3-58, 3-69, 3-102,

3-113
P4631B-70* SG 2 COMPOSITE 3-80, 3-91
P4631B-71* MFD SWITCH RETURN 3-58, 3-69, 3-102,

3-113
P4631B-71* SG 2 COPY 3-80, 3-91
P4631B-72* MFD XTALK RECEIVER A 3-102, 3-113
P4631B-73* MFD XTALK RECEIVER B 3-102, 3-113
P4631B-74* MFD XTALK TRANSMITTER A 3-102, 3-113
P4631B-75* MFD XTALK TRANSMITTER B 3-102, 3-113
P4631B-76* MFD SLAVED 1/2 3-102, 3-113
P4631B-77* MFD/ HSI 3-58, 3-69, 3-102,

3-113
P4631B-78* MFD STANDBY 3-58, 3-69, 3-102,

3-113

Pin
Designator
P4631B-80* MFD SG CONTROL PANEL MODE 4 3-98, 3-109
P4631B-80* SPARE RELAY 7A NORMALLY OPEN 3-60, 3-71, 3-82,

3-93
P4631B-81* MFD SG CONTROL PANEL HEADING 1 3-98, 3-109
P4631B-81* SPARE RELAY 7B NORMALLY OPEN 3-60, 3-71, 3-82,

3-93

3-93
P4631B-83* MFD SG CONTROL PANEL COURSE 1 3-98, 3-109

3-93

3-93
P4631B-85* MFD SG ADI DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3-52, 3-63, 3-96,

3-107
P4631B-85* DU 2 HSI DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3-78, 3-89
P4631B-86* MFD SG ADI VIDEO RED HI 3-52, 3-63, 3-96,

3-107
P4631B-86* DU 2 HSI VIDEO RED HI 3-78, 3-89
P4631B-87* MFD SG ADI VIDEO RED LO 3-52, 3-63, 3-96,

3-107
P4631B-87* DU 2 HSI VIDEO RED LO 3-78, 3-89
P4631B-88* MFD SG ADI VIDEO GREEN HI 3-52, 3-63, 3-96,

3-107
P4631B-88* DU 2 HSI VIDEO GREEN HI 3-78, 3-89
P4631B-89* MFD SG ADI VIDEO GREEN LO 3-52, 3-63, 3-96,

3-107
P4631B-89* DU 2 HSI VIDEO GREEN LO 3-78, 3-89
P4631B-90* MFD SG ADI VIDEO BLUE HI 3-52, 3-63, 3-96,

3-107
P4631B-90* DU 2 HSI VIDEO BLUE HI 3-78, 3-89
P4631B-91* MFD SG ADI VIDEO BLUE LO 3-52, 3-63, 3-96,

3-107

Pin
Designator
P4631B-91* DU 2 HSI VIDEO BLUE LO 3-78, 3-89
P4631B-92* MFD SG ADI MODE HI 3-53, 3-64, 3-97,

3-108
P4631B-92* DU 2 HSI MODE HI 3-79, 3-90
P4631B-93* MFD SG ADI MODE LO 3-53, 3-64, 3-97,

3-108
P4631B-93* DU 2 HSI MODE LO 3-79, 3-90
P4631B-94* MFD CONTROL PANEL +7 VDC POWER 3-54, 3-65, 3-98,

3-109
P4631B-95* MFD SG CONTROL PANEL RETURN 3-98, 3-109
P4631B-95* SPARE RELAY 7A COMMON 3-60, 3-71, 3-82,

3-93
P4631B-96* SPARE RELAY 7B COMMON 3-60, 3-71, 3-82,

3-93

3-93

3-93
P4631B-99* MFD SG HSI VIDEO RED HI 3-56, 3-67, 3-100,

3-111
P4631B-99* SG 2 HSI VIDEO RED HI 3-78, 3-89
P4631B-100* MFD SG HSI VIDEO RED LO 3-56, 3-67, 3-100,

3-111
P4631B-100* SG 2 HSI VIDEO RED LO 3-78, 3-89
P4631B-101* MFD SG HSI VIDEO GREEN HI 3-56, 3-67, 3-100,

3-111
P4631B-101* SG 2 HSI VIDEO GREEN HI 3-78, 3-89
P4631B-102* MFD SG HSI VIDEO GREEN LO 3-56, 3-67, 3-100,

3-111
P4631B-102* SG 2 HSI VIDEO GREEN LO 3-78, 3-89
P4631B-103* MFD SG HSI VIDEO BLUE HI 3-56, 3-67, 3-100,

3-111
P4631B-103* SG 2 HSI VIDEO BLUE HI 3-78, 3-89

Pin
Designator
P4631B-104* MFD SG HSI VIDEO BLUE LO 3-56, 3-67, 3-100,
3-111
P4631B-104* SG 2 HSI VIDEO BLUE LO 3-78, 3-89
P4631B-105* MFD SG HSI MODE HI 3-57, 3-68, 3-101,

3-112
P4631B-105* SG 2 HSI MODE HI 3-79, 3-90
P4631B-106* MFD SG HSI MODE LO 3-57, 3-68, 3-101,

3-112
P4631B-106* SG 2 HSI MODE LO 3-79, 3-90
3.18.1.10 SU 463 - P4631C Pin Designator Index
TABLE 3-26 SU 463 - P4631C Pin Designator Index
Pin
Designator
P4631C-1 SG 1 HSI VIDEO RED HI 3-56, 3-67, 3-78,
3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4631C-2 SG 1 HSI VIDEO RED LO 3-56, 3-67, 3-78,

3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4631C-3 SG 1 HSI VIDEO GREEN HI 3-56, 3-67, 3-78,

3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4631C-4 SG 1 HSI VIDEO GREEN LO 3-56, 3-67, 3-78,

3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4631C-5 SG 1 HSI VIDEO BLUE HI 3-56, 3-67, 3-78,

3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4631C-6 SG 1 HSI VIDEO BLUE LO 3-56, 3-67, 3-78,

3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4631C-7 SG 1 HSI MODE HI 3-57, 3-68, 3-79,

3-90, 3-101, 3-112
P4631C-8 SG 1 HSI MODE LO 3-57, 3-68, 3-79,

3-90, 3-101, 3-112
P4631C-9 SG 1 HSI DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3-56, 3-67, 3-78,

3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4631C-10 DU 1 HSI DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3-56, 3-67, 3-78,

3-89, 3-100, 3-111

Pin
Designator
P4631C-11* SG 1 HSI -30 VDC POWER 3-55, 3-99
P4631C-11* SPARE RELAY 3 ENABLE 3-82, 3-93
P4631C-11* SPARE RELAY 10A NORMALLY CLOSE 3-115
P4631C-12* SG 1 HSI +85 VDC POWER 3-55, 3-99
P4631C-12* SPARE RELAY 10B NORMALLY CLOSE 3-115
P4631C-13 DU 1 HSI VIDEO RED HI 3-56, 3-67, 3-78,

3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4631C-14 DU 1 HSI VIDEO RED LO 3-56, 3-67, 3-78,

3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4631C-15 DU 1 HSI VIDEO GREEN HI 3-56, 3-67, 3-78,

3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4631C-16 DU 1 HSI VIDEO GREEN LO 3-56, 3-67, 3-78,

3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4631C-17 DU 1 HSI VIDEO BLUE HI 3-56, 3-67, 3-78,

3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4631C-18 DU 1 HSI VIDEO BLUE LO 3-56, 3-67, 3-78,

3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4631C-19 DU 1 HSI MODE HI 3-57, 3-68, 3-79,

3-90, 3-101, 3-112
P4631C-20 DU 1 HSI MODE LO 3-57, 3-68, 3-79,

3-90, 3-101, 3-112
P4631C-21* SPARE RELAY 12B NORMALLY CLOSE 3-60, 3-71, 3-82,

3-93
P4631C-21* SPARE RELAY 4B NORMALLY CLOSE 3-104, 3-115
P4631C-22* SPARE RELAY 9 ENABLE 3-60, 3-71, 3-82,

3-93

3-93

3-93
P4631C-25* HSI 1 -30 VDC/ +85 VDC POWER ENABLE 3-55, 3-99
P4631C-25* SPARE RELAY 10 ENABLE 3-115

Pin
Designator
P4631C-26 SG 1 COMPOSITE 3-58, 3-69, 3-80,
3-91, 3-102, 3-113
P4631C-27* MFD CP DECISION HEIGHT ON 3-98, 3-109
P4631C-27* SPARE RELAY 1A NORMALLY CLOSE 3-60, 3-71, 3-82,

3-93
P4631C-28* MFD CP DECISION HEIGHT SELECT 2 3-98, 3-109
P4631C-28* SPARE RELAY 2B NORMALLY OPEN 3-60, 3-71, 3-82,

3-93
P4631C-29* SPARE RELAY 2A NORMALLY OPEN 3-60, 3-71, 3-82,

3-93
P4631C-30* MFD CP COURSE 2 3-98, 3-109

3-93
P4631C-31* MFD CP COURSE 1 3-98, 3-109

3-93
P4631C-32* MFD CP HEADING 2 3-98, 3-109
P4631C-32* SPARE RELAY 2B COMMON 3-60, 3-71, 3-82,

3-93
P4631C-33* MFD CP HEADING 1 3-98, 3-109
P4631C-33* SPARE RELAY 2A COMMON 3-60, 3-71, 3-82,

3-93
P4631C-34* MFD CP MODE 4 3-98, 3-109

3-93
P4631C-35* MFD CP MODE 3 3-98, 3-109

3-93

3-93
P4631C-36* SPARE RELAY 1B NORMALLY OPEN 3-104, 3-115

3-93
P4631C-37* SPARE RELAY 2A NORMALLY OPEN 3-104, 3-115

3-93

Pin
Designator

3-93
P4631C-40* SG 1 XTALK RECEIVER A 3-102, 3-113

3-93
P4631C-41* SG 1 XTALK RECEIVER B 3-102, 3-113

3-93
P4631C-42* SG 1 XTALK TRANSMITTER A 3-102, 3-113

3-93
P4631C-43* SG 1 XTALK TRANSMITTER B 3-102, 3-113
P4631C-44* CP 1 +7 VDC POWER 3-54, 3-65, 3-98,

3-109
P4631C-44* SG 1 COPY 3-80, 3-91

3-93
P4631C-45* SPARE RELAY 2A NORMALLY CLOSE 3-104, 3-115

3-93

3-93

3-93

3-93
P4631C-50* DU 1 HSI -30 VDC POWER 3-55, 3-99
P4631C-50* SPARE RELAY 10A COMMON 3-115
P4631C-51* DU 1 HSI +85 VDC POWER 3-55, 3-99

Pin
Designator
P4631C-51* SPARE RELAY 10B COMMON 3-115
P4631C-52 DU 1 HSI X DEFLECTION HI 3-57, 3-68, 3-79,

3-90, 3-101, 3-112

3-93
P4631C-53* SPARE RELAY 1B COMMON 3-104, 3-115

3-93
P4631C-54* SPARE RELAY 1A COMMON 3-104, 3-115
P4631C-55* MFD CP RETURN 3-54, 3-65, 3-98,

3-109
P4631C-56* SG 1 CONTROL PANEL +7 VDC POWER 3-54, 3-65, 3-98,

3-109

3-93

3-93

3-93

3-93
P4631C-61 SPARE
P4631C-65* DU 1 HSI +27.5 VDC FILTERED POWER 3-55, 3-99

Pin
Designator
P4631C-66 DU 1 HSI X DEFLECTION LO 3-57, 3-68, 3-79,
3-90, 3-101, 3-112
P4631C-67 SHIELD GROUND 3.16.4.H

3-93
P4631C-69* MFD CP MODE 2 3-98, 3-109
P4631C-69* SPARE RELAY 1-4 POWER 3-60, 3-71, 3-82,

3-93

3-93

3-93
P4631C-72* MFD SG DU 1 HSI +85 VDC POWER 3-99
P4631C-72* SPARE RELAY 10B NORMALLY OPEN 3-115
P4631C-75* SG 1 HSI +27.5 VDC FILTERED POWER 3-55, 3-99
P4631C-77* DU 1 HSI GROUND 3-55, 3-99
P4631C-78* DU 1 HSI GROUND 3-55, 3-99
P4631C-79 DU 1 HSI Y DEFLECTION HI 3-57, 3-68, 3-79,

3-90, 3-101, 3-112
P4631C-80* MFD CP MODE 1 3-98, 3-109

3-93

3-93
P4631C-82* MFD SG DU 1 HSI -30 VDC POWER 3-99

Pin
Designator
P4631C-82* SPARE RELAY 10A NORMALLY OPEN 3-115

3-93
P4631C-84* MFD CONTROL PANEL EXTERNAL 3-54, 3-65, 3-98,

3-109

3-93
P4631C-86 SPARE
P4631C-87* SG 1 HSI +15 VDC POWER
P4631C-92* DU 1 HSI GROUND 3-55, 3-99
P4631C-93 DU 1 HSI Y DEFLECTION LO 3-57, 3-68, 3-79,

3-90, 3-101, 3-112

3-93

3-93
P4631C-95* SPARE RELAY 1-4 POWER 3-104, 3-115

3-93
P4631C-97 SPARE

Pin
Designator
3-93
P4631C-100* SG1 HSI GROUND 3-55, 3-99
P4631C-101* SG1 HSI GROUND 3-55, 3-99
P4631C-102* SG1 HSI GROUND 3-55, 3-99
P4631C-103 SG HSI Y DEFLECTION LO 3-57, 3-68, 3-79,

3-90, 3-101, 3-112
P4631C-104 SG HSI Y DEFLECTION HI 3-57, 3-68, 3-79,

3-90, 3-101, 3-112
P4631C-105 SG HSI X DEFLECTION LO 3-57, 3-68, 3-79,

3-90, 3-101, 3-112
P4631C-106 SG HSI X DEFLECTION HI 3-57, 3-68, 3-79,

3-90, 3-101, 3-112
3.18.1.11 SU 463 - P4631D Pin Designator Index
TABLE 3-27 SU 463 - P4631D Pin Designator Index
Pin
Designator
P4631D-1* SG 2 ADI VIDEO RED HI 3-74, 3-85, 3-96,
3-107
P4631D-1* SPARE RELAY 5A COMMON 3-60, 3-71
P4631D-2* SG 2 ADI VIDEO RED LO 3-74, 3-85, 3-96,

3-107
P4631D-2* SPARE RELAY 5B COMMON 3-60, 3-71
P4631D-3* SG 2 ADI VIDEO GREEN HI 3-74, 3-85, 3-96,

3-107
P4631D-4* SG 2 ADI VIDEO GREEN LO 3-74, 3-85, 3-96,

3-107

Pin
Designator
P4631D-5* SG 2 ADI VIDEO BLUE HI 3-74, 3-85, 3-96,
3-107
P4631D-5* SPARE RELAY 5A NORMALLY OPEN 3-60, 3-71
P4631D-6* SG 2 ADI VIDEO BLUE LO 3-74, 3-85, 3-96,

3-107
P4631D-6* SPARE RELAY 5B NORMALLY OPEN 3-60, 3-71
P4631D-7* SG 2 ADI MODE HI 3-75, 3-86, 3-97,

3-108
P4631D-8* SG 2 ADI MODE LO 3-75, 3-86, 3-97,

3-108
P4631D-9* SG 2 ADI DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3-74, 3-85, 3-96,

3-107
P4631D-9* SPARE RELAY 5A NORMALLY CLOSE 3-60, 3-71
P4631D-10* DU 2 ADI VIDEO RED HI 3-74, 3-85, 3-96,

3-107
P4631D-10* SPARE RELAY 5B NORMALLY CLOSE 3-60, 3-71
P4631D-11* DU 2 ADI VIDEO RED LO 3-74, 3-85, 3-96,

3-107
P4631D-12* DU 2 ADI VIDEO GREEN HI 3-74, 3-85, 3-96,

3-107
P4631D-13* DU 2 ADI VIDEO GREEN LO 3-74, 3-85, 3-96,

3-107
P4631D-13* SPARE RELAY 5 ENABLE 3-60, 3-71
P4631D-14* DU 2 ADI VIDEO BLUE HI 3-74, 3-85, 3-96,

3-107
P4631D-15* DU 2 ADI VIDEO BLUE LO 3-74, 3-85, 3-96,

3-107
P4631D-15* SPARE RELAY 5-8 POWER 3-60, 3-71
P4631D-16* DU 2 ADI MODE HI 3-75, 3-86, 3-97,

3-108
P4631D-17* DU 2 ADI MODE LO 3-75, 3-86, 3-97,

3-108

Pin
Designator
P4631D-18* DU 2 ADI DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3-74, 3-85, 3-96,
3-107
P4631D-19* SG 2 ADI -30 VDC POWER 3-95
P4631D-19* SPARE RELAY 11A NORMALLY CLOSE 3-115
P4631D-20* SG 2 ADI +85 VDC POWER 3-95
P4631D-20* SPARE RELAY 11B NORMALLY CLOSE 3-115
P4631D-21* DU 2 ADI -30 VDC POWER 3-95
P4631D-21* SPARE RELAY 11A COMMON 3-115
P4631D-22 PROGRAM 9 3.2.4.U 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3-92, 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-23 PROGRAM 7 3.2.4.U 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3-92, 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-24 PROGRAM 8 3.2.4.U 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3-92, 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-25* DISPLAY DOWN (2) ANNUNCIATE 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631D-26* SG 2 ADI +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER 3-80, 3-102
P4631D-26* +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER BUS 2 3-84, 3-106
P4631D-26* SPARE RELAY 18 COMMON 3-60, 3-71
P4631D-27* DU 2 HSI DISPLAY DOWN RETURN 3-80, 3-91, 3-102,

3-113
P4631D-28* DISPLAY DOWN (2) SELECT IN 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631D-29* COMPOSITE (2) SELECT IN 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114

Pin
Designator
P4631D-30* COPY (2) SELECT IN 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92
P4631D-30* STANDBY (2) SELECT IN 3.2.4.T 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-31* SPARE (2) SELECT IN 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631D-32 SWITCH RETURN 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631D-33 ANNUNCIATOR TEST IN 3.2.4.T 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3-92, 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-34 POWER GROUND 3.2.4.T, 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3.16.4.F 3-92, 3-103, 3-114
3-165
P4631D-35 POWER GROUND 3.2.4.T, 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3.16.4.F 3-92, 3-103, 3-114
3-165
P4631D-36* +27.5 VDC BUS 2 IN 3.16.4.F 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114, 3-165
P4631D-37* +27.5 VDC BUS 2 IN 3.16.4.F 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114, 3-165
P4631D-38* AIRCRAFT POWER BUS 1 3-84, 3-106
P4631D-38* AIRCRAFT POWER BUS 2 3-80, 3-84,

3-102, 3-106
P4631D-38* SPARE RELAY 17 NORMALLY CLOSE 3-60, 3-71
P4631D-40 PROGRAM 1 3.2.4.U 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3-92, 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-41 PROGRAM 2 3.2.4.U 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3-92, 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-42 PROGRAM 3 3.2.4.U 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3-92, 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-43 PROGRAM 4 3.2.4.U 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3-92, 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-44 PROGRAM 5 3.2.4.U 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3-92, 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-45 PROGRAM 6 3.2.4.U 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3-92, 3-103, 3-114

Pin
Designator
3-92, 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-47 PROGRAM GROUND 3.2.4.U 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3-92, 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-48* SG 2 SWITCH RETURN 3-80, 3-91, 3-102,

3-113
P4631D-49* DU 2 HSI DISPLAY DOWN 3-80, 3-91, 3-102,

3-113
P4631D-50* SG 2 DISPLAY DOWN 3-80, 3-91, 3-102,

3-113
P4631D-51* AIRCRAFT POWER BUS 2 3-80, 3-84, 3-102,

3-106
P4631D-52* DU 2 ADI X DEFLECTION HI 3-75, 3-86, 3-97,

3-108
P4631D-53* DU 2 ADI +85 VDC POWER 3-95
P4631D-53* SPARE RELAY 11B COMMON 3-115
P4631D-54* ADI 2 -30 VDC/ +85 VDC POWER ENABLE 3-95
P4631D-54* SPARE RELAY 11 ENABLE 3-115
P4631D-57* MFD SG ADI +85 VDC POWER 3-95
P4631D-57* SPARE RELAY 11B NORMALLY OPEN 3-115
P4631D-58* MFD SG ADI -30 VDC POWER 3-95

Pin
Designator
P4631D-58* SPARE RELAY 11A NORMALLY OPEN 3-115
P4631D-59 SHIELD GROUND 3.16.4.H
P4631D-61* SPARE RELAY 14 ENABLE
P4631D-63* SPARE RELAY 3B NORMALLY OPEN
P4631D-64* DU 2 ADI GROUND 3-95
P4631D-64* SPARE RELAY 18 NORMALLY OPEN 3-60, 3-71
P4631D-66* DU 2 ADI X DEFLECTION LO 3-75, 3-86, 3-97,

3-108
P4631D-67* DISPLAY DOWN (2) SELECT OUT 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631D-68* COMPOSITE (2) SELECT OUT 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631D-69* ADI COPY (2) SELECT OUT 3-81, 3-92, 3-103
P4631D-69* STANDBY (2) SELECT OUT 3-95, 3-99, 3-114
P4631D-70* HSI COPY (2) SELECT OUT 3-81, 3-92
P4631D-70* SPARE (2) SELECT OUT 3-103, 3-114

Pin
Designator
P4631D-71* DISPLAY DOWN (2) COMMON 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,
3-114
P4631D-72* COMPOSITE (2) COMMON 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631D-73* ADI COPY (2) COMMON 3-81, 3-92
P4631D-73* STANDBY (2) COMMON 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-74* COMPOSITE (2) ANNUNCIATE 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631D-75* SPARE (2) ANNUNCIATE 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631D-79* DU 2 ADI Y DEFLECTION HI 3-75, 3-86, 3-97,

3-108
P4631D-80* COMPOSITE (2) NORMALLY OPEN 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631D-81* ADI COPY (2) NORMALLY OPEN 3-81, 3-92
P4631D-81* STANDBY (2) NORMALLY OPEN 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-82* HSI COPY (2) NORMALLY OPEN 3-81, 3-92
P4631D-82* SPARE (2) NORMALLY OPEN 3-103, 3-114

Pin
Designator
P4631D-83* DISPLAY DOWN (2) NORMALLY CLOSE 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631D-84* COMPOSITE (2) NORMALLY CLOSE 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631D-85* HSI COPY (2) COMMON 3-81, 3-92
P4631D-85* SPARE (2) COMMON 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-86* DISPLAY DOWN (2) NORMALLY OPEN 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631D-87* SG 2 ADI COPY 3-81, 3-92
P4631D-88* SG 2 ADI GROUND 3-95
P4631D-90* SHIELD GROUND 3.16.4.H
P4631D-93* DU 2 ADI Y DEFLECTION LO 3-75, 3-86, 3-97,

3-108
P4631D-94* SPARE RELAY 13B NORMALLY CLOSE
P4631D-95* COPY (2) ANNUNCIATE 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92

Pin
Designator
P4631D-95* STANDBY (2) ANNUNCIATE 3.2.4.T 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-97* DU 2 ADI +27.5 VDC FILTERED POWER 3-95
P4631D-98* SG 2 ADI +27.5 VDC FILTERED POWER 3-95
P4631D-99 PROGRAM 10 3.2.4.U 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3-92, 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-100* HSI COPY (2) NORMALLY CLOSE 3-81, 3-92
P4631D-100* SPARE (2) NORMALLY CLOSE 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-101* ADI COPY (2) NORMALLY CLOSE 3-81, 3-92
P4631D-101* STANDBY (2) NORMALLY CLOSE 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-103* SG 2 ADI Y DEFLECTION LO 3-75, 3-86, 3-97,

3-108
P4631D-104* SG 2 ADI Y DEFLECTION HI 3-75, 3-86, 3-97,

3-108
P4631D-105* SG 2 ADI X DEFLECTION LO 3-75, 3-86, 3-97,

3-108
P4631D-106* SG 2 ADI X DEFLECTION HI 3-75, 3-86, 3-97,

3-108

3.18.1.12 SU 463 - P4632 Pin Designator Index
TABLE 3-28 SU 463 - P4632 Pin Designator Index
Pin
Designator
P4632-1 DU 2 HSI Y DEFLECTION LO 3-101, 3-112
P4632-2* SG 2 HSI +7 VDC POWER 3-99
P4632-3* DU 2 HSI -15 VDC POWER 3-99
P4632-4 SG 2 CONTROL PANEL +7 VDC POWER 3-98, 3-109
P4632-5 SG 2 CONTROL PANEL RETURN 3-98, 3-109
P4632-6 SG 2 CONTROL PANEL MODE 1 3-98, 3-109
P4632-9 SG 2 CONTROL PANEL MODE4 3-98, 3-109
P4632-10 SG 2 CONTROL PANEL HEADING 1 3-98, 3-109
P4632-12 SG 2 CONTROL PANEL COURSE 1 3-98, 3-109
P4632-13 DU 2 HSI Y DEFLECTION HI 3-101, 3-112
P4632-14* SG 2 HSI -7 VDC POWER 3-99
P4632-15* DU 2 HSI +15 VDC POWER 3-99
P4632-16 SG 2 CONTROL PANEL DH ON 3-98, 3-109
P4632-17 SG 2 COMPOSITE 3-102, 3-113
P4632-18 SG 2 XTALK RECEIVER A 3-102, 3-113
P4632-19 SG 2 XTALK RECEIVER B 3-102, 3-113
P4632-20 SG 2 XTALK TRANSMITTER A 3-102, 3-113
P4632-21 SG 2 XTALK TRANSMITTER B 3-102, 3-113
P4632-22 CP 2 +7 VDC POWER 3-98, 3-109
P4632-23* DU 2 HSI -30 VDC POWER 3-99
P4632-23* SPARE RELAY 12A COMMON 3-115
P4632-24* DU 2 HSI +85 VDC POWER 3-99
P4632-24* SPARE RELAY 12B COMMON 3-115
P4632-26 DU 2 HSI X DEFLECTION LO 3-101, 3-112
P4632-27* DU 2 HSI +30 VDC POWER 3-99

Pin
Designator
P4632-28* SG 2 HSI +30 VDC POWER 3-99
P4632-29* DU 2 HSI -7 VDC POWER 3-99
P4632-30 SPARE RELAY 7A NORMALLY CLOSE 3-104, 3-115
P4632-31 SPARE RELAY 6B NORMALLY CLOSE 3-104, 3-115
P4632-33 SPARE RELAY 8A NORMALLY OPEN 3-104, 3-115
P4632-34 DU 2 HSI VIDEO RED HI 3-100, 3-111
P4632-35 SG 2 HSI VIDEO RED HI 3-100, 3-111
P4632-37* MFD SG DU 2 HSI -30 VDC POWER 3-99
P4632-37* SPARE RELAY 12A NORMALLY OPEN 3-115
P4632-38* MFD SG DU 2 HSI +85 VDC POWER 3-99
P4632-38* SPARE RELAY 12B NORMALLY OPEN 3-115
P4632-39 SG 2 CONTROL PANEL DH SELECT 1 3-98, 3-109
P4632-40 DU 2 HSI X DEFLECTION HI 3-101, 3-112
P4632-41* SG 2 HSI +15 VDC POWER 3-99
P4632-42* SG 2 HSI -15 VDC POWER 3-99
P4632-43 SPARE RELAY 5-8 POWER 3-104, 3-115
P4632-44 SPARE RELAY 5B NORMALLY OPEN 3-104, 3-115
P4632-45 SPARE RELAY 7A COMMON 3-104, 3-115
P4632-46 SPARE
P4632-48 DU 2 HSI VIDEO RED LO 3-100, 3-111
P4632-49 SG 2 HSI VIDEO RED LO 3-100, 3-111
P4632-51* HSI 2 -30 VDC/ +85 VDC POWER ENABLE 3-99
P4632-51* SPARE RELAY 12 ENABLE 3-115
P4632-53 SG 2 HSI Y DEFLECTION LO 3-101, 3-112
P4632-54* DU 2 HSI +7 VDC POWER 3-99
P4632-55 SPARE
P4632-56* SG 2 HSI +27.5 VDC FILTERED POWER 3-99

Pin
Designator
P4632-57 SPARE RELAY 8 ENABLE 3-104, 3-115
P4632-59 SPARE RELAY 6B COMMON 3-104, 3-115
P4632-60 SPARE
P4632-62 DU 2 HSI VIDEO GREEN HI 3-100, 3-111
P4632-63 SG 2 HSI VIDEO GREEN HI 3-100, 3-111
P4632-65 DU 2 HSI DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3-100, 3-111
P4632-66* SG 2 HSI -30 VDC POWER 3-99
P4632-66* SPARE RELAY 12A NORMALLY CLOSE 3-115
P4632-67 SG 2 HSI Y DEFLECTION HI 3-101, 3-112
P4632-68* SG 2 HSI GROUND 3-99
P4632-69* DU 2 HSI +27.5 VDC FILTERED POWER 3-99
P4632-74 SPARE
P4632-76 DU 2 HSI VIDEO GREEN LO 3-100, 3-111
P4632-77 SG 2 HSI VIDEO GREEN LO 3-100, 3-111
P4632-79* SG 2 HSI +85 VDC POWER 3-99
P4632-79* SPARE RELAY 12B NORMALLY CLOSE 3-115
P4632-80 SG 2 HSI X DEFLECTION LO 3-101, 3-112
P4632-82* DU 2 HSI GROUND 3-99

Pin
Designator
P4632-89 DU 2 HSI MODE HI 3-101, 3-112
P4632-90 DU 2 HSI VIDEO BLUE HI 3-100, 3-111
P4632-91 SG 2 HSI VIDEO BLUE HI 3-100, 3-111
P4632-93 SG 2 HSI MODE HI 3-101, 3-112
P4632-94 SG 2 HSI X DEFLECTION HI 3-101, 3-112
P4632-102 SG 2 HSI DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3-100, 3-111
P4632-103 DU 2 HSI MODE LO 3-101, 3-112
P4632-104 DU 2 HSI VIDEO BLUE LO 3-100, 3-111
P4632-105 SG 2 HSI VIDEO BLUE LO 3-100, 3-111
P4632-106 SG 2 HSI MODE LO 3-101, 3-112
3.18.1.13 SG 464 - P4641A Pin Designator Index
TABLE 3-29 SG 464 - P4641A Pin Designator Index
Pin
SG 464 Line Name Section Figure
Designator
P4641A-1 HSI -15 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,
3-28
P4641A-2 HSI -7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28

Pin
Designator
P4641A-3 HSI +7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,
3-28
P4641A-4 HSI +15 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28
P4641A-5 HSI +30 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28
P4641A-6 HSI +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER 3.16.4.A 3-165
P4641A-8 HSI AIRCRAFT POWER GROUND 3.16.4.A 3-165
P4641A-12 HSI +85 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28
P4641A-13 NOT USED
P4641A-14 HSI -30 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28
P4641A-15 SPARE
P4641A-16 CONTROL PANEL +7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.F 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,
3-21, 3-27
P4641A-17 REFERENCE 1 H 3.3.4.A, 3-116, 3-122,

3.4.4.A, 3-123, 3-124,
3.7.4.A 3-135, 3-136,
3-138, 3-139,
3-140, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4641A-18 REFERENCE 1 C 3.3.4.A, 3-116, 3-122,

3.4.4.A, 3-123, 3-124,
3.7.4.A 3-135, 3-136,
3-138, 3-139,
3-140, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4641A-20 SPARE
P4641A-21 HSI GROUND 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28
P4641A-22 HSI GROUND 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28
P4641A-23 HSI GROUND 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28

Pin
Designator
P4641A-24 HSI MODE LO 3.2.4.D 3-12, 3-18, 3-24,
3-30
P4641A-25 HSI +27.5 VDC FILTERED POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,
3-28
P4641A-26 NOT USED
P4641A-27 HSI +5 VDC (TEST) 3.2.4.A
P4641A-28* GLIDESLOPE 1 -FLAG 3.4.4.G 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4641A-28* VEL-FLAG 3.15.4.A.1
P4641A-28* SENS 1-FLAG 3.15.4.C.1
P4641A-29 SPARE
P4641A-30 NAV 1 OBI SIN H 3.4.4.B 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4641A-31 NAV 1 OBI COS H 3.4.4.B 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4641A-32 +FROM OUT 3.12.4.E 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641A-33 VERTICAL DEVIATION +DOWN 3.12.4.H 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641A-34 SPARE
P4641A-35 HSI GROUND 3.16.4.I
P4641A-36 HSI VIDEO RED LO 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-17, 3-23,

3-29
P4641A-37 HSI VIDEO RED Hl 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-17, 3-23,

3-29
P4641A-38 HSI MODE Hl 3.2.4.D 3-12, 3-18, 3-24,

3-30
P4641A-39 NOT USED

Pin
Designator
P4641A-40 NOT USED
P4641A-41 ADF 1 SIN HI / X 3.7.4.B 3-138, 3-139,

3-140
P4641A-42* GLIDESLOPE 1 +FLAG 3.4.4.G 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4641A-42* VEL +FLAG 3.15.4.A.1
P4641A-42* SEN 1 +FLAG 3.15.4.C.1
P4641A-43 COURSE DATUM H 3.12.4.B 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641A-44 COURSE DATUM C 3.12.4.B 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641A-46 +TO OUT 3.12.4.E 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641A-47 SPARE
P4641A-48 SPARE
P4641A-50 HSI Y DEFLECTION HI 3.2.4.C 3-12, 3-18, 3-24,

3-30
P4641A-51 HSI VIDEO GREEN LO 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-17, 3-23,

3-29
P4641A-52 HSI VIDEO GREEN HI 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-17, 3-23,

3-29
P4641A-53 NOT USED
P4641A-54 ADF 1 COS Hl / Y 3.7.4.B 3-138, 3-139,

3-140

Pin
Designator
P4641A-55* NAV/LOC 1 -FLAG 3.4.4.C 3-122, 3-123,
3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4641A-55* MEMORY -FLAG 3.15.4.A.1
P4641A-55* HOMING 1 -FLAG 3.15.4.C.1
P4641A-56 HEADING 1 Z 3.3.4.B 3-116, 3-119
P4641A-57 HEADING 1 Y 3.3.4.B 3-116, 3-119
P4641A-58 NAV 1 OBI SIN/COS C 3.4.4.B 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4641A-59 HSI DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3.2.4.E 3-11, 3-17,

3-23, 3-29
P4641A-60* GLIDESLOPE 1 DEVIATION +UP 3.4.4.F 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4641A-60* VEL X DEV +FWD 3.15.4.A.3
P4641A-60* SENS 1 DEV +UP 3.15.4.C.3
P4641A-61 CONTROL PANEL MODE 3 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,

3-21, 3-27, 3-161
P4641A-62 CONTROL PANEL HEADING 1 3.2.4.H 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,

3-21, 3-27
P4641A-63 HSI Y DEFLECTION LO 3.2.4.C 3-12, 3-18, 3-24,

3-30
P4641A-64 HSI X DEFLECTION HI 3.2.4.C 3-12, 3-18, 3-24,

3-30
P4641A-65 HSI VIDEO BLUE LO 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-17, 3-23,

3-29
P4641A-66 NOT USED
P4641A-67 NOT USED
P4641A-68 ADF 1 SIN/COS LO / Z 3.7.4.B 3-138, 3-139,

3-140
P4641A-69* NAV/LOC 1 +FLAG 3.4.4.C 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4641A-69* MEMORY +FLAG 3.15.4.A.1
P4641A-69* HOMING 1 +FLAG 3.15.4.C.1

Pin
Designator
P4641A-70 SPARE
P4641A-71 HEADING 1 X 3.3.4.B 3-116, 3-119
P4641A-72 SPARE
P4641A-73* LATERAL DEVIATION +LEFT 3.12.4.F 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B

3-21, 3-27, 3-161
P4641A-75 CONTROL PANEL COURSE 1 3.2.4.I 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,

3-21, 3-27

3-21, 3-27
P4641A-77 TCAS RECEIVER A 3.14.4.A 3-161
P4641A-78 HSI X DEFLECTION LO 3.2.4.C 3-12, 3-18, 3-24,

3-30
P4641A-79 HSI VIDEO BLUE HI 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-17, 3-23,

3-29
P4641A-80 NOT USED
P4641A-81 AUTOPILOT REFERENCE C 3.12.4.A 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641A-82 VERTICAL DEVIATION SUPERFLAG OUT 3.12.4.I 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641A-83 ADF 1 SUPERFLAG 3.7.4.C 3-138, 3-139,

3-140
P4641A-84* LOCALIZER 1 DEVIATION +L 3.4.4.D 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4641A-84* VEL Y DEV +L 3.15.4.A.2
P4641A-84* HOMING 1 DEV +L 3.15.4.C.2

Pin
Designator
P4641A-85* GLIDESLOPE 1 DEVIATION +DOWN 3.4.4.F 3-122, 3-123,
3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4641A-85* VEL X DEV +AFT 3.15.4.A.3
P4641A-85* SENS 1 DEV +DN 3.15.4.C.3
P4641A-86* LATERAL DEVIATION +RIGHT 3.12.4.F 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B

3-21, 3-27, 3-161

3-21, 3-27, 3-161
P4641A-89 RADIO ALTIMETER RECEIVER A 3.11.4.C 3-145, 3-146
P4641A-90 RADIO ALTIMETER RECEIVER B 3.11.4.C 3-145, 3-146
P4641A-91 SPARE 2 RECEIVER B
P4641A-92 TCAS RECEIVER B 3.14.4.A 3-161
P4641A-93 NOT USED
P4641A-94 NOT USED
P4641A-95 AUTOPILOT REFERENCE H 3.12.4.A 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641A-96 LATERAL DEVIATION SUPERFLAG OUT 3.12.4.G 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641A-97 ILS 1 ENERGIZE IN 3.4.4.E 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4641A-98* LOCALIZER 1 DEVIATION +R 3.4.4.D 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4641A-98* VEL Y DEV +R 3.15.4.A.2

Pin
Designator
P4641A-98* HOMING 1 DEV +R 3.15.4.C.2
P4641A-99 VERTICAL DEVIATION +UP 3.12.4.H 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641A-100 CONTROL PANEL RETURN 3.2.4.F 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,

3-21, 3-27, 3-161
P4641A-101 SPARE
P4641A-102 SPARE

3-21, 3-27
P4641A-105 SPARE 2 RECEIVER A
P4641A-106 HSI SCOPE BLANKING 3.16.4.J
3.18.1.14 SG 464 - P4641B Pin Designator Index
TABLE 3-30 SG 464 - P4641B Pin Designator Index
Pin
Designator
P4641B-1 AHRS 1 RECEIVER A 3.3.4.J 3-116, 3-119
P4641B-2 SPARE
P4641B-3 DME 1 RECEIVER A 3.5.4.D 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4641B-4 NAV 1 RECEIVER A 3.4.4.H 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164

Pin
Designator
P4641B-5 DME 1 SUPERFLAG 3.5.4.B 3-126, 3-127,
3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4641B-6 SPARE
P4641B-7 REFERENCE 2 C 3.3.4.A, 3-116, 3-122,

3.4.4.A, 3-123, 3-124,
3.7.4.A 3-135, 3-136,
3-138, 3-139,
3-140, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4641B-8 HEADING 2 X 3.3.4.B 3-116, 3-119
P4641B-9* NAV/LOC 2 +FLAG 3.4.4.C 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4641B-9* THRUST +FLAG 3.15.4.B.1
P4641B-9* HOMING 2 +FLAG 3.15.4.C.1
P4641B-10 HEADING DATUM H 3.12.4.C 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641B-11 RADIO ALTIMETER HI 3.11.4.A 3-145, 3-146
P4641B-12* LOCALIZER 2 DEVIATION +R 3.4.4.D 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4641B-12* POS Y DEV +R 3.15.4.B.2
P4641B-12* HOMING 2 DEV +R 3.15.4.C.2
P4641B-13 NOT USED
P4641B-14 LNAV 1 RECEIVER B 3.9.4.B 3-142, 3-142A
P4641B-15 LNAV 1 RECEIVER A 3.9.4.B 3-142, 3-142A
P4641B-16 ADF 1 RECEIVER B 3.7.4.D 3-138, 3-139,

3-140

Pin
Designator
P4641B-17 DME 1 HOLD 3.5.4.C 3-126, 3-127,
3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4641B-18 COMPASS 1 SUPERFLAG 3.3.4.C 3-116, 3-119
P4641B-19 REFERENCE 2 H 3.3.4.A, 3-116, 3-122,

3.4.4.A, 3-123, 3-124,
3.7.4.A 3-135, 3-136,
3-138, 3-139,
3-140, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4641B-20 HEADING 2 Z 3.3.4.B 3-116, 3-119
P4641B-21 HEADING 2 Y 3.3.4.B 3-116, 3-119
P4641B-22* NAV/LOC 2 -FLAG 3.4.4.C 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4641B-22* THRUST -FLAG 3.15.4.B.1
P4641B-22* HOMING 2 -FLAG 3.15.4.C.1
P4641B-23 RADIO ALTIMETER LO 3.11.4.A 3-145, 3-146
P4641B-24* LOCALIZER 2 DEVIATION +L 3.4.4.D 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4641B-24* POS Y DEV +L 3.15.4.B.2
P4641B-24* HOMING 2 DEV +L 3.15.4.C.2
P4641B-25 KNS 81 1 RETURN 3.8.4 3-141
P4641B-26 NOT USED
P4641B-27 CHECKLIST RECEIVER B 3.13 3-142, 3-160
P4641B-28 MLS 1 RECEIVER A 3.6.4 3-137
P4641B-29 DME 1 RECEIVER B 3.5.4.D 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4641B-30 NAV 1 RECEIVER B 3.4.4.H 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164

Pin
Designator
P4641B-31 AUTOPILOT LEFT/ RIGHT 3.12.4.S 3-147, 3-147A,
3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641B-32 NAV 2 OBI COS H 3.4.4.B 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4641B-33 SPARE
P4641B-35 ADF 2 SIN HI / X 3.7.4.B 3-138, 3-139,

3-140
P4641B-36 HEADING DATUM C 3.12.4.C 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641B-37* GLIDESLOPE 2 DEVIATION +UP 3.4.4.F 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4641B-37* POS X DEV +FWD 3.15.4.B.3
P4641B-37* SENS 2 DEV +UP 3.15.4.C.3
P4641B-38 FAN HI 3.2.4.R 3-7
P4641B-39 CONFIGURATION MODULE GROUND 3.2.4.Q 3-7
P4641B-40 NOT USED
P4641B-41 CHECKLIST RECEIVER A 3.13 3-142, 3-160
P4641B-42 MLS 1 RECEIVER B 3.6.4 3-137
P4641B-43 ADF 1 RECEIVER A 3.7.4.D 3-138, 3-139,

3-140
P4641B-44 TACAN 1 ENERGIZE IN 3.5.4.E 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4641B-45 SPARE

Pin
Designator
P4641B-46 NAV 2 OBI SIN/COS C 3.4.4.B 3-122, 3-123,
3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4641B-47 SPARE
P4641B-48 ADF 2 SIN/COS LO / Z 3.7.4.B 3-138, 3-139,

3-140
P4641B-49* GLIDESLOPE 2 -FLAG 3.4.4.G 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4641B-49* POSITION -FLAG 3.15.4.B.1
P4641B-49* SENS 2 -FLAG 3.15.4.C.1
P4641B-50 SPARE
P4641B-51* GLIDESLOPE 2 DEVIATION +DOWN 3.4.4.F 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4641B-51* POS X DEV +AFT 3.15.4.B.3
P4641B-51* SENS 2 DEV +DN 3.15.4.C.3
P4641B-52 SPARE
P4641B-53 NOT USED
P4641B-54 SPARE
P4641B-55 AHRS 1 RECEIVER B 3.3.4.J 3-116, 3-119
P4641B-56 DME 1 RETURN 3.5.4.A 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4641B-57 SPARE
P4641B-59 NAV 2 OBI SIN HI 3.4.4.B 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4641B-60 SPARE
P4641B-61 ADF 2 COS HI / Y 3.7.4.B 3-138, 3-139,

3-140

Pin
Designator
P4641B-62* GLIDESLOPE 2 +FLAG 3.4.4.G 3-122, 3-123,
3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4641B-62* POSITION +FLAG 3.15.4.B.1
P4641B-62* SENS 2 +FLAG 3.15.4.C.1
P4641B-63 SPARE
P4641B-65 SPARE
P4641B-66 CONFIGURATION MODULE +5 VDC 3.2.4.Q 3-7
P4641B-67 NOT USED
P4641B-68 DME 1 CLOCK 3.5.4.A 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4641B-69 DME 1 DATA 3.5.4.A 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4641B-70 DME 1 SYNC 3.5.4.A 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4641B-71 LNAV SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641B-72 MAGNETIC/TRUE 1 3.3.4.D 3-116, 3-119
P4641B-73 SPARE
P4641B-74 FAN LO 3.2.4.R 3-7
P4641B-75 SPARE
P4641B-76 SPARE
P4641B-77 JOYSTICK DOWN 3.2.4.N 3-5

Pin
Designator
P4641B-78 JOYSTICK ENTER 3.2.4.N 3-5
P4641B-79 SPARE
P4641B-80 NOT USED
P4641B-81 KNS 81 1 DATA 3.8.4 3-141
P4641B-82 KNS 81 1 SYNC 3.8.4 3-141
P4641B-83 SPARE
P4641B-84 FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM RECEIVER B 3.12.4.U 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641B-85 ILS 2 ENERGIZE IN 3.4.4.E 3-122, 3-123

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4641B-86 SG TO CONFIG CHIP SELECT 1 3.2.4.Q 3-7
P4641B-87 SG TO CONFIG CLOCK 3.2.4.Q 3-7
P4641B-88 SPARE
P4641B-89 SPARE
P4641B-90 JOYSTICK LEFT 3.2.4.N 3-5
P4641B-91 JOYSTICK UP 3.2.4.N 3-5
P4641B-93 SPARE
P4641B-94 NOT USED
P4641B-95 KNS 81 1 CLOCK 3.8.4 3-141
P4641B-96 FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM RECEIVER A 3.12.4.U 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641B-97 SPARE
P4641B-98 RADIO ALTIMETER SUPERFLAG 3.11.4.B 3-145, 3-146
P4641B-99 ADF 2 SUPERFLAG 3.7.4.C 3-138, 3-139,

3-140
P4641B-100 SG TO CONFIG DATA 3.2.4.Q 3-7
P4641B-101 JOYSTICK RETURN 3.2.4.N 3-5

Pin
Designator
P4641B-102 MFD /HSI 3.2.4.M 3-13, 3-19, 3-25,
3-31
P4641B-103 SPARE
P4641B-104 JOYSTICK RIGHT 3.2.4.N 3-5
P4641B-105 CONFIG TO SG DATA 3.2.4.Q 3-7
P4641B-106 SPARE
3.18.1.15 SG 464 - P4641C Pin Designator Index
TABLE 3-31 SG 464 - P4641C Pin Designator Index
Pin
Designator
P4641C-1 SPARE
P4641C-2 SPARE
P4641C-3 SPARE
P4641C-4 SPARE
P4641C-5 SPARE
P4641C-6 SPARE
P4641C-7 COPY 3.2.4.M 3-13, 3-19, 3-25,

3-31
P4641C-8 SPARE
P4641C-9* RADAR CONTROL RECEIVER B 3.13 3-155, 3-156,

3-157, 3-158,
3-160A, 3-160B
P4641C-10 DME 2 RETURN 3.5.4.A 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4641C-11 DME 2 CLOCK 3.5.4.A 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141

Pin
Designator
P4641C-12 XTALK RECEIVER A 3.2.4.L 3-13, 3-19, 3-25,
3-31
P4641C-13* SPARE
P4641C-13* NOT USED
P4641C-14 SPARE
P4641C-15 VNAV DEVIATION +DOWN 3-142, 3-142A
P4641C-16 MODE CHANGE OUT 3.12.4.L 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641C-17 SPARE
P4641C-18 SPARE
P4641C-19 TACAN 2 ENERGIZE IN 3.5.4.E 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4641C-20 SPARE
P4641C-21 STANDBY 3.2.4.M 3-13, 3-19, 3-25,

3-31
P4641C-22* RADAR CONTROL RECEIVER A 3.13 3-155, 3-156,

3-157, 3-158,
3-160A, 3-160B
P4641C-23 DME 2 DATA 3.5.4.A 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4641C-24 KNS 81 2 CLOCK 3.8.4 3-141
P4641C-25 NOT USED
P4641C-26 ADF SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641C-27 SPARE

Pin
Designator
P4641C-28 DME 2 SUPERFLAG 3.5.4.B 3-126, 3-127,
3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4641C-29 VNAV DEVIATION +UP 3-142, 3-142A
P4641C-30 HSI VALID OUT 3.12.4.D 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641C-31 SPARE
P4641C-32 SPARE
P4641C-33 VNAV ENGAGE 3-142, 3-142A
P4641C-34 SPARE
P4641C-35* R/T RECEIVER A 3.13 3-155, 3-156,

3-157, 3-158,
3-160A, 3-160B
P4641C-36 DME 2 SYNC 3.5.4.A 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4641C-37 KNS 81 2 DATA 3.8.4 3-141
P4641C-38 AHRS 2 RECEIVER A 3.3.4.J 3-116, 3-119
P4641C-39 NOT USED
P4641C-40 SWITCH RETURN 3.2.4.M 3-13, 3-19, 3-25,

3-31
P4641C-41 SPARE
P4641C-42 SPARE
P4641C-43 BACK COURSE OUT 3.12.4.M 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641C-44 TCAS VALID 3.14.4.B 3-161

Pin
Designator
P4641C-46 COMPASS 2 SUPERFLAG 3.3.4.C 3-116, 3-119
P4641C-47 DME 2 HOLD 3.5.4.C 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4641C-48 VNAV lN VIEW 3-142, 3-142A
P4641C-49* R/T RECEIVER B 3.13 3-155, 3-156,

3-157, 3-158,
3-160A, 3-160B
P4641C-50 KNS 81 2 SYNC 3.8.4 3-141
P4641C-51 AHRS 2 RECEIVER B 3.3.4.J 3-116, 3-119
P4641C-52 NOT USED
P4641C-53* LIGHTNING RECEIVER A 3.13 3-159
P4641C-54* R/T TRANSMITTER B 3.13 3-155, 3-156,

3-157, 3-158,
3-160A, 3-160B
P4641C-56 LNAV TRANSMITTER A 3.9.4.A 3-142, 3-142A
P4641C-57 VNAV SUPERFLAG 3-142, 3-142A
P4641C-58 CAT II ENABLE 3.4.4.J
P4641C-59 DG CROSS-SIDE 3.3.4.E 3-116, 3-118,

3-119, 3-120
P4641C-60 SPARE
P4641C-61 ILS ENERGIZE OUT 3.12.4.J 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641C-62 XTALK RECEIVER B 3.2.4.L 3-13, 3-19,

3-25, 3-31
P4641C-63 NAV 2 RECEIVER B 3.4.4.H 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4641C-64 HSI DATA B 3.16.4.L
P4641C-65 LNAV 2 RECEIVER B 3.9.4.B 3-142, 3-142A
P4641C-66 NOT USED

Pin
Designator
P4641C-67* R/T TRANSMITTER A 3.13 3-155, 3-156,
3-157, 3-158,
3-160A, 3-160B
P4641C-68 XTALK TRANSMITTER A 3.2.4.L 3-13, 3-19, 3-25,

3-31
P4641C-69 EFS GENERAL TRANSMITTER B 3.12.4.V 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B, 3-159,
3-160
P4641C-70 SPARE 1 TRANSMITTER A
P4641C-71 SPARE
P4641C-72 EFS / TEST 3.16.4.K
P4641C-73 CABLE SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J, 3-163

3.15.4.B.4
P4641C-74 HOVER SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J, 3-162

3.15.4.A.4
P4641C-75 SPARE
P4641C-76 DME 2 RECEIVER B 3.5.4.D 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4641C-77 DME 2 RECEIVER A 3.5.4.D 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4641C-78 HSI DATA A 3.16.4.L
P4641C-79 NOT USED
P4641C-80* LIGHTNING RECEIVER B 3.13 3-159
P4641C-81 EFS GENERAL TRANSMITTER A 3.12.4.V 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B, 3-159,
3-160
P4641C-82 XTALK TRANSMITTER B 3.2.4.L 3-13, 3-19, 3-25,

3-31

Pin
Designator
P4641C-83 LNAV TRANSMITTER B 3.9.4.A 3-142, 3-142A
P4641C-84 SPARE
P4641C-85 SPARE
P4641C-86 1/2 SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J 3-127, 3-128,

3-130, 3-132,
3-141, 3-142,
3-142A, 3-147,
3-147A, 3-148,
3-148A, 3-149,
3-150, 3-151,
3-152, 3-153,
3-154A, 3-154B,
3-164
P4641C-87 VNAV SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641C-88 MLS SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J 3-132, 3-147,

3-147A, 3-148,
3-148A, 3-149,
3-150, 3-151,
3-152, 3-153,
3-154A, 3-154B
P4641C-90 ADF 2 RECEIVER A 3.7.4.D 3-138, 3-139,

3-140
P4641C-91 MLS 2 RECEIVER A 3.6.4 3-137
P4641C-92 MLS 2 RECEIVER B 3.6.4 3-137
P4641C-93 NOT USED
P4641C-94 KNS 81 2 RETURN 3.8.4 3-141
P4641C-95 SPARE 1 TRANSMITTER B
P4641C-96 MFD SLAVED 1/2 3.2.4.M 3-13, 3-19, 3-25,

3-31
P4641C-97 SPARE
P4641C-98 MAGNETIC/ TRUE 2 3.3.4.D 3-116, 3-119

Pin
Designator
P4641C-99 NAV SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J 3-127, 3-128,
3-130, 3-132,
3-147, 3-147A,
3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641C-100 HOMING SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J, 3-164

3.15.4.C.4
P4641C-101 TACAN SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J
P4641C-102 RNAV SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J 3-127, 3-128,

3-141, 3-147,
3-147A, 3-148,
3-148A, 3-149,
3-150, 3-151,
3-152, 3-153,
3-154A, 3-154B
P4641C-103 ADF 2 RECEIVER B 3.7.4.D 3-138, 3-139,

3-140
P4641C-104 NAV 2 RECEIVER A 3.4.4.H 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4641C-105 LNAV 2 RECEIVER A 3.9.4.B 3-142, 3-142A
P4641C-106 NOT USED
Pin
Designator
P4651A-1 NOT USED
P4651A-2 PITCH 1 Z 3.3.4.F 3-117, 3-119
P4651A-3 PITCH 1 X 3.3.4.F 3-117, 3-119
P4651A-4 PITCH 1 Y 3.3.4.F 3-117, 3-119
P4651A-5 ROLL 1 Y 3.3.4.G 3-117, 3-119

Pin
Designator
3-28, 3-37, 3-46,
3-55, 3-66, 3-77,
3-88, 3-99, 3-110
P4651A-7 SPARE
P4651A-8 SPARE
P4651A-9 VNAV SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4651A-10 HSI GROUND 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28, 3-37, 3-46,
3-55, 3-66, 3-77,
3-88, 3-99, 3-110
P4651A-11 HSI GROUND 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28, 3-37, 3-46,
3-55, 3-66, 3-77,
3-88, 3-99, 3-110
P4651A-12 HSI -30 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28, 3-37, 3-46,
3-55, 3-66, 3-77,
3-88, 3-99, 3-110
P4651A-13 NOT USED
P4651A-14 NOT USED
P4651A-15 HSI MODE HI 3.2.4.D 3-12, 3-18, 3-24,

3-30, 3-39, 3-48,
3-57, 3-68, 3-79,
3-90, 3-101, 3-112
P4651A-16 HSI MODE LO 3.2.4.D 3-12, 3-18, 3-24,

3-30, 3-39, 3-48,
3-57, 3-68, 3-79,
3-90, 3-101, 3-112
P4651A-17 ROLL 1 X 3.3.4.G 3-117, 3-119
P4651A-18 PITCH COMMAND +UP 3.12.4.N 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154,
3-154A, 3-154B

Pin
Designator
3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4651A-21* VEL Y DEV +R 3.15.4.A.2
P4651A-21* HOMING 1 DEV +R 3.15.4.C.2
P4651A-22* VNAV SUPERFLAG 3-142, 3-142A
P4651A-22* TERRAIN SELECT SUPERFLAG IN 3.13 3-160E
P4651A-23 HSI GROUND 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28, 3-37, 3-46,
3-55, 3-66, 3-77,
3-88, 3-99, 3-110
P4651A-24 HSI/ADI GROUND 3.16.4.I
P4651A-25 HSI -15 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28, 3-37, 3-46,
3-55, 3-66, 3-77,
3-88, 3-99, 3-110
P4651A-26 NOT USED
P4651A-27 NOT USED
P4651A-28 HSI VIDEO RED HI 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-17, 3-23,

3-29, 3-38, 3-47,
3-56, 3-67, 3-78,
3-89, 3-100, 3-111

3-29, 3-38, 3-47,
3-56, 3-67, 3-78,
3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4651A-30 ROLL 1 Z 3.3.4.G 3-117, 3-119

Pin
Designator
P4651A-31 +FROM OUT 3.12.4.E 3-147, 3-147A,
3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4651A-32* VEL X DEV +FWD 3.15.4.A.3
P4651A-32* SENS 1 DEV +UP 3.15.4.C.3

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4651A-35* VEL Y DEV +L 3.15.4.A.2
P4651A-35* HOMING 1 DEV +L 3.15.4.C.2
P4651A-36* VNAV IN VIEW 3-142, 3-142A
P4651A-36* TCAS SELECT 3.14.4.C 3-161
P4651A-37 VNAV DEVIATION +DOWN 3-142, 3-142A
P4651A-38 VNAV DEVIATION +UP 3-142, 3-142A
P4651A-39 HSI -7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28, 3-37, 3-46,
3-55, 3-66, 3-77,
3-88, 3-99, 3-110
P4651A-40 NOT USED
P4651A-41 NOT USED

Pin
Designator
P4651A-42 HSI VIDEO GREEN Hl 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-17, 3-23,
3-29, 3-38, 3-47,
3-56, 3-67, 3-78,
3-89, 3-100, 3-111

3-29, 3-38, 3-47,
3-56, 3-67, 3-78,
3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4651A-45 PITCH COMMAND +DOWN 3.12.4.N 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154,
3-154A, 3-154B

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4651A-46* VEL X DEV +AFT 3.15.4.A.3
P4651A-46* SENS 1 DEV +DN 3.15.4.C.3

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4651A-49* VNAV ENGAGE 3-142, 3-142A
P4651A-49* PITCH OFFSET SYNC HSI 3.12.4.T 3-154A, 3-154B
P4651A-51 +TO OUT 3.12.4.E 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B

Pin
Designator
P4651A-52 HSI +7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,
3-28, 3-37, 3-46,
3-55, 3-66, 3-77,
3-88, 3-99, 3-110
P4651A-53 NOT USED
P4651A-54 NOT USED

3-29, 3-38, 3-47,
3-56, 3-67, 3-78,
3-89, 3-100, 3-111

3-29, 3-38, 3-47,
3-56, 3-67, 3-78,
3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4651A-57 HEADING 1 X 3.3.4.B 3-116, 3-119
P4651A-58 SPEED POINTER +FAST 3.10.4.A 3-143, 3-144

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4651A-60 NAV 1 OBI COS H 3.4.4.B 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4651A-61* VEL +FLAG 3.15.4.A.1
P4651A-61* SENS 1 +FLAG 3.15.4.C.1
P4651A-62* NAV/LOC 1 -FLAG 3.4.4.C 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4651A-62* MEMORY -FLAG 3.15.4.A.1
P4651A-62* HOMING 1 -FLAG 3.15.4.C.1

3-140
P4651A-64 ADF 1 COS HI / Y 3.7.4.B 3-138, 3-139,

3-140

Pin
Designator
P4651A-65 VERTICAL GYRO 1 SUPERFLAG 3.3.4.H 3-117, 3-119
P4651A-66 HSI +15 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28, 3-37, 3-46,
3-55, 3-66, 3-77,
3-88, 3-99, 3-110
P4651A-67 NOT USED
P4651A-68 NOT USED
P4651A-69 HSI Y DEFLECTION Hl 3.2.4.C 3-12, 3-18, 3-24,

3-30, 3-39, 3-48,
3-57, 3-68, 3-79,
3-90, 3-101, 3-112

3-30, 3-39, 3-48,
3-57, 3-68, 3-79,
3-90, 3-101, 3-112
P4651A-71 ROLL COMMAND +RIGHT 3.12.4.O 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154,
3-154A, 3-154B
P4651A-73 NAV 1 OBI SIN H 3.4.4.B 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4651A-74 REFERENCE 1 C 3.3.4.A, 3-116, 3-117,

3.4.4.A, 3-122, 3-123,
3.7.4.A 3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-138,
3-139, 3-140,
3-141, 3-162,
3-164
P4651A-75* NAV/LOC 1 +FLAG 3.4.4.C 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4651A-75* MEMORY +FLAG 3.15.4.A.1
P4651A-75* HOMING 1 +FLAG 3.15.4.C.1

3-140
P4651A-77 ADF 1 SIN HI / X 3.7.4.B 3-138, 3-139,

3-140

Pin
Designator
P4651A-78 HSI DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3.2.4.E 3-11, 3-17, 3-23,
3-29, 3-38, 3-47,
3-56, 3-67, 3-78,
3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4651A-79 HSI +30 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28, 3-37, 3-46,
3-55, 3-66, 3-77,
3-88, 3-99, 3-110
P4651A-80 NOT USED
P4651A-81 NOT USED

3-30, 3-39, 3-48,
3-57, 3-68, 3-79,
3-90, 3-101, 3-112
P4651A-84 HEADING 1 Z 3.3.4.B 3-116, 3-119
P4651A-85 SPEED POINTER SUPERFLAG 3.10.4.B 3-143, 3-144

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4651A-88* VEL -FLAG 3.15.4.A.1
P4651A-88* SENS 1 -FLAG 3.15.4.C.1

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4651A-92 HSI +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER 3.2.4.A, 3-165

3.16.4.A

Pin
Designator
P4651A-93 HSI +85 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,
3-28, 3-37, 3-46,
3-55, 3-66, 3-77,
3-88, 3-99, 3-110
P4651A-94 NOT USED
P4651A-95 NOT USED

3-30, 3-39, 3-48,
3-57, 3-68, 3-79,
3-90, 3-101, 3-112
P4651A-97 HEADING 1 Y 3.3.4.B 3-116, 3-119
P4651A-98 ROLL COMMAND +LEFT 3.12.4.O 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154,
3-154A, 3-154B
P4651A-99 SPEED POINTER +SLOW 3.10.4.A 3-143, 3-144
P4651A-100 COMPASS 1 SUPERFLAG 3.3.4.C 3-116, 3-119
P4651A-101 REFERENCE 1 H 3.3.4.A, 3-116, 3-117,

3.4.4.A, 3-122, 3-123,
3.7.4.A 3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-138,
3-139, 3-140,
3-141, 3-162,
3-164
P4651A-102 HSI +5 VDC (TEST) 3.2.4.A

Pin
Designator
P4651B-1* ADI MODE LO 3.2.4.D 3-35, 3-44, 3-53,
3-64, 3-75, 3-86,
3-97, 3-108
P4651B-2* ADI MODE HI 3.2.4.D 3-35, 3-44, 3-53,

3-64, 3-75, 3-86,
3-97, 3-108
P4651B-3* SPARE
P4651B-4* SPARE
P4651B-5* SPARE

3-140
P4651B-7 HSI VALID OUT 3.12.4.D 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4651B-8* ADI +27.5 VDC FILTERED POWER 3.2.4.A 3-33, 3-42, 3-51,
3-62, 3-73, 3-84,
3-95, 3-106
P4651B-9* SPARE
P4651B-10* SPARE
P4651B-11* ADI -30 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-33, 3-42, 3-51,

3-62, 3-73, 3-84,
3-95, 3-106
P4651B-12* ADI -15 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-33, 3-42, 3-51,

3-62, 3-73, 3-84,
3-95, 3-106
P4651B-13* ADI VIDEO RED HI 3.2.4.B 3-34, 3-43, 3-52,

3-63, 3-74, 3-85,
3-96, 3-107
P4651B-14* ADI VIDEO RED LO 3.2.4.B 3-34, 3-43, 3-52,

3-63, 3-74, 3-85,
3-96, 3-107
P4651B-15 NOT USED
P4651B-16* SPARE
P4651B-17* ADI DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3.2.4.E 3-34, 3-43, 3-52,

3-63, 3-74, 3-85,
3-96, 3-107

Pin
Designator
3-140

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4651B-20 REFERENCE 2 H 3.3.4.A, 3-116, 3-117,

3.4.4.A, 3-122, 3-123,
3.7.4.A 3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-138,
3-139, 3-140,
3-141, 3-163,
3-164
P4651B-21* NAV/LOC 2 -FLAG 3.4.4.C 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4651B-21* THRUST -FLAG 3.15.4.B.1
P4651B-21 HOMING 2 -FLAG 3.15.4.C.1

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4651B-22* SENS 2 -FLAG 3.15.4.C.1
P4651B-23* PITCH 2 Z 3.3.4.F 3-117, 3-119

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4651B-25* ADI -7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-33, 3-42, 3-51,

3-62, 3-73, 3-84,
3-95, 3-106
P4651B-26* ADI VIDEO GREEN HI 3.2.4.B 3-34, 3-43, 3-52,

3-63, 3-74, 3-85,
3-96, 3-107
P4651B-27* ADI VIDEO GREEN LO 3.2.4.B 3-34, 3-43, 3-52,

3-63, 3-74, 3-85,
3-96, 3-107
P4651B-28 NOT USED
P4651B-29* SPARE

Pin
Designator
P4651B-30 NOT USED
P4651B-31 NOT USED
P4651B-32 ADF 2 COS HI / Y 3.7.4.B 3-138, 3-139,

3-140
P4651B-33 NAV 2 OBI COS H 3.4.4.B 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4651B-34 EFS / TEST 3.16.4.K
P4651B-35 ILS 2 ENERGIZE IN 3.4.4.E 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4651B-36* PITCH 2 X 3.3.4.F 3-117, 3-119
P4651B-37* TERRAIN POP-UP DISCRETE IN 3.13 3-160E

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4651B-39* ADI +7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-33, 3-42, 3-51,

3-62, 3-73, 3-84,
3-95, 3-106
P4651B-40* ADI VIDEO BLUE HI 3.2.4.B 3-34, 3-43, 3-52,

3-63, 3-74, 3-85,
3-96, 3-107
P4651B-41* ADI VIDEO BLUE LO 3.2.4.B 3-34, 3-43, 3-52,

3-63, 3-74, 3-85,
3-96, 3-107
P4651B-42* SPARE
P4651B-43 NOT USED
P4651B-45 ADF 2 SIN HI / X 3.7.4.B 3-138, 3-139,

3-140
P4651B-46 NAV 2 OBI SIN HI 3.4.4.B 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164

Pin
Designator
P4651B-47 REFERENCE 2 C 3.3.4.A, 3-116, 3-117,
3.4.4.A, 3-122, 3-123,
3.7.4.A 3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-138,
3-139, 3-140,
3-141, 3-163,
3-164
P4651B-48* NAV/LOC 2 +FLAG 3.4.4.C 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4651B-48* THRUST +FLAG 3.15.4.B.1
P4651B-48* HOMING 2 +FLAG 3.15.4.C.1

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4651B-49* SENS 2 +FLAG 3.15.4.C.1
P4651B-50* PITCH 2 Y 3.3.4.F 3-117, 3-119
P4651B-52* ADI +15 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-33, 3-42, 3-51,

3-62, 3-73, 3-84,
3-95, 3-106
P4651B-53* ADI Y DEFLECTION HI 3.2.4.C 3-35, 3-44, 3-53,

3-64, 3-75, 3-86,
3-97, 3-108
P4651B-54* ADI Y DEFLECTION LO 3.2.4.C 3-35, 3-44, 3-53,

3-64, 3-75, 3-86,
3-97, 3-108
P4651B-55 NOT USED
P4651B-56 NOT USED
P4651B-57 NOT USED
P4651B-58 NOT USED
P4651B-60* ROLL 2 Z 3.3.4.G 3-117, 3-119

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4651B-61* POS Y DEV +L 3.15.4.B.2

Pin
Designator
P4651B-61* HOMING 2 DEV +L 3.15.4.C.2

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4651B-62* POS X DEV +AFT 3.15.4.B.3
P4651B-62* SENS 2 DEV +DN 3.15.4.C.3
P4651B-64 HEADING 2 Z 3.3.4.B 3-116, 3-119
P4651B-65 HEADING 2 Y 3.3.4.B 3-116, 3-119
P4651B-66* ADI +30 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-33, 3-42, 3-51,

3-62, 3-73, 3-84,
3-95, 3-106
P4651B-67* ADI X DEFLECTION HI 3.2.4.C 3-35, 3-44, 3-53,

3-64, 3-75, 3-86,
3-97, 3-108
P4651B-68* ADI X DEFLECTION LO 3.2.4.C 3-35, 3-44, 3-53,

3-64, 3-75, 3-86,
3-97, 3-108
P4651B-69 NOT USED
P4651B-70 NOT USED
P4651B-72* RATE OF TURN +RIGHT 3.3.4.K 3-121
P4651B-73* VERTICAL GYRO 2 SUPERFLAG 3.3.4.H 3-117, 3-119
P4651B-74 AUTOPILOT REFERENCE C 3.12.4.A 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4651B-75* POS Y DEV +R 3.15.4.B.2
P4651B-75* HOMING 2 DEV +R 3.15.4.C.2

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164

Pin
Designator
P4651B-76* POS X DEV +FWD 3.15.4.B.3
P4651B-76* SENS 2 DEV +UP 3.15.4.C.3
P4651B-77 SPARE
P4651B-78 HEADING 2 X 3.3.4.B 3-116, 3-119
P4651B-79* ADI +85 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-33, 3-42, 3-51,

3-62, 3-73, 3-84,
3-95, 3-106
P4651B-80* ADI SCOPE BLANKING 3.16.4.J
P4651B-81 MFD/ HSI 3.2.4.M 3-13, 3-19, 3-25,

3-31, 3-40, 3-49,
3-58, 3-69, 3-80,
3-91, 3-102, 3-113
P4651B-82 SPARE
P4651B-83 SPARE
P4651B-84 SPARE
P4651B-85 NOT USED
P4651B-86* RATE OF TURN +LEFT 3.3.4.K 3-121
P4651B-87* ROLL 2 X 3.3.4.G 3-117, 3-119
P4651B-88 AUTOPILOT REFERENCE H 3.12.4.A 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4651B-89* ADI GROUND 3.2.4.A 3-33, 3-42, 3-51,

3-62, 3-73, 3-84,
3-95, 3-106
P4651B-90* ADI GROUND 3.2.4.A 3-33, 3-42, 3-51,

3-62, 3-73, 3-84,
3-95, 3-106
P4651B-91* ADI AIRCRAFT POWER GROUND 3.16.4.B 3-165
P4651B-92* ADI +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER 3.16.4.B 3-40, 3-49, 3-58,
3-69, 3-80, 3-91,
3-102, 3-113,
3-165
3-69, 3-80, 3-91,
3-102, 3-113,
3-165
P4651B-94 SPARE

Pin
Designator
P4651B-95 SPARE
P4651B-96 SPARE
P4651B-97 SPARE
P4651B-100* RATE OF TURN SUPERFLAG 3.3.4.L 3-121
P4651B-101* ROLL 2 Y 3.3.4.G 3-117, 3-119
P4651B-102* ADI GROUND 3.2.4.A 3-33, 3-42, 3-51,

3-62, 3-73, 3-84,
3-95, 3-106
P4651B-105* ADI +5 VDC (TEST) 3.2.4.A
3-69, 3-80, 3-91,
3-102, 3-113,
3-165
Pin
Designator
P4652A-2 DME 1 RECEIVER A 3.5.4.D 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4652A-4 AHRS 1 RECEIVER B 3.3.4.J 3-116, 3-117,

3-119
P4652A-5 SPARE

Pin
Designator
P4652A-6 CABLE SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J, 3-163
3.15.4.B.4
P4652A-7 1/2 SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J 3-127, 3-128,

3-130, 3-132,
3-141, 3-142,
3-142A, 3-147,
3-147A, 3-148,
3-148A, 3-149,
3-150, 3-151,
3-152, 3-153,
3-154A, 3-154B,
3-164
P4652A-8 DME 1 HOLD 3.5.4.C 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4652A-9 DME 1 SUPERFLAG 3.5.4.B 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4652A-10 SPARE
P4652A-11 TCAS VALID 3.14.4.B 3-161
P4652A-12 MODE CHANGE OUT 3.12.4.L 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4652A-14 MLS 1 RECEIVER B 3.6.4 3-137
P4652A-16 NAV 1 RECEIVER A 3.4.4.H 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4652A-17 LNAV SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B

Pin
Designator
P4652A-18 HOVER SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J, 3-162
3.15.4.A.4
P4652A-19 NAV SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J 3-127, 3-128,

3-130, 3-132,
3-147, 3-147A,
3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4652A-21 AUTOPILOT LEFT/ RIGHT 3.12.4.S 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4652A-22 COMPOSITE 3.2.4.M 3-40, 3-49, 3-58,

3-69, 3-80, 3-91,
3-102, 3-113
P4652A-23 SPARE
P4652A-24* ADI VALID OUT 3.12.4.D 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4652A-25 SPARE
P4652A-26 CHECKLIST RECEIVER B 3.13 3-142, 3-160
P4652A-27 CHECKLIST RECEIVER A 3.13 3-142, 3-160
P4652A-28 DME 1 RECEIVER B 3.5.4.D 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4652A-29 NAV 1 RECEIVER B 3.4.4.H 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4652A-30 AHRS 1 RECEIVER A 3.3.4.J 3-116, 3-117,

3-119
P4652A-31 SPARE 1 TRANSMITTER B

Pin
Designator
P4652A-32 ATTITUDE MISCOMPARE OUT 3.12.4.K 3-147, 3-147A,
3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4652A-33 ADF SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4652A-34 TACAN 1 ENERGIZE IN 3.5.4.E 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4652A-37 NOT USED
P4652A-38* MARKER BEACON OUTER 3.4.4.I 3-125
P4652A-39* MARKER BEACON MIDDLE 3.4.4.I 3-125
P4652A-40* AIRDATA RECEIVER B 3.10.4.D 3-143, 3-144
P4652A-41 MLS 1 RECEIVER A 3.6.4 3-137
P4652A-42 ADF 1 RECEIVER B 3.7.4.D 3-138, 3-139,

3-140
P4652A-43 ADF 1 RECEIVER A 3.7.4.D 3-138, 3-139,

3-140
P4652A-45* HOMING SELECT OUT 3.15.4.C.4 3-164
P4652A-46 NOT USED
P4652A-47 NOT USED
P4652A-48 NOT USED
P4652A-49 NOT USED

Pin
Designator
P4652A-50 BACK COURSE OUT 3.12.4.M 3-147, 3-147A,
3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4652A-51* MARKER BEACON RETURN 3.4.4.I 3-125
P4652A-52* MARKER BEACON INNER 3.4.4.I 3-125
P4652A-53 LNAV 1 RECEIVER B 3.9.4.B 3-142, 3-142A
P4652A-54* AIRDATA RECEIVER A 3.10.4.D 3-143, 3-144
P4652A-55 KNS 81 1 SYNC 3.8.4 3-141
P4652A-56 SPARE
P4652A-57 NOT USED
P4652A-59 NOT USED
P4652A-60 NOT USED
P4652A-61 NOT USED
P4652A-62 NOT USED
P4652A-63 NOT USED
P4652A-64 SG TO CONFIG CLOCK 3.2.4.Q 3-7
P4652A-65 JOYSTICK LEFT 3.2.4.N 3-5
P4652A-66 JOYSTICK RIGHT 3.2.4.N 3-5
P4652A-67 LNAV 1 RECEIVER A 3.9.4.B 3-142, 3-142A
P4652A-68 XTALK RECEIVER A 3.2.4.L 3-13, 3-19, 3-25,

3-31, 3-40, 3-49,
3-58, 3-69, 3-80,
3-91, 3-102, 3-113
P4652A-69 KNS 81 1 CLOCK 3.8.4 3-141
P4652A-70 SPARE
P4652A-71 MAGNETIC/ TRUE 1 3.3.4.D 3-116, 3-119
P4652A-72 NOT USED
P4652A-73 NOT USED
P4652A-74 NOT USED
P4652A-75 NOT USED
P4652A-76 NOT USED

Pin
Designator
P4652A-77 JOYSTICK RETURN 3.2.4.N 3-5
P4652A-78 JOYSTICK DOWN 3.2.4.N 3-5
P4652A-79 JOYSTICK UP 3.2.4.N 3-5
P4652A-80 DME 1 DATA 3.5.4.A 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4652A-81 XTALK RECEIVER B 3.2.4.L 3-13, 3-19, 3-25,

3-31, 3-40, 3-49,
3-58, 3-69, 3-80,
3-91, 3-102, 3-113
P4652A-82 DME 1 SYNC 3.5.4.A 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4652A-83 KNS 81 1 RETURN 3.8.4 3-141
P4652A-84 NOT USED
P4652A-85* PITCH OFFSET SYNC - ADI 3.12.4.T 3-154A, 3-154B
P4652A-87 NOT USED
P4652A-88 NOT USED
P4652A-89 NOT USED
P4652A-91 SG TO CONFIG DATA 3.2.4.Q 3-7
P4652A-92 CONFIG TO SG DATA 3.2.4.Q 3-7
P4652A-93 JOYSTICK ENTER 3.2.4.N 3-5
P4652A-94 DME 1 CLOCK 3.5.4.A 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141

Pin
Designator
P4652A-95 DME 1 RETURN 3.5.4.A 3-126, 3-127,
3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4652A-96 KNS 81 1 DATA 3.8.4 3-141
P4652A-97 SPARE
P4652A-98 SPARE
P4652A-99 SPARE
P4652A-100 NOT USED
P4652A-101 FAN LO 3.2.4.R 3-7
P4652A-102 FAN HI 3.2.4.R 3-7
P4652A-103 CONFIGURATION MODULE GROUND 3.2.4.Q 3-7
P4652A-104 CONFIGURATION MODULE +5 VDC 3.2.4.Q 3-7
P4652A-105 SG TO CONFIG CHIP SELECT 2 3.2.4.Q 3-7
Pin
Designator
P4652B-1 SPARE
P4652B-2 NOT USED
P4652B-3 MAGNETIC/ TRUE 2 3.3.4.D 3-116, 3-119
P4652B-4* FLIGHT DIRECTOR ENGAGE 3.12.4.Q 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4652B-5 NOT USED

Pin
Designator
P4652B-6* FLIGHT DIRECTOR VALID 3.12.4.P 3-147, 3-147A,
3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4652B-8 EFS GENERAL TRANSMITTER A 3.12.4.V 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B, 3-159,
3-160
P4652B-9* RADAR CONTROL RECEIVER A 3.13 3-155, 3-156,

3-157, 3-158,
3-160A, 3-160B,
3-160C, 3-160D
P4652B-10 SPARE 2 RECEIVER B
P4652B-11 NOT USED
P4652B-12 NOT USED
P4652B-13* DECISION HEIGHT SELECT IN 3.11.4.D 3-145, 3-146
P4652B-14* FLT DIRECTOR COMMAND BAR SELECT 3.12.4.R 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4652B-15 NOT USED
P4652B-16 COPY 3.2.4.M 3-13, 3-19, 3-25,

3-31, 3-40, 3-49,
3-58, 3-69, 3-80,
3-91, 3-102, 3-113

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4652B-18 CAT II ENABLE 3.4.4.J
P4652B-19 DG CROSS-SIDE 3.3.4.E 3-116, 3-118,

3-119, 3-120
P4652B-20 LNAV TRANSMITTER B 3.9.4.A 3-142, 3-142A

Pin
Designator
P4652B-21 XTALK TRANSMITTER B 3.2.4.L 3-13, 3-19,
3-25, 3-31,
3-40, 3-49,
3-58, 3-69,
3-80, 3-91,
3-102, 3-113
P4652B-22* R/T RECEIVER A 3.13 3-155, 3-156,

3-157, 3-158,
3-160A, 3-160B,
3-160C, 3-160D
P4652B-22* 453 DATA BUS A IN 3-160E
P4652B-23 SPARE 2 RECEIVER A
P4652B-24* FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM RECEIVER B 3.12.4.U 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4652B-26 SPARE
P4652B-27 SPARE
P4652B-28 NOT USED
P4652B-29 NOT USED
P4652B-31 NOT USED
P4652B-32* AOA/IAS 3.10.4.C 3-143, 3-144
P4652B-33 NOT USED
P4652B-34 EFS GENERAL TRANSMITTER B 3.12.4.V 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B, 3-159,
3-160
P4652B-35* RADAR CONTROL RECEIVER B 3.13 3-155, 3-156,

3-157, 3-158,
3-160A, 3-160B,
3-160C, 3-160D
P4652B-36 MLS 2 RECEIVER A 3.6.4 3-137

Pin
Designator
3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4652B-40 SPARE
P4652B-41 SPARE
P4652B-42 SPARE
P4652B-43 STANDBY 3.2.4.M 3-13, 3-19, 3-25,

3-31, 3-40, 3-49,
3-58, 3-69, 3-80,
3-91, 3-102, 3-113
P4652B-44 DME 2 HOLD 3.5.4.C 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4652B-46 NOT USED
P4652B-47 LNAV TRANSMITTER A 3.9.4.A 3-142, 3-142A
P4652B-48 XTALK TRANSMITTER A 3.2.4.L 3-13, 3-19, 3-25,

3-31, 3-40, 3-49,
3-58, 3-69, 3-80,
3-91, 3-102, 3-113
P4652B-49* R/T RECEIVER B 3.13 3-155, 3-156,

3-157, 3-158,
3-160A, 3-160B,
3-160C, 3-160D
P4652B-49* 453 DATA BUS B IN 3-160E
P4652B-50 MLS 2 RECEIVER B 3.6.4 3-137
P4652B-51 NOT USED

Pin
Designator
3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4652B-53 SPARE
P4652B-54 SPARE
P4652B-56 SPARE
P4652B-57 CONTROL PANEL RETURN 3.2.4.F 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,

3-21, 3-27, 3-36,
3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109, 3-161
P4652B-58 CONTROL PANEL MODE 4 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,

3-21, 3-27, 3-36,
3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109, 3-161
P4652B-59 CONTROL PANEL HEADING 2 3.2.4.H 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,

3-21, 3-27, 3-36,
3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109
P4652B-61 TACAN SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J
P4652B-62* ADI DATA B 3.16.4.L

3-140

3-140
P4652B-67* LIGHTNING RECEIVER B 3.13 3-159
P4652B-68* R/T TRANSMITTER A 3.13 3-155, 3-156,

3-157, 3-158,
3-160A, 3-160B,
3-160C, 3-160D
P4652B-68* R/T TRANSMITTER 429 A OUT 3-160E
P4652B-69 NOT USED

Pin
Designator
P4652B-70* CONTROL PANEL DH SELECT 1 3.2.4.J 3-3, 3-4, 3-36,
3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109

3-21, 3-27, 3-36,
3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109, 3-161
P4652B-72 CONTROL PANEL COURSE 2 3.2.4.I 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,

3-21, 3-27, 3-36,
3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109
P4652B-73 MFD SLAVED 1/2 3.2.4.M 3-13, 3-19, 3-25,

3-31, 3-40, 3-49,
3-58, 3-69, 3-80,
3-91, 3-102, 3-113
P4652B-74 RNAV SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J 3-127, 3-128,

3-141, 3-147,
3-147A, 3-148,
3-148A, 3-149,
3-150, 3-151,
3-152, 3-153,
3-154A, 3-154B
P4652B-75 MLS SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J 3-132, 3-147,

3-147A, 3-148,
3-148A, 3-149,
3-150, 3-151,
3-152, 3-153,
3-154A, 3-154B
P4652B-76* ADI DATA A 3.16.4.L
P4652B-77 DME 2 RETURN 3.5.4.A 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4652B-78 DME 2 CLOCK 3.5.4.A 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141

Pin
Designator
P4652B-79 DME 2 DATA 3.5.4.A 3-126, 3-127,
3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4652B-80* LIGHTNING RECEIVER A 3.13 3-159
P4652B-81* R/T TRANSMITTER B 3.13 3-155, 3-156,

3-157, 3-158,
3-160A, 3-160B,
3-160C, 3-160D
P4652B-81* R/T TRANSMITTER 429 B OUT 3-160E
P4652B-82 NOT USED
P4652B-83 SPARE
P4652B-84* CONTROL PANEL DH ON 3.2.4.J 3-3, 3-4, 3-36,

3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109

3-21, 3-27, 3-36,
3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109, 3-161

3-21, 3-27, 3-36,
3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109
P4652B-87* VG CROSS-SIDE 3.3.4.I 3-117, 3-118,

3-119, 3-120
P4652B-88* DECISION HEIGHT SELECT OUT 3.11.4.E 3-145, 3-146
P4652B-89 HSI DATA A 3.16.4.L
P4652B-90 AHRS 2 RECEIVER A 3.3.4.J 3-116, 3-117,

3-119
P4652B-91 KNS 81 2 CLOCK 3.8.4 3-141
P4652B-92 DME 2 SYNC 3.5.4.A 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4652B-93 KNS 81 2 RETURN 3.8.4 3-141

Pin
Designator
P4652B-94 SWITCH RETURN 3.2.4.M 3-13, 3-19, 3-25,
3-31, 3-40, 3-49,
3-58, 3-69, 3-80,
3-91, 3-102, 3-113
P4652B-95* DISPLAY DOWN 3.2.4.M 3-40, 3-49, 3-58,

3-69, 3-80, 3-91,
3-102, 3-113
P4652B-96 SPARE

3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109

3-21, 3-27, 3-36,
3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109, 3-161

3-21, 3-27, 3-36,
3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109
P4652B-100 CONTROL PANEL +7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.F 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,
3-21, 3-27, 3-36,
3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109
P4652B-102 ILS ENERGIZE OUT 3.12.4.J 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4652B-103 HSI DATA B 3.16.4.L
P4652B-104 AHRS 2 RECEIVER B 3.3.4.J 3-116, 3-117,

3-119
P4652B-105 KNS 81 2 SYNC 3.8.4 3-141
P4652B-106 KNS 81 2 DATA 3.8.4 3-141

3.18.1.20 CP 467 - P4671 Pin Designator Index
TABLE 3-36 CP 467 - P4671 Pin Designator Index
Pin
CP 467 Line Name Section Figure
Designator
P4671-1 ADI BRIGHTNESS 3.2.4.P 3-6
P4671-2 HSI/MFD BRIGHTNESS RETURN 3.2.4.P 3-6
P4671-3 ADI BRIGHTNESS RETURN 3.2.4.P 3-6
P4671-4 HSI/MFD BRIGHTNESS 3.2.4.P 3-6
P4671-5 MODE 2 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-4, 3-36,

3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109, 3-161
P4671-6 MODE 4 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-4, 3-36,

3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109, 3-161
P4671-7 MODE 1 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-4, 3-36,

3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109, 3-161
P4671-8 HEADING 2 3.2.4.H 3-3, 3-4, 3-36,

3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109
P4671-9 RADIO ALTIMETER TEST RETURN 3.11.4.F 3-145, 3-146
P4671-10 COURSE 1 3.2.4.I 3-3, 3-4, 3-36,

3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109
P4671-11 MODE 1 IN 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-161
P4671-12 COURSE 2 3.2.4.I 3-3, 3-4, 3-36,

3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109
P4671-13 DECISION HEIGHT SELECT 2 3.2.4.J 3-3, 3-4, 3-36,

3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109

3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109
P4671-15 COURSE 1 IN 3.2.4.I 3-3
P4671-16 MODE 3 IN 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-161

Pin
Designator
P4671-17 +7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.F 3-3, 3-4, 3-36,
3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109
P4671-18* LIGHTING 5 VAC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4671-19 DECISION HEIGHT ON 3.2.4.J 3-3, 3-4, 3-36,

3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109
P4671-20* EXTERNAL HEADING SYNC 3.2.4.H 3-3, 3-4
P4671-21* +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4671-22 MODE 3 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-4, 3-36,

3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109, 3-161
P4671-23 HEADING 1 3.2.4.H 3-3, 3-4, 3-36,

3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109
P4671-24 RADIO ALTIMETER TEST 3.11.4.F 3-145, 3-146
P4671-25 NOT USED
P4671-26* EXTERNAL 3.2.4.K 3-3, 3-4
P4671-27* TANDEM 3.2.4.K 3-3, 3-4
P4671-28 NOT USED
P4671-29 DECISION HEIGHT SELECT 1 IN 3.2.4.J 3-3
P4671-31 COURSE 2 IN 3.2.4.I 3-3
P4671-32 HEADING 2 IN 3.2.4.H 3-3
P4671-33 +7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.F 3-3
P4671-34 LIGHTING LO 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4671-35 NOT USED
P4671-36 DECISION HEIGHT ON IN 3.2.4.J 3-3
P4671-37* LIGHTING +28 VDC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4671-38* LIGHTING +5 VDC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4671-40 NOT USED
P4671-41 NOT USED

Pin
Designator
P4671-42 NOT USED
P4671-43* AIRCRAFT GROUND 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4671-44 RETURN 3.2.4.F, 3-3, 3-4, 3-36,

3.2.4.G, 3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3.2.4.H, 3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3.2.4.K 3-109
P4671-45 RETURN 3.2.4.F, 3-3, 3-161

3.2.4.G
P4671-47 MODE 2 IN 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-161
P4671-48 NOT USED
P4671-49 HEADING 1 IN 3.2.4.H 3-3
P4671-50 MODE 4 IN 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-161
Pin
Designator
P4681-5 MODE 2 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,

3-27, 3-161
P4681-6 MODE 4 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,

3-27, 3-161
P4681-7 MODE 1 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,

3-27, 3-161
P4681-8 HEADING 2 3.2.4.H 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,

3-27
P4681-9 NOT USED
P4681-10 COURSE 1 3.2.4.I 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,

3-27

Pin
Designator
P4681-11 MODE 1 IN 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-161
P4681-12 COURSE 2 3.2.4.I 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,

3-27
P4681-13 NOT USED
P4681-14 NOT USED
P4681-15 COURSE 1 IN 3.2.4.I 3-3
P4681-16 MODE 3 IN 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-161
P4681-17 +7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.F 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,

3-27
P4681-18* LIGHTING 5 VAC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4681-19 NOT USED
P4681-20 EXTERNAL HEADING SYNC 3.2.4.H 3-3, 3-4
P4681-22 MODE 3 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,

3-27, 3-161
P4681-23 HEADING 1 3.2.4.H 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,

3-27
P4681-24 NOT USED
P4681-25 NOT USED
P4681-26* EXTERNAL 3.2.4.K 3-3, 3-4
P4681-27* TANDEM 3.2.4.K 3-3, 3-4
P4681-28 NOT USED
P4681-29 NOT USED
P4681-30 NOT USED
P4681-31 COURSE 2 IN 3.2.4.I 3-3
P4681-32 HEADING 2 IN 3.2.4.H 3-3
P4681-33 +7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.F 3-3
P4681-34 LIGHTING LO 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4681-35 NOT USED
P4681-36 NOT USED
P4681-37* LIGHTING +28 VDC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4681-38* LIGHTING +5 VDC 3.2.4.O 3-6

Pin
Designator
P4681-40 NOT USED
P4681-41 NOT USED
P4681-42 NOT USED
P4681-44 RETURN 3.2.4.F, 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,

3.2.4.G, 3-27
3.2.4.H,
3.2.4.K
P4681-45 RETURN 3.2.4.F, 3-3, 3-161

3.2.4.G
P4681-47 MODE 2 IN 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-161
P4681-48 NOT USED
P4681-49 HEADING 1 IN 3.2.4.H 3-3
P4681-50 MODE 4 IN 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-161
Pin
Designator
P4691-1 NOT USED
P4691-2 HSI/ MFD BRIGHTNESS RETURN 3.2.4.P 3-6
P4691-3 NOT USED
P4691-4 HSI/ MFD BRIGHTNESS 3.2.4.P 3-6
P4691-5 MODE 2 3.2.4.G 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109, 3-161
P4691-6 MODE 4 3.2.4.G 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109, 3-161
P4691-7 MODE 1 3.2.4.G 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109, 3-161
P4691-8 HEADING 2 3.2.4.H 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109

Pin
Designator
P4691-9 NOT USED
P4691-10 COURSE 1 3.2.4.I 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P4691-11 MODE 1 IN 3.2.4.G 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109, 3-161
P4691-12 COURSE 2 3.2.4.I 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109

3-98, 3-109

3-98, 3-109
P4691-15 COURSE 1 IN 3.2.4.I 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P4691-16 MODE 3 IN 3.2.4.G 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109, 3-161
P4691-17 +7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.F 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P4691-18 LIGHTING 5 VAC 3.2.4.O 3-6

3-98, 3-109
P4691-20 EXTERNAL HEADING SYNC 3.2.4.H 3-4
P4691-21 +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4691-22 MODE 3 3.2.4.G 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109, 3-161
P4691-23 HEADING 1 3.2.4.H 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P4691-24 NOT USED
P4691-25 NOT USED
P4691-26 EXTERNAL 3.2.4.K 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P4691-27 TANDEM 3.2.4.K 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P4691-28 NOT USED
P4691-29 DECISION HEIGHT SELECT 1 IN 3.2.4.J 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109

3-98, 3-109

Pin
Designator
P4691-31 COURSE 2 IN 3.2.4.I 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,
3-98, 3-109
P4691-32 HEADING 2 IN 3.2.4.H 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P4691-33 +7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.F 3-4
P4691-34 LIGHTING LO 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4691-35 NOT USED
P4691-36 DECISION HEIGHT ON IN 3.2.4.J 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P4691-37 LIGHTING +28 VDC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4691-38 LIGHTING +5 VDC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4691-40 NOT USED
P4691-41 NOT USED
P4691-42 NOT USED
P4691-43 AIRCRAFT GROUND 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4691-44 RETURN 3.2.4.F, 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3.2.4.G, 3-98, 3-109
3.2.4.K
P4691-45 RETURN 3.2.4.F, 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3.2.4.G 3-98, 3-109, 3-161
P4691-47 MODE 2 IN 3.2.4.G 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109, 3-161
P4691-48 NOT USED
P4691-49 HEADING 1 IN 3.2.4.H 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P4691-50 MODE 4 IN 3.2.4.G 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109, 3-161

Pin
Designator
P469A1-1 HSI/ MFD BRIGHTNESS 3.2.4.P 3-6
P469A1-2 AIRCRAFT +27.5 VDC POWER BUS 1 3.2.4.F, 3-165

3.2.4.O,
3.16.4.E

3.2.4.O,
3.16.4.E
P469A1-4 POLARIZER KEY
P469A1-5 MODE 2 3.2.4.G 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-6 MODE 4 3.2.4.G 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-7 MODE 1 3.2.4.G 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-8 HEADING 2 3.2.4.H 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-9 NOT USED
P469A1-10 COURSE 1 3.2.4.I 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-11 MODE 1 IN 3.2.4.G 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-12 COURSE 2 3.2.4.I 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-13 DECISION HEIGHT SELECT 2 3.2.4.J 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-15 COURSE 1 IN 3.2.4.I 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-16 MODE 3 IN 3.2.4.G 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-17 JOYSTICK RIGHT 3.2.4.N 3-5
P469A1-18 LIGHTING 5 VAC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P469A1-19 DECISION HEIGHT ON 3.2.4.J 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-20 EXTERNAL HEADING SYNC 3.2.4.H 3-4

Pin
Designator
P469A1-21 NOT USED
P469A1-22 MODE 3 3.2.4.G 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-23 HEADING 1 3.2.4.H 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-24 NOT USED
P469A1-25 HSI/ MFD BRIGHTNESS RETURN 3.2.4.P 3-6
P469A1-26 EXTERNAL 3.2.4.K 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-27 TANDEM 3.2.4.K 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-28 JOYSTICK LEFT 3.2.4.N 3-5
P469A1-29 DECISION HEIGHT SELECT 1 IN 3.2.4.J 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-31 COURSE 2 IN 3.2.4.I 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-32 HEADING 2 IN 3.2.4.H 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-33 JOYSTICK UP 3.2.4.N 3-5
P469A1-34 LIGHTING LO 3.2.4.O 3-6
P469A1-35 JOYSTICK DOWN 3.2.4.N 3-5
P469A1-36 DECISION HEIGHT ON IN 3.2.4.J 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-37 LIGHTING +28 VDC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P469A1-38 LIGHTING +5 VDC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P469A1-39 NOT USED
P469A1-40 JOYSTICK ENTER 3.2.4.N 3-5
P469A1-41 EXTERNAL TCAS 3.14.4.D 3-161
P469A1-42 AIRCRAFT GROUND 3.2.4.F 3-165
P469A1-43 AIRCRAFT GROUND 3.16.4.E 3-165
P469A1-44 JOYSTICK/SWITCH RETURN 3.2.4.G, 3-5

3.2.4.N
P469A1-45 RETURN 3.2.4.G, 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3.2.4.H 3-98, 3-109, 3-161

Pin
Designator
P469A1-46 RETURN 3.2.4.K 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,
3-98, 3-109
P469A1-47 MODE 2 IN 3.2.4.G 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-48 EXTERNAL ENTER 3.2.4.N 3-5
P469A1-49 HEADING 1 IN 3.2.4.H 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-50 MODE 4 IN 3.2.4.G 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
Pin
Designator
P469A2-1 EMERGENCY 1 3.13 3-160
P469A2-2 EMERGENCY 2 3.13 3-160
P469A2-3 EMERGENCY 3 3.13 3-160
P469A2-4 EXTERNAL JOYSTICK RETURN 3.2.4.N 3-5
P469A2-5 EXTERNAL UP 3.13 3-160
P469A2-6 CHECKLIST VALID 3.13 3-160
P469A2-7 SPARE OUT 1
P469A2-8 EFS ARINC 429 RECEIVER A 3.13 3-160
P469A2-9 EFS ARINC 429 RECEIVER B 3.13 3-160
P469A2-10 EFS ARINC 429 TRANSMITTER A 3.13 3-160
P469A2-11 EXTERNAL ARINC 429 RECEIVER 3 B 3.13 3-160
P469A2-12 SPARE IN 1
P469A2-16 RS 232 RECEIVER 3.13
P469A2-17 RS 232 TRANSMITTER 3.13

Pin
Designator
P469A2-18 EMERGENCY 4 3.13 3-160
P469A2-19 EMERGENCY 5 3.13 3-160
P469A2-20 EMERGENCY 6 3.13 3-160
P469A2-21 EXTERNAL JOYSTICK DOWN 3.2.4.N 3-5
P469A2-22 EXTERNAL DOWN 3.13 3-160
P469A2-25 EFS ARINC 429 TRANSMITTER B 3.13 3-160
P469A2-26 EXTERNAL ARINC 429 RECEIVER 1 A 3.13 3-160
P469A2-28 EXTERNAL ARINC 429 SELECT 1 3.13 3-160
P469A2-33 RS 232 RETURN 3.13
P469A2-34 EMERGENCY 7 3.13 3-160
P469A2-35 EMERGENCY 8 3.13 3-160
P469A2-36 EXTERNAL JOYSTICK LEFT 3.2.4.N 3-5
P469A2-37 EXTERNAL JOYSTICK RIGHT 3.2.4.N 3-5
P469A2-39 EXTERNAL JOYSTICK UP 3.2.4.N 3-5
P469A2-45 NOT USED
P469A2-46 NOT USED
P469A2-47 JOYSTICK/SWITCH RETURN 3.13 3-160

Pin
Designator
Pin
Designator
P4701-1 DECISION HEIGHT ON 3.2.4.J 3-3, 3-4, 3-36
P4701-2 RETURN 3-3, 3-4, 3-36
P4701-6 RADIO ALTIMETER TEST 1 3.11.4.F 3-145, 3-146
P4701-7 RADIO ALTIMETER TEST RETURN 1 3.11.4.F 3-145, 3-146
P4701-8 NOT USED
P4701-9 DECISION HEIGHT SELECT 2 3.2.4.J 3-3, 3-4, 3-36
P4701-13 LIGHTING LO 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4701-14* LIGHTING +28 VDC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4701-15* LIGHTING +5 VDC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4701-15* LIGHTING 5 VAC 3.2.4.O 3-6

Pin
Designator
P5511-A AIRCRAFT POWER GROUND 3.16.4.D 3-16, 3-28, 3-42,
3-46, 3-62, 3-66,
3-84, 3-88, 3-106,
3-110, 3-165
P5511-B AIRCRAFT POWER GROUND 3.16.4.D 3-16, 3-28, 3-42,

3-46, 3-62, 3-66,
3-84, 3-88, 3-106,
3-110, 3-165
P5511-C LIGHTING LO 3.2.4.O 3-6
P5511-D* LIGHTING 5 VOLTS 3.2.4.O 3-6
P5511-E* LIGHTING 28 VOLTS 3.2.4.O 3-6
P5511-F SHIELD GROUND 3.16.4.H
P5511-G SHIELD GROUND 3.16.4.H
P5511-H SPARE
P5511-J SPARE
P5511-K SPARE
P5511-L SPARE
P5511-M +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER BUS 2 3.16.4.D 3-16, 3-28, 3-42,
3-46, 3-62, 3-66,
3-84, 3-88, 3-106,
3-110, 3-165
P5511-N +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER BUS 2 3.16.4.D 3-16, 3-28, 3-42,
3-46, 3-62, 3-66,
3-84, 3-88, 3-106,
3-110, 3-165
P5511-P X DEFLECTION LO 3.2.4.C 3-18, 3-30, 3-44,

3-48, 3-64, 3-68,
3-86, 3-90, 3-108,
3-112
P5511-R X DEFLECTION Hl 3.2.4.C 3-18, 3-30, 3-44,

3-48, 3-64, 3-68,
3-86, 3-90, 3-108,
3-112
P5511-S +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER BUS 1 3.16.4.D 3-16, 3-28, 3-42,
3-46, 3-62, 3-66,
3-84, 3-88, 3-106,
3-110, 3-165

Pin
Designator
P5511-T +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER BUS 1 3.16.4.D 3-16, 3-28, 3-42,
3-46, 3-62, 3-66,
3-84, 3-88, 3-106,
3-110, 3-165
P5511-U VIDEO RED HI 3.2.4.B 3-17, 3-29, 3-43,

3-47, 3-63, 3-67,
3-85, 3-89, 3-107,
3-111
P5511-V VIDEO RED LO 3.2.4.B 3-17, 3-29, 3-43,

3-47, 3-63, 3-67,
3-85, 3-89, 3-107,
3-111
P5511-W VIDEO BLUE HI 3.2.4.B 3-17, 3-29, 3-43,

3-47, 3-63, 3-67,
3-85, 3-89, 3-107,
3-111
P5511-X VIDEO BLUE LO 3.2.4.B 3-17, 3-29, 3-43,

3-47, 3-63, 3-67,
3-85, 3-89, 3-107,
3-111
P5511-Y VIDEO GREEN HI 3.2.4.B 3-17, 3-29, 3-43,

3-47, 3-63, 3-67,
3-85, 3-89, 3-107,
3-111
P5511-Z VIDEO GREEN LO 3.2.4.B 3-17, 3-29, 3-43,

3-47, 3-63, 3-67,
3-85, 3-89, 3-107,
3-111
P5511-A MODE HI 3.2.4.D 3-18, 3-30, 3-44,

3-48, 3-64, 3-68,
3-86, 3-90, 3-108,
3-112
P5511-B MODE LO 3.2.4.D 3-18, 3-30, 3-44,

3-48, 3-64, 3-68,
3-86, 3-90, 3-108,
3-112
P5511-C DISPLAY DOWN 3.2.4.M 3-19, 3-31, 3-49,

3-69, 3-91, 3-113
P5511-D Y DEFLECTION LO 3.2.4.C 3-18, 3-30, 3-44,

3-48, 3-64, 3-68,
3-86, 3-90, 3-108,
3-112
P5511-E Y DEFLECTION HI 3.2.4.C 3-18, 3-30, 3-44,

3-48, 3-64, 3-68,
3-86, 3-90, 3-108,
3-112

Pin
Designator
P5511-F DISPLAY DOWN RETURN 3.2.4.M 3-49, 3-69, 3-91,
3-113
P5511-G BRIGHTNESS 3.2.4.P 3-6
P5511-H BRIGHTNESS RETURN 3.2.4.P 3-6
P5511-J DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3.2.4.E 3-17, 3-29, 3-43,

3-47, 3-63, 3-67,
3-85, 3-89, 3-107,
3-111
3.18.1.27 ED 551A - P551A1 Pin Designator Index
TABLE 3-43 ED 551A - P551A1 Pin Designator Index
Pin
ED 551A Line Name Section Figure
Designator
P551A1-A AIRCRAFT POWER GROUND 3.16.4.D 3-16, 3-28, 3-42,
3-46, 3-62, 3-66,
3-84, 3-88, 3-106,
3-110, 3-165
P551A1-B AIRCRAFT POWER GROUND 3.16.4.D 3-16, 3-28, 3-42,

3-46, 3-62, 3-66,
3-84, 3-88, 3-106,
3-110, 3-165
P551A1-C LIGHTING LO 3.2.4.O 3-6
P551A1-D* LIGHTING 5 VOLTS 3.2.4.O 3-6
P551A1-E* LIGHTING 28 VOLTS 3.2.4.O 3-6
P551A1-F SHIELD GROUND 3.16.4.H
P551A1-G SHIELD GROUND 3.16.4.H
P551A1-H SPARE
P551A1-J SPARE
P551A1-K SPARE
P551A1-L SPARE
P551A1-M +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER BUS 2 3.16.4.D 3-16, 3-28, 3-42,
3-46, 3-62, 3-66,
3-84, 3-88, 3-106,
3-110, 3-165

Pin
Designator
P551A1-N +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER BUS 2 3.16.4.D 3-16, 3-28, 3-42,
3-46, 3-62, 3-66,
3-84, 3-88, 3-106,
3-110, 3-165
P551A1-P X DEFLECTION LO 3.2.4.C 3-18, 3-30, 3-44,

3-48, 3-64, 3-68,
3-86, 3-90, 3-108,
3-112
P551A1-R X DEFLECTION Hl 3.2.4.C 3-18, 3-30, 3-44,

3-48, 3-64, 3-68,
3-86, 3-90, 3-108,
3-112
P551A1-S +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER BUS 1 3.16.4.D 3-16, 3-28, 3-42,
3-46, 3-62, 3-66,
3-84, 3-88, 3-106,
3-110, 3-165
P551A1-T +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER BUS 1 3.16.4.D 3-16, 3-28, 3-42,
3-46, 3-62, 3-66,
3-84, 3-88, 3-106,
3-110, 3-165
P551A1-U VIDEO RED HI 3.2.4.B 3-17, 3-29, 3-43,

3-47, 3-63, 3-67,
3-85, 3-89, 3-107,
3-111
P551A1-V VIDEO RED LO 3.2.4.B 3-17, 3-29, 3-43,

3-47, 3-63, 3-67,
3-85, 3-89, 3-107,
3-111
P551A1-W VIDEO BLUE HI 3.2.4.B 3-17, 3-29, 3-43,

3-47, 3-63, 3-67,
3-85, 3-89, 3-107,
3-111
P551A1-X VIDEO BLUE LO 3.2.4.B 3-17, 3-29, 3-43,

3-47, 3-63, 3-67,
3-85, 3-89, 3-107,
3-111
P551A1-Y VIDEO GREEN HI 3.2.4.B 3-17, 3-29, 3-43,

3-47, 3-63, 3-67,
3-85, 3-89, 3-107,
3-111
P551A1-Z VIDEO GREEN LO 3.2.4.B 3-17, 3-29, 3-43,

3-47, 3-63, 3-67,
3-85, 3-89, 3-107,
3-111

Pin
Designator
P551A1-A MODE HI 3.2.4.D 3-18, 3-30, 3-44,
3-48, 3-64, 3-68,
3-86, 3-90, 3-108,
3-112
P551A1-B MODE LO 3.2.4.D 3-18, 3-30, 3-44,

3-48, 3-64, 3-68,
3-86, 3-90, 3-108,
3-112
P551A1-C DISPLAY DOWN 3.2.4.M 3-19, 3-31, 3-49,

3-69, 3-91, 3-113
P551A1-D Y DEFLECTION LO 3.2.4.C 3-18, 3-30, 3-44,

3-48, 3-64, 3-68,
3-86, 3-90, 3-108,
3-112
P551A1-E Y DEFLECTION HI 3.2.4.C 3-18, 3-30, 3-44,

3-48, 3-64, 3-68,
3-86, 3-90, 3-108,
3-112
P551A1-F DISPLAY DOWN RETURN 3.2.4.M 3-49, 3-69, 3-91,

3-113
P551A1-G BRIGHTNESS 3.2.4.P 3-6
P551A1-H BRIGHTNESS RETURN 3.2.4.P 3-6
P551A1-J DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3.2.4.E 3-17, 3-29, 3-43,

3-47, 3-63, 3-67,
3-85, 3-89, 3-107,
3-111
3.18.2 Line Name Index
Pin line names are listed in alphabetical order. Pin number designators mentioned in
text are indexed to manual section. Pin number designators are indexed to figure num-
bers of interconnect drawings.

3.18.2.1 Configuration Module - Line Name Index
TABLE 3-44 Configuration Module - Line Name Index
Pin
Configuration Module Line Name Section Figure
Designator
P1-5 +5 VDC POWER 3.2.4.Q 3-7
P1-4 CONFIG TO SG DATA 3.2.4.Q 3-7
P1-3 NOT USED
P1-7 NOT USED
P1-1 POWER GROUND 3.2.4.Q 3-7
P1-6 SG TO CONFIG CLOCK 3.2.4.Q 3-7
P1-8 SG TO CONFIG DATA 3.2.4.Q 3-7
3.18.2.2 CP 113F - Line Name Index
TABLE 3-45 CP 113F - Line Name Index
Pin
Designator
P113F1-25 429 OUT A 3.13 3-155
P113F1-8 429 OUT B 3.13 3-155
P113F1-34 LEFT SIDE +28 VDC 3.16.4.E 3-165
P113F1-45 LEFT SIDE POWER RETURN 3.16.4.E 3-165
P113F1-2 LIGHTING +28 VDC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P113F1-1 LIGHTING +5 VDC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P113F1-1 LIGHTING 5 VAC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P113F1-9 LIGHTING LO 3.2.4.O 3-6
P113F1-3 NOT USED
P113F1-4 NOT USED
P113F1-5 NOT USED
P113F1-6 NOT USED
P113F1-7 NOT USED

Pin
Designator
P113F1-10 NOT USED
P113F1-11 NOT USED
P113F1-12 NOT USED
P113F1-13 NOT USED
P113F1-14 NOT USED
P113F1-15 NOT USED
P113F1-16 NOT USED
P113F1-17 NOT USED
P113F1-18 NOT USED
P113F1-19 NOT USED
P113F1-20 NOT USED
P113F1-21 NOT USED
P113F1-22 NOT USED
P113F1-23 NOT USED
P113F1-24 NOT USED
P113F1-26 NOT USED
P113F1-27 NOT USED
P113F1-28 NOT USED
P113F1-29 NOT USED
P113F1-30 NOT USED
P113F1-31 NOT USED
P113F1-32 NOT USED
P113F1-33 NOT USED
P113F1-35 NOT USED
P113F1-36 NOT USED
P113F1-38 NOT USED
P113F1-39 NOT USED
P113F1-40 NOT USED
P113F1-41 NOT USED
P113F1-42 NOT USED
P113F1-43 NOT USED
P113F1-44 NOT USED

Pin
Designator
P113F1-47 NOT USED
P113F1-48 NOT USED
P113F1-49 NOT USED
P113F1-37 R/T ON/OFF 3.13 3-155
P113F1-50 RIGHT SIDE +28 VDC 3.16.4.E 3-165
P113F1-46 RIGHT SIDE POWER RETURN 3.16.4.E 3-165
3.18.2.3 CP 466A - Line Name Index
TABLE 3-46 CP 466A - Line Name Index
Pin
Designator
P466A1-25 429 OUT A 3.13 3-155, 3-157,
3-160B, 3-160C,
3-160D
P466A1-8 429 OUT B 3.13 3-155, 3-157,

3-160B, 3-160C,
3-160D
P466A1-42 CHASSIS GROUND
P466A1-3 EXTERNAL LIGHTING OUT
P466A1-34 LEFT SIDE +28 VDC 3.16.4.E 3-165
P466A1-45 LEFT SIDE POWER RETURN 3.16.4.E 3-165
P466A1-2 LIGHTING +28 VDC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P466A1-1 LIGHTING +5VDC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P466A1-1 LIGHTING 5 VAC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P466A1-9 LIGHTING LO 3.2.4.O 3-6
P466A1-4 NOT USED
P466A1-5 NOT USED
P466A1-6 NOT USED
P466A1-7 NOT USED
P466A1-10 NOT USED
P466A1-11 NOT USED
P466A1-12 NOT USED

Pin
Designator
P466A1-13 NOT USED
P466A1-14 NOT USED
P466A1-15 NOT USED
P466A1-16 NOT USED
P466A1-17 NOT USED
P466A1-18 NOT USED
P466A1-19 NOT USED
P466A1-20 NOT USED
P466A1-21 NOT USED
P466A1-22 NOT USED
P466A1-23 NOT USED
P466A1-24 NOT USED
P466A1-26 NOT USED
P466A1-27 NOT USED
P466A1-28 NOT USED
P466A1-29 NOT USED
P466A1-30 NOT USED
P466A1-31 NOT USED
P466A1-32 NOT USED
P466A1-33 NOT USED
P466A1-36 NOT USED
P466A1-38 NOT USED
P466A1-39 NOT USED
P466A1-40 NOT USED
P466A1-41 NOT USED
P466A1-43 NOT USED
P466A1-44 NOT USED
P466A1-47 NOT USED
P466A1-48 NOT USED
P466A1-35 PANEL RETURN
P466A1-37 R/T ON/OFF 3.13 3-155, 3-157,

3-160B, 3-160C,
3-160D

Pin
Designator
P466A1-49 REMOTE GROUND
P466A1-50 RIGHT SIDE +28 VDC 3.16.4.E 3-165
P466A1-46 RIGHT SIDE POWER RETURN 3.16.4.E 3-165
3.18.2.4 CP 466B - Line Name Index
TABLE 3-47 CP 466B - Line Name Index
Pin
Designator
P466B1-25 429 OUT A 3.13 3-155, 3-157,
3-160B, 3-160C,
3-160D
P466B1-8 429 OUT B 3.13 3-155, 3-157,

3-160B, 3-160C,
3-160D
P466B1-42 CHASSIS GROUND
P466B1-3 EXTERNAL LIGHTING OUT
P466B1-34 LEFT SIDE +28 VDC 3.16.4.E 3-165
P466B1-45 LEFT SIDE POWER RETURN 3.16.4.E 3-165
P466B1-2 LIGHTING +28 VDC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P466B1-1 LIGHTING +5 VDC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P466B1-1 LIGHTING 5 VAC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P466B1-9 LIGHTING LO 3.2.4.O 3-6
P466B1-4 NOT USED
P466B1-5 NOT USED
P466B1-6 NOT USED
P466B1-7 NOT USED
P466B1-10 NOT USED
P466B1-11 NOT USED
P466B1-12 NOT USED
P466B1-13 NOT USED
P466B1-14 NOT USED
P466B1-15 NOT USED

TABLE 3-47 CP 466B - Line Name Index
Pin
Designator
P466B1-16 NOT USED
P466B1-17 NOT USED
P466B1-18 NOT USED
P466B1-19 NOT USED
P466B1-20 NOT USED
P466B1-21 NOT USED
P466B1-22 NOT USED
P466B1-23 NOT USED
P466B1-24 NOT USED
P466B1-26 NOT USED
P466B1-27 NOT USED
P466B1-28 NOT USED
P466B1-29 NOT USED
P466B1-30 NOT USED
P466B1-31 NOT USED
P466B1-32 NOT USED
P466B1-33 NOT USED
P466B1-36 NOT USED
P466B1-38 NOT USED
P466B1-39 NOT USED
P466B1-40 NOT USED
P466B1-41 NOT USED
P466B1-43 NOT USED
P466B1-44 NOT USED
P466B1-47 NOT USED
P466B1-48 NOT USED
P466B1-35 PANEL RETURN
P466B1-37 R/T ON/OFF 3.13 3-155, 3-157,

3-160B, 3-160C,
3-160D
P466B1-49 REMOTE GROUND
P466B1-50 RIGHT SIDE +28 VDC 3.16.4.E 3-165
P466B1-46 RIGHT SIDE POWER RETURN 3.16.4.E 3-165

3.18.2.5 KA 163A - Line Name Index
TABLE 3-48 KA 163A - Line Name Index
Pin
Designator
P163A1-13 26 VAC POWER HI 3.16.4.G 3-154, 3-165
P163A1-25 26 VAC POWER LO 3.16.4.G 3-154, 3-165
P163A1-7 CHASSIS GROUND 3-154
P163A1-6 KEY
P163A1-4 NO CONNECT
P163A1-14 PITCH COMMAND +DOWN IN 3.12.4.W 3-154
P163A1-2 PITCH COMMAND +UP IN 3.12.4.W 3-154
P163A1-16 PITCH COMMAND +UP OUT 3.12.4.W 3-154
P163A1-1 PITCH/ROLL COMMAND OUT GROUND 3.12.4.W 3-154
P163A1-20 ROLL COMMAND +LEFT IN 3.12.4.W 3-154
P163A1-8 ROLL COMMAND +RIGHT IN 3.12.4.W 3-154
P163A1-9 ROLL COMMAND +RIGHT OUT 3.12.4.W 3-154
P163A1-3 SPARE
P163A1-5 SPARE
P163A1-18 SPARE

3.18.2.6 ED 461 - Line Name Index
TABLE 3-49 ED 461 - Line Name Index
Pin
Designator
P4611-17 +15 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-22, 3-37
P4611-1 +27.5 VDC FILTERED POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-22, 3-37
P4611-33 +30 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-22, 3-37
P4611-16 +7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-3, 3-4, 3-10,

3-22, 3-37
P4611-34 +85 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-22, 3-37
P4611-50 -15 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-22, 3-37
P4611-49 -30 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-22, 3-37
P4611-48 -7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-22, 3-37
P4611-5 COURSE 1 3.2.4.I 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-21,

3-36
P4611-4 COURSE 2 3.2.4.I 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-21,

3-36
P4611-3 DISPLAY DOWN 3.2.4.M 3-13, 3-25, 3-40
P4611-21 DISPLAY DOWN RETURN 3.2.4.M 3-40
P4611-42 DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3.2.4.E 3-11, 3-23, 3-38
P4611-2 GROUND 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-22, 3-37
P4611-19 GROUND 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-22, 3-37
P4611-36 GROUND 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-22, 3-37
P4611-15 HEADING 1 3.2.4.H 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-21,

3-36
P4611-14 HEADING 2 3.2.4.H 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-21,

3-36
P4611-8 LIGHTING LO 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4611-9 MODE 1 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-21,

3-36, 3-161
P4611-10 MODE 2 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-21,

3-36, 3-161
P4611-11 MODE 3 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-21,

3-36, 3-161

Pin
Designator
P4611-12 MODE 4 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-21,
3-36, 3-161
P4611-28 MODE HI 3.2.4.D 3-12, 3-24, 3-39
P4611-27 MODE LO 3.2.4.D 3-12, 3-24, 3-39
P4611-6 NOT USED
P4611-18 NOT USED
P4611-23 NOT USED
P4611-25 NOT USED
P4611-26 NOT USED
P4611-32 NOT USED
P4611-35 NOT USED
P4611-47 NOT USED
P4611-24 RETURN 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-21,

3-36, 3-161
P4611-30 SPARE
P4611-31 SPARE
P4611-37 VIDEO BLUE Hl 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-23, 3-38
P4611-22 VIDEO BLUE LO 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-23, 3-38
P4611-41 VIDEO GREEN HI 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-23, 3-38
P4611-40 VIDEO GREEN LO 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-23, 3-38
P4611-39 VIDEO RED HI 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-23, 3-38
P4611-38 VIDEO RED LO 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-23, 3-38
P4611-45 X DEFLECTION HI 3.2.4.C 3-12, 3-24, 3-39
P4611-46 X DEFLECTION LO 3.2.4.C 3-12, 3-24, 3-39
P4611-43 Y DEFLECTION HI 3.2.4.C 3-12, 3-24, 3-39
P4611-44 Y DEFLECTION LO 3.2.4.C 3-12, 3-24, 3-39

Pin
Designator
P4621-17 +15 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-33, 3-37,
3-51, 3-55, 3-73,
3-77, 3-95, 3-99
P4621-1 +27.5 VDC FILTERED POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-33, 3-37,

3-51, 3-55, 3-73,
3-77, 3-95, 3-99
P4621-33 +30 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-33, 3-37,

3-51, 3-55, 3-73,
3-77, 3-95, 3-99
P4621-16 +7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-33, 3-37,

3-51, 3-55, 3-73,
3-77, 3-95, 3-99
P4621-34 +85 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-33, 3-37,

3-51, 3-55, 3-73,
3-77, 3-95, 3-99
P4621-50 -15 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-33, 3-37,

3-51, 3-55, 3-73,
3-77, 3-95, 3-99
P4621-49 -30 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-33, 3-37,

3-51, 3-55, 3-73,
3-77, 3-95, 3-99
P4621-48 -7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-33, 3-37,

3-51, 3-55, 3-73,
3-77, 3-95, 3-99
P4621-26 BRIGHTNESS 3.2.4.P 3-6
P4621-23 BRIGHTNESS RETURN 3.2.4.P 3-6
P4621-3 DISPLAY DOWN 3.2.4.M 3-13, 3-40, 3-58,

3-80, 3-102
P4621-21 DISPLAY DOWN RETURN 3.2.4.M 3-40, 3-58, 3-80,

3-102
P4621-42 DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3.2.4.E 3-11, 3-34, 3-38,

3-52, 3-56, 3-74,
3-78, 3-96, 3-100
P4621-2 GROUND 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-33, 3-37,

3-51, 3-55, 3-73,
3-77, 3-95, 3-99
P4621-19 GROUND 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-33, 3-37,

3-51, 3-55, 3-73,
3-77, 3-95, 3-99

Pin
Designator
P4621-36 GROUND 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-33, 3-37,
3-51, 3-55, 3-73,
3-77, 3-95, 3-99
P4621-8 LIGHTING LO 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4621-28 MODE HI 3.2.4.D 3-12, 3-35, 3-39,

3-53, 3-57, 3-75,
3-79, 3-97, 3-101
P4621-27 MODE LO 3.2.4.D 3-12, 3-35, 3-39,

3-53, 3-57, 3-75,
3-79, 3-97, 3-101
P4621-4 NOT USED
P4621-5 NOT USED
P4621-6 NOT USED
P4621-9 NOT USED
P4621-10 NOT USED
P4621-11 NOT USED
P4621-12 NOT USED
P4621-14 NOT USED
P4621-15 NOT USED
P4621-18 NOT USED
P4621-24 NOT USED
P4621-25 NOT USED
P4621-32 NOT USED
P4621-35 NOT USED
P4621-47 NOT USED
P4621-30 SPARE
P4621-31 SPARE
P4621-37 VIDEO BLUE Hl 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-34, 3-38,

3-52, 3-56, 3-74,
3-78, 3-96, 3-100

Pin
Designator
P4621-22 VIDEO BLUE LO 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-34, 3-38,
3-52, 3-56, 3-74,
3-78, 3-96, 3-100
P4621-41 VIDEO GREEN HI 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-34, 3-38,

3-52, 3-56, 3-74,
3-78, 3-96, 3-100
P4621-40 VIDEO GREEN LO 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-34, 3-38,

3-52, 3-56, 3-74,
3-78, 3-96, 3-100
P4621-39 VIDEO RED HI 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-34, 3-38,

3-52, 3-56, 3-74,
3-78, 3-96, 3-100
P4621-38 VIDEO RED LO 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-34, 3-38,

3-52, 3-56, 3-74,
3-78, 3-96, 3-100
P4621-45 X DEFLECTION HI 3.2.4.C 3-12, 3-35, 3-39,

3-53, 3-57, 3-75,
3-79, 3-97, 3-101
P4621-46 X DEFLECTION LO 3.2.4.C 3-12, 3-35, 3-39,

3-53, 3-57, 3-75,
3-79, 3-97, 3-101
P4621-43 Y DEFLECTION HI 3.2.4.C 3-12, 3-35, 3-39,

3-53, 3-57, 3-75,
3-79, 3-97, 3-101
P4621-44 Y DEFLECTION LO 3.2.4.C 3-12, 3-35, 3-39,

3-53, 3-57, 3-75,
3-79, 3-97, 3-101
3.18.2.8 SU 463 - Line Name Index
TABLE 3-51 SU 463 - Line Name Index
Pin
Designator

Pin
Designator
P4631A-1 +27.5 VDC BUS 1 IN 3.16.4.F 3-55, 3-59, 3-70,

3-81, 3-92, 3-103,
3-114, 3-165
P4631A-2 +27.5 VDC BUS 1 IN 3.16.4.F 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3-92, 3-103, 3-114
3-165
P4631B-40* +27.5 VDC BUS 1/2 IN 3.16.4.F 3-103, 3-114,

3-165
P4631B-41* +27.5 VDC BUS 1/2 IN 3.16.4.F 3-103, 3-114,

3-165
P4631B-18* +27.5 VDC BUS 1/2 OUT 3.16.4.F 3-103, 3-114,

3-165
P4631B-42* +27.5 VDC BUS 1/2 OUT 3.16.4.F 3-99, 3-103,

3-114, 3-165
P4631D-36* +27.5 VDC BUS 2 IN 3.16.4.F 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114, 3-165
P4631D-37* +27.5 VDC BUS 2 IN 3.16.4.F 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114, 3-165
P4631A-47* ADI 1 -30 VDC POWER/ +85 VDC POWER 3-51, 3-95
ENABLE
P4631D-54* ADI 2 -30 VDC/ +85 VDC POWER ENABLE 3-95
P4631A-80* ADI COPY (1) COMMON 3-81, 3-92
P4631A-57* ADI COPY (1) NORMALLY CLOSE 3-81, 3-92
P4631A-67* ADI COPY (1) NORMALLY OPEN 3-81, 3-92
P4631A-72* ADI COPY (1) SELECT OUT 3-81, 3-92
P4631D-73* ADI COPY (2) COMMON 3-81, 3-92
P4631D-101* ADI COPY (2) NORMALLY CLOSE 3-81, 3-92
P4631D-81* ADI COPY (2) NORMALLY OPEN 3-81, 3-92
P4631D-69* ADI COPY (2) SELECT OUT 3-81, 3-92, 3-103
P4631A-52* ADI STBY (1) OR HSI STBY (1) OUT 3-103, 3-114

Pin
Designator

3-106

3-106

3-106

3-106

3-92, 3-103, 3-114

3-92, 3-103, 3-114
P4631A-66 CHASSIS GROUND 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3-92, 3-103, 3-114
P4631A-23* COMPOSITE (1) ANNUNCIATE 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631A-81* COMPOSITE (1) COMMON 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631A-43* COMPOSITE (1) NORMALLY CLOSE 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631A-53* COMPOSITE (1) NORMALLY OPEN 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631A-78* COMPOSITE (1) SELECT IN 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631A-73* COMPOSITE (1) SELECT OUT 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631D-74* COMPOSITE (2) ANNUNCIATE 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631D-72* COMPOSITE (2) COMMON 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631D-84* COMPOSITE (2) NORMALLY CLOSE 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631D-80* COMPOSITE (2) NORMALLY OPEN 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114

Pin
Designator
P4631D-29* COMPOSITE (2) SELECT IN 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,
3-114
P4631D-68* COMPOSITE (2) SELECT OUT 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631A-23* COMPOSITE ANNUNCIATE 3.2.4.T 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-81* COMPOSITE COMMON 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-43* COMPOSITE NORMALLY CLOSE 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-53* COMPOSITE NORMALLY OPEN 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-78* COMPOSITE SELECT IN 3.2.4.T 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-73* COMPOSITE SELECT OUT 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-24* COPY (1) ANNUNCIATE 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92
P4631A-77* COPY (1) SELECT IN 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92
P4631D-95* COPY (2) ANNUNCIATE 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92
P4631D-30* COPY (2) SELECT IN 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92
P4631C-44* CP 1 +7 VDC POWER 3-54, 3-65, 3-98,

3-109
P4632-22 CP 2 +7 VDC POWER 3-98, 3-109
P4631A-11* DISPLAY DOWN (1) ANNUNCIATE 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631A-82* DISPLAY DOWN (1) COMMON 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631A-56* DISPLAY DOWN (1) NORMALLY CLOSE 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631A-68* DISPLAY DOWN (1) NORMALLY OPEN 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631A-79* DISPLAY DOWN (1) SELECT IN 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631A-74* DISPLAY DOWN (1) SELECT OUT 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631D-25* DISPLAY DOWN (2) ANNUNCIATE 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631D-71* DISPLAY DOWN (2) COMMON 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631D-83* DISPLAY DOWN (2) NORMALLY CLOSE 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631D-86* DISPLAY DOWN (2) NORMALLY OPEN 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114

Pin
Designator
P4631D-28* DISPLAY DOWN (2) SELECT IN 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,
3-114
P4631D-67* DISPLAY DOWN (2) SELECT OUT 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631A-11* DISPLAY DOWN ANNUNCIATE 3.2.4.T 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-82* DISPLAY DOWN COMMON 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-56* DISPLAY DOWN NORMALLY CLOSE 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-68* DISPLAY DOWN NORMALLY OPEN 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-79* DISPLAY DOWN SELECT IN 3.2.4.T 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-74* DISPLAY DOWN SELECT OUT 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-27* DU 1 ADI +27.5 VDC FILTERED POWER 3-51, 3-95
P4631A-98 DU 1 ADI DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3-52, 3-63, 3-74,

3-85, 3-96, 3-107
P4631A-30* DU 1 ADI GROUND 3-51, 3-95
P4631A-31* DU 1 ADI GROUND 3-51, 3-95
P4631A-32* DU 1 ADI GROUND 3-51, 3-95
P4631A-92 DU 1 ADI MODE HI 3-53, 3-64, 3-75,

3-86, 3-97, 3-108
P4631A-93 DU 1 ADI MODE LO 3-53, 3-64, 3-75,

3-86, 3-97, 3-108
P4631A-90 DU 1 ADI VIDEO BLUE HI 3-52, 3-63, 3-74,

3-85, 3-96, 3-107
P4631A-91 DU 1 ADI VIDEO BLUE LO 3-52, 3-63, 3-74,

3-85, 3-96, 3-107
P4631A-88 DU 1 ADI VIDEO GREEN HI 3-52, 3-63, 3-74,

3-85, 3-96, 3-107
P4631A-89 DU 1 ADI VIDEO GREEN LO 3-52, 3-63, 3-74,

3-85, 3-96, 3-107

Pin
Designator
P4631A-86 DU 1 ADI VIDEO RED HI 3-52, 3-63, 3-74,
3-85, 3-96, 3-107
P4631A-87 DU 1 ADI VIDEO RED LO 3-52, 3-63, 3-74,

3-85, 3-96, 3-107
P4631A-7 DU 1 ADI X DEFLECTION HI 3-53, 3-64, 3-75,

3-86, 3-97, 3-108
P4631A-8 DU 1 ADI X DEFLECTION LO 3-53, 3-64, 3-75,

3-86, 3-97, 3-108
P4631A-9 DU 1 ADI Y DEFLECTION HI 3-53, 3-64, 3-75,

3-86, 3-97, 3-108
P4631A-10 DU 1 ADI Y DEFLECTION LO 3-53, 3-64, 3-75,

3-86, 3-97, 3-108
P4631C-65* DU 1 HSI +27.5 VDC FILTERED POWER 3-55, 3-99
P4631A-95 DU 1 HSI DISPLAY DOWN 3-58, 3-69, 3-80,

3-91, 3-102, 3-113
P4631A-97 DU 1 HSI DISPLAY DOWN RETURN 3-58, 3-69, 3-80,

3-91, 3-102, 3-113
P4631C-10 DU 1 HSI DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3-56, 3-67, 3-78,

3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4631C-77* DU 1 HSI GROUND 3-55, 3-99
P4631C-78* DU 1 HSI GROUND 3-55, 3-99
P4631C-92* DU 1 HSI GROUND 3-55, 3-99
P4631C-19 DU 1 HSI MODE HI 3-57, 3-68, 3-79,

3-90, 3-101, 3-112
P4631C-20 DU 1 HSI MODE LO 3-57, 3-68, 3-79,

3-90, 3-101, 3-112
P4631C-17 DU 1 HSI VIDEO BLUE HI 3-56, 3-67, 3-78,

3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4631C-18 DU 1 HSI VIDEO BLUE LO 3-56, 3-67, 3-78,

3-89, 3-100, 3-111

Pin
Designator
P4631C-15 DU 1 HSI VIDEO GREEN HI 3-56, 3-67, 3-78,
3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4631C-16 DU 1 HSI VIDEO GREEN LO 3-56, 3-67, 3-78,

3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4631C-13 DU 1 HSI VIDEO RED HI 3-56, 3-67, 3-78,

3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4631C-14 DU 1 HSI VIDEO RED LO 3-56, 3-67, 3-78,

3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4631C-52 DU 1 HSI X DEFLECTION HI 3-57, 3-68, 3-79,

3-90, 3-101, 3-112
P4631C-66 DU 1 HSI X DEFLECTION LO 3-57, 3-68, 3-79,

3-90, 3-101, 3-112
P4631C-79 DU 1 HSI Y DEFLECTION HI 3-57, 3-68, 3-79,

3-90, 3-101, 3-112
P4631C-93 DU 1 HSI Y DEFLECTION LO 3-57, 3-68, 3-79,

3-90, 3-101, 3-112
P4631D-97* DU 2 ADI +27.5 VDC FILTERED POWER 3-95
P4631D-18* DU 2 ADI DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3-74, 3-85, 3-96,

3-107
P4631D-16* DU 2 ADI MODE HI 3-75, 3-86, 3-97,

3-108
P4631D-17* DU 2 ADI MODE LO 3-75, 3-86, 3-97,

3-108
P4631D-14* DU 2 ADI VIDEO BLUE HI 3-74, 3-85, 3-96,

3-107
P4631D-15* DU 2 ADI VIDEO BLUE LO 3-74, 3-85, 3-96,

3-107

Pin
Designator
P4631D-12* DU 2 ADI VIDEO GREEN HI 3-74, 3-85, 3-96,
3-107
P4631D-13* DU 2 ADI VIDEO GREEN LO 3-74, 3-85, 3-96,

3-107
P4631D-10* DU 2 ADI VIDEO RED HI 3-74, 3-85, 3-96,

3-107
P4631D-11* DU 2 ADI VIDEO RED LO 3-74, 3-85, 3-96,

3-107
P4631D-52* DU 2 ADI X DEFLECTION HI 3-75, 3-86, 3-97,

3-108
P4631D-66* DU 2 ADI X DEFLECTION LO 3-75, 3-86, 3-97,

3-108
P4631D-79* DU 2 ADI Y DEFLECTION HI 3-75, 3-86, 3-97,

3-108
P4631D-93* DU 2 ADI Y DEFLECTION LO 3-75, 3-86, 3-97,

3-108
P4632-15* DU 2 HSI +15 VDC POWER 3-99
P4632-69* DU 2 HSI +27.5 VDC FILTERED POWER 3-99
P4632-27* DU 2 HSI +30 VDC POWER 3-99
P4632-54* DU 2 HSI +7 VDC POWER 3-99
P4632-24* DU 2 HSI +85 VDC POWER 3-99
P4632-3* DU 2 HSI -15 VDC POWER 3-99
P4632-23* DU 2 HSI -30 VDC POWER 3-99
P4632-29* DU 2 HSI -7 VDC POWER 3-99
P4631D-49* DU 2 HSI DISPLAY DOWN 3-80, 3-91, 3-102,

3-113
P4631D-27* DU 2 HSI DISPLAY DOWN RETURN 3-80, 3-91, 3-102,

3-113
P4631B-85* DU 2 HSI DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3-78, 3-89
P4632-65 DU 2 HSI DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3-100, 3-111
P4631B-92* DU 2 HSI MODE HI 3-79, 3-90
P4632-89 DU 2 HSI MODE HI 3-101, 3-112
P4631B-93* DU 2 HSI MODE LO 3-79, 3-90

Pin
Designator
P4632-103 DU 2 HSI MODE LO 3-101, 3-112
P4631B-90* DU 2 HSI VIDEO BLUE HI 3-78, 3-89
P4632-90 DU 2 HSI VIDEO BLUE HI 3-100, 3-111
P4631B-91* DU 2 HSI VIDEO BLUE LO 3-78, 3-89
P4632-104 DU 2 HSI VIDEO BLUE LO 3-100, 3-111
P4631B-88* DU 2 HSI VIDEO GREEN HI 3-78, 3-89
P4632-62 DU 2 HSI VIDEO GREEN HI 3-100, 3-111
P4631B-89* DU 2 HSI VIDEO GREEN LO 3-78, 3-89
P4632-76 DU 2 HSI VIDEO GREEN LO 3-100, 3-111
P4631B-86* DU 2 HSI VIDEO RED HI 3-78, 3-89
P4632-34 DU 2 HSI VIDEO RED HI 3-100, 3-111
P4631B-87* DU 2 HSI VIDEO RED LO 3-78, 3-89
P4632-48 DU 2 HSI VIDEO RED LO 3-100, 3-111
P4631B-1* DU 2 HSI X DEFLECTION HI 3-79, 3-90
P4632-40 DU 2 HSI X DEFLECTION HI 3-101, 3-112
P4631B-2* DU 2 HSI X DEFLECTION LO 3-79, 3-90
P4632-26 DU 2 HSI X DEFLECTION LO 3-101, 3-112
P4631B-3* DU 2 HSI Y DEFLECTION HI 3-79, 3-90
P4632-13 DU 2 HSI Y DEFLECTION HI 3-101, 3-112
P4631B-4* DU 2 HSI Y DEFLECTION LO 3-79, 3-90
P4632-1 DU 2 HSI Y DEFLECTION LO 3-101, 3-112
P4631A-37* DUAL STANDBY ANNUNCIATE 3-103, 3-114
P4631A-69* DUAL STANDBY COMMON 3-103
P4631A-58* DUAL STANDBY NORMALLY CLOSE 3-103
P4631A-42* DUAL STANDBY NORMALLY OPEN 3-103
P4631A-84* DUAL STANDBY SELECT OUT 3-103, 3-114
P4631C-25* HSI 1 -30 VDC/ +85 VDC POWER ENABLE 3-55, 3-99
P4632-51* HSI 2 -30 VDC/ +85 VDC POWER ENABLE 3-99
P4631A-70* HSI COPY (1) COMMON 3-81, 3-92
P4631A-44* HSI COPY (1) NORMALLY CLOSE 3-81, 3-92
P4631A-55* HSI COPY (1) NORMALLY OPEN 3-81, 3-92
P4631A-71* HSI COPY (1) SELECT OUT 3-81, 3-92

Pin
Designator
P4631D-85* HSI COPY (2) COMMON 3-81, 3-92
P4631D-100* HSI COPY (2) NORMALLY CLOSE 3-81, 3-92
P4631D-82* HSI COPY (2) NORMALLY OPEN 3-81, 3-92
P4631D-70* HSI COPY (2) SELECT OUT 3-81, 3-92
P4631A-64* HSI STBY (1) OUT OR HSI STBY (2) OUT 3-99, 3-103, 3-114
P4631B-70* MFD COMPOSITE 3-58, 3-69, 3-102,

3-113
P4631B-94* MFD CONTROL PANEL +7 VDC POWER 3-54, 3-65, 3-98,

3-109
P4631C-84* MFD CONTROL PANEL EXTERNAL 3-54, 3-65, 3-98,

3-109
P4631C-31* MFD CP COURSE 1 3-98, 3-109
P4631C-30* MFD CP COURSE 2 3-98, 3-109
P4631C-27* MFD CP DECISION HEIGHT ON 3-98, 3-109
P4631C-33* MFD CP HEADING 1 3-98, 3-109
P4631C-32* MFD CP HEADING 2 3-98, 3-109
P4631C-80* MFD CP MODE 1 3-98, 3-109
P4631C-69* MFD CP MODE 2 3-98, 3-109
P4631C-35* MFD CP MODE 3 3-98, 3-109
P4631C-34* MFD CP MODE 4 3-98, 3-109
P4631C-55* MFD CP RETURN 3-54, 3-65, 3-98,

3-109
P4631B-64* MFD DU DISPLAY DOWN 3-69, 3-113
P4631B-65* MFD DU DISPLAY DOWN RETURN 3-69, 3-113
P4631B-43* MFD DU HSI +27.5 VDC FILTERED POWER 3-55, 3-99

Pin
Designator
P4631B-57* MFD HSI +27.5 VDC FILT PWR/ GND ENABLE 3-55, 3-99
P4631B-56* MFD HSI +85 VDC POWER NORMALLY OPEN
P4631B-55* MFD HSI -30 VDC POWER NORMALLY OPEN
P4631B-58* MFD HSI GROUND/ +7 VDC POWER ENABLE 3-55, 3-99
P4631B-63* MFD HSI POWER RELAY POWER 3-55, 3-99
P4631B-16* MFD SG ADI +27.5 VDC FILTERED POWER 3-51, 3-95
P4631D-57* MFD SG ADI +85 VDC POWER 3-95
P4631D-58* MFD SG ADI -30 VDC POWER 3-95
P4631B-85* MFD SG ADI DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3-52, 3-63, 3-96,

3-107
P4631B-92* MFD SG ADI MODE HI 3-53, 3-64, 3-97,

3-108
P4631B-93* MFD SG ADI MODE LO 3-53, 3-64, 3-97,

3-108
P4631B-90* MFD SG ADI VIDEO BLUE HI 3-52, 3-63, 3-96,

3-107

Pin
Designator
P4631B-91* MFD SG ADI VIDEO BLUE LO 3-52, 3-63, 3-96,
3-107
P4631B-88* MFD SG ADI VIDEO GREEN HI 3-52, 3-63, 3-96,

3-107
P4631B-89* MFD SG ADI VIDEO GREEN LO 3-52, 3-63, 3-96,

3-107
P4631B-86* MFD SG ADI VIDEO RED HI 3-52, 3-63, 3-96,

3-107
P4631B-87* MFD SG ADI VIDEO RED LO 3-52, 3-63, 3-96,

3-107
P4631B-1* MFD SG ADI X DEFLECTION HI 3-53, 3-64, 3-97,

3-108
P4631B-2* MFD SG ADI X DEFLECTION LO 3-53, 3-64, 3-97,

3-108
P4631B-3* MFD SG ADI Y DEFLECTION HI 3-53, 3-64, 3-97,

3-108
P4631B-4* MFD SG ADI Y DEFLECTION LO 3-53, 3-64, 3-97,

3-108
P4631B-69* MFD SG CONTROL PANEL DH ON 3-98, 3-109
P4631B-95* MFD SG CONTROL PANEL RETURN 3-98, 3-109
P4631A-69* MFD SG COPY 3-113
P4631C-82* MFD SG DU 1 HSI -30 VDC POWER 3-99
P4631C-72* MFD SG DU 1 HSI +85 VDC POWER 3-99
P4632-38* MFD SG DU 2 HSI +85 VDC POWER 3-99
P4632-37* MFD SG DU 2 HSI -30 VDC POWER 3-99
P4631B-56* MFD SG DU HSI +85 VDC POWER 3-99

Pin
Designator
P4631B-55* MFD SG DU HSI -30 VDC POWER 3-99
P4631B-27* MFD SG HSI +27.5 VDC FILTERED POWER 3-55, 3-99
P4631B-50* MFD SG HSI DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3-56, 3-67, 3-100,

3-111
P4631B-105* MFD SG HSI MODE HI 3-57, 3-68, 3-101,

3-112
P4631B-106* MFD SG HSI MODE LO 3-57, 3-68, 3-101,

3-112
P4631B-103* MFD SG HSI VIDEO BLUE HI 3-56, 3-67, 3-100,

3-111
P4631B-104* MFD SG HSI VIDEO BLUE LO 3-56, 3-67, 3-100,

3-111
P4631B-101* MFD SG HSI VIDEO GREEN HI 3-56, 3-67, 3-100,

3-111
P4631B-102* MFD SG HSI VIDEO GREEN LO 3-56, 3-67, 3-100,

3-111
P4631B-99* MFD SG HSI VIDEO RED HI 3-56, 3-67, 3-100,

3-111
P4631B-100* MFD SG HSI VIDEO RED LO 3-56, 3-67, 3-100,

3-111
P4631B-5* MFD SG HSI X DEFLECTION HI 3-57, 3-68, 3-101,

3-112
P4631B-6* MFD SG HSI X DEFLECTION LO 3-57, 3-68, 3-101,

3-112

Pin
Designator
P4631B-7* MFD SG HSI Y DEFLECTION HI 3-57, 3-68, 3-101,
3-112
P4631B-8* MFD SG HSI Y DEFLECTION LO 3-57, 3-68, 3-101,

3-112
P4631A-42* MFD SG SWITCH RETURN 3-113
P4631B-76* MFD SLAVED 1/2 3-102, 3-113
P4631B-78* MFD STANDBY 3-58, 3-69, 3-102,

3-113
P4631B-71* MFD SWITCH RETURN 3-58, 3-69, 3-102,

3-113
P4631B-72* MFD XTALK RECEIVER A 3-102, 3-113
P4631B-73* MFD XTALK RECEIVER B 3-102, 3-113
P4631B-74* MFD XTALK TRANSMITTER A 3-102, 3-113
P4631B-75* MFD XTALK TRANSMITTER B 3-102, 3-113
P4631B-77* MFD/ HSI 3-58, 3-69, 3-102,

3-113
P4631A-13 POWER GROUND 3.2.4.T, 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3.16.4.F 3-92, 3-103, 3-114
3-165
P4631A-26 POWER GROUND 3.2.4.T, 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3.16.4.F 3-92, 3-103, 3-114
3-165
P4631D-34 POWER GROUND 3.2.4.T, 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3.16.4.F 3-92, 3-103, 3-114
3-165
P4631D-35 POWER GROUND 3.2.4.T, 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3.16.4.F 3-92, 3-103, 3-114
3-165
P4631D-40 PROGRAM 1 3.2.4.U 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3-92, 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-99 PROGRAM 10 3.2.4.U 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3-92, 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-41 PROGRAM 2 3.2.4.U 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3-92, 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-42 PROGRAM 3 3.2.4.U 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3-92, 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-43 PROGRAM 4 3.2.4.U 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3-92, 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-44 PROGRAM 5 3.2.4.U 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3-92, 3-103, 3-114

Pin
Designator
P4631D-45 PROGRAM 6 3.2.4.U 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,
3-92, 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-23 PROGRAM 7 3.2.4.U 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3-92, 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-24 PROGRAM 8 3.2.4.U 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3-92, 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-22 PROGRAM 9 3.2.4.U 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3-92, 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-47 PROGRAM GROUND 3.2.4.U 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3-92, 3-103, 3-114
P4631A-52* SG 1 ADI COPY 3-81, 3-92
P4631A-12* SG 1 ADI +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER 3-58, 3-80, 3-102,

3-106
P4631A-25 SG 1 ADI +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER 3-58, 3-80, 3-102
P4631A-34* SG 1 ADI +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER 3-58, 3-80, 3-102
P4631A-14* SG 1 ADI +27.5 VDC FILTERED POWER 3-51, 3-95
P4631A-85 SG 1 ADI DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3-52, 3-63, 3-74,

3-85, 3-96, 3-107
P4631A-15* SG 1 ADI GROUND 3-51, 3-95
P4631A-16* SG 1 ADI GROUND 3-51, 3-95
P4631A-17* SG 1 ADI GROUND 3-51, 3-95
P4631A-105 SG 1 ADI MODE HI 3-53, 3-64, 3-75,

3-86, 3-97, 3-108
P4631A-106 SG 1 ADI MODE LO 3-53, 3-64, 3-75,

3-86, 3-97, 3-108
P4631A-103 SG 1 ADI VIDEO BLUE HI 3-52, 3-63, 3-74,

3-85, 3-96, 3-107
P4631A-104 SG 1 ADI VIDEO BLUE LO 3-52, 3-63, 3-74,

3-85, 3-96, 3-107

Pin
Designator
P4631A-101 SG 1 ADI VIDEO GREEN HI 3-52, 3-63, 3-74,
3-85, 3-96, 3-107
P4631A-102 SG 1 ADI VIDEO GREEN LO 3-52, 3-63, 3-74,

3-85, 3-96, 3-107
P4631A-99 SG 1 ADI VIDEO RED HI 3-52, 3-63, 3-74,

3-85, 3-96, 3-107
P4631A-100 SG 1 ADI VIDEO RED LO 3-52, 3-63, 3-74,

3-85, 3-96, 3-107
P4631A-3 SG 1 ADI X DEFLECTION HI 3-53, 3-64, 3-75,

3-86, 3-97, 3-108
P4631A-4 SG 1 ADI X DEFLECTION LO 3-53, 3-64, 3-75,

3-86, 3-97, 3-108
P4631A-5 SG 1 ADI Y DEFLECTION HI 3-53, 3-64, 3-75,

3-86, 3-97, 3-108
P4631A-6 SG 1 ADI Y DEFLECTION LO 3-53, 3-64, 3-75,

3-86, 3-97, 3-108
P4631C-26 SG 1 COMPOSITE 3-58, 3-69, 3-80,

3-91, 3-102, 3-113
P4631C-56* SG 1 CONTROL PANEL +7 VDC POWER 3-54, 3-65, 3-98,

3-109
P4631C-44* SG 1 COPY 3-80, 3-91
P4631A-94 SG 1 DISPLAY DOWN 3-58, 3-69, 3-80,

3-91, 3-102, 3-113
P4631C-75* SG 1 HSI +27.5 VDC FILTERED POWER 3-55, 3-99
P4631C-9 SG 1 HSI DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3-56, 3-67, 3-78,

3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4631C-7 SG 1 HSI MODE HI 3-57, 3-68, 3-79,

3-90, 3-101, 3-112

Pin
Designator
P4631C-8 SG 1 HSI MODE LO 3-57, 3-68, 3-79,
3-90, 3-101, 3-112
P4631C-5 SG 1 HSI VIDEO BLUE HI 3-56, 3-67, 3-78,

3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4631C-6 SG 1 HSI VIDEO BLUE LO 3-56, 3-67, 3-78,

3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4631C-3 SG 1 HSI VIDEO GREEN HI 3-56, 3-67, 3-78,

3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4631C-4 SG 1 HSI VIDEO GREEN LO 3-56, 3-67, 3-78,

3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4631C-1 SG 1 HSI VIDEO RED HI 3-56, 3-67, 3-78,

3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4631C-2 SG 1 HSI VIDEO RED LO 3-56, 3-67, 3-78,

3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4631A-96 SG 1 SWITCH RETURN 3-58, 3-69, 3-80,

3-91, 3-102, 3-113
P4631C-40* SG 1 XTALK RECEIVER A 3-102, 3-113
P4631C-41* SG 1 XTALK RECEIVER B 3-102, 3-113
P4631C-42* SG 1 XTALK TRANSMITTER A 3-102, 3-113
P4631C-43* SG 1 XTALK TRANSMITTER B 3-102, 3-113
P4631D-98* SG 2 ADI +27.5 VDC FILTERED POWER 3-95
P4631D-87* SG 2 ADI COPY 3-81, 3-92
P4631D-9* SG 2 ADI DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3-74, 3-85, 3-96,

3-107

Pin
Designator
P4631D-7* SG 2 ADI MODE HI 3-75, 3-86, 3-97,

3-108
P4631D-8* SG 2 ADI MODE LO 3-75, 3-86, 3-97,

3-108
P4631D-5* SG 2 ADI VIDEO BLUE HI 3-74, 3-85, 3-96,

3-107
P4631D-6* SG 2 ADI VIDEO BLUE LO 3-74, 3-85, 3-96,

3-107
P4631D-3* SG 2 ADI VIDEO GREEN HI 3-74, 3-85, 3-96,

3-107
P4631D-4* SG 2 ADI VIDEO GREEN LO 3-74, 3-85, 3-96,

3-107
P4631D-1* SG 2 ADI VIDEO RED HI 3-74, 3-85, 3-96,

3-107
P4631D-2* SG 2 ADI VIDEO RED LO 3-74, 3-85, 3-96,

3-107
P4631D-106* SG 2 ADI X DEFLECTION HI 3-75, 3-86, 3-97,

3-108
P4631D-105* SG 2 ADI X DEFLECTION LO 3-75, 3-86, 3-97,

3-108
P4631D-104* SG 2 ADI Y DEFLECTION HI 3-75, 3-86, 3-97,

3-108
P4631D-103* SG 2 ADI Y DEFLECTION LO 3-75, 3-86, 3-97,

3-108
P4631B-70* SG 2 COMPOSITE 3-80, 3-91
P4632-17 SG 2 COMPOSITE 3-102, 3-113
P4632-4 SG 2 CONTROL PANEL +7 VDC POWER 3-98, 3-109
P4632-16 SG 2 CONTROL PANEL DH ON 3-98, 3-109

Pin
Designator
P4632-9 SG 2 CONTROL PANEL MODE4 3-98, 3-109
P4632-5 SG 2 CONTROL PANEL RETURN 3-98, 3-109
P4631B-71* SG 2 COPY 3-80, 3-91
P4631D-50* SG 2 DISPLAY DOWN 3-80, 3-91, 3-102,

3-113
P4632-41* SG 2 HSI +15 VDC POWER 3-99
P4632-56* SG 2 HSI +27.5 VDC FILTERED POWER 3-99
P4632-28* SG 2 HSI +30 VDC POWER 3-99
P4632-2* SG 2 HSI +7 VDC POWER 3-99
P4632-79* SG 2 HSI +85 VDC POWER 3-99
P4632-42* SG 2 HSI -15 VDC POWER 3-99
P4632-66* SG 2 HSI -30 VDC POWER 3-99
P4632-14* SG 2 HSI -7 VDC POWER 3-99
P4631B-7* SG 2 HSI ADI Y DEFLECTION HI 3-79, 3-90
P4631B-8* SG 2 HSI ADI Y DEFLECTION LO 3-79, 3-90
P4631B-50* SG 2 HSI DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3-78, 3-89
P4632-102 SG 2 HSI DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3-100, 3-111
P4631B-105* SG 2 HSI MODE HI 3-79, 3-90
P4632-93 SG 2 HSI MODE HI 3-101, 3-112
P4631B-106* SG 2 HSI MODE LO 3-79, 3-90
P4632-106 SG 2 HSI MODE LO 3-101, 3-112
P4631B-103* SG 2 HSI VIDEO BLUE HI 3-78, 3-89
P4632-91 SG 2 HSI VIDEO BLUE HI 3-100, 3-111
P4631B-104* SG 2 HSI VIDEO BLUE LO 3-78, 3-89
P4632-105 SG 2 HSI VIDEO BLUE LO 3-100, 3-111
P4631B-101* SG 2 HSI VIDEO GREEN HI 3-78, 3-89
P4632-63 SG 2 HSI VIDEO GREEN HI 3-100, 3-111
P4631B-102* SG 2 HSI VIDEO GREEN LO 3-78, 3-89

Pin
Designator
P4632-77 SG 2 HSI VIDEO GREEN LO 3-100, 3-111
P4631B-99* SG 2 HSI VIDEO RED HI 3-78, 3-89
P4632-35 SG 2 HSI VIDEO RED HI 3-100, 3-111
P4631B-100* SG 2 HSI VIDEO RED LO 3-78, 3-89
P4632-49 SG 2 HSI VIDEO RED LO 3-100, 3-111
P4631B-5* SG 2 HSI X DEFLECTION HI 3-79, 3-90
P4632-94 SG 2 HSI X DEFLECTION HI 3-101, 3-112
P4631B-6* SG 2 HSI X DEFLECTION LO 3-79, 3-90
P4632-80 SG 2 HSI X DEFLECTION LO 3-101, 3-112
P4632-67 SG 2 HSI Y DEFLECTION HI 3-101, 3-112
P4632-53 SG 2 HSI Y DEFLECTION LO 3-101, 3-112
P4631D-48* SG 2 SWITCH RETURN 3-80, 3-91, 3-102,

3-113
P4632-18 SG 2 XTALK RECEIVER A 3-102, 3-113
P4632-19 SG 2 XTALK RECEIVER B 3-102, 3-113
P4632-20 SG 2 XTALK TRANSMITTER A 3-102, 3-113
P4632-21 SG 2 XTALK TRANSMITTER B 3-102, 3-113
P4631C-106 SG HSI X DEFLECTION HI 3-57, 3-68, 3-79,

3-90, 3-101, 3-112
P4631C-105 SG HSI X DEFLECTION LO 3-57, 3-68, 3-79,

3-90, 3-101, 3-112
P4631C-104 SG HSI Y DEFLECTION HI 3-57, 3-68, 3-79,

3-90, 3-101, 3-112
P4631C-103 SG HSI Y DEFLECTION LO 3-57, 3-68, 3-79,

3-90, 3-101, 3-112
P4631C-100* SG1 HSI GROUND 3-55, 3-99
P4631C-101* SG1 HSI GROUND 3-55, 3-99
P4631C-102* SG1 HSI GROUND 3-55, 3-99

Pin
Designator
P4631D-90* SHIELD GROUND 3.16.4.H
P4631C-61 SPARE
P4631C-86 SPARE
P4631C-97 SPARE
P4632-46 SPARE
P4632-55 SPARE
P4632-60 SPARE
P4632-74 SPARE
P4631A-36* SPARE (1) ANNUNCIATE 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631A-70* SPARE (1) COMMON 3-103, 3-114
P4631A-44* SPARE (1) NORMALLY CLOSE 3-103, 3-114
P4631A-55* SPARE (1) NORMALLY OPEN 3-103, 3-114
P4631A-76* SPARE (1) SELECT IN 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631A-71* SPARE (1) SELECT OUT 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-75* SPARE (2) ANNUNCIATE 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631D-85* SPARE (2) COMMON 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-100* SPARE (2) NORMALLY CLOSE 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-82* SPARE (2) NORMALLY OPEN 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-31* SPARE (2) SELECT IN 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
P4631D-70* SPARE (2) SELECT OUT 3-103, 3-114
P4631A-36* SPARE ANNUNCIATE 3.2.4.T 3-59, 3-70

Pin
Designator
P4631A-70* SPARE COMMON 3-59, 3-70

3-92, 3-103, 3-114

3-92, 3-103, 3-114

3-92, 3-103, 3-114

3-92, 3-103, 3-114

3-92, 3-103, 3-114

3-92, 3-103, 3-114
P4631A-44* SPARE NORMALLY CLOSE 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-55* SPARE NORMALLY OPEN 3-59, 3-70

3-93
P4631C-25* SPARE RELAY 10 ENABLE 3-115
P4631C-50* SPARE RELAY 10A COMMON 3-115

3-93
P4631C-11* SPARE RELAY 10A NORMALLY CLOSE 3-115

3-93

3-93
P4631C-82* SPARE RELAY 10A NORMALLY OPEN 3-115
P4631C-51* SPARE RELAY 10B COMMON 3-115

3-93
P4631C-12* SPARE RELAY 10B NORMALLY CLOSE 3-115

3-93

Pin
Designator
3-93
P4631C-72* SPARE RELAY 10B NORMALLY OPEN 3-115

3-93
P4631D-54* SPARE RELAY 11 ENABLE 3-115

3-93
P4631D-21* SPARE RELAY 11A COMMON 3-115

3-93
P4631D-19* SPARE RELAY 11A NORMALLY CLOSE 3-115

3-93
P4631D-58* SPARE RELAY 11A NORMALLY OPEN 3-115

3-93
P4631D-53* SPARE RELAY 11B COMMON 3-115

3-93
P4631D-20* SPARE RELAY 11B NORMALLY CLOSE 3-115

3-93
P4631D-57* SPARE RELAY 11B NORMALLY OPEN 3-115

3-93
P4632-51* SPARE RELAY 12 ENABLE 3-115

3-93
P4632-23* SPARE RELAY 12A COMMON 3-115

3-93
P4632-66* SPARE RELAY 12A NORMALLY CLOSE 3-115

3-93
P4632-37* SPARE RELAY 12A NORMALLY OPEN 3-115

Pin
Designator
3-93
P4632-24* SPARE RELAY 12B COMMON 3-115

3-93
P4632-79* SPARE RELAY 12B NORMALLY CLOSE 3-115

3-93
P4632-38* SPARE RELAY 12B NORMALLY OPEN 3-115

Pin
Designator
P4631D-61* SPARE RELAY 14 ENABLE

3-93
P4631C-95* SPARE RELAY 1-4 POWER 3-104, 3-115

Pin
Designator
P4631A-48* SPARE RELAY 16A NORMALLY OPEN

Pin
Designator

Pin
Designator
P4631B-49* SPARE RELAY 19A COMMON

Pin
Designator

3-93

3-93

3-93

3-93

3-93

3-93

3-93
P4631A-48* SPARE RELAY 20B COMMON

Pin
Designator
P4631B-38 SPARE RELAY 25A COMMON 3-71

Pin
Designator

3-93

3-93

3-93

3-93

3-93

3-93

Pin
Designator

Pin
Designator
P4631B-52* SPARE RELAY 5-8 POWER
P4632-43 SPARE RELAY 5-8 POWER 3-104, 3-115

Pin
Designator

3-93

3-93

3-93

3-93

Pin
Designator

3-93

3-93

3-93

3-93

3-93

3-93

3-93

3-93

3-93

3-93

3-93

3-93

Pin
Designator
3-93

3-93

3-93
P4631A-48* SPARE RELAY 9B COMMON 3-115

3-93
P4631A-50* SPARE RELAY 9B NORMALLY CLOSE 3-115

3-93

3-93
P4631A-76* SPARE SELECT IN 3.2.4.T 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-71* SPARE SELECT OUT 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-24* STANDBY (1) ANNUNCIATE 3.2.4.T 3-103, 3-114
P4631A-80* STANDBY (1) COMMON 3-103, 3-114
P4631A-57* STANDBY (1) NORMALLY CLOSE 3-103, 3-114
P4631A-67* STANDBY (1) NORMALLY OPEN 3-103, 3-114
P4631A-77* STANDBY (1) SELECT IN 3.2.4.T 3-103, 3-114
P4631A-72* STANDBY (1) SELECT OUT 3-95, 3-99, 3-103,

3-114
P4631A-83* STANDBY (2) AND NOT STANDBY (1) OUT 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-95* STANDBY (2) ANNUNCIATE 3.2.4.T 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-73* STANDBY (2) COMMON 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-101* STANDBY (2) NORMALLY CLOSE 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-81* STANDBY (2) NORMALLY OPEN 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-30* STANDBY (2) SELECT IN 3.2.4.T 3-103, 3-114
P4631D-69* STANDBY (2) SELECT OUT 3-95, 3-99, 3-114
P4631A-24* STANDBY ANNUNCIATE 3.2.4.T 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-80* STANDBY COMMON 3-59, 3-70

Pin
Designator
P4631A-57* STANDBY NORMALLY CLOSE 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-67* STANDBY NORMALLY OPEN 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-77* STANDBY SELECT IN 3.2.4.T 3-59, 3-70
P4631A-72* STANDBY SELECT OUT 3-51, 3-55, 3-59,

3-70
P4631A-75 SWITCH RETURN 3.2.4.T 3-59, 3-70, 3-81,

3-92, 3-103, 3-114
P4631A-96 SWITCH RETURN 3-81, 3-92
P4631D-32 SWITCH RETURN 3.2.4.T 3-81, 3-92, 3-103,

3-114
3.18.2.9 SG 464 - Line Name Index
TABLE 3-52 SG 464 - Line Name Index
Pin
Designator
P4641A-32 +FROM OUT 3.12.4.E 3-147, 3-147A,
3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641A-46 +TO OUT 3.12.4.E 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641C-86 1/2 SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J 3-127, 3-128,

3-130, 3-132,
3-141, 3-142,
3-142A, 3-147,
3-147A, 3-148,
3-148A, 3-149,
3-150, 3-151,
3-152, 3-153,
3-154A, 3-154B,
3-164
P4641A-54 ADF 1 COS Hl / Y 3.7.4.B 3-138, 3-139,

3-140

Pin
Designator
3-140

3-140
P4641A-41 ADF 1 SIN HI / X 3.7.4.B 3-138, 3-139,

3-140

3-140

3-140
P4641B-61 ADF 2 COS HI / Y 3.7.4.B 3-138, 3-139,

3-140
P4641C-90 ADF 2 RECEIVER A 3.7.4.D 3-138, 3-139,

3-140
P4641C-103 ADF 2 RECEIVER B 3.7.4.D 3-138, 3-139,

3-140
P4641B-35 ADF 2 SIN HI / X 3.7.4.B 3-138, 3-139,

3-140

3-140

3-140
P4641C-26 ADF SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641B-1 AHRS 1 RECEIVER A 3.3.4.J 3-116, 3-119
P4641B-55 AHRS 1 RECEIVER B 3.3.4.J 3-116, 3-119
P4641C-38 AHRS 2 RECEIVER A 3.3.4.J 3-116, 3-119
P4641C-51 AHRS 2 RECEIVER B 3.3.4.J 3-116, 3-119
P4641B-31 AUTOPILOT LEFT/ RIGHT 3.12.4.S 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B

Pin
Designator
P4641A-81 AUTOPILOT REFERENCE C 3.12.4.A 3-147, 3-147A,
3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641A-95 AUTOPILOT REFERENCE H 3.12.4.A 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641C-43 BACK COURSE OUT 3.12.4.M 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641C-73 CABLE SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J, 3-163

3.15.4.B.4
P4641C-58 CAT II ENABLE 3.4.4.J
P4641B-41 CHECKLIST RECEIVER A 3.13 3-142, 3-160
P4641B-27 CHECKLIST RECEIVER B 3.13 3-142, 3-160
P4641C-46 COMPASS 2 SUPERFLAG 3.3.4.C 3-116, 3-119
P4641B-105 CONFIG TO SG DATA 3.2.4.Q 3-7
P4641B-66 CONFIGURATION MODULE +5 VDC 3.2.4.Q 3-7
P4641B-39 CONFIGURATION MODULE GROUND 3.2.4.Q 3-7
P4641A-16 CONTROL PANEL +7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.F 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,
3-21, 3-27

3-21, 3-27

3-21, 3-27

3-21, 3-27

3-21, 3-27

3-21, 3-27, 3-161

Pin
Designator
3-21, 3-27, 3-161

3-21, 3-27, 3-161

3-21, 3-27, 3-161
P4641A-100 CONTROL PANEL RETURN 3.2.4.F 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,

3-21, 3-27, 3-161
P4641C-7 COPY 3.2.4.M 3-13, 3-19, 3-25,

3-31

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641C-59 DG CROSS-SIDE 3.3.4.E 3-116, 3-118,

3-119, 3-120
P4641B-68 DME 1 CLOCK 3.5.4.A 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4641B-69 DME 1 DATA 3.5.4.A 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4641B-17 DME 1 HOLD 3.5.4.C 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141

Pin
Designator
3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4641B-56 DME 1 RETURN 3.5.4.A 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4641B-5 DME 1 SUPERFLAG 3.5.4.B 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4641B-70 DME 1 SYNC 3.5.4.A 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4641C-11 DME 2 CLOCK 3.5.4.A 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4641C-23 DME 2 DATA 3.5.4.A 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4641C-47 DME 2 HOLD 3.5.4.C 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141

Pin
Designator
P4641C-77 DME 2 RECEIVER A 3.5.4.D 3-126, 3-127,
3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4641C-76 DME 2 RECEIVER B 3.5.4.D 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4641C-10 DME 2 RETURN 3.5.4.A 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4641C-28 DME 2 SUPERFLAG 3.5.4.B 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4641C-36 DME 2 SYNC 3.5.4.A 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4641C-72 EFS / TEST 3.16.4.K
P4641C-81 EFS GENERAL TRANSMITTER A 3.12.4.V 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B, 3-159,
3-160
P4641C-69 EFS GENERAL TRANSMITTER B 3.12.4.V 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B, 3-159,
3-160
P4641B-38 FAN HI 3.2.4.R 3-7
P4641B-74 FAN LO 3.2.4.R 3-7

Pin
Designator
3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641B-84 FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM RECEIVER B 3.12.4.U 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4641A-71 HEADING 1 X 3.3.4.B 3-116, 3-119
P4641A-57 HEADING 1 Y 3.3.4.B 3-116, 3-119

Pin
Designator
P4641A-56 HEADING 1 Z 3.3.4.B 3-116, 3-119
P4641B-8 HEADING 2 X 3.3.4.B 3-116, 3-119
P4641B-21 HEADING 2 Y 3.3.4.B 3-116, 3-119
P4641B-20 HEADING 2 Z 3.3.4.B 3-116, 3-119

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641A-69* HOMING 1 +FLAG 3.15.4.C.1
P4641A-84* HOMING 1 DEV +L 3.15.4.C.2
P4641A-98* HOMING 1 DEV +R 3.15.4.C.2
P4641A-55* HOMING 1 -FLAG 3.15.4.C.1
P4641B-9* HOMING 2 +FLAG 3.15.4.C.1
P4641B-24* HOMING 2 DEV +L 3.15.4.C.2
P4641B-12* HOMING 2 DEV +R 3.15.4.C.2
P4641B-22* HOMING 2 -FLAG 3.15.4.C.1
P4641C-100 HOMING SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J, 3-164

3.15.4.C.4
P4641C-74 HOVER SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J, 3-162

3.15.4.A.4
P4641A-4 HSI +15 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28
3-28
P4641A-5 HSI +30 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28
P4641A-27 HSI +5 VDC (TEST) 3.2.4.A

Pin
Designator
P4641A-3 HSI +7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,
3-28
P4641A-12 HSI +85 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28
P4641A-1 HSI -15 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28
P4641A-14 HSI -30 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28
P4641A-2 HSI -7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28
P4641C-78 HSI DATA A 3.16.4.L
P4641C-64 HSI DATA B 3.16.4.L
P4641A-59 HSI DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3.2.4.E 3-11, 3-17,

3-23, 3-29
P4641A-21 HSI GROUND 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28
P4641A-22 HSI GROUND 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28
P4641A-23 HSI GROUND 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28
P4641A-35 HSI GROUND 3.16.4.I
P4641A-38 HSI MODE Hl 3.2.4.D 3-12, 3-18, 3-24,

3-30
P4641A-24 HSI MODE LO 3.2.4.D 3-12, 3-18, 3-24,

3-30
P4641C-30 HSI VALID OUT 3.12.4.D 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B

3-29

Pin
Designator
3-29
P4641A-52 HSI VIDEO GREEN HI 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-17, 3-23,

3-29

3-29
P4641A-37 HSI VIDEO RED Hl 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-17, 3-23,

3-29

3-29

3-30

3-30
P4641A-50 HSI Y DEFLECTION HI 3.2.4.C 3-12, 3-18, 3-24,

3-30

3-30

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4641B-85 ILS 2 ENERGIZE IN 3.4.4.E 3-122, 3-123

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4641C-61 ILS ENERGIZE OUT 3.12.4.J 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641B-77 JOYSTICK DOWN 3.2.4.N 3-5
P4641B-78 JOYSTICK ENTER 3.2.4.N 3-5
P4641B-90 JOYSTICK LEFT 3.2.4.N 3-5
P4641B-101 JOYSTICK RETURN 3.2.4.N 3-5
P4641B-104 JOYSTICK RIGHT 3.2.4.N 3-5
P4641B-91 JOYSTICK UP 3.2.4.N 3-5
P4641B-95 KNS 81 1 CLOCK 3.8.4 3-141
P4641B-81 KNS 81 1 DATA 3.8.4 3-141

Pin
Designator
P4641B-25 KNS 81 1 RETURN 3.8.4 3-141
P4641B-82 KNS 81 1 SYNC 3.8.4 3-141
P4641C-24 KNS 81 2 CLOCK 3.8.4 3-141
P4641C-37 KNS 81 2 DATA 3.8.4 3-141
P4641C-94 KNS 81 2 RETURN 3.8.4 3-141
P4641C-50 KNS 81 2 SYNC 3.8.4 3-141

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149
P4641A-86* LATERAL DEVIATION +LEFT 3-150, 3-151,

3-152, 3-153,
3-154A, 3-154B
P4641A-73* LATERAL DEVIATION +RIGHT 3-150, 3-151,

3-152, 3-153,
3-154A, 3-154B

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641C-53* LIGHTNING RECEIVER A 3.13 3-159
P4641C-80* LIGHTNING RECEIVER B 3.13 3-159
P4641C-105 LNAV 2 RECEIVER A 3.9.4.B 3-142, 3-142A
P4641C-65 LNAV 2 RECEIVER B 3.9.4.B 3-142, 3-142A
P4641B-71 LNAV SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641C-56 LNAV TRANSMITTER A 3.9.4.A 3-142, 3-142A
P4641C-83 LNAV TRANSMITTER B 3.9.4.A 3-142, 3-142A

Pin
Designator
3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4641C-98 MAGNETIC/ TRUE 2 3.3.4.D 3-116, 3-119
P4641B-72 MAGNETIC/TRUE 1 3.3.4.D 3-116, 3-119
P4641A-69* MEMORY +FLAG 3.15.4.A.1
P4641A-55* MEMORY -FLAG 3.15.4.A.1
P4641B-102 MFD /HSI 3.2.4.M 3-13, 3-19, 3-25,

3-31
P4641C-96 MFD SLAVED 1/2 3.2.4.M 3-13, 3-19, 3-25,

3-31
P4641B-28 MLS 1 RECEIVER A 3.6.4 3-137
P4641B-42 MLS 1 RECEIVER B 3.6.4 3-137
P4641C-91 MLS 2 RECEIVER A 3.6.4 3-137
P4641C-92 MLS 2 RECEIVER B 3.6.4 3-137
P4641C-88 MLS SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J 3-132, 3-147,

3-147A, 3-148,
3-148A, 3-149,
3-150, 3-151,
3-152, 3-153,
3-154A, 3-154B
P4641C-16 MODE CHANGE OUT 3.12.4.L 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B

Pin
Designator
P4641A-31 NAV 1 OBI COS H 3.4.4.B 3-122, 3-123,
3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4641A-30 NAV 1 OBI SIN H 3.4.4.B 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4641B-32 NAV 2 OBI COS H 3.4.4.B 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4641B-59 NAV 2 OBI SIN HI 3.4.4.B 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4641C-104 NAV 2 RECEIVER A 3.4.4.H 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-141, 3-163,
3-164
P4641C-63 NAV 2 RECEIVER B 3.4.4.H 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164

Pin
Designator
P4641C-99 NAV SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J 3-127, 3-128,
3-130, 3-132,
3-147, 3-147A,
3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641A-69* NAV/LOC 1 +FLAG 3.4.4.C 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4641A-55* NAV/LOC 1 -FLAG 3.4.4.C 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4641B-9* NAV/LOC 2 +FLAG 3.4.4.C 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4641B-22* NAV/LOC 2 -FLAG 3.4.4.C 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4641A-13 NOT USED
P4641A-26 NOT USED
P4641A-39 NOT USED
P4641A-40 NOT USED
P4641A-53 NOT USED
P4641A-66 NOT USED
P4641A-67 NOT USED
P4641A-80 NOT USED
P4641A-93 NOT USED
P4641A-94 NOT USED
P4641B-13 NOT USED
P4641B-26 NOT USED
P4641B-40 NOT USED
P4641B-53 NOT USED
P4641B-67 NOT USED
P4641B-80 NOT USED

Pin
Designator
P4641B-94 NOT USED
P4641C-13* NOT USED
P4641C-25 NOT USED
P4641C-39 NOT USED
P4641C-52 NOT USED
P4641C-66 NOT USED
P4641C-79 NOT USED
P4641C-93 NOT USED
P4641C-106 NOT USED
P4641B-51* POS X DEV +AFT 3.15.4.B.3
P4641B-37* POS X DEV +FWD 3.15.4.B.3
P4641B-24* POS Y DEV +L 3.15.4.B.2
P4641B-12* POS Y DEV +R 3.15.4.B.2
P4641C-35* R/T RECEIVER A 3.13 3-155, 3-156,

3-157, 3-158,
3-160A, 3-160B
P4641C-49* R/T RECEIVER B 3.13 3-155, 3-156,

3-157, 3-158,
3-160A, 3-160B
P4641C-67* R/T TRANSMITTER A 3.13 3-155, 3-156,

3-157, 3-158,
3-160A, 3-160B
P4641C-54* R/T TRANSMITTER B 3.13 3-155, 3-156,

3-157, 3-158,
3-160A, 3-160B
P4641C-22* RADAR CONTROL RECEIVER A 3.13 3-155, 3-156,

3-157, 3-158,
3-160A, 3-160B
P4641C-9* RADAR CONTROL RECEIVER B 3.13 3-155, 3-156,

3-157, 3-158,
3-160A, 3-160B

Pin
Designator
P4641A-18 REFERENCE 1 C 3.3.4.A, 3-116, 3-122,

3.4.4.A, 3-123, 3-124,
3.7.4.A 3-135, 3-136,
3-138, 3-139,
3-140, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4641A-17 REFERENCE 1 H 3.3.4.A, 3-116, 3-122,

3.4.4.A, 3-123, 3-124,
3.7.4.A 3-135, 3-136,
3-138, 3-139,
3-140, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4641B-7 REFERENCE 2 C 3.3.4.A, 3-116, 3-122,

3.4.4.A, 3-123, 3-124,
3.7.4.A 3-135, 3-136,
3-138, 3-139,
3-140, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4641B-19 REFERENCE 2 H 3.3.4.A, 3-116, 3-122,

3.4.4.A, 3-123, 3-124,
3.7.4.A 3-135, 3-136,
3-138, 3-139,
3-140, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4641C-102 RNAV SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J 3-127, 3-128,

3-141, 3-147,
3-147A, 3-148,
3-148A, 3-149,
3-150, 3-151,
3-152, 3-153,
3-154A, 3-154B
P4641A-42* SEN 1 +FLAG 3.15.4.C.1
P4641A-85* SENS 1 DEV +DN 3.15.4.C.3
P4641A-60* SENS 1 DEV +UP 3.15.4.C.3
P4641A-28* SENS 1-FLAG 3.15.4.C.1
P4641B-62* SENS 2 +FLAG 3.15.4.C.1
P4641B-51* SENS 2 DEV +DN 3.15.4.C.3
P4641B-37* SENS 2 DEV +UP 3.15.4.C.3
P4641B-49* SENS 2 -FLAG 3.15.4.C.1
P4641B-87 SG TO CONFIG CLOCK 3.2.4.Q 3-7

Pin
Designator
P4641B-100 SG TO CONFIG DATA 3.2.4.Q 3-7
P4641A-15 SPARE
P4641A-20 SPARE
P4641A-29 SPARE
P4641A-34 SPARE
P4641A-47 SPARE
P4641A-48 SPARE
P4641A-70 SPARE
P4641A-72 SPARE
P4641A-101 SPARE
P4641A-102 SPARE
P4641B-2 SPARE
P4641B-6 SPARE
P4641B-33 SPARE
P4641B-45 SPARE
P4641B-47 SPARE
P4641B-50 SPARE
P4641B-52 SPARE
P4641B-54 SPARE
P4641B-57 SPARE
P4641B-60 SPARE
P4641B-63 SPARE
P4641B-65 SPARE

Pin
Designator
P4641B-73 SPARE
P4641B-75 SPARE
P4641B-76 SPARE
P4641B-79 SPARE
P4641B-83 SPARE
P4641B-88 SPARE
P4641B-89 SPARE
P4641B-93 SPARE
P4641B-97 SPARE
P4641B-103 SPARE
P4641B-106 SPARE
P4641C-1 SPARE
P4641C-2 SPARE
P4641C-3 SPARE
P4641C-4 SPARE
P4641C-5 SPARE
P4641C-6 SPARE
P4641C-8 SPARE
P4641C-13* SPARE
P4641C-14 SPARE
P4641C-17 SPARE
P4641C-18 SPARE
P4641C-20 SPARE
P4641C-27 SPARE
P4641C-31 SPARE
P4641C-32 SPARE
P4641C-34 SPARE
P4641C-41 SPARE
P4641C-42 SPARE
P4641C-60 SPARE
P4641C-71 SPARE
P4641C-75 SPARE

Pin
Designator
P4641C-84 SPARE
P4641C-85 SPARE
P4641C-97 SPARE
P4641C-70 SPARE 1 TRANSMITTER A
P4641C-95 SPARE 1 TRANSMITTER B
P4641A-105 SPARE 2 RECEIVER A
P4641A-91 SPARE 2 RECEIVER B
P4641C-21 STANDBY 3.2.4.M 3-13, 3-19, 3-25,

3-31
P4641C-40 SWITCH RETURN 3.2.4.M 3-13, 3-25, 3-31

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4641C-19 TACAN 2 ENERGIZE IN 3.5.4.E 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4641C-101 TACAN SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J
P4641C-44 TCAS VALID 3.14.4.B 3-161
P4641B-9* THRUST +FLAG 3.15.4.B.1
P4641B-22* THRUST -FLAG 3.15.4.B.1
P4641A-42* VEL +FLAG 3.15.4.A.1
P4641A-85* VEL X DEV +AFT 3.15.4.A.3
P4641A-60* VEL X DEV +FWD 3.15.4.A.3
P4641A-84* VEL Y DEV +L 3.15.4.A.2
P4641A-98* VEL Y DEV +R 3.15.4.A.2
P4641A-28* VEL-FLAG 3.15.4.A.1

Pin
Designator
3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641C-15 VNAV DEVIATION +DOWN 3-142, 3-142A
P4641C-29 VNAV DEVIATION +UP 3-142, 3-142A
P4641C-33 VNAV ENGAGE 3-142, 3-142A
P4641C-48 VNAV lN VIEW 3-142, 3-142A
P4641C-87 VNAV SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4641C-57 VNAV SUPERFLAG 3-142, 3-142A
P4641C-12 XTALK RECEIVER A 3.2.4.L 3-13, 3-19, 3-25,

3-31
P4641C-62 XTALK RECEIVER B 3.2.4.L 3-13, 3-19,

3-25, 3-31
P4641C-68 XTALK TRANSMITTER A 3.2.4.L 3-13, 3-19, 3-25,

3-31
P4641C-82 XTALK TRANSMITTER B 3.2.4.L 3-13, 3-19, 3-25,

3-31

3.18.2.10 SG 465 - Line Name Index
Pin
Designator
P4651A-31 +FROM OUT 3.12.4.E 3-147, 3-147A,
3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4651A-51 +TO OUT 3.12.4.E 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4652A-7 1/2 SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J 3-127, 3-128,

3-130, 3-132,
3-141, 3-142,
3-142A, 3-147,
3-147A, 3-148,
3-148A, 3-149,
3-150, 3-151,
3-152, 3-153,
3-154A, 3-154B,
3-164
P4652B-22* 453 DATA BUS A IN 3-160E
P4652B-49* 453 DATA BUS B IN 3-160E
P4651A-64 ADF 1 COS HI / Y 3.7.4.B 3-138, 3-139,

3-140
P4652A-43 ADF 1 RECEIVER A 3.7.4.D 3-138, 3-139,

3-140
P4652A-42 ADF 1 RECEIVER B 3.7.4.D 3-138, 3-139,

3-140
P4651A-77 ADF 1 SIN HI / X 3.7.4.B 3-138, 3-139,

3-140

3-140

3-140
P4651B-32 ADF 2 COS HI / Y 3.7.4.B 3-138, 3-139,

3-140

3-140

Pin
Designator
3-140
P4651B-45 ADF 2 SIN HI / X 3.7.4.B 3-138, 3-139,

3-140

3-140

3-140
P4652A-33 ADF SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4651B-52* ADI +15 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-33, 3-42, 3-51,

3-62, 3-73, 3-84,
3-95, 3-106
3-69, 3-80, 3-91,
3-102, 3-113,
3-165
3-69, 3-80, 3-91,
3-102, 3-113,
3-165
3-69, 3-80, 3-91,
3-102, 3-113,
3-165
P4651B-8* ADI +27.5 VDC FILTERED POWER 3.2.4.A 3-33, 3-42, 3-51,
3-62, 3-73, 3-84,
3-95, 3-106
P4651B-66* ADI +30 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-33, 3-42, 3-51,

3-62, 3-73, 3-84,
3-95, 3-106
P4651B-105* ADI +5 VDC (TEST) 3.2.4.A
P4651B-39* ADI +7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-33, 3-42, 3-51,

3-62, 3-73, 3-84,
3-95, 3-106
P4651B-79* ADI +85 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-33, 3-42, 3-51,

3-62, 3-73, 3-84,
3-95, 3-106

Pin
Designator
P4651B-12* ADI -15 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-33, 3-42, 3-51,
3-62, 3-73, 3-84,
3-95, 3-106
P4651B-11* ADI -30 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-33, 3-42, 3-51,

3-62, 3-73, 3-84,
3-95, 3-106
P4651B-25* ADI -7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-33, 3-42, 3-51,

3-62, 3-73, 3-84,
3-95, 3-106
P4652B-76* ADI DATA A 3.16.4.L
P4652B-62* ADI DATA B 3.16.4.L
P4651B-17* ADI DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3.2.4.E 3-34, 3-43, 3-52,

3-63, 3-74, 3-85,
3-96, 3-107
P4651B-89* ADI GROUND 3.2.4.A 3-33, 3-42, 3-51,

3-62, 3-73, 3-84,
3-95, 3-106
P4651B-90* ADI GROUND 3.2.4.A 3-33, 3-42, 3-51,

3-62, 3-73, 3-84,
3-95, 3-106
P4651B-102* ADI GROUND 3.2.4.A 3-33, 3-42, 3-51,

3-62, 3-73, 3-84,
3-95, 3-106
P4651B-2* ADI MODE HI 3.2.4.D 3-35, 3-44, 3-53,

3-64, 3-75, 3-86,
3-97, 3-108
P4651B-1* ADI MODE LO 3.2.4.D 3-35, 3-44, 3-53,

3-64, 3-75, 3-86,
3-97, 3-108
P4651B-80* ADI SCOPE BLANKING 3.16.4.J
P4652A-24* ADI VALID OUT 3.12.4.D 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4651B-40* ADI VIDEO BLUE HI 3.2.4.B 3-34, 3-43, 3-52,

3-63, 3-74, 3-85,
3-96, 3-107

Pin
Designator
P4651B-41* ADI VIDEO BLUE LO 3.2.4.B 3-34, 3-43, 3-52,
3-63, 3-74, 3-85,
3-96, 3-107
P4651B-26* ADI VIDEO GREEN HI 3.2.4.B 3-34, 3-43, 3-52,

3-63, 3-74, 3-85,
3-96, 3-107
P4651B-27* ADI VIDEO GREEN LO 3.2.4.B 3-34, 3-43, 3-52,

3-63, 3-74, 3-85,
3-96, 3-107
P4651B-13* ADI VIDEO RED HI 3.2.4.B 3-34, 3-43, 3-52,

3-63, 3-74, 3-85,
3-96, 3-107
P4651B-14* ADI VIDEO RED LO 3.2.4.B 3-34, 3-43, 3-52,

3-63, 3-74, 3-85,
3-96, 3-107
P4651B-67* ADI X DEFLECTION HI 3.2.4.C 3-35, 3-44, 3-53,

3-64, 3-75, 3-86,
3-97, 3-108
P4651B-68* ADI X DEFLECTION LO 3.2.4.C 3-35, 3-44, 3-53,

3-64, 3-75, 3-86,
3-97, 3-108
P4651B-53* ADI Y DEFLECTION HI 3.2.4.C 3-35, 3-44, 3-53,

3-64, 3-75, 3-86,
3-97, 3-108
P4651B-54* ADI Y DEFLECTION LO 3.2.4.C 3-35, 3-44, 3-53,

3-64, 3-75, 3-86,
3-97, 3-108
P4652A-30 AHRS 1 RECEIVER A 3.3.4.J 3-116, 3-117,

3-119
P4652A-4 AHRS 1 RECEIVER B 3.3.4.J 3-116, 3-117,

3-119
P4652B-90 AHRS 2 RECEIVER A 3.3.4.J 3-116, 3-117,

3-119
P4652B-104 AHRS 2 RECEIVER B 3.3.4.J 3-116, 3-117,

3-119
P4652A-54* AIRDATA RECEIVER A 3.10.4.D 3-143, 3-144
P4652A-40* AIRDATA RECEIVER B 3.10.4.D 3-143, 3-144
P4652B-32* AOA/IAS 3.10.4.C 3-143, 3-144

Pin
Designator
P4652A-32 ATTITUDE MISCOMPARE OUT 3.12.4.K 3-147, 3-147A,
3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4652A-21 AUTOPILOT LEFT/ RIGHT 3.12.4.S 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4651B-74 AUTOPILOT REFERENCE C 3.12.4.A 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4651B-88 AUTOPILOT REFERENCE H 3.12.4.A 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4652A-50 BACK COURSE OUT 3.12.4.M 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4652A-6 CABLE SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J, 3-163

3.15.4.B.4
P4652B-18 CAT II ENABLE 3.4.4.J
P4652A-27 CHECKLIST RECEIVER A 3.13 3-142, 3-160
P4652A-26 CHECKLIST RECEIVER B 3.13 3-142, 3-160
P4651A-100 COMPASS 1 SUPERFLAG 3.3.4.C 3-116, 3-119
P4652A-22 COMPOSITE 3.2.4.M 3-40, 3-49, 3-58,

3-69, 3-80, 3-91,
3-102, 3-113
P4652A-92 CONFIG TO SG DATA 3.2.4.Q 3-7
P4652A-104 CONFIGURATION MODULE +5 VDC 3.2.4.Q 3-7
P4652A-103 CONFIGURATION MODULE GROUND 3.2.4.Q 3-7

Pin
Designator
P4652B-100 CONTROL PANEL +7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.F 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,
3-21, 3-27, 3-36,
3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109

3-21, 3-27, 3-36,
3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109

3-21, 3-27, 3-36,
3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109
P4652B-84* CONTROL PANEL DH ON 3.2.4.J 3-3, 3-4, 3-36,

3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109

3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109

3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109

3-21, 3-27, 3-36,
3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109

3-21, 3-27, 3-36,
3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109

3-21, 3-27, 3-36,
3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109, 3-161

3-21, 3-27, 3-36,
3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109, 3-161

Pin
Designator
3-21, 3-27, 3-36,
3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109, 3-161

3-21, 3-27, 3-36,
3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109, 3-161
P4652B-57 CONTROL PANEL RETURN 3.2.4.F 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,

3-21, 3-27, 3-36,
3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109, 3-161
P4652B-16 COPY 3.2.4.M 3-13, 3-19, 3-25,

3-31, 3-40, 3-49,
3-58, 3-69, 3-80,
3-91, 3-102, 3-113

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4652B-13* DECISION HEIGHT SELECT IN 3.11.4.D 3-145, 3-146
P4652B-88* DECISION HEIGHT SELECT OUT 3.11.4.E 3-145, 3-146
P4652B-19 DG CROSS-SIDE 3.3.4.E 3-116, 3-118,

3-119, 3-120
P4652B-95* DISPLAY DOWN 3.2.4.M 3-40, 3-49, 3-58,

3-69, 3-80, 3-91,
3-102, 3-113
P4652A-94 DME 1 CLOCK 3.5.4.A 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141

Pin
Designator
P4652A-80 DME 1 DATA 3.5.4.A 3-126, 3-127,
3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4652A-8 DME 1 HOLD 3.5.4.C 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4652A-2 DME 1 RECEIVER A 3.5.4.D 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4652A-28 DME 1 RECEIVER B 3.5.4.D 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4652A-95 DME 1 RETURN 3.5.4.A 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4652A-82 DME 1 SYNC 3.5.4.A 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4652B-78 DME 2 CLOCK 3.5.4.A 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141

Pin
Designator
P4652B-79 DME 2 DATA 3.5.4.A 3-126, 3-127,
3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4652B-44 DME 2 HOLD 3.5.4.C 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4652B-77 DME 2 RETURN 3.5.4.A 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4652B-92 DME 2 SYNC 3.5.4.A 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4651B-34 EFS / TEST 3.16.4.K

Pin
Designator
P4652B-8 EFS GENERAL TRANSMITTER A 3.12.4.V 3-147, 3-147A,
3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B, 3-159,
3-160
P4652B-34 EFS GENERAL TRANSMITTER B 3.12.4.V 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B, 3-159,
3-160
P4652A-102 FAN HI 3.2.4.R 3-7
P4652A-101 FAN LO 3.2.4.R 3-7

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4652B-24* FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM RECEIVER B 3.12.4.U 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4652B-4* FLIGHT DIRECTOR ENGAGE 3.12.4.Q 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4652B-6* FLIGHT DIRECTOR VALID 3.12.4.P 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4652B-14* FLT DIRECTOR COMMAND BAR SELECT 3.12.4.R 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B

Pin
Designator
3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4651A-57 HEADING 1 X 3.3.4.B 3-116, 3-119
P4651A-97 HEADING 1 Y 3.3.4.B 3-116, 3-119
P4651A-84 HEADING 1 Z 3.3.4.B 3-116, 3-119
P4651B-78 HEADING 2 X 3.3.4.B 3-116, 3-119
P4651B-65 HEADING 2 Y 3.3.4.B 3-116, 3-119
P4651B-64 HEADING 2 Z 3.3.4.B 3-116, 3-119

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B

Pin
Designator
3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4651A-75* HOMING 1 +FLAG 3.15.4.C.1
P4651A-35* HOMING 1 DEV +L 3.15.4.C.2
P4651A-21* HOMING 1 DEV +R 3.15.4.C.2
P4651A-62* HOMING 1 -FLAG 3.15.4.C.1
P4651B-48* HOMING 2 +FLAG 3.15.4.C.1
P4651B-61* HOMING 2 DEV +L 3.15.4.C.2
P4651B-75* HOMING 2 DEV +R 3.15.4.C.2
P4651B-21 HOMING 2 -FLAG 3.15.4.C.1
P4652A-45* HOMING SELECT OUT 3.15.4.C.4 3-164
P4652A-18 HOVER SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J, 3-162

3.15.4.A.4
P4651A-66 HSI +15 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28, 3-37, 3-46,
3-55, 3-66, 3-77,
3-88, 3-99, 3-110
P4651A-92 HSI +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER 3.2.4.A, 3-165

3.16.4.A
3-28, 3-37, 3-46,
3-55, 3-66, 3-77,
3-88, 3-99, 3-110
P4651A-79 HSI +30 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28, 3-37, 3-46,
3-55, 3-66, 3-77,
3-88, 3-99, 3-110
P4651A-102 HSI +5 VDC (TEST) 3.2.4.A
P4651A-52 HSI +7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28, 3-37, 3-46,
3-55, 3-66, 3-77,
3-88, 3-99, 3-110

Pin
Designator
P4651A-93 HSI +85 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,
3-28, 3-37, 3-46,
3-55, 3-66, 3-77,
3-88, 3-99, 3-110
P4651A-25 HSI -15 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28, 3-37, 3-46,
3-55, 3-66, 3-77,
3-88, 3-99, 3-110
P4651A-12 HSI -30 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28, 3-37, 3-46,
3-55, 3-66, 3-77,
3-88, 3-99, 3-110
P4651A-39 HSI -7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28, 3-37, 3-46,
3-55, 3-66, 3-77,
3-88, 3-99, 3-110
P4652B-89 HSI DATA A 3.16.4.L
P4652B-103 HSI DATA B 3.16.4.L
P4651A-78 HSI DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3.2.4.E 3-11, 3-17, 3-23,

3-29, 3-38, 3-47,
3-56, 3-67, 3-78,
3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4651A-10 HSI GROUND 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28, 3-37, 3-46,
3-55, 3-66, 3-77,
3-88, 3-99, 3-110
P4651A-11 HSI GROUND 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28, 3-37, 3-46,
3-55, 3-66, 3-77,
3-88, 3-99, 3-110
P4651A-23 HSI GROUND 3.2.4.A 3-10, 3-16, 3-22,

3-28, 3-37, 3-46,
3-55, 3-66, 3-77,
3-88, 3-99, 3-110
P4651A-15 HSI MODE HI 3.2.4.D 3-12, 3-18, 3-24,

3-30, 3-39, 3-48,
3-57, 3-68, 3-79,
3-90, 3-101, 3-112

Pin
Designator
P4651A-16 HSI MODE LO 3.2.4.D 3-12, 3-18, 3-24,
3-30, 3-39, 3-48,
3-57, 3-68, 3-79,
3-90, 3-101, 3-112
P4651B-7 HSI VALID OUT 3.12.4.D 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B

3-29, 3-38, 3-47,
3-56, 3-67, 3-78,
3-89, 3-100, 3-111

3-29, 3-38, 3-47,
3-56, 3-67, 3-78,
3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4651A-42 HSI VIDEO GREEN Hl 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-17, 3-23,

3-29, 3-38, 3-47,
3-56, 3-67, 3-78,
3-89, 3-100, 3-111

3-29, 3-38, 3-47,
3-56, 3-67, 3-78,
3-89, 3-100, 3-111
P4651A-28 HSI VIDEO RED HI 3.2.4.B 3-11, 3-17, 3-23,

3-29, 3-38, 3-47,
3-56, 3-67, 3-78,
3-89, 3-100, 3-111

3-29, 3-38, 3-47,
3-56, 3-67, 3-78,
3-89, 3-100, 3-111

3-30, 3-39, 3-48,
3-57, 3-68, 3-79,
3-90, 3-101, 3-112

3-30, 3-39, 3-48,
3-57, 3-68, 3-79,
3-90, 3-101, 3-112

Pin
Designator
P4651A-69 HSI Y DEFLECTION Hl 3.2.4.C 3-12, 3-18, 3-24,
3-30, 3-39, 3-48,
3-57, 3-68, 3-79,
3-90, 3-101, 3-112

3-30, 3-39, 3-48,
3-57, 3-68, 3-79,
3-90, 3-101, 3-112
P4651A-24 HSI/ADI GROUND 3.16.4.I

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4651B-35 ILS 2 ENERGIZE IN 3.4.4.E 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4652B-102 ILS ENERGIZE OUT 3.12.4.J 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4652A-78 JOYSTICK DOWN 3.2.4.N 3-5
P4652A-93 JOYSTICK ENTER 3.2.4.N 3-5
P4652A-65 JOYSTICK LEFT 3.2.4.N 3-5
P4652A-77 JOYSTICK RETURN 3.2.4.N 3-5
P4652A-66 JOYSTICK RIGHT 3.2.4.N 3-5
P4652A-79 JOYSTICK UP 3.2.4.N 3-5
P4652A-69 KNS 81 1 CLOCK 3.8.4 3-141
P4652A-96 KNS 81 1 DATA 3.8.4 3-141
P4652A-83 KNS 81 1 RETURN 3.8.4 3-141
P4652A-55 KNS 81 1 SYNC 3.8.4 3-141
P4652B-91 KNS 81 2 CLOCK 3.8.4 3-141
P4652B-106 KNS 81 2 DATA 3.8.4 3-141
P4652B-93 KNS 81 2 RETURN 3.8.4 3-141
P4652B-105 KNS 81 2 SYNC 3.8.4 3-141

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149

Pin
Designator
P4651A-47* LATERAL DEVIATION +LEFT 3-150, 3-151,
3-152, 3-153,
3-154A, 3-154B
P4651A-33* LATERAL DEVIATION +RIGHT 3-150, 3-151,

3-152, 3-153,
3-154A, 3-154B

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4652B-80* LIGHTNING RECEIVER A 3.13 3-159
P4652B-67* LIGHTNING RECEIVER B 3.13 3-159
P4652A-67 LNAV 1 RECEIVER A 3.9.4.B 3-142, 3-142A
P4652A-53 LNAV 1 RECEIVER B 3.9.4.B 3-142, 3-142A
P4652A-17 LNAV SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4652B-47 LNAV TRANSMITTER A 3.9.4.A 3-142, 3-142A
P4652B-20 LNAV TRANSMITTER B 3.9.4.A 3-142, 3-142A

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164

Pin
Designator
3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4652A-71 MAGNETIC/ TRUE 1 3.3.4.D 3-116, 3-119
P4652B-3 MAGNETIC/ TRUE 2 3.3.4.D 3-116, 3-119
P4652A-52* MARKER BEACON INNER 3.4.4.I 3-125
P4652A-39* MARKER BEACON MIDDLE 3.4.4.I 3-125
P4652A-38* MARKER BEACON OUTER 3.4.4.I 3-125
P4652A-51* MARKER BEACON RETURN 3.4.4.I 3-125
P4651A-75* MEMORY +FLAG 3.15.4.A.1
P4651A-62* MEMORY -FLAG 3.15.4.A.1
P4652B-73 MFD SLAVED 1/2 3.2.4.M 3-13, 3-19, 3-25,

3-31, 3-40, 3-49,
3-58, 3-69, 3-80,
3-91, 3-102, 3-113
P4651B-81 MFD/ HSI 3.2.4.M 3-19, 3-25, 3-31,

3-40, 3-49, 3-58,
3-69, 3-80, 3-91,
3-102, 3-113
P4652A-41 MLS 1 RECEIVER A 3.6.4 3-137
P4652A-14 MLS 1 RECEIVER B 3.6.4 3-137
P4652B-36 MLS 2 RECEIVER A 3.6.4 3-137
P4652B-50 MLS 2 RECEIVER B 3.6.4 3-137
P4652B-75 MLS SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J 3-132, 3-147,

3-147A, 3-148,
3-148A, 3-149,
3-150, 3-151,
3-152, 3-153,
3-154A, 3-154B
P4652A-12 MODE CHANGE OUT 3.12.4.L 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4651A-60 NAV 1 OBI COS H 3.4.4.B 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164

Pin
Designator
P4651A-73 NAV 1 OBI SIN H 3.4.4.B 3-122, 3-123,
3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4652A-16 NAV 1 RECEIVER A 3.4.4.H 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4652A-29 NAV 1 RECEIVER B 3.4.4.H 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4651B-33 NAV 2 OBI COS H 3.4.4.B 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4651B-46 NAV 2 OBI SIN HI 3.4.4.B 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4652A-19 NAV SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J 3-127, 3-128,

3-130, 3-132,
3-147, 3-147A,
3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B

Pin
Designator
P4651A-75* NAV/LOC 1 +FLAG 3.4.4.C 3-122, 3-123,
3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4651A-62* NAV/LOC 1 -FLAG 3.4.4.C 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-162, 3-164
P4651B-48* NAV/LOC 2 +FLAG 3.4.4.C 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4651B-21* NAV/LOC 2 -FLAG 3.4.4.C 3-122, 3-123,

3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141,
3-163, 3-164
P4651A-1 NOT USED
P4651A-13 NOT USED
P4651A-14 NOT USED
P4651A-26 NOT USED
P4651A-27 NOT USED
P4651A-40 NOT USED
P4651A-41 NOT USED
P4651A-53 NOT USED
P4651A-54 NOT USED
P4651A-67 NOT USED
P4651A-68 NOT USED
P4651A-80 NOT USED
P4651A-81 NOT USED
P4651A-94 NOT USED
P4651A-95 NOT USED
P4651B-15 NOT USED
P4651B-28 NOT USED
P4651B-30 NOT USED
P4651B-31 NOT USED
P4651B-43 NOT USED
P4651B-55 NOT USED

Pin
Designator
P4651B-56 NOT USED
P4651B-57 NOT USED
P4651B-58 NOT USED
P4651B-69 NOT USED
P4651B-70 NOT USED
P4651B-85 NOT USED
P4652A-37 NOT USED
P4652A-46 NOT USED
P4652A-47 NOT USED
P4652A-48 NOT USED
P4652A-49 NOT USED
P4652A-57 NOT USED
P4652A-59 NOT USED
P4652A-60 NOT USED
P4652A-61 NOT USED
P4652A-62 NOT USED
P4652A-63 NOT USED
P4652A-72 NOT USED
P4652A-73 NOT USED
P4652A-74 NOT USED
P4652A-75 NOT USED
P4652A-76 NOT USED
P4652A-84 NOT USED
P4652A-87 NOT USED
P4652A-88 NOT USED
P4652A-89 NOT USED
P4652A-100 NOT USED
P4652B-2 NOT USED
P4652B-5 NOT USED
P4652B-11 NOT USED
P4652B-12 NOT USED
P4652B-15 NOT USED

Pin
Designator
P4652B-28 NOT USED
P4652B-29 NOT USED
P4652B-31 NOT USED
P4652B-33 NOT USED
P4652B-46 NOT USED
P4652B-51 NOT USED
P4652B-69 NOT USED
P4652B-82 NOT USED
P4651A-3 PITCH 1 X 3.3.4.F 3-117, 3-119
P4651A-4 PITCH 1 Y 3.3.4.F 3-117, 3-119
P4651A-2 PITCH 1 Z 3.3.4.F 3-117, 3-119
P4651B-36* PITCH 2 X 3.3.4.F 3-117, 3-119
P4651B-50* PITCH 2 Y 3.3.4.F 3-117, 3-119
P4651B-23* PITCH 2 Z 3.3.4.F 3-117, 3-119
P4651A-45 PITCH COMMAND +DOWN 3.12.4.N 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154,
3-154A, 3-154B
P4651A-18 PITCH COMMAND +UP 3.12.4.N 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154,
3-154A, 3-154B
P4652A-85* PITCH OFFSET SYNC - ADI 3.12.4.T 3-154A, 3-154B
P4651A-49* PITCH OFFSET SYNC HSI 3.12.4.T 3-154A, 3-154B
P4651B-62* POS X DEV +AFT 3.15.4.B.3
P4651B-76* POS X DEV +FWD 3.15.4.B.3
P4651B-61* POS Y DEV +L 3.15.4.B.2
P4651B-75* POS Y DEV +R 3.15.4.B.2

Pin
Designator
P4652B-22* R/T RECEIVER A 3.13 3-155, 3-156,
3-157, 3-158,
3-160A, 3-160B,
3-160C, 3-160D
P4652B-49* R/T RECEIVER B 3.13 3-155, 3-156,

3-157, 3-158,
3-160A, 3-160B,
3-160C, 3-160D
P4652B-68* R/T TRANSMITTER 429 A OUT 3-160E
P4652B-81* R/T TRANSMITTER 429 B OUT 3-160E
P4652B-68* R/T TRANSMITTER A 3.13 3-155, 3-156,

3-157, 3-158,
3-160A, 3-160B,
3-160C, 3-160D
P4652B-81* R/T TRANSMITTER B 3.13 3-155, 3-156,

3-157, 3-158,
3-160A, 3-160B,
3-160C, 3-160D
P4652B-9* RADAR CONTROL RECEIVER A 3.13 3-155, 3-156,

3-157, 3-158,
3-160A, 3-160B,
3-160C, 3-160D
P4652B-35* RADAR CONTROL RECEIVER B 3.13 3-155, 3-156,

3-157, 3-158,
3-160A, 3-160B,
3-160C, 3-160D
P4651B-86* RATE OF TURN +LEFT 3.3.4.K 3-121
P4651B-72* RATE OF TURN +RIGHT 3.3.4.K 3-121
P4651B-100* RATE OF TURN SUPERFLAG 3.3.4.L 3-121
P4651A-74 REFERENCE 1 C 3.3.4.A, 3-116, 3-117,

3.4.4.A, 3-122, 3-123,
3.7.4.A 3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-138,
3-139, 3-140,
3-141, 3-162,
3-164

Pin
Designator
P4651A-101 REFERENCE 1 H 3.3.4.A, 3-116, 3-117,
3.4.4.A, 3-122, 3-123,
3.7.4.A 3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-138,
3-139, 3-140,
3-141, 3-162,
3-164
P4651B-47 REFERENCE 2 C 3.3.4.A, 3-116, 3-117,

3.4.4.A, 3-122, 3-123,
3.7.4.A 3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-138,
3-139, 3-140,
3-141, 3-163,
3-164
P4651B-20 REFERENCE 2 H 3.3.4.A, 3-116, 3-117,

3.4.4.A, 3-122, 3-123,
3.7.4.A 3-124, 3-135,
3-136, 3-138,
3-139, 3-140,
3-141, 3-163,
3-164
P4652B-74 RNAV SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J 3-127, 3-128,

3-141, 3-147,
3-147A, 3-148,
3-148A, 3-149,
3-150, 3-151,
3-152, 3-153,
3-154A, 3-154B
P4651A-17 ROLL 1 X 3.3.4.G 3-117, 3-119
P4651A-5 ROLL 1 Y 3.3.4.G 3-117, 3-119
P4651A-30 ROLL 1 Z 3.3.4.G 3-117, 3-119
P4651B-87* ROLL 2 X 3.3.4.G 3-117, 3-119
P4651B-101* ROLL 2 Y 3.3.4.G 3-117, 3-119
P4651B-60* ROLL 2 Z 3.3.4.G 3-117, 3-119
P4651A-98 ROLL COMMAND +LEFT 3.12.4.O 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154,
3-154A, 3-154B
P4651A-71 ROLL COMMAND +RIGHT 3.12.4.O 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154,
3-154A, 3-154B

Pin
Designator
P4651A-61* SENS 1 +FLAG 3.15.4.C.1
P4651A-46* SENS 1 DEV +DN 3.15.4.C.3
P4651A-32* SENS 1 DEV +UP 3.15.4.C.3
P4651A-88* SENS 1 -FLAG 3.15.4.C.1
P4651B-49* SENS 2 +FLAG 3.15.4.C.1
P4651B-62* SENS 2 DEV +DN 3.15.4.C.3
P4651B-76* SENS 2 DEV +UP 3.15.4.C.3
P4651B-22* SENS 2 -FLAG 3.15.4.C.1
P4652A-64 SG TO CONFIG CLOCK 3.2.4.Q 3-7
P4652A-91 SG TO CONFIG DATA 3.2.4.Q 3-7
P4651A-7 SPARE
P4651A-8 SPARE
P4651B-3* SPARE

Pin
Designator
P4651B-4* SPARE
P4651B-5* SPARE
P4651B-9* SPARE
P4651B-10* SPARE
P4651B-16* SPARE
P4651B-29* SPARE
P4651B-42* SPARE
P4651B-77 SPARE
P4651B-82 SPARE
P4651B-83 SPARE
P4651B-84 SPARE
P4651B-94 SPARE
P4651B-95 SPARE
P4651B-96 SPARE
P4651B-97 SPARE
P4652A-5 SPARE
P4652A-10 SPARE
P4652A-23 SPARE
P4652A-25 SPARE
P4652A-56 SPARE
P4652A-70 SPARE
P4652A-97 SPARE
P4652A-98 SPARE
P4652A-99 SPARE
P4652B-1 SPARE
P4652B-26 SPARE
P4652B-27 SPARE
P4652B-40 SPARE
P4652B-41 SPARE
P4652B-42 SPARE
P4652B-53 SPARE
P4652B-54 SPARE

Pin
Designator
P4652B-56 SPARE
P4652B-83 SPARE
P4652B-96 SPARE
P4652B-23 SPARE 2 RECEIVER A
P4652B-10 SPARE 2 RECEIVER B
P4651A-58 SPEED POINTER +FAST 3.10.4.A 3-143, 3-144
P4651A-99 SPEED POINTER +SLOW 3.10.4.A 3-143, 3-144
P4651A-85 SPEED POINTER SUPERFLAG 3.10.4.B 3-143, 3-144
P4652B-43 STANDBY 3.2.4.M 3-13, 3-19, 3-25,

3-31, 3-40, 3-49,
3-58, 3-69, 3-80,
3-91, 3-102, 3-113
P4652B-94 SWITCH RETURN 3.2.4.M 3-13, 3-19, 3-25,

3-31, 3-40, 3-49,
3-58, 3-69, 3-80,
3-91, 3-102, 3-113
P4652A-34 TACAN 1 ENERGIZE IN 3.5.4.E 3-126, 3-127,

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141

3-128, 3-129,
3-130, 3-131,
3-132, 3-133,
3-134, 3-135,
3-136, 3-141
P4652B-61 TACAN SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J
P4651A-36* TCAS SELECT 3.14.4.C 3-161
P4652A-11 TCAS VALID 3.14.4.B 3-161
P4651B-37* TERRAIN POP-UP DISCRETE IN 3.13 3-160E
P4651A-22* TERRAIN SELECTED DISCRETE IN 3.13 3-160E
P4651B-48* THRUST +FLAG 3.15.4.B.1

Pin
Designator
P4651B-21* THRUST -FLAG 3.15.4.B.1
P4651A-61* VEL +FLAG 3.15.4.A.1
P4651A-88* VEL -FLAG 3.15.4.A.1
P4651A-46* VEL X DEV +AFT 3.15.4.A.3
P4651A-32* VEL X DEV +FWD 3.15.4.A.3
P4651A-35* VEL Y DEV +L 3.15.4.A.2
P4651A-21* VEL Y DEV +R 3.15.4.A.2

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4651A-65 VERTICAL GYRO 1 SUPERFLAG 3.3.4.H 3-117, 3-119
P4651B-73* VERTICAL GYRO 2 SUPERFLAG 3.3.4.H 3-117, 3-119
P4652B-87* VG CROSS-SIDE 3.3.4.I 3-117, 3-118,

3-119, 3-120
P4651A-37 VNAV DEVIATION +DOWN 3-142, 3-142A
P4651A-38 VNAV DEVIATION +UP 3-142, 3-142A
P4651A-49* VNAV ENGAGE 3-142, 3-142A
P4651A-36* VNAV IN VIEW 3-142, 3-142A
P4651A-9 VNAV SELECT OUT 3.12.4.J 3-147, 3-147A,

3-148, 3-148A,
3-149, 3-150,
3-151, 3-152,
3-153, 3-154A,
3-154B
P4651A-22* VNAV SUPERFLAG 3-142, 3-142A

Pin
Designator
P4652A-68 XTALK RECEIVER A 3.2.4.L 3-13, 3-19, 3-25,
3-31, 3-40, 3-49,
3-58, 3-69, 3-80,
3-91, 3-102, 3-113
P4652A-81 XTALK RECEIVER B 3.2.4.L 3-13, 3-19, 3-25,

3-31, 3-40, 3-49,
3-58, 3-69, 3-80,
3-91, 3-102, 3-113
P4652B-48 XTALK TRANSMITTER A 3.2.4.L 3-13, 3-19, 3-25,

3-31, 3-40, 3-49,
3-58, 3-69, 3-80,
3-91, 3-102, 3-113
P4652B-21 XTALK TRANSMITTER B 3.2.4.L 3-13, 3-19,

3-25, 3-31,
3-40, 3-49,
3-58, 3-69,
3-80, 3-91,
3-102, 3-113
3.18.2.11 CP 467 - Line Name Index
TABLE 3-54 CP 467 - Line Name Index
Pin
Designator
P4671-17 +7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.F 3-3, 3-4, 3-36,

3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109
P4671-33 +7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.F 3-3
P4671-10 COURSE 1 3.2.4.I 3-3, 3-4, 3-36,

3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109
P4671-15 COURSE 1 IN 3.2.4.I 3-3

Pin
Designator
P4671-12 COURSE 2 3.2.4.I 3-3, 3-4, 3-36,
3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109
P4671-31 COURSE 2 IN 3.2.4.I 3-3

3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109
P4671-36 DECISION HEIGHT ON IN 3.2.4.J 3-3

3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109

3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109
P4671-26* EXTERNAL 3.2.4.K 3-3, 3-4
P4671-20* EXTERNAL HEADING SYNC 3.2.4.H 3-3, 3-4
P4671-23 HEADING 1 3.2.4.H 3-3, 3-4, 3-36,

3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109
P4671-49 HEADING 1 IN 3.2.4.H 3-3
P4671-8 HEADING 2 3.2.4.H 3-3, 3-4, 3-36,

3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109
P4671-32 HEADING 2 IN 3.2.4.H 3-3
P4671-37* LIGHTING +28 VDC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4671-38* LIGHTING +5 VDC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4671-18* LIGHTING 5 VAC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4671-34 LIGHTING LO 3.2.4.O 3-6

Pin
Designator
P4671-7 MODE 1 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-4, 3-36,
3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109, 3-161
P4671-11 MODE 1 IN 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-161
P4671-5 MODE 2 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-4, 3-36,

3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109, 3-161
P4671-47 MODE 2 IN 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-161
P4671-22 MODE 3 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-4, 3-36,

3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109, 3-161
P4671-16 MODE 3 IN 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-161
P4671-6 MODE 4 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-4, 3-36,

3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3-109, 3-161
P4671-50 MODE 4 IN 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-161
P4671-25 NOT USED
P4671-28 NOT USED
P4671-35 NOT USED
P4671-40 NOT USED
P4671-41 NOT USED
P4671-42 NOT USED
P4671-48 NOT USED
P4671-24 RADIO ALTIMETER TEST 3.11.4.F 3-145, 3-146
P4671-9 RADIO ALTIMETER TEST RETURN 3.11.4.F 3-145, 3-146
P4671-44 RETURN 3.2.4.F, 3-3, 3-4, 3-36,

3.2.4.G, 3-45, 3-54, 3-65,
3.2.4.H, 3-76, 3-87, 3-98,
3.2.4.K 3-109
P4671-45 RETURN 3.2.4.F, 3-3, 3-161

3.2.4.G
P4671-27* TANDEM 3.2.4.K 3-3, 3-4

Pin
Designator
P4681-17 +7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.F 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,

3-27
P4681-33 +7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.F 3-3
P4681-10 COURSE 1 3.2.4.I 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,

3-27
P4681-15 COURSE 1 IN 3.2.4.I 3-3
P4681-12 COURSE 2 3.2.4.I 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,

3-27
P4681-31 COURSE 2 IN 3.2.4.I 3-3
P4681-26* EXTERNAL 3.2.4.K 3-3, 3-4
P4681-20 EXTERNAL HEADING SYNC 3.2.4.H 3-3, 3-4
P4681-23 HEADING 1 3.2.4.H 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,

3-27
P4681-49 HEADING 1 IN 3.2.4.H 3-3
P4681-8 HEADING 2 3.2.4.H 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,

3-27
P4681-32 HEADING 2 IN 3.2.4.H 3-3
P4681-37* LIGHTING +28 VDC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4681-38* LIGHTING +5 VDC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4681-18* LIGHTING 5 VAC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4681-34 LIGHTING LO 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4681-7 MODE 1 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,

3-27, 3-161
P4681-11 MODE 1 IN 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-161

Pin
Designator
P4681-5 MODE 2 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,
3-27, 3-161
P4681-47 MODE 2 IN 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-161
P4681-22 MODE 3 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,

3-27, 3-161
P4681-16 MODE 3 IN 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-161
P4681-6 MODE 4 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,

3-27, 3-161
P4681-50 MODE 4 IN 3.2.4.G 3-3, 3-161
P4681-9 NOT USED
P4681-13 NOT USED
P4681-14 NOT USED
P4681-19 NOT USED
P4681-24 NOT USED
P4681-25 NOT USED
P4681-28 NOT USED
P4681-29 NOT USED
P4681-30 NOT USED
P4681-35 NOT USED
P4681-36 NOT USED
P4681-40 NOT USED
P4681-41 NOT USED
P4681-42 NOT USED
P4681-48 NOT USED
P4681-44 RETURN 3.2.4.F, 3-3, 3-4, 3-9, 3-15,

3.2.4.G, 3-27
3.2.4.H,
3.2.4.K
P4681-45 RETURN 3.2.4.F, 3-3, 3-161

3.2.4.G
P4681-27* TANDEM 3.2.4.K 3-3, 3-4

Pin
Designator
P4691-21 +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4691-17 +7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.F 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P4691-33 +7 VDC POWER 3.2.4.F 3-4
P4691-43 AIRCRAFT GROUND 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4691-10 COURSE 1 3.2.4.I 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P4691-15 COURSE 1 IN 3.2.4.I 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P4691-12 COURSE 2 3.2.4.I 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P4691-31 COURSE 2 IN 3.2.4.I 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109

3-98, 3-109
P4691-36 DECISION HEIGHT ON IN 3.2.4.J 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109

3-98, 3-109

3-98, 3-109

3-98, 3-109

3-98, 3-109
P4691-26 EXTERNAL 3.2.4.K 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P4691-20 EXTERNAL HEADING SYNC 3.2.4.H 3-4
P4691-23 HEADING 1 3.2.4.H 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P4691-49 HEADING 1 IN 3.2.4.H 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P4691-8 HEADING 2 3.2.4.H 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P4691-32 HEADING 2 IN 3.2.4.H 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109

Pin
Designator
P4691-4 HSI/ MFD BRIGHTNESS 3.2.4.P 3-6
P4691-2 HSI/ MFD BRIGHTNESS RETURN 3.2.4.P 3-6
P4691-37 LIGHTING +28 VDC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4691-38 LIGHTING +5 VDC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4691-18 LIGHTING 5 VAC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4691-34 LIGHTING LO 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4691-7 MODE 1 3.2.4.G 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109, 3-161
P4691-11 MODE 1 IN 3.2.4.G 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109, 3-161
P4691-5 MODE 2 3.2.4.G 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109, 3-161
P4691-47 MODE 2 IN 3.2.4.G 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109, 3-161
P4691-22 MODE 3 3.2.4.G 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109, 3-161
P4691-16 MODE 3 IN 3.2.4.G 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109, 3-161
P4691-6 MODE 4 3.2.4.G 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109, 3-161
P4691-50 MODE 4 IN 3.2.4.G 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109, 3-161
P4691-1 NOT USED
P4691-3 NOT USED
P4691-9 NOT USED
P4691-24 NOT USED
P4691-25 NOT USED
P4691-28 NOT USED
P4691-35 NOT USED
P4691-40 NOT USED
P4691-41 NOT USED
P4691-42 NOT USED
P4691-48 NOT USED

Pin
Designator
P4691-44 RETURN 3.2.4.F, 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,
3.2.4.G, 3-98, 3-109
3.2.4.K
P4691-45 RETURN 3.2.4.F, 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3.2.4.G 3-98, 3-109, 3-161
P4691-27 TANDEM 3.2.4.K 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
3.18.2.14 CP 469A - Line Name Index
Pin
Designator
3.2.4.O,
3.16.4.E

3.2.4.O,
3.16.4.E
P469A1-42 AIRCRAFT GROUND 3.2.4.F 3-165
P469A1-43 AIRCRAFT GROUND 3.16.4.E 3-165
P469A1-10 COURSE 1 3.2.4.I 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-15 COURSE 1 IN 3.2.4.I 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-12 COURSE 2 3.2.4.I 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-31 COURSE 2 IN 3.2.4.I 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-19 DECISION HEIGHT ON 3.2.4.J 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-36 DECISION HEIGHT ON IN 3.2.4.J 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109

Pin
Designator
3-98, 3-109

3-98, 3-109

3-98, 3-109

3-98, 3-109
P469A2-8 EFS ARINC 429 RECEIVER A 3.13 3-160
P469A2-9 EFS ARINC 429 RECEIVER B 3.13 3-160
P469A2-10 EFS ARINC 429 TRANSMITTER A 3.13 3-160
P469A2-25 EFS ARINC 429 TRANSMITTER B 3.13 3-160
P469A2-1 EMERGENCY 1 3.13 3-160
P469A2-2 EMERGENCY 2 3.13 3-160
P469A2-3 EMERGENCY 3 3.13 3-160
P469A2-18 EMERGENCY 4 3.13 3-160
P469A2-19 EMERGENCY 5 3.13 3-160
P469A2-20 EMERGENCY 6 3.13 3-160
P469A2-34 EMERGENCY 7 3.13 3-160
P469A2-35 EMERGENCY 8 3.13 3-160
P469A1-26 EXTERNAL 3.2.4.K 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A2-22 EXTERNAL DOWN 3.13 3-160
P469A1-48 EXTERNAL ENTER 3.2.4.N 3-5
P469A1-20 EXTERNAL HEADING SYNC 3.2.4.H 3-4
P469A2-21 EXTERNAL JOYSTICK DOWN 3.2.4.N 3-5

Pin
Designator
P469A2-36 EXTERNAL JOYSTICK LEFT 3.2.4.N 3-5
P469A2-4 EXTERNAL JOYSTICK RETURN 3.2.4.N 3-5
P469A2-37 EXTERNAL JOYSTICK RIGHT 3.2.4.N 3-5
P469A2-39 EXTERNAL JOYSTICK UP 3.2.4.N 3-5
P469A1-41 EXTERNAL TCAS 3.14.4.D 3-161
P469A2-5 EXTERNAL UP 3.13 3-160
P469A1-23 HEADING 1 3.2.4.H 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-49 HEADING 1 IN 3.2.4.H 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-8 HEADING 2 3.2.4.H 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-32 HEADING 2 IN 3.2.4.H 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-1 HSI/ MFD BRIGHTNESS 3.2.4.P 3-6
P469A1-25 HSI/ MFD BRIGHTNESS RETURN 3.2.4.P 3-6
P469A1-35 JOYSTICK DOWN 3.2.4.N 3-5
P469A1-40 JOYSTICK ENTER 3.2.4.N 3-5
P469A1-28 JOYSTICK LEFT 3.2.4.N 3-5
P469A1-17 JOYSTICK RIGHT 3.2.4.N 3-5
P469A1-33 JOYSTICK UP 3.2.4.N 3-5
P469A1-44 JOYSTICK/SWITCH RETURN 3.2.4.G, 3-5

3.2.4.N
P469A1-37 LIGHTING +28 VDC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P469A1-38 LIGHTING +5 VDC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P469A1-18 LIGHTING 5 VAC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P469A1-34 LIGHTING LO 3.2.4.O 3-6
P469A1-7 MODE 1 3.2.4.G 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-11 MODE 1 IN 3.2.4.G 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109

Pin
Designator
P469A1-5 MODE 2 3.2.4.G 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,
3-98, 3-109
P469A1-47 MODE 2 IN 3.2.4.G 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-22 MODE 3 3.2.4.G 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-16 MODE 3 IN 3.2.4.G 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-6 MODE 4 3.2.4.G 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-50 MODE 4 IN 3.2.4.G 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A1-9 NOT USED
P469A1-21 NOT USED
P469A1-24 NOT USED
P469A1-39 NOT USED
P469A2-45 NOT USED
P469A2-46 NOT USED
P469A1-45 RETURN 3.2.4.G, 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3.2.4.H 3-98, 3-109, 3-161
P469A1-46 RETURN 3.2.4.K 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
P469A2-16 RS 232 RECEIVER 3.13
P469A2-33 RS 232 RETURN 3.13
P469A2-17 RS 232 TRANSMITTER 3.13

Pin
Designator
P469A1-27 TANDEM 3.2.4.K 3-4, 3-54, 3-65,

3-98, 3-109
Pin
Designator
P4701-1 DECISION HEIGHT ON 3.2.4.J 3-3, 3-4, 3-36
P4701-14* LIGHTING +28 VDC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4701-15* LIGHTING +5 VDC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4701-15* LIGHTING 5 VAC 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4701-13 LIGHTING LO 3.2.4.O 3-6
P4701-8 NOT USED
P4701-2 RETURN 3-3, 3-4, 3-36

Pin
Designator
P5511-S +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER BUS 1 3.16.4.D 3-16, 3-28, 3-42,
3-46, 3-62, 3-66,
3-84, 3-88, 3-106,
3-110, 3-165
P5511-T +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER BUS 1 3.16.4.D 3-16, 3-28, 3-42,
3-46, 3-62, 3-66,
3-84, 3-88, 3-106,
3-110, 3-165
P5511-M +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER BUS 2 3.16.4.D 3-16, 3-28, 3-42,
3-46, 3-62, 3-66,
3-84, 3-88, 3-106,
3-110, 3-165
P5511-N +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER BUS 2 3.16.4.D 3-16, 3-28, 3-42,
3-46, 3-62, 3-66,
3-84, 3-88, 3-106,
3-110, 3-165
P5511-A AIRCRAFT POWER GROUND 3.16.4.D 3-16, 3-28, 3-42,

3-46, 3-62, 3-66,
3-84, 3-88, 3-106,
3-110, 3-165
P5511-B AIRCRAFT POWER GROUND 3.16.4.D 3-16, 3-28, 3-42,

3-46, 3-62, 3-66,
3-84, 3-88, 3-106,
3-110, 3-165
P5511-G BRIGHTNESS 3.2.4.P 3-6
P5511-H BRIGHTNESS RETURN 3.2.4.P 3-6
P5511-C DISPLAY DOWN 3.2.4.M 3-19, 3-31, 3-49,

3-69, 3-91, 3-113
P5511-F DISPLAY DOWN RETURN 3.2.4.M 3-49, 3-69, 3-91,

3-113
P5511-J DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3.2.4.E 3-17, 3-29, 3-43,

3-47, 3-63, 3-67,
3-85, 3-89, 3-107,
3-111
P5511-E* LIGHTING 28 VOLTS 3.2.4.O 3-6
P5511-D* LIGHTING 5 VOLTS 3.2.4.O 3-6
P5511-C LIGHTING LO 3.2.4.O 3-6

Pin
Designator
P5511-A MODE HI 3.2.4.D 3-18, 3-30, 3-44,
3-48, 3-64, 3-68,
3-86, 3-90, 3-108,
3-112
P5511-B MODE LO 3.2.4.D 3-18, 3-30, 3-44,

3-48, 3-64, 3-68,
3-86, 3-90, 3-108,
3-112
P5511-F SHIELD GROUND 3.16.4.H
P5511-G SHIELD GROUND 3.16.4.H
P5511-H SPARE
P5511-J SPARE
P5511-K SPARE
P5511-L SPARE
P5511-W VIDEO BLUE HI 3.2.4.B 3-17, 3-29, 3-43,

3-47, 3-63, 3-67,
3-85, 3-89, 3-107,
3-111
P5511-X VIDEO BLUE LO 3.2.4.B 3-17, 3-29, 3-43,

3-47, 3-63, 3-67,
3-85, 3-89, 3-107,
3-111
P5511-Y VIDEO GREEN HI 3.2.4.B 3-17, 3-29, 3-43,

3-47, 3-63, 3-67,
3-85, 3-89, 3-107,
3-111
P5511-Z VIDEO GREEN LO 3.2.4.B 3-17, 3-29, 3-43,

3-47, 3-63, 3-67,
3-85, 3-89, 3-107,
3-111
P5511-U VIDEO RED HI 3.2.4.B 3-17, 3-29, 3-43,

3-47, 3-63, 3-67,
3-85, 3-89, 3-107,
3-111
P5511-V VIDEO RED LO 3.2.4.B 3-17, 3-29, 3-43,

3-47, 3-63, 3-67,
3-85, 3-89, 3-107,
3-111
P5511-R X DEFLECTION Hl 3.2.4.C 3-18, 3-30, 3-44,

3-48, 3-64, 3-68,
3-86, 3-90, 3-108,
3-112

Pin
Designator
P5511-P X DEFLECTION LO 3.2.4.C 3-18, 3-30, 3-44,
3-48, 3-64, 3-68,
3-86, 3-90, 3-108,
3-112
P5511-E Y DEFLECTION HI 3.2.4.C 3-18, 3-30, 3-44,

3-48, 3-64, 3-68,
3-86, 3-90, 3-108,
3-112
P5511-D Y DEFLECTION LO 3.2.4.C 3-18, 3-30, 3-44,

3-48, 3-64, 3-68,
3-86, 3-90, 3-108,
3-112
3.18.2.17 ED 551A - Line Name Index
TABLE 3-60 ED 551A - Line Name Index
Pin
Designator
P551A1-S +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER BUS 1 3.16.4.D 3-16, 3-28, 3-42,
3-46, 3-62, 3-66,
3-84, 3-88, 3-106,
3-110, 3-165
P551A1-T +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER BUS 1 3.16.4.D 3-16, 3-28, 3-42,
3-46, 3-62, 3-66,
3-84, 3-88, 3-106,
3-110, 3-165
P551A1-M +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER BUS 2 3.16.4.D 3-16, 3-28, 3-42,
3-46, 3-62, 3-66,
3-84, 3-88, 3-106,
3-110, 3-165
P551A1-N +27.5 VDC AIRCRAFT POWER BUS 2 3.16.4.D 3-16, 3-28, 3-42,
3-46, 3-62, 3-66,
3-84, 3-88, 3-106,
3-110, 3-165
P551A1-A AIRCRAFT POWER GROUND 3.16.4.D 3-16, 3-28, 3-42,

3-46, 3-62, 3-66,
3-84, 3-88, 3-106,
3-110, 3-165

Pin
Designator
P551A1-B AIRCRAFT POWER GROUND 3.16.4.D 3-16, 3-28, 3-42,
3-46, 3-62, 3-66,
3-84, 3-88, 3-106,
3-110, 3-165
P551A1-G BRIGHTNESS 3.2.4.P 3-6
P551A1-H BRIGHTNESS RETURN 3.2.4.P 3-6
P551A1-C DISPLAY DOWN 3.2.4.M 3-19, 3-31, 3-49,

3-69, 3-91, 3-113
P551A1-F DISPLAY DOWN RETURN 3.2.4.M 3-49, 3-69, 3-91,

3-113
P551A1-J DISPLAY UNIT FAULT 3.2.4.E 3-17, 3-29, 3-43,

3-47, 3-63, 3-67,
3-85, 3-89, 3-107,
3-111
P551A1-E* LIGHTING 28 VOLTS 3.2.4.O 3-6
P551A1-D* LIGHTING 5 VOLTS 3.2.4.O 3-6
P551A1-C LIGHTING LO 3.2.4.O 3-6
P551A1-A MODE HI 3.2.4.D 3-18, 3-30, 3-44,

3-48, 3-64, 3-68,
3-86, 3-90, 3-108,
3-112
P551A1-B MODE LO 3.2.4.D 3-18, 3-30, 3-44,

3-48, 3-64, 3-68,
3-86, 3-90, 3-108,
3-112
P551A1-F SHIELD GROUND 3.16.4.H
P551A1-G SHIELD GROUND 3.16.4.H
P551A1-H SPARE
P551A1-J SPARE
P551A1-K SPARE
P551A1-L SPARE
P551A1-W VIDEO BLUE HI 3.2.4.B 3-17, 3-29, 3-43,

3-47, 3-63, 3-67,
3-85, 3-89, 3-107,
3-111
P551A1-X VIDEO BLUE LO 3.2.4.B 3-17, 3-29, 3-43,

3-47, 3-63, 3-67,
3-85, 3-89, 3-107,
3-111

Pin
Designator
P551A1-Y VIDEO GREEN HI 3.2.4.B 3-17, 3-29, 3-43,
3-47, 3-63, 3-67,
3-85, 3-89, 3-107,
3-111
P551A1-Z VIDEO GREEN LO 3.2.4.B 3-17, 3-29, 3-43,

3-47, 3-63, 3-67,
3-85, 3-89, 3-107,
3-111
P551A1-U VIDEO RED HI 3.2.4.B 3-17, 3-29, 3-43,

3-47, 3-63, 3-67,
3-85, 3-89, 3-107,
3-111
P551A1-V VIDEO RED LO 3.2.4.B 3-17, 3-29, 3-43,

3-47, 3-63, 3-67,
3-85, 3-89, 3-107,
3-111
P551A1-R X DEFLECTION Hl 3.2.4.C 3-18, 3-30, 3-44,

3-48, 3-64, 3-68,
3-86, 3-90, 3-108,
3-112
P551A1-P X DEFLECTION LO 3.2.4.C 3-18, 3-30, 3-44,

3-48, 3-64, 3-68,
3-86, 3-90, 3-108,
3-112
P551A1-E Y DEFLECTION HI 3.2.4.C 3-18, 3-30, 3-44,

3-48, 3-64, 3-68,
3-86, 3-90, 3-108,
3-112
P551A1-D Y DEFLECTION LO 3.2.4.C 3-18, 3-30, 3-44,

3-48, 3-64, 3-68,
3-86, 3-90, 3-108,
3-112

THIS PAGE RESERVED

EFS 40/EFS 50
SECTION IV
POST INSTALLATION CHECKS
4.0 POST INSTALLATION CHECKOUT
The Post Installation Checkout consists of configuration sections for software revisions: 02, 03,
04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 50, and 55; a post installation KA 163A check
section; a ground checkout section; and a flight check section. Each configuration section is ded-
icated to a particular software revision of the EFS 40/EFS 50 system. The system must be pow-
ered up and the procedures in the appropriate configuration section completed before ground and
flight checks are attempted. The procedures in the configuration section programs the system to
work with the companion systems installed in the aircraft that interface with EFS 40/EFS 50. The
configuration must be done after the new installation is finished.
4.1 CONFIGURATION WITH -02 VERSION SOFTWARE
Since aircraft systems and installations will vary, a list of interfacing equipment and type of inter-
face should be made. This will ease the configuration process and help insure all interfaces will
be programmed correctly. For the general configuration process in this procedure, the following
example installation will be used:
NOTE
The step numbers correspond to the programming paragraphs on the following pages.
Software revisions have resulted in changes to the configuration menu. Configuration
menus are shown for all software releases in the field. The last two digits of the Symbol
Generator part number or a software level identifier tag on the Symbol Generator front
will identify the configuration menu used by your system. Use this configuration menu
or the menu that most closely resembles the one in your system. If a menu change is
attempted in a system that does not have the appropriate software level to support that
menu, the change will not be allowed.
1. INITIAL SET UP
2. DISPLAYING THE CONFIGURATION MENU PAGE
3. SYMBOL GENERATOR CONFIGURATION
4. DISPLAY CONFIGURATION
5. DU TYPE CONFIGURATION
6. ATTITUDE/HDG #1 CONFIGURATION
8. RATE OF TURN CONFIGURATION
9. ADF #1 CONFIGURATION
11. NAV #1 CONFIGURATION
12. NAV #2 CONFIGURATION
13. NUMBER OF DMES CONFIGURATION

14. DME #1 CONFIGURATION

16. MLS #1 CONFIGURATION
18. FMS/RNAV #1 CONFIGURATION
19. FMS/RNAV #2 CONFIGURATION
20. NUMBER OF TACANS CONFIGURATION
21. TACAN #1 CONFIGURATION
23. VNAV CONFIGURATION
24. RADAR ALTIMETER CONFIGURATION
25. FLIGHT CONTROL CONFIGURATION
26. AIR DATA CONFIGURATION
27. RADAR TYPE CONFIGURATION
28. RADAR CONTROL PANEL CONFIGURATION
29. RADAR INDICATOR CONFIGURATION
30. CHECKLIST CONFIGURATION
31. JOYSTICK CONFIGURATION
32. RADAR GRAPHICS CONFIGURATION
33. VERTICAL SCALE SIDE CONFIGURATION
34. DECLUTTER GLIDESLOPE ON BACKCOURSE CONFIGURATION
35. DECLUTTER DEVIATION ON FLAG CONFIGURATION
36. DISPLAY WIND VECTOR CONFIGURATION
37. DISPLAY DRIFT CONFIGURATION
38. DG MODE ONLY CONFIGURATION
39. DME DISTANCE ONLY CONFIGURATION
40. RADAR ONLY CONFIGURATION
41. HOVER MODE AVAILABLE CONFIGURATION
42. DISPLAY HEADING TAPE CONFIGURATION
43. COMMAND BARS CONFIGURATION
44. ROLL INDICATOR CONFIGURATION
45. DECISION HEIGHT WINDOW LOCATION CONFIGURATION
46. CATEGORY II AVAILABLE CONFIGURATION
47. EXITING CONFIGURATION
Not all of these modes or options will be applicable to all installations. All modes and interfaces
must be checked and set on the original configuration.
4.1.1 INITIAL SET UP
The following is the procedure for configuring the system,

4.1.1.A. Make sure all units are connected properly. Connect an auxiliary power unit (APU) to
the aircraft.
4.1.1.B. Turn aircraft power. avionics power and inverters on. Verify the display unit becomes
lighted within 30 seconds and all colors. red in particular, are displayed. The system
will do an automatic self test and will display a SELF TEST PASS message. A yellow
CHECK CONFIG message may appear indicating the system requires configuration
programming.
4.1.1.C. SG cooling is required and must be checked. If the ambient temperature is above 35°
C a Fan Flag will appear on the display if the cooling fan is not operating. At ambient
temperatures below 7° C cooling may not be requested and the fan flag may not ap-
pear. If the cooling fan is not operating due to malfunction or miswire it should be re-
paired before continuing.
4.1.1.D. DU cooling is also required. If the fan is not operating due to a failure or miswire a yel-
low DU Fail Annunciation will be displayed. The fan problem should be corrected be-
fore continuing.
4.1.2 DISPLAYING THE CONFIGURATION MENU PAGE
4.1.2.A. Press the TST button for three seconds. The EFS 40/EFS 50 TEST PAGE will be dis-
played.
FIGURE 4-1 EFS 40/EFS 50 Test Page
4.1.2.B. Press the HSI and ARC buttons simultaneously. The EFS 40/EFS 50 MAINTENANCE
COPYRIGHT PAGE will be displayed in green. Exact switch coordination may be re-
quired.
EFS40 MAINTENANCE
ALLIED-SIGNAL INC.

COPYRIGHT SEPT., 1988
IP 125-00801-0000
NP1 125-00602-0000
DP1 125-00803-0000
RP 125-00804-0000
4.1.2.C. Press the NEXT MENU button. The MAINT FUNCTIONS PAGE will be displayed. A
hand pointing to the first line will be displayed.
FIGURE 4-2 Menu and Item Buttons
EFIS MAINTENANCE FUNCTION PG 01

> LRU STATUS
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
TEST PATTERNS
RECORDED MISC. ERRORS
PROCESSOR ITEMS
BIT HISTORY STACK
WATCHDOG TIMER TEST
SUBSYSTEM MENU
4.1.2.D. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move the pointer down to the SYSTEM CONFIGURA-
TION position.
4.1.2.E. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the CONFIGURATION MENU as shown below.
CONFIGURATION MENU PG 00
> VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT CONFIG
VIEW/EDIT OPERATION CONFIG
COPY SG TO RACKS 1 & 2
COPY RACK 1 TO SG RACK 2
COPY RACK 2 TO SG RACK 1
RETURN TO MAINT MENUS

The first two items on this menu are used to set the configuration upon the original in-
stallation or change something in the original configuration due to a unit change or unit
operation. The three copy items may be used to copy configurations from racks to
Symbol Generators or vice versa when Loaner or Exchange units are installed. This
allows you to copy the complete configuration at one step. Rack refers to the memory
modules contained in the Symbol Generator mounting racks. There are two modules
in each mounting rack which are called Rack 1 and Rack 2.
NOTE
To change the configuration upon the “CHECK CONFIG” message, select the copy
mode appropriate by moving the hand to the appropriate item. Push Config Switch
through the Front of the Symbol Generator, then NEXT MENU. You Should get a Copy
Complete Message when the Operation is Complete. To change a single item in a
configuration page through the equipment or operating Menus until the item requiring
change is found. Enter that menu page and push the switch through the front of the
Symbol Generator. This will allow you to move the hand to the line you are changing
the configuration to. Push the Next Menu button to select the item you moved the hand
to. The configuration menu may then be exited.
4.1.3 SYMBOL GENERATOR CONFIGURATION
4.1.3.A. Press the NEXT MENU button to select VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE as shown be-
low.
VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PG 01
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #1 0 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
NAV #1 0 0 0
NAV #2 0 0 0
..MORE..
4.1.3.B. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter SG NUMBER menu as shown below.
4.1.3.C. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to desired option on menu below.
4.1.3.D. Press the NEXT MENU button to select the desired option.
SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0

> 0: #1 EFIS
1: #2 EFIS
2: #3 EFIS
4.1.4 DISPLAY CONFIGURATION
4.1.4.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to the VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 01.
4.1.4.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the SINGLE/DUAL menu.
4.1.4.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the SINGLE/DUAL menu.
4.1.4.D. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to desired option on menu below.
4.1.4.E. Press the NEXT MENU button to select the desired option.
SG RK1 RK2
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
0: SINGLE EHSI
> 1: DUAL EHSI
2: SINGLE EADI/EHSI
3: DUAL EADI/EHSI
4: SINGLE EADI/EHSI MFD
5: DUAL EADI/EHSI MFD
4.1.5 DU TYPE CONFIGURATION
4.1.5.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 01.
4.1.5.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DU TYPE menu.
4.1.5.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DU TYPE menu.
SG RK1 RK2
DU TYPE 0 0 0
> 0: ED 461
1: ED 462
2: ED 561
4.1.6 ATTITUDE/HDG #1 CONFIGURATION
4.1.6.A. Press PREV MENU button to return to VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 01.
4.1.6.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the ATTITUDE/HDG #1 menu.

4.1.6.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the ATTITUDE/HDG #1 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
0: NONE
> 1: XYZ
2: 429
SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NONE
1: XYZ
2: 429
4.1.8 RATE OF TURN CONFIGURATION
4.1.8.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the RATE OF TURN menu.
4.1.8.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the RATE OF TURN menu.
SG RK1 RK2
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: COL GYRO
2: KING GYRO
3: SPRY GYRO
4: 429

4.1.9 ADF #1 CONFIGURATION
4.1.9.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the ADF #1 menu.
4.1.9.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the ADF #1 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
ADF #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429
> 3: SYNCHRO
SG RK1 RK2
ADF #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429
3: SYNCHRO
4.1.11 NAV #1 CONFIGURATION
4.1.11.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the NAV #1 menu.
4.1.11.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the NAV #1 menu.
SG RK1 RK2

NAV #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4.1.12 NAV #2 CONFIGURATION
4.1.12.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the NAV #2 menu.
4.1.12.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the NAV #2 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
NAV #2 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4.1.13 NUMBER OF DMEs CONFIGURATION
4.1.13.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the MORE.
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
NAV #1 0 0 0
NAV #2 0 0 0
> .. MORE. .
4.1.13.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter NUMBER OF DMEs menu on VIEW/EDIT
EQUIPMENT PAGE 02.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> NUMBER OF DMES 0 0 0
DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS/RNAV #1 0 0 0
FMS/RNAV #2 0 0 0
NUMBER OF TCNS 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
..MORE..
SG RK1 RK2
NUMBER OF DMES 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: 1
2: 2 OR MORE
4.1.14 DME #1 CONFIGURATION
4.1.14.B. Press the-NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DME #1 menu.
4.1.14.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DME #1 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
3: NOT USED
> 4: 429 GOLD
5: 429 MULTICHANNEL

4.1.15 DME#2 CONFIGURATION
4.1.15.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 02
4.1.15.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DME #2 menu.
4.1.15.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DME#2 menu,
SG RK1 RK2
DME #2 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
3: NOT USED
> 4: 429 GOLD
5: 429 MULTICHANNEL
4.1.16 MLS #1 CONFIGURATION
4.1.16.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the MLS #1 menu.
4.1.16.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the MLS #1 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
MLS #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429
SG RK1 RK2

MLS #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429
4.1.18 FMS/RNAV #1 CONFIGURATION
4.1.18.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the FMS/RNAV #1 menu.
4.1.18.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the FMS/RNAV #1 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
FMS #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: KNS 660 GAMA
2: CROUZET OMEGA
3: KLN 88
4: UNS1
4.1.19 FMS/RNAV #2 CONFIGURATION
4.1.19.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the FMS/RNAV #2 menu.
4.1.19.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the FMS/RNAV #2 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
FMS #2 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: KNS 660 GAMA
2: CROUZET OMEGA
3: KLN 88
4: UNS1
4.1.20 NUMBER OF TACANS CONFIGURATION
4.1.20.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the NUMBER OF TCNS menu.

4.1.20.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter NUMBER OF TCNS menu.
SG RK1 RK2
NUMBER OF TCNS 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 1
2: 2 OR MORE
4.1.21 TACAN #1 CONFIGURATION
4.1.21.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the TACAN #1 menu.
4.1.21.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter TACAN #1 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME
2: B: S/C NAV D: KING SER
3: B: 429 NAV D: KING SER
4: B: S/C NAV D: 688 DME
SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME

4.1.23 VNAV CONFIGURATION
4.1.23.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to MORE.
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
NUMBER OF DMES 0 0 0
DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS/RNAV #1 0 0 0
FMS/RNAV #2 0 0 0
NUMBER OF TACANS 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
4.1.23.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 03.
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> VNAV 0 0 0
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
FLT CTRL 0 0 0
AIR DATA 0 0 0
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
RADAR INDICATOR 0 0 0
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
JOYSTICK 0 0 0
RADAR GRAPHICS 0 0 0
..MORE..
4.1.23.D. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the VNAV menu.
4.1.23.E. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to desired option on menu below.
4.1.23.F. Press the NEXT MENU button to select the desired option.
SG RK1 RK2

VNAV 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 660
2: KVN 395
4.1.24 RADAR ALTIMETER CONFIGURATION
4.1.24.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the RADAR ALT menu.
4.1.24.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the RADAR ALT menu.
NOTE:
RADAR ALTIMETER IS ELSEWHERE REFERRED TO AS ITS EQUIVALENT: RA-
DIO ALTIMETER.
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
4.1.25 FLIGHT CONTROL CONFIGURATION
4.1.25.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the FLT CTRL menu.
4.1.25.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the FLT CTRL menu.
SG RK1 RK2
FLIGHT CTRL 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: KFC 325 ANALOG
2: KFC 325 429
3: KFC 400
4.1.26 AIR DATA CONFIGURATION
4.1.26.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the AIR DATA menu.
4.1.26.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the AIR DATA menu.

SG RK1 RK2
AIR DATA 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KDC 481
4.1.27 RADAR TYPE CONFIGURATION
4.1.27.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the RADAR TYPE menu.
4.1.27.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the RADAR TYPE menu.
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: RDS 81/RDS 82
2: RDS 84/RDS 88
4.1.28 RADAR CONTROL PANEL CONFIGURATION
4.1.28.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the RADAR CTL PNL menu.
4.1.28.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the RADAR CTL PNL menu.
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: CP 113
2: CP 123
4.1.29 RADAR INDICATOR CONFIGURATION

4.1.29.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the RADAR INDICATOR menu.
4.1.29.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the RADAR INDICATOR menu.
SG RK1 RK2
0: NONE
> 1: BENDIX/KING
4.1.30 CHECKLIST CONFIGURATION
4.1.30.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the CHECKLIST menu.
4.1.30.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the CHECKLIST menu.
SG RK1 RK2
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: CC 2024F
4.1.31 JOYSTICK CONFIGURATION
4.1.31.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the JOYSTICK menu.
4.1.31.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the JOYSTICK menu.
SG RK1 RK2
JOYSTICK 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 5 WIRE
2: 429
4.1.32 RADAR GRAPHICS CONFIGURATION

4.1.32.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the RADAR GRAPHICS menu.
4.1.32.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the RADAR GRAPHICS menu.
SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NONE
1: GC 360A
4.1.33 VERTICAL SCALE SIDE CONFIGURATION
4.1.33.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to CONFIGURATION MENU PAGE 00.
4.1.33.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to VIEW/EDIT OPERATION CONFIG
PAGE.
4.1.33.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to select VIEW/EDIT OPERATING CONFIG PAGE 06.
VIEW/EDIT OPERATING CHAR PG 06

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> VERT SCALE SIDE 0 0 0
DCLTR GS ON BC 0 0 0
DCLTR DEV ON FLG 0 0 0
DISPLAY WIND VEC 0 0 0
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
RADAR ONLY MODE 0 0 0
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
..MORE..
4.1.33.D. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the VERT SCALE SIDE option.
SG RK1 RK2
VERT SCALE SIDE 0 0 0
> 0: RIGHT
1: LEFT

4.1.34 DECLUTTER GLIDESLOPE ON BACKCOURSE CONFIGURATION
4.1.34.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to VIEW/EDIT OPERATING CHAR PAGE 06.
4.1.34.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DCLTR GS ON BC menu.
4.1.34.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DCLTR GS ON BC menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DECLUTTER VERT 0 0 0
SCALE ON BACKCOURSE
0: NO
> 1: YES
4.1.35 DECLUTTER DEVIATION ON FLAG CONFIGURATION
4.1.35.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DCLTR DEV ON FLAG menu.
4.1.35.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DCLTR DEV ON FLAG menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DECLUTTER 0 0 0
SCALE ON DEV FLAG
0: NO
> 1: YES
4.1.36 DISPLAY WIND VECTOR CONFIGURATION
4.1.36.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DISPLAY WIND VECTOR menu.
4.1.36.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DISPLAY WIND VECTOR menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY WIND 0 0 0
VECTOR FROM FMS
0: NO

> 1: YES
4.1.37 DISPLAY DRIFT CONFIGURATION
4.1.37.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DISPLAY DRIFT menu.
4.1.37.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DISPLAY DRIFT menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
ANGLE FROM FMS
0: NO
> 1: YES
4.1.38 DG MODE ONLY CONFIGURATION
4.1.38.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DG MODE ONLY menu.
4.1.38.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DG MODE ONLY menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES
4.1.39 DME DISTANCE ONLY CONFIGURATION
4.1.39.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DME DIST ONLY menu.
4.1.39.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DME DIST ONLY menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY ONLY DME 0 0 0

DISTANCE ON BRG PTR

0: NO
> 1: YES
4.1.40 RADAR ONLY CONFIGURATION
4.1.40.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the RADAR ONLY menu.
4.1.40.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the RADAR ONLY menu.

SG RK1 RK2
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES
4.1.41 HOVER MODE AVAILABLE CONFIGURATION
4.1.41.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the HOVER MODE AVAILABLE
menu.
4.1.41.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the HOVER MODE AVAILABLE menu.

SG RK1 RK2
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: YES
4.1.42 DISPLAY HEADING TAPE CONFIGURATION
4.1.42.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move the pointer to MORE.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2

DCLTR DEV ON FLG 0 0 0
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
NOTE:
THE FOLLOWING CONFIGURATION ITEMS ARE ADI RELATED AND WILL NOT
BE OPERATIONAL.
4.1.42.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter VIEW/EDIT OPERATING CHAR PAGE 07.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> DISPLAY HDG TAPE 0 0 0
COMMAND BARS 0 0 0
ROLL INDICATOR 0 0 0
DH WINDOW LOC 0 0 0
CAT II AVAILABLE 0 0 0
4.1.42.D. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DISPLAY HDG TAPE menu.
VIEW/EDIT OPERATING CHARPG 49

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY ADI HDG 0 0 0
TAPE
> 0: NO
1: YES
4.1.43 COMMAND BARS CONFIGURATION
4.1.43.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the COMMAND BARS menu.
4.1.43.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the COMMAND BARS menu.


SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BARS 0 0 0
> 0: SINGLE CUE
1: SPLIT CUE
2: DISCRETE SELECT
4.1.44 ROLL INDICATOR CONFIGURATION
4.1.44.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the ROLL INDICATOR menu.
4.1.44.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the ROLL INDICATOR menu.

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: ROLL INDICATOR
1: SKY POINTER
4.1.45 DECISION HEIGHT WINDOW LOCATION CONFIGURATION
4.1.45.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DH WINDOW LOC menu.
4.1.45.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DH WINDOW LOC menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DH WINDOW 0 0 0
> 0: CENTER
1: LEFT OF CENTER
4.1.46 CATEGORY II AVAILABLE CONFIGURATION
4.1.46.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the CAT II AVAILABLE menu.
4.1.46.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the CAT II AVAILABLE menu.


SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NO
1: YES
4.1.47 EXITING CONFIGURATION
Press the TST button to exit the maintenance configuration pages. Verify that the system resets
within one second. This is indicated by the screen going blank and a self test pass message being
displayed. This completes the configuration process. The configuration process may also be ex-
ited by cycling power to the EFS 40 System.

be programmed correctly. For the general configuration process in this procedure. the following
NOTE:
1. INITIAL SET UP
11. VOR/ILS #1 CONFIGURATION
17. FMS #1 CONFIGURATION
19. RNAV #1 CONFIGURATION
25. AFCS CONFIGURATION
26. AFCS COMMAND BAR SCALING CONFIGURATION
27. AFCS MODE ANNUNCIATOR CONFIGURATION


37. DECLUTTER DEVIATION ON FLAG CONFIGURATION
47. DECISION HEIGHT WINDOW LOCATION CONFIGURATION
49. DISPLAY ADI PERSPECTIVE LINES
50. DECISION HEIGHT SELECTOR CONFIGURATION
See Section 4.1.1
See Section 4.1.2
low.
ITEM SG RK1 RK2

> SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
..MORE..
SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0
> 0: #1 EFIS
1: #2 EFIS
2: #3 EFIS
SG RK1 RK2
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
> 0: SINGLE EHSI
1: DUAL EHSI
2: SINGLE EADI/EHSI
3: DUAL EADI/EHSI

4.2.5.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to DU TYPE menu.
SG RK1 RK2
DU TYPE 0 0 0
> 0: ED 461
1: ED 462
2: ED 551
SG RK1 RK2
0: NONE
> 1: XYZ
2: 429
SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NONE
1: XYZ

2: 429
4.2.8.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to VIEVEDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 01.
SG RK1 RK2
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: COL GYRO
2: KING GYRO
3: SPRY GYRO
4: 429
SG RK1 RK2
ADF #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429
> 3: SYNCHRO
4: DC S/C BRG ONLY
5: 429 BRG ONLY
6: SYNCHRO BRG ONLY
NOTE:
BRG ONLY selections are for ADF that does not have a SUPER FLAG output. This
limits ADF display to bearing pointers only.

SG RK1 RK2
ADF #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429
3: SYNCHRO
4: DC S/C BRG ONLY
5: 429 BRG ONLY
6: SYNCHRO BRG ONLY
NOTE:
BRG ONLY selections are for ADF that does not have a SUPER FLAG output. This
4.2.11 VOR/ILS #1 CONFIGURATION
4.2.11.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the VOR/ILS #1 menu.
4.2.11.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the VOR/ILS #1 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4: KNS 81

SG RK1 RK2
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4: KNS 81
4.2.13.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the MORE.
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
> . . MORE. .
4.2.13.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 02 menu.
4.2.13.D. Press the NEXT MENU button to select DME #1 menu as shown below.
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS #1 0 0 0
FMS #2 0 0 0

TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
..MORE..
SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
3: NOT USED
> 4: 429 GOLD
5: 429 MULTICHANNEL
SG RK1 RK2
DME #2 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
3: NOT USED
> 4: 429 GOLD
5: 429 MULTICHANNEL

SG RK1 RK2
MLS #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429
SG RK1 RK2
MLS #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429
4.2.17 FMS #1 CONFIGURATION
4.2.17.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the FMS #1 menu.
4.2.17.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the FMS #1 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
FMS #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: KNS 660 GAMA
2: CROUZET OMEGA
3: KLN 88
4: UNS1

SG RK1 RK2
FMS #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 660 GAMA
2: CROUZET OMEGA
3: KLN 88
4: UNS1
4.2.19 RNAV #1 CONFIGURATION
4.2.19.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the RNAV #1 menu.
4.2.19.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter RNAV #1 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
RNAV #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 81
SG RK1 RK2
RNAV #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 81

SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME
4.2.22.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to VIEVV/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 02.
SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0

MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS #1 0 0 0
FMS #2 0 0 0
RNAV #2 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> VNAV 0 0 0
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
AFCS COMMAND BAR 0 0 0
AFCS MODE ANN 0 0 0
AIR DATA 0 0 0
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
..MORE..
SG RK1 RK2
VNAV 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 660
2: KVN 395
NOTE:
THE DISPLAY RADAR ALTIMETER IS ELSEWHERE REFERRED TO AS ITS
EQUIVALENT: RADIO ALTIMETER.

SG RK1 RK2
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KRA 405
2: KRA 10A
3: 429
4: COLLINS 55A
5: ARINC 552A
4.2.25 AFCS CONFIGURATION
4.2.25.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the AFCS TYPE menu.
4.2.25.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the AFCS TYPE menu.
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: ANALOG
2: KFC 400
4.2.26 AFCS COMMAND BAR SCALING CONFIGURATION
4.2.26.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the AFCS CMD BAR menu.
4.2.26.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the AFCS CMD BAR menu.
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS COMMAND 0 0 0
BAR SCALING
0: NONE
1: 429

> 2: P:1.0V R:750MV
4.2.27 AFCS MODE ANNUNCIATOR CONFIGURATION
4.2.27.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the AFCS MODE ANN menu.
4.2.27.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the AFCS MODE ANN menu.
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS MODE 0 0 0
ANNUNCIATORS
0: NONE
> 1: KFC 325/400
SG RK1 RK2
AIR DATA 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KDC 481
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
0: NONE

> 1: RDS 81/RDS 82

2: RDS 84/RDS 86
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: CP 466 A,B
2: CP 113F
SG RK1 RK2
0: NONE
> 1: BENDIX/KING
SG RK1 RK2
CHECKLIST 0 0 0

> 0: NONE
1: CC2024F
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
VNAV 0 0 0
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
AFCS MODE ANN 0 0 0
AIR DATA 0 0 0
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
> ...MORE...
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> JOYSTICK 0 0 0
4.2.33.D. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the JOYSTICK menu.
SG RK1 RK2
JOYSTICK 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 5 WIRE
2: 429

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NONE
1: GC 360A
PAGE.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DCLTR DEV ON FLAG 0 0 0
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
..MORE.. 0 0 0
SG RK1 RK2
> 0: RIGHT
1: LEFT


SG RK1 RK2
SCALE ON BACKCOURSE
0: NO
> 1: YES
4.2.37 DECLUTTER DEVIATION ON FLAG CONFIGURATION
4.2.37.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DCLTR DEV ON FLAG menu.
4.2.37.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DCLTR DEV ON FLAG menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DECLUTTER 0 0 0
SCALE ON DEV FLAG
0: NO
> 1: YES
4.2.38.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to VIEVEDIT OPERATING CHAR PAGE 06.

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY WIND 0 0 0
VECTOR FROM FMS
0: NO
> 1: YES


SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
ANGLE FROM FMS
0: NO
> 1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DISTANCE ON BRG PTR

0: NO
> 1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES
menu.

SG RK1 RK2
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
VERT SCAL SIDE 0 0 0
DCLTR DEV ON FLAG 0 0 0


DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BARS 0 0 0
DH WINDOW LOC 0 0 0
PERSPECTIVE LINES 0 0 0
DH SELECT 0 0 0

SG RK1 RK2
TAPE
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BARS 0 0 0

> 0: SINGLE CUE

1: SPLIT CUE
2: DISCRETE SELECT

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: ROLL INDICATOR
1: SKY POINTER
4.2.47 DECISION HEIGHT WINDOW LOCATION CONFIGURATION
4.2.47.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DH WINDOW LOC menu.
4.2.47.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DH WINDOW LOC menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DH WINDOW 0 0 0
> 0: CENTER
1: LEFT OF CENTER

SG RK1 RK2

> 0: NO
1: YES
4.2.49 DISPLAY ADI PERSPECTIVE LINES
4.2.49.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the PERSPECTIVE LINES menu.
4.2.49.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the PERSPECTIVE LINES menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY ADI 0 0 0
PERSPECTIVE LINES
> 0: NO
1: YES
4.2.50 DECISION HEIGHT SELECTOR CONFIGURATION
4.2.50.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DH SELECT menu.
4.2.50.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DH SELECT menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DH SELECT 0 0 0
BY EFIS
> 0: NO
1: YES
The following screen will be displayed:

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY HDG TAPE 0 0 0
COMMAND BARS 0 0 0

DH WINDOW LOC 0 0 0
> DH SELECT 0 0 0
NOTE:
COPY CONFIGURATION IS REQUIRED TO LOAD THE EADI INFORMATION ANY
TIME THE SG IS RECONFIGURED.
4.2.51.B. Press the PREV MENU button to return to CONFIGURATION MENU PAGE 00.
4.2.51.C. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to COPY SG TO RACKS 1 & 2 as shown
below.
VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT CONFIG
> COPY SG TO RACKS 1 & 2
COPY RACK 1 TO SG & RACK 2
** PRESS TST TO EXIT **
4.2.51.D. Press the NEXT MENU button to select COPY SG TO RACKS 1 & 2 MENU show be-
low.
COPY CONFIGURATION PG 57
PRESS NEXT MENU BUTTON
TO COPY THE CONFIG DATA IN
THE SG TO RACKS 1 AND 2
4.2.51.E. Press the NEXT MENU BUTTON to copy the config data in the SG to Racks 1 And 2.
4.2.51.F. When copy process is completed, press the TST button to exit the maintenance con-
figuration pages. Verify that the system resets within one second. This is indicated by
the screen going blank and a self test pass message being displayed. This completes
the configuration process.

NOTE
1. INITIAL SET UP


46. DECLUTTER DATA ON UNUSUAL ATTITUDE CONFIGURATION
50. CABLE MODE AVAILABLE CONFIGURATION
See Section 4.1.1
The HSI, ADI and Reversionary display will display all item identical among all 3 displays but the
ADI will not be able to show the rack configurations, instead it will show the configuration data
coming from the HSI and the data in its own EEPROM.
See Section 4.1.2

4.3.3.A. Press the NEXT MENU button to select VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 01 as shown
below on the HSI.
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
..MORE..
The ADI will show the VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT menu as follows.
ITEM HSI ADI
> SG NUMBER 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #1 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #2 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0
ADF #1 0 0
ADF #2 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0
..MORE..
SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0
> 0: #1 EFIS
1: #2 EFIS
2: #3 EFIS

4.3.4.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to the VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 01 on
HSI or VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 02 on ADI.
SG RK1 RK2
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
> 0: SINGLE EHSI
1: DUAL EHSI
2: SINGLE EADI/EHSI
3: DUAL EADI/EHSI
4.3.5.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 01 on HSI
or VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 02 on ADI.
SG RK1 RK2
DU TYPE 0 0 0
> 0: ED 461
1: ED 462
2: ED 551
4.3.6.A. Press PREV MENU button to return to VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 01 on HSI or
VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 02 on ADI.

SG RK1 RK2
0: NONE
> 1: XYZ
2: 429
NOTE:
If XYZ ATTITUDE is configured (option 1) for either side 1 or side 2, then the other side
must be configured for either option 1 or option 2. See section 3.3.3 HEADING/ATTI-
TUDE/AHRS/RATE OF TURN REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS.
or VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 02 on ADI
SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NONE
1: XYZ
2: 429
NOTE:

SG RK1 RK2
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: COL GYRO
2: KING GYRO
3: SPRY GYRO
4: 429
SG RK1 RK2
ADF #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429
> 3: SYNCHRO
4: DC S/C BRG ONLY
5: 429 BRG ONLY
6: SYNCHRO BRG ONLY
NOTE:
BRG only selections are for ADF that does not have a SUPER FLAG output. This limits
ADF display to Bearing Pointers only.

SG RK1 RK2
ADF #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429
3: SYNCHRO
4: DC S/C BRG ONLY
5: 429 BRG ONLY
6: SYNCHRO BRG ONLY
NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4: KNS 81

SG RK1 RK2
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRO
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4: KNS 81
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
The ADI will display will show the VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT menu as follows.
ITEM HSI ADI
SG NUMBER 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #1 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #2 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0
ADF #1 0 0
ADF #2 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0
> ..MORE..

4.3.13.D. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DME #1 menu.
4.3.13.E. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DME #1 menu.
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS #1 0 0 0
FMS #2 0 0 0
RNAV #1 0 0 0
RNAV #2 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
..MORE..
4.3.13.F. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to desired option on menu below.
4.3.13.G. Press the NEXT MENU button to select the desired option.
SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 4 4 4
0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
3: NOT USED
> 4: 429 GOLD
5: 429 MULTICHANNEL
SG RK1 RK2
DME #2 0 0 0

0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
3: NOT USED
> 4: 429 GOLD
5: 429 MULTICHANNEL
SG RK1 RK2
MLS #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429
SG RK1 RK2
MLS #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429

SG RK1 RK2
FMS #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: KNS 660 GAMA
2: CROUZET OMEGA
3: KLN 88
4: UNS1
SG RK1 RK2
FMS #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 660 GAMA
2: CROUZET OMEGA
3: KLN 88
4: UNS1
SG RK1 RK2
RNAV #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 81

SG RK1 RK2
RNAV #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 81
SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME
SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME


ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS #1 0 0 0
FMS #2 0 0 0
RNAV #1 0 0 0
RNAV #2 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> VNAV 0 0 0
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
AFCS MODE ANN 0 0 0
AIR DATA 0 0 0
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
..MORE..

SG RK1 RK2
VNAV 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 660
2: KVN 395
NOTE:
DIO ALTIMETER.
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KRA 405
2: KRA 10A
3: 429
4: COLLINS 55A
5: ARINC 552A
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: ANALOG

2: KFC 400
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS COMMAND 0 0 0
BAR SCALING
0: NONE
1: 429
> 2: P:1.0V R:750MV DSC
3: P:400MV R:400MV D:12V
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS MODE 0 0 0
ANNUNCIATORS
0: NONE
> 1: KFC 325/400

SG RK1 RK2
AIR DATA 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KDC 481
4.3.29.C. ress the NEXT MENU button to enter the RADAR TYPE menu.
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: RDS 81/RDS 82
2: RDS 84/RDS 86
3: RDR1400/NC104
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: CP 466 A,B
2: CP 113F

SG RK1 RK2
0: NONE
> 1: BENDIX/KING
SG RK1 RK2
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: CC2024F
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
VNAV 0 0 0
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
AFCS MODE ANN 0 0 0
AIR DATA 0 0 0
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

4.3.33.D. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the JOYSTICK menu.
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> JOYSTICK 0 0 0
4.3.33.E. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the JOYSTICK menu.
SG RK1 RK2
JOYSTICK 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 5 WIRE
2: 429
SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NONE
1: GC 360A
PAGE.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> VERT SCAL SIDE 0 0 0

SPARE 0 0 0
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
..MORE..
SG RK1 RK2
> 0: RIGHT
1: LEFT

SG RK1 RK2
SCALE ON BACKCOURSE
0: NO
> 1: YES
4.3.37.C. Press the N EXT MENU button to enter the DISPLAY WIND VECTOR menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY WIND 0 0 0
VECTOR FROM FMS
0: NO
> 1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
ANGLE FROM FMS
0: NO
> 1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES


SG RK1 RK2
DISTANCE ON BRG PTR
0: NO
> 1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES
menu.

SG RK1 RK2
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES


ITEM SG RK1 RK2
SPARE 0 0 0
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BARS 0 0 0
DCLTR UNUS ATT 0 0 0
DH SELECT 0 0 0
CABLE MODE 0 0 0

SG RK1 RK2
TAPE
> 0: NO
1: YES


SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BARS 0 0 0
> 0: SINGLE CUE
1: SPLIT CUE
2: DISCRETE SELECT

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: ROLL INDICATOR
1: SKY POINTER
4.3.46 DECLUTTER DATA ON UNUSUAL ATTITUDE CONFIGURATION
4.3.46.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DCLTR UNUS ATT menu.
4.3.45.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DCLTR UNUS ATT menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DECLUTTER DATA 0 0 0
ON UNUSUAL ATTITUDE
> 0: NO
1: YES


SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY ADI 0 0 0
PERSPECTIVE LINES
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DH SELECT 0 0 0
BY EFIS
> 0: NO
1: YES

4.3.50 CABLE MODE AVAILABLE CONFIGURATION
4.3.50.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the CABLE MODE AVAILABLE menu.
4.3.50.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the CABLE MODE AVAILABLE menu.

SG RK1 RK2
CABLE MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES
The following screen will be displayed.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BARS 0 0 0
DH SELECT 0 0 0
> CABLE MODE 0 0 0
NOTE:
COPY CONFIGURATION IS REQUIRED TO LOAD THE EADI INFORMATION AF-
TER INITIAL CONFIG.
4.3.51.B. Press TST to EXIT and Enter Config mode.

below.


low.

NOTE
1. INITIAL SET UP


35. HOMING #1 CONFIGURATION
39. FULLTIME FMS MAP CONFIGURATION
46. MFD NAV CONTROL CONFIGURATION
55. SELECTED HDG SYNC CONFIGURATION
56. SELECTED CRS SYNC CONFIGURATION
See Section 4.1.1

See Section 4.1.2
low on the HSI.
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
..MORE..
The ADI will show the VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT menu as follows.
ITEM HSI ADI
> SG NUMBER 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #1 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #2 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0
ADF #1 0 0
ADF #2 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0
..MORE..

SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0
> 0: #1 EFIS
1: #2 EFIS
2: #3 EFIS
SG RK1 RK2
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
> 0: SINGLE EHSI
1: DUAL EHSI
2: SINGLE EADI/EHSI
3: DUAL EADI/EHSI
SG RK1 RK2
DU TYPE 0 0 0
HSI ADI
> 0: ED 461 ED 462
1: ED 462 ED 462
2: ED 551A ED 551A
3: ED 551 ED 551

SG RK1 RK2
0: NONE
> 1: XYZ
2: 429
NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NONE
1: XYZ
2: 429
NOTE:

SG RK1 RK2
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: COL GYRO
2: KING GYRO
3: SPRY GYRO
4: 429
SG RK1 RK2
ADF #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429
> 3: SYNCHRO
4: DC S/C BRG ONLY
5: 429 BRG ONLY
6: SYNCHRO BRG ONLY
NOTE:

SG RK1 RK2
ADF #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429
3: SYNCHRO
4: DC S/C BRG ONLY
5: 429 BRG ONLY
6: SYNCHRO BRG ONLY
NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
0:NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4: KNS 81

SG RK1 RK2
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4: KNS 81
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM HSI ADI
SG NUMBER 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #1 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #2 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0
ADF #1 0 0
ADF #2 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS #1 0 0 0
FMS #2 0 0 0
RNAV #1 0 0 0
RNAV #2 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
..MORE..
SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
3: NOT USED
> 4: 429 GOLD
5: 429 MULTICHANNEL
SG RK1 RK2
DME #2 4 4 4

0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
3: NOT USED
> 4: 429 GOLD
5: 429 MULTICHANNEL
4.4.15.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to VIENEDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 02.
SG RK1 RK2
MLS #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429
4.4.16.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to VIENEDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 02.
SG RK1 RK2
MLS #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429

SG RK1 RK2
FMS #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: KNS 660 GAMA
2: CROUZET OMEGA
3: KLN 88
4: GAMA 429
SG RK1 RK2
FMS #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 660 GAMA
2: CROUZET OMEGA
3: KLN 88
4: GAMA 429
SG RK1 RK2
RNAV #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 81

SG RK1 RK2
RNAV #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 81
SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME
SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME


ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS #1 0 0 0
FMS #2 0 0 0
RNAV #1 0 0 0
RNAV #2 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> VNAV 0 0 0
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
AFCS MODE ANN 0 0 0
AIR DATA 0 0 0
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
..MORE..

SG RK1 RK2
VNAV 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 660
2: KVN 395
NOTE:
The display RADAR ALTIMETER is elsewhere referred to as its equivalent: radio al-
timeter.
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KRA 405
2: KRA 10A
3: 429
4: COLLINS 55A
5: ARINC 552A
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: ANALOG

2: KFC 400
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS COMMAND 0 0 0
BAR SCALING
0: NONE
1: 429
> 2: P:1.0V R:750MV DSC
3: P:400MV R:400MV D:12V
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS MODE 0 0 0
ANNUNCIATORS
0: NONE
> 1: KFC 325/400
2: CDV 155

SG RK1 RK2
AIR DATA 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ANALOG AOA/IAS
2: ANALOG AOA/IAS OFFSET
3: ANALOG COLLECTIVE
4: FROM AFCS BUS
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: RDS 81/RDS 82
2: RDS 84/RDS 86
3: RDR1400/NC104
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: CP 466 A,B
2: CP 113F

SG RK1 RK2
0: NONE
> 1: BENDIX/KING
SG RK1 RK2
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: CC2024F
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
VNAV 0 0 0
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
AFCS MODE ANN 0 0 0
AIR DATA 0 0 0
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0

CHECKLIST 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> JOYSTICK 0 0 0
HOMING #1 0 0 0
HOMING #2 0 0 0
SG RK1 RK2
JOYSTICK 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 5 WIRE
2: 429
SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NONE
1: GC 360A
4.4.35 HOMING #1 CONFIGURATION
4.4.35.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the HOMING #1 menu.

4.4.35.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the HOMING #1 menu.

SG RK1 RK2
HOMING #1 0 0 0
> 0 : NONE
1: ANALOG

SG RK1 RK2
HOMING #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ANALOG
PAGE.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
FULLTIME FMS MAP 0 0 0
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
MFD NAV CONTROL 0 0 0

..MORE..
SG RK1 RK2
> 0 : RIGHT
1: LEFT

SG RK1 RK2
SCALE ON BACKCOURSE
0: NO
> 1: YES
4.4.39 FULLTIME FMS MAP CONFIGURATION
4.4.39.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the FULLTIME FMS MAP menu.
4.4.39.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the FULLTIME FMS MAP menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY FMS 0 0 0
MAP ON A NON-MAP NAV SOURCE
> 0: NO
1: YES


SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY WIND 0 0 0
VECTOR FROM FMS
0: NO
> 1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
ANGLE FROM FMS
0: NO
> 1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO

1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DISTANCE ON BRG PTR
0: NO
> 1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES
menu.

SG RK1 RK2

HOVER MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES - NO COUPLER
2: YES - WITH COUPLER
4.4.46 MFD NAV CONTROL CONFIGURATION
4.4.46.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the MFD NAV CONTROL menu.
4.4.46.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the MFD NAV CONTROL menu.

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NORMAL CP OPERATION
1: NAV SLAVE OR LNAV

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2


COMMAND BARS 0 0 0
DH SELECT 0 0 0
CABLE MODE 0 0 0
SEL HDG SYNC 0 0 0
SEL CRS SYNC 0 0 0

SG RK1 RK2
TAPE
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BARS 0 0 0
> 0: SINGLE CUE
1: SPLIT CUE
2: DISCRETE SELECT


SG RK1 RK2
> 0: ROLL INDICATOR
1: SKY POINTER

SG RK1 RK2
ON UNUSUAL ATTITUDE
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NO
1: FAA LIMITS
2: JAR LIMITS


SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY ADI 0 0 0
PERSPECTIVE LINES
> 0 : NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DH SELECT 0 0 0
BY EFIS
> 0: NO
1: YES
2: YES - SYNC FROM OTHER SG

SG RK1 RK2
CABLE MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES - NO COUPLER

4.4.55 SELECTED HDG SYNC CONFIGURATION
4.4.55.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the SELECTED HDG SYNC menu.
4.4.55.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the SELECTED HDG SYNC menu.

SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED HDG 0 0 0
SYNC FROM OTHER SG
> 0: NO
1: YES
4.4.56 SELECTED CRS SYNC CONFIGURATION
4.4.56.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the SELECTED CRS SYNC menu.
4.4.56.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the SELECTED CRS SYNC menu.

SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED CRS 0 0 0
SYNC FROM OTHER SG
> 0: NO
1: YES

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
HDG 0 0 0
COMMAND BARS 0 0 0

DH SELECT 0 0 0
CABLE MODE 0 0 0
SEL HDG SYNC 0 0 0
> SEL CRS SYNC 0 0 0
NOTE:
Copy configuration is required to load the EADI information after initial config.
below.
low.

NOTE
menu. the change will not be allowed.
1. INITIAL SET UP


34. TCAS CONFIGURATION
37. LIGHTNING DETECTION CONFIGURATION
58. NORTH UP MAP CONFIGURATION
59. VERTICAL POINTER TYPE CONFIGURATION
60. DISPLAY MESSAGES FOR FMS CONFIGURATION
61. HDG COLOR CONFIGURATION
62. COMMAND BAR COLOR CONFIGURATION
63. REVERSIONARY MODE ANNUNCIATION CONFIGURATION
64. LOC/MLS DEV DISPLAY ON EADI CONFIGURATION
65. ADI ILS/MLS SOURCE CONFIGURATION
66. COMMAND BAR FILTER CONFIGURATION

See Section 4.1.1
See Section 4.1.2
below.
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
..MORE..
The ADI will display will show the VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 01 menu as follows.
ITEM HSI ADI
> SG NUMBER 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #1 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #2 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0
ADF #1 0 0

ADF #2 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0
..MORE..
SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0
> 0: #1 EFIS
1: #2 EFIS
2: #3 EFIS
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
THE SG NUMBER MENU SELECTION DETERMINES
THE COCKPIT LOCATION OF THIS S.G.
0: PILOT
1: COPILOT
2: MFD
SG RK1 RK2
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
> 0: SINGLE EHSI
1: DUAL EHSI
2: SINGLE EADI/EHSI
3: DUAL EADI/EHSI

SG RK1 RK2
DU TYPE 0 0 0
HSI ADI
> 0: ED 461 ED 462
1: ED 462 ED 462
2: ED 551A ED 551A
3: ED 551 ED 551
SG RK1 RK2
0: NONE
> 1: XYZ
2: 429
NOTE:

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NONE
1: XYZ
2: 429
NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: COL GYRO
2: KING GYRO
3: SPRY GYRO
4: 429
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
RATE OF TURN MENU DETERMINES THE TYPE OF RATE OF TURN INPUT.
0: NONE
1: COLLINS ANALOG (333 mv/deg/sec)
2: KING ANALOG (200 mv/deg/sec)
3: SPERRY ANALOG (888 mv/deg/sec)
4: ARINC 429 RATE OF TURN

SG RK1 RK2
ADF #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429
> 3: SYNCHRO
4: DC S/C BRG ONLY
5: 429 BRG ONLY
6: SYNCHRO BRG ONLY
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
BRG ONLY SELECTIONS ARE FOR ADF THAT DOES NOT HAVE A SUPER FLAG
OUTPUT. THIS LIMITS ADF DISPLAY TO BEARING POINTERS ONLY.
SG RK1 RK2
ADF #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429
3: SYNCHRO
4: DC S/C BRG ONLY
5: 429 BRG ONLY
6: SYNCHRO BRG ONLY
CONFIGURATION NOTE:

SG RK1 RK2
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4: KNS 81
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
2: 429 BRG: GOLD CROWN
3: 429 RAD:SERIES III
4: KNS 81: SERIAL RNAV
* VN 411B-01 VERSION MUST BE CONFIGURED FOR 429 BRG
SG RK1 RK2
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4: KNS 81
CONFIGURATION NOTE:

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM HSI ADI
SG NUMBER 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #1 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #2 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0
ADF #1 0 0
ADF #2 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM SG RK1 RK2

> DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS #1 0 0 0
FMS #2 0 0 0
RNAV #1 0 0 0
RNAV #2 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
..MORE..
SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
3: NOT USED
> 4: 429 GOLD
5: 429 MULTICHANNEL
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
4: 429 GOLD (SINGLE CHANNEL DME)
5: 429 MULTI-CHANNEL (SCANNING/MULTI-CHANNEL 429 DME)
SG RK1 RK2
DME #2 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME

3: NOT USED
> 4: 429 GOLD
5: 429 MULTICHANNEL
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
4: 429 GOLD (SINGLE CHANNEL DME)
5: 429 MULTI-CHANNEL (SCANNING/MULTI-CHANNEL 429 DME)
SG RK1 RK2
MLS #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429
SG RK1 RK2
MLS #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429

SG RK1 RK2
FMS #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: KNS 660 GAMA
2: NADIR CROUZET
3: KLN 88
4: GAMA 429
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
4: GAMA 429 (UNS1A, GNS X)
SG RK1 RK2
FMS #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 660 GAMA
2: NADIR CROUZET
3: KLN 88
4: GAMA 429
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
4: GAMA 429 (UNS1A, GNS X)

SG RK1 RK2
RNAV #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 81
SG RK1 RK2
RNAV #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 81
SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME
5: KNS 81
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
2: BRG, (SIN/COS NAV); DME, (KING SERIAL)
3: BRG, (429); DME, (KING SERIAL)
4: BRG, (SIN/COS NAV); DME, (568)
5: KNS 81 (WITH TACAN CAPABILITY), VOR #1 MUST ALSO BE CONFIGURED
FOR KNS 81

SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME
5: KNS 81
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
FOR KNS 81
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS #1 0 0 0
FMS #2 0 0 0
RNAV #1 0 0 0
RNAV #2 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0

> ..MORE..
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
VNAV 0 0 0
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
AFCS MODE ANN 0 0 0
AIR DATA 0 0 0
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
SG RK1 RK2
VNAV 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 660
2: KVN 395
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
DIO ALTIMETER.
4.5.24.A. PRESS THE PREV MENU BUTTON TO RETURN TO VIEVV/EDIT EQUIPMENT

PAGE 03.

SG RK1 RK2
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KRA 405
2: KRA 10A
3: 429
4: COLLINS 55A
5: ARINC 552A
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: ANALOG
2: KFC 400
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
2: KFC 400 (OR ANY OTHER DIGITAL 429 INTERFACE SYSTEM)
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS COMMAND 0 0 0
BAR SCALING
0: NONE
1: 429
> 2: P:1.0V R:760MV DSC
3: P:400MV R:400MV D:12V

SG RK1 RK2
AFCS MODE 0 0 0
ANNUNCIATORS
0: NONE
> 1: KFC 325/400
2: CDV 155
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
AFC MODE ANNUNCIATORS MENU DETERMINES THE SOURCE TYPE FOR AU-
TOPILOT MODE ANNUNCIATIONS.
1: KING 429 AUTOPILOT
2: SFIM 429 AUTOPILOT
SG RK1 RK2
AIR DATA 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ANALOG AOA/IAS
4: 429 AOA/IAS
5: FROM AFCS BUS
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
AIR DATA MENU DETERMINES THE SOURCE TYPE FOR FAST/SLOW INPUTS.

1: 0.2V/KT OR 0.2V/deg. SCALE IS +/- 2V.

2: 0.1V/KT OR 0.1V/deg. SCALE IS -2V TO 0V
3: .2V/mm SCALE RANGE IS +/- 2V.
4: 429, SCALE IS +/- 10KT OR +/- 10 deg.
5: CDV155, 429 COLLECTIVE FROM AUTOPILOT.
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: RDS 81/RDS 82
2: RDS 84/RDS 86
3: RDR1400/NC104
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR CTL PNIL 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: CP 466 A,B
2: CP 113F

SG RK1 RK2
0: NONE
> 1: BENDIX/KING
SG RK1 RK2
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: CC2024F
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
VNAV 0 0 0
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
AFCS MODE ANN 0 0 0
AIR DATA 0 0 0
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> JOYSTICK 0 0 0
TCAS 0 0 0
HOMING #1 0 0 0
HOMING #2 0 0 0
LIGHTNING DET 0 0 0
SG RK1 RK2
JOYSTICK 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 5 WIRE
2: 429
4.5.34 TCAS CONFIGURATION
4.5.34.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the TCAS menu.
4.5.34.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the TCAS menu.
SG RK1 RK2
TCAS 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ARINC 735


SG RK1 RK2
HOMING #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ANALOG

SG RK1 RK2
HOMING #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ANALOG
4.5.37 LIGHTNING DETECTION CONFIGURATION
4.5.37.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the LIGHTNING DET menu.
4.5.37.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the LIGHTNING DET menu.

SG RK1 RK2
LIGHTNING DET 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 3M WX1200
PAGE.


ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
..MORE..
SG RK1 RK2
> 0: RIGHT
1: LEFT

SG RK1 RK2
SCALE ON BACKCOURSE
0: NO
> 1: YES


SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY FMS 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: YES
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
FMS MAP MAYBE DISPLAYED WHEN FMS IS NOT THE PRIMARY NAV SELECT-
ED.
CAUTION
ON AIRPORT APPROACH THE ILS OR ADF MUST BE USED.
4.5.41.B. Press the N EXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DISPLAY WIND VECTOR menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY WIND 0 0 0
VECTOR FROM FMS
0: NO
> 1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
ANGLE FROM FMS
0: NO
> 1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
OPTIONAL COMPASS CARD WITH ONLY A HEADING BUG, NO NAV INFORMA-
TION MAY BE DISPLAYED WITH THE HSI KEY SEQUENCE.

SG RK1 RK2
DISTANCE ON BRG PTR
0: NO
> 1: YES
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
OPTIONAL DISPLAY OF DME DISTANCE ONLY IN THE BEARING POINTER FIELD
WITH THE RMI KEY SEQUENCE.


SG RK1 RK2
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
OPTIONAL DISPLAY OF RADAR INFORMATION ONLY ON THE MFD. NO NAV IN-
FORMATION DISPLAYED.
menu.

SG RK1 RK2
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES - NO COUPLER


SG RK1 RK2
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
NAV KEY OPERATION ON THE MFD CONTROL PANEL.
0: NAV KEY CYCLES THROUGH NAV UNITS CONNECTED.
1: ALTERNATE BETWEEN THE MASTER SGs SELECTED NAV
SOURCE AND AN FMS NAV SOURCE

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BARS 0 0 0

DH SELECT 0 0 0
CABLE MODE 0 0 0
SEL HDG SYNC 0 0 0
SEL CRS SYNC 0 0 0
..MORE..

SG RK1 RK2
TAPE
> 0: NO
1: YES
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
OPTION TO DISPLAY HEADING INFORMATION ON THE EADI HORIZON LINE.

SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BARS 0 0 0
> 0: SINGLE CUE
1: SPLIT CUE
2: DISCRETE SELECT


SG RK1 RK2
> 0: ROLL INDICATOR
1: SKY POINTER
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
EADI ROLL INDICATOR CONFIGURATION,
MAY BE USED TO MATCH #2 EADI OPERATION.
0: ROLL INDICATOR AT TOP STATIONARY AND SKY POINTER
MOVES WITH ROLL
1: SKY POINTER AT TOP STATIONARY AND ROLL INDICATOR
MOVES WITH ROLL

SG RK1 RK2
ON UNUSUAL ATTITUDE
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NO
1: FAA LIMITS

2: JAR LIMITS

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY ADI 0 0 0
PERSPECTIVE LINES
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DH SELECT 0 0 0
BY EFIS
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2

CABLE MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES - NO COUPLER

SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED HDG 0 0 0
SYNC FROM OTHER SG
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED CRS 0 0 0
SYNC FROM OTHER SG
> 0: NO
1: YES
4.5.58 NORTH UP MAP CONFIGURATION

ITEM SG RK1 RK2


COMMAND BARS 0 0 0
DH SELECT 0 0 0
CABLE MODE 0 0 0
SEL HDG SYNC 0 0 0
SEL CRS SYNC 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> SEL NORTH UP MAP 0 0 0
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
DISPLAY FMS MSG 0 0 0
SEL HDG COLOR 0 0 0
CMD BAR COLOR 0 0 0
REV MODE ANN 0 0 0
RISING RUNWAY 0 0 0
ADI DEV SRC 0 0 0
CMD BAR FILTER 0 0 0
4.5.58.D. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the NORTH UP MAP menu.

SG RK1 RK2
NORTH UP MAP 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES
4.5.59 VERTICAL POINTER TYPE CONFIGURATION
4.5.59.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the VERT PTR TYPE menu.
4.5.59.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the VERT PTR TYPE menu.


SG RK1 RK2
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
> 0: SMALL DIAMOND
1: DIAMOND (NOT FOR 4’ DU)
2: RECTANGLE
4.5.60 DISPLAY MESSAGES FOR FMS CONFIGURATION
4.5.60.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DISPLAY MESSAGES FOR
FROM menu.
4.5.60.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DISPLAY MESSAGES FROM FMS menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY 0 0 0
MESSAGES FROM FMS
> 0: NO
1: YES
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
SYSTEM CAN BE CONFIGURED TO DISPLAY MSG, DR, WPT, HDG, XTK OR APR
FROM AN FMS ON THE EHSI JUST ABOVE THE VERTICAL MODE NAME FMS.
4.5.61 HDG COLOR CONFIGURATION
4.5.61.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the SEL HDG COLOR menu.
4.5.61.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the SEL HDG COLOR menu.

SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED 0 0 0
HEADING BUG/READOUT COLOR
> 0: ORANGE

1: CYAN
2: MAGENTA
4.5.62 COMMAND BAR COLOR CONFIGURATION
4.5.62.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the CMD BAR COLOR menu.
4.5.62.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the CMD BAR COLOR menu.

SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BAR 0 0 0
COLOR
> 0: GREEN
1: MAGENTA
4.5.63 REVERSIONARY MODE ANNUNCIATION CONFIGURATION
4.5.63.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the REV MODE ANN menu.
4.5.63.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the REV MODE ANN menu.

SG RK1 RK2
REVERSIONARY 0 0 0
MODE ANNUNCIATION
> 0: NONE
1: STBY/COPY
2: SG2
3: SG3
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
0: DO NOT DISPLAY STBY OR COPY
1: DISPLAY STBY, COPY OR STBY AND COPY FOR DUAL SYSTEMS
2: DISPLAY SG2 ON STANDBY AND BOXED FOR DUAL SYSTEMS
4.5.64 LOC/MLS DEVIATION DISPLAY ON EADI CONFIGURATION

4.5.64.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the RISING RUNWAY menu.
4.5.64.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the RISING RUNWAY menu.

SG RK1 RK2
ADI LOC/MLS 0 0 0
DISPLAY
> 0: RISING RUNWAY
1: DBAR
2: RUNWAY OR DBAR
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
ADI LOC/MLS DISPLAY MENU DETERMINES HOW LOC/MLS DEVIATION IS DIS-
PLAYED ON THE EADI.
0: ALWAYS AS A RISING RUNWAY
1: ALWAYS AS A DBAR
2: AS A RISING RUNWAY WHEN RADAR ALTITUDE IS VALID, ELSE AS A DBAR
4.5.65 ADI ILS/MLS SOURCE CONFIGURATION
4.5.65.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the ADI ILS/MLS menu.
4.5.65.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the ADI ILS/MLS menu.

SG RK1 RK2
ADI ILS/MLS 0 0 0
DEVIATION SOURCE
> 0: ON-SIDE ILS/MLS
1: CROSS-SIDE ILS/MLS
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
ADI ILS/MLS DEVIATION SOURCE MENU DETERMINES WHAT SOURCE DRIVES
THE EADI DBAR.
0: NORMAL DEVIATION PROCESSING
1: CROSS-SIDE ILS/MLS RECEIVERS WHEN ON SIDE IS SELECTED

4.5.66 COMMAND BAR FILTER CONFIGURATION
4.5.66.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the CMD BAR FILTER menu.
4.5.66.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the CMD BAR FILTER menu.

SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BAR 0 0 0
TIME CONSTANTS
> 0: 0 SEC
1: 0.1 SEC
2: 0.2 SEC
3: 0.25 SEC
4: 0.3 SEC
5: 0.35 SEC
6: 0.4 SEC
7: 0.5 SEC

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
NORTH UP MAP 0 0 0
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
SEL HDG COLOR 0 0 0
CMD BAR COLOR 0 0 0
REV MODE ANN 0 0 0
RISING RUNWAY 0 0 0
ADI DEV SRC 0 0 0
> CMD BAR FILTER 0 0 0
NOTE:

below.
low.

NOTE
1. INITIAL SET UP


56. SELECT CONTROL PANEL SYNC CONFIGURATION
65. LOC/MLS DEVIATION DISPLAY ON EADI CONFIGURATION

See Section 4.1.1
The HIS, ADI and Reversionary displays will display all items identically among all 3 displays but
the ADI will not be able to show the rack configurations, instead it will show the configuration data
See Section 4.1.2
below.
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
..MORE..
The ADI display will show the VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 01 menu as follows.
ITEM HSI ADI
> SG NUMBER 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #1 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #2 0 0

RATE OF TURN 0 0
ADF #1 0 0
ADF #2 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0
..MORE..
SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0
> 0: #1 EFIS
1: #2 EFIS
2: #3 EFIS
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
THE SC NUMBER MENU SELECTION DETERMINES THE
COCKPIT LOCATION OF THIS S.G.
0: PILOT
1: COPILOT
2: MFD
SG RK1 RK2
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
> 0: SINGLE EHSI
1: DUAL EHSI
2: SINGLE EADI/EHSI
3: DUAL EADI/EHSI

SG RK1 RK2
DU TYPE 0 0 0
HSI ADI
> 0: ED 461 ED 462
1: ED 462 ED 462
2: ED 551A ED 551A
3: ED 551 ED 551
SG RK1 RK2
0: NONE
> 1: XYZ
2: 429
NOTE:

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NONE
1: XYZ
2: 429
NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: COL GYRO
2: KING GYRO
3: SPRY GYRO
4: 429
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
RATE OF TURN MENU DETERMINES THE TYPE OF RATE OF TURN INPUT.
0: NONE
1: COLLINS ANALOG (333 mv/deg/sec)
2: KING ANALOG (200 mv/deg/sec)
3: SPERRY ANALOG (666 mv/deq/sec)
4: ARINC 429 RATE OF TURN

SG RK1 RK2
ADF #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429
> 3: SYNCHRO
4: DC S/C BRG ONLY
5: 429 BRG ONLY
6: SYNCHRO BRG ONLY
NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
ADF #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429
3: SYNCHRO
4: DC S/C BRG ONLY
5: 429 BRG ONLY
6: SYNCHRO BRG ONLY
CONFIGURATION NOTE:

SG RK1 RK2
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
0:NONE
> 1 : SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4: KNS 81
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4: KNS 81
CONFIGURATION NOTE:


ITEM SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM HSI ADI
SG NUMBER 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #1 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #2 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0
ADF #1 0 0
ADF #2 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0
> ..MORE. .

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS #1 0 0 0
FMS #2 0 0 0
RNAV #1 0 0 0
RNAV #2 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
..MORE..
SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 3 3 3
0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
> 3: 429 GOLD
4: 429 DF1=V1/M2, DF2=V2/Ml
5: 429 DF1=Vl/Ml, DF2=V2/M2
6: 429 DF1=Vl/V2, DF2=Ml/M2
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
DME CONFIGURATION ITEMS 5 AND 8 ARE INTENDED FOR POSSIBLE FUTURE
USE. THE PREFERRED CONFIGURATION FOR ALL MULTI-CHANNEL DME IN-
STALLATIONS IS ITEM 4.
1: ARINC 668 DME
2: KING SERIAL DME
3: SINGLE CHANNEL ARINC 429 DME
4: MULTI-CHANNEL DME. DIRECTED FREQUENCY #1 IS VOR #1 OR MLS2. DI-
RECTED FREQUENCY #2 IS VOR #2 AND CAN BE MLS #1. THIS IS THE PRE-
FERRED CONFIGURATION FOR A MULT-CHANNEL DME
5: MULTI-CHANNEL 429 DME. MLS IS RELAY SWITCHED INTO THE VOR TUNING
PORT. DIRECTED FREQUENCY #1 IS VOR #1 SWITCHED TO MLS #1 AND DI-
RECTED FREQUENCY #2 IS VOR #2 SWITCHED TO MLS #2.
6: MULTI-CHANNEL 429 DME DIRECTED FREQUENCY #1 IS ALWAYS VOR AND
DIRECTED FREQUENCY #2 IS ALWAYS MLS.

SG RK1 RK2
DME #2 3 3 3
0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
> 3: 429 GOLD
4: 429 DF1=Vl/M2, DF2=V2/Ml
5: 429 DF1=Vl/Ml, DF2=V2/M2
6: 429 DF1=V2, DF2=M2
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
3: SINGLE CHANNEL DME
4: SCANNING/MULTI-CHANNEL DME. DIRECTED FREQUENCY #1 IS VOR #1
AND CAN BE MLS #2. DIRECTED FREQUENCY #2 IS VOR #2.
5: EXTENDED RELAY SWITCHED SCANNING/MULTI-CHANNEL DME, MLS IS RE-
LAY SWITCHED INTO THE VOR TUNING PORT, DIRECTED FREQUENCY #1 IS
VOR #1 SWITCHED TO MLS #1 AND DIRECTED FREQUENCY #2 IS VOR #2
SWITCHED TO MLS #2.
6: COLLINS TYPE SCANNING/MULTI-CHANNEL DME. DIRECTED FREQUENCY
#1 IS ALWAYS VOR AND DIRECTED FREQUENCY #2 IS ALWAYS MLS.
SG RK1 RK2
MLS #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429

2: 429 DEV ONLY
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
1: 429 MLS WITH VALID BEARING TO STATION OUTPUTS. DO NOT USE WITH
0701 SW.
2: 429 MLS WITHOUT VALID BEARING TO STATION OUTPUTS. NO MLS RMI
POINTER. USE ONLY THIS OPTION WITH 0701 SW.
SG RK1 RK2
MILS #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429
2: 429 DEV ONLY
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
1: 429 MLS WITH VALID BEARING TO STATION OUTPUTS. DO NOT USE WITH
0701 SW.
POINTER. USE ONLY THIS OPTION WITH 0701 SW.
SG RK1 RK2
FMS #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: KNS 660 GAMA
2: NADIR CROUZET

3: KLN 88
4: GAMA 429
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
4: GAMA (UNS1A, GNS X)
SG RK1 RK2
FMS #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 660 GAMA
2: NADIR CROUZET
3: KLN 88
4: GAMA 429
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
4: GAMA (UNS1A, GNS X)
SG RK1 RK2
RNAV #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 81

SG RK1 RK2
RNAV #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 81
SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME
5: KNS 81
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
FOR KNS 81

SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME
5: KNS 81
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
FOR KNS 81
VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENTPG 02
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS #1 0 0 0
FMS #2 0 0 0
RNAV #1 0 0 0
RNAV #2 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> VNAV 0 0 0

RADAR ALT 0 0 0
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
AFCS MODE ANN 0 0 0
F/S AIR DATA 0 0 0
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
..MORE..
SG RK1 RK2
VNAV 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 660
2: KVN 395
NOTE:
DIO ALTIMETER.
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KRA 405
2: KRA 10A
3: 429
4: COLLINS 55A
5: ARINC 552A

CONFIGURATION NOTE:
0: NONE
1: 10 mv/ft
2: 4 mv/ft
3: ARINC 429
4: 20 mv/ft BELOW 500 ft, 3 mv/ft ABOVE 500 ft
5: 20 mv/ft BELOW 480 ft, LOGARITHMIC ABOVE 600 ft
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SINGLE ANALOG
2: DUAL ANALOG
3: SINGLE 429
4: DUAL 429
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
3: SINGLE KFC 400 OR ANY OTHER 429 AUTOPILOT
4: DUAL KFC 400 OR ANY OTHER 429 AUTOPILOT
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS COMMAND 0 0 0
BAR SCALING
0: NONE

1: 429
> 2: P:1.0V R:750MV DSC
3: P:400MV R:400MV D:12V
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS MODE 0 0 0
ANNUNCIATORS
0: NONE
> 1: KFC 325/400
2: CDV 155
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
AFC MODE ANNUNCIATORS MENU DETERMINES THE SOURCE TYPE FOR AU-
TOPILOT MODE ANNUNCIATIONS.
SG RK1 RK2
AIR DATA 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ANALOG AOA/IAS
4: 429 AOA/IAS
5: FROM AFCS BUS

CONFIGURATION NOTE:
1: 0.2 V/KT OR 0.2 V/deg. SCALE IS +/- 2 V.
2: 0.1 V/KT OR 0.1 V/deg. SCALE IS -2V TO 0 V.
3: 0.2V/mm SCALE RANGE IS +/- 2 V.
4: 429, SCALE IS +/- 10 KT OR +/- 10 deg.
5: CDV155,429 COLLECTIVE FROM AUTOPILOT.
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: RDS 81/RDS 82
2: RDS 84/RDS 86
3: RDR1400/NC104
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: CP 466 A,B
2: CP 113F

SG RK1 RK2
0: NONE
> 1: BENDIX/KING
SG RK1 RK2
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: CC2024F
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
VNAV 0 0 0
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
AFCS MODE ANN 0 0 0
AIR DATA 0 0 0
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
CHECKLIST 0 0 0

> .. MORE. .
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> JOYSTICK 0 0 0
TCAS 0 0 0
HOMING #1 0 0 0
HOMING #2 0 0 0
LIGHTNING DET 0 0 0
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
CABLE MODE 0 0 0
SG RK1 RK2
JOYSTICK 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 5 WIRE
2: FORMATTED 429
3: RAW 429
SG RK1 RK2
TCAS 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ARINC 735

SG RK1 RK2
HOMING #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ANALOG
4.6.36.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to VfEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 04.
SG RK1 RK2
HOMING #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ANALOG
4.6.37.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the LIGHTNING DET menu,
SG RK1 RK2
LIGHTNING DET 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1:3M WX1200

menu.
SG RK1 RK2
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES - NO COUPLER FLAG
2: YES - WITH COUPLER FLAG
4.6.39.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the CABLE MODE menu.
4.6.39.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the CABLE MODE menu.

SG RK1 RK2
CABLE MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
PAGE.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2


DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
SPARE 0 0 0
..MORE..

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: RIGHT
1: LEFT

SG RK1 RK2
SCALE ON BACKCOURSE
0: NO
> 1: YES


SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY FMS 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: YES
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
FMS MAP MAYBE DISPLAYED WHEN FMS IS NOT
THE PRIMARY NAV SELECTED.
CAUTION

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY WIND 0 0 0
VECTOR FROM FMS
0: NO
> 1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
ANGLE FROM FMS
0: NO

> 1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
OPTIONAL COMPASS CARD WITH ONLY A HEADING BUG, NO NAV INFORMA-
TION MAY BE DISPLAYED WITH THE HSI KEY SEQUENCE.

SG RK1 RK2
DISTANCE ON BRG PTR
0: NO
> 1: YES - DME LABEL
2: YES - NAV LABEL
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
0: NO DME DISTANCE ONLY DISPLAY
1: DISTANCE IS PROVIDED AND LABELED AS DME BUS AS BEARING POINTER
IS DRAWN. USE THIS WITH A SINGLE CHANNEL DME.

2: DISTANCE IS PROVIDED AND LABELED AS NAV BUT NO BEARING pointer IS

DRAWN. USE THIS WITH A MULTI-CHANNEL DME.

SG RK1 RK2
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
OPTIONAL DISPLAY OF RADAR INFORMATION ONLY ON THE MFD.
NO NAV INFORMATION DISPLAYED.

SG RK1 RK2
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
1: ALTERNATE BETWEEN THE MASTER SGs SELECTED NAV SOURCE AND AN
FMS NAV SOURCE


ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
SPARE 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BARS 0 0 0
DH SELECT 0 0 0
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
SEL HDG SYNC 0 0 0
SEL CRS SYNC 0 0 0
..MORE..

SG RK1 RK2
TAPE
> 0: NO

1: YES
2: YES - WITH HEADING BUG
CONFIGURATION NOTE:

SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BARS 0 0 0
> 0: SINGLE CUE
1: SPLIT CUE
2: DISCRETE SELECT

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: ROLL INDICATOR
1: SKY POINTER
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
EADI ROLL INDICATOR CONFIGURATION, MAY BE USED TO MATCH #2 EADI
OPERATION.
0: ROLL INDICATOR AT TOP STATIONARY AND SKY POINTER MOVES WITH
ROLL
1: SKY POINTER AT TOP STATIONARY AND ROLL INDICATOR MOVES WITH
ROLL

4.6.52.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to VIEW/EDIT OPERATING CHAR PAGE 07,

SG RK1 RK2
ON UNUSUAL ATTITUDE
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NO
1: FAA LIMITS
2: JAR LIMITS

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY ADI 0 0 0
PERSPECTIVE LINES
> 0: NO

1: YES
4.6.55.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DH SELECT menu,

SG RK1 RK2
DH SELECT 0 0 0
BY EFIS
> 0: NO
1: YES
4.6.56 SELECT CONTROL PANEL SYNC CONFIGURATION
4.6.56.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the CTL PNL SYNC menu.
4.6.56.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the CTL PNL SYNC menu.

SG RK1 RK2
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: YES - MASTER
2: YES - SLAVE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
CONTROL PANEL ITEM SELECTION CAN BE SYNCHRONIZED TO TWO SYMBOL
GENERATORS, SUCH AS IN TANDEM INSTALLATIONS.
NOTE:
IF YES, BOTH SGs MUST BE CONFIGURED AS SG #1 AND CONFIGURED FOR
DUAL SYSTEMS.
0: NO CONTROL PANEL SYNC
1: YES, THIS SG IS THE MASTER
2: YES, THIS SG IS THE SLAVE


SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED HDG 0 0 0
SYNC FROM OTHER SG
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED CRS 0 0 0
SYNC FROM OTHER SG
> 0: NO
1: YES

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BARS 0 0 0

DH SELECT 0 0 0
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
SEL HDG SYNC 0 0 0
SEL CRS SYNC 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
SEL HDG COLOR 0 0 0
CMD BAR COLOR 0 0 0
REV MODE ANN 0 0 0
RISING RUNWAY 0 0 0
ADI DEV SRC 0 0 0

SG RK1 RK2
NORTH UP MAP 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2

VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0

> 0: SMALL DIAMOND
1: DIAMOND (NOT FOR 4” DU)
2: RECTANGLE
FROM menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY 0 0 0
MESSAGES FROM FMS
> 0: NO
1: YES
CONFIGURATION NOTE:

SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED 0 0 0
> 0: ORANGE
1: CYAN
2: MAGENTA


SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BAR 0 0 0
COLOR
> 0: GREEN
1: MAGENTA

SG RK1 RK2
REVERSIONARY 0 0 0
MODE ANNUNCIATION
> 0: NONE
1: STBY/COPY
2: SG2
3: SG3
CONFIGURATION NOTE:


SG RK1 RK2
ADI LOC/MLS 0 0 0
DISPLAY
> 0: RISING RUNWAY
1: DBAR
2: RUNWAY OR DBAR
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
PLAYED ON THE EADI.
1: ALWAYS AS A DBAR

SG RK1 RK2
ADI ILS/MLS 0 0 0
DEVIATION SOURCE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
THE GADI DBAR.


SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BAR 0 0 0
TIME CONSTANTS
> 0: 0 SEC
1: 0.1 SEC
2: 0.2 SEC
3: 0.25 SEC
4: 0.3 SEC
5: 0.35 SEC
6: 0.4 SEC
7: 0.5 SEC

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
NORTH UP MAP 0 0 0
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
SEL HDG COLOR 0 0 0
CMD BAR COLOR 0 0 0
REV MODE ANN 0 0 0
RISING RUNWAY 0 0 0
ADI DEV SRC 0 0 0
> CMD BAR FILTER 0 0 0
NOTE:

below.


> COPY SG TO RACKS 1 A 2
COPY RACK 2 TO SG A RACK 1
low.

NOTE
1. INITIAL SET UP


68. MLS VERTICAL ANNUNCIATION CONFIGURATION
69. DATUM SCALING CONFIGURATION

70. HDG FAIL ANNUNCIATION CONFIGURATION

71. VNAV APPROACH SCALE CONFIGURATION
72. LNAV CRS CONTROL CONFIGURATION
See Section 4.1.1
See Section 4.1.2
below.
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
..MORE..
ITEM HSI ADI

> SG NUMBER 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #1 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #2 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0
ADF #1 0 0
ADF #2 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0
..MORE..
SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0
> 0: #1 EFIS
1: #2 EFIS
2: #3 EFIS
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
THE SG NUMBER MENU SELECTION DETERMINES
THE COCKPIT LOCATION OF THIS SG.
0: PILOT
1: COPILOT
2: MFD
SG RK1 RK2
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
> 0: SINGLE EHSI
1: DUAL EHSI

2: SINGLE EADI/EHSI
3: DUAL EADI/EHSI
SG RK1 RK2
DU TYPE 0 0 0
HSI ADI
> 0: ED 461 ED 462
1: ED 462 ED 462
2: ED 551A ED 551A
3: ED 551 ED 551
SG RK1 RK2
0: NONE
> 1 : XYZ
2: 429
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
1: ARINC 407 ANALOG
2: ARINC 429 AHRS

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NONE
1: XYZ
2: 429
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
1: ARINC 407 ANALOG
2: ARINC 429 AHRS
SG RK1 RK2
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: COLLINS ROT GYRO
2: KING ROT GYRO
3: SPERRY ROT GYRO
4: 429 ROT
5: COLLINS YAW RATE GYRO
6: KING YAW RATE GYRO
7: SPERRY YAW RATE GYRO
8: 429 YAW RATE

CONFIGURATION NOTE:
RATE OF TURN ITEMS 1-4 SHOULD BE SELECTED IF ACTUAL RATE OF TURN
INFORMATION IS PROVIDED TO THE EFS. ITEMS 5-8 SHOULD BE SELECTED IF
YAW RATE INFORMATION IS PROVIDED TO THE EFS. THE EFS WILL APPLY A
BANK ANGLE CORRECTION TO THIS INPUT WHEN ITEMS 5-8 ARE SELECTED
TO CONVERT YAW RATE TO RATE OF TURN
1. 333 mv/deg/sec RATE OF TURN
4. ARINC 429 RATE OF TURN
5. 333 mv/deq/sec YAW RATE
6. 200 mv/deq/sec YAW RATE
7. 666 mv/deg/sec YAW RATE
8. ARINC 429 YAW RATE FROM AHRS (LABEL 330)
SG RK1 RK2
ADF #1 3 3 3
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429
> 3: SYNCHRO
4: DC S/C BRG ONLY
5: 429 BRG ONLY
6: SYNCHRO BRG ONLY
NOTE:

SG RK1 RK2
ADF #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429
3: SYNCHRO
4: DC S/C BRG ONLY
5: 429 BRG ONLY
6: SYNCHRO BRO ONLY
NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
0:NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4: KNS 81
CONFIGURATION NOTE:

SG RK1 RK2
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4: KNS 81
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
3: 429 RAD: SERIES III
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
The ADI will display will show the VIEVV/EDIT EQUIPMENT menu as follows.

ITEM HSI ADI
SG NUMBER 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #1 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #2 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0
ADF #1 0 0
ADF #2 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS #1 0 0 0
FMS #2 0 0 0
RNAV #1 0 0 0
RNAV #2 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
..MORE..
SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
> 3: 429 GOLD

4: 429 DF1=V1/M2, DF2=V2/M1

5: 429 DF1=V1/M1, DF2=V2/M2
6: 429 DF1=V1/V2, DF2=M1/M2
7: 429 DF1=V1/M*, DF2=V2/M*
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
STALLATION IS ITEM 4. ITEM 7 CAN BE USED TO ALLOW A SINGLE MULTI-
CHANNEL DME TO PROVIDE DISTANCE FOR TWO VOR RECEIVERS PLUS A
SINGLE MLS RECEIVER.
AND CAN BE MLS 2. DIRECTED FREQUENCY #2 IS VOR #2.
SWITCHED TO MLS #2.
7: MULTI-CHANNEL DME. DIRECTED FREQUENCY #1 IS VOR #1 OR THE MLS.
DIRECTED FREQUENCY #2 IS VOR #2 OR THE MLS.
SG RK1 RK2
DME #2 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
> 3: 429 GOLD
4: 429 DF1=V1/M2 , DF2=V2/M1
5: 429 DF1=V1/M1, DF2=V2/M2
6: 429 DF1=V1,V2, DF2=M1/M2
7: 429 DF1=V1/M*, DF2=V2/M*
CONFIGURATION NOTE:


STALLATION IS ITEM 4. ITEM 7 CAN BE USED TO ALLOW A SINGLE MULTI-
CHANNEL DME TO PROVIDE DISTANCE FOR TWO VOR RECEIVERS PLUS A
SINGLE MLS RECEIVER.
AND CAN BE MLS 2. DIRECTED FREQUENCY #2 IS VOR #2.
SWITCHED TO MLS #2.
7: MULTI-CHANNEL DME. DIRECTED FREQUENCY #1 IS VOR #1 OR THE MLS.
DIRECTED FREQUENCY #2 IS VOR #2 OR THE MLS.
SG RK1 RK2
MLS #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429
2: 429 DEV ONLY
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
1: 429 MLS WITH VALID BEARING TO STATION OUTPUTS 2: 429 MLS WITHOUT
VALID BEARING TO STATION OUTPUTS. NO MLS RMI POINTER.
4.7.16.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 02,

SG RK1 RK2
MLS #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429
2: 429 DEV ONLY
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
1: 429 MLS WITH VALID BEARING TO STATION OUTPUTS 2: 429 MLS WITHOUT
VALID BEARING TO STATION OUTPUTS. NO MLS RMI POINTER.
SG RK1 RK2
FMS #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: KNS 660 GAMA - FMS
2: NADIR CROUZET - FMS
3: KLN 88 - LOR
4: GAMA 429 - FMS
5: KLN 90 - GPS
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
4: GAMA 429 - FMS INCLUDES UNS1A AND GNS X
SG RK1 RK2
FMS #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE

1: KNS 660 GAMA - FMS

3: KLN 88 - LOR
4: GAMA 429 - FMS
6: KLN 90 - GPS
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
4: GAMA 429 - FMS INCLUDES UNS1A AND GNS X
SG RK1 RK2
RNAV #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 81
SG RK1 RK2
RNAV #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 81

SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME
5: KNS 81
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
FOR KNS 81
SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME
5: KNS 81
CONFIGURATION NOTE:


FOR KNS 81
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS #1 0 0 0
FMS #2 0 0 0
RNAV #1 0 0 0
RNAV #2 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> FMS VNAV 0 0 0
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
AFCS MODE ANN 0 0 0
F/S AIR DATA 0 0 0
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
..MORE..

SG RK1 RK2
FMS VNAV 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: FEET ONLY
2: FEET OR ANGLE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
0: VNAV IS NEVER PRESENTED
1: VNAV DEVIATION PRESENTED WHEN PROVIDED BY AN LNAV AS LINEAR
DISTANCE IN FEET (ANY GAMA LNAV INCLUDING BENDIX/KING)
2: VNAV DEVIATION PRESENTED WHEN PROVIDED BY A BENDIX/KING LNAV
AS EITHER DISTANCE IN FEET OR ANGLE IN DEGREES.
NOTE
DIO ALTIMETER
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KRA 405
2: KRA 10A
3: 429
4: ALT 50/55
6: ARINC 552A
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
0: NONE
1: 10 mv/ft
2: 4 mv/ft
3: ARINC 429
4: 20 mv/ft BELOW 500 ft, 3 mv/ft ABOVE 500 ft
5: 20 mv/ft BELOW 480 ft, LOGARITHMIC ABOVE 500 ft

SG RK1 RK2
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SINGLE ANALOG
2: DUAL ANALOG
3: SINGLE 429
4: DUAL 429
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS COMMAND 0 0 0
BAR SCALING
0: NONE
1: 429
> 2: P:1.0V R:750MV DSC
3: P:400MV R:400MV D:12V
4: P:400MV R:400MV D:DSC
CONFIGURATION NOTE:

0: NONE
1: ARINC 429 - INCLUDES KFC 400, CDV155
2: KFC 325 - PITCH 1.0 V/deq , ROLL 750 mv/deg, DISCRETE
3: 400 mv/deg PITCH & ROLL, DECLUTTER AT 12 V
4: 400 mv/dog PITCH & ROLL, DISCRETE DECLUTTER
5: KFC 200 MODIFIED - PITCH 453 mv/deg, Roll 168 mv/deg, DISCRETE DECLUT-
TER
4.7.27.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the AFCS MODE ANN menu,
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS MODE 0 0 0
ANNUNCIATORS
0: NONE
> 1: KFC 325/400
2: CDV 155
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
AFC MODE ANNUNCIATORS MENU DETERMINES THE SOURCE TYPE FOR
AUTOPILOT MODE ANNUNCIATIONS.
SG RK1 RK2
AIR DATA 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ANALOG AOA/IAS


4: 429 AOA/IAS
5: FROM AFCS BUS
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
1: 0.2 V/KT OR 0.2 V/deg. SCALE IS +/- 2 V.
2: 0.1 V/KT OR 0.1 V/deg. SCALE IS -2 V TO 0 V.
3: 0.2 V/mm SCALE RANGE IS +/- 2V.
4: 429, SCALE IS +/- 10 KT OR +/- 10 deg.
5: CDV155, 429 COLLECTIVE FROM AUTOPILOT.
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: RDS 81/RDS 82
2: RDS 84/RDS 86
3: RDR1400/NC104
4: RDR2101
6: RDR2102
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
> 0: NONE

1: CP 466 A,B
2: CP 113F
3: CP 466 C
SG RK1 RK2
0: NONE
> 1: BENDIX/KING
SG RK1 RK2
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: CP 469A
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
FMS VNAV 0 0 0
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0


AFCS MODE ANN 0 0 0
AIR DATA 0 0 0
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> JOYSTICK 0 0 0
TCAS 0 0 0
HOMING #1 0 0 0
HOMING #2 0 0 0
LIGHTNING DET 0 0 0
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
CABLE MODE 0 0 0
SG RK1 RK2
JOYSTICK 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 5 WIRE
2: FORMATTED 429
3: RAW 429

SG RK1 RK2
TCAS 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: BENDIX/KING
SG RK1 RK2
HOMING #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ANALOG
SG RK1 RK2
HOMING #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ANALOG
SG RK1 RK2

LIGHTNING DET 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 3M WX1200
menu.
SG RK1 RK2
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO

SG RK1 RK2
CABLE MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
PAGE.


ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
SPARE 0 0 0
..MORE..

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: RIGHT
1: LEFT

SG RK1 RK2
SCALE ON BACKCOURSE
0: NO
> 1: YES


SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY FMS 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: YES
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
FMS map may be displayed when FMS is not the primary NAV selected.
CAUTION

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY WIND 0 0 0
VECTOR FROM FMS
0: NO
> 1: YES


SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
ANGLE FROM FMS
0: NO
> 1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
OPTIONAL COMPASS AND WITH ONLY A HEADING BUG, NO NAV INFORMA-
TION, MAY BE DISPLAYED WITH THE HSI KEY SEQUENCE.
CAUTION
CONFIGURATION OF DG ONLY MODE CAN ALLOW AN UNACCEPTABLE CONDI-
TION TO EXIST WITH SOME AUTOPILOTS. SEE CERTIFICATION SECTION.

SG RK1 RK2
DISTANCE ON BRG PTR

0: NO
2: YES - NAV LABEL
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
IS DRAWN. USE THIS A SINGLE CHANNEL DME.
2: DISTANCE IS PROVIDED AND LABELED AS NAV BUT NO BEARING POINTER
IS DRAWN. USE THIS WITH A MULTI-CHANNEL DME.

SG RK1 RK2
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES
CONFIGURATION NOTE:

SG RK1 RK2


CONFIGURATION NOTE:
1: ALTERNATE BETWEEN THE MASTER SGs SELECTED NAV SOURCE AND AN
FMS NAV SOURCE

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
SPARE 0 0 0
> ..MORE. .

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BARS 0 0 0
DH SELECT 0 0 0
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
SEL HDG SYNC 0 0 0
SEL CRS SYNC 0 0 0
..MORE..


SG RK1 RK2
TAPE
> 0: NO
1: YES
CONFIGURATION NOTE:

SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BARS 0 0 0
> 0: SINGLE CUE
1: SPLIT CUE
2: DISCRETE SELECT
NOTE:
The triangle aircraft symbol (options 0 or 2) should not be configured if perspective
lines are also configured. See the Certification section of this manual.


SG RK1 RK2
> 0: ROLL INDICATOR
1: SKY POINTER
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
OPERATION.
0: ROLL INDICATOR AT TOP STATIONARY AND SKY POINTER MOVES WITH
ROLL
1: SKY POINTER AT TOP STATIONARY AND ROLL INDICATOR MOVES WITH
ROLL

SG RK1 RK2
ON UNUSUAL ATTITUDE
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NO
1: FAA LIMITS

2: JAR LIMITS

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY ADI 0 0 0
PERSPECTIVE LINES
> 0: NO
1: YES
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
Perspective lines should not be configured if the single aircraft symbol is to be dis-
played on the EADI. See the Certification section of this manual.

SG RK1 RK2
DH SELECT 0 0 0
BY EFIS
> 0: NO
1: YES


SG RK1 RK2
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: YES - MASTER
2: YES - SLAVE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
CONTROL PANEL ITEM SELECTION CAN BE SYNCHRONIZED TO TWO SYM-
BOL GENERATORS, SUCH AS IN TANDEM INSTALLATIONS.
NOTE:
IF YES, BOTH PILOT AND COPILOT SGs MUST BE CONFIGURED AS SG #1
AND ALSO CONFIGURED FOR DUAL SYSTEMS, SELECTED HEADING SYNC,
SELECTED COURSE SYNC, AND DH SYNC.
0: NO, CONTROL PANEL SYNC
4.7.57.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the SELECTED HIDG SYNC menu.

SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED HDG 0 0 0
SYNC FROM OTHER SG
> 0: NO
1: YES
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
The MFD SG will sync heading from the other SG regardless of this configuration se-
lection.


SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED CRS 0 0 0
SYNC FROM OTHER SG
> 0: NO
1: YES
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
Selected course sync should never be configured on an MFD SG.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BARS 0 0 0
CAT Il AVAILABLE 0 0 0
DH SELECT 0 0 0
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
SEL HDG SYNC 0 0 0
SEL CRS SYNC 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0


SEL HDG COLOR 0 0 0
CMD BAR COLOR 0 0 0
REV MODE ANN 0 0 0
RISING RUNWAY 0 0 0
ADI DEV SRC 0 0 0
MLS VIRT ANNUNC 0 0 0
.. MORE ..

SG RK1 RK2
NORTH UP MAP 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
North up map (plan view) will only activate on an MFD. The joystick must also be con-
figured.

SG RK1 RK2
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
> 0: SMALL DIAMOND
2: RECTANGLE

FROM menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY 0 0 0
MESSAGES FROM FMS
> 0: NO
1: YES
CONFIGURATION NOTE:

SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED 0 0 0
> 0: ORANGE
1: CYAN
2: MAGENTA

SG RK1 RK2

COMMAND BAR 0 0 0
COLOR
> 0: GREEN
1: MAGENTA

SG RK1 RK2
REVERSIONARY 0 0 0
MODE ANNUNCIATION
> 0: NONE
1: STBY/COPY
2: SG2
3: SG3
CONFIGURATION NOTE:

SG RK1 RK2
ADI LOC/MLS 0 0 0
DISPLAY
> 0: RISING RUNWAY
1: DBAR
2: RUNWAY OR DBAR

CONFIGURATION NOTE:
PLAYED ON THE EADI.
1: ALWAYS AS A DBAR

SG RK1 RK2
ADI ILS/MLS 0 0 0
DEVIATION SOURCE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
THE GADI DBAR.

SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BAR 0 0 0
TIME CONSTANTS
> 0: 0 SEC
1: 0.1 SEC

2: 0.2 SEC
3: 0.25 SEC
4: 0.3 SEC
5: 0.35 SEC
6: 0.4 SEC
7: 0.5 SEC
4.7.68 MLS VERTICAL ANNUNCIATION CONFIGURATION
4.7.68.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the MLS VRT ANNUNC menu.
4.7.68.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the MLS VRT ANNUNC menu.

SG RK1 RK2
MLS VERTICAL 0 0 0
ANNUNCIATION
> 0: GS
1: GP
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
MLS VERTICAL ANNUNCIATION CAN BE GLIDESLOPE OR GLIDEPATH
4.7.69 DATUM SCALING CONFIGURATION

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
NORTH UP MAP 0 0 0
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
SEL HDG COLOR 0 0 0
CMD BAR COLOR 0 0 0
REV MODE ANN 0 0 0
RISING RUNWAY 0 0 0
ADI DEV SRC 0 0 0
MLS VRT ANNUNC 0 0 0

> .. MORE ..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> DATUM SCALING 0 0 0
HDG FAIL ANNUNC 0 0 0
VNAV APR SCALE 0 0 0
LNAV CRS CTRL 0 0 0
4.7.69.D. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DATUM SCALING menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DATUM SCALE 0 0 0
> 0: 393MV/DEG
1: 300MV/DEG
2: 206MV/DEG
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
SCALING USED FOR COURSE A HEADING DATUM OUTPUTS
4.7.70 HDG FAIL ANNUNCIATION CONFIGURATION
4.7.70.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the HDG FAIL ANNUNC menu.
4.7.70.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the HDG FAIL ANNUNC menu.

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NORMAL HDG
1: LARGE HDG
4.7.71 VNAV APPROACH SCALE CONFIGURATION

4.7.71.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the VNAV APR SCALE menu.
4.7.71.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the VNAV APR SCALE menu.

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: 1000 FEET
1: 500 FEET
2: 260 FEET
3: 200 FEET
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
VNAV APPROACH MODE SCALING FOR FULL SCALE DEVIATION
4.7.72 LNAV CRS CONTROL CONFIGURATION
4.7.72.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the LNAV CRS CTRL menu.
4.7.72.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the LNAV CRS CTRL menu.

SG RK1 RK2
LNAV CRS CTRL 1 1 1
0: NO
1: YES
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
THIS CONFIGURATION SELECT WHETHER THE LNAV WILL HAVE AUT0MATIC
COURSE CONTROL HANDSHAKING OR NOT.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DATUM SCALING 0 0 0


> LNAV CRS CTRL 0 0 0
NOTE:

below.
low.
figuration pages. Verify that the system resets within one second, This is indicated by

Aircraft systems and installations vary. To ease configuration and insure all interfaces will be pro-
grammed correctly, a list of interfacing equipment and type of interface should be made. The gen-
eral configuration process is demonstrated in the following example installation.
NOTE
1. INITIAL SET UP
5. DISPLAY UNIT TYPE CONFIGURATION


50. ADI PLANE/COMMAND BARS CONFIGURATION
Page 4-220 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


73. SG #1 SIDE CONFIGURATION
74. AIRCRAFT SYMBOL CONFIGURATION
75. TACAN ANNUNCIATE CONFIGURATION
76. TCAS INTRUDER DISPLAYS CONFIGURATION
77. CAT II SENSORS CONFIGURATION
78. MAX RADAR SCAN ANGLE CONFIGURATION
79. RADAR SDI CONFIGURATION
The following is the procedure for configuring the system.
the aircraft.
4.8.1.B. Turn aircraft power, avionics power and inverters on. Verify the display unit becomes
lighted within 30 seconds and all colors, red in particular, are displayed. The system
programming.
EADI will not be able to show the rack configurations, instead it will show the configuration data
coming from the HSI and the data in it’s own EEPROM.
played.

quired.
EFS 40 MAINTENANCE
ALLIED-SIGNAL INC.
IP 125-00601-0000
NP1 125-00602-0000
DP1 125-00603-0000
RP 125-00604-0000
4.8.2.C. Press the NEXT MENU button. The MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS PAGE will be dis-
played. A hand pointing to the first line will be displayed.
Page 4-222 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

> LRU STATUS

TEST PATTERNS
PROCESSOR ITEMS
BIT HISTORY STACK
WATCHDOG TIMER TEST
SUBSYSTEM MENU
ASCII TEXT PAGE
TION position.
NOTE
through the Front of the Symbol Generator, then NEXT MENU. You should get a Copy
Complete Message when the Operation is Complete. To change a single item in a con-
figuration page through the equipment or operating Menus until the item requiring
below.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
..MORE..
ITEM HSI ADI
> SG NUMBER 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #1 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #2 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0
ADF #1 0 0
ADF #2 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0
..MORE..
SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0
> 0: #1 EFIS
1: #2 EFIS
2: MFD
Page 4-224 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

CONFIGURATION DESCRIPTION:
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE COCKPIT LOCATION OF THIS S.G.
0: PILOT
1: CO-PILOT
2: MFD
SG RK1 RK2
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
> 0: SINGLE EHSI
1: DUAL EHSI
2: SINGLE EADI/EHSI
3: DUAL EADI/EHSI
6: SINGLE MFD SG
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE EFS SYSTEM TYPE IN WHICH THIS SG EX-
ISTS.
0: SINGLE HSI - ONLY SYSTEM (1 TUBE)
1: DUAL HSI- ONLY SYSTEM (2 TUBE)
2: SINGLE HSI/ADI SYSTEM (2 TUBE)
3: DUAL HSI/ADI SYSTEM (4 TUBE)
4: SINGLE HSI/ADI WITH MFD (3 TUBE)
5: DUAL HSI/ADI MFD (5 TUBE)
6: SINGLE MFD SG (1 TUBE)
4.8.5 DISPLAY UNIT TYPE CONFIGURATION

SG RK1 RK2
DU TYPE 0 0 0
HSI ADI
> 0: ED461 ED462
1: ED462 ED462
2: ED551A ED551A
3: ED551 ED551
4: ED551A/ED461ED462
5: ED551A/ED462ED462
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE DISPLAY UNIT TYPES FOR HSI AND ADI DIS-
PLAYS
0: 4 - INCH, CONTROLS ON HSI DU BEZEL
1: 4 - INCH, CONTROLS EXTERNAL TO DU
2: 5 - INCH, MAGNIFIED 4 - INCH DISPLAY
3: 5 - INCH, DISPLAY DESIGNED FOR 5 - INCH
4: MFD OPTION. 5 - INCH MAGNIFIED ON THE MFD BUT 4 - INCH WITH CON-
TROLS ON HSI DU BEZEL WHEN IN STANDBY.
5: MFD OPTION. 5 -INCH MAGNIFIED ON THE MFD BUT 4 - INCH WITH EXTER-
NAL CONTROLS WHEN IN STANDBY.
SG RK1 RK2
ATT HDG
0: NONE NONE
> 1: XYZ XYZ
2: 429 429
3: NONE XYZ
Page 4-226 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE TYPE OF SIDE 1 ATTITUDE AND HEADING

SOURCES
0: NONE
1: ANALOG XYZ
2: 429 AHRS SYSTEM
3: ANALOG XYZ FOR HEADING; NO #1 ATTITUDE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
IF XYZ ATTITUDE is configured (option 1) for either side, then the other side must be
configured for either option 1 or 2. See Section 3.3.3 “HEADING/ATTITUDE/AHRS/
RATE OF TURN REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS”.
SG RK1 RK2
ATT HDG
> 0: NONE NONE
1: XYZ XYZ
2: 429 429
3: NONE XYZ
SOURCES
0: NONE
1: ANALOG XYZ
2: 429 AHRS SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION NOTE:

SG RK1 RK2
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: COLLINS ROT GYRO
2: KING ROT GYRO
3: SPERRY ROT GYRO
4: 429 ROT
8: 429 YAW RATE
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE TYPE OF RATE OF TURN INPUT.
0: NONE
1: COLLINS ANALOG: 333 MV/DEG/SEC
2: KING ANALOG: 200 MV/DEG/SEC
3: SPERRY ANALOG: 666 MV/DEG/SEC
4: FROM 429 AHRS: ROT OF LABEL 330
5: COLLINS ANALOG: EFIS DOES ROLL ANGLE CORRECTION
6: KING ANALOG: EFIS DOES ROLL ANGLE CORRECTION
7: SPERRY ANALOG: EFIS DOES ROLL ANGLE CORRECTION
8: 429 AHRS LABEL 310: EFIS DOES ROLL ANGLE CORRECTION
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
• Items 1-4 should be selected if actual RATE OF TURN information is provided to the
EFS.
• Items 5-8 should be selected if YAW RATE information is provided to the EFS.
• The EFS will apply a bank angle correction to this input when items 5-8 are selected
to convert YAW RATE to RATE OF TURN.
Page 4-228 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
ADF #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429
> 3: SYNCHRO
4: DC S/C BRG ONLY
5: 429 BRG ONLY
6: SYNCHRO BRG ONLY
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE SOURCE TYPE FOR SIDE 1 ADF
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429 ADF SYSTEM
3: XYZ
4: DC SIN/COS, BEARING POINTER ONLY, NOT IN NAV SOURCE-SEQUENCE
5: XYZ, BEARING POINTER ONLY, NOT IN NAV SOURCE-SEQUENCE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
BRG ONLY selections are for an ADF that does not have a SUPER FLAG output. This
SG RK1 RK2
ADF #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429

3: SYNCHRO
4: DC S/C BRG ONLY
5: 429 BRG ONLY
6: SYNCHRO BRG ONLY
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429 ADF SYSTEM
3: XYZ
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4: KNS 81
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE SOURCE TYPE FOR THE SIDE 1 VOR/ILS RE-
CEIVER
0: NONE
1: ANALOG SIN/COS ANGLE TO VOR
3: 429 RAD:SERIES III (*)
Page 4-230 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

CONFIGURATION NOTE:
VN 411B-01 version must be configured for 429 BRG
SG RK1 RK2
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4: KNS 81
CEIVER
0: NONE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
VN 411 B-01 version must be configured for 429 BRG
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0

RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM HSI ADI
SG NUMBER 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #1 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #2 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0
ADF #1 0 0
ADF #2 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS #1 0 0 0
FMS #2 0 0 0
RNAV #1 0 0 0
RNAV #2 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
..MORE..
Page 4-232 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
> 3: 429 GOLD
4: 429 DF1=V1/M2, DF2=V2/M1
5: 429 DF1=V1/M1, DF2=V2/M2
6: 429 DF1=V1/V2, DF2=M1/M2
7: 429 DF1=V1/M*, DF2=V2/M*
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE SOURCE TYPE OF THE SIDE 1 DME UNIT
0: NONE
1: ARINC 568 SERIAL UNIT
2: KING SERIAL UNIT
3: STANDARD 429 DME
4: STANDARD MULTI-CHANNEL 429 DME
5: RELAY SWITCH MULTI-CHANNEL 429 DME
6: COLLINS TYPE MULTI-CHANNEL 429 DME
7: SINGLE MULTI-CHANNEL 429 DME, NAV IS PAIRED TO ITS CHANNEL AND
MLS IS ON EITHER CHANNEL
SG RK1 RK2
DME #2 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
> 3: 429 GOLD

4: 429 DF1=V1/M2, DF2=V2/M1

5: 429 DF1=V1/M1, DF2=V2/M2
6: 429 DF1=V2, DF2=M1/M2
7: 429 DF1=V1/M*, DF2=V2/M*
0: NONE
2: KING SERIAL UNIT
3: STANDARD 429 DME
4.8.15.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the MLS # 1 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
MLS #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429
2: 429 DEV ONLY
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE SOURCE TYPE FOR THE SIDE 1 MLS
0: NONE
1: 429 MLS WITH VALID BEARING TO STATION OUTPUTS
POINTER.
Page 4-234 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
MLS 92 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429
2: 429 DEV ONLY
0: NONE
POINTER.
SG RK1 RK2
FMS #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
3: KLN 88 - LOR
4: GAMA 429 - FMS
5: KLN 90 - GPS
6: GAMA 429 - LOR
7: GAMA 429 - GPS
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE SOURCE TYPE FOR THE SIDE 1 FMS SYSTEM
0: NONE
1: KING KNS 660, 429
2: NADIR CROUZET FMS, 429

3: KING LORAN UNIT, 429

4: GAMA 429 UNS1A, GNSX
5: KING GPS UNIT, 429
6: GAMA 429 - LORAN SENSOR ANNUNCIATION
7: GAMA 429 - GPS SENSOR ANNUNCIATION
SG RK1 RK2
FMS #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
3: KLN 88 - LOR
4: GAMA 429 - FMS
5: KLN 90 - GPS
6: GAMA 429 LOR
7: GAMA 429 GPS
0: NONE
1: KING KNS660, 429
Page 4-236 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
RNAV #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 81
SG RK1 RK2
RNAV #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 81
SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME
5: KNS 81
6: B: 429 NAV D: 429 DME

THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE SOURCE TYPE FOR THE SIDE 1 TACAN UNIT
0: NONE
1: 429 DME BEARING, 429 DME DISTANCE
2: SIN/COS BEARING, KING SERIAL DME
3: 429 BEARING, KING SERIAL DME
4: SIN/COS BEARING, 568 DME
5: KNS 81 RNAV WITH TACAN CAPABILITY, VOR #1 MUST ALSO BE CONFIG-
URED KNS 81
6: 429 NAV BEARING, 429 DME DISTANCE.
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
IF option 5 is selected VOR #1 must also be configured for KNS 81
SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME
5: KNS 81
6: B: 429 NAV D: 429 DME
0: NONE
URED KNS 81
Page 4-238 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

CONFIGURATION NOTE:
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS #1 0 0 0
FMS #2 0 0 0
RNAV #1 0 0 0
RNAV #2 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> FMS VNAV 0 0 0
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
AFCS MODE ANN 0 0 0
F/S AIR DATA 0 0 0
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
..MORE..

SG RK1 RK2
FMS VNAV 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: FEET ONLY
2: FEET OR ANGLE
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE SOURCE TYPE FOR FMS VERTICAL NAVIGA-
TION
0: NO FMS VNAV PROCESSING IS TO BE DONE
1: ONLY ’FEET’ FMS VNAV IS ALLOWED, DECLUTTER IF ’ANGLE’ IS TRANSMIT-
TED, UNS1A
2: BOTH ‘FEET’ AND ‘ANGLE’ ARE ALLOWED, KNS660
NOTE
RADAR ALTIMETER is elsewhere referred to as its equivalent RADIO ALTIMETER.
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KRA 405
2: KRA 10A
3: 429
4: ALT 50155
5: ARINC 552A
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE SOURCE TYPE FOR RADAR ALTITUDE
0: NONE
1: -10 mV/ft
2: 4 mV/ft
3: ARINC 429
Page 4-240 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

4: FOR 0-10.4 V (Below 500 ft) 20 mV/ft STARTING AT -20 ft, AFTER 10.4 V (ABOVE
500’), 3 mV/ft
5: FOR 0-10 V (Below 480 ft) STARTING AT -20 ft, AFTER 10 V (ABOVE 480 ft) LOG-
ARITHMIC TABLE.
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SINGLE ANALOG
2: DUAL ANALOG
3: SINGLE 429
4: DUAL 429
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE NUMBER AND TYPE OF FLIGHT DIRECTOR/
AUTOPILOT
0: NONE
1: SINGLE ANALOG AUTOPILOT SYSTEM
2: DUAL ANALOG AUTOPILOT SYSTEM
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS COMMAND 0 0 0
BAR SCALING

0: NONE
1: 429
> 2: P:1.0V R:750MV D:DSC
3: P:400MV R:400MV D:12V
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE SOURCE TYPE OF FLIGHT DIRECTOR COM-
MAND BARS
0: NONE
1: ARINC 429 - 429 PITCH/ ROLL COMMANDS INCLUDES KFC 400, CDV1 55
2: PITCH 1.0 V/DEG, ROLL 750 MV/DEG, DECLUTTER BASED ON INPUT DIS-
CRETE (KFC 325)
3: PITCH CMD: 400 MV/DEG, ROLL CMD: 400 MV/DEG, DECLUTTER AT 12 V
4: PITCH CMD: 400 MV/DEG, ROLL CMD: 400 MV/DEG, DECLUTTER BASED ON
INPUT DISCRETE
INPUT DISCRETE
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS MODE 0 0 0
ANNUNCIATORS
0: NONE
> 1: KFC325/400/500
2: CDV155
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE SOURCE TYPE FOR AUTOPILOT MODE AN-
NUNCIATORS
0: NONE
2 SFIM 429 AUTOPILOT
Page 4-242 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
F/S AIR DATA 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ANLG AN/AS 1D ± DCLTR
2: ANLG AN/AS 2D + DCLTR
3: ANLG COLLECTIVE
4: 429 AOA/IAS 1D
5: COLLECTIVE VIA AFCS BUS
6: ANLG AS 2D DIS DCLTR
7: 429 AN/AS 2D
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE SOURCE TYPE FOR FAST/SLOW INPUTS.
0: NONE
1: 0.2 V/KT OR 0.2 V/DEG, FULL SCALE IS ± 2 V AT THE DIAMOND, 1 DOT SCALE,
DECLUTTER ± -2.4 V, RETURN ± 2.3 V.
2: 0.22 V/KT OR 0.22 V/DEG, FULL SCALE IS ± 2.2 V AT F&S, 2 DOT SCALE, DE-
CLUTTER + 2.4 V, RETURN + 2.3 V
3: 0.2 V/mm, FULL SCALE IS ± 2 V AT THE DIAMOND, DECLUTTER 2.166 V, RE-
TURN 2.066 V
4: 429, SCALEIS ± 10 KT OR ± 10 DEG AT THE DIAMOND, 1 DOTSCALE
5: CDV155, 429 COLLECTIVE FROM AUTOPILOT BUS, FULL SCALE IS ± 100% AT
THE DIAMOND.
6: AS SCALE ONLY, 0.22 V/KT, FULL SCALE IS ± 2.2 V AT THE F&S, 2 DOT SCALE,
DECLUTTER WHEN AOA/IAS DISCREET INPUT IS GROUND.
7: 429, FULL SCALE IS ± 10 KT OR ± 10 DEG AT THE F AND S, 2 DOT SCALE

SG RK1 RK2
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: RDS81/RDS82/RDR2000
2: RDS84/RDS86
3: RDR1400/NC104
4: RDR210/2200
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES TYPE OF RADAR
0: NONE
1: RDS, 10-240 NM RANGE
2: RIDS, 5-320 NM RANGE
3: EFS HAS ONLY RANGE CONTROL, 5-320 NM
4: NEW RDR 2XXX, 5-320 NM RANGE
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: CP 466 A,B,C
2: CP 113F
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE TYPE OF RADAR CONTROL PANEL
0: NONE
1: STANDARD RADAR CONTROLS
2: INCLUDES DUAL TILT CONTROLS
Page 4-244 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
0: NONE
> 1: BENDIX/KING
SG RK1 RK2
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: CP 469A
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
FMS VNAV 0 0 0
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
AFCS MODE ANN 0 0 0
AIR DATA 0 0 0
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> JOYSTICK 0 0 0
TCAS 0 0 0
HOMING #1 0 0 0
HOMING #2 0 0 0
LIGHTNING DET 0 0 0
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
CABLE MODE 0 0 0
SG RK1 RK2
JOYSTICK 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 5 WIRE
2: FORMATTED 429
3: RAW 429
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE SOURCE TYPE FOR JOYSTICK
0: NONE
1: 5-WIRE JOYSTICK CONNECTED TO THIS SG
2: OPERATION SLAVED TO THE MFD JOYSTICK; FMS JOYSTICK DATA FROM
MFD IS READ FROM CHECKLIST INPUT PORT
3. HIGH SPEED 429 JOYSTICK CONNECT TO THIS SG, MOST LIKELY FROM
CHECKLIST UNIT.
Page 4-246 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
TCAS 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: BENDIX/KING
SG RK1 RK2
HOMING #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ANALOG
SG RK1 RK2
HOMING #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ANALOG

SG RK1 RK2
LIGHTNING DET 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: STORMSCOPE
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE SOURCE TYPE FOR LIGHTNING DETECTION
0: NONE
1: 429 STORMSCOPE
menu.
SG RK1 RK2
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO

SG RK1 RK2
CABLE MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
Page 4-248 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

PAGE.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> VERT SCALE SIDE1 0 0 0
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
SPARE 0 0 0
..MORE..

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: RIGHT
1: LEFT

SG RK1 RK2
SCALE ON BACKCOURSE

0: NO
> 1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY FMS 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: YES
NOTE
FMS MAP may be displayed when FMS is not the primary NAV selected.
CAUTION

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY WIND 0 0 0
VECTOR FROM FMS
0: NO
> 1: YES
Page 4-250 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
ANGLE FROM FMS
0: NO
> 1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES
DETERMINE IF DG-ONLY MODE IS MADE AVAILABLE DURING THE HSI KEY SE-
QUENCE.
CAUTION
DG ONLY MODE CAN ALLOW AN UNACCEPTABLE CONDITION TO EXIST WITH
SOME AUTOPILOTS. SEE CERTIFICATION SECTION.


SG RK1 RK2
DISTANCE ON BRG PTR
0: NO
2: YES - NAV LABEL
OPTIONAL DISPLAY OF DME DISTANCE ONLY IN THE BEARING POINTER
FIELD WITH THE RMI KEY SEQUENCE.
1: DISTANCE IS PROVIDED AND LABELED AS DME BUS AS BEARING POINT-
ER IS DRAWN.USE THIS A SINGLE CHANNEL DME.
2: DISTANCE IS PROVIDED AND LABELED AS NAV BUT NO BEARING POINT
IS DRAWN. USE THIS WITH A MULTI-CHANNEL DME.

SG RK1 RK2
RADAR ONLY MODE0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES
Page 4-252 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
0: NORMAL NAV SOURCE SEQUENCE
1: ALTERNATE BETWEEN THE MASTER SG’s SELECTED NAV SOURCE AND AN
FMS NAV SOURCE

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
SPARE 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> HDG TAPE 0 0 0
ADI PLANE/CMD BAR 0 0 0
DH SELECT 0 0 0

CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0

SEL HDG SYNC 0 0 0
SEL CRS SYNC 0 0 0
..MORE..

SG RK1 RK2
TAPE
> 0: NO
1: YES
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
4.8.50 ADI PLANE/COMMAND BARS CONFIGURATION

SG RK1 RK2
ADI AIRCRAFT/ 0 0 0
COMMAND BAR SYMBOLS
> 0: WEDGE PLANE/SINGLE CUE
1: BULLS EYE/SPLIT CUE
2: DISCRETE SELECT
WHAT TYPE OF ADI AIRCRAFT SYMBOLS AND COMMAND BARS SHOULD BE
DISPLAYED?
0: WEDGE AIRCRAFT SYMBOL WITH SINGLE CUE BAR THAT MOVES IN BOTH
AXES
1: BULLS EYE AIRCRAFT SYMBOL WITH HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL BARS
2: WEDGE/BLILLS EYE, SINGLE/SPLIT SELECTABE THROUGH DISCRETE INPUT
Page 4-254 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

CONFIGURATION NOTE:
The WEDGE AIRCRAFT SYMBOL of option 0 and option 2 should not be configured
if perspective lines are also configured. See the Certification Section of this manual.

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: ROLL INDICATOR
1: SKY POINTER
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE TYPE OF ADI ROLL INDICATOR
0: ARC OF TIC MARKS MOVES WITH ROLL
1: ARC OF TIC MARKS REMAINS STATIONARY WITH ROLL CHANGES
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
EADI ROLL indicator configuration, may be used to match #2 EADI operation.

SG RK1 RK2
ON UNUSUAL ATTITUDE
> 0: NO
1: YES

UNDER EXCESSIVE PITCH AND ROLL VALUES, SHOULD NAV DATA BE DE-
CLUTTERED?
0: NO
1: YES, DECLUTTER OF NON-ATTITUDE DATA OCCURS WHEN PITCH EXCEEDS
+30 OR -20 DEGREES, OR WHEN ROLL EXCEED +/- 65 DEGREES.

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NO
1: YES - NO DEVIATION LIMITS
2: FAR-GS:75UA LOC:25/35UA
3: JAR-GS:75UA LOC:25UA
IS CATEGORY II DEVIATION MONITOR AVAILABLE
0: NO
1: YES, WITHOUT ANY DEVIATION MONITORING
2: YES, USING FAR DEVIATION LIMITS
3: YES, USING JAR DEVIATION LIMITS

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY ADI 0 0 0
PERSPECTIVE LINES
Page 4-256 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DH SELECT 0 0 0
BY EFIS
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: YES - MASTER
2: YES - SLAVE
SHOULD CONTROL PANEL ITEMS BE SYNCHRONIZED BETWEEN TWO SG
SUCH AS IN TANDEM INSTALLATIONS.


SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED HDG 0 0 0
SYNC FROM OTHER SG
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED CRS 0 0 0
SYNC FROM OTHER SG
> 0: NO
1: YES

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BARS 0 0 0
DH SELECT 0 0 0
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
Page 4-258 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SEL HDG SYNC 0 0 0

SEL CRS SYNC 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> NORTH UP MAP 0 0 0
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
SEL HDG COLOR 0 0 0
CMD BAR COLOR 0 0 0
REV MODE ANN 0 0 0
RISING RUNWAY 0 0 0
ADI DEV SRC 0 0 0
.. MORE ..

SG RK1 RK2
NORTH UP MAP 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
> 0: SMALL DIAMOND


2: RECTANGLE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
Do not select DIAMOND VERTICAL SCALE POINTER for 4” DU
FROM menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY 0 0 0
MESSAGES FROM FMS
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED 0 0 0
> 0: ORANGE
1: CYAN
2: MAGENTA
Page 4-260 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BAR 0 0 0
COLOR
> 0: GREEN
1: MAGENTA

SG RK1 RK2
REVERSIONARY 0 0 0
MODE ANNUNCIATION
> 0: NONE
1: STBY/COPY
2: SG2
3: SG3
HOW SHOULD ANY REVERSIONARY MODE BE ANNUNCIATED?


SG RK1 RK2
ADI LOC/MLS 0 0 0
DISPLAY
> 0: RISING RUNWAY
1: DBAR
2: RUNWAY OR DBAR
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES HOW LOC/MLS DEVIATION IS DISPLAYED ON THE
EADI.
1: ALWAYS AS A DBAR
4.8.66.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the ADI DEV SRC menu.
4.8.66.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the ADI DEV SRC menu.

SG RK1 RK2
ADI ILS/MLS 0 0 0
DEVIATION SOURCE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES WHAT SOURCE DRIVES THE EADI DBAR.
Page 4-262 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BAR 0 0 0
TIME CONSTANTS
> 0: 0 SEC
1: 0.1 SEC
2: 0.2 SEC
3: 0.25 SEC
4: 0.3 SEC
5: 0.35 SEC
6: 0.4 SEC
7: 0.5 SEC

SG RK1 RK2
MLS VERTICAL 0 0 0
ANNUNCIATION
> 0: GS
1: GP

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
NORTH UP MAP 0 0 0

VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0

SEL HDG COLOR 0 0 0
CMD BAR COLOR 0 0 0
REV MODE ANN 0 0 0
RISING RUNWAY 0 0 0
ADI DEV SRC 0 0 0
> .. MORE ..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
LNAV CRS CTRL 0 0 0
SG # 1 SIDE 0 0 0
AIRCRAFT SYMBOL 0 0 0
TACAN ANNUNC 0 0 0
TCAS 0 0 0
CATII SENSORS 0 0 0
RADAR SCAN 0 0 0
.. MORE ..

SG RK1 RK2
DATUM SCALE 0 0 0
> 0: 393 MV/DEG
1: 300 MV/DEG
2: 206 MV/DEG
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES OUTPUT SCALING USED FOR HEADING &
COURSE DATUM
0: KING 22.5 V SIN (ANGLE)
1: ARINC 17.2 V SIN (ANGLE)
Page 4-264 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

2: SPERRY 11.8 V SIN (ANGLE)

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NORMAL HDG
1: LARGE HDG
4.8.71 VNAV APRROACH SCALE CONFIGURATION

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: 1000 FEET
1: 500 FEET
2: 250 FEET
3: 200 FEET


SG RK1 RK2
XSIDE LNAV 0 0 0
CRS & JSTK CTL
> 0: NO
1: YES
SHOULD THE SG ATTEMPT TO PERFORM SELECTED COURSE AND JOYSTICK
HANDSHAKE WITH THE OFF-SIDE LNAV?
4.8.73 SG #1 SIDE CONFIGURATION
4.8.73.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the SG #1 SIDE menu.
4.8.73.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the SG #1 SIDE menu.

SG RK1 RK2
SG #1 SIDE 0 0 0
> 0: LEFT
1: RIGHT
WHICH PHYSICAL SIDE OF THE AIRCRAFT IS THE #1 SG (PILOTS SG) ON?
0: SG #1 ON THE LEFT, FIXED WING
1: SG #1 ON THE RIGHT, HELICOPTER
4.8.74 AIRCRAFT SYMBOL CONFIGURATION
4.8.74.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the AIRCRAFT SYMBOL menu.
4.8.74.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the AIRCRAFT SYMBOL menu.

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: FIXED WING
Page 4-266 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

1: ROTARY WING
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES WHICH TYPE OF SYMBOLIC AIRCRAFT SYMBOL
SHOULD BE DISPLAYED
0: SHOW STANDARD AIRPLANE SYMBOL
1: SHOW HELICOPTER SYMBOL
4.8.75 TACAN ANNUNCIATE CONFIGURATION
4.8.75.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the TACAN ANNUNC menu.
4.8.75.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the TACAN ANNUNC menu.

SG RK1 RK2
TACAN ANNUC 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: A/A L141 26=0 27=1
2: A/A L141 27=1 28=1
SHOULD THE TACAN AIR-TO AIR MODE BE ANNUNCIATED?
0: NO
1: DISPLAY A/A MESSAGE WHEN BIT 27 AND 26 OF LABEL 141 ARE 10
4.8.76 TCAS INTRUDER DISPLAYS CONFIGURATION
4.8.76.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the TCAS DISPLAY menu.
4.8.76.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the TCAS DISPLAY menu.

SG RK1 RK2
TCAS INTRUDER 0 0 0
DISPLAYS
> 0: HSI-NONE MFD- NONE
1: HSI-NONE MFD-TCAS ONLY

2: HSI-NONE MFD-ALL
3: HSI-HSI ONLY MFD-ALL
4: HSI-ALL MFD-ALL
WHAT TYPE OF TCAS INTRUDER DISPLAY SHOULD BE PRESENTED?
0: NO TCAS INTRUDER DISPLAYS, ONLY SHOW TRAFFIC MESSAGE
1: ONLY SHOW INTRUDERS ON THE TCAS ONLY MFD DISPLAY MODE TST/REF
MODE DOES NOT FUNCTION TCAS SELECTION.
2: SHOW INTRUDERS ON ALL MFD MODES. TST/REF DOES NOT FUNCTION
FOR TCAS SELECTION ON HSI BUT DOES ON MFD.
3: SHOW INTRUDERS ON HSI COMPASS AND MFD ALL MODES. TST/REF DOES
NOT FUNCTION FOR TCAS SELECTION ON HSI BUT DOES ON MFD
4: SHOW INTRUDERS ON ALL HSI AND MFD MODES. TST/REF DOES FUNCTION
FOR TCAS SELECTION ON ALL DISPLAYS.
4.8.77 CAT II SENSORS CONFIGURATION
4.8.77.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the CAT II SENSORS menu.
4.8.77.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the CAT II SENSORS menu.

SG RK1 RK2
CATII SENSORS 0 0 0
> 0: LOC ONLY
1: MLS ONLY
2: LOC OR MLS
WHAT SENSORS ARE VALID FOR CAT II APPROACHES?
4.8.78 MAX RADAR SCAN ANGLE CONFIGURATION
4.8.78.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the RADAR SCAN menu.
4.8.78.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the RADAR SCAN menu.
Page 4-268 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
MAX RADAR 0 0 0
SCAN ANGLE
> 0: 90 DEG
0: 100 DEG
1: 120 RIGHT
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE MAXIMUM SCAN ANGLE DISPLAYED ON EFIS
4.8.79 RADAR SDI CONFIGURATION

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DATUM SCALING 0 0 0
LNAV CRS CTRL 0 0 0
SG # 1 0 0 0
TACAN ANNUNC 0 0 0
TCAS DISPLAYS 0 0 0
CATII SENSORS 0 0 0
RADAR SCAN 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> RADAR SDI 0 0 0
4.8.79.D. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the RADAR SDI menu.

SG RK1 RK2
RADAR SDI 0 0 0
> 0: NONE - MATCH FOR DATA

1: SDI # 1 + RANGE
2: SDI # 2 + RANGE
3: SDI # 3 + RANGE
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE RADAR SDI MATCHING PERFORMED IN THIS
SG
0: NO SDI MATCHING, USE RANGE, GAIN, TILT, AND MODE MATCHING TO DE-
TERMINE DATA FOR THIS INDICATOR
1: INDICATOR #1 PLUS RANGE MATCH

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> RADAR SDI 0 0 0
NOTE

below.
low.
Page 4-270 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

4.8.80.E. Press the NEXT MENU BUTTON to copy the config data in the SG to Racks 1 & 2.

NOTE
1. INITIAL SET UP
Page 4-272 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000




80. PITCH OFFSET SYNC CONFIGURATION
the aircraft.
programming.
played.
Page 4-274 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

quired.
EFS 40 MAINTENANCE
ALLIED-SIGNAL INC.
IP 125-00601-0000
NP1 125-00602-0000
DP1 125-00603-0000
RP 125-00604-0000

> LRU STATUS

TEST PATTERNS
PROCESSOR ITEMS
BIT HISTORY STACK
WATCHDOG TIMER TEST
SUBSYSTEM MENU
ASCII TEXT PAGE
TION position.
NOTE
below.
Page 4-276 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
..MORE..
ITEM HSI ADI
> SG NUMBER 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #1 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #2 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0
ADF #1 0 0
ADF #2 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0
..MORE..
SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0
> 0: #1 EFIS
1: #2 EFIS
2: MFD

0: PILOT
1: CO-PILOT
2: MFD
SG RK1 RK2
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
> 0: SINGLE EHSI
1: DUAL EHSI
2: SINGLE EADI/EHSI
3: DUAL EADI/EHSI
6: SINGLE MFD SG
ISTS.
Page 4-278 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
DU TYPE 0 0 0
HSI ADI
> 0: ED461 ED462
1: ED462 ED462
2: ED551A ED551A
3: ED551 ED551
4: ED551A/ED461ED462
5: ED551A/ED462ED462
PLAYS
SG RK1 RK2
ATT HDG
0: NONE NONE
> 1: XYZ XYZ
2: 429 429
3: NONE XYZ


SOURCES
0: NONE
1: ANALOG XYZ
2: 429 AHRS SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
ATT HDG
> 0: NONE NONE
1: XYZ XYZ
2: 429 429
3: NONE XYZ
SOURCES
0: NONE
1: ANALOG XYZ
2: 429 AHRS SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
Page 4-280 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: COLLINS ROT GYRO
2: KING ROT GYRO
3: SPERRY ROT GYRO
4: 429 ROT
8: 429 YAW RATE
0. NONE
1. COLLINS ANALOG: 333 MV/DEG/SEC
2. KING ANALOG: 200 MV/DEG/SEC
3. SPERRY ANALOG: 666 MV/DEG/SEC
4. FROM 429 AHRS: ROT OF LABEL 330
5. COLLINS ANALOG: EFIS DOES ROLL ANGLE CORRECTION
6. KING ANALOG: EFIS DOES ROLL ANGLE CORRECTION
7. SPERRY ANALOG: EFIS DOES ROLL ANGLE CORRECTION
8. 429 AHRS LABEL 310: EFIS DOES ROLL ANGLE CORRECTION
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
EFS.

SG RK1 RK2
ADF #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429
> 3: SYNCHRO
4: DC S/C BRG ONLY
5: 429 BRG ONLY
6: SYNCHRO ORG ONLY
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429 ADF SYSTEM
3: XYZ
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
ADF #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429
3: SYNCHRO
4: DC S/C BRG ONLY
Page 4-282 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

5: 429 BRG ONLY

6: SYNCHRO BRG ONLY
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429 ADF SYSTEM
3: XYZ
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4: KNS81
CEIVER
0: NONE
3: 429 RAD: SERIES III (*)
CONFIGURATION NOTE:

SG RK1 RK2
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4: KNS81
CEIVER
0: NONE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0
Page 4-284 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM HSI ADI
SG NUMBER 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #1 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #2 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0
ADF #1 0 0
ADF #2 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS #1 0 0 0
FMS #2 0 0 0
RNAV #1 0 0 0
RNAV #2 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
..MORE..

SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
> 3: 429 GOLD
4: 429 DF1=V1/M2, DF2=V2/M1
5: 429 DF1=V1/M1, DF2=V2/M2
6: 429 DF1=V1/V2, DF2=M1/M2
7: 429 DF1=V1/M*, DF2=V2/M*
0: NONE
2: KING SERIAL UNIT
3: STANDARD 429 DME
SG RK1 RK2
DME #2 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
> 3: 429 GOLD
4: 429 DF1=V1/M2, DF2=V2/M1
5: 429 DF1=V1/M1, DF2=V2/M2
Page 4-286 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

6: 429 DF1=V2, DF2=M1/M2

7: 429 DF1=V1/M*, DF2=V2/M*
0: NONE
2: KING SERIAL UNIT
3: STANDARD 429 DME
SG RK1 RK2
MLS #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429
2: 429 DEV ONLY
0: NONE
POINTER.

SG RK1 RK2
MLS #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429
2: 429 DEV ONLY
0: NONE
POINTER.
SG RK1 RK2
FMS #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
3: KLN 88 - LOR
4: GAMA 429 - FMS
5: KLN 90 - GPS
6: GAMA 429 LOR
7: GAMA 429 GPS
0: NONE
1: KING KNS 660, 429
Page 4-288 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
FMS #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
3: KLN 88 - LOR
4: GAMA 429 - FMS
5: KLN 90 - GPS
6: GAMA 429 LOR
7: GAMA 429 GPS
0: NONE
1: KING KNS660, 429

SG RK1 RK2
RNAV #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 81
SG RK1 RK2
RNAV #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 81
SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME
5: KNS81
6: B: 429 NAV D: 429 DME
Page 4-290 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

0: NONE
URED KNS 81
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME
5: KNS81
6: B: 429 NAV D: 429 DME
0: NONE
URED KNS 81
CONFIGURATION NOTE:

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS #1 0 0 0
FMS #2 0 0 0
RNAV #1 0 0 0
RNAV #2 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> FMS VNAV 0 0 0
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
AFCS MODE ANN 0 0 0
F/S AIR DATA 0 0 0
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
..MORE..
SG RK1 RK2
Page 4-292 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

FMS VNAV 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: FEET ONLY
2: FEET OR ANGLE
TION
1: ONLY ‘FEET’ FMS VNAV IS ALLOWED, DECLUTTER IF’ANGLE’ IS TRANSMIT-
TED, UNS1A
2: BOTH ‘FEET’AND ‘ANGLE’ARE ALLOWED, KNS660
NOTE
RADAR ALTIMETER is elsewhere referred to as its equivalent: RADIO ALTIMETER.
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KRA 405
2: KRA 10A
3: 429
4: ALT 50/55
5: ARINC 552A
0: NONE
1: - 10 mV/ft
2: 4 mV/ft
3: ARINC 429
500’), 3 mV/ft

ARITHMIC TABLE.
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SINGLE ANALOG
2: DUAL ANALOG
3: SINGLE 429
4: DUAL 429
AUTOPILOT
0: NONE
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS COMMAND 0 0 0
BAR SCALING
0: NONE
1: 429
Page 4-294 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

> 2: P:1.0V R:750MV D:DSC

3: P:400MV R:400MV D:12V
MAND BARS
0: NONE
CRETE (KFC 325)
INPUT DISCRETE
INPUT DISCRETE
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS MODE 0 0 0
ANNUNCIATORS
0: NONE
> 1: KFC325/400/500
2: CDV155
NUNCIATORS
0: NONE

SG RK1 RK2
F/S AIR DATA 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ANLG AN/AS 1D +/- DCLTR
3: ANLG COLLECTIVE
4: 429 AOA/IAS 1D
7: 429 AN/AS 2D
8: MACH, NO F/S
0: NONE
CLUTTER
+ 2.4 V, RETURN + 2.3 V
TURN 2.066 V
4: 429, SCALE IS ± 10 KT OR ± 10 DEG AT THE DIAMOND, 1 DOT SCALE
THE DIAMOND.
8: 429 MACH DISPLAY, NOT FAST/SLOW SCALE
Page 4-296 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: RDS81/RDS82/RDR2000
2: RDS84/RDS86
3: RDR1400/NC104
4: RDR210/2200
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE TYPE OF RADAR UNIT
0: NONE
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: CP 466 A,B,C
2: CP 113F
0: NONE

SG RK1 RK2
0: NONE
> 1: BENDIX/KING
SG RK1 RK2
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: CP 469A
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
FMS VNAV 0 0 0
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
AFCS MODE ANN 0 0 0
AIR DATA 0 0 0
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
Page 4-298 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

> ..MORE..
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> JOYSTICK 0 0 0
TCAS 0 0 0
HOMING #1 0 0 0
HOMING #2 0 0 0
LIGHTNING DIET 0 0 0
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
CABLE MODE 0 0 0
SG RK1 RK2
JOYSTICK 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 5 WIRE
2: FORMATTED 429
3: RAW 429
0: NONE
CHECKLIST UNIT.
4.9.34.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer, to the TCAS menu.

SG RK1 RK2
TCAS 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: BENDIX/KING
SG RK1 RK2
HOMING #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ANALOG
SG RK1 RK2
HOMING #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ANALOG
Page 4-300 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
LIGHTNING DET 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: STORMSCOPE
0: NONE
1: 429 STORMSCOPE
menu.
SG RK1 RK2
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES NO COUPLER FLAG
2: YES WITH COUPLER FLAG

SG RK1 RK2
CABLE MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO

PAGE.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
SPARE 0 0 0
..MORE..

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: RIGHT
1: LEFT

SG RK1 RK2
Page 4-302 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SCALE ON BACKCOURSE
0: NO
> 1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY FMS 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: YES
NOTE
CAUTION

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY WIND 0 0 0
VECTOR FROM FMS
0: NO
> 1: YES


SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
ANGLE FROM FMS
0: NO
> 1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES WHEN FMS SELECTED
2: YES FULLTIME
QUENCE
CAUTION
Page 4-304 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
DISTANCE ON BRG PTR
0: NO
2: YES - NAV LABEL
2: DISTANCE IS PROVIDED AND LABELED AS NAV BUT NO BEARING POINT IS

SG RK1 RK2
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES


SG RK1 RK2
FMS NAV SOURCE

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
SPARE 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> HDG TAPE 0 0 0
Page 4-306 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

CATII AVAILABLE 0 0 0
DH SELECT 0 0 0
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
SEL HDG SYNC 0 0 0
SEL CRS SYNC 0 0 0
..MORE..

SG RK1 RK2
TAPE
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
ADI AIRCRAFT/ 0 0 0
COMMAND BAR SYMBOLS
2: DISCRETE SELECT
DISPLAYED?

AXES
2: WEDGE/BULLS EYE, SINGLE/SPLIT SELECTABLE THROUGH DISCRETE IN-
PUT
CONFIGURATION NOTE:

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: ROLL INDICATOR
1: SKY POINTER
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
OPERATION.

SG RK1 RK2
Page 4-308 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

ON UNUSUAL ATTITUDE
> 0: NO
1: YES
CLUTTERED?
0: NO
+30 OR -20 DEGREES, OR WHEN ROLL EXCEED ± 65 DEGREES.

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NO
0: NO


SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY ADI 0 0 0
PERSPECTIVE LINES
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DH SELECT 0 0 0
BY EFIS
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: YES - MASTER
2: YES - SLAVE
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES IF CONTROL PANEL ITEMS SHOULD BE
Page 4-310 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SYNCHRONIZED BETWEEN TWO SG SUCH AS IN TANDEM INSTALLATIONS.


SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED HDG 0 0 0
SYNC FROM OTHER SG
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED CRS 0 0 0
SYNC FROM OTHER SG
> 0: NO
1: YES
4.9.59.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move the pointer to MORE,

ITEM SG RK1 RK2

COMMAND BARS 0 0 0
DH SELECT 0 0 0
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
SEL HDG SYNC 0 0 0
SEL CRS SYNC 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
SEL HDG COLOR 0 0 0
CMD BAR COLOR 0 0 0
REV MODE ANN 0 0 0
RISING RUNWAY 0 0 0
ADI DEV SRC 0 0 0
.. MORE ..

SG RK1 RK2
NORTH UP MAP 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES
Page 4-312 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
> 0: SMALL DIAMOND
2: RECTANGLE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
DO NOT SELECT DIAMOND VERTICAL SCALE POINTER FOR 4” DU
FROM menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY 0 0 0
MESSAGES FROM FMS
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED 0 0 0
> 0: ORANGE
1: CYAN
2: MAGENTA

SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BAR 0 0 0
COLOR
> 0: GREEN
1: MAGENTA

SG RK1 RK2
REVERSIONARY 0 0 0
MODE ANNUNCIATION
> 0: NONE
1: STBY/COPY
2: SG2
3: SG3
Page 4-314 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000



SG RK1 RK2
ADI LOC/MLS 0 0 0
DISPLAY
> 0: RISING RUNWAY
1: DBAR
2: RUNWAY OR DBAR
EADI.
1: ALWAYS AS A DBAR

SG RK1 RK2
ADI ILSIMLS 0 0 0
DEVIATION SOURCE



SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BAR 0 0 0
TIME CONSTANTS
> 0: 0 SEC
1: 0.1 SEC
2: 0.2 SEC
3: 0.25 SEC
4: 0.3 SEC
5: 0.35 SEC
6: 0.4 SEC
7: 0.5 SEC

SG RK1 RK2
MLS VERTICAL 0 0 0
ANNUNCIATION
> 0: GS
1: GP
Page 4-316 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


ITEM SG RK1 RK2
NORTH UP MAP 0 0 0
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
SEL HDG COLOR 0 0 0
CMD BAR COLOR 0 0 0
REV MODE ANN 0 0 0
RISING RUNWAY 0 0 0
ADI DEV SRC 0 0 0
> .. MORE ..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
LNAV CRS CTRL 0 0 0
SG # 1 SIDE 0 0 0
TACAN ANNUNC 0 0 0
TCAS 0 0 0
CAT II SENSORS 0 0 0
RADAR SCAN 0 0 0
.. MORE ..

SG RK1 RK2
DATUM SCALE 0 0 0

> 0: 393 MV/DEG

1: 300 MV/DEG
2: 206 MV/DEG
COURSE DATUM

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NORMAL HDG
1: LARGE HDG

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: 1000 FEET
1: 500 FEET
2: 250 FEET
3: 200 FEET
Page 4-318 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
XSIDE LNAV 0 0 0
CRS & JSTK CTL
> 0:NO
1:YES
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES IF THE SG ATTEMPTS TO PERFORM SELECTED
COURSE AND JOYSTICK HANDSHAKE WITH THE OFF-SIDE LNAV.

SG RK1 RK2
SG #1 SIDE 0 0 0
> 0: LEFT
1: RIGHT
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE PHYSICAL SIDE OF THE AIRCRAFT
ON WHICH THE #1 SG (PILOTS SG) IS LOCATED.


SG RK1 RK2
> 0: FIXED WING
1: ROTARY WING
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES WHICH TYPE OF SYMBOLIC
AIRCRAFT SYMBOL SHOULD BE DISPLAYED

SG RK1 RK2
TACAN ANNUC 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: A/A L141 26=0 27=1
2: A/A L141 27=1 28=1
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES IF THE TACAN AIR-TO AIR MODE SHOULD BE AN-
NUNCIATED
0: NO
Page 4-320 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
TCAS INTRUDER 0 0 0
DISPLAYS
2: HSI-NONE MFD-ALL
4: HSI-ALL MFD-ALL
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE TYPE OF TCAS INTRUDER DISPLAY TO BE
PRESENTED

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: LOC ONLY
1: MLS ONLY
2: LOC OR MLS

THIS SCREEN DETERMINES WHICH SENSORS ARE VALID FOR CAT II AP-
PROACHES.

SG RK1 RK2
MAX RADAR 0 0 0
SCAN ANGLE
> 0: 90 DEG
0: 100 DEG
1: 120 RIGHT

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DATUM SCALING 0 0 0
LNAV CRS CTRL 0 0 0
SG # 1 0 0 0
TACAN ANNUNC 0 0 0
TCAS DISPLAYS 0 0 0
CATII SENSORS 0 0 0
RADAR SCAN 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
Page 4-322 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> RADAR SDI 0 0 0
PITCH SYNC DISC 0 0 0

SG RK1 RK2
RADAR SDI 0 0 0
1: SDI # 1 + RANGE
2: SDI # 2 + RANGE
3: SDI # 3 + RANGE
SG
4.9.80 PITCH OFFSET SYNC CONFIGURATION
4.9.80.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the PITCH OFFSET SYNC DIS-
CRETE menu.
4.9.80.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the PITCH OFFSET SYNC DISCRETE menu.

SG RK1 RK2
PITCH OFFSET 0 0 0
SYNC DISCRETE
> 0: NO
1: YES

CAPABILITY TO SYNC THE DISPLAYED PITCH TO A CONSTANT OFFSET WITH

AN INPUT DISCRETE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
ONLY FOR HELICOPTER USE.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
RADAR SDI 0 0 0
> PITCH SYNC DISC 0 0 0
NOTE

below.
low.
Page 4-324 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000



NOTE
1. INITIAL SET UP
Page 4-326 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


40. VARIABLE LNAV CONFIGURATION


4.10.1 INITIALSETUP
the aircraft.
programming.
played.
Page 4-328 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

quired.
EFS 40 MAINTENANCE
ALLIED-SIGNAL INC.
IP 125-00601-0000
NP1 125-00602-0000
DP1 125-00603-0000
RP 125-00604-0000

> LRU STATUS

TEST PATTERNS
PROCESSOR ITEMS
BIT HISTORY STACK
WATCHDOG TIMER TEST
SUBSYSTEM MENU
ASCII TEXT PAGE
TION position.
NOTE
below.
Page 4-330 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
..MORE..
ITEM HSI ADI
> SG NUMBER 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #1 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #2 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0
ADF #1 0 0
ADF #2 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0
..MORE..
SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0
> 0: #1 EFIS
1: #2 EFIS
2: MFD

0: PILOT
1: CO-PILOT
2: MFD
SG RK1 RK2
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
> 0: SINGLE EHSI
1: DUAL EHSI
2: SINGLE EADI/EHSI
3: DUAL EADI/EHSI
6: SINGLE MFD SG
ISTS.
Page 4-332 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
DU TYPE 0 0 0
HSI ADI
> 0: ED461 ED462
1: ED462 ED462
2: ED551A ED551A
3: ED551 ED551
4: ED551A/ED461ED462
5: ED551A/ED462ED462
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE DISPLAY UNIT TYPES
FOR HSI AND ADI DISPLAYS
SG RK1 RK2
ATT HDG
0: NONE NONE
> 1: XYZ XYZ
2: 429 429
3: NONE XYZ


SOURCES
0: NONE
1: ANALOG XYZ
2: 429 AHRS SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
ATT HDG
> 0: NONE NONE
1: XYZ XYZ
2: 429 429
3: NONE XYZ
SOURCES
0: NONE
1: ANALOG XYZ
2: 429 AHRS SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
Page 4-334 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: COLLINS ROT GYRO
2: KING ROT GYRO
3: SPERRY ROT GYRO
4: 429 ROT
8: 429 YAW RATE
0. NONE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
Items 1-4 should be selected if actual RATE OF TURN information is provided to the
EFS.
Items 5-8 should be selected if YAW RATE information is provided to the EFS.
The EFS will apply a bank angle correction to this input when items 5-8 are selected to
convert YAW RATE to RATE OF TURN.

SG RK1 RK2
ADF #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429
> 3: SYNCHRO
4: DC S/C BRG ONLY
5: 429 BRG ONLY
6: SYNCHRO BRG ONLY
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429 ADF SYSTEM
3: XYZ
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
BRG ONLY selections are for an ADF that does not have a SUPER FLAG output.
This limits ADF display to bearing pointers only.
SG RK1 RK2
ADF #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429
3: SYNCHRO
4: DC S/C BRG ONLY
Page 4-336 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

5: 429 BRG ONLY

6: SYNCHRO BRG ONLY
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429 ADF SYSTEM
3: XYZ
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4: KNS81
CEIVER
0: NONE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:

SG RK1 RK2
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4: KNS81
CEIVER
0: NONE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0
Page 4-338 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM HSI ADI
SG NUMBER 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #1 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #2 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0
ADF #1 0 0
ADF #2 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS #1 0 0 0
FMS #2 0 0 0
RNAV #1 0 0 0
RNAV #2 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
..MORE..

SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
> 3: 429 GOLD
4: 429 DF1=V1/M2, DF2=V2/M1
5: 429 DF1=V1/M1, DF2=V2/M2
6: 429 DF1=V1/V2, DF2=M1/M2
7: 429 DF1=V1/M*, DF2=V2/M*
0: NONE
2: KING SERIAL UNIT
3: STANDARD 429 DME
4: STANDARD MULTI-CHANNEL429DME
SG RK1 RK2
DME #2 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
> 3: 429 GOLD
4: 429 DF1=V1/M2, DF2=V2/M1
5: 429 DF1=V1/M1, DF2=V2/M2
Page 4-340 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

6: 429 DF1=V2, DF2=M1/M2

7: 429 DF1=V1/M*, DF2=V2/M*
0:NONE
1:ARINC 568 SERIAL UNIT
2:KING SERIAL UNIT
3:STANDARD 429 DME
4:STANDARD MULTI-CHANNEL 429 DME
5:RELAY SWITCH MULTI-CHANNEL 429 DME
6:COLLINS TYPE MULTI-CHANNEL 429 DME
7:SINGLE MULTI-CHANNEL 429 DME, NAV IS PAIRED TO ITS CHANNEL AND
SG RK1 RK2
MLS #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429
2: 429 DEV ONLY
0: NONE
2: 429 IALS WITHOUT VALID BEARING TO STATION OUTPUTS. NO MLS RMI
POINTER.

SG RK1 RK2
MLS #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429
2: 429 DEV ONLY
0: NONE
POINTER.
SG RK1 RK2
FMS #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
3: KLN 88 - LOR
4: GAMA 429 - FMS
5: KLN 90 - GPS
6: GAMA 429 - LOR
7: GAMA 429 - GPS
0: NONE
1: KING KNS 660, 429
Page 4-342 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
FMS #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
3: KLN 88 - LOR
4: GAMA 429 - FMS
5: KLN 90 - GPS
6: GAMA 429 LOR
7: GAMA 429 GPS
0: NONE
1: KING KNS660, 429

SG RK1 RK2
RNAV #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 81
SG RK1 RK2
RNAV #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 81
SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME
5: KNS81
6: B: 429 NAV D: 429 DME
Page 4-344 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

0: NONE
URED KNS 81
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME
5: KNS81
6: B: 429 NAV D: 429 DME
0: NONE
URED KNS 81
CONFIGURATION NOTE:

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS #1 0 0 0
FMS #2 0 0 0
RNAV #1 0 0 0
RNAV #2 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> FMS VNAV 0 0 0
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
AFCS MODE ANN 0 0 0
F/S AIR DATA 0 0 0
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
..MORE..
4.10.23.E. Press the NEXT MENU button to select NONE as shown below.
SG RK1 RK2
FMS VNAV 0 0 0
Page 4-346 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

> 0: NONE
1: FEET ONLY
2: FEET OR ANGLE
TION
TED, UNS1A
2: BOTH ‘FEET’AND ‘ANGLE’ARE ALLOWED, KNS 660
NOTE
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KRA 405
2: KRA 10A
3: 429
4: ALT 50/55
5: ARINC 552A
0: NONE
1: -10 mV/ft
2: 4 mV/ft
3: ARINC 429
500’), 3 mV/ft
ARITHMIC TABLE.

SG RK1 RK2
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SINGLE ANALOG
2: DUAL ANALOG
3: SINGLE 429
4: DUAL 429
AUTOPILOT
0: NONE
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS COMMAND 0 0 0
BAR SCALING
0: NONE
1: 429
> 2: P:1.0V R:750MV D:DSC
3: P:400MV R:400MV D:12V
Page 4-348 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


MAND BARS
0: NONE
CRETE (KFC 325)
INPUT DISCRETE
INPUT DISCRETE
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS MODE 0 0 0
ANNUNCIATORS
0: NONE
> 1: KFC325/400/500
2: CDV155
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE SOURCE TYPE FOR
AUTOPILOT MODE ANNUNCIATORS
0: NONE

SG RK1 RK2
F/S AIR DATA 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
3: ANLG COLLECTIVE
4: 429 AOA/IAS 1D
7: 429 AN/AS 2D
8: MACH, NO F/S
0: NONE
TURN 2.066 V
THE DIAMOND.
SG RK1 RK2
Page 4-350 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

RADAR TYPE 0 1 0
0: NONE
> 1: RDS81/RDS82/RDR2000
2: RDS84/RDS86
3: RDR1400/NC104
4: RDR210/2200
0: NONE
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: CP 466 A,B,C
2: CP 113F
0: NONE

SG RK1 RK2
0: NONE
> 1: BENDIX/KING
SG RK1 RK2
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: CP 469A
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
FMS VNAV 0 0 0
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
AFCS MODE ANN 0 0 0
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
Page 4-352 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> JOYSTICK 0 0 0
TCAS 0 0 0
HOMING #1 0 0 0
HOMING #2 0 0 0
LIGHTNING DET 0 0 0
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
CABLE MODE 0 0 0
VARIABLE LNAV 0 0 0
SG RK1 RK2
JOYSTICK 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 5 WIRE
2: FORMATTED 429
3: RAW 429
0: NONE.
1: 5-WIRE JOYSTICK CONNECTED TO THIS SG.
MFD IS READ FROM CHECKLIST INPUT PORT.
3: HIGH SPEED 429 JOYSTICK CONNECT TO THIS SG, MOST LIKELY FROM
CHECKLIST UNIT.
SG RK1 RK2

TCAS 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: BENDIX/KING
SG RK1 RK2
HOMING #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ANALOG
SG RK1 RK2
HOMING #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ANALOG
Page 4-354 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
LIGHTNING DET 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: STORMSCOPE
0: NONE
1: 429 STORMSCOPE
menu.
SG RK1 RK2
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO

SG RK1 RK2
CABLE MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO

4.10.40 VARIABLE LNAV CONFIGURATION
4.10.40.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the VARIABLE LNAV menu.
4.10.40.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the VARIABLE LNAV menu.

SG RK1 RK2
LNAV X-TRACK 0 0 0
SCALE FACTOR
> 0: LNAV1:FIX LNAV2:FIX
1: LNAV1:VAR LNAV2:FIX
2: LNAV1:FIX LNAV2:VAR
3: LNAV1:VAR LNAV2:VAR
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES IF CROSS-TRACK DIST SCALING IS PROVIDED BY
LNAV
0: FIXED SCALING (±1.25 NM APPROACH) LNAV 1 AND LVAV 2
1: VARIABLE CROSS TRACK SCALING FOR LNAV 1, FIXED FOR LNAV 2
2: FIXED FOR LNAV 1, VARIABLE CROSS TRACK SCALING FOR LNAV 2
3: VARIABLE CROSS TRACK SCALING FOR BOTH LNAV 1 AND LNAV2
PAGE.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
Page 4-356 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SPARE 0 0 0
..MORE..

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: RIGHT
1: LEFT

SG RK1 RK2
SCALE ON BACKCOURSE
0: NO
> 1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY FMS 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: YES

NOTE:
CAUTION

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY WIND 0 0 0
VECTOR FROM FMS
0: NO
> 1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
ANGLE FROM FMS
0: NO
> 1: YES
Page 4-358 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES IF DG-ONLY MODE IS MADE AVAILABLE DURING
THE HSI KEY SEQUENCE
CAUTION

SG RK1 RK2
DISTANCE ON BRG PTR
0: NO
2: YES - NAV LABEL


SG RK1 RK2
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
FMS NAV SOURCE
Page 4-360 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
SPARE 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> HDG TAPE 0 0 0
DH SELECT 0 0 0
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
SEL HDG SYNC 0 0 0
SEL CRS SYNC 0 0 0
..MORE..

SG RK1 RK2
TAPE
> 0: N0
1: YES


SG RK1 RK2
ADI AIRCRAFT/ 0 0 0
COMMAND BAR SYMBOLS
2: DISCRETE SELECT
DISPLAYED?
AXES
2: WEDGE/BLILLS EYE, SINGLE/SPLIT SELECTABLE THROUGH DISCRETE IN-
PUT
CONFIGURATION NOTE:

SG RK1 RK2
Page 4-362 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

> 0: ROLL INDICATOR
1: SKY POINTER
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
OPERATION.

SG RK1 RK2
ON UNUSUAL ATTITUDE
> 0: NO
1: YES
CLUTTERED?
0: NO


SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NO
2: FAR-GS:75UA LOC:25/35LIA
0: NO

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY ADI 0 0 0
PERSPECTIVE LINES
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DH SELECT 0 0 0
Page 4-364 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

BY EFIS
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: YES - MASTER
2: YES - SLAVE
SHOULD CONTROL PANEL ITEMS BE SYNCHRONIZED BETWEEN
TWO SG SUCH AS IN TANDEM INSTALLATIONS.

SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED HDG 0 0 0
SYNC FROM OTHER SG
> 0: NO
1: YES


SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED CRS 0 0 0
SYNC FROM OTHER SG
> 0: NO
1: YES

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BARS 0 0 0
DCLTR LINLIS ATT 0 0 0
DH SELECT 0 0 0
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
SEL HDG SYNC 0 0 0
SEL CRS SYNC 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
SEL HDG COLOR 0 0 0
CMD BAR COLOR 0 0 0
Page 4-366 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

REV MODE ANN 0 0 0

RISING RUNWAY 0 0 0
ADI DEV SRC 0 0 0
.. MORE ..

SG RK1 RK2
NORTH UP MAP 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
> 0: SMALL DIAMOND
2: RECTANGLE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
FROM menu.


SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY 0 0 0
MESSAGES FROM FMS
> 0: NO
1: YES
SYSTEM CAN BE CONFIGURED TO DISPLAY MSG, DR, WPT, HDG, XTK OR
APR FROM AN FMS ON THE EHSI JUST ABOVE THE VERTICAL MODE NAME
FMS.

SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED 0 0 0
> 0: ORANGE
1: CYAN
2: MAGENTA

SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BAR 0 0 0
COLOR
> 0: GREEN
Page 4-368 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

1: MAGENTA

SG RK1 RK2
REVERSIONARY 0 0 0
MODE ANNUNCIATION
> 0: NONE
1: STBY/COPY
2: SG2
3: SG3

SG RK1 RK2
ADI LOC/MLS 0 0 0
DISPLAY
> 0: RISING RUNWAY
1: DBAR
2: RUNWAY OR DBAR

EADI.
1: ALWAYS AS A DBAR

SG RK1 RK2
ADI ILS/MLS 0 0 0
DEVIATION SOURCE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:

SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BAR 0 0 0
TIME CONSTANTS
> 0: 0 SEC
1: 0.1 SEC
2: 0.2 SEC
3: 0.25 SEC
Page 4-370 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

4: 0.3 SEC
5: 0.35 SEC
6: 0.4 SEC
7: 0.5 SEC

SG RK1 RK2
MLS VERTICAL 0 0 0
ANNUNCIATION
> 0: GS
1: GP

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
NORTH UP MAP 0 0 0
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
SEL HDG COLOR 0 0 0
CMD BAR COLOR 0 0 0
REV MODE ANN 0 0 0
RISING RUNWAY 0 0 0
ADI DEV SRC 0 0 0
> .. MORE ..


ITEM SG RK1 RK2
LNAV CRS CTRL 0 0 0
SG # 1 SIDE 0 0 0
TACAN ANNUNC 0 0 0
TCAS 0 0 0
RADAR SCAN 0 0 0
.. MORE ..

SG RK1 RK2
DATUM SCALE 0 0 0
> 0: 393 MV/DEG
1: 300 MV/DEG
2: 206 MV/DEG
COURSE DATUM
Page 4-372 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NORMAL HDG
1: LARGE HDG

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: 1000 FEET
1: 500 FEET
2: 250 FEET
3: 200 FEET

SG RK1 RK2
XSIDE LNAV 0 0 0
CRS & JSTK CTL
> 0:NO
1:YES
SHOULD THE SG ATTEMPT TO PERFORM SELECTED COURSE AND
JOYSTICK HANDSHAKE WITH THE OFF-SIDE LNAV?


SG RK1 RK2
SG #1 SIDE 0 0 0
> 0: LEFT
1: RIGHT

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: FIXED WING
1: ROTARY WING
WHICH TYPE OF SYMBOLIC AIRCRAFT SYMBOL SHOULD BE SHOWN
Page 4-374 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
TACAN ANNUC 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: A/A L141 26=0 27=1
2: A/A L141 27=1 28=1
0: NO

SG RK1 RK2
TCAS INTRUDER 0 0 0
DISPLAYS
2: HSI-NONE MFD-ALL
4: HSI-ALL MFD-ALL


SG RK1 RK2
> 0: LOC ONLY
1: MLS ONLY
2: LOC OR MLS

SG RK1 RK2
MAX RADAR 0 0 0
SCAN ANGLE
> 0: 90 DEG
0: 100 DEG
1: 120 RIGHT
Page 4-376 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DATUM SCALING 0 0 0
LNAV CRS CTRL 0 0 0
SG # 1 0 0 0
TACAN ANNUNC 0 0 0
TCAS DISPLAYS 0 0 0
CATII SENSORS 0 0 0
RADAR SCAN 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> RADAR SDI 0 0 0

SG RK1 RK2
RADAR SDI 0 0 0
1: SDI # 1 + RANGE
2: SDI # 2 + RANGE
3: SDI # 3 + RANGE
SG
TERMINE DATA FOR THIS INDICATOR.


CRETE menu.

SG RK1 RK2
PITCH OFFSET 0 0 0
SYNC DISCRETE
> 0: NO
1: YES
AN INPUT DISCRETE.
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
Only for helicopter use.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
RADAR SDI 0 0 0
NOTE:
COPY CONFIGURATION IS REQUIRED TO LOAD THE EADI INFORMATION AF-
TER INITIAL CONFIG.

below.
Page 4-378 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

low.
TO COPY THE CONFIG DATA IN2

NOTE
1. INITIAL SET UP
Page 4-380 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000




the aircraft.
programming.
4.11.2.A. Press the TST button for three seconds, The EFS 40/EFS 50 TEST PAGE will be dis-
played.
Page 4-382 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

quired.
EFS 40 MAINTENANCE
ALLIED-SIGNAL INC.
IP 125-00601-0000
NP1 125-00602-0000
DP1 125-00603-0000
RP 125-00604-0000

> LRU STATUS

TEST PATTERNS
PROCESSOR ITEMS
SIT HISTORY STACK
WATCHDOG TIMER TEST
SUBSYSTEM MENU
ASCII TEXT PAGE
TION position.
NOTE
below.
Page 4-384 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
..MORE..
ITEM HSI ADI
> SG NUMBER 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #1 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #2 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0
ADF #1 0 0
ADF #2 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0
..MORE..
SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0
> 0: #1 EFIS
1: #2 EFIS
2: MFD

0: PILOT
1: CO-PILOT
2: MFD
SG RK1 RK2
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
> 0: SINGLE EHSI
1: DUAL EHSI
2: SINGLE EADI/EHSI
3: DUAL EADI/EHSI
6: SINGLE MFD SG
ISTS.
3: DUAL HSI/AD[ SYSTEM (4 TUBE)
6:SINGLE MFD SG (1 TUBE)
Page 4-386 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
DU TYPE 0 0 0
HSI ADI
> 0: ED461 ED462
1: ED462 ED462
2: ED551A ED551A
3: ED551 ED551
4: ED551A/ED461ED462
5: ED551A/ED462ED462
PLAYS
SG RK1 RK2
ATT HDG
0: NONE NONE
> 1: XYZ XYZ
2: 429 429
3: NONE XYZ


SOURCES
0: NONE
1: ANALOG XYZ
2: 429 AHRS SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
ATT HDG
> 0: NONE NONE
1: XYZ XYZ
2: 429 429
3: NONE XYZ
SOURCES
0: NONE
1: ANALOG XYZ
2: 429 AHRS SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
Page 4-388 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: COLLINS ROT GYRO
2: KING ROT GYRO
3: SPERRY ROT GYRO
4: 429 ROT
8: 429 YAW RATE
0. NONE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
EFS.

SG RK1 RK2
ADF #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429
> 3: SYNCHRO
4: DC S/C BRG ONLY
5: 429 BRG ONLY
6: SYNCHRO BRG ONLY
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429 ADF SYSTEM
3: XYZ
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
ADF #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429
3: SYNCHRO
4: DC S/C BRG ONLY
Page 4-390 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

5: 429 BRG ONLY

6: SYNCHRO BRG ONLY
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429 ADF SYSTEM
3: XYZ
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
0:NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4: KNS81
CEIVER
0: NONE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:

SG RK1 RK2
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4: KNS81
CEIVER
0: NONE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0
Page 4-392 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM HSI ADI
SG NUMBER 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #1 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #2 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0
ADF #1 0 0
ADF #2 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> DME #1 0 0 0
DME N2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS #1 0 0 0
FMS #2 0 0 0
RNAV #1 0 0 0
RNAV #2 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
..MORE..

SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
> 3: 429 GOLD
4: 429 DF1=V1/M2, DF2=V2/M1
5: 429 DF1=V1/M1, DF2=V2/M2
6: 429 DF1=V1/V2, DF2=M1/M2
7: 429 DF1=V1/M*, DF2=V2/M*
0: NONE
2: KING SERIAL UNIT
3: STANDARD 429 DME
SG RK1 RK2
DME #2 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
> 3: 429 GOLD
4: 429 DF1=V1/M2, DF2=V2/M1
5: 429 DF1=V1/M1, DF2=V2/M2
Page 4-394 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

6: 429 DF1=V2, DF2=M1/M2

7: 429 DF1=V1/M*, DF2=V2/M*
0: NONE
2: KING SERIAL UNIT
3: STANDARD 429 DME
SG RK1 RK2
MLS #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429
2: 429 DEV ONLY
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE SOURCE TYPE FOR THE SIDE 1 MILS
0: NONE
1: 429 MILS WITH VALID BEARING TO STATION OUTPUTS
2: 429 MILS WITHOUT VALID BEARING TO STATION OUTPUTS. NO MLS RMI
POINTER.

SG RK1 RK2
MLS #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429
2: 429 DEV ONLY
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE SOURCE TYPE FOR THE SIDE 2 MILS
0: NONE
POINTER.
SG RK1 RK2
FMS #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
3: KLN 88 - LOR
4: GAMA 429 - FMS
5: KLN 90 - GPS
6: GAMA 429 - LOR
7: GAMA 429 - GPS
0: NONE
1: KING KINIS 660, 429
Page 4-396 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
FMS #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
3: KLN 88 - LOR
4: GAMA 429 - FMS
5: KLN 90 - GPS
6: GAMA 429 - LOR
7: GAMA 429 - GPS
0: NONE
1: KING KNS660, 429

SG RK1 RK2
RNAV #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 81
SG RK1 RK2
RNAV #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 81
SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME
5: KNS81
6: B: 429 NAV D: 429 DME
Page 4-398 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

0: NONE
5: KINIS 81 RNAV WITH TACAN CAPABILITY, VOR #1 MUST ALSO BE CONFIG-
URED KNS 81
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME
5: KNS81
6: B: 429 NAV D: 429 DME
0: NONE
URED KNS 81
CONFIGURATION NOTE:

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS #1 0 0 0
FMS #2 0 0 0
RNAV #1 0 0 0
RNAV #2 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> FMS VNAV 0 0 0
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
AFCS MODE ANN 0 0 0
F/S AIR DATA 0 0 0
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
..MORE..
SG RK1 RK2
Page 4-400 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

FMS VNAV 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: FEET ONLY
2: FEET OR ANGLE
TION
1: ONLY ‘FEET’ FMS VNAV IS ALLOWED, DECLUTTER IF ‘ANGLE’ IS TRANSMIT-
TED, UNS1A
NOTE
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KRA 405
2: KRA 10A
3: 429
4: ALT 50/55
5: ARINC 552A
0: NONE
1: -10 mV/ft
2: 4 mV/ft
3: ARINC 429
4: FOR 0-10.4 V(Below 500 ft) 20 mV/ft STARTING AT -20 ft, AFTER 10.4 V(ABOVE
500’), 3 mV/ft

5: FOR 0-10 V(Below 480 ft) STARTING AT -20 ft, AFTER 10 V(ABOVE 480 ft) LOG-
ARITHMIC TABLE.
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SINGLE ANALOG
2: DUAL ANALOG
3: SINGLE 429
4: DUAL 429
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE NUMBER AND TYPE OF FLIGHT DIREC-
TORAUTOPILOT
0: NONE
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS COMMAND 0 0 0
BAR SCALING
0: NONE
1: 429
Page 4-402 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

> 2: P:1.0V R:750MV D:DSC

3: P:400MV R:400MV D: 12V
MAND BARS
0: NONE
CRETE (KFC 325)
INPUT DISCRETE
INPUT DISCRETE
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS MODE 0 0 0
ANNUNCIATORS
0: NONE
> 1: KFC325/400/500
2: CDV155
NUNCIATORS
0: NONE

SG RK1 RK2
F/S AIR DATA 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
3: ANLG COLLECTIVE
4: 429 AOA/IAS 1D
7: 429 AN/AS 2D
8: MACH, NO F/S
0: NONE
1: 0.2 V/KT OR 0.2 V/DEG, FULL SCALE IS +/- 2 V AT THE DIAMOND, 1 DOT
SCALE, DECLUTTER + /- -2.4 V, RETURN + /-2.3 V.
2: 0.22 V/KT OR 0.22 V/DEG, FULL SCALE IS +/- 2.2 V AT F&S, 2 DOT SCALE, DE-
CLUTTER
+ 2.4 V, RETURN + 2.3 V
3: 0.2 V/mm, FULL SCALE IS +/- 2 V AT THE DIAMOND, DECLUTTER 2.166 V, RE-
TURN 2.066 V
4: 429, SCALE IS + /- 10 KT OR + /- 10 DEG AT THE DIAMOND, 1 DOT SCALE
5: CDV155, 429 COLLECTIVE FROM AUTOPILOT BUS, FULL SCALE IS +/- 100%
AT THE DIAMOND.
6: AS SCALE ONLY, 0.22 V/KT, FULL SCALE IS +/- 2.2 V AT THE F&S, 2 DOT
SCALE, DECLUTTER WHEN AOA/IAS DISCRETE INPUT IS GROUND.
7: 429, FULL SCALE IS +/- 10 KT OR +/- 10 DEG AT THE F AND S, 2 DOT SCALE
Page 4-404 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: RDS81/RDS82/RDR2000
2: RDS84/RDS86
3: RDR1400/NC104
4: RDR2100/2200
0: NONE
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: CP 466 A,B,C
2: CP 113F
0: NONE

SG RK1 RK2
0: NONE
> 1: BENDIX/KING
SG RK1 RK2
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: CP 469A
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
FMS VNAV 0 0 0
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
AFCS MODE ANN 0 0 0
AIR DATA 0 0 0
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
Page 4-406 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

> ..MORE..
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> JOYSTICK 0 0 0
TCAS 0 0 0
HOMING #1 0 0 0
HOMING #2 0 0 0
LIGHTNING DET 0 0 0
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
CABLE MODE 0 0 0
VARIABLE LNAV 0 0 0
SG RK1 RK2
> JOYSTICK 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: 5 WIRE
2: FORMATTED 429
3: RAW 429
0: NONE
CHECKLIST UNIT.

SG RK1 RK2
TCAS 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: BENDIX/KING
SG RK1 RK2
HOMING #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ANALOG
SG RK1 RK2
HOMING #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ANALOG
Page 4-408 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
LIGHTNING DET 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: STORMSCOPE
0: NONE
1: 429 STORMSCOPE
menu.
SG RK1 RK2
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO

SG RK1 RK2
CABLE MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO



SG RK1 RK2
LNAV X-TRACK 0 0 0
SCALE FACTOR
LNAV
PAGE.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
Page 4-410 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0

SPARE 0 0 0
..MORE..

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: RIGHT
1: LEFT

SG RK1 RK2
SCALE ON BACKCOURSE
0: NO
> 1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY FMS 0 0 0

> 0: NO
1: YES
NOTE:
CAUTION
ON AIRPORT APPROACH THE ILS OR ADF MUST BE USED

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY WIND 0 0 0
VECTOR FROM FMS
0: NO
> 1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
ANGLE FROM FMS
0: NO
> 1: YES
Page 4-412 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES IF DG-ONLY MODE IS MADE
AVAILABLE DURING THE HSI KEY SEQUENCE
CAUTION

SG RK1 RK2
DISTANCE ON BRG PTR
0: NO
2: YES - NAV LABEL



SG RK1 RK2
RADAR ONLY MODE0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
MFD NAV CONTROL0 0 0
FMS NAV SOURCE
Page 4-414 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
SPARE 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> HDG TAPE 0 0 0
DH SELECT 0 0 0
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
SEL HDG SYNC 0 0 0
SEL CRS SYNC 0 0 0
..MORE..

SG RK1 RK2
TAPE
> 0: NO

1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
ADI AIRCRAFT/ 0 0 0
COMMAND BAR SYMBOLS
2: DISCRETE SELECT
DISPLAYED?
AXES
2: WEDGE/BULLS EYE, SINGLE/SPLIT SELECTABE THROUGH DISCRETE INPUT
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
Page 4-416 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: ROLL INDICATOR
1: SKY POINTER
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
OPERATION.

SG RK1 RK2
ON UNUSUAL ATTITUDE
> 0: NO
1: YES
CLUTTERED?
0: NO


SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NO
3: JAR-GS:75UA LOC:251JA
0: NO

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY ADI 0 0 0
PERSPECTIVE LINES
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
Page 4-418 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

DH SELECT 0 0 0
BY EFIS
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: YES - MASTER
2: YES - SLAVE
SHOULD CONTROL PANEL ITEMS BE SYNCHRONIZED BETWEEN
TWO SG SUCH AS IN TANDEM INSTALLATIONS.

SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED HDG 0 0 0
SYNC FROM OTHER SG
> 0: NO
1: YES


SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED CRS 0 0 0
SYNC FROM OTHER SG
0: No
1: YES

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BARS 0 0 0
DH SELECT 0 0 0
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
SEL HDG SYNC 0 0 0
SEL CRS SYNC 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
SEL HDG COLOR 0 0 0
Page 4-420 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

CMD BAR COLOR 0 0 0

REV MODE ANN 0 0 0
RISING RUNWAY 0 0 0
ADI DEV SRC 0 0 0
.. MORE ..

SG RK1 RK2
NORTH UP MAP 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
0: SMALL DIAMOND
> 1: DIAMOND (NOT FOR 4” DU)
2: RECTANGLE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
FROM menu.


SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY 0 0 0
MESSAGES FROM FMS
> 0: NO
1: YES
SYSTEM CAN BE CONFIGURED TO DISPLAY MSG, DR, WPT, HDG, XTK OR
APR FROM AN FMS ON THE EHSI JUST ABOVE THE VERTICAL MODE NAME
FMS.

SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED 0 0 0
> 0: ORANGE
1: CYAN
2: MAGENTA

SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BAR 0 0 0
COLOR
Page 4-422 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

> 0: GREEN
1: MAGENTA

SG RK1 RK2
REVERSIONARY 0 0 0
MODE ANNUNCIATION
> 0: NONE
1: STBY/COPY
2: SG2
3: SG3

SG RK1 RK2
ADI LOC/MLS 0 0 0
DISPLAY
> 0: RISING RUNWAY
1: DBAR
2: RUNWAY OR DBAR

THIS SCREEN DETERMINES HOW LOC/MLS DEVIATION IS DISPLAYED ON THE EADI.
1: ALWAYS AS A DBAR

SG RK1 RK2
ADI ILS/MLS 0 0 0
DEVIATION SOURCE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:

SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BAR 0 0 0
TIME CONSTANTS
> 0: 0 SEC
1: 0.1 SEC
2: 0.2 SEC
3: 0.25 SEC
Page 4-424 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

4: 0.3 SEC
5: 0.35 SEC
6: 0.4 SEC
7: 0.5 SEC

SG RK1 RK2
MLS VERTICAL 0 0 0
ANNUNCIATION
> 0: GS
1: GP

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
NORTH UP MAP 0 0 0
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
SEL HDG COLOR 0 0 0
CMD BAR COLOR 0 0 0
REV MODE ANN 0 0 0
RISING RUNWAY 0 0 0
ADI DEV SRC 0 0 0
> .. MORE ..


ITEM SG RK1 RK2
LNAV CRS CTRL 0 0 0
SG # 1 SIDE 0 0 0
TACAN ANNUNC 0 0 0
TCAS 0 0 0
CATII SENSORS 0 0 0
RADAR SCAN 0 0 0
.. MORE ..

SG RK1 RK2
DATUM SCALE 0 0 0
> 0: 393 MV/DEG
1: 300 MV/DEG
2: 206 MV/DEG
COURSE DATUM
Page 4-426 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NORMAL HDG
1: LARGE HDG

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: 1000 FEET
1: 500 FEET
2: 250 FEET
3: 200 FEET

SG RK1 RK2
XSIDE LNAV 0 0 0
CRS & JSTK CTL
> 0:NO
1:YES
SHOULD THE SG ATTEMPT TO PERFORM SELECTED COURSE
AND JOYSTICK HANDSHAKE WITH THE OFF-SIDE LNAV?


SG RK1 RK2
SG #1 SIDE 1 1 1
> 0: LEFT
1: RIGHT

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: FIXED WING
1: ROTARY WING
WHICH TYPE OF SYMBOLIC AIRCRAFT SYMBOL SHOULD BE SHOWN
Page 4-428 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
TACAN ANNUC 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: A/A L141 26=0 27=1
2: A/A L141 27=1 28=1
0: NO

SG RK1 RK2
TCAS INTRUDER 0 0 0
DISPLAYS
2: HSI-NONE MFD-ALL
4: HSI-ALL MFD-ALL


SG RK1 RK2
> 0: LOC ONLY
1: MLS ONLY
2: LOC OR MLS

SG RK1 RK2
MAX RADAR 0 0 0
SCAN ANGLE
> 0: 90 DEG
0: 100 DEG
1: 120 RIGHT
Page 4-430 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DATUM SCALING 0 0 0
LNAV CRS CTRL 0 0 0
SG # 1 0 0 0
TACAN ANNUNC 0 0 0
TCAS DISPLAYS 0 0 0
CATII SENSORS 0 0 0
RADAR SCAN 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> RADAR SDI 0 0 0

SG RK1 RK2
RADAR SDI 0 0 0
1: SDI # 1 + RANGE
2: SDI # 2 + RANGE
3: SDI # 3 + RANGE
SG
TERMINE DATA
FOR THIS INDICATOR


CRETE menu.

SG RK1 RK2
PITCH OFFSET 0 0 0
SYNC DISCRETE
> 0: NO
1: YES
AN INPUT DISCRETE

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
RADAR SDI 0 0 0
NOTE:

below.
Page 4-432 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


low.

NOTE
1. INITIAL SET UP
Page 4-434 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000




82. DME HOLD DISTANCE WITH ADF RMI CONFIGURATION
the aircraft.
CHECK CONFIG message may apppar indicating the system requires configuration
programming.
pear. It the cooling fan is not operating due to malfunction or miswire it should be re-
played.
Page 4-436 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

quired.
EFS 40 MAINTENANCE
ALLIED-SIGNAL INC.
IP 125-00601-0000
NP1 125-00602-0000
DP1 125-00603-0000
RP 125-00604-0000

> LRU STATUS

TEST PATTERNS
PROCESSOR ITEMS
BIT HISTORY STACK
WATCHDOG TIMER TEST
SUBSYSTEM MENU
ASCII TEXT PAGE
TION position.
NOTE
below.
Page 4-438 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
..MORE..
ITEM HSI ADI
> SG NUMBER 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #1 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #2 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0
ADF #1 0 0
ADF #2 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0
..MORE..
SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0
> 0: #1 EFIS
1: #2 EFIS
2: MFD

0: PILOT
1: CO-PILOT
2: MFD
SG RK1 RK2
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
> 0: SINGLE EHSI
1: DUAL EHSI
2: SINGLE EADI/EHSI
3: DUAL EADI/EHSI
6: SINGLE MFD SG
ISTS.
Page 4-440 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
DU TYPE 0 0 0
HSI ADI
> 0: ED461 ED462
1: ED462 ED462
2: ED551A ED551A
3: ED551 ED551
4: ED551A/ED461ED462
5: ED551A/ED462ED462
PLAYS
SG RK1 RK2
ATT HDG
0: NONE NONE
> 1: XYZ XYZ
2: 429 429
3: NONE XYZ


SOURCES
0: NONE
1: ANALOG XYZ
2: 429 AHRS SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
ATT HDG
> 0: NONE NONE
1: XYZ XYZ
2: 429 429
3: NONE XYZ
SOURCES
0: NONE
1: ANALOG XYZ
2: 429 AHRS SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
Page 4-442 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: COLLINS ROT GYRO
2: KING ROT GYRO
3: SPERRY ROT GYRO
4: 429 ROT
8: 429 YAW RATE
0. NONE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
EFS.

SG RK1 RK2
ADF #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429
> 3: SYNCHRO
4: DC S/C BRG ONLY
5: 429 BRG ONLY
6: SYNCHRO BRG ONLY
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429 ADF SYSTEM
3: XYZ
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
4.12.10.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to entcr the ADF #2 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
ADF #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429
3: SYNCHRO
4: DC S/C BRG ONLY
Page 4-444 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

EFS 40/EFS 50
5: 429 BRG ONLY

6: SYNCHRO BRG ONLY
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429 ADF SYSTEM
3: XYZ
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4: KNS81
CEIVER
0: NONE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:

VN 411 B-0 1 version must be configured f or 429 BRG
SG RK1 RK2
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4: KNS81
CEIVER
0: NONE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
VN 411 B-0 1 version must be configured for 429 BRG
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0
Page 4-446 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM HSI ADI
SG NUMBER 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #1 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #2 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0
ADF #1 0 0
ADF #2 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0
..MORE..
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS #1 0 0 0
FMS #2 0 0 0
RNAV #1 0 0 0
RNAV #2 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
..MORE..

SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
> 3: 429 GOLD
4: 429 DF1=V1/M2, DF2=V2/M1
5: 429 DF1=V1/M1, DF2=V2/M2
6: 429 DF1=V1/V2, DF2=M1/M2
7: 429 DF1=V1/M*, DF2=V2/M*
0: NONE
2: KING SERIAL UNIT
3: STANDARD 429 DME
SG RK1 RK2
DME #2 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
> 3: 429 GOLD
4: 429 DF1=V1/M2, DF2=V2/M1
5: 429 DF1=V1/M1, DF2=V2/M2
Page 4-448 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

6: 429 DF1=V2, DF2=M1/M2

7: 429 DF1=V1/M*, DF2=V2/M*
0: NONE
2: KING SERIAL UNIT
3: STANDARD 429 DME
SG RK1 RK2
MLS #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429
2: 429 DEV ONLY
0: NONE
POINTER.

SG RK1 RK2
MLS #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429
2: 429 DEV ONLY
0: NONE
POINTER.
SG RK1 RK2
FMS #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
3: KLN 88 - LOR
4: GAMA 429 - FMS
5: KLN 90 - GPS
6: GAMA 429 - LOR
7: GAMA 429 - GPS
0: NONE
1: KING KNS 660, 429
Page 4-450 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
FMS #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
3: KLN 88 - LOR
4: GAMA 429 - FMS
5: KLN 90 - GPS
6: GAMA 429 - LOR
7: GAMA 429 - GPS
0: NONE
1: KING KNS660, 429

SG RK1 RK2
RNAV #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 81
SG RK1 RK2
RNAV #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 81
SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME
5: KNS81
6: B: 429 NAV D: 429 DME
Page 4-452 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

0: NONE
URED KNS 81
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME
5: KNS81
6: B: 429 NAV D: 429 DME
0: NONE
URED KNS 81

CONFIGURATION NOTE:
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS #1 0 0 0
FMS #2 0 0 0
RNAV #1 0 0 0
RNAV #2 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> FMS VNAV 0 0 0
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
AFCS MODE ANN 0 0 0
F/S AIR DATA 0 0 0
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
..MORE..
Page 4-454 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
FMS VNAV 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: FEET ONLY
2: FEET OR ANGLE
TION
TED, UNS1A
NOTE
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KRA 405
2: KRA 10A
3: 429
4: ALT 50/55
5: ARINC 552A
0: NONE
1: -10 mV/ft
2: 4 mV/ft
3: ARINC 429
500’), 3 mV/ft

ARITHMIC TABLE.
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SINGLE ANALOG
2: DUAL ANALOG
3: SINGLE 429
4: DUAL 429
AUTOPILOT
0: NONE
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS COMMAND BAR SCALING 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: 429
> 2: P:1.0V R:750MV SC
Page 4-456 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

3: P:400MV R:400MV D:12V

MAND BARS
0: NONE
CRETE (KFC 325)
INPUT DISCRETE
INPUT DISCRETE
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS MODE 0 0 0
ANNUNCIATORS
0: NONE
> 1: KFC325/400/500
2: CDV155
NUNCIATORS
0: NONE

SG RK1 RK2
F/S AIR DATA 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
3: ANLG COLLECTIVE
4: 429 AOA/IAS 1D
7: 429 AN/AS 2D
8: MACH, NO F/S
0: NONE
1: 0.2 V/KT OR 0.2 V/DEG, FULL SCALE IS +/- 2 V AT THE DIAMOND, 1 DOT
SCALE, DECLUTTER +/- -2.4 V, RETURN +/-2.3 V.
2: 0.22 V/KT OR 0.22 V/DEG, FULL SCALE IS + /- 2.2 V AT F&S, 2 DOT SCALE, DE-
CLUTTER +2.4 V, RETURN + 2.3 V
3: 0.2 V/mm, FULL SCALE IS +/- 2 V AT THE DIAMOND, DECLUTTER 2.166 V, RE-
TURN 2.066 V
4: 429, SCALE IS +/- 10 KT OR +/- 10 DEG AT THE DIAMOND, 1 DOT SCALE
AT THE DIAMOND.
6: AS SCALE ONLY, 0.22 V/KT, FULL SCALE IS +/- 2.2 V AT THE F&S, 2 DOT
SCALE, DECLUTTER WHEN AOA/IAS DISCRETE INPUT IS GROUND.
Page 4-458 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: RDS81/RDS82/RDR2000
2: RDS84/RDS86
3: RDR1400/NC104
4: RDR210/2200
0: NONE
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: CP 466 A,B,C
2: CP 113F
0: NONE

SG RK1 RK2
0: NONE
> BENDIX/KING
SG RK1 RK2
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: CP 469A
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
FMS VNAV 0 0 0
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
AFCS MODE ANN 0 0 0
AIR DATA 0 0 0
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
Page 4-460 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

ITEM: SG RK1 RK2
> JOYSTICK 0 0 0
TCAS 0 0 0
HOMING #1 0 0 0
HOMING #2 0 0 0
LIGHTNING DET 0 0 0
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
CABLE MODE 0 0 0
VARIABLE LNAV 0 0 0
SG RK1 RK2
JOYSTICK 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 5 WIRE
2: FORMATTED 429
3: RAW 429
0: NONE
CHECKLIST UNIT.

SG RK1 RK2
TCAS 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: BENDIX/KING
SG RK1 RK2
HOMING #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ANALOG
SG RK1 RK2
HOMING #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ANALOG
Page 4-462 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
LIGHTNING DET 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: STORMSCOPE
0: NONE
1: 429 STORMSCOPE
menu.
SG RK1 RK2
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO

SG RK1 RK2
CABLE MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO


SG RK1 RK2
LNAV X-TRACK 0 0 0
SCALE FACTOR
LNAV
0: FIXED SCALING (±1.25 NM APPROACH) LNAV 1 AND LNAV 2
PAGE.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
SPARE 0 0 0
Page 4-464 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


..MORE..

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: RIGHT
1: LEFT

SG RK1 RK2
SCALE ON BACKCOURSE
0: NO
> 1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY FMS 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: YES
NOTE

CAUTION

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY WIND 0 0 0
VECTOR FROM FMS
0: NO
> 1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
ANGLE FROM FMS
0: NO
> 1: YES
Page 4-466 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES
CAUTION

SG RK1 RK2
DISTANCE ON BRG PTR
0: NO
2: YES - NAV LABEL


SG RK1 RK2
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
MFD NAV CONTROL0 0 0
FMS NAV SOURCE
Page 4-468 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

ITEM SG RK1 RK2

DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
SPARE 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> HDG TAPE 0 0 0
DH SELECT 0 0 0
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
SEL HDG SYNC 0 0 0
SEL CRS SYNC 0 0 0
..MORE..

SG RK1 RK2
TAPE
> 0: NO
1: YES


SG RK1 RK2
ADI AIRCRAFT/ 0 0 0
COMMAND BAR SYMBOLS
2: DISCRETE SELECT
DISPLAYED?
AXES
CONFIGURATION NOTE:

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: ROLL INDICATOR
Page 4-470 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

1: SKY POINTER
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
OPERATION.

SG RK1 RK2
ON UNUSUAL ATTITUDE
> 0: NO
1: YES
UNDER EXCESSIVE PITCH AND ROLE VALUES, SHOULD NAV DATA BE DE-
CLUTTERED?
0: NO

SG RK1 RK2

> 0: NO
0: NO

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY ADI 0 0 0
PERSPECTIVE LINES
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DH SELECT 0 0 0
BY EFIS
> 0: NO
Page 4-472 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: YES - MASTER
2: YES - SLAVE

SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED HDG 0 0 0
SYNC FROM OTHER SG
> 0: NO
1: YES
DUAL SYSTEMS ONLY. THIS SCREEN DETERMINES IF SELECTED COURSE IS
TO BE SYNCHRONIZED WITH CROSS-SG.


SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED CRS 0 0 0
SYNC FROM OTHER SG
> 0: NO
1: YES
DUAL SYSTEMS ONLY. THIS SCREEN DETERMINES IF THE SELECTED
COURSE IS TO BE SYNCHROIZED WITH CROSS-SG.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BARS 0 0 0
DH SELECT 0 0 0
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
SEL HDG SYNC 0 0 0
SEL CRS SYNC 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
Page 4-474 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


VERT PTR TYPE 1 1 1
SEL HDG COLOR 1 1 1
CMD BAR COLOR 1 1 1
REV MODE ANN 1 1 1
RISING RUNWAY 0 0 0
ADI DEV SRC 0 0 0
.. MORE ..

SG RK1 RK2
NORTH UP MAP 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES
MFD ONLY. THIS SCREEN DETERMINES IF CONTROL PANEL ITEMS ARE TO BE

SG RK1 RK2
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
> 0: SMALL DIAMOND

2: RECTANGLE
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE TYPE OF VERTICAL SCALE POINTER TO BE
DISPLAYED.
0: SMALL DIAMOND - NORMAL POINTER
1: LARGE DIAMOND - LEAR POINTER
2: RECTANGLE - ASP POINTER
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
FROM menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY 0 0 0
MESSAGES FROM FMS
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED 0 0 0
Page 4-476 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


> 0: ORANGE
1: CYAN
2: MAGENTA
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES WHAT COLOR THE SELECTED HEADING BUG AND
READOUT SHOULD BE.

SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BAR 0 0 0
COLOR
> 0: GREEN
1: MAGENTA
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES WHAT COLOR THE AUTOPILOT COMMAND BARS
SHOULD BE.

SG RK1 RK2
REVERSIONARY 0 0 0
MODE ANNUNCIATION
0: NONE
> 1: STBY/COPY
2: SG2

3: SG3
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES HOW REVERSIONARY MODE SHOULD BE ANNUN-
CIATED

SG RK1 RK2
ADI LOC/MLS 0 0 0
DISPLAY
> 0: RISING RUNWAY
1: DBAR
2: RUNWAY OR DBAR
EADI.
1: ALWAYS AS A DBAR

SG RK1 RK2
Page 4-478 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

ADI ILS/MLS 0 0 0
DEVIATION SOURCE

SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BAR 0 0 0
TIME CONSTANTS
> 0: 0 SEC
1: 0.1 SEC
2: 0.2 SEC
3: 0.25 SEC
4: 0.3 SEC
5: 0.35 SEC
6: 0.4 SEC
7: 0.5 SEC

SG RK1 RK2
MLS VERTICAL 0 0 0
ANNUNCIATION

> 0: GS
1: GP

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
NORTH UP MAP 0 0 0
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
SEL HDG COLOR 0 0 0
CMD BAR COLOR 0 0 0
REV MODE ANN 0 0 0
RISING RUNWAY 0 0 0
ADI DEV SRC 0 0 0
> .. MORE ..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
LNAV CRS CTRL 0 0 0
SG # 1 SIDE 0 0 0
TACAN ANNUNC 0 0 0
TCAS 0 0 0
RADAR SCAN 0 0 0
.. MORE ..
Page 4-480 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
DATUM SCALE 0 0 0
> 0: 393 MV/DEG
1: 300 MV/DEG
2: 206 MV/DEG
COURSE DATUM

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NORMAL HDG
1: LARGE HDG

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: 1000 FEET

1: 500 FEET
2: 250 FEET
3: 200 FEET

SG RK1 RK2
XSIDE LNAV 0 0 0
CRS & JSTK CTL
> 0:NO
1:YES
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES IF THE SG WILL ATTEMPT TO PERFORM SELECT-
ED COURSE AND JOYSTICK HANDSHAKE WITH THE OFF-SIDE LNAV.

SG RK1 RK2
SG #1 SIDE 0 0 0
> 0: LEFT
1: RIGHT
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE PHYSICAL SIDE OF THE AIRCRAFT ON WHICH
#1 SG (PILOTS SG) IS TO BE LOCATED.
Page 4-482 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000



SG RK1 RK2
> 0: FIXED WING
1: ROTARY WING
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE TYPE OF SYMBOLIC AIRCRAFT TO BE DIS-
PLAYED.

SG RK1 RK2
TACAN ANNUC 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: A/A L141 26=0 27=1
2: A/A L141 27=1 28=1
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES IF TACAN AIR-TO AIR MODE SHOULD BE ANNUN-
CIATED.
0: NO


SG RK1 RK2
TCAS INTRUDER 0 0 0
DISPLAYS
> 0: HSI-NONE MFD-NONE
2: HSI-NONE MFD-ALL
4: HSI-ALL MFD-ALL
PRESENTED.

SG RK1 RK2
Page 4-484 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

> 0: LOC ONLY

1: MLS ONLY
2: LOC OR MLS
PROACHES

SG RK1 RK2
MAX RADAR 0 0 0
SCAN ANGLE
> 0: 90 DEG
0: 100 DEG
1: 120 RIGHT

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DATUM SCALING 0 0 0
LNAV CRS CTRL 0 0 0
SG # 1 0 0 0
TACAN ANNUNC 0 0 0
TCAS DISPLAYS 0 0 0
CATII SENSORS 0 0 0

RADAR SCAN 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> RADAR SDI 0 0 0
ADF PTR HOLD DST 0 0 0

SG RK1 RK2
RADAR SDI 0 0 0
1: SDI # 1 + RANGE
2: SDI # 2 + RANGE
3: SDI # 3 + RANGE
SG
CRETE menu.

SG RK1 RK2
Page 4-486 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

PITCH OFFSET 0 0 0
SYNC DISCRETE
> 0: NO
1: YES
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES IF THE DISPLAYED PITCH IS OFFSET BY AN INPUT
DISCRETE (HELICOPTER USE ONLY)
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
• PITCH OFFSET SYNC FEATURE INTENDED FOR USE ON ROTARY WING AIR-
CRAFT ONLY NOT FOR USE ON FIXED WING AIRCRAFT.
• INSTALLATION WITH PITCH OFFSET MAY HAVE EITHER ADI DOWN OR COM-
POSITE BUT NOT BOTH.
4.12.82 DME HOLD DISTANCE WITH ADF RMI CONFIGURATION
4.12.82.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the ADF PTR HOLD DST menu.
4.12.82.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the ADF PTR HOLD DST menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY HOLD DST 0 0 0
ON ADF BRG PTR
> 0: NO
1: YES
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES IF HOLD DISTANCE IS DISPLAYED WITH ADF RMI
DATA.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
RADAR SDI 0 0 0
> ADF PTR HOLD DST 0 0 0

NOTE:

below.
low.
Page 4-488 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

NOTE
1. INITIAL SET UP


41. EGPWS CONFIGURATION
46. DISPLAY DRIFT ANGLE CONFIGURATION
Page 4-490 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


84. FMS OUTPUT BUS CONFIGURATION
the aircraft.
programming.
pear. It the cooling fan is not operating due to malfunction or miswire it should be re-
played.

quired.
EFS 40 MAINTENANCE
ALLIED-SIGNAL INC.
IP 125-00601-0000
NP1 125-00602-0000
DP1 125-00603-0000
RP 125-00604-0000
played. A pointer to the first line will be displayed.

> LRU STATUS
Page 4-492 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

TEST PATTERNS
PROCESSOR ITEMS
BIT HISTORY STACK
WATCHDOG TIMER TEST
SUBSYSTEM MENU
ASCII TEXT PAGE
TION position.
NOTE
below.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2

> SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM HSI ADI
> SG NUMBER 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #1 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #2 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0
ADF #1 0 0
ADF #2 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0
..MORE..
SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0
> 0: #1 EFIS
1: #2 EFIS
2: MFD
Page 4-494 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

0: PILOT
1: CO-PILOT
2: MFD
SG RK1 RK2
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
> 0: SINGLE EHSI
1: DUAL EHSI
2: SINGLE EADI/EHSI
3: DUAL EADI/EHSI
6: SINGLE MFD SG
ISTS.

SG RK1 RK2
DU TYPE 0 0 0
HSI ADI
> 0: ED461 ED462
1: ED462 ED462
2: ED551A ED551A
3: ED551 ED551
4: ED551A/ED461 ED462
5: ED551A/ED462 ED462
PLAYS
SG RK1 RK2
ATT HDG
0: NONE NONE
> 1: XYZ XYZ
2: 429 429
3: NONE XYZ
SOURCES
0: NONE
Page 4-496 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

1: ANALOG XYZ
2: 429 AHRS SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
ATT HDG
> 0: NONE NONE
1: XYZ XYZ
2: 429 429
3: NONE XYZ
SOURCES
0: NONE
1: ANALOG XYZ
2: 429 AHRS SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION NOTE:

SG RK1 RK2
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: COLLINS ROT GYRO
2: KING ROT GYRO
3: SPERRY ROT GYRO
4: 429 ROT
8: 429 YAW RATE
0: NONE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
EFS.
•Items 5-8 should be selected if YAW RATE information is provided to the EFS.
Page 4-498 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
ADF #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429
> 3: SYNCHRO
4: DC S/C BRG ONLY
5: 429 BRG ONLY
6: SYNCHRO BRG ONLY
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429 ADF SYSTEM
3: XYZ
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
ADF #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429
3: SYNCHRO
4: DC S/C BRG ONLY
5: 429 BRG ONLY
6: SYNCHRO BRG ONLY

EFS 40/EFS 50
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429 ADF SYSTEM
3: XYZ
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4: KNS81
CEIVER
0: NONE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
VN 411B -01 version must be configured for 429 BRG

SG RK1 RK2
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4: KNS81
CEIVER
0: NONE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0

ADF #2 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM HSI ADI
SG NUMBER 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #1 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #2 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0
ADF #1 0 0
ADF #2 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS #1 0 0 0
FMS #2 0 0 0
RNAV #1 0 0 0
RNAV #2 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
..MORE..
Page 4-502 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
> 3: 429 GOLD
4: 429 DF1=V1/M2, DF2=V2/M1
5: 429 DF1=V1/M1, DF2=V2/M2
6: 429 DF1=V1/V2, DF2=M1/M2
7: 429 DF1=V1/M*, DF2=V2/M*
0: NONE
2: KING SERIAL UNIT
3: STANDARD 429 DME
SG RK1 RK2
DME #2 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
> 3: 429 GOLD
4: 429 DF1=V1/M2, DF2=V2/M1
5: 429 DF1=V1/M1, DF2=V2/M2
6: 429 DF1=V2, DF2=M1/M2
7: 429 DF1=V1/M*, DF2=V2/M*

0: NONE
2: KING SERIAL UNIT
3: STANDARD 429 DME
SG RK1 RK2
MLS #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429
2: 429 DEV ONLY
0: NONE
POINTER.
Page 4-504 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
MLS #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429
2: 429 DEV ONLY
0: NONE
POINTER.
SG RK1 RK2
FMS #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
3: KLN 88 - LOR
4: GAMA 429 - FMS
5: KLN 90 - GPS
6: GAMA 429 - LOR
7: GAMA 429 - GPS
0: NONE
1: KING KNS 660, 429
4: GAMA 429 UNS1 A, GNSX

SG RK1 RK2
FMS #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
3: KLN 88 - LOR
4: GAMA 429 - FMS
5: KLN 90 - GPS
6: GAMA 429 - LOR
7: GAMA 429 - GPS
0: NONE
1: KING KNS660, 429
SG RK1 RK2
RNAV #1 0 0 0
Page 4-506 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

> 0: NONE
1: KNS 81
SG RK1 RK2
RNAV #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 81
SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME
5: KNS81
6: B: 429 NAV D: 429 DME
0: NONE


URED KNS 81
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME
5: KNS81
6: B: 429 NAV D: 429 DME
0: NONE
URED KNS 81
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
Page 4-508 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS #1 0 0 0
FMS #2 0 0 0
RNAV #1 0 0 0
RNAV #2 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> FMS VNAV 0 0 0
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
AFCS MODE ANN 0 0 0
F/S AIR DATA 0 0 0
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
..MORE..
SG RK1 RK2
FMS VNAV 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: FEET ONLY
2: FEET OR ANGLE

TION
TED, UNS1A
2: BOTH ‘FEET’AND ‘ANGLE’ ARE ALLOWED, KNS660
NOTE
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KRA 405
2: KRA 10A
3: 429
4: ALT 50/55
5: ARINC 552A
0: NONE
1: -10 mV/ft.
2: 4 mV/ft.
3: ARINC 429
4: FOR 0-10.4 V (Below 500 ft.) 20 mV/ft. STARTING AT -20 ft., AFTER 10.4 V
(ABOVE 500’), 3 mV/ft.
5: FOR 0-10 V (Below 480 ft.) STARTING AT -20 ft., AFTER 10 V (ABOVE 480 ft.)
LOGARITHMIC TABLE.
Page 4-510 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SINGLE ANALOG
2: DUAL ANALOG
3: SINGLE 429
4: DUAL 429
AUTOPILOT
0: NONE
SG RK1 RK2
0: NONE
1: 429
> 2: P:1.0V R:750MV D:DSC
3: P:400MV R:400MV D:12V


MAND BARS
0: NONE
CRETE (KFC 325)
3: PITCH CMD: 400 MV/DEG, ROLL CMD: 400 MV/DEG, DECLUTTER AT 12V
INPUT DISCRETE
INPUT DISCRETE
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS MODE 0 0 0
ANNUNCIATORS
0: NONE
> 1: KFC325/400/500
2: CDV155
3: KFC225
NUNCIATORS
0: NONE
3: BENDIX/KING KFC 225
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
The KFC 225 configuration in the lateral armed and lateral coupled modes will annun-
ciate REV. All other KFC autopilot configurations will annunciate BC.
Page 4-512 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
F/S AIR DATA 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
3: ANLG COLLECTIVE
4: 429 AOA/IAS 1D
7: 429 AN/AS 2D
8: MACH, NO F/S
0: NONE
1: 0.2V/KT OR 0.2V/DEG, FULL SCALE IS +/- 2V AT THE DIAMOND, 1 DOT
SCALE,DECLUTTER +/- -2.4V, RETURN +/-2.3V.
2: 0.22V/KT OR 0.22V/DEG, FULL SCALE IS + /- 2.2V AT F&S, 2 DOT SCALE, DE-
3: 0.2V/mm, FULL SCALE IS +/- 2V AT THE DIAMOND, DECLUTTER 2.166V, RE-
TURN 2.066V
4: 429, SCALE IS +/- 10KT OR +/- 10 DEG ATTHE DIAMOND, 1 DOT SCALE
AT THE DIAMOND.
6: AS SCALE ONLY, 0.22V/KT, FULL SCALE IS +/- 2.2V AT THE F&S, 2 DOT SCALE,
DECLUTTER WHEN AOA/IAS DISCRETE INPUT IS GROUND.
7: 429, FULL SCALE IS +/- 10 KT OR +/- 10 DEG ATTHE F AND S, 2 DOT SCALE

SG RK1 RK2
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: RDS81/RDS82/RDR2000
2: RDS84/RDS86
3: RDR1400/NC104
4: RDR2100/2200
0: NONE
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: CP 466 A,B,C
2: CP 113F
0: NONE
Page 4-514 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
0: NONE
> BENDIX/KING
SG RK1 RK2
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: CP 469A
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
FMS VNAV 0 0 0
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
AFCS MODE ANN 0 0 0
AIR DATA 0 0 0
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM: SG RK1 RK2
> JOYSTICK 0 0 0
TCAS 0 0 0
HOMING #1 0 0 0
HOMING #2 0 0 0
LIGHTNING DET 0 0 0
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
CABLE MODE 0 0 0
VARIABLE LNAV 0 0 0
EGPWS 0 0 0
SG RK1 RK2
JOYSTICK 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 5 WIRE
2: FORMATTED 429
3: RAW 429
0: NONE
2: OPERATION SALVED TO THE MFD JOYSTICK; FMS JOYSTICK DATA FROM
CHECKLIST UNIT.
Page 4-516 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
TCAS 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: BENDIX/KING
SG RK1 RK2
HOMING #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ANALOG
SG RK1 RK2
HOMING #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ANALOG

SG RK1 RK2
LIGHTNING DET 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: STORMSCOPE
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE SOURCE TYPE FOR LIGHTING DETECTION
0: NONE
1: 429 STORMSCOPE
menu.
SG RK1 RK2
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO

SG RK1 RK2
CABLE MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
Page 4-518 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
LNAV X-TRACK 0 0 0
SCALE FACTOR
LNAV
4.13.41 EGPWS CONFIGURATION
4.13.41.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the EGPWS menu.
4.13.41.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the EGPWS menu.

SG RK1 RK2
EGPWS 1 1 1
0: NONE
> 1: ALLIEDSIGNAL

PAGE.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
SPARE 0 0 0
..MORE..

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: RIGHT
1: LEFT

SG RK1 RK2
SCALE ON BACKCOURSE
0: NO
> 1: YES
Page 4-520 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY FMS 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: YES
NOTE
FMS MAP maybe displayed when FMS is not the primary NAV selected.
CAUTION

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY WIND 0 0 0
VECTOR FROM FMS
0: NO
> 1: YES


SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
ANGLE FROM FMS
0: NO
> 1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES
CAUTION

SG RK1 RK2
Page 4-522 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


DISTANCE ON BRG PTR
0: NO
2: YES - NAV LABEL

SG RK1 RK2
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
FMS NAV SOURCE

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
SPARE 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> HDG TAPE 0 0 0
DH SELECT 0 0 0
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
SEL HDG SYNC 0 0 0
Page 4-524 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SEL CRS SYNC 0 0 0

..MORE..

SG RK1 RK2
TAPE
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
ADI AIRCRAFT/ 0 0 0
COMMAND BAR SYMBOLS
2: DISCRETE SELECT
DISPLAYED?
AXES
CONFIGURATION NOTE:


SG RK1 RK2
> 0: ROLL INDICATOR
1: SKY POINTER
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
OPERATION.

SG RK1 RK2
ON UNUSUAL ATTITUDE
> 0: NO
1: YES
Page 4-526 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

CLUTTERED?
0: NO

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NO
0: NO

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY ADI 0 0 0
PERSPECTIVE LINES

> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DH SELECT 0 0 0
BY EFIS
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: YES - MASTER
2: YES - SLAVE
Page 4-528 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED HDG 0 0 0
SYNC FROM OTHER SG
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED CRS 0 0 0
SYNC FROM OTHER SG
> 0: NO
1: YES

ITEM SG RK1 RK2


COMMAND BARS 0 0 0
DH SELECT 0 0 0
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
SEL HDG SYNC 0 0 0
SEL CRS SYNC 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
SEL HDG COLOR 0 0 0
CMD BAR COLOR 0 0 0
REV MODE ANN 0 0 0
RISING RUNWAY 0 0 0
ADI DEV SRC 0 0 0
.. MORE..

SG RK1 RK2
NORTH UP MAP 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES
Page 4-530 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000



SG RK1 RK2
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
0: SMALL DIAMOND
2: RECTANGLE
DISPLAYED.
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
FROM menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY 0 0 0
MESSAGES FROM FMS
> 0: NO
1: YES


SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED 0 0 0
> 0: ORANGE
1: CYAN
2: MAGENTA
READOUT SHOULD BE.

SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BAR 0 0 0
COLOR
> 0: GREEN
1: MAGENTA
SHOULD BE.
Page 4-532 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
REVERSIONARY 0 0 0
MODE ANNUNCIATION
> 0: NONE
1: STBY/COPY
2: SG2
3: SG3
CIATED

SG RK1 RK2
ADI LOC/MLS 0 0 0
DISPLAY
> 0: RISING RUNWAY
1: DBAR
2: RUNWAY OR DBAR


EADI.
1: ALWAYS AS A DBAR

SG RK1 RK2
ADI ILS/MLS 0 0 0
DEVIATION SOURCE

SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BAR 0 0 0
TIME CONSTANTS
> 0: 0 SEC
1: 0.1 SEC
2: 0.2 SEC
3: 0.25 SEC
4: 0.3 SEC
Page 4-534 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

5: 0.35 SEC
6: 0.4 SEC
7: 0.5 SEC

SG RK1 RK2
MLS VERTICAL 0 0 0
ANNUNCIATION
> 0: GS
1: GP

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
NORTH UP MAP 0 0 0
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
SEL HDG COLOR 0 0 0
CMD BAR COLOR 0 0 0
REV MODE ANN 0 0 0
RISING RUNWAY 0 0 0
ADI DEV SRC 0 0 0
> .. MORE..


ITEM SG RK1 RK2
LNAV CRS CTRL 0 0 0
SG # 1 SIDE 0 0 0
TACAN ANNUNC 0 0 0
TCAS 0 0 0
RADAR SCAN 0 0 0
.. MORE..

SG RK1 RK2
DATUM SCALE 0 0 0
> 0: 393 MV/DEG
1: 300 MV/DEG
2: 206 MV/DEG
COURSE DATUM
0: KING 22.5V SIN(ANGLE)
1: ARINC 17.2V SIN(ANGLE)
2: SPERRY 11.8V SIN(ANGLE)

SG RK1 RK2
Page 4-536 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


> 0: NORMAL HDG
1: LARGE HDG

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: 1000 FEET
1: 500 FEET
2: 250 FEET
3: 200 FEET

SG RK1 RK2
XSIDE LNAV 0 0 0
CRS & JSTK CTL
> 0:NO
1:YES


SG RK1 RK2
SG #1 SIDE 1 1 1
> 0: LEFT
1: RIGHT
4.13.76.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to VIEVV/EDIT OPERATING CHAR PAGE 09.

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: FIXED WING
1: ROTARY WING
PLAYED.
Page 4-538 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
TACAN ANNUC 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: A/A L141 26=0 27=1
2: A/A L141 27=1 28=1
CIATED.
0: NO

SG RK1 RK2
TCAS INTRUDER 0 0 0
DISPLAYS
2: HSI-NONE MFD-ALL
4: HSI-ALL MFD-ALL
PRESENTED.



SG RK1 RK2
> 0: LOC ONLY
1: MLS ONLY
2: LOC OR MLS
PROACHES

SG RK1 RK2
MAX RADAR 0 0 0
SCAN ANGLE
> 0: 90 DEG
0: 100 DEG
1: 120 RIGHT
Page 4-540 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DATUM SCALING 0 0 0
LNAV CRS CTRL 0 0 0
SG # 1 0 0 0
TACAN ANNUNC 0 0 0
TCAS DISPLAYS 0 0 0
CATII SENSORS 0 0 0
RADAR SCAN 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> RADAR SDI 0 0 0
FMS OUTPUT BUS 0 0 0

SG RK1 RK2
RADAR SDI 0 0 0
1: SDI # 1 + RANGE
2: SDI # 2 + RANGE
3: SDI # 3 + RANGE

SG
CRETE menu.

SG RK1 RK2
PITCH OFFSET 0 0 0
SYNC DISCRETE
> 0: NO
1: YES
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
Page 4-542 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
ON ADF BRG PTR
> 0: NO
1: YES
DATA.
4.13.84 FMS OUTPUT BUS CONFIGURATION
This configuration option was added to handle the ARINC 429 requirements for the Global FMS
products.
4.13.84.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the FMS OUTPUT BUS menu.
4.13.84.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the FMS OUTPUT BUS menu.

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NORMAL
1: CONCENTRATED
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
When configured for NORMAL the FMS output bus will contain the labels of the original
set that was provided before SW version 1201. When configured for CONCENTRAT-
ED the FMS output bus will contain the labels of the original set, plus those added for
GNS-XLS that was provided in SW version 1201, plus the most recent list for the Glo-
balStar. With this option selected the Air Data input bus will be activated on the EFIS
regardless of the configured selection for FAST/SLOW display.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
RADAR SDI 0 0 0


> FMS OUTPUT BUS 0 0 0
NOTE:

below.
low.
Page 4-544 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13A CONFIGURATION WITH -15 VERSION SOFTWARE
NOTE
1. INITIAL SET UP
Rev 8, May/2008 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Page 4-544.1

EFS 40/EFS 50

41. VARIABLE VNAV CONFIGURATION

EFS 40/EFS 50

86. LNAV VERT APR CONFIGURATION
87. L/VNAV VERT APR CONFIGURATION
88. LP VERT APR CONFIGURATION
89. LPV VERT APR CONFIGURATION
90. LNAV SELECT OUT
4.13A.1 INITIAL SET UP
4.13A.1.A. Make sure all units are connected properly. Connect an auxiliary power unit (APU)
to the aircraft.
4.13A.1.B. Turn aircraft power, avionics power and inverters on. Verify the display unit becomes
programming.
4.13A.1.C. SG cooling is required and must be checked. If the ambient temperature is above
35° C a Fan Flag will appear on the display if the cooling fan is not operating. At am-
bient temperatures below 7° C cooling may not be requested and the fan flag may
not appear. It the cooling fan is not operating due to malfunction or miswire it should
be repaired before continuing.

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13A.2 DISPLAYING THE CONFIGURATION MENU PAGE
4.13A.2.A. Press the TST button for three seconds. The EFS 40/EFS 50 TEST PAGE will be
displayed.
FIGURE 4-14A EFS 40/EFS 50 Test Page
4.13A.2.B. Press the HSI and ARC buttons simultaneously. The EFS 40/EFS 50 MAINTE-
NANCE COPYRIGHT PAGE will be displayed in green. Exact switch coordination
may be required.
EFS 40 MAINTENANCE
ALLIED-SIGNAL INC.
IP 125-00601-XXXX
NP1 125-00658-XXXX
DP1 125-00699-XXXX
RP 125-00604-XXXX
4.13A.2.C. Press the NEXT MENU button. The MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS PAGE will be dis-
played. A pointer to the first line will be displayed.
Page 4-544.4 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010

EFS 40/EFS 50
FIGURE 4-14B Menu and Item Buttons

> LRU STATUS
TEST PATTERNS
PROCESSOR ITEMS
BIT HISTORY STACK
WATCHDOG TIMER TEST
SUBSYSTEM MENU
ASCII TEXT PAGE
4.13A.2.D. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move the pointer down to the SYSTEM CONFIGU-
RATION position.
4.13A.2.E. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the CONFIGURATION MENU as shown be-
low.

EFS 40/EFS 50
NOTE
4.13A.3 SYMBOL GENERATOR CONFIGURATION
4.13A.3.A. Press the NEXT MENU button to select VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 01 as
shown below.
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM HSI ADI
> SG NUMBER 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #1 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #2 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0
ADF #1 0 0
ADF #2 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0

EFS 40/EFS 50
VOR/ILS #2 0 0
..MORE..
4.13A.3.B. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter SG NUMBER menu as shown below.
4.13A.3.C. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to desired option on menu below.
4.13A.3.D. Press the NEXT MENU button to select the desired option.
SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0
> 0: #1 EFIS
1: #2 EFIS
2: MFD
0: PILOT
1: CO-PILOT
2: MFD
4.13A.4 DISPLAY CONFIGURATION
4.13A.4.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to the VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 01.
4.13A.4.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the SINGLE/DUAL menu.
4.13A.4.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the SINGLE/DUAL menu.
4.13A.4.D. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to desired option on menu below.
4.13A.4.E. Press the NEXT MENU button to select the desired option.
SG RK1 RK2
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
> 0: SINGLE EHSI
1: DUAL EHSI
2: SINGLE EADI/EHSI
3: DUAL EADI/EHSI
6: SINGLE MFD SG
ISTS.

EFS 40/EFS 50

4.13A.5 DISPLAY UNIT TYPE CONFIGURATION
4.13A.5.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 01.
4.13A.5.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to DU TYPE menu.
4.13A.5.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DU TYPE menu.
SG RK1 RK2
DU TYPE 0 0 0
HSI ADI
> 0: ED461 ED462
1: ED462 ED462
2: ED551A ED551A
3: ED551 ED551
4: ED551A/ED461 ED462
5: ED551A/ED462 ED462
PLAYS
4.13A.6 ATTITUDE/HDG #1 CONFIGURATION
4.13A.6.A. Press PREV MENU button to return to VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 01.

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13A.6.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the ATTITUDE/HDG #1 menu.
4.13A.6.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the ATTITUDE/HDG #1 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
ATT HDG
0: NONE NONE
> 1: XYZ XYZ
2: 429 429
3: NONE XYZ
SOURCES
0: NONE
1: ANALOG XYZ
2: 429 AHRS SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
4.13A.7 ATTITUDE/HDG #2 CONFIGURATION
4.13A.7.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the ATTITUDE/HDG #2 menu.
4.13A.7.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the ATTITUDE/HDG #2 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
ATT HDG
> 0: NONE NONE
1: XYZ XYZ
2: 429 429

EFS 40/EFS 50
3: NONE XYZ
SOURCES
0: NONE
1: ANALOG XYZ
2: 429 AHRS SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
4.13A.8 RATE OF TURN CONFIGURATION
4.13A.8.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the RATE OF TURN menu.
4.13A.8.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the RATE OF TURN menu.
SG RK1 RK2
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: COLLINS ROT GYRO
2: KING ROT GYRO
3: SPERRY ROT GYRO
4: 429 ROT
8: 429 YAW RATE
0: NONE

EFS 40/EFS 50

CONFIGURATION NOTE:
EFS.
•Items 5-8 should be selected if YAW RATE information is provided to the EFS.
4.13A.9 ADF #1 CONFIGURATION
4.13A.9.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the ADF #1 menu.
4.13A.9.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the ADF #1 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
ADF #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429
> 3: SYNCHRO
4: DC S/C BRG ONLY
5: 429 BRG ONLY
6: SYNCHRO BRG ONLY
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429 ADF SYSTEM
3: XYZ
CONFIGURATION NOTE:

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13A.10 ADF #2 CONFIGURATION
4.13A.10.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the ADF #2 menu.
4.13A.10.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the ADF #2 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
ADF #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429
3: SYNCHRO
4: DC S/C BRG ONLY
5: 429 BRG ONLY
6: SYNCHRO BRG ONLY
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429 ADF SYSTEM
3: XYZ
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
4.13A.11 VOR/ILS #1 CONFIGURATION
4.13A.11.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to VIEVV/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 01.
4.13A.11.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the VOR/ILS #1 menu.
4.13A.11.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the VOR/ILS #1 menu.

EFS 40/EFS 50
SG RK1 RK2
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4: KNS81
CEIVER
0: NONE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
4.13A.12 VOR/ILS #2 CONFIGURATION
4.13A.12.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the VOR/ILS #2 menu.
4.13A.12.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the VOR/ILS #2 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4: KNS81
CEIVER

EFS 40/EFS 50
0: NONE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
4.13A.13 DME #1 CONFIGURATION
4.13A.13.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to MORE.
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM HSI ADI
SG NUMBER 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #1 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #2 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0
ADF #1 0 0
ADF #2 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0

EFS 40/EFS 50
VOR/ILS #2 0 0
> ..MORE..
4.13A.13.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 02.
4.13A.13.D. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DME #1 menu.
4.13A.13.E. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DME #1 menu.
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS #1 0 0 0
FMS #2 0 0 0
RNAV #1 0 0 0
RNAV #2 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
..MORE..
4.13A.13.F. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to desired option on menu below.
4.13A.13.G. Press the NEXT MENU button to select the desired option.
SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
> 3: 429 GOLD
4: 429 DF1=V1/M2, DF2=V2/M1
5: 429 DF1=V1/M1, DF2=V2/M2
6: 429 DF1=V1/V2, DF2=M1/M2
7: 429 DF1=V1/M*, DF2=V2/M*
0: NONE
2: KING SERIAL UNIT

EFS 40/EFS 50
3: STANDARD 429 DME

4.13A.14 DME #2 CONFIGURATION
4.13A.14.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 02
4.13A.14.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DME #2 menu.
4.13A.14.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DME #2 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
DME #2 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
> 3: 429 GOLD
4: 429 DF1=V1/M2, DF2=V2/M1
5: 429 DF1=V1/M1, DF2=V2/M2
6: 429 DF1=V2, DF2=M1/M2
7: 429 DF1=V1/M*, DF2=V2/M*
0: NONE
2: KING SERIAL UNIT
3: STANDARD 429 DME
4.13A.15 MLS #1 CONFIGURATION

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13A.15.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the MLS #1 menu.
4.13A.15.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the MLS #1 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
MLS #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429
2: 429 DEV ONLY
0: NONE
POINTER.
4.13A.16 MLS #2 CONFIGURATION
4.13A.16.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the MLS #2 menu.
4.13A.16.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the MLS #2 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
MLS #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429
2: 429 DEV ONLY
0: NONE
POINTER.
4.13A.17 FMS #1 CONFIGURATION

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13A.17.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the FMS #1 menu.
4.13A.17.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the FMS #1 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
FMS #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
3: KLN 88 - LOR
4: GAMA 429 - FMS
5: KLN 90 - GPS
6: GAMA 429 - LOR
7: GAMA 429 - GPS
0: NONE
1: KING KNS 660, 429
NOTE: To use Garmin WAAS capable units as GAMA 429 GPS, select KLN
90-GPS.
4.13A.18 FMS #2 CONFIGURATION
4.13A.18.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the FMS #2 menu.
4.13A.18.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the FMS #2 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
FMS #2 0 0 0

EFS 40/EFS 50
> 0: NONE
3: KLN 88 - LOR
4: GAMA 429 - FMS
5: KLN 90 - GPS
6: GAMA 429 - LOR
7: GAMA 429 - GPS
0: NONE
1: KING KNS660, 429
90-GPS.
4.13A.19 RNAV #1 CONFIGURATION
4.13A.19.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the RNAV #1 menu.
4.13A.19.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter RNAV #1 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
RNAV #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 81
4.13A.20 RNAV #2 CONFIGURATION
4.13A.20.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the RNAV #2 menu.
4.13A.20.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter RNAV #2 menu.

EFS 40/EFS 50
SG RK1 RK2
RNAV #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 81
4.13A.21 TACAN #1 CONFIGURATION
4.13A.21.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the TACAN #1 menu.
4.13A.21.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter TACAN #1 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME
5: KNS81
6: B: 429 NAV D: 429 DME
0: NONE
URED KNS 81
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
4.13A.22 TACAN #2 CONFIGURATION

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13A.22.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the TACAN #2 menu.
4.13A.22.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter TACAN #2 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME
5: KNS81
6: B: 429 NAV D: 429 DME
0: NONE
URED KNS 81
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
4.13A.23 VNAV CONFIGURATION
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0

EFS 40/EFS 50
FMS #1 0 0 0
FMS #2 0 0 0
RNAV #1 0 0 0
RNAV #2 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> FMS VNAV 0 0 0
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
AFCS MODE ANN 0 0 0
F/S AIR DATA 0 0 0
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
..MORE..
4.13A.23.D. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the VNAV menu.
4.13A.23.E. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to desired option on menu below.
4.13A.23.F. Press the NEXT MENU button to select the desired option.
SG RK1 RK2
FMS VNAV 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: FEET ONLY
2: FEET OR ANGLE
TION
TED, UNS1A

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13A.24 RADAR ALTIMETER CONFIGURATION
NOTE
4.13A.24.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the RADAR ALT menu.
4.13A.24.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the RADAR ALT menu.
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KRA 405
2: KRA 10A
3: 429
4: ALT 50/55
5: ARINC 552A
0: NONE
1: -10 mV/ft.
2: 4 mV/ft.
3: ARINC 429
LOGARITHMIC TABLE.
4.13A.25 AFCS CONFIGURATION
4.13A.25.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the AFCS TYPE menu.
4.13A.25.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the AFCS TYPE menu.

EFS 40/EFS 50
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SINGLE ANALOG
2: DUAL ANALOG
3: SINGLE 429
4: DUAL 429
AUTOPILOT
0: NONE
4.13A.26 AFCS COMMAND BAR SCALING CONFIGURATION
4.13A.26.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the AFCS CMD BAR menu.
4.13A.26.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the AFCS CMD BAR menu.
SG RK1 RK2
0: NONE
1: 429
> 2: P:1.0V R:750MV D:DSC
3: P:400MV R:400MV D:12V
MAND BARS
0: NONE
CRETE (KFC 325)

EFS 40/EFS 50
INPUT DISCRETE
INPUT DISCRETE
4.13A.27 AFCS MODE ANNUNCIATOR CONFIGURATION
4.13A.27.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the AFCS MODE ANN menu.
4.13A.27.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the AFCS MODE ANN menu.
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS MODE 0 0 0
ANNUNCIATORS
0: NONE
> 1: KFC325/400/500
2: CDV155
3: KFC225
NUNCIATORS
0: NONE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
The KFC 225 configuration in the lateral armed and lateral coupled modes will annun-
ciate REV. All other KFC autopilot configurations will annunciate BC.
4.13A.28 AIR DATA CONFIGURATION
4.13A.28.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 03
4.13A.28.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the AIR DATA menu.
4.13A.28.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the AIR DATA menu.

EFS 40/EFS 50
SG RK1 RK2
F/S AIR DATA 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
3: ANLG COLLECTIVE
4: 429 AOA/IAS 1D
7: 429 AN/AS 2D
8: MACH, NO F/S
0: NONE
2: 0.22V/KT OR 0.22V/DEG, FULL SCALE IS + /- 2.2V AT F&S, 2 DOT SCALE, DE-
TURN 2.066V
AT THE DIAMOND.
4.13A.29 RADAR TYPE CONFIGURATION
4.13A.29.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the RADAR TYPE menu.
4.13A.29.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the RADAR TYPE menu.
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0

EFS 40/EFS 50
0: NONE
> 1: RDS81/RDS82/RDR2000
2: RDS84/RDS86
3: RDR1400/NC104
4: RDR2100/2200
0: NONE
4.13A.30 RADAR CONTROL PANEL CONFIGURATION
4.13A.30.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the RADAR CTL PNL menu.
4.13A.30.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the RADAR CTL PNL menu.
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: CP 466 A,B,C
2: CP 113F
0: NONE
4.13A.31 RADAR INDICATOR CONFIGURATION
4.13A.31.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the RADAR INDICATOR menu.
4.13A.31.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the RADAR INDICATOR menu.

EFS 40/EFS 50
SG RK1 RK2
0: NONE
> BENDIX/KING
4.13A.32 CHECKLIST CONFIGURATION
4.13A.32.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the CHECKLIST menu.
4.13A.32.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the CHECKLIST menu.
SG RK1 RK2
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: CP 469A
4.13A.33 JOYSTICK CONFIGURATION
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
FMS VNAV 0 0 0
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
AFCS MODE ANN 0 0 0
AIR DATA 0 0 0
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13A.33.D. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the JOYSTICK menu.
ITEM: SG RK1 RK2
> JOYSTICK 0 0 0
TCAS 0 0 0
HOMING #1 0 0 0
HOMING #2 0 0 0
LIGHTNING DET 0 0 0
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
CABLE MODE 0 0 0
VARIABLE LNAV 0 0 0
EGPWS 0 0 0
4.13A.33.E. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the JOYSTICK menu.
4.13A.33.F. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to desired option on menu below.
4.13A.33.G. Press the NEXT MENU button to select the desired option.
SG RK1 RK2
JOYSTICK 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 5 WIRE
2: FORMATTED 429
3: RAW 429
0: NONE
CHECKLIST UNIT.
4.13A.34 TCAS CONFIGURATION
4.13A.34.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the TCAS menu.
4.13A.34.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the TCAS menu.

EFS 40/EFS 50
SG RK1 RK2
TCAS 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: BENDIX/KING
4.13A.35 HOMING #1 CONFIGURATION
4.13A.35.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the HOMING #1 menu.
4.13A.35.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the HOMING #1 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
HOMING #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ANALOG
4.13A.36 HOMING #2 CONFIGURATION
4.13A.36.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the HOMING #2 menu.
4.13A.36.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the HOMING #2 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
HOMING #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ANALOG
4.13A.37 LIGHTNING DETECTION CONFIGURATION
4.13A.37.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the LIGHTNING DET menu.
4.13A.37.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the LIGHTNING DET menu.

EFS 40/EFS 50
SG RK1 RK2
LIGHTNING DET 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: STORMSCOPE
0: NONE
1: 429 STORMSCOPE
4.13A.38 HOVER MODE AVAILABLE CONFIGURATION
4.13A.38.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the HOVER MODE AVAILABLE
menu.
4.13A.38.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the HOVER MODE AVAILABLE menu.
SG RK1 RK2
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
4.13A.39 CABLE MODE AVAILABLE CONFIGURATION
4.13A.39.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the CABLE MODE menu.
4.13A.39.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the CABLE MODE menu.

SG RK1 RK2
CABLE MODE 0 0 0

EFS 40/EFS 50
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
4.13A.40 VARIABLE LNAV CONFIGURATION
4.13A.40.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the VARIABLE LNAV menu.
4.13A.40.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the VARIABLE LNAV menu.

SG RK1 RK2
LNAV X-TRACK 0 0 0
SCALE FACTOR
LNAV
4.13A.41 VARIABLE VNAV CONFIGURATION
4.13A.41.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the VARIABLE VNAV menu.
4.13A.41.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the VARIABLE VNAV menu.

SG RK1 RK2
VNAV DEVIATION 0 0 0
SCALE FACTOR

EFS 40/EFS 50

WHEN CONFIGURED “VAR” THE EFIS WILL PERFORM THE FOLLOWING:
• Energize the ILS output during GPS approach mode
• May provide valid vertical data to the autopilot, both analog and digital, during GPS
approach mode, depending on the VERT APR configuration.
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES IF VERTICAL SCALING FEATURES ARE PROVIDED

BY LNAV
0: FIXED SCALING (1000 FT ENROUTE, CONFIGURABLE IN APPROACH) LNAV 1
AND LNAV 2
1: ABOVE VAR FEATURES PROVIDED FROM LNAV 1, FIXED FOR LNAV 2
2: FIXED FOR LNAV 1, VARIABLE VERTICAL SCALING FOR LNAV 2
3: ABOVE VAR FEATURES FOR BOTH LNAV 1 AND LNAV2
4.13A.42 EGPWS CONFIGURATION
4.13A.42.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the EGPWS menu.
4.13A.42.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the EGPWS menu.

SG RK1 RK2
EGPWS 1 1 1
0: NONE
> 1: ALLIEDSIGNAL
4.13A.43 VERTICAL SCALE SIDE CONFIGURATION
4.13A.43.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to CONFIGURATION MENU PAGE 00.
4.13A.43.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to VIEW/EDIT OPERATION CONFIG
PAGE.
4.13A.43.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to select VIEW/EDIT OPERATING CONFIG PAGE
06.

EFS 40/EFS 50

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
SPARE 0 0 0
..MORE..
4.13A.43.D. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the VERT SCALE SIDE option.

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: RIGHT
1: LEFT
4.13A.44 DECLUTTER GLIDESLOPE ON BACKCOURSE CONFIGURATION
4.13A.44.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to VIEW/EDIT OPERATING CHAR PAGE
06.
4.13A.44.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DCLTR GS ON BC menu.
4.13A.44.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DCLTR GS ON BC menu.

SG RK1 RK2
SCALE ON BACKCOURSE
0: NO
> 1: YES
4.13A.45 FULLTIME FMS MAP CONFIGURATION

EFS 40/EFS 50
06.
4.13A.45.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the FULLTIME FMS MAP menu.
4.13A.45.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the FULLTIME FMS MAP menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY FMS 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: YES
NOTE
CAUTION
4.13A.46 DISPLAY WIND VECTOR CONFIGURATION
06.
4.13A.46.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DISPLAY WIND VECTOR
menu.
4.13A.46.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DISPLAY WIND VECTOR menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY WIND 0 0 0
VECTOR FROM FMS
0: NO
> 1: YES
4.13A.47 DISPLAY DRIFT CONFIGURATION
06.

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13A.47.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DISPLAY DRIFT menu.
4.13A.47.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DISPLAY DRIFT menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
ANGLE FROM FMS
0: NO
> 1: YES
4.13A.48 DG MODE ONLY CONFIGURATION
06.
4.13A.48.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DG MODE ONLY menu.
4.13A.48.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DG MODE ONLY menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES
CAUTION
4.13A.49 DME DISTANCE ONLY CONFIGURATION
06.
4.13A.49.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DME DIST ONLY menu.
4.13A.49.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DME DIST ONLY menu.

EFS 40/EFS 50

SG RK1 RK2
DISTANCE ON BRG PTR
0: NO
2: YES - NAV LABEL
4.13A.50 RADAR ONLY CONFIGURATION
06.
4.13A.50.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the RADAR ONLY menu.
4.13A.50.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the RADAR ONLY menu.

SG RK1 RK2
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES
4.13A.51 MFD NAV CONTROL CONFIGURATION

EFS 40/EFS 50
06.
4.13A.51.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the MFD NAV CONTROL menu.
4.13A.51.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the MFD NAV CONTROL menu.

SG RK1 RK2
FMS NAV SOURCE
4.13A.52 DISPLAY HEADING TAPE CONFIGURATION
06.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
SPARE 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
4.13A.52.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move the pointer to MORE.
4.13A.52.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter VIEW/EDIT OPERATING CHAR PAGE 07.

EFS 40/EFS 50
ITEM SG RK1 RK2

> HDG TAPE 0 0 0
DH SELECT 0 0 0
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
SEL HDG SYNC 0 0 0
SEL CRS SYNC 0 0 0
..MORE..
4.13A.52.D. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DISPLAY HDG TAPE menu.

SG RK1 RK2
TAPE
> 0: NO
1: YES
4.13A.53 ADI PLANE/COMMAND BARS CONFIGURATION
07.
4.13A.53.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the COMMAND BARS menu.
4.13A.53.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the COMMAND BARS menu.

SG RK1 RK2
ADI AIRCRAFT/ 0 0 0
COMMAND BAR SYMBOLS

EFS 40/EFS 50

2: DISCRETE SELECT
DISPLAYED?
AXES
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
4.13A.54 ROLL INDICATOR CONFIGURATION
07.
4.13A.54.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the ROLL INDICATOR menu.
4.13A.54.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the ROLL INDICATOR menu.

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: ROLL INDICATOR
1: SKY POINTER
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
OPERATION.
4.13A.55 DECLUTTER DATA ON UNUSUAL ATTITUDE CONFIGURATION

EFS 40/EFS 50
07.
4.13A.55.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DCLTR UNUS ATT menu.
4.13A.55.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DCLTR UNUS ATT menu.

SG RK1 RK2
ON UNUSUAL ATTITUDE
> 0: NO
1: YES
CLUTTERED?
0: NO
4.13A.56 CATEGORY II AVAILABLE CONFIGURATION
07.
4.13A.56.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the CAT II AVAILABLE menu.
4.13A.56.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the CAT II AVAILABLE menu.

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NO
0: NO

EFS 40/EFS 50

4.13A.57 DISPLAY ADI PERSPECTIVE LINES
07.
4.13A.57.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the PERSPECTIVE LINES menu.
4.13A.57.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the PERSPECTIVE LINES menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY ADI 0 0 0
PERSPECTIVE LINES
> 0: NO
1: YES
4.13A.58 DECISION HEIGHT SELECTOR CONFIGURATION
07.
4.13A.58.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DH SELECT menu.
4.13A.58.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DH SELECT menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DH SELECT 0 0 0
BY EFIS
> 0: NO
1: YES
4.13A.59 SELECT CONTROL PANEL SYNC CONFIGURATION
07.

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13A.59.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the CTL PNL SYNC menu.
4.13A.59.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the CTL PNL SYNC menu.

SG RK1 RK2
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: YES - MASTER
2: YES - SLAVE
4.13A.60 SELECTED HDG SYNC CONFIGURATION
07.
4.13A.60.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the SELECTED HDG SYNC menu.
4.13A.60.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the SELECTED HDG SYNC menu.

SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED HDG 0 0 0
SYNC FROM OTHER SG
> 0: NO
1: YES
4.13A.61 SELECTED CRS SYNC CONFIGURATION

EFS 40/EFS 50
07.
4.13A.61.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the SELECTED CRS SYNC menu.
4.13A.61.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the SELECTED CRS SYNC menu.

SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED CRS 0 0 0
SYNC FROM OTHER SG
> 0: NO
1: YES
COURSE IS TO BE SYNCHRONIZED WITH CROSS-SG.
4.13A.62 NORTH UP MAP CONFIGURATION
07.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BARS 0 0 0
DH SELECT 0 0 0
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
SEL HDG SYNC 0 0 0
SEL CRS SYNC 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2

EFS 40/EFS 50

VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
SEL HDG COLOR 0 0 0
CMD BAR COLOR 0 0 0
REV MODE ANN 0 0 0
RISING RUNWAY 0 0 0
ADI DEV SRC 0 0 0
.. MORE..
4.13A.62.D. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the NORTH UP MAP menu.

SG RK1 RK2
NORTH UP MAP 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES
4.13A.63 VERTICAL POINTER TYPE CONFIGURATION
08.
4.13A.63.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the VERT PTR TYPE menu.
4.13A.63.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the VERT PTR TYPE menu.

SG RK1 RK2
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0

EFS 40/EFS 50
0: SMALL DIAMOND
2: RECTANGLE
DISPLAYED.
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
4.13A.64 DISPLAY MESSAGES FOR FMS CONFIGURATION
08.
4.13A.64.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DISPLAY MESSAGES FOR
FROM menu.
4.13A.64.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DISPLAY MESSAGES FROM FMS
menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY 0 0 0
MESSAGES FROM FMS
> 0: NO
1: YES
4.13A.65 HDG COLOR CONFIGURATION
08.
4.13A.65.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the SEL HDG COLOR menu.
4.13A.65.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the SEL HDG COLOR menu.

EFS 40/EFS 50

SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED 0 0 0
> 0: ORANGE
1: CYAN
2: MAGENTA
READOUT SHOULD BE.
4.13A.66 COMMAND BAR COLOR CONFIGURATION
08.
4.13A.66.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the CMD BAR COLOR menu.
4.13A.66.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the CMD BAR COLOR menu.

SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BAR 0 0 0
COLOR
> 0: GREEN
1: MAGENTA
SHOULD BE.
4.13A.67 REVERSIONARY MODE ANNUNCIATION CONFIGURATION
08.
4.13A.67.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the REV MODE ANN menu.
4.13A.67.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the REV MODE ANN menu.

EFS 40/EFS 50
SG RK1 RK2
REVERSIONARY 0 0 0
MODE ANNUNCIATION
> 0: NONE
1: STBY/COPY
2: SG2
3: SG3
CIATED
4.13A.68 LOC/MLS DEVIATION DISPLAY ON EADI CONFIGURATION
NOTE: This option is also applicable to FMS/GPS installations configured for

WAAS/SBAS approaches.
08.
4.13A.68.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the RISING RUNWAY menu.
4.13A.68.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the RISING RUNWAY menu.
SG RK1 RK2
ADI LOC/MLS 0 0 0
DISPLAY
> 0: RISING RUNWAY
1: DBAR
2: RUNWAY OR DBAR
EADI.
1: ALWAYS AS A DBAR


EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13A.69 ADI ILS/MLS SOURCE CONFIGURATION
08.
4.13A.69.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the ADI DEV SRC menu.
4.13A.69.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the ADI DEV SRC menu.

SG RK1 RK2
ADI ILS/MLS 0 0 0
DEVIATION SOURCE

4.13A.70 COMMAND BAR FILTER CONFIGURATION
08.
4.13A.70.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the CMD BAR FILTER menu.
4.13A.70.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the CMD BAR FILTER menu.

SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BAR 0 0 0
TIME CONSTANTS
> 0: 0 SEC
1: 0.1 SEC
2: 0.2 SEC
3: 0.25 SEC
4: 0.3 SEC
5: 0.35 SEC
6: 0.4 SEC

EFS 40/EFS 50
7: 0.5 SEC
4.13A.71 MLS VERTICAL ANNUNCIATION CONFIGURATION
08.
4.13A.71.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the MLS VRT ANNUNC menu.
4.13A.71.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the MLS VRT ANNUNC menu.

SG RK1 RK2
MLS VERTICAL 0 0 0
ANNUNCIATION
> 0: GS
1: GP
4.13A.72 DATUM SCALING CONFIGURATION
08.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
NORTH UP MAP 0 0 0
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
SEL HDG COLOR 0 0 0
CMD BAR COLOR 0 0 0
REV MODE ANN 0 0 0
RISING RUNWAY 0 0 0
ADI DEV SRC 0 0 0
> .. MORE..

EFS 40/EFS 50

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
LNAV CRS CTRL 0 0 0
SG # 1 SIDE 0 0 0
TACAN ANNUNC 0 0 0
TCAS 0 0 0
RADAR SCAN 0 0 0
.. MORE..
4.13A.72.D. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DATUM SCALING menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DATUM SCALE 0 0 0
> 0: 393 MV/DEG
1: 300 MV/DEG
2: 206 MV/DEG
COURSE DATUM
4.13A.73 HDG FAIL ANNUNCIATION CONFIGURATION
09.
4.13A.73.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the HDG FAIL ANNUNC menu.
4.13A.73.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the HDG FAIL ANNUNC menu.

EFS 40/EFS 50

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NORMAL HDG
1: LARGE HDG
4.13A.74 VNAV APPROACH SCALE CONFIGURATION
09.
4.13A.74.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the VNAV APR SCALE menu.
4.13A.74.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the VNAV APR SCALE menu.

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: 1000 FEET
1: 500 FEET
2: 250 FEET
3: 200 FEET
4.13A.75 LNAV CRS CONTROL CONFIGURATION
09.
4.13A.75.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the LNAV CRS CTRL menu.
4.13A.75.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the LNAV CRS CTRL menu.

SG RK1 RK2
XSIDE LNAV 0 0 0
CRS & JSTK CTL
> 0:NO
1:YES

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13A.76 SG #1 SIDE CONFIGURATION
09.
4.13A.76.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the SG #1 SIDE menu.
4.13A.76.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the SG #1 SIDE menu.

SG RK1 RK2
SG #1 SIDE 1 1 1
> 0: LEFT
1: RIGHT
4.13A.77 AIRCRAFT SYMBOL CONFIGURATION
4.13A.77.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to VIEVV/EDIT OPERATING CHAR PAGE
09.
4.13A.77.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the AIRCRAFT SYMBOL menu.
4.13A.77.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the AIRCRAFT SYMBOL menu.

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: FIXED WING
1: ROTARY WING

EFS 40/EFS 50

PLAYED.
4.13A.78 TACAN ANNUNCIATE CONFIGURATION
09.
4.13A.78.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the TACAN ANNUNC menu.
4.13A.78.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the TACAN ANNUNC menu.

SG RK1 RK2
TACAN ANNUC 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: A/A L141 26=0 27=1
2: A/A L141 27=1 28=1
CIATED.
0: NO
4.13A.79 TCAS INTRUDER DISPLAYS CONFIGURATION
09.
4.13A.79.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the TCAS DISPLAY menu.
4.13A.79.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the TCAS DISPLAY menu.

SG RK1 RK2
TCAS INTRUDER 0 0 0
DISPLAYS

EFS 40/EFS 50

2: HSI-NONE MFD-ALL
4: HSI-ALL MFD-ALL
PRESENTED.
4.13A.80 CAT II SENSORS CONFIGURATION
09.
4.13A.80.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the CAT II SENSORS menu.
4.13A.80.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the CAT II SENSORS menu.

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: LOC ONLY
1: MLS ONLY
2: LOC OR MLS
PROACHES
4.13A.81 MAX RADAR SCAN ANGLE CONFIGURATION
09.
4.13A.81.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the RADAR SCAN menu.

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13A.81.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the RADAR SCAN menu.

SG RK1 RK2
MAX RADAR 0 0 0
SCAN ANGLE
> 0: 90 DEG
0: 100 DEG
1: 120 RIGHT
4.13A.82 RADAR SDI CONFIGURATION
09.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DATUM SCALING 0 0 0
LNAV CRS CTRL 0 0 0
SG # 1 0 0 0
TACAN ANNUNC 0 0 0
TCAS DISPLAYS 0 0 0
CATII SENSORS 0 0 0
RADAR SCAN 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> RADAR SDI 0 0 0

EFS 40/EFS 50

LNAV VERT APR 0 0 0
L/VNAV VERT APR 0 0 0
LP VERT APR 0 0 0
LPV VERT APR 0 0 0
LNAV SELECT OUT 0 0 0
4.13A.82.D. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the RADAR SDI menu.

SG RK1 RK2
RADAR SDI 0 0 0
1: SDI # 1 + RANGE
2: SDI # 2 + RANGE
3: SDI # 3 + RANGE
SG
4.13A.83 PITCH OFFSET SYNC CONFIGURATION
10.
4.13A.83.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the PITCH OFFSET SYNC DIS-
CRETE menu.
4.13A.83.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the PITCH OFFSET SYNC DISCRETE
menu.

SG RK1 RK2
PITCH OFFSET 0 0 0

EFS 40/EFS 50
SYNC DISCRETE
> 0: NO
1: YES
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
4.13A.84 DME HOLD DISTANCE WITH ADF RMI CONFIGURATION
10.
4.13A.84.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the ADF PTR HOLD DST menu.
4.13A.84.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the ADF PTR HOLD DST menu.

SG RK1 RK2
ON ADF BRG PTR
> 0: NO
1: YES
DATA.
4.13A.85 FMS OUTPUT BUS CONFIGURATION
products.
10.
4.13A.85.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the FMS OUTPUT BUS menu.
4.13A.85.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the FMS OUTPUT BUS menu.

EFS 40/EFS 50

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NORMAL
1: CONCENTRATED
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
set that was provided before SW version 1201. When configured for CONCENTRAT-
ED the FMS output bus will contain the labels of the original set, plus those added for
GNS-XLS that was provided in SW version 1201, plus the most recent list for the Glo-
balStar. With this option selected the Air Data input bus will be activated on the EFIS
regardless of the configured selection for FAST/SLOW display.
4.13A.86 LNAV VERT APR CONFIGURATION
4.13A.86.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PAGE 10.
4.13A.86.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the LNAV VERT APR menu.
4.13A.86.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the LNAV VERT APR menu.
VIEW/EDIT/OPERATING CHAR PG 97
SG RK1 RK2
LNAV VERT APR 0 0 0
COUPLING TO AFCS
> 0:LNAV1:NO LNAV2:NO
1:LNAV1:YES LNAV2:NO
2:LNAV1:NO LNAV2:YES
3:LNAV1:YES LNAV2:YES
THIS CONFIGURATION PAGE WORKS IN CONJUCTION WITH THE VARIABLE
VNAV PAGE. WHEN VARIABLE VNAV IS CONFIGURED "VAR" FOR THE RESPEC-
TIVE SIDE THIS CONFIGURATION CAN BE UTILIZED. WHEN VARIABLE VNAV IS
CONFIGURED "FIX" THIS PAGE HAS NO EFFECT ON OPERATION. THIS
SCREEN DETERMINES WHEN TO PROVIDE VALID VERTICAL GUIDANCE TO
THE AUTOPILOT WHEN THE WAAS APPROACH TYPE IS LNAV.
0: DO NOT PROVIDE VALID VERTICAL GUIDANCE TO THE AUTOPILOT ON
LNAV1 AND LNAV2 WHEN GPS APPROACH TYPE IS LNAV.

EFS 40/EFS 50
1: PROCESS VERTICAL DATA TO THE AUTOPILOT ON LNAV 1 BUT NOT

LNAV 2 WHEN THE GPS APPROACH TYPE IS LNAV
2: PROCESS VERTICAL DATA TO THE AUTOPILOT ON LNAV 2 BUT NOT LNAV 1
WHEN THE GPS APPROACH TYPE IS LNAV
3: PROCESS VERTICAL DATA TO THE AUTOPILOT ON BOTH LNAV 1 AND
LNAV 2 WHEN THE APPROACH TYPE IS LNAV
4.13A.87 L/VNAV VERT APR CONFIGURATION
4.13A.87.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the L/VNAV VERT APR menu.
4.13A.87.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the L/VNAV VERT APR menu.
SG RK1 RK2
COUPLING TO AFCS
THE AUTOPILOT WHEN THE WAAS APPROACH TYPE IS L/VNAV.
LNAV1 AND LNAV2 WHEN GPS APPROACH TYPE IS L/VNAV.
WHEN THE GPS APPROACH TYPE IS L/VNAV
LNAV 2 WHEN THE APPROACH TYPE IS L/VNAV
4.13A.88 LP VERT APR CONFIGURATION
4.13A.88.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the LP VERT APR menu.

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13A.88.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the LP VERT APR menu.
SG RK1 RK2
LP VERT APR 0 0 0
COUPLING TO AFCS
THE AUTOPILOT WHEN THE WAAS APPROACH TYPE IS LP.
LNAV1 AND LNAV2 WHEN GPS APPROACH TYPE IS LP.
WHEN THE GPS APPROACH TYPE IS LP
LNAV 2 WHEN THE APPROACH TYPE IS LP
4.13A.89 LPV VERT APR CONFIGURATION
4.13A.89.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the LP VERT APR menu.
4.13A.89.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the LP VERT APR menu.
VIEW/EDIT/OPERATING CHAR PG100

SG RK1 RK2
LPV VERT APR 0 0 0
COUPLING TO AFCS

EFS 40/EFS 50
THE AUTOPILOT WHEN THE WAAS APPROACH TYPE IS LPV.
LNAV1 AND LNAV2 WHEN GPS APPROACH TYPE IS LPV.
WHEN THE GPS APPROACH TYPE IS LPV
LNAV 2 WHEN THE APPROACH TYPE IS LPV
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
HAVING ALL FOUR VERT APR CONFIGURATIONS SET TO YES WILL ALLOW
THE GPS TO COUPLE TO THE AUTOPILOT FOR ALL WAAS APPROACH TYPES
AND NOT REQUIRE THE GPS TO TRANSMIT THE APPROACH TYPE TO THE
GPS.
4.13A.90 LNAV SELECT OUT CONFIGURATION
4.13A.90.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the LNAV SELECT OUT menu.
4.13A.90.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the LNAV SELECT OUT menu.

SG RK1 RK2
ENROUTE ONLY
> 0:LNAV SELECTED
1:ENROUTE ONLY
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE OPERATION OF THE LNAV SELECT OUT PIN.
0: THE LNAV SELECT OUT OPERATION IS ACTIVE WHEN THE FMS, LORAN,
OMEGA OR GPS ARE THE SELECTED SENSOR.

EFS 40/EFS 50
1: THE LNAV SELECT OUT IS NOT ACTIVE WHEN PERFORMING A GPS

APPROACH BUT IS LOW WHEN NOT IN GPS APPROACH.
4.13A.91 EXITING CONFIGURATION
10. The following screen will be displayed:

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
RADAR SDI 0 0 0
NOTE:
4.13A.91.B. Press TST to EXIT and Enter Config mode.

4.13A.91.C. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to COPY SG TO RACKS 1 & 2 as
shown below.
4.13A.91.D. Press the NEXT MENU button to select COPY SG TO RACKS 1 & 2 MENU as
shown below.

4.13A.91.E. Press the NEXT MENU BUTTON to copy the config data in the SG to Racks 1 And 2.

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13A.91.F. When copy process is completed, press the TST button to exit the maintenance con-
figuration pages. Verify that the system resets within one second. This is indicated
by the screen going blank and a self test pass message being displayed. This com-
pletes the configuration process.

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13B CONFIGURATION WITH -16 VERSION SOFTWARE
Aircraft systems and installations vary. To ease configuration and insure all interfaces will be
programmed correctly, a list of interfacing equipment and type of interface should be made. The
general configuration process is demonstrated in the following example installation.
NOTE
1. INITIAL SET UP

EFS 40/EFS 50

41. VARIABLE VNAV CONFIGURATION

EFS 40/EFS 50

86. LNAV VERT APR CONFIGURATION
87. L/VNAV VERT APR CONFIGURATION
88. LP VERT APR CONFIGURATION
89. LPV VERT APR CONFIGURATION
90. LNAV SELECT OUT
4.13B.1 INITIAL SET UP
4.13B.1.A. Make sure all units are connected properly. Connect an auxiliary power unit (APU)
to the aircraft.
4.13B.1.B. Turn aircraft power, avionics power and inverters on. Verify the display unit becomes
programming.
4.13B.1.C. SG cooling is required and must be checked. If the ambient temperature is above
35°C a Fan Flag will appear on the display if the cooling fan is not operating. At
ambient temperatures below 7°C cooling may not be requested and the fan flag may
not appear. It the cooling fan is not operating due to malfunction or miswire it should
be repaired before continuing.

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13B.2 DISPLAYING THE CONFIGURATION MENU PAGE
The HSI, ADI and Reversionary display will display all item identical among all three displays but
the EADI will not be able to show the rack configurations, instead it will show the configuration data
4.13B.2.A. Press the TST button for three seconds. The EFS 40/EFS 50 TEST PAGE will be
displayed.
FIGURE 4-14C EFS 40/EFS 50 Test Page
4.13B.2.B. Press the HSI and ARC buttons simultaneously. The EFS 40/EFS 50
MAINTENANCE COPYRIGHT PAGE will be displayed in green. Exact switch
coordination may be required.
EFS 40 MAINTENANCE
ALLIED-SIGNAL INC.
IP 125-00601-XXXX
NP1 125-00658-XXXX
DP1 125-00699-XXXX
RP 125-00604-XXXX
4.13B.2.C. Press the NEXT MENU button. The MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS PAGE will be
displayed. A pointer to the first line will be displayed.

EFS 40/EFS 50
FIGURE 4-14D Menu and Item Buttons

> LRU STATUS
TEST PATTERNS
PROCESSOR ITEMS
BIT HISTORY STACK
WATCHDOG TIMER TEST
SUBSYSTEM MENU
ASCII TEXT PAGE
4.13B.2.D. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move the pointer down to the SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION position.
4.13B.2.E. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the CONFIGURATION MENU as shown
below.
The first two items on this menu are used to set the configuration upon the original
installation or change something in the original configuration due to a unit change or
unit operation. The three copy items may be used to copy configurations from racks to

EFS 40/EFS 50
NOTE
4.13B.3 SYMBOL GENERATOR CONFIGURATION
4.13B.3.A. Press the NEXT MENU button to select VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 01 as
shown below.
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM HSI ADI
> SG NUMBER 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #1 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #2 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0
ADF #1 0 0
ADF #2 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0

EFS 40/EFS 50
VOR/ILS #2 0 0
..MORE..
4.13B.3.B. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter SG NUMBER menu as shown below.
4.13B.3.C. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to desired option on menu below.
4.13B.3.D. Press the NEXT MENU button to select the desired option.
SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0
> 0: #1 EFIS
1: #2 EFIS
2: MFD
0: PILOT
1: CO-PILOT
2: MFD
4.13B.4 DISPLAY CONFIGURATION
4.13B.4.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to the VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 01.
4.13B.4.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the SINGLE/DUAL menu.
4.13B.4.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the SINGLE/DUAL menu.
4.13B.4.D. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to desired option on menu below.
4.13B.4.E. Press the NEXT MENU button to select the desired option.
SG RK1 RK2
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
> 0: SINGLE EHSI
1: DUAL EHSI
2: SINGLE EADI/EHSI
3: DUAL EADI/EHSI
6: SINGLE MFD SG
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE EFS SYSTEM TYPE IN WHICH THIS SG
EXISTS.

EFS 40/EFS 50

4.13B.5 DISPLAY UNIT TYPE CONFIGURATION
4.13B.5.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 01.
4.13B.5.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to DU TYPE menu.
4.13B.5.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DU TYPE menu.
SG RK1 RK2
DU TYPE 0 0 0
HSI ADI
> 0: ED461 ED462
1: ED462 ED462
2: ED551A ED551A
3: ED551 ED551
4: ED551A/ED461 ED462
5: ED551A/ED462 ED462
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE DISPLAY UNIT TYPES FOR HSI AND ADI
DISPLAYS
4: MFD OPTION. 5 - INCH MAGNIFIED ON THE MFD BUT 4 - INCH WITH
CONTROLS ON HSI DU BEZEL WHEN IN STANDBY.
5: MFD OPTION. 5 -INCH MAGNIFIED ON THE MFD BUT 4 - INCH WITH
EXTERNAL CONTROLS WHEN IN STANDBY.
4.13B.6 ATTITUDE/HDG #1 CONFIGURATION
4.13B.6.A. Press PREV MENU button to return to VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 01.

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13B.6.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the ATTITUDE/HDG #1 menu.
4.13B.6.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the ATTITUDE/HDG #1 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
ATT HDG
0: NONE NONE
> 1: XYZ XYZ
2: 429 429
3: NONE XYZ
SOURCES
0: NONE
1: ANALOG XYZ
2: 429 AHRS SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
configured for either option 1 or 2. See section 3.3.3 HEADING/ATTITUDE/AHRS/
RATE OF TURN REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS.
4.13B.7 ATTITUDE/HDG #2 CONFIGURATION
4.13B.7.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the ATTITUDE/HDG #2 menu.
4.13B.7.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the ATTITUDE/HDG #2 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
ATT HDG
> 0: NONE NONE
1: XYZ XYZ
2: 429 429

EFS 40/EFS 50
3: NONE XYZ
SOURCES
0: NONE
1: ANALOG XYZ
2: 429 AHRS SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
4.13B.8 RATE OF TURN CONFIGURATION
4.13B.8.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the RATE OF TURN menu.
4.13B.8.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the RATE OF TURN menu.
SG RK1 RK2
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: COLLINS ROT GYRO
2: KING ROT GYRO
3: SPERRY ROT GYRO
4: 429 ROT
8: 429 YAW RATE
0: NONE

EFS 40/EFS 50

CONFIGURATION NOTE:
EFS.
4.13B.9 ADF #1 CONFIGURATION
4.13B.9.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the ADF #1 menu.
4.13B.9.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the ADF #1 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
ADF #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429
> 3: SYNCHRO
4: DC S/C BRG ONLY
5: 429 BRG ONLY
6: SYNCHRO BRG ONLY
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429 ADF SYSTEM
3: XYZ

EFS 40/EFS 50
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
4.13B.10 ADF #2 CONFIGURATION
4.13B.10.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the ADF #2 menu.
4.13B.10.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the ADF #2 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
ADF #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429
3: SYNCHRO
4: DC S/C BRG ONLY
5: 429 BRG ONLY
6: SYNCHRO BRG ONLY
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429 ADF SYSTEM
3: XYZ
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
4.13B.11 VOR/ILS #1 CONFIGURATION
4.13B.11.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to VIEVV/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 01.
4.13B.11.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the VOR/ILS #1 menu.
4.13B.11.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the VOR/ILS #1 menu.

EFS 40/EFS 50
SG RK1 RK2
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4: KNS81
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE SOURCE TYPE FOR THE SIDE 1 VOR/ILS
RECEIVER
0: NONE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
4.13B.12 VOR/ILS #2 CONFIGURATION
4.13B.12.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the VOR/ILS #2 menu.
4.13B.12.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the VOR/ILS #2 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4: KNS81
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE SOURCE TYPE FOR THE SIDE 2 VOR/ILS
RECEIVER

EFS 40/EFS 50
0: NONE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
4.13B.13 DME #1 CONFIGURATION
4.13B.13.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to MORE.
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM HSI ADI
SG NUMBER 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #1 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #2 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0
ADF #1 0 0
ADF #2 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0

EFS 40/EFS 50
VOR/ILS #2 0 0
> ..MORE..
4.13B.13.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 02.
4.13B.13.D. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DME #1 menu.
4.13B.13.E. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DME #1 menu.
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS #1 0 0 0
FMS #2 0 0 0
RNAV #1 0 0 0
RNAV #2 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
..MORE..
4.13B.13.F. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to desired option on menu below.
4.13B.13.G. Press the NEXT MENU button to select the desired option.
SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
> 3: 429 GOLD
4: 429 DF1=V1/M2, DF2=V2/M1
5: 429 DF1=V1/M1, DF2=V2/M2
6: 429 DF1=V1/V2, DF2=M1/M2
7: 429 DF1=V1/M*, DF2=V2/M*
0: NONE
2: KING SERIAL UNIT

EFS 40/EFS 50
3: STANDARD 429 DME

4.13B.14 DME #2 CONFIGURATION
4.13B.14.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 02
4.13B.14.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DME #2 menu.
4.13B.14.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DME #2 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
DME #2 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
> 3: 429 GOLD
4: 429 DF1=V1/M2, DF2=V2/M1
5: 429 DF1=V1/M1, DF2=V2/M2
6: 429 DF1=V2, DF2=M1/M2
7: 429 DF1=V1/M*, DF2=V2/M*
0: NONE
2: KING SERIAL UNIT
3: STANDARD 429 DME
4.13B.15 MLS #1 CONFIGURATION

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13B.15.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the MLS #1 menu.
4.13B.15.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the MLS #1 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
MLS #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429
2: 429 DEV ONLY
0: NONE
POINTER.
4.13B.16 MLS #2 CONFIGURATION
4.13B.16.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the MLS #2 menu.
4.13B.16.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the MLS #2 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
MLS #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429
2: 429 DEV ONLY
0: NONE
POINTER.

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13B.17 FMS #1 CONFIGURATION
4.13B.17.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the FMS #1 menu.
4.13B.17.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the FMS #1 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
FMS #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
3: KLN 88 - LOR
4: GAMA 429 - FMS
5: KLN 90 - GPS
6: GAMA 429 - LOR
7: GAMA 429 - GPS
0: NONE
1: KING KNS 660, 429
90-GPS.
4.13B.18 FMS #2 CONFIGURATION
4.13B.18.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the FMS #2 menu.
4.13B.18.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the FMS #2 menu.

EFS 40/EFS 50
SG RK1 RK2
FMS #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
3: KLN 88 - LOR
4: GAMA 429 - FMS
5: KLN 90 - GPS
6: GAMA 429 - LOR
7: GAMA 429 - GPS
0: NONE
1: KING KNS660, 429
90-GPS.
4.13B.19 RNAV #1 CONFIGURATION
4.13B.19.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the RNAV #1 menu.
4.13B.19.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter RNAV #1 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
RNAV #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 81
4.13B.20 RNAV #2 CONFIGURATION
4.13B.20.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the RNAV #2 menu.

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13B.20.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter RNAV #2 menu.

SG RK1 RK2
RNAV #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 81
4.13B.21 TACAN #1 CONFIGURATION
4.13B.21.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the TACAN #1 menu.
4.13B.21.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter TACAN #1 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME
5: KNS81
6: B: 429 NAV D: 429 DME
0: NONE
5: KNS 81 RNAV WITH TACAN CAPABILITY, VOR #1 MUST ALSO BE
CONFIGURED KNS 81
CONFIGURATION NOTE:

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13B.22 TACAN #2 CONFIGURATION
4.13B.22.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the TACAN #2 menu.
4.13B.22.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter TACAN #2 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME
5: KNS81
6: B: 429 NAV D: 429 DME
0: NONE
5: KNS 81 RNAV WITH TACAN CAPABILITY, VOR #2 MUST ALSO BE
CONFIGURED KNS 81
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
4.13B.23 VNAV CONFIGURATION
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0

EFS 40/EFS 50
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS #1 0 0 0
FMS #2 0 0 0
RNAV #1 0 0 0
RNAV #2 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> FMS VNAV 0 0 0
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
AFCS MODE ANN 0 0 0
F/S AIR DATA 0 0 0
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
..MORE..
4.13B.23.D. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the VNAV menu.
4.13B.23.E. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to desired option on menu below.
4.13B.23.F. Press the NEXT MENU button to select the desired option.
SG RK1 RK2
FMS VNAV 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: FEET ONLY
2: FEET OR ANGLE
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE SOURCE TYPE FOR FMS VERTICAL
NAVIGATION

EFS 40/EFS 50

1: ONLY ’FEET’ FMS VNAV IS ALLOWED, DECLUTTER IF ’ANGLE’ IS
TRANSMITTED, UNS1A
4.13B.24 RADAR ALTIMETER CONFIGURATION
NOTE
4.13B.24.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the RADAR ALT menu.
4.13B.24.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the RADAR ALT menu.
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KRA 405
2: KRA 10A
3: 429
4: ALT 50/55
5: ARINC 552A
0: NONE
1: -10 mV/ft.
2: 4 mV/ft.
3: ARINC 429
LOGARITHMIC TABLE.
4.13B.25 AFCS CONFIGURATION
4.13B.25.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the AFCS TYPE menu.
4.13B.25.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the AFCS TYPE menu.

EFS 40/EFS 50
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SINGLE ANALOG
2: DUAL ANALOG
3: SINGLE 429
4: DUAL 429
AUTOPILOT
0: NONE
4.13B.26 AFCS COMMAND BAR SCALING CONFIGURATION
4.13B.26.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the AFCS CMD BAR menu.
4.13B.26.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the AFCS CMD BAR menu.
SG RK1 RK2
0: NONE
1: 429
> 2: P:1.0V R:750MV D:DSC
3: P:400MV R:400MV D:12V
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE SOURCE TYPE OF FLIGHT DIRECTOR
COMMAND BARS

EFS 40/EFS 50
0: NONE
2: PITCH 1.0 V/DEG, ROLL 750 MV/DEG, DECLUTTER BASED ON INPUT
DISCRETE (KFC 325)
INPUT DISCRETE
INPUT DISCRETE
4.13B.27 AFCS MODE ANNUNCIATOR CONFIGURATION
4.13B.27.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the AFCS MODE ANN menu.
4.13B.27.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the AFCS MODE ANN menu.
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS MODE 0 0 0
ANNUNCIATORS
0: NONE
> 1: KFC325/400/500
2: CDV155
3: KFC225
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE SOURCE TYPE FOR AUTOPILOT MODE
ANNUNCIATORS
0: NONE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
The KFC 225 configuration in the lateral armed and lateral coupled modes will
annunciate REV. All other KFC autopilot configurations will annunciate BC.
4.13B.28 AIR DATA CONFIGURATION
4.13B.28.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to VIEW/EDIT EQUIPMENT PAGE 03

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13B.28.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the AIR DATA menu.
4.13B.28.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the AIR DATA menu.
SG RK1 RK2
F/S AIR DATA 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
3: ANLG COLLECTIVE
4: 429 AOA/IAS 1D
7: 429 AN/AS 2D
8: MACH, NO F/S
0: NONE
2: 0.22V/KT OR 0.22V/DEG, FULL SCALE IS + /- 2.2V AT F&S, 2 DOT SCALE,
DECLUTTER +2.4 V, RETURN + 2.3 V
3: 0.2V/mm, FULL SCALE IS +/- 2V AT THE DIAMOND, DECLUTTER 2.166V,
RETURN 2.066V
AT THE DIAMOND.
4.13B.29 RADAR TYPE CONFIGURATION
4.13B.29.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the RADAR TYPE menu.
4.13B.29.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the RADAR TYPE menu.

EFS 40/EFS 50
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: RDS81/RDS82/RDR2000
2: RDS84/RDS86
3: RDR1400/NC104
4: RDR2100/2200
0: NONE
4.13B.30 RADAR CONTROL PANEL CONFIGURATION
4.13B.30.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the RADAR CTL PNL menu.
4.13B.30.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the RADAR CTL PNL menu.
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: CP 466 A,B,C
2: CP 113F
0: NONE
4.13B.31 RADAR INDICATOR CONFIGURATION
4.13B.31.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the RADAR INDICATOR menu.

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13B.31.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the RADAR INDICATOR menu.
SG RK1 RK2
0: NONE
> BENDIX/KING
4.13B.32 CHECKLIST CONFIGURATION
4.13B.32.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the CHECKLIST menu.
4.13B.32.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the CHECKLIST menu.
SG RK1 RK2
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: CP 469A
4.13B.33 JOYSTICK CONFIGURATION
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
FMS VNAV 0 0 0
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
AFCS MODE ANN 0 0 0
AIR DATA 0 0 0
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13B.33.D. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the JOYSTICK menu.
ITEM: SG RK1 RK2
> JOYSTICK 0 0 0
TCAS 0 0 0
HOMING #1 0 0 0
HOMING #2 0 0 0
LIGHTNING DET 0 0 0
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
CABLE MODE 0 0 0
VARIABLE LNAV 0 0 0
EGPWS 0 0 0
4.13B.33.E. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the JOYSTICK menu.
4.13B.33.F. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to desired option on menu below.
4.13B.33.G. Press the NEXT MENU button to select the desired option.
SG RK1 RK2
JOYSTICK 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 5 WIRE
2: FORMATTED 429
3: RAW 429
0: NONE
CHECKLIST UNIT.
4.13B.34 TCAS CONFIGURATION
4.13B.34.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the TCAS menu.
4.13B.34.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the TCAS menu.

EFS 40/EFS 50
SG RK1 RK2
TCAS 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: BENDIX/KING
4.13B.35 HOMING #1 CONFIGURATION
4.13B.35.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the HOMING #1 menu.
4.13B.35.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the HOMING #1 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
HOMING #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ANALOG
4.13B.36 HOMING #2 CONFIGURATION
4.13B.36.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the HOMING #2 menu.
4.13B.36.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the HOMING #2 menu.
SG RK1 RK2
HOMING #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ANALOG
4.13B.37 LIGHTNING DETECTION CONFIGURATION
4.13B.37.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the LIGHTNING DET menu.
4.13B.37.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the LIGHTNING DET menu.

EFS 40/EFS 50
SG RK1 RK2
LIGHTNING DET 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: STORMSCOPE
0: NONE
1: 429 STORMSCOPE
4.13B.38 HOVER MODE AVAILABLE CONFIGURATION
4.13B.38.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the HOVER MODE AVAILABLE
menu.
4.13B.38.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the HOVER MODE AVAILABLE menu.
SG RK1 RK2
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
4.13B.39 CABLE MODE AVAILABLE CONFIGURATION
4.13B.39.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the CABLE MODE menu.
4.13B.39.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the CABLE MODE menu.

SG RK1 RK2
CABLE MODE 0 0 0

EFS 40/EFS 50
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
4.13B.40 VARIABLE LNAV CONFIGURATION
4.13B.40.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the VARIABLE LNAV menu.
4.13B.40.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the VARIABLE LNAV menu.

SG RK1 RK2
LNAV X-TRACK 0 0 0
SCALE FACTOR
LNAV
4.13B.41 VARIABLE VNAV CONFIGURATION
4.13B.41.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the VARIABLE VNAV menu.
4.13B.41.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the VARIABLE VNAV menu.

SG RK1 RK2
VNAV DEVIATION 0 0 0
SCALE FACTOR

EFS 40/EFS 50

WHEN CONFIGURED “VAR” THE EFIS WILL PERFORM THE FOLLOWING:
• May provide valid vertical data to the autopilot, both analog and digital, during GPS
approach mode, depending on the VERT APR configuration.
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES IF VERTICAL SCALING FEATURES ARE PROVIDED

BY LNAV
0: FIXED SCALING (1000 FT ENROUTE, CONFIGURABLE IN APPROACH) LNAV 1
AND LNAV 2
1: ABOVE VAR FEATURES PROVIDED FROM LNAV 1, FIXED FOR LNAV 2
2: FIXED FOR LNAV 1, VARIABLE VERTICAL SCALING FOR LNAV 2
3: ABOVE VAR FEATURES FOR BOTH LNAV 1 AND LNAV2
4.13B.42 EGPWS CONFIGURATION
4.13B.42.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the EGPWS menu.
4.13B.42.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the EGPWS menu.

SG RK1 RK2
EGPWS 1 1 1
0: NONE
> 1: ALLIEDSIGNAL
4.13B.43 VERTICAL SCALE SIDE CONFIGURATION
4.13B.43.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to CONFIGURATION MENU PAGE 00.
4.13B.43.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to VIEW/EDIT OPERATION CONFIG
PAGE.
4.13B.43.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to select VIEW/EDIT OPERATING CONFIG PAGE
06.

EFS 40/EFS 50

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
SPARE 0 0 0
..MORE..
4.13B.43.D. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the VERT SCALE SIDE option.

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: RIGHT
1: LEFT
4.13B.44 DECLUTTER GLIDESLOPE ON BACKCOURSE CONFIGURATION
4.13B.44.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to VIEW/EDIT OPERATING CHAR PAGE
06.
4.13B.44.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DCLTR GS ON BC menu.
4.13B.44.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DCLTR GS ON BC menu.

SG RK1 RK2
SCALE ON BACKCOURSE
0: NO
> 1: YES

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13B.45 FULLTIME FMS MAP CONFIGURATION
06.
4.13B.45.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the FULLTIME FMS MAP menu.
4.13B.45.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the FULLTIME FMS MAP menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY FMS 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: YES
NOTE
CAUTION
4.13B.46 DISPLAY WIND VECTOR CONFIGURATION
06.
4.13B.46.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DISPLAY WIND VECTOR
menu.
4.13B.46.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DISPLAY WIND VECTOR menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY WIND 0 0 0
VECTOR FROM FMS
0: NO
> 1: YES

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13B.47 DISPLAY DRIFT CONFIGURATION
06.
4.13B.47.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DISPLAY DRIFT menu.
4.13B.47.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DISPLAY DRIFT menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
ANGLE FROM FMS
0: NO
> 1: YES
4.13B.48 DG MODE ONLY CONFIGURATION
06.
4.13B.48.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DG MODE ONLY menu.
4.13B.48.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DG MODE ONLY menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES
CAUTION

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13B.49 DME DISTANCE ONLY CONFIGURATION
06.
4.13B.49.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DME DIST ONLY menu.
4.13B.49.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DME DIST ONLY menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DISTANCE ON BRG PTR
0: NO
2: YES - NAV LABEL
4.13B.50 RADAR ONLY CONFIGURATION
06.
4.13B.50.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the RADAR ONLY menu.
4.13B.50.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the RADAR ONLY menu.

SG RK1 RK2
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES

EFS 40/EFS 50
OPTIONAL DISPLAY OF RADAR INFORMATION ONLY ON THE MFD. NO NAV
INFORMATION DISPLAYED.
4.13B.51 MFD NAV CONTROL CONFIGURATION
06.
4.13B.51.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the MFD NAV CONTROL menu.
4.13B.51.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the MFD NAV CONTROL menu.

SG RK1 RK2
FMS NAV SOURCE
4.13B.52 DISPLAY HEADING TAPE CONFIGURATION
06.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
SPARE 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13B.52.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move the pointer to MORE.
4.13B.52.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter VIEW/EDIT OPERATING CHAR PAGE 07.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> HDG TAPE 0 0 0
DH SELECT 0 0 0
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
SEL HDG SYNC 0 0 0
SEL CRS SYNC 0 0 0
..MORE..
4.13B.52.D. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DISPLAY HDG TAPE menu.

SG RK1 RK2
TAPE
> 0: NO
1: YES
4.13B.53 ADI PLANE/COMMAND BARS CONFIGURATION
07.
4.13B.53.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the COMMAND BARS menu.
4.13B.53.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the COMMAND BARS menu.

EFS 40/EFS 50

SG RK1 RK2
ADI AIRCRAFT/ 0 0 0
COMMAND BAR SYMBOLS
2: DISCRETE SELECT
DISPLAYED?
AXES
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
4.13B.54 ROLL INDICATOR CONFIGURATION
07.
4.13B.54.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the ROLL INDICATOR menu.
4.13B.54.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the ROLL INDICATOR menu.

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: ROLL INDICATOR
1: SKY POINTER

EFS 40/EFS 50
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
OPERATION.
4.13B.55 DECLUTTER DATA ON UNUSUAL ATTITUDE CONFIGURATION
07.
4.13B.55.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DCLTR UNUS ATT menu.
4.13B.55.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DCLTR UNUS ATT menu.

SG RK1 RK2
ON UNUSUAL ATTITUDE
> 0: NO
1: YES
UNDER EXCESSIVE PITCH AND ROLE VALUES, SHOULD NAV DATA BE
DECLUTTERED?
0: NO
4.13B.56 CATEGORY II AVAILABLE CONFIGURATION
07.
4.13B.56.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the CAT II AVAILABLE menu.
4.13B.56.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the CAT II AVAILABLE menu.

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NO

EFS 40/EFS 50
0: NO
4.13B.57 DISPLAY ADI PERSPECTIVE LINES
07.
4.13B.57.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the PERSPECTIVE LINES menu.
4.13B.57.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the PERSPECTIVE LINES menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY ADI 0 0 0
PERSPECTIVE LINES
> 0: NO
1: YES
4.13B.58 DECISION HEIGHT SELECTOR CONFIGURATION
07.
4.13B.58.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DH SELECT menu.
4.13B.58.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DH SELECT menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DH SELECT 0 0 0
BY EFIS
> 0: NO
1: YES

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13B.59 SELECT CONTROL PANEL SYNC CONFIGURATION
07.
4.13B.59.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the CTL PNL SYNC menu.
4.13B.59.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the CTL PNL SYNC menu.

SG RK1 RK2
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: YES - MASTER
2: YES - SLAVE
4.13B.60 SELECTED HDG SYNC CONFIGURATION
07.
4.13B.60.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the SELECTED HDG SYNC menu.
4.13B.60.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the SELECTED HDG SYNC menu.

SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED HDG 0 0 0
SYNC FROM OTHER SG
> 0: NO
1: YES

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13B.61 SELECTED CRS SYNC CONFIGURATION
07.
4.13B.61.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the SELECTED CRS SYNC menu.
4.13B.61.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the SELECTED CRS SYNC menu.

SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED CRS 0 0 0
SYNC FROM OTHER SG
> 0: NO
1: YES
COURSE IS TO BE SYNCHRONIZED WITH CROSS-SG.
4.13B.62 NORTH UP MAP CONFIGURATION
07.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BARS 0 0 0
DH SELECT 0 0 0
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
SEL HDG SYNC 0 0 0
SEL CRS SYNC 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

EFS 40/EFS 50

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
SEL HDG COLOR 0 0 0
CMD BAR COLOR 0 0 0
REV MODE ANN 0 0 0
RISING RUNWAY 0 0 0
ADI DEV SRC 0 0 0
.. MORE..
4.13B.62.D. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the NORTH UP MAP menu.

SG RK1 RK2
NORTH UP MAP 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES
4.13B.63 VERTICAL POINTER TYPE CONFIGURATION
08.
4.13B.63.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the VERT PTR TYPE menu.
4.13B.63.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the VERT PTR TYPE menu.

EFS 40/EFS 50

SG RK1 RK2
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
0: SMALL DIAMOND
2: RECTANGLE
DISPLAYED.
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
4.13B.64 DISPLAY MESSAGES FOR FMS CONFIGURATION
08.
4.13B.64.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the DISPLAY MESSAGES FOR
FROM menu.
4.13B.64.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DISPLAY MESSAGES FROM FMS
menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY 0 0 0
MESSAGES FROM FMS
> 0: NO
1: YES
IF THE GAMA 429 FMS SUPPORTS FMS MESSAGING, THEN THE SYSTEM CAN
BE CONFIGURED TO DISPLAY MSG, DR, WPT, HDG, XTK OR APR FROM AN FMS
ON THE EHSI JUST ABOVE THE VERTICAL MODE NAME FMS.

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13B.65 HDG COLOR CONFIGURATION
08.
4.13B.65.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the SEL HDG COLOR menu.
4.13B.65.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the SEL HDG COLOR menu.

SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED 0 0 0
> 0: ORANGE
1: CYAN
2: MAGENTA
READOUT SHOULD BE.
4.13B.66 COMMAND BAR COLOR CONFIGURATION
08.
4.13B.66.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the CMD BAR COLOR menu.
4.13B.66.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the CMD BAR COLOR menu.

SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BAR 0 0 0
COLOR
> 0: GREEN
1: MAGENTA
SHOULD BE.

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13B.67 REVERSIONARY MODE ANNUNCIATION CONFIGURATION
08.
4.13B.67.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the REV MODE ANN menu.
4.13B.67.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the REV MODE ANN menu.

SG RK1 RK2
REVERSIONARY 0 0 0
MODE ANNUNCIATION
> 0: NONE
1: STBY/COPY
2: SG2
3: SG3
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES HOW REVERSIONARY MODE SHOULD BE
ANNUNCIATED
4.13B.68 LOC/MLS DEVIATION DISPLAY ON EADI CONFIGURATION

08.
4.13B.68.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the RISING RUNWAY menu.
4.13B.68.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the RISING RUNWAY menu.

SG RK1 RK2
ADI LOC/MLS 0 0 0
DISPLAY
> 0: RISING RUNWAY
1: DBAR
2: RUNWAY OR DBAR

EFS 40/EFS 50
EADI.
1: ALWAYS AS A DBAR
4.13B.69 ADI ILS/MLS SOURCE CONFIGURATION
08.
4.13B.69.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the ADI DEV SRC menu.
4.13B.69.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the ADI DEV SRC menu.

SG RK1 RK2
ADI ILS/MLS 0 0 0
DEVIATION SOURCE
4.13B.70 COMMAND BAR FILTER CONFIGURATION

08.
4.13B.70.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the CMD BAR FILTER menu.
4.13B.70.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the CMD BAR FILTER menu.

SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BAR 0 0 0
TIME CONSTANTS
> 0: 0 SEC

EFS 40/EFS 50
1: 0.1 SEC
2: 0.2 SEC
3: 0.25 SEC
4: 0.3 SEC
5: 0.35 SEC
6: 0.4 SEC
7: 0.5 SEC
4.13B.71 MLS VERTICAL ANNUNCIATION CONFIGURATION
08.
4.13B.71.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the MLS VRT ANNUNC menu.
4.13B.71.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the MLS VRT ANNUNC menu.

SG RK1 RK2
MLS VERTICAL 0 0 0
ANNUNCIATION
> 0: GS
1: GP
4.13B.72 DATUM SCALING CONFIGURATION
08.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
NORTH UP MAP 0 0 0
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
SEL HDG COLOR 0 0 0
CMD BAR COLOR 0 0 0
REV MODE ANN 0 0 0
RISING RUNWAY 0 0 0

EFS 40/EFS 50
ADI DEV SRC 0 0 0

> .. MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
LNAV CRS CTRL 0 0 0
SG # 1 SIDE 0 0 0
TACAN ANNUNC 0 0 0
TCAS 0 0 0
RADAR SCAN 0 0 0
.. MORE..
4.13B.72.D. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the DATUM SCALING menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DATUM SCALE 0 0 0
> 0: 393 MV/DEG
1: 300 MV/DEG
2: 206 MV/DEG
COURSE DATUM

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13B.73 HDG FAIL ANNUNCIATION CONFIGURATION
09.
4.13B.73.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the HDG FAIL ANNUNC menu.
4.13B.73.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the HDG FAIL ANNUNC menu.

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NORMAL HDG
1: LARGE HDG
4.13B.74 VNAV APPROACH SCALE CONFIGURATION
09.
4.13B.74.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the VNAV APR SCALE menu.
4.13B.74.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the VNAV APR SCALE menu.

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: 1000 FEET
1: 500 FEET
2: 250 FEET
3: 200 FEET
4.13B.75 LNAV CRS CONTROL CONFIGURATION
09.
4.13B.75.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the LNAV CRS CTRL menu.
4.13B.75.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the LNAV CRS CTRL menu.

EFS 40/EFS 50

SG RK1 RK2
XSIDE LNAV 0 0 0
CRS & JSTK CTL
> 0:NO
1:YES
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES IF THE SG WILL ATTEMPT TO PERFORM
SELECTED COURSE AND JOYSTICK HANDSHAKE WITH THE OFF-SIDE LNAV.
4.13B.76 SG #1 SIDE CONFIGURATION
09.
4.13B.76.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the SG #1 SIDE menu.
4.13B.76.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the SG #1 SIDE menu.

SG RK1 RK2
SG #1 SIDE 1 1 1
> 0: LEFT
1: RIGHT
4.13B.77 AIRCRAFT SYMBOL CONFIGURATION
4.13B.77.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to VIEVV/EDIT OPERATING CHAR PAGE
09.
4.13B.77.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the AIRCRAFT SYMBOL menu.
4.13B.77.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the AIRCRAFT SYMBOL menu.

EFS 40/EFS 50

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: FIXED WING
1: ROTARY WING
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE TYPE OF SYMBOLIC AIRCRAFT TO BE
DISPLAYED.
4.13B.78 TACAN ANNUNCIATE CONFIGURATION
09.
4.13B.78.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the TACAN ANNUNC menu.
4.13B.78.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the TACAN ANNUNC menu.

SG RK1 RK2
TACAN ANNUC 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: A/A L141 26=0 27=1
2: A/A L141 27=1 28=1
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES IF TACAN AIR-TO AIR MODE SHOULD BE
ANNUNCIATED.
0: NO
4.13B.79 TCAS INTRUDER DISPLAYS CONFIGURATION
09.
4.13B.79.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the TCAS DISPLAY menu.
4.13B.79.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the TCAS DISPLAY menu.

EFS 40/EFS 50

SG RK1 RK2
TCAS INTRUDER 0 0 0
DISPLAYS
2: HSI-NONE MFD-ALL
4: HSI-ALL MFD-ALL
PRESENTED.
4.13B.80 CAT II SENSORS CONFIGURATION
09.
4.13B.80.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the CAT II SENSORS menu.
4.13B.80.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the CAT II SENSORS menu.

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: LOC ONLY
1: MLS ONLY
2: LOC OR MLS

EFS 40/EFS 50
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES WHICH SENSORS ARE VALID FOR CAT II
APPROACHES
4.13B.81 MAX RADAR SCAN ANGLE CONFIGURATION
09.
4.13B.81.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the RADAR SCAN menu.
4.13B.81.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the RADAR SCAN menu.

SG RK1 RK2
MAX RADAR 0 0 0
SCAN ANGLE
> 0: 90 DEG
0: 100 DEG
1: 120 RIGHT
4.13B.82 RADAR SDI CONFIGURATION
09.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DATUM SCALING 0 0 0
LNAV CRS CTRL 0 0 0
SG # 1 0 0 0
TACAN ANNUNC 0 0 0
TCAS DISPLAYS 0 0 0
CATII SENSORS 0 0 0
RADAR SCAN 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

EFS 40/EFS 50

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> RADAR SDI 0 0 0
LNAV VERT APR 0 0 0
LP VERT APR 0 0 0
LPV VERT APR 0 0 0
4.13B.82.D. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the RADAR SDI menu.

SG RK1 RK2
RADAR SDI 0 0 0
1: SDI # 1 + RANGE
2: SDI # 2 + RANGE
3: SDI # 3 + RANGE
SG
0: NO SDI MATCHING, USE RANGE, GAIN, TILT, AND MODE MATCHING TO
DETERMINE DATA FOR THIS INDICATOR
4.13B.83 PITCH OFFSET SYNC CONFIGURATION
10.
4.13B.83.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the PITCH OFFSET SYNC
DISCRETE menu.

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13B.83.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the PITCH OFFSET SYNC DISCRETE
menu.

SG RK1 RK2
PITCH OFFSET 0 0 0
SYNC DISCRETE
> 0: NO
1: YES
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
• PITCH OFFSET SYNC FEATURE INTENDED FOR USE ON ROTARY WING
AIRCRAFT ONLY NOT FOR USE ON FIXED WING AIRCRAFT.
• INSTALLATION WITH PITCH OFFSET MAY HAVE EITHER ADI DOWN OR
COMPOSITE BUT NOT BOTH.
4.13B.84 DME HOLD DISTANCE WITH ADF RMI CONFIGURATION
10.
4.13B.84.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the ADF PTR HOLD DST menu.
4.13B.84.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the ADF PTR HOLD DST menu.

SG RK1 RK2
ON ADF BRG PTR
> 0: NO
1: YES
DATA.

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13B.85 FMS OUTPUT BUS CONFIGURATION
products.
10.
4.13B.85.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the FMS OUTPUT BUS menu.
4.13B.85.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the FMS OUTPUT BUS menu.

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NORMAL
1: CONCENTRATED
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
set that was provided before SW version 1201. When configured for CONCENTRATED
the FMS output bus will contain the labels of the original set, plus those added for GNS-
XLS that was provided in SW version 1201, plus the most recent list for the GlobalStar.
With this option selected the Air Data input bus will be activated on the EFIS regardless
of the configured selection for FAST/SLOW display.
4.13B.86 LNAV VERT APR CONFIGURATION
4.13B.86.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to VIEW/EDIT OPERATING PAGE 10.
4.13B.86.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the LNAV VERT APR menu.
4.13B.86.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the LNAV VERT APR menu.
SG RK1 RK2
LNAV VERT APR 0 0 0
COUPLING TO AFCS

EFS 40/EFS 50
VNAV PAGE. WHEN VARIABLE VNAV IS CONFIGURED "VAR" FOR THE
RESPECTIVE SIDE THIS CONFIGURATION CAN BE UTILIZED. WHEN VARIABLE
VNAV IS CONFIGURED "FIX" THIS PAGE HAS NO EFFECT ON OPERATION. THIS
THE AUTOPILOT WHEN THE WAAS APPROACH TYPE IS LNAV.
LNAV1 AND LNAV2 WHEN GPS APPROACH TYPE IS LNAV.
1: PROCESS VERTICAL DATA TO THE AUTOPILOT ON LNAV 1 BUT NOT
LNAV 2 WHEN THE GPS APPROACH TYPE IS LNAV
WHEN THE GPS APPROACH TYPE IS LNAV
LNAV 2 WHEN THE APPROACH TYPE IS LNAV
4.13B.87 L/VNAV VERT APR CONFIGURATION
4.13B.87.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the L/VNAV VERT APR menu.
4.13B.87.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the L/VNAV VERT APR menu.
SG RK1 RK2
COUPLING TO AFCS
THE AUTOPILOT WHEN THE WAAS APPROACH TYPE IS L/VNAV.
LNAV1 AND LNAV2 WHEN GPS APPROACH TYPE IS L/VNAV.

EFS 40/EFS 50

LNAV 2 WHEN THE APPROACH TYPE IS L/VNAV
4.13B.88 LP VERT APR CONFIGURATION
4.13B.88.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the LP VERT APR menu.
4.13B.88.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the LP VERT APR menu.
SG RK1 RK2
LP VERT APR 0 0 0
COUPLING TO AFCS
THE AUTOPILOT WHEN THE WAAS APPROACH TYPE IS LP.
LNAV1 AND LNAV2 WHEN GPS APPROACH TYPE IS LP.
LNAV 2 WHEN THE APPROACH TYPE IS LP
4.13B.89 LPV VERT APR CONFIGURATION
4.13B.89.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the LP VERT APR menu.
4.13B.89.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the LP VERT APR menu.

EFS 40/EFS 50

SG RK1 RK2
LPV VERT APR 0 0 0
COUPLING TO AFCS
THE AUTOPILOT WHEN THE WAAS APPROACH TYPE IS LPV.
LNAV1 AND LNAV2 WHEN GPS APPROACH TYPE IS LPV.
LNAV 2 WHEN THE APPROACH TYPE IS LPV
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
HAVING ALL FOUR VERT APR CONFIGURATIONS SET TO YES WILL ALLOW
THE GPS TO COUPLE TO THE AUTOPILOT FOR ALL WAAS APPROACH TYPES
AND NOT REQUIRE THE GPS TO TRANSMIT THE APPROACH TYPE TO THE
GPS.
4.13B.90 LNAV SELECT OUT CONFIGURATION
4.13B.90.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the LNAV SELECT OUT menu.
4.13B.90.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the LNAV SELECT OUT menu.

EFS 40/EFS 50

SG RK1 RK2
ENROUTE ONLY
> 0:LNAV SELECTED
1:ENROUTE ONLY
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE OPERATION OF THE LNAV SELECT OUT PIN.
0: THE LNAV SELECT OUT OPERATION IS ACTIVE WHEN THE FMS, LORAN,
OMEGA OR GPS ARE THE SELECTED SENSOR.
1: THE LNAV SELECT OUT IS NOT ACTIVE WHEN PERFORMING A GPS
APPROACH BUT IS LOW WHEN NOT IN GPS APPROACH.
4.13B.91 EXITING CONFIGURATION
10. The following screen will be displayed:

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
RADAR SDI 0 0 0
NOTE:
4.13B.91.B. Press TST to EXIT and Enter Config mode.

4.13B.91.C. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to COPY SG TO RACKS 1 & 2 as
shown below.

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.13B.91.D. Press the NEXT MENU button to select COPY SG TO RACKS 1 & 2 MENU as
shown below.

4.13B.91.E. Press the NEXT MENU BUTTON to copy the config data in the SG to Racks 1 And 2.
4.13B.91.F. When copy process is completed, press the TST button to exit the maintenance
configuration pages. Verify that the system resets within one second. This is
indicated by the screen going blank and a self test pass message being displayed.
This completes the configuration process.

NOTE
1. INITIAL SET UP


Page 4-546 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


81. NAV SELECT DELAY CONFIGURATION DESCRIPTION
the aircraft.
programming.
played.

quired.
EFS 40 MAINTENANCE
ALLIED-SIGNAL INC.
IP 125-00601-0000
NP1 125-00602-0000
DP1 125-00603-0000
RP 125-00604-0000
Page 4-548 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

> LRU STATUS

TEST PATTERNS
PROCESSOR ITEMS
BIT HISTORY STACK
WATCHDOG TIMER TEST
SUBSYSTEM MENU
ASCII TEXT PAGE
TION position.
COPY RACK 2 TO SG & RACK I
NOTE
below.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
..MORE..
ITEM HSI ADI
> SG NUMBER 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #1 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #2 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0
ADF #1 0 0
ADF #2 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0
..MORE..
SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0
> 0: #1 EFIS
1: #2 EFIS
2: MFD
Page 4-550 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

0: PILOT
1: CO-PILOT
2: MFD
SG RK1 RK2
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
> 0: SINGLE EHSI
1: DUAL EHSI
2: SINGLE EADI/EHSI
3: DUAL EADI/EHSI
6: SINGLE MFD SG
ISTS.

SG RK1 RK2
DU TYPE 0 0 0
HSI ADI
> 0: ED461 ED462
1: ED462 ED462
2: ED551A ED551A
3: ED551 ED551
4: ED551A/ED461ED462
5: ED551A/ED462ED462
PLAYS
SG RK1 RK2
ATT HDG
0: NONE NONE
> 1: XYZ XYZ
2: 429 429
3: NONE XYZ
Page 4-552 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SOURCES
0: NONE
1: ANALOG XYZ
2: 429 AHRS SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
RATE
OF TURN REQUIREMENTS AND LIMITATIONS”.
SG RK1 RK2
ATT HDG
> 0: NONE NONE
1: XYZ XYZ
2: 429 429
3: NONE XYZ
SOURCES
0: NONE
1: ANALOG XYZ
2: 429 AHRS SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION NOTE:

SG RK1 RK2
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: COLLINS ROT GYRO
2: KING ROT GYRO
3: SPERRY ROT GYRO
4: 429 ROT
8: 429 YAW RATE
0. NONE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
EFS.
Page 4-554 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
ADF #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429
> 3: SYNCHRO
4: DC S/C BRG ONLY
5: 429 BRG ONLY
6: SYNCHRO BRG ONLY
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429 ADF SYSTEM
3: XYZ
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
ADF #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429

3: SYNCHRO
4: DC S/C BRG ONLY
5: 429 BRG ONLY
6: SYNCHRO BRG ONLY
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429 ADF SYSTEM
3: XYZ
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4: KNS81
CEIVER
0: NONE
Page 4-556 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

CONFIGURATION NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4: KNS81
CEIVER
0: NONE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0

ATTITUDEIHDG #2 0 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM HSI ADI
SG NUMBER 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #1 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #2 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0
ADF #1 0 0
ADF #2 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS #1 0 0 0
FMS #2 0 0 0
RNAV #1 0 0 0
RNAV #2 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
..MORE..
Page 4-558 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
> 3: 429 GOLD
4: 429 DF1=V1/M2, DF2=V2/M1
5: 429 DF1=V1/M1, DF2=V2/M2
6: 429 DF1=V1/V2, DF2=M1/M2
7: 429 DF1=V1/M*, DF2=V2/M*
0: NONE
2: KING SERIAL UNIT
3: STANDARD 429 DME
7: SINGLE MULTI-CHANNEL 429 DME, NAV IS PAIRED TO ITS CHANNEL
AND MLS IS ON EITHER CHANNEL
SG RK1 RK2
DME #2 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
> 3: 429 GOLD

4: 429 DF1=V1/M2, DF2=V2/M1

5: 429 DF1=V1/M1, DF2=V2/M2
6: 429 DF1=V2, DF2=M1/M2
7: 429 DF1=V1/M*, DF2=V2/M*
0: NONE
2: KING SERIAL UNIT
3: STANDARD 429 DME
SG RK1 RK2
MLS #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429
2: 429 DEV ONLY
0: NONE
POINTER.
Page 4-560 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
MLS #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429
2: 429 DEV ONLY
0: NONE
POINTER.
SG RK1 RK2
FMS #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
3: KLN 88 - LOR
4: GAMA 429 - FMS
5: KLN 90 - GPS
6: GAMA 429 - LOR
7: GAMA 429 - GPS
8: SMITHS-FMS/GPS
0: NONE
1: KING KNS 660, 429


8: SMITHS FMS WITH FMS & GPS SENSOR ANNUNCIATION
SG RK1 RK2
FMS #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
3: KLN 88 - LOR
4: GAMA 429 - FMS
5: KLN 90 - GPS
6: GAMA 429 - LOR
7: GAMA 429 - GPS
8: SMITHS-FMS/GPS
0: NONE
1: KING KNS660, 429
8: SMITHS FMS WITH FMS & GPS SENSOR ANNUNCIATION
Page 4-562 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
RNAV #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 81
SG RK1 RK2
RNAV #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 81
SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME


5: KNS81
6: B: 429 NAV D: 429 DME
7: B: XYZ ADF D: 568 DME
0: NONE
URED KNS 81
7: XYZ SYNCHRO BEARING (HEADING RELATIVE) INPUT ON ADF PORT, 568
DME
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME
5: KNS81
6: B: 429 NAV D: 429 DME
7: B: XYZ ADF D: 568 DME
Page 4-564 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

0: NONE
URED KNS 81
7: XYZ SYNCHRO BEARING (HEADING RELATIVE) INPUT ON ADF PORT, 568
DME
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS #1 0 0 0
FMS #2 0 0 0
RNAV #1 0 0 0
RNAV #2 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> FMS VNAV 0 0 0
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
AFCS MODE ANN 0 0 0
F/S AIR DATA 0 0 0

RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
..MORE..
SG RK1 RK2
FMS VNAV 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: FEET ONLY
2: FEET OR ANGLE
TION
1: ONLY ‘FEET’ FMS VNAV IS ALLOWED, DECLUTTER IF ‘ANGLE’ IS TRANSMIT-
TED, UNS1 A
2: BOTH ‘FEET’ AND ‘ANGLE’ ARE ALLOWED,KNS660
NOTE
RADAR ALTIMETER is elsewhere referred to as its equivalent: RADIO ALTIMETER.
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KRA 405
2: KRA 10A
3: 429
Page 4-566 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

4: ALT 50/55
5: ARINC 552A
0: NONE
1: -10 mV/ft
2: 4 mV/ft
3: ARINC 429
500’), 3 mV/ft
ARITHMIC TABLE.
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SINGLE ANALOG
2: DUAL ANALOG
3: SINGLE 429
4: DUAL 429
AUTOPILOT
0: NONE

SG RK1 RK2
AFCS COMMAND 0 0 0
BAR SCALING
0: NONE
1: 429
> 2: P:1.0V R:750MV D:DSC
3: P:400MV R:400MV D:12V
MAND BARS
0: NONE
CRETE (KFC 325)
INPUT DISCRETE
INPUT DISCRETE
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS MODE 0 0 0
ANNUNCIATORS
0: NONE
> 1: KFC325/400/500
Page 4-568 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

2: CDV155
NUNCIATORS
0: NONE
SG RK1 RK2
F/S AIR DATA 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
3: ANLG COLLECTIVE
4: 429 AOA/IAS ID
7: 429 AN/AS 2D
8: MACH, NO F/S
0: NONE
1: 0.2V/KT OR 0.2V/DEG, FULL SCALE IS +/- 2V AT THE DIAMOND, 1 DOT SCALE,
DECLUTTER +/- -2.4V, RETURN +/-2.3V.
2: 0.22V/KT OR.22V/DEG, FULL SCALE IS +/- 2.2V AT F&S, 2 DOT SCALE, DE-
TURN 2.066V
4: 429, SCALE IS + /- 10 KT OR + /- 10 DEG AT THE DIAMOND, 1 DOT SCALE
AT THE DIAMOND.

SG RK1 RK2
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: RDS81/RDS82/RDR2000
2: RDS84/RDS86
3: RDR1400/NC104
4: RDR210/2200
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE TYPE OF RADAR UNIT
0: NONE
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: CP 466 A,B,C
2: CP 113F
Page 4-570 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

0: NONE
SG RK1 RK2
0: NONE
> 1: BENDIX/KING
SG RK1 RK2
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: CP 469A
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
FMS VNAV 0 0 0

RADAR ALT 0 0 0
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
AFCS MODE ANN 0 0 0
AIR DATA 0 0 0
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> JOYSTICK 0 0 0
TCAS 0 0 0
HOMING #1 0 0 0
HOMING #2 0 0 0
LIGHTNING DET 0 0 0
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
CABLE MODE 0 0 0
SG RK1 RK2
JOYSTICK 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 5 WIRE
2: FORMATTED 429
3: RAW 429
0: NONE
Page 4-572 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

CHECKLIST UNIT.
SG RK1 RK2
TCAS 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: BENDIX/KING
SG RK1 RK2
HOMING #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ANALOG
SG RK1 RK2
HOMING #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE

1: ANALOG
SG RK1 RK2
LIGHTNING DET 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: STORMSCOPE
0: NONE
1: 429 STORMSCOPE
menu.
SG RK1 RK2
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
Page 4-574 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
CABLE MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
PAGE.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
SPARE 0 0 0
..MORE..

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: RIGHT
1: LEFT


SG RK1 RK2
SCALE ON BACKCOURSE
0: NO
> 1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY FMS 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: YES
NOTE
CAUTION
Page 4-576 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY WIND 0 0 0
VECTOR FROM FMS
0: NO
> 1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
ANGLE FROM FMS
0: NO
> 1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES
QUENCE
CAUTION



SG RK1 RK2
DISTANCE ON BRG PTR
0: NO
2: YES - NAV LABEL

SG RK1 RK2
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES
Page 4-578 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
FMS NAV SOURCE

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
SPARE 0 0 0
> ..MORE..


ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> HDG TAPE 0 0 0
CATII AVAILABLE 0 0 0
DH SELECT 0 0 0
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
SEL HDG SYNC 0 0 0
SEL CRS SYNC 0 0 0
..MORE..

SG RK1 RK2
TAPE
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
ADI AIRCRAFT/ 0 0 0
COMMAND BAR SYMBOLS
Page 4-580 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


2: DISCRETE SELECT
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES WHICH TYPE OF ADI AIRCRAFT SYMBOLS AND
COMMAND BARS SHOULD BE DISPLAYED
AXES
2: WEDGE/BULLS EYE, SINGLE/SPLIT SELECTABLE THROUGH DISCRETE IN-
PUT
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
The WEDGE AIRCRAFT SYMBOL of option 0 and option 2 should not be configured if
perspective lines are also configured. See the Certification Section of this manual.

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: ROLL INDICATOR
1: SKY POINTER
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
OPERATION.


SG RK1 RK2
ON UNUSUAL ATTITUDE
> 0: NO
1: YES
CLUTTERED?
0: NO

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NO
0: NO.
Page 4-582 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY ADI 0 0 0
PERSPECTIVE LINES
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DH SELECT 0 0 0
BY EFIS
> 0: NO
1: YES
4.14.56.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the CTL PNIL SYNC menu.

SG RK1 RK2
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0

> 0: NO
1: YES MASTER
2: YES SLAVE
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES IF CONTROL PANEL ITEMS BE SYNCHRONIZED
BETWEEN TWO SG SUCH AS IN TANDEM INSTALLATIONS.

SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED HDG 0 0 0
SYNC FROM OTHER SG
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED CRS 0 0 0
SYNC FROM OTHER SG
> 0: NO
1: YES
Page 4-584 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


ITEM SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BARS 0 0 0
DH SELECT 0 0 0
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
SEL HDG SYNC 0 0 0
SEL CRS SYNC 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
SEL HDG COLOR 0 0 0
CMD BAR COLOR 0 0 0
REV MODE ANN 0 0 0
RISING RUNWAY 0 0 0
ADI DEV SRC 0 0 0
.. MORE ..

SG RK1 RK2
NORTH UP MAP 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO

1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
> 0: SMALL DIAMOND
2: RECTANGLE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
FROM menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY 0 0 0
MESSAGES FROM FMS
> 0: NO
1: YES
Page 4-586 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED 0 0 0
> 0: ORANGE
1: CYAN
2: MAGENTA

SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BAR 0 0 0
COLOR
> 0: GREEN
1: MAGENTA

SG RK1 RK2
REVERSIONARY 0 0 0
MODE ANNUNCIATION
> 0: NONE
1: STBY/COPY
2: SG2

3: SG3
CIATED

SG RK1 RK2
ADI LOC/MLS 0 0 0
DISPLAY
> 0: RISING RUNWAY
1: DBAR
2: RUNWAY OR DBAR
EADI.
1: ALWAYS AS A DBAR
Page 4-588 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
ADI ILS/MLS 0 0 0
DEVIATION SOURCE

SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BAR 0 0 0
TIME CONSTANTS
> 0: 0 SEC
1: 0.1 SEC
2: 0.2 SEC
3: 0.25 SEC
4: 0.3 SEC
5: 0.35 SEC
6: 0.4 SEC
7: 0.5 SEC

SG RK1 RK2
MLS VERTICAL 0 0 0

ANNUNCIATION
> 0: GS
1: GP

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
NORTH UP MAP 0 0 0
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
SEL HDG COLOR 0 0 0
CMD BAR COLOR 0 0 0
REV MODE ANN 0 0 0
RISING RUNWAY 0 0 0
ADI DEV SRC 0 0 0
> .. MORE ..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
LNAV CRS CTRL 0 0 0
SG # 1 SIDE 0 0 0
TACAN ANNUNC 0 0 0
TCAS 0 0 0
RADAR SCAN 0 0 0
.. MORE ..
Page 4-590 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
DATUM SCALE 0 0 0
> 0: 393 MV/DEG
1: 300 MV/DEG
2: 206 MV/DEG
COURSE DATUM
0: KING 22.5V SIN (ANGLE)
1: ARINC 17.2V SIN (ANGLE)
2: SPERRY 1 1.8V SIN (ANGLE)

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NORMAL HDG
1: LARGE HDG

SG RK1 RK2

> 0: 1000 FEET

1: 500 FEET
2: 250 FEET
3: 200 FEET

SG RK1 RK2
XSIDE LNAV 0 0 0
CRS & JSTK CTL
> 0: NO
1: YES
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES IF SG ATTEMPTS TO PERFORM SELECTED
COURSE AND JOYSTICK HANDSHAKE WITH THE OFF-SIDE LNAV.

SG RK1 RK2
SG #1 SIDE 0 0 0
> 0: LEFT
1: RIGHT
Page 4-592 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

THIS SCREEN DETERMINES THE PHYSICAL SIDE OF THE AIRCRAFT

ON WHICH THE #1 SG (PILOTS SG) IS LOCATED.

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: FIXED WING
1: ROTARY WING
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES WHICH TYPE OF SYMBOLIC
AIRCRAFT SYMBOL SHOULD BE DISPLAYED

SG RK1 RK2
TACAN ANNUC 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: A/A L141 26=0 27=1
2: A/A L141 27=1 28=1
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES IF THE TACAN AIR-TO AIR MODE

SHOULD BE ANNUNCIATED
0: NO

SG RK1 RK2
TCAS INTRUDER 0 0 0
DISPLAYS
2: HSI-NONE MFD-ALL
4: HSI-ALL MFD-ALL
PRESENTED.
MODE
DOES NOT FUNCTION TCAS SELECTION.
4: SHOW INTRUDERS ON ALL HSI AND MFD MODES. TSTIREF DOES FUNCTION
Page 4-594 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
> 0: LOC ONLY
1: MLS ONLY
2: LOC OR MLS
PROACHES

SG RK1 RK2
MAX RADAR 0 0 0
SCAN ANGLE
> 0: 90 DEG
0: 100 DEG
1: 120 RIGHT

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DATUM SCALING 0 0 0
LNAV CRS CTRL 0 0 0

SG # 1 0 0 0
TACAN ANNUNC 0 0 0
TCAS DISPLAYS 0 0 0
CATII SENSORS 0 0 0
RADAR SCAN 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> RADAR SDI 0 0 0
NAV SELECT DELAY 0 0 0

SG RK1 RK2
RADAR SDI 0 0 0
1: SDI # 1 + RANGE
2: SDI # 2 + RANGE
3: SDI # 3 + RANGE
SG
0: NO SDI MATCHING, USE RANGE, GAIN, TILT, AND MODE MATCHING TO
DETERMINE DATA FOR THIS INDICATOR
CRETE menu.
Page 4-596 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
PITCH OFFSET 0 0 0
SYNC DISCRETE
> 0: NO
1: YES
CAPABILITY TO SYNC THE DISPLAYED PITCH TO A CONSTANT
OFFSET WITH AN INPUT DISCRETE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
• PITCH OFFSET SYNC for helicopter use only not for use on fixed wing aircraft.
• Installations using PITCH OFFSET SYNC may have either ADI DOWN OR COM-
POSITE but not both.
4.14.81 NAV SELECT DELAY CONFIGURATION DESCRIPTION
4.14.81.B. Press the NEXT ITEM button to move pointer to the NAV SELECT DELAY menu.
4.14.81.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the NAV KEY SELECT OF GPS DELAY menu.

SG RK1 RK2
NAV KEY SELECT 0 0 0
OF GPS DELAY
> 0: 0 SEC.
1: 0.5 SEC.
2: 1.0 SEC.
3: 1.5 SEC.
4: 2.0 SEC.
CAPABILITY TO ADJUST THE AMOUNT OF DELAY BETWEEN SELECTION OF
GPS WITH THE NAV KEY AND WHEN GPS SELECT (HOVER SELECT DISCRETE)
IS SET VALID
CONFIGURATION NOTE:

ONLY USED WITH SMITHS FMS

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
RADAR SDI 0 0 0
> NAV SELECT DELAY 0 0 0
NOTE

below.
low.
Page 4-598 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

NOTE
1. INITIAL SET UP


Page 4-600 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


the aircraft.
programming.
played.

quired.
EFS 40 MAINTENANCE
ALLIED-SIGNAL INC.
IP 125-00601-0000
NP1 125-00602-0000
DP1 125-00603-0000
RP 125-00604-0000
Page 4-602 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

> LRU STATUS

TEST PATTERNS
PROCESSOR ITEMS
BIT HISTORY STACK
WATCHDOG TIMER TEST
SUBSYSTEM MENU
ASCII TEXT PAGE
TION position.
COPY RACK 2 TO SG & RACK I
NOTE
below.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> SG NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
..MORE..
ITEM HSI ADI
> SG NUMBER 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #1 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #2 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0
ADF #1 0 0
ADF #2 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0
..MORE..
SG RK1 RK2
SG NUMBER 0 0 0
> 0: #1 EFIS
1: #2 EFIS
2: MFD
Page 4-604 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

0: PILOT
1: CO-PILOT
2: MFD
SG RK1 RK2
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
> 0: SINGLE EHSI
1: DUAL EHSI
2: SINGLE EADI/EHSI
3: DUAL EADI/EHSI
6: SINGLE MFD SG
ISTS.
6: SINGLE MFD SG (I TUBE)

SG RK1 RK2
DU TYPE 0 0 0
HSI ADI
> 0: ED461 ED462
1: ED462 ED462
2: ED551A ED551A
3: ED551 ED551
4: ED551A/ED461ED462
5: ED551A/ED462ED462
PLAYS
SG RK1 RK2
ATT HDG
0: NONE NONE
> 1: XYZ XYZ
2: 429 429
3: NONE XYZ
Page 4-606 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SOURCES
0: NONE
1: ANALOG XYZ
2: 429 AHRS SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
ATT HDG
> 0: NONE NONE
1: XYZ XYZ
2: 429 429
3: NONE XYZ
SOURCES
0: NONE
1: ANALOG XYZ
2: 429 AHRS SYSTEM
CONFIGURATION NOTE:

SG RK1 RK2
RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: COLLINS ROT GYRO
2: KING ROT GYRO
3: SPERRY ROT GYRO
4: 429 ROT
8: 429 YAW RATE
0. NONE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
EFS.
Page 4-608 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
ADF #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429
> 3: SYNCHRO
4: DC S/C BRG ONLY
5: 429 BRG ONLY
6: SYNCHRO BRG ONLY
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429 ADF SYSTEM
3: XYZ
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
ADF #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429
3: SYNCHRO
4: DC S/C BRG ONLY

5: 429 BRG ONLY

6: SYNCHRO BRG ONLY
0: NONE
1: DC SIN/COS
2: 429 ADF SYSTEM
3: XYZ
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4: KNS81
CEIVER
0: NONE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
Page 4-610 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SIN/COS BRG
2: 429 BRG
3: 429 RAD
4: KNS81
CEIVER
0: NONE
4: KNS81: SERIAL RNAV
CONFIGURATION NOTE
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
SC NUMBER 0 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0 0

RATE OF TURN 0 0 0
ADF #1 0 0 0
ADF #2 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM HSI ADI
SG NUMBER 0 0
SINGLE/DUAL 0 0
DU TYPE 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #1 0 0
ATTITUDE/HDG #2 0 0
RATE OF TURN 0 0
ADF #1 0 0
ADF #2 0 0
VOR/ILS #1 0 0
VOR/ILS #2 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS #1 0 0 0
FMS #2 0 0 0
RNAV #1 0 0 0
RNAV #2 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
..MORE..
Page 4-612 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
> 3: 429 GOLD
4: 429 DF1=V1/M2, DF2=V2/M1
5: 429 DF1=V1/M1, DF2=V2/M2
6: 429 DF1=V1/V2, DF2=M1/M2
7: 429 DF1=V1/M*, DF2=V2/M*
0: NONE
2: KING SERIAL UNIT
3: STANDARD 429 DME
SG RK1 RK2
DME #2 0 0 0
0: NONE
1: 568
2: KING SERIAL DME
> 3: 429 GOLD
4: 429 DF1=V1/M2, DF2=V2/M1
5: 429 DF1=V1/M1, DF2=V2/M2

6: 429 DF1=V2, DF2=M1/M2

7: 429 DF1=V1/M*, DF2=V2/M*
0: NONE
2: KING SERIAL UNIT
3: STANDARD 429 DME
SG RK1 RK2
MLS #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429
2: 429 DEV ONLY
0: NONE
POINTER.
Page 4-614 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
MLS #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 429
2: 429 DEV ONLY
0: NONE
POINTER.
SG RK1 RK2
FMS #1 0 0 0
0: NONE
3: KLN 88 - LOR
4: GAMA 429 - FMS
5: KLN 90 - GPS
6: GAMA 429 - LOR
7: GAMA 429 - GPS
0: NONE
1: KING KNS 660, 429


SG RK1 RK2
FMS #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
3: KLN 88 - LOR
4: GAMA 429 - FMS
5: KLN 90 - GPS
6: GAMA 429 - LOR
7: GAMA 429 - GPS
0: NONE
1: KING KNS660, 429
Page 4-616 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
RNAV #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 81
SG RK1 RK2
RNAV #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KNS 81
SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME
5: KNS81
6: B: 429 NAV D: 429 DME
7: ARN 118 TERNARY

0: NONE
URED KNS 81
6: 429 NAV BEARING, 429 DME DISTANCE. 7: COLLINS ARN 118, USED FOR C-9
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
SG RK1 RK2
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: B: 429 DME D: 429 DME
5: KNS81
6: B: 429 NAV D: 429 DME
7: 7: ARN -118 TERNARY
0: NONE
URED KNS 81
Page 4-618 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

7: COLLINS ARN 118, USED FOR C-9
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DME #1 0 0 0
DME #2 0 0 0
MLS #1 0 0 0
MLS #2 0 0 0
FMS #1 0 0 0
FMS #2 0 0 0
RNAV #1 0 0 0
RNAV #2 0 0 0
TACAN #1 0 0 0
TACAN #2 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> FMS VNAV 0 0 0
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
AFCS MODE ANN 0 0 0
F/S AIR DATA 0 0 0
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
..MORE..

SG RK1 RK2
FMS VNAV 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: FEET ONLY
2: FEET OR ANGLE
TION
1: ONLY’FEET’ FMS VNAV IS ALLOWED, DECLUTTER IF ‘ANGLE’IS TRANSMIT-
TED, UNS1A
2: BOTH ‘FEET’AND ‘ANGLE’ARE ALLOWED, KNS660
NOTE
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: KRA 405
2: KRA 10A
3: 429
4: ALT 50/55
5: ARINC 552A
0: NONE
1: -10 mV/ft
2: 4 mV/ft
Page 4-620 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

3: ARINC 429
500 ft), 3 mV/ft
5: FOR 0-10 V (Below 480 ft) STARTING AT -20 ft, AFTER 10 V (ABOVE 480 ft LOG-
ARITHMIC TABLE.
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: SINGLE ANALOG
2: DUAL ANALOG
3: SINGLE 429
4: DUAL 429
AUTOPILOT
0: NONE
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS COMMAND 0 0 0

BAR SCALING
0: NONE
1: 429
> 2: P:1.0V R:750MV D:DSC
3: P:400MV R:400MV D:12V
MAND BARS
0: NONE
CRETE (KFC 325)
INPUT DISCRETE
INPUT DISCRETE
SG RK1 RK2
AFCS MODE 0 0 0
ANNUNCIATORS
0: NONE
> 1: KFC325/400/500
2: CDV155
NUNCIATORS
0: NONE
Page 4-622 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
F/S AIR DATA 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
3: ANLG COLLECTIVE
4: 429 AOA/IAS 1D
7: 429 AN/AS 2D
8: MACH, NO F/S
0: NONE
1: 0.2V/KT OR 0.2V/DEG, FULL SCALE IS ± 2V AT THE DIAMOND, 1 DOT SCALE,
DECLUTTER ± -2.4V, RETURN ± 2.3V.
2: 0.22V/KT OR 0.22V/DEG, FULL SCALE IS ± 2.2V AT F&S, 2 DOT SCALE, DE-
3: 0.2V/mm, FULL SCALE IS ± 2V AT THE DIAMOND, DECLUTTER 2.166V, RE-
TURN 2.066V
THE DIAMOND.
6: AS SCALE ONLY, 0.22V/KT, FULL SCALE IS ± 2.2V AT THE F&S, 2 DOT SCALE,

SG RK1 RK2
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
0: NONE
> 1: RDS81/RDS82/RDR2000
2: RDS84/RDS86
3: RDR1400/NC104
4: RDR210/2200
0: NONE
SG RK1 RK2
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: CP 466 A,B,C
2: CP 113F
0: NONE
Page 4-624 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
0: NONE
> BENDIX/KING
SG RK1 RK2
CHECKLIST 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: CP 469A
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
FMS VNAV 0 0 0
RADAR ALT 0 0 0
AFCS TYPE 0 0 0
AFCS MODE ANN 0 0 0
AIR DATA 0 0 0
RADAR TYPE 0 0 0
RADAR CTL PNL 0 0 0

CHECKLIST 0 0 0
> ..MORE..
ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> JOYSTICK 0 0 0
TCAS 0 0 0
HOMING #1 0 0 0
HOMING #2 0 0 0
LIGHTNING DET 0 0 0
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
CABLE MODE 0 0 0
VARIABLE LNAV 0 0 0
SG RK1 RK2
JOYSTICK 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: 5 WIRE
2: FORMATTED 429
3: RAW 429
0: NONE
CHECKLIST UNIT.
Page 4-626 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
TCAS 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: BENDIX/KING
SG RK1 RK2
HOMING #1 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ANALOG
SG RK1 RK2
HOMING #2 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: ANALOG

SG RK1 RK2
LIGHTNING DET 0 0 0
> 0: NONE
1: STORMSCOPE
0: NONE
1: 429 STORMSCOPE
menu.
SG RK1 RK2
HOVER MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO

SG RK1 RK2
CABLE MODE 0 0 0
Page 4-628 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

AVAILABLE
> 0: NO

SG RK1 RK2
LNAV X-TRACK 0 0 0
SCALE FACTOR
LNAV
PAGE.

ITEM SG RK1 RK2

DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
SPARE 0 0 0
..MORE..

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: RIGHT
1: LEFT

SG RK1 RK2
SCALE ON BACKCOURSE
0: NO
> 1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
Page 4-630 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

EFS 40/EFS 50
DISPLAY FMS 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: YES
NOTE

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY WIND 0 0 0
VECTOR FROM FMS
0: NO
> 1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
ANGLE FROM FMS
0: NO
> 1: YES


SG RK1 RK2
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES
CAUTION

SG RK1 RK2
DISTANCE ON BRG PTR
0: NO
2: YES - NAV LABEL
Page 4-632 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000



SG RK1 RK2
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
FMS NAV SOURCE


ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY DRIFT 0 0 0
DG ONLY MODE 0 0 0
DME DIST ONLY 0 0 0
SPARE 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> HDG TAPE 0 0 0
DH SELECT 0 0 0
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
SEL CRS SYNC 0 0 0
..MORE..

SG RK1 RK2
TAPE
Page 4-634 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
ADI AIRCRAFT/ 0 0 0
COMMAND BAR SYMBOLS
2: DISCRETE SELECT
DISPLAYED?
AXES
CONFIGURATION NOTE:


SG RK1 RK2
> 0: ROLL INDICATOR
1: SKY POINTER
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
OPERATION.

SG RK1 RK2
ON UNUSUAL ATTITUDE
> 0: NO
1: YES
CLUTTERED?
0: NO
Page 4-636 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NO
0: NO

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY ADI 0 0 0
PERSPECTIVE LINES
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
DH SELECT 0 0 0
BY EFIS
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: YES - MASTER
2: YES - SLAVE

SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED HDG 0 0 0
SYNC FROM OTHER SG
0: NO
1: YES
Page 4-638 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED CRS 0 0 0
SYNC FROM OTHER SG
> 0: NO
1: YES

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BARS 0 0 0
DH SELECT 0 0 0
CTL PNL SYNC 0 0 0
SEL HDG SYNC 0 0 0
SEL CRS SYNC 0 0 0
> ..MORE..


ITEM SG RK1 RK2
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
SEL HDG COLOR 0 0 0
CMD BAR COLOR 0 0 0
REV MODE ANN 0 0 0
RISING RUNWAY 0 0 0
ADI DEV SRC 0 0 0
.. MORE ..

SG RK1 RK2
NORTH UP MAP 0 0 0
AVAILABLE
> 0: NO
1: YES
4.15.61.A. Press the PREV MENU button to return to VIEW/EDIT OPERATING CHAR PAGE 08,
Page 4-640 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG RK1 RK2
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
> 0: SMALL DIAMOND
2: RECTANGLE
DISPLAYED.
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
FROM menu.

SG RK1 RK2
DISPLAY 0 0 0
MESSAGES FROM FMS
> 0: NO
1: YES


SG RK1 RK2
SELECTED 0 0 0
> 0: ORANGE
1: CYAN
2: MAGENTA
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES WHAT COULOR THE SELECTED
HEADING BUG AND READOUT SHOULD BE.
4.15.64.C. Press the NEXT MENU button to enter the CMD BAR COLOR menu,

SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BAR 0 0 0
COLOR
> 0: GREEN
1: MAGENTA
SHOULD BE.

SG RK1 RK2
REVERSIONARY 0 0 0
Page 4-642 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

MODE ANNUNCIATION
> 0: NONE
1: STBY/COPY
2: SG2
3: SG3
CIATED

SG RK1 RK2
ADI LOC/MLS 0 0 0
DISPLAY
> 0: RISING RUNWAY
1: DBAR
2: RUNWAY OR DBAR
EADI.
1: ALWAYS AS A DBAR


SG RK1 RK2
ADI ILS/MLS 0 0 0
DEVIATION SOURCE
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
THIS SCREEN DETERMINES WHAT SOURCE DRIVES THE EADI DEAR.

SG RK1 RK2
COMMAND BAR 0 0 0
TIME CONSTANTS
> 0: 0 SEC
1: 0.1 SEC
2: 0.2 SEC
3: 0.25 SEC
4: 0.3 SEC
5: 0.35 SEC
6: 0.4 SEC
7: 0.5 SEC
Page 4-644 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
MLS VERTICAL 0 0 0
ANNUNCIATION
> 0: GS
1: GP

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
NORTH UP MAP 0 0 0
VERT PTR TYPE 0 0 0
SEL HDG COLOR 0 0 0
CMD BAR COLOR 0 0 0
REV MODE ANN 0 0 0
RISING RUNWAY 0 0 0
ADI DEV SRC 0 0 0
> .. MORE ..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
LNAV CRS CTRL 0 0 0
SG # 1 SIDE 0 0 0
TACAN ANNUNC 0 0 0
TCAS 0 0 0
CATII SENSORS 0 0 0

RADAR SCAN 0 0 0
.. MORE ..

SG RK1 RK2
DATUM SCALE 0 0 0
> 0: 393 MV/DEG

1: 300 MV/DEG
2: 206 MV/DEG
COURSE DATUM
0: KING 22.5V SIN (ANGLE)
1: ARINC 17.2V SIN (ANGLE)
2: SPERRY 11.8V SIN (ANGLE)

SG RK1 RK2
> 0: NORMAL HDG
1: LARGE HDG
Page 4-646 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


SG RK1 RK2
> 0: 1000 FEET
1: 500 FEET
2: 250 FEET
3: 200 FEET

SG RK1 RK2
XSIDE LNAV 0 0 0
CRS & JSTK CTL
> 0: NO
1: YES

SG RK1 RK2
SG #1 SIDE 0 0 0
> 0: LEFT

1: RIGHT

SG RK1 RK2
> 0 : FIXED WING
1 : ROTARY WING
PLAYED.

SG RK1 RK2
TACAN ANNUC 0 0 0
> 0: NO
1: A/A L141 26=0 27=1
2: A/A L141 27=1 28=1
Page 4-648 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

CIATED.
0: NO

SG RK1 RK2
TCAS INTRUDER 0 0 0
DISPLAYS
2: HSI-NONE MFD-ALL
4: HSI-ALL MFD-ALL
PRESENTED.


SG RK1 RK2
> 0: LOC ONLY
1: MLS ONLY
2: LOC OR MLS
PROACHES

SG RK1 RK2
MAX RADAR 0 0 0
SCAN ANGLE
> 0: 90 DEG
0: 100 DEG
1: 120 RIGHT

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
DATUM SCALING 0 0 0
LNAV CRS CTRL 0 0 0
Page 4-650 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

SG # 1 0 0 0
TACAN ANNUNC 0 0 0
TCAS DISPLAYS 0 0 0
CATII SENSORS 0 0 0
RADAR SCAN 0 0 0
> ..MORE..

ITEM SG RK1 RK2
> RADAR SDI 0 0 0

SG RK1 RK2
RADAR SDI 0 0 0
1: SDI # 1 + RANGE
2: SDI # 2 + RANGE
3: SDI # 3 + RANGE
SG
CRETE menu.


SG RK1 RK2
PITCH OFFSET 0 0 0
SYNC DISCRETE
> 0: NO
1: YES
CONFIGURATION NOTE:
POSITE, BUT NOT BOTH.

SG RK1 RK2
ON ADF BRG PTR
> 0: NO
1: YES
DATA.
Page 4-652 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000


ITEM SG RK1 RK2
RADAR SDI 0 0 0
> ADF PTR HOLD DST 0 0 0
NOTE

below.
low.

THIS PAGE RESERVED
Page 4-654 SIM 006-00698-0007 Rev 7, Nov/2000

4.16 POST INSTALLATION KA 163A CHECK
All KA 163A Pitch and Roll command adapters are supplied from the factory with internal gain set
to accommodate a pitch command input of 32.0 mVdc/degree and a roll command input of 29.0
mVdc/degree. When any other scaling is supplied by the flight director, the KA 163A gain must be
changed before installation. This is accomplished by removing the dust cover and adjusting pitch
and roll repetitively. The following procedure should be used to adjust the gain when required:
4.16.A. Remove the two screws securing the dust cover and remove cover.
4.16.B. Apply a pitch command input voltage equivalent to 10 degrees of pitch, then adjust
R102 for 4.0 Vdc of pitch command output.
4.16.C. Apply a roll command input voltage equivalent to 10 degrees of roll, then adjust R109
for 4.0 vdc of roll command output.
4.16.D. Replace the dust cover and perform a normal return to service check.
FIGURE 4-19 KA 163A AMP Board Assembly

(Dwg. No. 300-07294-0010 R-0)

EFS 40/EFS 50
4.17 GROUND CHECKOUT
This procedure must be performed prior to the first flight to insure an airworthy system. The
Ground Checkout may also be performed any time for situations such as unit exchange, overhaul,
or troubleshooting a suspected malfunction. The procedures presented in this section are written
for the total system, but may be used for reduced capability systems by running only the appropri-
ate mode tests.
4.17.1 STARTUP
Apply power to the system. The display unit should become lighted within 30 seconds. Confirm
that all of the colors are present in the display, paying particular attention to the presence of the
color red. After a successful power up self test, the last used state of the system and the pro-
grammed configuration of the system will be recalled for initialization of the system. Various flags
may be annunciated in the displays, representing systems not yet on-line. System outputs should
be flagged until all self tests have passed. Deviation should be set to 0 deviation. Heading should
be set to the value being input to the system. Heading and Course datum should be set to the last
selected values. TST bits in ARINC 429 output labels should be set. These values may be unavail-
able until all of the processors have completed their power-up self tests.
4.17.2 SG COOLING
SG cooling is required and must be checked. If ambient temperature is above 35° C a Fan Flag
(a yellow SG enclosed by a yellow box) will appear on the displays if the Cooling Fan is not oper-
ating. If the ambient temperature is below 7° C cooling may not be requested and the flag will not
appear. If the cooling fan is not operating due to malfunction or miswire it should be repaired be-
fore continuing.
4.17.3 DU COOLING
DU cooling is also required and must be checked. If the fan is not operating due to a failure or
miswire a yellow DU FAIL annunciation will be displayed. The cooling problem should be corrected
before continuing.
4.17.4 SYSTEM CONTROLS CHECK
A check of all of the pushbuttons and knobs will be made to confirm that they are functioning prop-
erly. For a detailed description of the operation of each of the EFS 40/EFS 50 controls, refer to the
EFS 40/EFS 50 Flight Manual Supplement in the aircraft or the EFS 40/50 Pilots Guide P/N 006-
08701-0000.
4.17.4.1 System Controls

4.17.4.1.A. 1-2 Button
When the System Select (1/2) button is pressed, the system will alternately select
NAV receiver #1 or NAV receiver #2 for display (if configured for dual sensor).
4.17.4.1.B. NAV Button
When the Navigation Sensor Select (NAV) button is pressed, the system sequen-
tially selects VOR (or LOC), ADF, FMS (or RNAV), or MLS (as configured) for dis-
play on the course pointer/deviation indicator.
4.17.4.1.C. HSI Button
When the HSI Mode Select button is pushed, the system converts the sector pre-
sentation (if being displayed) to a standard 360° HSI compass rose. If this button
is pushed while the system is in the 360° HSI mode, the system will display sequen-
tially first, the compass rose with a moving map display, then second, the compass
rose with a map radar display. Repeated pressing of this button will cause the sys-
tem to sequence through the available 360° HSI formats.
4.17.4.1.D. CRS (DIR) Knob
If the selected sensor is valid, turn the Course Select (DIR) knob to position the
course pointer and push the center of the knob (ED 461) or pull the knob (CP 46X).
The system will slew the course pointer for a direct-to course to the selected navi-
gation facility, except for FMS (RNAV) in the autoleg mode or in LOC (ILS).
4.17.4.1.E. SINGLE ARROW (Number 1 Bearing Pointer) Button
Repeatedly pressing the Number 1 Bearing Pointer Select button cycles sequen-
tially through navigation sensors for waypoints in the manner of an ADF or RMI.
The sequence of presentation is (as configured) 1) declutter, 2) VOR 1, 3) ADF 1,
4) FMS 1, 5) DME 1 (no pointer), and back again to 1) declutter.
4.17.4.1.F. BRT Knob
Turning the Display Brightness (BRT) knob varies the intensity of the displayed in-
formation. The CP 467 and some versions of the CP 468 have dual concentric
knobs to allow independent EHSI and EADI brightness. This knob does not control
bezel lighting which is controlled by the aircraft lighting dimming bus. The EHSI
brightness knob may be on a CP 467, CP 468 or on the ED 461. The EADI bright-
ness knob may be on a CP 467, CP 470, or mounted on the aircraft panel indepen-
dently. The BRT knob on the MFD Control Panel, CP 469 or CP 469A, controls the
brightness of the MFD tube.
4.17.4.1.G. DOUBLE ARROW (Number 2 Bearing Pointer) Button

Repeatedly pressing the Number 2 Bearing Pointer Select button cycles sequen-
tially through navigation sensors for waypoints in the manner of an ADF or RMI.
The sequence of presentation is (as configured) 1) declutter, 2) VOR 2, 3) ADF 2,
4) FMS 2, 5) DME 2 (no pointer), and back again to 1) declutter.
4.17.4.1.H. HDG (SYNC) Knob
The Heading Select (SYNC) knob is rotated to position the heading bug. Pushing
in on the center of this knob (ED 461) or pulling the knob (CP 46X) will synchronize
the heading bug to the present heading of the aircraft under the lubber line. If there
is an EADI in the system and Flight Director is engaged in HDG mode, the Com-
mand Bars should respond to HDG Select in the roll axis.
4.17.4.1.I. ARC Button
When the Arc Mode Select (ARC) button is pushed, the system converts the stan-
dard 360° compass rose presentation (if it is currently displayed) to a large scale
85° sector presentation for expanded viewing of the compass rose/weather/moving
map display in the vicinity directly ahead of the aircraft. Subsequent pressing of this
button sequentially cycles through displays (as configured) in the following order:
1) compass arc, 2) compass arc with moving map, 3) compass arc with moving
map and weather radar, 4) compass arc with weather radar (map information de-
cluttered), and back again to 1) compass arc. If this button is pushed when the 360°
HSI mode is displayed, the initial arc will duplicate the existing 360° HSI format.
4.17.4.1.J. RNG Down Button
The Range Down button selects the next shorter distance range to be displayed
when in the NAV MAP or WEATHER mode of operation.
4.17.4.1.K. RNG Up Button
The Range Up button selects the next longer distance to be displayed when in the
NAV MAP or WEATHER mode of operation.
4.17.4.1.L. TST-SYS/REF Button
When the Self Test (TST/REF) button is pressed and held for three seconds, the
system displays self test and fault presentations. To clear the display, press the
TST/REF button again. The EADI self test page will automatically reset to a normal
EADI display.
When this button is pressed momentarily while the system is NOT IN A FMS MAP
MODE, DME ground speed readouts can be toggled between time-to-station and
ground speed, (if available). On SW 08 and above, GS and TTS are both displayed
on separate lines.

If a FMS MAP display has already been selected (ARC or HSI buttons) when the
TST/REF button is pressed for less than three seconds and within five seconds of
the previous pressing of the button, the display will sequentially cycle through avail-
able MAP formats as shown below.
FPL ID - Flight plan waypoints with ICAO identifiers.
AIRPORTS -ICAO identifiers will be assigned only to the TO waypoints in the flight
plan and to the nearest three or four airports as defined by the nearest airports
page on the KNS 660 or other compatible FMS.
NAVAIDS -ICAO identifiers will only be assigned to the TO waypoints of the flight-
plan and to the nearest VOR and VORTAC stations.
4.17.4.2 Radar Controls (if CP 466A/CP 466B Radar Control Panel is installed)
4.17.4.2.A. OFF-STBY-TST-ON Rotary Knob
OFF - Turns radar system off. STBY - Puts radar system in standby mode for warm
up. TST - Causes radar system test pattern to appear on the MFD tube. ON - Se-
lects normal operation of the radar system.
4.17.4.2.B. WX Button
Selects radar system weather mode for display.
4.17.4.2.C. WxA Button
Selects radar system weather alert mode for display
4.17.4.2.D. GND MAP Button
Selects radar system ground map mode for display.
4.17.4.2.E. Lighting Button (optional)
Selects the ability to display lighting information if a weather mode is selected.
4.17.4.2.F. VP Button (optional)
Selects/deselects radar system vertical profile mode for display on the MFD unit.

4.17.4.2.G. TRK Left/Right Buttons (optional)
In a system with Vertical Profile these buttons move the track line left or right.
4.17.4.2.H. Gain Knob
Provides a manual gain control in Ground Map mode. Pulling knob on a CP 466B
will enable ARL mode.
4.17.4.2.I. Tilt Knob
Provides manual adjustment of radar antenna tilt up and down. Pulling knob will
control STAB or AUTO tilt modes (as appropriate).
4.17.4.3 Multifunction Display Controls (if installed)
There are two MFD control panels designated, the standard CP 469, and the CP 469A. The CP
469A has joystick, checklist and some additional modes available. Controls will be the same for
both panels except where indicated.
4.17.4.3.A. CRS SEL Button
The Course select button makes the course select knob active or inactive.
4.17.4.3.B. HSI Button
Function is the same as on ED 461, CP 467, and CP 468.
4.17.4.3.C. ARC Button
Function is the same as on ED 461, CP 467, CP 468 but with the added capability
to select an optional radar only display on the MFD display.
4.17.4.3.D. NAV Button
Function is configured one of two ways. Configuration one: causes the NAV button,
when pushed, to show the LNAV or the same NAV as on the pilot’s EHSI. Config-
uration two: causes the NAV button to operate identical to the CP 467, CP 468 or
ED 461 and selects any available NAV sources.
4.17.4.3.E. 1-2 Button

Its function is to select On side and Off side sensors if MFD NAV Configuration is
NAV button configuration one. If NAV button configuration two is active, the 1-2
button works identical to the CP 467, CP 468 or ED 461.
4.17.4.3.F. Single and Double Arrow (#1 and #2 Bearing Pointer) Buttons
Function is the same as on ED 461, CP 467 and CP 468.
4.17.4.3.G. RNG Up/Down Buttons
4.17.4.3.H. Joystick (CP 469A only)
Function is for a waypoint input system with an LNAV or RNAV selected for the pri-
mary NAV sensor during display of a NAV MAP on the MFD.
4.17.4.3.I. ENT Button (CP 469A only)
When pushed enters the location of the waypoint selected with the joystick.
4.17.4.3.J. TEST/REF Button
4.17.4.3.K. TCAS ONLY Button (CP 469A only)
Selects display of TCAS information if TCAS system is installed and interfaced.
4.17.4.3.L. CHK LIST Button (CP 469A only)
Selects display of Checklist information on the MFD.
4.17.5 OPERATIONAL CHECK
All associated equipment such as compass systems and navigation receivers should be powered
up and working. Ramp testers and simulators should be available to simulate NAV stations and
distance. Turn the BRT knob up and down to confirm proper operation and then set for proper
brightness. The normal brightness range for white is from 0.2 to 100 Foot Lamberts.
4.17.5.1 Attitude Checks

The EADI should be indicating the appropriate roll and pitch attitude of the aircraft or the ramp on
in the hangar. Remove the vertical gyro from its mount position and move the gyro in pitch and
roll. Confirm the attitude display reacts correctly. If an AHRS system is installed, engage the test
switch and confirm the attitude display reacts correctly.
Pull the circuit breaker on the attitude source and confirm that the pitch scale, roll scale, roll index
pointer, horizon line, heading tape, blue sky and brown ground are removed from the display. A
red box with a red attitude fail inside it is displayed on a black background in the upper center of
the display. Push the attitude breaker back in and confirm the proper display returns.
4.17.5.2 Compass Checks
The EHSI and MFD (if installed) can be referenced for these compass checks. The compass card
should be indicating the approximate magnetic heading of the aircraft. Using the compass control
panel switches, manually slave the compass card off and return the system to slave mode. Con-
firm that the card returns to the original heading from both directions. Remove the directional gyro
from its mount and confirm the compass card follows the DG when it is rotated right and left.
Pull the compass system circuit breaker. Verify that the lubber line is replaced by a rectangular
red box with a pointer on the bottom and HDG inside. Verify that the course pointer head and tail
are decluttered. Verify that the deviation scale is fixed in a horizontal position and the deviation
bar operates as a CDI referenced to the digital selected course when VOR is selected as the pri-
mary nav sensor and a valid VOR bearing is provided.
NOTE
A red X will be drawn through the deviation scale when the ADF is selected as the pri-
mary nav sensor without valid heading information since ADF D-Bar is heading depen-
dent.
Push the compass system circuit breaker back in. Verify the compass card display returns to nor-
mal.
4.17.5.3 Rate of Turn Checks
If installed and configured, a rate of turn display will appear at the bottom of the EADI. The display
may moved left and right by removing the rate source from its mount and moving it left and right.
4.17.5.4 Heading Select Check
Rotate the heading knob right and left and confirm the heading bug moves clockwise and coun-
terclockwise. Confirm that the digital readout just above the heading knob corresponds with the
heading bearing location. With the heading bug set at some location other than at the lubber line,
push (or pull as appropriate) the SYNC button and confirm the heading bug moves to the lubber
line. If the system is coupled to an autopilot, turn the autopilot on in heading mode and confirm it

EFS 40/EFS 50
responds to the heading bug rotation left and right. This Heading bug operation may be observed
on the MFD also.
4.17.5.5 Course Select Check

Rotate the course knob right and left and confirm the course pointer moves clockwise and coun-
terclockwise. Confirm that the digital readout in the upper left corner of the display corresponds to
the course pointer location. If the system is coupled to an autopilot, turn the autopilot on in NAV
Coupled mode and confirm it responds to the course deviation left and right. This course selected
operation may be observed on the MFD also. The MFD Course select will repeat the EHSI unless
the CRS SEL button is activated, then the MFD Course Select Knob will operate independent of
the pilot’s system.
4.17.5.6 NAV 1 Mode Check
Using VOR and DME ramp generators as signal sources, select the test frequency with the num-
ber 1 NAV control unit and select NAV 1 on the display. The HSI should display to/from and left/
right information. Set a DME distance into the DME ramp test generator and confirm the proper
DME distance is displayed in the upper right corner of the display. Set in a ground speed and con-
firm the proper display is shown. Put the DME control into hold mode and confirm it is annunciated.
Return the DME to #1 NAV tuning source. Set the CRS pointer in the HSI under the lubber line.
Adjust the VOR ramp generator to center the needle with a TO flag. Increase the VOR bearing 10°
to give a full scale right deflection. Slowly change the bearing on the VOR ramp generator to cen-
ter the deviation. Slowly change the bearing on the VOR ramp generator to move the deviation to
half scale right on the HSI. The display should respond correctly to the NAV system. Push (or pull
as appropriate) the DIR knob and confirm the course pointer rotates to center the D-bar. Turn the
VOR ramp generator off and confirm that a red X appears over the D-bar scale and the TO/FROM
declutters. Beginning with SW version 09, the deviation bar and scale are decluttered without dis-
playing a RED X when the deviation information is provided in ARINC 429 format with a status of
NO COMPUTED DATA (NCD). The RED X will still be displayed if the data is missing or invalid.
Turn the VOR ramp generator back on. Turn the DME ramp generator off and confirm he stance
display field is red dashes. Turn the DME ramp generator back on. Cycle the #1 bearing pointer
select button to confirm proper display of the pointer.
For other Navigation sensors, such as FMS, GPS, MLS, etc, refer to the applicable manufacturer's
installation manual and/or operator's guide for specific guidance on the control and operational
checkout of those systems. Navigational source annunciations and display of navigational data
on the EFIS displays will be based upon the configurations used from within this installation man-
ual and will be presented in a manner as described in the EFS 40/50 Pilot's Guide.
4.17.5.7 NAV 2 Mode Check
Repeat the NAV 1 test for NAV 2, if installed. On the display select NAV 2 with the 1/2 button and
note that the vertical NAV annunciator on the left side of the display changes from green to yellow,
indicating cross side selection. Response of the NAV 2 display should be the same as NAV 1. Cy-
cle the #2 bearing pointer select button to confirm proper display of pointer and distance informa-
tion in the lower right corner.
4.17.5.8 ADF 1 Mode Check

Turn the ADF function selector on the ADF control unit to the ADF mode. Tune the ADF to a broad-
cast station. Select ADF with the EFIS NAV button and number 1 system with the 1/2 button. Verify
that deviation and to/from are displayed on the HSI. Turn the CRS pointer to give a full scale right
deviation. Turn the course pointer to give a full scale left deviation. Push (or pull as appropriate)
the course DIR button and confirm the course pointer moves to center the deviation D-bar. Cycle
the #1 bearing pointer to ADF to confirm proper operation. Verify that when an ADF with a super-
flag or ARINC 429 is tuned to an unused frequency, a red X appears over the D-bar scale and the
TO/FROM declutters. Beginning with SW version 09, the deviation bar and scale are decluttered
without displaying a RED X when the deviation information is provided in ARINC 429 format with
a status of NO COMPUTED DATA (NCD). The RED X will still be displayed if the data is missing
or invalid.
4.17.5.9 ADF 2 Mode Check
Repeat the ADF 1 test for ADF 2, if installed. Select ADF 2 with the 1/2 button and note the vertical
ADF annunciate changes from green to yellow for cross side use. Cycle the #2 bearing pointer to
ADF to confirm proper operation.
4.17.5.10 RNAV Mode Check
Use the VOR and DME ramp generators as signal sources and select the test frequency on the
number 1 NAV control unit. Select NAV 1 on the EFIS. With the NAV in RNAV mode, set up each
of the following RNAV problems and verify proper operation.
Problem 1:
Set the waypoint radial to 0°. Set the waypoint distance to 140 nm. Set the VOR bearing at 90°
TO. Set the DME distance to 140 nm. The D-bar should center with an OBS reading of 45, ±2.5°
and the distance to station should be 198, ±2 nm. The to/from indicator should read TO.
Problem 2:
Set the waypoint radial to 150°. Set the waypoint distance to 50 nm. Set the VOR bearing at 30°
TO. Set the DME distance to 50 nm. The D-bar should center with an OBS reading of 90, ±3°
and the distance to station should be 50, ±1.5 nm.
Loss of VOR or DME simulation should flag the VOR or DME displays as previously stated.
4.17.5.11 ILS Mode Checks
Select NAV using the EFIS NAV button and set the CRS pointer to the lubber line. The ramp test
generator must be set to give simultaneous localizer and glideslope signals. Select the test fre-
quency on the NAV 1 control head. LOC 1 will appear vertically on the left side of the display and
when a valid glideslope is received, the vertical glideslope display will appear on the left or right
side (as configured) of the compass card. The attitude display will reduce in size and the glides-
lope display will appear on the same side as the EHSI glideslope display. The LOC deviation dis-
play will appear along the bottom of the EADI display. Adjust the ramp generator to deflect the

localizer and glideslope and confirm proper displays. Rotate the course pointer 360° and note the
glideslope display declutters whenever the course pointer is more than 105° from the lubber line.
This and the glideslope display appearing on the right side of the display are functions set during
the system configuration. Turn the glideslope ramp generator off and confirm the glideslope dis-
play declutters and a red X appears on the scale.
4.17.5.12 Rising Runway
If a Radio Altimeter is connected and rising runway option is activated, it will be displayed in LOC
mode. The runway will move laterally with localizer deviation and vertically growing in size from
200 ft. AGL to 0 feet with Radio Attitude.
4.17.5.13 Decision Height Display
Digital radio attitude will be displayed in the upper right corner of the EADI when the system is
connected to a radio altimeter and below 2500 feet AGL. The DH set is displayed in the lower right
corner of the EADI display. The DH set knob on the control panel may be pulled to activate the
DH set display. Adjust the DH set knob to the desired decision height and push the DH set knob
back in. The selected DH will be decluttered above 2500 feet.
4.17.5.14 NAV Map Check

WARNING
THE RADAR ANTENNA WILL BE TRANSMITTING MICROWAVE ENERGY. OB-

SERVE PROPER SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING THE WEATHER RADAR
DURING GROUND OPERATIONS.
Using the VOR and DME ramp generators as signal sources, select the test frequency on the
number 1 NAV control unit and select NAV 1 on the EFIS. Press the HSI button until the display
cycles to the NAV MAP. This display is the standard 360° compass rose with a smaller circle inside
it and an expanded deviation scale at the bottom. The range of the inner circle is displayed to the
right of the circle and controlled by the range up and range down buttons. The VORTAC symbol
will be displayed with a course line going through it. If radar is connected, the NAV map with
weather may be selected. Weather will then be displayed forward of the symbolic airplane. This
same display can be observed on the MFD, if installed.
If the NAV button is pressed to cycle the display to RNAV or FMS, a series of map locations can
be plotted on the EHSI. With FMS selected, the TST/REF button can be used to change the format
selection. Flightplan waypoints, nearest airports or nearest VORTAC stations may be displayed.
This same display can be observed on the MFD, if installed.
Press the NAV button to cycle to ADF and confirm the display changes to “NO MAP” and the
course line disappears. This indicates a mode change or loss of information.

4.17.5.15 Sectored Mode Select Check
Press the ARC mode selector button. This converts the 360° compass rose presentation to a large
scale 85° sector presentation for expanded viewing. Subsequent presses of the ARC button se-
lects sequentially, the compass arc, the compass arc with moving map, the compass arc with mov-
ing map and weather radar, and the compass arc with weather radar. Check for proper heading
bug operation. When the heading bug is rotated off the display, the digital readout should appear
where the bug leaves the display and should digitally indicate the location of the bug. Confirm the
course pointer and its digital readout are displayed. Confirm the radar display is shown when the
arc with weather radar is selected. This same display can be observed on the MFD, if installed.
WARNING

SERVE PROPER SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING THE WEATHER RADAR
DURING GROUND OPERATIONS.
Confirm LOC and GS displays are present when an ILS frequency is selected and the system
switches from VOR to LOC. Confirm the #1 and #2 bearing pointers are displayed. Confirm that
the range up and range down buttons cycle the range ring distance and display.
4.17.5.16 MFD Only Displays
The MFD, if installed, can provide some displays that would otherwise not be available. It can be
configured to provide a Weather ONLY display. In this mode, only weather related displays are
shown. This mode is entered, if configured, by cycling the ARC button to the Weather only mode.
The second MFD only display is Vertical Profile Mode from the Radar Control Panel. The Track
line direction and Vertical Profile mode are entered from the Radar Control Panel. The vertical
slice is shown only on the MFD, the EHSI will display only the horizontal radar display.
Lightning information may be displayed on the Weather mode if the proper Stormscope is inter-
faced. The mode is entered with the lightning button on the Radar Control panel when a weather
mode is on. If a Radar Control Panel is not used, the lightning information is automatically pre-
sented.
The MFD also has the ability to provide a TCAS ONLY display. This mode is entered with the
TCAS ONLY button on the CP 469A, or with an externally mounted switch.
4.18 FLIGHT CHECKS
This checkout should be run on all new installations and anytime there has been major system
rework or aircraft wiring changes.

4.18.1 PREFLIGHT CHECK PROCEDURE
Prior to starting the preflight check, the aircraft engines must be operating, the inverters turned on,
the gyros stabilized, and the EFS 40/EFS 50 power on.
4.18.1.A. Turn the BRT Knobs to obtain the desirable level of brightness on the displays.
4.18.1.B. Press the TST/REF button and hold for three seconds and release to activate the sys-
tem self test and view all fault presentations. To clear any annunciations, press the
TST/REF button again. The EADI test page will automatically revert to a normal display
after a short delay.
4.18.1.C. Select the desired NAV source using the NAV and 1/2 buttons. Set the desired course
and heading and check that the appropriate displays are presented. Set the desired
NAV frequencies for takeoff, then press the appropriate buttons for the desired display
presentation.
4.18.2 ENROUTE OPERATION
The following instructions can apply to an EHSI or a MFD.
4.18.2.A. To automatically center the CDl with the direct course “TO” the NAV station or selected
RNAV waypoint, push (or pull as appropriate) the spring loaded “DIRECT TO” course
control. When released, the CDI resumes normal function.
4.18.2.B. To automatically sync the heading bug to the existing aircraft heading, push (or pull as
appropriate) the spring loaded “SYNC” button. When released, the heading bug may
be reset as desired.
4.18.2.C. If a weather radar indicator with its own controls is installed, refer to the operating in-
structions for that indicator. If no weather radar indicator is installed, the following in-
structions apply to the CP 466A or CP 466B radar control panel.
4.18.2.C.1 Press the ARC or HSI buttons on the EHSI as desired for sectored mode or full
compass weather display.
4.18.2.C.2 Turn the weather radar system to TST and observe the test pattern on the EHSI
display. After the test is complete, select the desired radar mode on the radar con-
trol panel and observe the desired mode display on the EHSI display unit.
4.18.2.C.3 Using the range up and range down buttons, select the desired range on the EHSI.
If necessary, readjust the controls on the radar control panel to provide the opti-
mum weather presentation on the EHSI.

4.18.2.C.4 The tilt angle may be adjusted by turning the TILT control on the radar control pan-
el. The tilt angle is displayed in white as up or down X degrees in the lower left or
right corner of the display, depending on configuration.
4.18.3 APPROACH OPERATION
4.18.3.1 ILS Approach
Select NAV (VOR) on the EHSI using the NAV button. Tune an ILS frequency. “LOC” will replace
“VOR” on the EHSI. Once an ILS frequency is selected, the RMI pointer associated with that VOR
is decluttered and the TO/FROM indicator disappears. When “DME HOLD” is selected on the
DME control panel, the ground speed is replaced with the VOR frequency, if available, and an or-
ange “H” follows the frequency. The VOR readout and the DME distance is displayed in white. If
the VOR or DME frequency is not available, only an orange “H” is displayed. The attitude display
reduces and the glideslope deviation appears on the EADI. The rising runway also appears, if
available. The DH will appear when below 2500 feet AGL.
4.18.3.2 Backcourse Approach
When the aircraft heading is greater than ±105° from the selected ILS course, GS information is
automatically decluttered from the EHSI, if selected in the configuration. If the MAP mode is se-
lected, the LOC deviation scale on the bottom of the display will be reverse sense. BC will be an-
nunciated below the scale and the center deviation triangle will be reversed.
4.18.3.3 ADF Approach

NOTE
ADF COUPLE TO AUTOPILOT IS NOT APPROVED
Select the ADF navigation source using the NAV button on the display unit. Tune the ADF receiver
to the desired NDB. Using the course control, select the desired course TO or FROM the NDB.
The course deviation bar on the EHSI now provides guidance in flying the selected course as in
flying a VOR course. This eliminates the mental calculations required while tracking an NDB
course in the conventional manner. NDB station passage is indicated by the reversal of the TO/
FROM indicator and the RMI pointer.
4.18.3.4 FMS (RNAV) Approach
Place the FMS in the approach mode and select the desired waypoints. Select the desired FMS
source on the display unit or control panel. Using the course control, select the desired course TO
or FROM the waypoint unless the FMS is in the autoleg mode. The course deviation bar on the
EHSI or MFD now provides guidance in flying the selected course. Waypoint passage is indicated
by reversal of the TO/FROM indicator and the waypoint RMI pointer. If the FMS is in an autoleg
mode, the CRS control will be disabled.

SECTION V
CERTIFICATION
5.1 INTRODUCTION
This section outlines the recommended procedures for obtaining FAA approval of the EHI 40/50
or EFS 40/50 installation.
5.2 CERTIFICATION PROCEDURE
5.2.1 Equipment Compatibility
Careful attention must be paid to the electrical characteristics of the existing equipment or new
equipment that will be interfaced to the EHI 40/50 or EFS 40/50 in order to insure system compat-
ibility. Section III of this manual provides system planning guidelines and defines the electrical
characteristics of the EHI 40/50 or EFS 40/50. The Post Installation Checks found in Section IV of
this manual shall be conducted to assure proper operation of the EHI 40/50 or EFS 40/50 system.
5.2.2 Equipment Location
The ED 461, ED 462, ED 551, ED 551A EHSIs must be mounted in the same location and as a
replacement for the existing instrument which most effectively indicates direction of flight. This will
normally be the existing electro-mechanical HSI or the gyroscopically stabilized direction indicator.
The ED 462, ED 551, ED 551A EADIs must be mounted in the same location and as a replace-
ment for the existing electro-mechanical ADI or flight director/attitude indicator. Both the ED 461,
ED 462, ED 551, ED 551A units and the SG 464, SG 465 Symbol Generators must be installed
per Section II of this manual.
5.2.3 Equipment Cooling Requirements
Both the ED 461, ED 462, ED 551, ED 551A units and the SG 464, SG 465 Symbol Generators
require forced air cooling. Approved methods of providing cooling to these units are described in
detail in Section II of this manual. Since forced air cooling is required for these units, temperature
tests must be conducted to show that the operating environment is within the temperature limits
of the equipment. A recommended temperature survey test procedure is described in paragraph
5.3.
5.2.4 FAA Requirements
The installing agency shall contact their local FAA Flight Standards District Office who will deter-
mine whether the EHI 40/50 installation may be approved by submitting FAA Form 337. If Form
337 is determined to be sufficient, the installing agency and their F.S.D.O. representative shall de-
termine the acceptability of the procedures defined in paragraphs 5.2.5, 5.2.6 and 5.3 of this man-

ual. If the FAA representative determines that a S.T.C. or T.C. is required, the installing agency
will need to contact their regional Aircraft Certification Office (A.C.O.) to obtain acceptable proce-
dures. An S.T.C. or T.C. is required to gain FAA approval of EFS 40/EFS 50, EADI/EHSI system
installations.
The FAA Central Region Aircraft Certification Office (ACE-115W), Wichita, Kansas has on file all
of the applicable Bendix/King reports substantiating the DO-160A, DO-160B and DO-160C envi-
ronmental tests and software validation to DO-178A which are required to demonstrate compli-
ance with either FAR 23, FAR 25, FAR 27, or FAR 29.
5.2.5 FAA Form 337
Form 337 must be completed and submitted to the FAA. A sample cooling test attachment to this
form is provided in Appendix B of this manual.
5.2.6 Flight Manual Revision
A Flight Manual Supplement will be required for the EHI 40/50. A sample supplement is provided
in Appendix C of this manual as a guide to acceptable content and format. It is not intended to
apply to all installations. The sample provided is titled Airplane Flight Manual Supplement, but it
could be an Airplane Flight Manual, Rotorcraft Flight Manual Supplement, or Rotorcraft Flight
Manual. It is the responsibility of the installing agency to determine which type of manual is re-
quired to prepare an appropriate manual with applicable contents and to obtain FAA approval.
5.3 TEMPERATURE SURVEY TEST PROCEDURE
5.3.1 Temperature Test Objectives
The objective of this procedure is to show that the operating environment in which the Electronic
Flight Instrument System components (SG 464, SG 465 and ED 461, ED 462, ED 551, ED 551A)
are installed is within the TSO limits established by Honeywell International Inc., the manufacturer.
The electronic displays have been qualified to TSO environmental limits of -40° C to +55° C and
the symbol generators have been qualified to the limits of -55° C to +70° C. The unit test point
maximum temperature specified for each of the units is a calibrated worst case internal tempera-
ture and should not be confused with the environmental limits. These test points shall be instru-
mented so that temperature measurements can be taken and recorded. These recorded mea-
surements shall then be adjusted for worst case temperature conditions to help demonstrate guar-
anteed performance, overall system reliability, and compliance with DO-160() environmental re-
quirements.
This procedure will establish a short term high temperature limit test which shall account for air-
craft temperatures on the ground and should not exceed 30 minutes. A long term temperature
limits test will be established to account for environmental temperatures during flight. The long
term temperature test will account for equipment located within a pressurized cabin and equip-
ment located outside a pressurized cabin. Both a ground test and a flight test are required.

5.3.2 Reference Documents
Required and desirable reference documents are listed below.
Required:
FAA approved Airplane or Rotorcraft Flight Manual or Flight Manual Supplement.
Desirable:
FAA Memorandum ANM-110, Interim Technical Guidance for Electronic Flight Instrument Sys-
tems.
FAA Advisory Circular 25-11, Transport Category Airplane Electronic Display Systems.
FAA Advisory Circular 27-1, Certification of Normal Category Rotorcraft.
FAA Advisory Circular 29-2A, Certification of Transport Category Rotorcraft.
5.3.3 Temperature Test Instrumentation
A temperature measuring device is required that has the accuracy and repeatability of ± 1° F, else
the unit’s accuracy value shall be added to the final corrected temperature values. It shall have
multiple inputs to measure all the necessary temperatures. Acceptable devices are the Fluke Mod-
el 2166A or Fluke HYDRA Data Logger using standard J or K type thermocouple wire for probes.
Thermocouples shall be attached to each SG 464/SG 465 in the position shown in Figure 5-2 and
Figure 5-3 and on each ED 461/ED 462/ED 551/ED 551A in the position shown in Figure 5-4 and
Figure 5-5. If a KA 33 is used to cool the Symbol Generator(s) and/or the Display Unit(s) in an
unpressurized aircraft, a thermocouple shall be suspended in the area two to three inches ahead
of the fan inlet, but not directly in the air stream. For pressurized aircraft, a thermocouple shall be
placed in an area within the cockpit/cabin that best represents the cabin ambient temperature, six
to eight inches aft of the glare shield. A thermocouple shall be placed within five inches of the Sym-
bol Generator(s) if it is also in a pressurized area. For ground tests, a thermocouple needs to be
placed outside of the aircraft in an area that best represents the outside ambient air temperature.
Environmental temperatures must be kept to a minimum in order to maintain a high level of reli-
ability for all electronic components. It is recommended that thermocouples be placed in the air-
craft to monitor the ambient temperatures for the symbol generators and electronic displays.
These thermocouples shall not be placed within the air stream of any fans.
These added temperature sensors provide valid data where overheating is experienced. The am-
bient temperature for the symbol generator shall never exceed 70° C. Under long term high tem-
perature conditions, the electronic display ambient temperature shall not exceed 55° C. The am-
bient temperature for the electronic displays can be equal to or less than 70° C for a period of 30
minutes or less. This extended temperature range is to account for periods of excessive heat
soaking on the ground.
The aircraft must be equipped with an outside air temperature gauge or static air temperature in-
dicator. If an O.A.T. gauge is used the installing agency will need to find the correction curve for
ram rise which is normally provided in the Aircraft Flight Manual. This correction data will be need-

ed when computing the temperatures taken during flight tests. A true static air temperature indi-
cator should already be corrected for the effect of ram rise.
5.3.4 Short Term Temperature Limit (Ground Test)
The unit Test Point temperatures will be monitored during a 30 minute ground heat soak test. The
temperature readings taken will be corrected to the maximum hot day operating temperature for
the aircraft at sea level. For turboprop or turbojet airplanes or turbine powered rotorcraft this tem-
perature may be found in the limitations section of the Aircraft Flight Manual. To determine the
proper temperature for a piston engine aircraft, look for the performance graph in the Aircraft Flight
Manual that shows takeoff performance. Use the maximum temperature indicated on the graph
that the aircraft manufacturer gives for takeoff performance data at sea level.
5.3.4.1 Short Term Temperature Test Conditions
Prior to starting the Ground Test, it must be determined whether the aircraft should be allowed to
heat soak on the ramp for 2 or more hours with all avionics turned off and no power supplied to
the aircraft, or whether the ground test should be conducted in a hanger facility where the aircraft
would be protected from the “green house” effect. A factor of 25° F must be factored in to the
ground test maximum corrected temperature for those units located in the cabin area to account
for the “green house” effect, see paragraph 5.3.4.2. All avionics, including the EHI 40/EHI 50 or
EFS 40/EFS 50 System, and all other heat generating equipment shall be turned on during the
tests. All lighting pots shall be turned to maximum brightness. The ED 461/ED 462/ED 551/ED
551A master dimmer control shall be set to maximum brightness. The ED 461/ED 462/ED 551/
ED 551A shall be configured to display the maximum amount of data that is possible to be select-
ed simultaneously at any given time. All avionics bay doors are to be closed. Any other avionics
cooling fans other than the one required for the SG 464/SG 465s and the ED 461/ED 462/ED 551s
must be disabled. If it is felt that additional fans are mandatory to maintain an ambient tempera-
ture of less than +55° C behind the panel or less than +70° C for remote mounted equipment ar-
eas, these fans must be monitored and a fan failure must be annunciated to the flight crew upon
detecting a fan failure. All cabin doors shall be closed. The pressurization system, if applicable,
shall be turned off. The air conditioner system, if applicable, shall be turned off.
NOTE
A thermocouple can be placed to record the outside air temperature for the Ground
Test and the Flight Test. The temperatures for the Flight Test will have to be corrected
for RAM effects.
The temperature data shall be recorded for 30 minutes minimum in 5 minute intervals. The follow-
ing temperatures shall be recorded:
Outside Air Temperature

Cabin Ambient Temperature
Initial Non-operating Test Point Temperature of each ED 461/ED 462/ED 551/ED 551A
Initial Non-operating Test Point Temperature of each SG 464/SG 465

Test Point Operating Temperature of each ED 461/ED 462/ED 55I/ED 551A at 5

minute intervals
Test Point Operating Temperature of each SG 464/SG 465 at 5 minute intervals
NOTE
Do not use the O.A.T. or S.A.T. indicator on the ground for outside air temperature
readings. These devices are very inaccurate without air flow across the temperature
probe.
NOTE
Temperature Test Point readings should be taken in degrees fahrenheit. A 1° fahren-
heit change in temperature is smaller than a 1° celsius change, thus making the data
taken more accurate. Before any compensated temperatures are calculated all tem-
perature data shall be converted to degrees celsius. Following is the conversion for-
mula: °C = 5/9 [(°F) - 32]
5.3.4.2 Short Term Temperature Correction
The temperature data shall be measured at a minimum of 6 minute intervals for 30 minutes and
must be corrected to the maximum hot day temperature of the aircraft in which the equipment is
installed. For example, if the temperature data was taken on a day when the outside air temper-
ature was 20° C and the maximum hot day temperature rating of the aircraft at sea level is 50° C,
the temperature readings have to be compensated for the 30° C difference. If the ground test is
performed in a protected environment (shielded from the “green house” effect), then 25° F (13.89°
C) budget (TGHB) must be applied to the formula to account for “green house” effect.
If the ground test is performed where the aircraft is allowed to heat-soak for at least 2 hours, thus
being exposed to real world “green house” effect, then the following calculations are taken into
account:
- Subtract outside air temperature TOAT from the cabin ambient (after heat-soak) TCA to
determine net green house temperature rise TGHN.
- Subtract TGHN from 25° F greenhouse budget to obtain a corrected greenhouse effect
temperature TGHC.
- Add TGHC to the formula as shown below:
TGHN = TCA - TOAT

TGHC = 25 - TGHN
TC = TT - TO + TGHC + TMAX
NOTE
Calculations that are made to accommodate “greenhouse effect” apply to EHI 40/EHI
50 and/or EFS 40/EFS 50 equipment located in the cabin area only.
TCA = Cabin Ambient Temperature

TOAT = Outside Air Temperature (Thermocouple)

TGHB = Greenhouse Budget = 25° F (13.89° C)
TGHN = Greenhouse Net Temperature rise
TGHC = Greenhouse Corrected Temperature
TO = Initial Non-operating Unit Temperature
TT = Measured Test Point Temperature
TMAX = Aircraft Maximum Approved Hot Day Temperature Limit
TC = Corrected Test Point Temperature
This added temperature will usually only affect the Electronic Displays (ED 461/ ED 462/ED 551/
ED 551A) corrected temperature. The electronic displays maximum corrected test point temper-
ature is 65° C for the ED 461/ED 462 and 75° C for the ED 551/ED 551A. These temperatures
may be exceeded by 15° C for a period not to exceed 30 minutes. This time period is consecutive
and not cumulative. The extended maximum temperature is to account for conditions where the
equipment could be exposed to high ambient temperatures during a heat soak. There is no ex-
tended maximum temperature for the symbol generators. The following formula are to be used to
compensate for short term temperature corrections:
TGHN = TCA - TOAT

TGHB = 25° F (13.89° C)
TGHC = TGHB - TGHN
TC = TT - TOAT + TMAX + (TGHC if test is conducted following heatsoak) or (TGHB if test is
conducted in a protected environment)
The corrected test point temperature (Tc) must not exceed the temperatures listed below. The ex-
tended maximum temperatures for the Electronic Displays are in parentheses.
ED 461/ED 462 = 65° C (80° C for 30 minutes)

ED 551/ED 551A = 75° C (90° C for 30 minutes)
SG 464 (066-04020-01XX, -02XX) = 80° C
SG 465 (066-04021-X1XX, -X2XX) = 80° C
SG 465 (066-04021-X4XX, -X5XX) = 75° C
5.3.5 Long Term Temperature Limit (Flight Test)
The Flight Test should immediately follow the Ground Test if possible. For the Flight Test, the unit
test point temperatures will be logged at set intervals during preflight checks, ground taxi, takeoff,
power climb, and cruise at the highest attainable altitude on the test day. The set interval may
range from logging temperature data points every 3 minutes to every 6 minutes. The altitude can-
not exceed the certified ceiling of the aircraft being tested. The corrected test point temperatures
for the equipment mounted outside of a pressurized cabin or within an unpressurized cabin envi-
ronment shall be corrected to the maximum hot day temperature limit for the aircraft. The correct-
ed test point temperature for the equipment mounted within a pressurized cabin shall be to the
maximum hot cabin temperature; typically 95° F. Consult the aircraft POH for specific maximum

hot cabin temperature limit. If the aircraft is equipped with a pressurization system, then a pres-
surization failure must be demonstrated (see section 5.3.5.4).
5.3.5.1 Long Term Temperature Test Conditions
The ED 461/ED 462/ED 551/ED 551A Display Units shall be configured as required for normal
flight conditions. The master dimmer controls shall be set to maximum brightness. The ED 461/
ED 462/ED 551/ED 551A and SG 464/SG 465 Test Point temperatures shall be recorded until
they are stabilized during cruise flight. Stabilization is defined as a maximum temperature de-
crease or increase of 0.4° F (0.22° C) over a 3 minute sampling period.
All data shall be recorded at a minimum rate of 6 minute intervals. The following temperatures and
data shall be recorded.
Outside Air Temperature (O.A.T.) or Static Air Temperature (S.A.T.)

Pressure Altitude (feet)
Indicated Airspeed (knots)
Cabin Ambient Temperature
ED 461/ED 462/ED 551/ED 551A Test Point Temperature
SG 464/SG 465 Test Point Temperature
NOTE
Outside air temperature (O.A.T.) indicators must be compensated for RAM air temper-
ature in order to get a true outside air temperature. Static air temperature does not
need to be compensated. The following formula can be used to compensate for true
outside air temperature.
TIA = Indicated Outside Air Temperature

TRAM = RAM Temperature Rise for O.A.T. Probe from graph in Flight Manual
TOAT = TIA - TRAM (at a given altitude and speed)
5.3.5.2 Long Term Temperature Correction For Unpressurized Compartments
The Temperature data taken for equipment mounted in unpressurized compartments or cabins
must be corrected to maximum hot day conditions. Since outside air temperature varies with pres-
sure altitude the temperature data will be corrected using an International Standard Atmosphere
as a standard. Following is the definition of I.S.A.
International Standard Atmosphere:

1. The air is a dry perfect gas.
2. The temperature at sea level is 15° celsius (59° Fahrenheit).
3. The pressure at sea level is 29.92 inches of Hg. (1013.2 mb.).

4. The temperature gradient from sea level to the altitude at which the temperature is
-56.5° C (-69.7° F) is -0.00198° C (-0.003564° F) per foot and zero above that altitude.
Following are the formulas to be used to compensate long term temperature corrections for equip-
ment mounted in unpressurized compartments.
TA = True Outside Air Temperature (TOAT) or Static Air Temperature (TSAT)

TMAX = Aircraft Max. Hot Day Temperature (at sea level)
hb = Indicated Altitude (in feet)
TMAX @ hb = TMAX + [(-0.00198° C) X hb]
TT = Unit Test Point Temperature (at a given time interval and altitude)
TC = Corrected Test Point Temperature (at a given altitude)
TC = TT - TA + TMAX @ hb
5.3.5.3 Long Term Temperature Correction For Pressurized Cabin
The temperature data taken for the cabin mounted equipment must be corrected to the published
maximum cabin temperature for the particular airframe. Following are the formulas to be used to
compensate long term temperature corrections for equipment mounted on pressurized cabins.
TT = Unit Point Temperature (at a given time interval)

TA = Cabin Ambient Temperature
TC = Corrected Test Point Temperature
TC = TT - TA + Maximum Cabin Temperature
5.3.5.4 Procedure For Testing A Pressurization Failure
If an aircraft has an emergency pressurization system using raw bleed air to pressurize the cabin,
the following format shall be followed.
5.3.5.4.A. After establishing the highest possible altitude cruise, the pressurization control shall
be placed in the EMERGENCY position and left there. Immediately a simulated emer-
gency descent shall be conducted until the aircraft altitude reaches 10,000 ft. or below,
where normal pressurization may be reactivated.
5.3.5.4.B. The temperatures for the cabin mounted equipment shall be corrected to a maximum
hot cabin temperature.
NOTE
The aircraft’s oxygen system shall be operable and serviced to safely last the duration
of the test. It is recommended to functionally check the emergency pressurization sys-
tem first at a low altitude to ensure proper system operation and to allow the pilot-in-
command to gain familiarity with the system in preparation for high altitude operation.

5.3.6 Sample Temperature Survey Test
Following is a sample temperature survey test that shows an example of the data to be taken and
the calculations required to correct it to worst case conditions. The sample survey consists of the
following.
5.3.6.A. Sample Temperature Survey Test Data Sheet
This is the information recorded during the ground and flight test.
5.3.6.B. Short Term Temperature Correction SG 465 (EHI 40 Ground Test)
This shows the calculations for TC (Corrected Test Point Temperature) for the SG 465
Symbol Generator.
5.3.6.C. Short Term Temperature Correction ED 461 (With Greenhouse Effect Factored IN).
This shows the calculations for TC for the ED 461 EHSI. (The test is performed in the
hanger).
5.3.6.D. Long Term Temperature Correction For Unpressurized Areas.
This shows the calculations for TA (True Outside Air Temperature), TMAX @ hb (Aircraft
Maximum Hot Day Temperature at Indicated Altitude), and TC for the SG 465 Symbol
Generator located in an unpressurized equipment bay.
5.3.6.E. Long Term Temperature Correction For Pressurized Areas.
This shows the calculations for TC for the ED 461 EHSI located in a pressurized cabin.

5.3.6.1 Sample Temperature Survey Test Data Sheet
TABLE 5-1 Sample Temperature Survey Test Data Sheet
PROBE PROBE PROBE

TEST PROBE PROBE
#1 #2 #3
PERIOD PRESS IND. #4 #5 COMMEN
KIAS COOLIN SG 465 ED 461
MINUTE ALT. O.A.T CABIN OUTSID TS
G AIR HOT HOT
S AMB. AMB.
TEMP SPOT SPOT
0 1350 0 62 62 71 73 N/A 80 GROUND

TEST
5 1350 0 62 62 72 80 N/A 80
10 1350 0 62 62 73 84 N/A 80
15 1350 0 62 62 75 88 N/A 80
20 1350 0 62 62 76 90 N/A 80
25 1350 0 62 62 77 92 N/A 80
30 1350 0 62 62 78 94 N/A 80
35 1350 0 62 62 78 92 62 N/A PRE-

FLIGHT
40 1350 0 62 62 78 92 62 N/A AND
ENGINE
45 1350 0 62 62 78 92 62 N/A
START
50 1400 100 60 62 77 92 62 N/A TAXI &

TAKE
OFF
55 7300 100 36 52 73 82 62 N/A CLIMB
60 11300 100 27 45 67 75 62 N/A
65 13800 100 19 40 61 70 62 N/A
70 15600 100 11 34 54 64 62 N/A
75 17300 100 7 29 48 59 62 N/A CRUISE
80 17600 120 6 25 42 55 62 N/A
85
90
95
100
105
110
115
120

5.3.6.2 Sample Short Term Temperature Correction SG 465 (EHI 40 Ground Test)
SG 465 Symbol Generator - Located in Unpressurized Equipment Bay.

Aircraft Maximum Hot Day Temperature at sea level = 45° Celsius.
Calculations for TC Temperatures are listed in degrees C.
TABLE 5-2 Sample Short Term TC Calculations (SG 465)
TEST PERIOD TT - TO + TMAX = TC
0 21.7 26.7 45 40.0
5 22.2 26.7 45 40.5
10 22.8 26.7 45 41.1
15 23.9 26.7 45 42.2
20 24.4 26.7 45 42.7
25 25.0 26.7 45 43.3
30 25.6 26.7 45 43.9
NOTE
TC is less than 80° C in all cases.
5.3.6.3 Sample Short Term Temperature Correction ED 461 (EHI 40 Ground Test)
ED 461 EHSI - Located in cabin. (This test is performed in the hanger.)

TABLE 5-3 Sample Short Term TC Calculations (ED 461)
TEST PERIOD TT - TO + TMAX + TGNB = TC
0 22.8 26.7 45 13.9 55
5 26.7 26.7 45 13.9 58.9
10 28.9 26.7 45 13.9 61.1
15 31.1 26.7 45 13.9 63.3
20 32.2 26.7 45 13.9 64.4
25 33.3 26.7 45 13.9 65.5
30 34.4 26.7 45 13.9 66.6

NOTE
TC exceeds 65° C about 25 minutes into the ground test. This is permissible since this
corrected temperature is less than 80° C and the period of time above 65° C is less
than 30 minutes.
5.3.6.4 Long Term Temperature Correction For Unpressurized Areas
SG 465 Symbol Generator

Calculations for TA Temperatures are listed in degrees C.
TABLE 5-4 Sample Long Term TA Calculations (SG 465)
hb KIAS TIA - TRAM = TA
1350’ 0 16.6 0 16.6
1400’ 100 15.4 1 14.4
7300’ 100 2.1 1 1.1
11300 100 -2.9 1.5 -4.4
13800’ 100 -7.3 2.1 -9.4
15600’ 100 -11.7 2.2 -13.9
17300’ 100 -13.8 2.3 -16.1
17600’ 120 -14.7 2.5 -17.2
Calculations for TAMAX @ hb Temperatures are listed in degrees C.
TABLE 5-5 Sample Long Term TAMAX Calculations (SG 465)
[45 C + [(-0.00198) X hb]] = TAMAX @ hb
[45 C + [(-0.00198) X 1350’]] +42.3
[45 C + [(-0.00198) X 1400’]] +42.2
[45 C + [(-0.00198) X 7300’]] +30.6
[45 C + [(-0.00198) X 11300’]] +22.6
[45 C + [(-0.00198) X 13800’]] +17.7
[45 C + [(-0.00198) X 15600’]] +14.1
[45 C + [(-0.00198) X 17300’]] +10.8
[45 C + [(-0.00198) X 17600’]] +10.2

TABLE 5-6 Sample Long Term TC Calculations (SG 465)
TEST
TT - TA + TMAX @ hb = TC
PERIOD
35 25.6 16.6 42.3 51.2
40 25.6 16.6 42.3 51.2
45 25.6 16.6 42.3 51.2
50 25.0 14.4 42.2 52.8
55 22.8 1.1 30.6 52.2
60 19.4 -4.4 22.6 46.4
65 16.1 -9.4 17.7 43.2
70 12.2 -13.9 14.1 40.2
75 8.9 -16.1 10.8 35.8
80 5.6 -17.2 10.2 33.0
NOTE
5.3.6.5 Long Term Temperature Correction For Pressurized Cabins
ED 461 EHSI
TABLE 5-7 Sample Long Term TC Calculations (ED 461)
TEST PERIOD TT - TA + Max Hot Day (35°C) = TC Comments
35 33.3 16.7 35 51.6 PREFLIGHT
40 33.3 16.7 35 51.6
45 33.3 16.7 35 51.6
50 33.3 16.7 35 51.6 TAXI & TAKE-

OFF
55 27.8 16.7 35 46.1 CLIMB
60 23.9 16.7 35 42.2
65 21.1 16.7 35 39.4
70 17.8 16.7 35 36.1

TABLE 5-7 Sample Long Term TC Calculations (ED 461)
TEST PERIOD TT - TA + Max Hot Day (35°C) = TC Comments
75 15.0 16.7 35 33.3 CRUISE
80 12.8 16.7 35 31.1
NOTE
FIGURE 5-1 Pressure Altitude vs. Outside Air Temperature Survey Graph

FIGURE 5-2 SG 465 Temperature Test Point Location

FIGURE 5-3 SG 464 Temperature Test Point Location

FIGURE 5-4 ED 461/ED 462 Temperature Test Point Location

(ED 461 Shown, ED 462 Similar)

FIGURE 5-5 ED 551/ED 551A Temperature Test Point Location

EFS 40/EFS 50
SECTION VI
OPERATION
Refer to Section IV for the operating instructions for the post installation checkout.
Refer to the EFS 40/50 Pilots Guide P/N 006-08701-0000 for complete operating instructions.

THIS PAGE RESERVED

APPENDIX A
ENVIRONMENTAL QUALIFICATION FORMS
Rev 7, Nov/2000 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Page A-1

THIS PAGE RESERVED
Page A-2 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Rev 7, Nov/2000

FIGURE A-1 CP 113F Radar Control Panel EQF

SHEET 1 of 2 (Dwg 004-09095-0000, Rev 0, Sht 1)

FIGURE A-1 CP 113F Radar Control Panel EQF


FIGURE A-2 KA 163A Pitch and Roll Command Adapter EQF

(Dwg 004-09073-0000, Rev 0)

THIS PAGE RESERVED

FIGURE A-3 ED 461 Electronic Display EQF
















FIGURE A-7 SU 463 EFIS Reversionary Switching Unit EQF


FIGURE A-7 SU 463 EFIS Reversionary Switching Unit EQF


FIGURE A-8 SG 464 Symbol Generator EQF





SHEET 1 of 2 (Dwg 004-09061-0001, Rev AA, Sht 1)


SHEET 2 of 2 (Dwg 004-09061-0001, Rev AA, Sht 2)





EFS 40/EFS 50

SHEET 1 of 2 (Dwg 004-09049-0001, Rev AC, Sht 1)
Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Page A-23

EFS 40/EFS 50

SHEET 2 of 2 (Dwg 004-09049-0001, Rev AC, Sht 2)
Page A-24 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010

FIGURE A-12 CP 466A/ CP 466B Control Panel EQF

(Dwg 004-09071-0000, Rev 2)

THIS PAGE RESERVED

FIGURE A-13 CP 467/ CP 468 Control Panel EQF








FIGURE A-15 CP 469 Control Panel EQF




FIGURE A-16 CP 469A Control Panel EQF

(Dwg 004-09094-0000, Rev 0)

THIS PAGE RESERVED





FIGURE A-18 ED 551/ED 551A Electronic Display EQF








APPENDIX B
SAMPLE ATTACHMENT TO FAA FORM 337
Rev 7, Nov/2000 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Page B-1

THIS PAGE RESERVED
Page B-2 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Rev 7, Nov/2000

A sample attachment to FAA Form 337 was not available at the time of publication. Please refer
to Installation Bulletin #299 for information regarding sample attachment to FAA form 337.
Rev 7, Nov/2000 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Page B-3

THIS PAGE RESERVED
Page B-4 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Rev 7, Nov/2000

APPENDIX C
FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENT
(GENERIC EXAMPLE)
Rev 7, Nov/2000 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Page C-1

NOTE
THIS DOCUMENT IS INTENDED AS A GUIDE TO BE USED IN THE WRITING OF A SUPPLE-

MENT ADDRESSING A SPECIFIC AIRPLANE-PECULIAR EHI 40 INSTALLATION. NOT ALL OF
THE DATA HEREIN MAY BE APPLICABLE, AND CONVERSELY, THERE MAY BE CONSIDER-
ATIONS NOT INCLUDED AT THIS TIME.
A FINAL DOCUMENT ADDRESSING A SPECIFIC INSTALLATION MUST BE SUBMITTED TO

THE FAA FOR APPROVAL AND SHOULD NOT CONTAIN PHRASES SUCH AS “IF IN-
STALLED” OR “IF AVAILABLE.”
OPERATION OF THE EHI 40 WHEN PROPERLY INTERFACED WITH A BENDIX/KING AUTO-

PILOT IS APPROVED WITHOUT FURTHER REVISION TO THE AUTOPILOT FLIGHT MANUAL
SUPPLEMENTS. THIS SAME RULE MAY APPLY TO COMPETITOR AUTOPILOTS IF UPON
EXAMINATION IT IS DETERMINED THAT THE AUTOPILOT LIMITATIONS AND EMERGENCY
PROCEDURES HAVE NOT BEEN VIOLATED.
Page C-2 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Rev 7, Nov/2000

FAA APPROVED AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENT

BENDIX/KING MODEL EHI 40 ELECTRONIC
HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (EHSI)
AIRCRAFT MAKE ____________________________________________________
AIRCRAFT MODEL ____________________________________________________
AIRCRAFT SERIAL NO. ____________________________________________________
AIRCRAFT REG. NO. ____________________________________________________
This document must be carried in the aircraft at all times. It describes the operating procedures
for the EHI 40 Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator when it has been installed in accordance
with Bendix/King System Installation Manual 006-00698-_____, Rev. ___, and FAA Form 337
dated_______.
When the EHI 40 is installed in an aircraft that does not have an FAA approved Airplane Flight
Manual, this document serves as the FAA approved EHI 40 Flight Manual. For aircraft with a Pilots
Operating Handbook and/or FAA approved Airplane Flight Manual this document serves as the
FAA Approved EHI 40 Flight Manual Supplement.
This information contained herein supplements or supersedes that basic Airplane Flight Manual
only in those areas listed herein. For limitations, procedures and performance information not con-
tained in this document, consult the basic Airplane Flight Manual, (if applicable).
FAA Approved: _____________________________________
(Responsible FAA Official)
Date: _____________________________________

MANUFACTURER MODEL ________

AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION PAGE
1.0 INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................C-5
2.0 LIMITATIONS ............................................................................................................C-13
3.0 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES .................................................................................C-13
4.0 NORMAL PROCEDURES .........................................................................................C-15
5.0 PERFORMANCE .......................................................................................................C-17
FAA Approved
Date: __________ (MM/DD/YY)

1.0 INTRODUCTION
1.1 GENERAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This manual is provided to acquaint the pilot with the limitations as well as normal and emergency
operating procedures of the Bendix/King Model EHI 40 Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator
(EHSI). The EHI 40 System must be operated within the limitations specified herein.
The EHI 40 EHSI consists of a 4” x 4” ED 461 Electronic Control Display Unit (CDU) with an inte-
gral bezel mounted mode controller, and a remote mounted SG 464 (or SG 465) symbol generator
(SG). An optional remote CP 467 mode controller with an ED 462 display unit are also available.
The symbol generator interfaces with multiple navigation sensors to compute the EHSI display
and data required by other systems on board the aircraft.
The EHI 40 EHSI provides conventional HSI functions along with bearings and distances as would
normally be provided by separate RMI and DME readouts. The display is multicolored for ease of
interpretation an 9 includes a moving map presentation as well as a weather radar overlay. A 360
deg. compass rose or an 85 deg. compass sector may be selected.
1.2 SYSTEM CONTROLS
FIGURE C-1 EHI 40 Controls and Indicators

ED 461 Electronic Display Unit
FAA Approved MANUFACTURER MODEL ________

Date: __________ AIRPLANE FLIGHT MANUAL SUPPLEMENT

EFS 40/EFS 50
1.2.1 NAVIGATION (NAV) SENSOR SELECT BUTTON
When pressed sequentially selects VOR (or LOC), ADF, FMS or MLS for display on the course
pointer/deviation indicator. (Note: Depending upon the installation, other options may be avail-
able).
If the selected primary sensor is an ILS, MLS or FMS with VNAV selected, the vertical scale will
appear on the configured side. The vertical scale may be in view at all times, or depending on the
configuration option selected at the time of installation, only when the selected course is within
105 deg. of the aircraft heading.
The vertical two letter identifier in the pointer annunciates the deviation source and is dependent
on the configuration for the MLS. In the MLS mode, the glide path angle selected will be annunci-
ated above the vertical deviation scale.
GS will be annunciated if the source is ILS.

VN will be annunciated if the source is vertical navigation output from an FMS that
is in enroute mode.
GP will be annunciated if the source is FMS provided the unit is configured for
Variable VNAV.
During FMS VNAV, the vertical scale provides the angle in degrees before capture has occurred,
or error in feet after capture. When ADF is selected, desired course is set and L/R deviation is
displayed on the D-bar similar to VOR.
1.2.2 NAVIGATION (1/2) SYSTEM SELECT BUTTON
When pressed will alternately select navigation receiver No. 1 or No. 2 for presentation. Green
annunciations indicates an “on side” approach approved NAV system and yellow indicates the
“cross- side” system has been selected. Cyan annunciations apply to “on side” non-approach ap-
proved NAV systems. These color codes apply to the NAV source annunciator, CRS pointer and
deviation scale, CRS line in MAP mode, CRS digital readout, distance and ground speed readout.
In dual installations when both pilots have selected the same navigation system, a yellow box is
placed around the navigation source annunciator. If both sides select their respective “cross- side”
navigation systems (i.e., pilot selects system 2, copilot selects system 1) then both NAV source
annunciators will be yellow with no yellow box.
1.2.3 SELF TEST (TST/REF) BUTTON
When pressed and held for three seconds, activates an internal self test and displays all fault pre-
sentations. Upon completion PASS or FAIL will be annunciated. To clear the PASS or FAIL an-
nunciations, the TST/REF button must be pressed again. When pressed momentarily (for less
than three seconds) when not in a MAP mode. DME ground speed readouts can be converted to
time-to-station and vice versa depending on SW version.

Page C-6 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Rev 9, 17 Sep 2010

EFS 40/EFS 50
If a MAP presentation (ARC or HSI button) has already been selected, and the FMS (KNS 660 in
AUTO LEG) is the selected source for presentation on the course pointer; when the TST/REF is
pressed (for less than three seconds) it will sequentially select available MAP formats in the fol-
lowing manner:
1.2.3.A. First push displays the MAP annunciator (ie. FPL, AIRPORTS or NAVAIDS) for five
seconds.
FPL Flight plan waypoints with ICAO identifiers.

AIRPORTS ICAO identifiers will be assigned to the TO waypoints of the flight plan
and the nearest three (or four) airports (as defined by the nearest Air-
ports Page on the KNS 660).
NAVAIDS ICAO identifiers will be assigned to the TO waypoints of the flight plan
and the nearest VOR and VORTAC navaids.
1.2.3.B. Second (or subsequent) push (within 5 seconds) - selects to display the next sequen-
tial MAP display mode in the sequence listed under a. above.
1.2.4 RANGE UP BUTTON
Selects the next longer distance range to be displayed when in the NAV MAP or WEATHER mode
of operation.
1.2.5 RANGE DOWN BUTTON
Selects the next shorter distance range to be displayed when in the NAV MAP or WEATHER
mode of operation.
NOTE
AVAILABLE RANGES INCLUDE 5, 10, 20, 40, 80, 160, 240, 320, AND 1000 NAUTI-
CAL MILES. THE MAXIMUM SELECTABLE RANGE WITH RADAR DISPLAYED
WILL BE DEPENDENT ON THE MAXIMUM RANGE OF THE RADAR SYSTEM IN-
STALLED.
1.2.6 ARC MODE SELECTOR BUTTON
When pushed, converts the standard 360 deg. compass rose presentation (if being displayed) to
a large scale, 85 deg. sector presentation for expanded viewing of the compass rose/ weather/
moving map display in the vicinity directly ahead of the aircraft. Sequential button pushes provide
the following format changes: (1) the compass arc, (2) the compass arc with moving map display,
(3) the compass arc with the moving map display and weather radar, (4) the compass arc with
weather radar (map information decluttered), and (5) back to the compass arc. If pushed when the
EHSI presentation is in the 360 deg. HSI mode, the initial arc will duplicate the existing 360 deg.
HSI format. (See note after Section 1.2.12).

Rev 9, 17 Sep 2010 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Page C-7

1.2.7 HEADING SELECT (SYNC) KNOB
Rotated to position the heading bug. Pushing in on the center of the knob will sync the bug to the
aircraft’s present heading under the lubber line.
1.2.8 NO. 2 BEARING ( < ) POINTER SELECT BUTTON
Sequentially selects navigation sensors for waypoint bearing presentation in the manner of an
ADF or RMI. The pointer is magenta and double barred. The sequence of presentation includes:
(1) declutter, (2) VOR 2, (3) ADF 2, (4) FMS 2, (5) DME 2 (no pointer) and back to declutter. (Note,
depending upon the installation, other options may be available). Upon successful signal acquisi-
tion the pointer will appear along with a pointer assignment annunciation in the lower right hand
corner of the display. Should a flagged condition exist, the pointer will declutter and the pointer
assignment annunciation will be flagged. If VOR 2 is selected and a LOC frequency is tuned, both
the pointer and the assignment annunciation will declutter. If VOR 2 or FMS 2 is selected along
with a MAP presentation, the pointer will declutter and a diamond shape symbol will appear on the
map field (if in range). If not in range, the pointer will remain.
1.2.9 DISPLAY BRIGHTNESS (BRT) KNOB
Rotates to control display brightness. (Bezel lighting is controlled through an airframe brightness
control).
1.2.10 NO. 1 BEARING ( > ) POINTER SELECT BUTTON
Sequentially selects navigation sensors for waypoint bearing presentation in the manner of an
ADF or RMI. The pointer is white and single barred. The sequence of presentation include: (1) de-
clutter, (2) VOR 1, (3) ADF 1, (4) FMS 1, (5) DME 1 (no pointer) and back to declutter. (Note, de-
pending upon the installation, other options may be available). Upon successful signal acquisition
the pointer will appear along with a pointer assignment annunciation in the lower left hand corner
of the display. Should a flagged condition exist, the pointer will declutter and the pointer assign-
ment annunciation will be flagged. If a VOR is selected and a LOC frequency is tuned, both the
pointer and the assignment annunciation will declutter. If VOR 1 or FMS 1 is selected along with
a MAP presentation the pointer will declutter and a diamond shape symbol will appear on the map
field (if in range). If not in range, the pointer will remain.
1.2.11 COURSE SELECT (DIR) KNOB
Rotates to position the course pointer. Pushing in on the center of the knob will slew the course
pointer on a direct-to course to the selected navigation facility. (When FMS is the selected NAV
source, the course pointer may be controlled by the KNS 660).


1.2.12 360° HSI MODE SELECTOR BUTTON
When pushed converts the sector presentation (if being displayed) to a standard 360 deg. HSI
compass rose. If pushed when already in the 360 deg. HSI mode, will select the following sequen-
tial formats: (1) the compass rose with moving map display and (2) the compass rose with moving
radar. Repeated button pushes will continuously sequence through the available 360 deg. HSI for-
mats.
NOTE
SYMBOLOGY IS COLOR CODED TO INDICATE THE SOURCE OF DATA ON THE
EHSI. DATA WHICH IS CODED INCLUDES THE DISTANCE AND GROUND SPEED
READOUTS, DIGITAL COURSE READOUT. NAV SOURCE SELECT ANNUNCIA-
TION. COURSE POINTER, COURSE D-BAR, GLIDESLOPE POINTER AND IN-
BOUND COURSE LINE. THE COLOR OF THIS DATA IS AS FOLLOWS: (NOTE, DE-
PENDING UPON THE INSTALLATION, OTHER OPTIONS MAY BE AVAILABLE.)
GREEN = (ON-SIDE DATA) NAV 1, ADF 1 OR MLS 1 (NO. 2 SYSTEMS ON CO-

PILOT’S DISPLAY)
YELLOW = (CROSS-SIDE DATA) NAV 2, ADF 2 OR MLS 2 (NO. 1 SYSTEMS ON

COPILOT’S ISPLAY)
CYAN = FMS (GREEN WHEN APPROACH APPROVED RNAV DATA IS DIS-

PLAYED.)
1.2.13 MISCELLANEOUS DISPLAYS (NOT SHOWN)
1.2.13.A. Magnetic/True Heading Annunciations
Magnetic compass heading is automatically displayed in VOR/LOC, RNAV. MLS and

ADF. However, when primary NAV source is FMS, the reference annunciation can be
either blank for magnetic heading or “T” for true heading.
If the compass card is in MAG, all bearing pointers may be displayed. The true sources
are converted to magnetic. If the compass card is in TRUE, only the Long Range Nav
or FMS, which is providing the MAG VAR information, can be displayed.
1.2.13.B. Dual Compass Systems
Dual, selectable compass inputs may be provided for. The alternate compass source
is selected by means of a remote mounted switch. Once the alternate compass source
has been selected, an amber DG 1 or DG 2, depending on side selected from, will be
displayed.


When two compass sources are available, the two inputs are compared for agreement.
In a two symbol generator installation, an additional cross comparison is performed be-
tween the two symbol generators. If a miscompare is detected a yellow DG comparison
warning will be annunciated.
1.2.13.C. Digital Course Displays
In the upper left corner of the display an alphanumeric readout of the course pointer
annunciates CRS and indicates the selected navigation course in degrees. Desired
Track readout (DTK), generated by the FMS system replaces CRS in RNAV mode.
The FMS may display CRS or DTK depending on the FMS mode. MLS may display AZ
or BAZ depending on the selected mode.
1.2.13.D. Distance and Ground Speed Displays
The EHI 40 provides three DME data displays in the upper right corner, lower left below
the #1 bearing pointer sensor annunciator and lower right below #2 bearing pointer
sensor annunciator.
In the upper right corner an alphanumeric readout annunciates distance in nautical

miles from the aircraft to the selected DME or VORTAC station in NAV mode or to way-
point in FMS or RNAV mode. Below the distance readout is an alphanumeric readout
which displays the aircraft ground speed in knots (or time-to-station), depending on SW
version.
When DME HOLD is selected. the DME distance color remains as previously selected
until a different channeling frequency is selected, at which time it changes to white. The
hold state is indicated by an amber colored letter “H”.
In the event that the VORTAC or DME station is out of range or not in operation, or if
for any reason the DME receiver is operational but not providing computed data, the
distance will be dashed in the original color. If the DME receiver is indicating an internal
fault, is being tuned by another receiver, or is turned off, distance and ground speed
readouts will be dashed in red.
1.2.13.E. Winds Aloft
A small white arrow in upper left section of the display rotates with the heading and in-
dicates the direction of the wind. The velocity of the wind is shown in a white numeric
readout which is expressed in knots if supplied by the KNS 660.
In single FMS systems the wind vector data will be displayed on the pilots and copilots
EHSI displays. In dual FMS installations the wind vector will be displayed from the on-
side FMS.


The wind vector will be presented continuously when valid data is received from the
FMS and if the EHSI system was configured for the option at the time of installation.
Otherwise, no wind vector data will be displayed.
1.2.13.F. Drift Angle Bug
An unfilled cyan triangular pointer which rotates about the outside of the compass
scale. The drift angle bug represents aircraft actual track.
The drift angle bug information is provided by the FMS and will only be displayed when
the FMS is the selected primary navigation sensor and valid information is present.
1.2.13.G. Map Modes
The EHI 40 provides two map formats: (1) 360 deg. and (2) an approximate 85 deg.
sectored map display in front of the aircraft. When coupled with a compatible FMS, na-
vaids, airports, waypoints and ICAO identifiers may be displayed. When coupled with
a simple RNAV, such as the KNS 81, waypoints referenced to the selected VORTAC
may be displayed. The simplest map format is provided by plotting VORTAC symbols
referenced to the aircraft using bearing and distance from the VOR/DME.
A four point symbol represents a waypoint as programmed by the RNAV. A hexagonal

symbol represents a VOR, VOR/DME or VORTAC station. A four-sided symbol repre-
sents an airport.
Course lines inbound to a waypoint may be cyan if not approach approved (i.e., RNAV
enroute) or green if approach approved. The outbound course lines are white. Inbound
course lines from cross-side sensors are yellow.
NO MAP will be annunciated when graphic course lines are not available (such as
when ADF is the selected navigation source for presentation on the course pointer).
The airplane power switch functions are unchanged.
Circuit breakers are used to protect the elements of the Bendix/King EHI 40 Electronic
Horizontal Situation Indicator.


LABEL: CIRCUIT BREAKER FUNCTION:

__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________
__________ _______________________________________________________


2.0 LIMITATIONS
2.1 FLAGS:
No yellow FAN or DU flag may be visible prior to departure. (EXCEPTION: A 30 minute ferry flight
to a repair facility in VFR conditions is permissible.)
NOTE
ADDITIONAL LIMITATIONS MAY BE REQUIRED, DEPENDENT UPON THE IN-
STALLATION AND APPLICABLE FEDERAL REGULATIONS.
2.2 PLACARDS:
None.
3.0 EMERGENCY PROCEDURES
3.1 Emergency Procedures
None.
3.2 Abnormal Procedures
3.2.1 BITE
Automatic built in test and monitoring functions integral to the EHI 40 software detect component
failures and present failure annunciations on the face of the EHSI display. A small red SG annun-
ciation indicates an internal self-test failure.
3.2.2 EFIS Component Failures
3.2.2.A. Symbol Generator Failures
3.2.2.A.1 A large red SG annunciation in the EHSI indicates a catastrophic failure of the sym-
bol generator.
3.2.2.A.2 A yellow FAN annunciation indicates a failure of the symbol generator cooling fan.
3.2.2.A.3 If a fan failure is indicated in flight:


3.2.2.A.3.1 Continue using the symbol generator with caution, verifying the validity of displayed
data by reference to alternate instruments.
3.2.2.A.3.2 Although a symbol generator failure is unlikely, consideration should be given to

securing power to the symbol generator.
3.2.2.B. Control/Display Unit Failures
3.2.2.B.1 A yellow DU annunciation indicates a failure of the EHSI cooling fan.
3.2.2.B.2 If a fan failure is indicated in flight:
3.2.2.B.2.1 Monitor the presentation for an abnormal appearance that indicates impending fail-
ure.
3.2.2.B.2.2 Although an EHSI failure is very unlikely, consideration should be given to shutting
off the system and flying with alternate instruments.
3.2.2.B.2.3 Also, system heating can be reduced by lowering the lighting intensity of the pre-
sentation.
3.2.2.B.3 A red CP annunciation indicates a control panel failure but could be as simple as
a stuck key. Continue operation with caution, verifying the validity of displayed data
by reference to alternate instruments.
3.2.2.B.4 A red RCP annunciation indicates a radar control panel failure.
CAUTION
FOLLOWING FAILURE OF A RED GUN IN ANY DISPLAY TUBE, RED WARNING
FLAGS WILL NOT BE VISIBLE.
3.2.3 Compass Failure
A compass failure is indicated by a red HDG flag in place of the lubber line. Simultaneously, the
course pointer head and tail will declutter leaving the d-bar. (The D-bar will reorient on the face of
the instrument providing horizontal deviation in the manner of a CDI.)
DG Select Switch - Select cross-side DG if installed.
NOTE
DURING CROSS-SIDE DG USE, THE MAGNETIC COMPASS SHOULD BE USED
FOR A CROSS REFERENCE.


3.2.4 RMI Failure
If the VHF NAV or ADF receiver is OFF or indicating an internal fault, the affected deviation scale
will be flagged. The affected RMI pointer will be decluttered and the pointer assignment annunci-
ation will be flagged or decluttered depending on SW version and analog or ARINC 429 input.
3.2.5 DME Failure

In the event that the VORTAC or DME station is out of range or not in operation, or if for any reason
the DME receiver is operational but not providing computed data, distance and ground speed will
be dashed on the EHSI but no flags will be displayed.
3.2.6 DME Flag
If the DME receiver is indicating an internal fault or turned off, distance and ground speed readout
will be flagged (dashed in red.)
3.2.7 Heading or Course Failure
In the event of a failure of the heading or course control knobs, red flags will appear on the heading
bug, or on the head and tail of the course pointer as appropriate.
3.2.8 Weather Radar Failure
In the event of a failure of the weather radar while operating the EHSI in the WX mode, a white
annunciation indicating the nature of the failure will be displayed in the lower left section of the
EHSI.
3.2.9 EHSI Data Failure
If data on the EHSI is missing or abnormal in flight, refer to alternate instruments for useable data
for the remainder of the flight.
4.0 NORMAL PROCEDURES
4.1 Pre-Flight Check
4.1.1 Aircraft engines operating, inverters on, gyros stabilized and EFIS power on.
4.1.2 Turn the BRT knob to obtain a desirable level of illumination in the EHSI.
4.1.3 Press the TST REF button, hold for three seconds and release to activate the system
self test and view all the fault presentations. To clear the annunciation, press TST REF
again.


4.2 In-Flight Operation
4.2.1 Select the NAV sensor desired through use of the NAV button.
4.2.2 Select NAV system #1 or #2 through use of the 1/2 button.
4.2.3 Select HSI or ARC display through the use of the HSI or ARC buttons.
4.2.4 Select the display mode (map and/or radar) through repeat HSI or ARC button pushes.
4.2.4.A. If MAP is displayed select the desired MAP presentation through momentary sequen-
tial button pushes (less than three seconds) of the TST REF button.
4.2.4.B. If radar display is desired on the EHSI, the radar must be ON and the desired radar
mode selected. The EHSI selected range can be different than the range selected on
the radar itself but must not exceed the radars maximum range. (Note that the EHSI
has selectable ranges out to 1000 nautical miles.)
NOTE
IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO READJUST THE TILT CONTROL ON THE RADAR TO
GIVE OPTIMUM WEATHER PRESENTATION ON THE EHSI.
CAUTION
SERVE PROPER SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING WEATHER RADAR DUR-
ING GROUND OPERATIONS.
4.2.5 Course Pointer and Heading Bug Slew
Use heading select (SYNC) and course select (DIR) knobs to select the desired bearing or course.
The center push buttons in each knob may be used to: (1) rapidly acquire the direct-to course to
the station (DIR button) or (2) center the heading bug under the lubber line (SYNC button).
4.2.6 RMI or ADF/Waypoint Bearing Pointers
Use the No. 1 or No. 2 bearing pointer select buttons (< or >) to display the bearing to the desired
station or waypoint through sequential button pushes.
NOTE
THESE BUTTONS MAY BE USED TO DISPLAY DME ALONE WITHOUT A
POINTER.


4.2.7 Flying Pre-Selected ADF Course
First, select ADF using the NAV button. Select the desired NDB frequency on the ADF receiver.
Identify the station. Using the CRS knob, select the desired course as you would a VOR radial and
fly the left-right steering information presented on the D-bar.
Flying an ADF course using the bearing pointer in traditional fashion is also available by selecting
the ADF on bearing pointer #1 or #2.
4.2.8 VNAV
When FMS is selected, VNAV operation can be programmed and displayed. Prior to KNS 660
VNAV engagement, the VNAV scale displays the VNAV flight path angle (full scale 10 deg.). Fol-
lowing KNS 660 VNAV engagement, the VNAV scale displays deviations from the selected NAV
flight path in feet (full scale 1000 ft.). During operation in Auto-3D, the VNAV scale will always be
displayed. During AUTO/LEG or OBS operation the VNAV scale will only be displayed whenever
the selected altitude is different from the present altitude.
5.0 PERFORMANCE
No change.


THIS PAGE RESERVED

EFS 40&50 Installation Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EFS 40&50 Installation Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

EFS 40&50 Installation Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Honeywell International Inc.

23500 West 105th Street

EFS 40/EFS 50 Electronic Flight

Honeywell Materials License Agreement

Added List of Effective Pages for Volume I and Volume II.

Added -15 Software, GPS WAAS approach function.

Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Page RH-1

Page RH-2 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES - VOLUME I

* indicates a changed or added page.

Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Page LEP-1

Subheading and Page Date Subheading and Page Date

* indicates a changed or added page.

Page LEP-2 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010

Subheading and Page Date Subheading and Page Date

* indicates a changed or added page.

Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Page LEP-3

Subheading and Page Date Subheading and Page Date

* indicates a changed or added page.

Page LEP-4 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010

Subheading and Page Date Subheading and Page Date

* indicates a changed or added page.

Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Page LEP-5

Subheading and Page Date Subheading and Page Date

* indicates a changed or added page.

Page LEP-6 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010

Subheading and Page Date Subheading and Page Date

* indicates a changed or added page.

Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Page LEP-7

Subheading and Page Date Subheading and Page Date

* indicates a changed or added page.

Page LEP-8 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010

Subheading and Page Date Subheading and Page Date

* indicates a changed or added page.

Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Page LEP-9

Subheading and Page Date Subheading and Page Date

* indicates a changed or added page.

Page LEP-10 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010

Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Page TOC-1

Page TOC-2 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010

1-21 ED 462 Version Characteristics ...................................................................... 1-18

Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Page TOC-3

Page TOC-4 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010

3.1.2 Function Subsection Description ....................................................................... 3-3

Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Page TOC-5

3.8.1 RNAV Applicable Part Numbers ................................................................... 3-399

Page TOC-6 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010

3.15.1 HOVER/CABLE/HOMING Applicable Part Numbers .................................... 3-539

Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Page TOC-7

Page TOC-8 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010

Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Page TOC-9

Page TOC-10 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010

3-144 EFS 40/EFS 50 ARINC 429 Airdata Interconnect .......................................... 3-427

Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Page TOC-11

Page TOC-12 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010

3-20 CP 466B - P466B1 Pin Designator Index ..................................................... 3-643

Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Page TOC-13

Page TOC-14 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010

4.1.36 Display Wind Vector Configuration ................................................................. 4-19

Rev 9, 19 Oct 2010 SIM 006-00698-0007.DWD Page TOC-15